File 314 1241

Type QD75M Positioning Module
User's Manual(Details)

User's Manual
(Details)
Type QD75M Positioning Module User's Manual(Details)
HEAD OFFICE : 1-8-12, OFFICE TOWER Z 14F HARUMI CHUO-KU 104-6212,JAPAN

NAGOYA WORKS : 1-14 , YADA-MINAMI 5 , HIGASHI-KU, NAGOYA , JAPAN
MODEL
QD75M-U-S-E
MODEL
CODE
1CT752
IB(NA)-0300062-A(0212)MEE
IB(NA)-0300062-A(0212)MEE
Mitsubishi Programmable
Logic Controller
When exported from Japan, this manual does not require application to the
Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry for service transaction permission.
QD75M1
QD75M2
QD75M4
Specifications subject to change without notice.
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
(Always read these instructions before using this equipment.)
Before using this product, please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual
carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly.
The instructions given in this manual are concerned with this product. For the safety instructions of the
programmable logic controller system, please read the CPU module User's Manual.
In this manual, the safety instructions are ranked as "DANGER" and "CAUTION".
DANGER
Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions,

resulting in death or severe injury.
! CAUTION
Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions,

resulting in medium or slight personal injury or physical damage.
Note that the ! CAUTION level may lead to a serious consequence according to the circumstances.
Always follow the instructions of both levels because they are important to personal safety.
Please save this manual to make it accessible when required and always forward it to the end user.
[Design Instructions]
!
DANGER
Provide a safety circuit outside the programmable logic controller so that the entire system will
operate safely even when an external power supply error or PLC fault occurs.
Failure to observe this could lead to accidents for incorrect outputs or malfunctioning.
(1) Configure an emergency stop circuit and interlock circuit such as a positioning upper
limit/lower limit to prevent mechanical damage outside the PLC.
(2) The machine OPR operation is controlled by the OPR direction and OPR speed data.
Deceleration starts when the near-point dog turns ON. Thus, if the OPR direction is
incorrectly set, deceleration will not start and the machine will continue to travel. Configure
an interlock circuit to prevent mechanical damage outside the PLC.
(3) When the module detects an error, normally deceleration stop or sudden stop will take
place according to the parameter stop group settings. Set the parameters to the positioning
system specifications.
Make sure that the OPR parameter and positioning data are within the parameter setting
values.
A-1
[Design Instructions]
!
CAUTION
Do not bundle or adjacently lay the control wire or communication cable with the main circuit or
power wire.
Separate these by 100mm (3.94in.) or more.
Failure to observe this could lead to malfunctioning caused by noise.
[Mounting Instructions]
!
CAUTION
Use the PLC within the general specifications environment given in this manual.
Using the PLC outside the general specification range environment could lead to electric
shocks, fires, malfunctioning, product damage or deterioration.
Hold down the module loading lever at the bottom of the module and insert the module fixing
hooks into the base unit fixing holes securely to load the module. Improper loading of the
module can cause a malfunction, failure or drop.
For use in vibratory environment, tighten the module with screws.
Tighten the screws within the specified torque range.
Undertightening can cause a drop, short circuit or malfunction.
Overtightening can cause a drop, short circuit or malfunction due to damage to the screws or
module.
Always load or unload the module after switching power off externally in all phases. Not doing
so may damage the product.
Make sure that the connectors for the servo amplifier and peripheral devices have been
securely installed until a click is heard.
Not doing so could lead to a poor connection, resulting in erroneous input and output.
When the servo amplifier is not installed, install the connector cover without fail.
Failure to observe this could lead to a malfunction.
[Wiring Instructions]
!
DANGER
Always confirm the terminal layout before connecting the wires to the module.
[Startup/Maintenance Instructions]
!
DANGER
Always turn all phases of the power supply OFF externally before cleaning or tightening the
screws.
Failure to turn all phases OFF could lead to electric shocks.
A-2
[Startup/Maintenance Instructions]
!
CAUTION
Never disassemble or modify the module.

Failure to observe this could lead to trouble, malfunctioning, injuries or fires.
Always turn all phases of the power supply OFF externally before installing or removing the
module.
Failure to turn all phases OFF could lead to module trouble or malfunctioning.
Before starting test operation, set the parameter speed limit value to the slowest value, and
make sure that operation can be stopped immediately if a hazardous state occurs.
Always make sure to touch the grounded metal to discharge the electricity charged in the body,
etc., before touching the module.
Failure to do so may cause a failure or malfunctions of the module.
[Precautions for use]

!
CAUTION
Note that when the reference axis speed is designated for interpolation operation, the speed of
the partner axis (2nd axis, 3rd axis and 4th axis) may be larger than the set speed (larger than
the speed limit value).
[Disposal Instructions]
!
CAUTION
When disposing of the product, handle it as industrial waste.
A-3
REVISIONS
The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.
Print Date
Dec., 2002
Apr., 2004
Manual Number
Revision
IB (NA) 0300062-A First edition

Partial corrections and additions
IB (NA) 0300062-B
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS, CONTENTS, Generic Terms and
Abbreviations, Section 1.1.1, Section 1.1.4 to Section 1.1.6,
Section 1.2, Section 2.1, Section 2.2 to Section 2.4, Section 3.1 to
Section 3.5, Section 4.1.1, Section 4.1.2, Section 4.3.1, Section
4.4.1, Section 5.1.1 to Section 5.1.3, Section 5.1.5 to Section 5.1.9,
Section 5.2.1 to Section 5.2.10, Section 5.3 to Section 5.6, Section
6.1 to Section 6.3, Section 6.5.1 to Section 6.5.6, Section 7.1 to
Section 7.2, Section 8.1 to Section 8.2, Section 9.1.1 to Section
9.1.3, Section 9.1.5, Section 9.1.6, Section 9.2, Section 10.1 to
Section 10.6, Section 11.1.1 to Section 11.2.4, Section 11.3 to
Section 11.4, Section 12.1 to Section 12.7, Section 13.1 to Section
13.4, Section 14.1 to Section 14.6, Section 15.1 to Section 15.3,
Appendix 1 to Appendix 8, INDEX
Japanese Manual Version IB-0300030

This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent licenses.
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which
may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual.
2002 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
A-4
INTRODUCTION
Thank you for purchasing the Mitsubishi general-purpose programmable logic controller MELSEC-Q Series.
Always read through this manual, and fully comprehend the functions and performance of the Q Series PLC
before starting use to ensure correct usage of this product.
CONTENTS
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS............................................................................................................................A- 1
REVISIONS ...................................................................................................................................................A- 4
INTRODUCTION...........................................................................................................................................A- 5
CONTENTS...................................................................................................................................................A- 5
About Manuals ..............................................................................................................................................A- 13
Using This Manual.........................................................................................................................................A- 13
Conformation to the EMC Directive ..............................................................................................................A- 13
Generic Terms and Abbreviations ................................................................................................................A- 14
Component List .............................................................................................................................................A- 14
Section 1 Product Specifications and Handling
1. Product Outline
1- 1 to 1- 28
1.1 Positioning control.................................................................................................................................... 1- 2

1.1.1 Features of QD75.............................................................................................................................. 1- 2
1.1.2 Purpose and applications of positioning control............................................................................... 1- 5
1.1.3 Mechanism of positioning control ..................................................................................................... 1- 7
1.1.4 Overview of positioning control functions ......................................................................................... 1- 8
1.1.5 Outline design of positioning system ............................................................................................... 1- 18
1.1.6 Communicating signals between QD75 and each module............................................................. 1- 19
1.2 Flow of system operation........................................................................................................................ 1- 22
1.2.1 Flow of all processes........................................................................................................................ 1- 22
1.2.2 Outline of starting ............................................................................................................................. 1- 24
1.2.3 Outline of stopping ........................................................................................................................... 1- 26
1.2.4 Outline for restarting......................................................................................................................... 1- 27
2. System Configuration
2- 1 to 2- 8
2.1 General image of system......................................................................................................................... 22.2 Component list ......................................................................................................................................... 22.3 Applicable system .................................................................................................................................... 22.4 How to check the function version and SERIAL No. .............................................................................. 23. Specifications and Functions
2
4
6
8
3- 1 to 3- 22
3.1 Performance specifications...................................................................................................................... 33.2 List of functions ....................................................................................................................................... 33.2.1 QD75 control functions...................................................................................................................... 33.2.2 QD75 main functions......................................................................................................................... 3A-5
2
4
4
6
3.2.3 QD75 sub functions and common functions .................................................................................... 3- 8

3.2.4 Combination of QD75 main functions and sub functions................................................................ 3- 12
3.3 Specifications of input/output signals with PLC CPU ............................................................................ 3- 14
3.3.1 List of input/output signals with PLC CPU....................................................................................... 3- 14
3.3.2 Details of input signals (QD75 PLC CPU) .................................................................................. 3- 15
3.3.3 Details of output signals (PLC CPU QD75) ................................................................................ 3- 17
3.4 Specifications of interfaces with external devices.................................................................................. 3- 18
3.4.1 Electrical specifications of input signals .......................................................................................... 3- 18
3.4.2 Signal layout for external device connection connector.................................................................. 3- 19
3.4.3 List of input signal details ................................................................................................................. 3- 20
3.4.4 Interface internal circuit .................................................................................................................... 3- 21
3.5 External circuit design............................................................................................................................. 3- 22
4. Installation, Wiring and Maintenance of the Product
4- 1 to 4- 16
4.1 Outline of installation, wiring and maintenance....................................................................................... 4- 2

4.1.1 Installation, wiring and maintenance procedures............................................................................. 4- 2
4.1.2 Names of each part........................................................................................................................... 4- 3
4.1.3 Handling precautions ........................................................................................................................ 4- 5
4.2 Installation ................................................................................................................................................ 4- 7
4.2.1 Precautions for installation................................................................................................................ 4- 7
4.3 Wiring........................................................................................................................................................ 4- 9
4.3.1 Precautions for wiring........................................................................................................................ 4- 9
4.4 Confirming the installation and wiring..................................................................................................... 4- 14
4.4.1 Items to confirm when installation and wiring are completed ......................................................... 4- 14
4.5 Maintenance............................................................................................................................................ 4- 15
4.5.1 Precautions for maintenance ........................................................................................................... 4- 15
4.5.2 Disposal instructions ........................................................................................................................ 4- 15
5. Data Used for Positioning Control (List of buffer memory addresses)
5- 1 to 5-162
5.1 Types of data............................................................................................................................................ 5- 2

5.1.1 Parameters and data required for control......................................................................................... 5- 2
5.1.2 Setting items for positioning parameters .......................................................................................... 5- 4
5.1.3 Setting items for OPR parameters.................................................................................................... 5- 6
5.1.4 Setting items for servo parameters................................................................................................... 5- 7
5.1.5 Setting items for positioning data...................................................................................................... 5- 9
5.1.6 Setting items for block start data ..................................................................................................... 5- 12
5.1.7 Setting items for condition data ....................................................................................................... 5- 13
5.1.8 Types and roles of monitor data ...................................................................................................... 5- 14
5.1.9 Types and roles of control data ....................................................................................................... 5- 18
5.2 List of parameters ................................................................................................................................... 5- 22
5.2.1 Basic parameters 1 .......................................................................................................................... 5- 22
5.2.2 Basic parameters 2 .......................................................................................................................... 5- 26
5.2.3 Detailed parameters 1...................................................................................................................... 5- 28
5.2.4 Detailed parameters 2...................................................................................................................... 5- 36
5.2.5 OPR basic parameters..................................................................................................................... 5- 48
5.2.6 OPR detailed parameters ................................................................................................................ 5- 54
A-6
5.2.7 Servo basic parameters ................................................................................................................... 5- 58

5.2.8 Servo adjustment parameters.......................................................................................................... 5- 64
5.2.9 Servo expansion parameters........................................................................................................... 5- 74
5.2.10 Servo expansion parameters 2...................................................................................................... 5- 78
5.3 List of positioning data ............................................................................................................................ 5- 82
5.4 List of block start data ............................................................................................................................. 5- 98
5.5 List of condition data .............................................................................................................................. 5-104
5.6 List of monitor data................................................................................................................................. 5-110
5.6.1 System monitor data ....................................................................................................................... 5-110
5.6.2 Axis monitor data............................................................................................................................. 5-120
5.7 List of control data.................................................................................................................................. 5-138
5.7.1 System control data ........................................................................................................................ 5-138
5.7.2 Axis control data.............................................................................................................................. 5-140
6. Sequence Program Used for Positioning Control
6- 1 to 6- 72
6.1 Precautions for creating program ........................................................................................................... 6- 2

6.2 List of devices used................................................................................................................................. 6- 5
6.3 Creating a program ................................................................................................................................. 6- 15
6.3.1 General configuration of program.................................................................................................... 6- 15
6.3.2 Positioning control operation program............................................................................................. 6- 16
6.4 Positioning program examples ............................................................................................................... 6- 20
6.5 Program details ....................................................................................................................................... 6- 53
6.5.1 Initialization program ........................................................................................................................ 6- 53
6.5.2 Start details setting program ............................................................................................................ 6- 54
6.5.3 Start program.................................................................................................................................... 6- 56
6.5.4 Continuous operation interrupt program.......................................................................................... 6- 65
6.5.5 Restart program ............................................................................................................................... 6- 67
6.5.6 Stop program.................................................................................................................................... 6- 70
7. Memory Configuration and Data Process
7- 1 to 7- 20
7.1 Configuration and roles of QD75 memory .............................................................................................. 77.1.1 Configuration and roles of QD75 memory........................................................................................ 77.1.2 Buffer memory area configuration .................................................................................................... 77.2 Data transmission process ...................................................................................................................... 7-
A-7
2
2
5
8
Section 2 Control Details and Setting
8. OPR Control
8- 1 to 8- 14
8.1 Outline of OPR control ............................................................................................................................. 8- 2

8.1.1 Two types of OPR control ................................................................................................................. 8- 2
8.2 Machine OPR ........................................................................................................................................... 8- 4
8.2.1 Outline of the machine OPR operation............................................................................................. 8- 4
8.2.2 Machine OPR method....................................................................................................................... 8- 5
8.2.3 OPR method (1): Near-point dog method ........................................................................................ 8- 6
8.2.4 OPR method (2): Count method 1) .................................................................................................. 8- 8
8.2.5 OPR method (3): Count method 2) ................................................................................................. 8- 10
8.2.6 OPR method (4): Data set method .................................................................................................. 8- 12
8.3 Fast OPR................................................................................................................................................. 8- 13
8.3.1 Outline of the fast OPR operation.................................................................................................... 8- 13
9. Major Positioning Control
9- 1 to 9-116
9.1 Outline of major positioning controls ....................................................................................................... 9- 2

9.1.1 Data required for major positioning control ...................................................................................... 9- 4
9.1.2 Operation patterns of major positioning controls ............................................................................. 9- 5
9.1.3 Designating the positioning address................................................................................................ 9- 15
9.1.4 Confirming the current value............................................................................................................ 9- 16
9.1.5 Control unit "degree" handling ......................................................................................................... 9- 18
9.1.6 Interpolation control.......................................................................................................................... 9- 21
9.2 Setting the positioning data ................................................................................................................... 9- 25
9.2.1 Relation between each control and positioning data ...................................................................... 9- 25
9.2.2 1-axis linear control .......................................................................................................................... 9- 27
9.2.3 2-axis linear interpolation control ..................................................................................................... 9- 29
9.2.4 3-axis linear interpolation control ..................................................................................................... 9- 33
9.2.5 4-axis linear interpolation control ..................................................................................................... 9 -39
9.2.6 1-axis fixed-feed control ................................................................................................................... 9- 44
9.2.7 2-axis fixed-feed control (interpolation) ........................................................................................... 9- 46
9.2.8 3-axis fixed-feed control (interpolation) ........................................................................................... 9- 48
9.2.9 4-axis fixed-feed control (interpolation) .......................................................................................... 9- 52
9.2.10 2-axis circular interpolation control with sub point designation .................................................... 9- 54
9.2.11 2-axis circular interpolation control with center point designation ................................................ 9- 60
9.2.12 1-axis speed control ....................................................................................................................... 9- 68
9.2.16 Speed-position switching control (INC mode)............................................................................... 9- 83
9.2.17 Speed-position switching control (ABS mode).............................................................................. 9- 91
9.2.18 Position-speed switching control ................................................................................................... 9- 99
9.2.19 Current value changing................................................................................................................. 9-106
9.2.20 NOP instruction ............................................................................................................................. 9-111
A-8
9.2.21 JUMP instruction ........................................................................................................................... 9-112

9.2.22 LOOP............................................................................................................................................. 9-114
9.2.23 LEND ............................................................................................................................................. 9-115
10. High-Level Positioning Control
10- 1 to 10- 26
10.1 Outline of high-level positioning control .............................................................................................. 10- 2

10.1.1 Data required for high-level positioning control............................................................................ 10- 3
10.1.2 "Block start data" and "condition data" configuration................................................................... 10- 4
10.2 High-level positioning control execution procedure ............................................................................ 10- 6
10.3 Setting the block start data .................................................................................................................. 10- 7
10.3.1 Relation between various controls and block start data .............................................................. 10- 7
10.3.2 Block start (normal start) .............................................................................................................. 10- 8
10.3.3 Condition start .............................................................................................................................. 10- 10
10.3.4 Wait start....................................................................................................................................... 10- 11
10.3.5 Simultaneous start ...................................................................................................................... 10- 12
10.3.6 Repeated start (FOR loop) ......................................................................................................... 10- 13
10.3.7 Repeated start (FOR condition) .................................................................................................. 10- 14
10.3.8 Restrictions when using the NEXT start...................................................................................... 10- 15
10.4 Setting the condition data ................................................................................................................... 10- 16
10.4.1 Relation between various controls and the condition data ......................................................... 10- 16
10.4.2 Condition data setting examples ................................................................................................. 10- 19
10.5 Multiple axes simultaneous start control ............................................................................................ 10- 20
10.6 Start program for high-level positioning control ................................................................................. 10- 23
10.6.1 Starting high-level positioning control.......................................................................................... 10- 23
10.6.2 Example of a start program for high-level positioning control .................................................... 10- 24
11. Manual Control
11- 1 to 11- 36
11.1 Outline of manual control .................................................................................................................... 11- 2

11.1.1 Three manual control methods..................................................................................................... 11- 2
11.2 JOG operation...................................................................................................................................... 11- 4
11.2.1 Outline of JOG operation .............................................................................................................. 11- 4
11.2.2 JOG operation execution procedure ............................................................................................ 11- 7
11.2.3 Setting the required parameters for JOG operation..................................................................... 11- 8
11.2.4 Creating start programs for JOG operation................................................................................. 11- 10
11.2.5 JOG operation example ............................................................................................................... 11- 13
11.3 Inching operation................................................................................................................................. 11- 17
11.3.1 Outline of inching operation ......................................................................................................... 11- 17
11.3.2 Inching operation execution procedure ....................................................................................... 11- 20
11.3.3 Setting the required parameters for inching operation ............................................................... 11- 21
11.3.4 Creating a program to enable/disable the inching operation...................................................... 11- 22
11.3.5 Inching operation example........................................................................................................... 11- 25
11.4 Manual pulse generator operation...................................................................................................... 11- 27
11.4.1 Outline of manual pulse generator operation.............................................................................. 11- 27
11.4.2 Manual pulse generator operation execution procedure ............................................................ 11- 31
11.4.3 Setting the required parameters for manual pulse generator operation .................................... 11- 32
11.4.4 Creating a program to enable/disable the manual pulse generator operation........................... 11- 33
A-9
12. Control Sub Functions
12- 1 to 12- 98
12.1 Outline of sub functions ....................................................................................................................... 12- 2

12.1.1 Outline of sub functions ................................................................................................................ 12- 2
12.2 Sub functions specifically for machine OPR ....................................................................................... 12- 4
12.2.1 OPR retry function......................................................................................................................... 12- 4
12.2.2 OP shift function ........................................................................................................................... 12- 8
12.3 Functions for compensating the control ............................................................................................. 12- 11
12.3.1 Backlash compensation function ................................................................................................. 12- 11
12.3.2 Electronic gear function ............................................................................................................... 12- 13
12.3.3 Near pass function ....................................................................................................................... 12- 20
12.4 Functions to limit the control ............................................................................................................... 12- 23
12.4.1 Speed limit function...................................................................................................................... 12- 23
12.4.2 Torque limit function..................................................................................................................... 12- 25
12.4.3 Software stroke limit function....................................................................................................... 12- 29
12.4.4 Hardware stroke limit function ..................................................................................................... 12- 35
12.5 Functions to change the control details.............................................................................................. 12- 37
12.5.1 Speed change function ................................................................................................................ 12- 37
12.5.2 Override function .......................................................................................................................... 12- 44
12.5.3 Acceleration/deceleration time change function ......................................................................... 12- 47
12.5.4 Torque change function ............................................................................................................... 12- 51
12.6 Absolute position system .................................................................................................................... 12- 54
12.7 Other functions .................................................................................................................................... 12- 56
12.7.1 Step function................................................................................................................................. 12- 56
12.7.2 Skip function ................................................................................................................................. 12- 61
12.7.3 M code output function................................................................................................................. 12- 64
12.7.4 Teaching function......................................................................................................................... 12- 68
12.7.5 Target position change function .................................................................................................. 12- 74
12.7.6 Command in-position function ..................................................................................................... 12- 78
12.7.7 Acceleration/deceleration processing function............................................................................ 12- 81
12.7.8 Pre-reading start function............................................................................................................. 12- 84
12.7.9 Deceleration start flag function................................................................................................... 12- 89
12.7.10 Stop command processing for deceleration stop function ..................................................... 12- 93
12.8 Servo ON/OFF .................................................................................................................................... 12- 96
12.8.1 Servo ON/OFF ............................................................................................................................. 12- 96
12.8.2 Follow up function ........................................................................................................................ 12- 97
12.9 Precautions for MR-J2M-B connection .............................................................................................. 12- 98
13. Common Functions
13- 1 to 13- 8
13.1 Outline of common functions ............................................................................................................... 1313.2 Parameter initialization function........................................................................................................... 1313.3 Execution data backup function .......................................................................................................... 1313.4 External I/O signal logic switching function ......................................................................................... 1313.5 External I/O signal monitor function .................................................................................................... 13-
A - 10
2
3
5
7
8
14. Dedicated Instructions
14- 1 to 14- 18
14.1 List of dedicated instructions ............................................................................................................... 14- 2

14.2 Interlock during dedicated instruction is executed .............................................................................. 14- 2
14.3 PSTRT1, PSTRT2, PSTRT3, PSTRT4............................................................................................... 14- 3
14.4 TEACH1, TEACH2, TEACH 3, TEACH 4 ........................................................................................... 14- 7
14.5 PFWRT................................................................................................................................................ 14- 11
14.6 PINIT.................................................................................................................................................... 14- 15
15. Troubleshooting
15- 1 to 15-106
15.1 Error and warning details..................................................................................................................... 15- 2

15.2 List of errors ......................................................................................................................................... 15- 6
15.2.1 QD75 detection error..................................................................................................................... 15- 6
15.2.2 MR-H-BN detection error ............................................................................................................. 15- 34
15.2.3 MR-J2-B detection error............................................................................................................... 15- 46
15.2.4 MR-J2S-B detection error ............................................................................................................ 15- 56
15.2.5 MR-J2-Jr detection error .............................................................................................................. 15- 66
15.2.6 MR-J2M-B detection error ........................................................................................................... 15- 76
15.3 List of warnings ................................................................................................................................... 15- 90
15.3.1 QD75 detection warning .............................................................................................................. 15- 90
15.3.2 MR-H-BN detection warning ........................................................................................................ 15- 96
15.3.3 MR-J2-B detection warning ......................................................................................................... 15- 98
15.3.4 MR-J2S-B detection warning ...................................................................................................... 15-100
15.3.5 MR-J2-Jr detection warning........................................................................................................ 15-102
15.3.6 MR-J2M-B detection warning ..................................................................................................... 15-104
15.4 LED display functions ........................................................................................................................ 15-106
Appendices
Appendix- 1 to Appendix-76
Appendix 1 Functions........................................................................................................................Appendix- 3
Appendix 1.1 Multiple CPU correspond function..........................................................................Appendix- 3
Appendix 1.2 The combination of software package for QD75 and QCPU ................................Appendix- 3
Appendix 2 Positioning data (No.1 to 600) List of buffer memory addresses.................................Appendix- 4
Appendix 3 Connection with servo amplifiers .................................................................................Appendix- 28
Appendix 3.1 Connection of SSCNET cables .............................................................................Appendix- 28
Appendix 3.2 Wiring of SSCNET cables .....................................................................................Appendix- 30
Appendix 4 Connection with external device connector .................................................................Appendix- 34
Appendix 4.1 Connector...............................................................................................................Appendix- 34
Appendix 4.2 Wiring of manual pulse generator cable ...............................................................Appendix- 36
Appendix 5 Comparisons with conventional positioning modules..................................................Appendix- 37
Appendix 5.1 Comparisons with QD75P model ..........................................................................Appendix- 37
Appendix 5.2 Comparisons with A1SD75M1/A1SD75M2/ A1SD75M3 models ........................Appendix- 38
A - 11
Appendix 6 Positioning control troubleshooting ..............................................................................Appendix- 57

Appendix 7 List of buffer memory addresses..................................................................................Appendix- 63
Appendix 8 External dimension drawing .........................................................................................Appendix- 75
INDEX
Index- 1 to Index - 10
INDEX..................................................................................................................................................... Index - 1
A - 12
About Manuals
The following manuals are also related to this product.
In necessary, order them by quoting the details in the tables below.
Related Manuals
Manual Number
Manual Name
(Model Code)
Type QD75M Positioning Module User's Manual (Hardware)

Describes the performance, specifications, Input interface, component names, and startup procedure of
the respective positioning modules: Type QD75M
IB-0300031
(1CT750)
(The manual is supplied with the module.)
GX Configurator-QP Operating Manual

Describes how to use GX Configurator-QP for the following and other purposes: creating data
(parameters, positioning data, etc.), sending the data to the module, monitoring the positioning
operations, and testing.
SH-080172
(13JU19)
(The manual is supplied with the software.)
Using This Manual

The symbols used in this manual are shown below.
Pr.
Da.
Md.
Cd.
....... Symbol indicating positioning parameter and OPR parameter item.

....... Symbol indicating positioning data, block start data and condition
data item.
....... Symbol indicating monitor data item.
....... Symbol indicating control data item.
(A serial No. is inserted in the
mark.)
Conformation to the EMC Directive

The CE logo is printed on the rating plate on the main body of the PLC that
conforms to the EMC directive and low voltage instruction.
To make this product conform to the EMC directive and low voltage instruction,
please refer to section 4.3.1 "Precautions for wiring" of the chapter 4 "Installation,
Wiring and Maintenance of the Product" and the EMC Installation Guidelines
(IB(NA)67339).
Representation of numerical values used in this manual.
Buffer memory addresses, error codes and warning codes are represented in
decimal.
X/Y devices are represented in hexadecimal.
Setting data and monitor data are represented in decimal or hexadecimal. Data
ended by "H" or "h" are represented in hexadecimal.
(Example) 10.........Decimal
10H ......Hexadecimal
A - 13
Generic Terms and Abbreviations

Unless specially noted, the following generic terms and abbreviations are used in this
manual.
Generic term/abbreviation
Details of generic term/abbreviation
PLC CPU
Generic term for PLC CPU on which QD75 can be mounted.
QD75
Generic term for positioning module QD75M1, QD75M2 and QD75M4.

The module type is described to indicate a specific module.
MR-H-BN
Servo amplifier: Abbreviation for MR-H-BN/MR-HB.
MR-J2-Jr
Servo amplifier: Abbreviation for MR-J2-03B5.
MR-J2-B
Servo amplifier: Abbreviation for MR-J2-B/MR-J2S-B/MR-J2-Jr/MR-J2M-B.
Peripheral device
Generic term for DOS/V personal computer that can run the following "GX Developer" and
"GX Configurator-QP".
GX Developer
Abbreviation for GX Developer (SW4D5C-GPPW-E or later).
GX Configurator-QP
Abbreviation for GX Configurator-QP (SW2D5C-QD75P-E or later).
Servo amplifier (drive unit) Abbreviation for SSCNET compatible servo amplifier (drive unit).
Manual pulse generator
Abbreviation for manual pulse generator (MR-HDP01) (prepared by user).
DOS/V personal computer IBM PC/AT and compatible DOS/V compliant personal computer.
Personal computer
Generic term for DOS/V personal computer.
Workpiece
Generic term for moving body such as workpiece and tool, and for various control targets.
Axis 1, axis 2, axis 3,

axis 4
Indicates each axis connected to QD75.
1-axis, 2-axis, 3-axis,

4-axis
Indicates the number of axes. (Example: 2-axis = Indicates two axes such as axis 1 and axis 2,
axis 2 and axis 3, and axis 3 and axis 1.)
OPR
Generic term for "Home position return".
OP
SSCNET
Generic term for "Home position".

(Note)
High speed synchronous communication network between QD75 and servo amplifier.
(Note): SSCNET: Servo System Controller NETwork
Component List
The table below shows the component included in respective positioning modules:
Quantity
Module name
QD75M1
QD75M1 positioning module
QD75M2
QD75M4
A - 14
Section 1
Section 1 Product Specifications and Handling
Section 1 is configured for the following purposes (1) to (5).

(1) To understand the outline of positioning control, and the QD75 specifications
and functions
(2) To carry out actual work such as installation and wiring
(3) To set parameters and data required for positioning control
(4) To create a PLC program required for positioning control
(5) To understand the memory configuration and data transmission process
Read "Section 2" for details on each control.
Chapter 1
Product outline .............................................................................................. 1- 1 to 1- 28
Chapter 2
System configuration .................................................................................... 2- 1 to 2-
Chapter 3
Specifications and Functions........................................................................ 3- 1 to 3- 22
Chapter 4
Installation, Wiring and Maintenance of the Product ................................... 4- 1 to 4- 16
Chapter 5
Data Used for Positioning Control ................................................................ 5- 1 to 5-162
Chapter 6
PLC Program Used for Positioning Control ................................................. 6- 1 to 6- 72
Chapter 7
Memory Configuration and Data Process .................................................... 7- 1 to 7- 20
MEMO
Chapter 1 Product Outline
The purpose and outline of positioning control using QD75 are explained in this chapter.
Reading this chapter will help you understand what can be done using the positioning
system and which procedure to use for a specific purpose.
By understanding "What can be done", and "Which procedure to use" beforehand, the
positioning system can be structured smoothly.
1.1 Positioning control ........................................................................................................1- 2

1.1.1 Features of QD75 ...........................................................................................1- 2
1.1.2 Purpose and applications of positioning control ............................................1- 5
1.1.3 Mechanism of positioning control...................................................................1- 7
1.1.4 Overview of positioning control functions.......................................................1- 8
1.1.5 Outline design of positioning system.............................................................1- 18
1.1.6 Communicating signals between QD75 and each module ..........................1- 19
1.2 Flow of system operation ............................................................................................1- 22
1.2.1 Flow of all processes .....................................................................................1- 22
1.2.2 Outline of starting...........................................................................................1- 24
1.2.3 Outline of stopping .........................................................................................1- 26
1.2.4 Outline for restarting ......................................................................................1- 27
1-1
1 PRODUCT OUTLINE
MELSEC-Q
1.1 Positioning control

1.1.1 Features of QD75
The features of the QD75 are shown below.
(1) Availability of one, two, and four axis modules

(a) One, two and four axis positioning modules are available.
They can be selected according to the PLC CPU type and the number of
required control axes. (Refer to Section 2.2.)
(b) For connecting any of the QD75 modules to the base unit, a single slot and
32 dedicated I/O channels are required.
Within the limit imposed by the maximum number of inputs and outputs
supported by the PLC CPU, up to 64 modules can be used. (Refer to
Section 3.1.)
(2) Wide variety of positioning control functions

(a) A wide variety of positioning control functions essential to any positioning
system are supported: positioning to an arbitrary position, fixed-feed
control, equal-speed control, and so on. (Refer to Section 5.3 and 9.2.)
1) Up to 600 positioning data items, including such information as
positioning addresses, control systems, and operation patterns, can be
prepared for each axis.
Using the prepared positioning data, the positioning control is
performed independently for each axis. (In addition, such controls as
interpolation involving two to four axes and simultaneous startup of
multiple axes are possible.)
2) Independent control of each axis can be achieved in linear control
mode (executable simultaneously over four axes).
Such control can either be the independent positioning control using a
single positioning data or the continuous positioning control enabled by
the continuous processing of multiple positioning data.
3) Coordinated control over multiple axes can take the form of either the
linear interpolation through the speed or position control of two to four
axes or the circular interpolation involving two axes.
Such control can either be the independent positioning control using a
single positioning data or the continuous positioning control enabled by
the continuous processing of multiple positioning data.
(b) For each positioning data, the user can specify any of the following control
systems: position control, speed control, speed-position switching control,
position-speed switching control, and so on. (Refer to Section 5.3 and 9.2.)
1-2
1 PRODUCT OUTLINE
MELSEC-Q
(c)
Continuous positioning control using multiple positioning data can be

executed in accordance with the operation patterns the user assigned to
the positioning data. (Refer to Section 5.3 and 9.1.2.)
Continuous positioning control can be executed over multiple blocks, where
each block consists of multiple positioning data. (Refer to Section 10.3.2.)
(d) OPR control is given additional features (Refer to Section 8.2.)

Four different machine OPR methods are provided: the near point dog
method, two count methods, and the data set method.
(e) Two acceleration/deceleration control methods are provided: automatic
trapezoidal acceleration/deceleration and S-pattern acceleration/
deceleration. (Refer to Section 12.7.7.)
(3) Quick startup (Refer to Section 3.1.)

A positioning operation starts up quickly taking as little as 6 ms to 7.
When operation using simultaneous start function or interpolation operation is
executed, the axes start without delay.
(Example) Axis 1 and Axis 3 are started by the
: No delay in Axis 1 and
simultaneous start function
Axis 3 start
Axis 2 and Axis 4 are started by the
: No delay in Axis 2 and
interpolation operation
Axis 4 start
(4) SSCNET makes the connection to the servo amplifier possible

(a) The QD75 can be directly connected to the servo amplifier using the
MELSERVO (Mitsubishi's servo amplifier: MR-H-BN, MR-H-BN4, MR-J2-B,
MR-J2S-B, MR-J2-Jr, MR-J2M-B) and SSCNET.
(b) Because the SSCNET cable is used to connect the QD75 and the servo
amplifier, or servo amplifiers, saving wiring can be realized. The cable
between the QD75 and servo amplifier or servo amplifiers can be extended
up to 30m.
(c)
The servo parameters can be set on the QD75 side to write or read them
to/from the servo amplifier using the SSCNET.
(d) The actual current value and error description contained in the servo can
be checked by the buffer memory of the QD75.
(5) Easy application to the absolute position system

(a) The absolute position-corresponding servo amplifier is connected to have
an application to the absolute position system.
(b) Once the OP have been established, the OPR operation can also be made
unnecessary when the power is supplied.
(c)
With the absolute position system, the data set method OPR is used to
establish the OP.
(d) When the setting unit is "degree", the absolute position system with
unlimited length feed can be configured.
1-3
1 PRODUCT OUTLINE
MELSEC-Q
(6) Control can be realized with the mechanical system input

The external inputs, such as external start, stop, and speed/position switching is
used to perform the positioning control without using the PLC program.
(7) Easy maintenance

Each QD75 positioning module incorporates the following improvements in
maintainability:
(a) Data such as the positioning data and parameters can be stored on a flash
ROM inside the QD75, eliminating the need of a battery for retaining data.
(Refer to Section 7.1.1.)
(b) Error messages are classified in more detail to facilitate the initial
troubleshooting procedure. (Refer to Section 15.1.)
(c)
The module retains 16 error messages and 16 warning messages recently

output, offering more complete error and warning histories.
(Refer to Section 5.6.1.)
(8) Support of intelligent function module dedicated instructions

Dedicated instructions such as the positioning start instruction, and teaching
instruction are provided.
The use of such dedicated instruction simplifies PLC programs.(Refer to Chapter
14.)
(9) Setups, monitoring, and testing through GX Configurator-QP

Using GX Configurator-QP, the user can control the QD75 parameters and
positioning data without having to be conscious of the buffer memory addresses.
Moreover, GX Configurator-QP has a test function which allows the user to check
the wiring before creating a PLC program for positioning control, or test operation
the QD75 using created parameters and positioning data for checking their
integrity.
The control monitor function of GX Configurator-QP allows the user to debug
programs efficiently.
1-4
1 PRODUCT OUTLINE
MELSEC-Q
1.1.2 Purpose and applications of positioning control

"Positioning" refers to moving a moving body, such as a workpiece or tool (hereinafter,
generically called "workpiece") at a designated speed, and accurately stopping it at the
target position. The main application examples are shown below.
Punch press (X, Y feed positioning)
Gear and ball screw
Y axis
servomotor
15m/min
(2000r/min)
160mm
320mm
Y axis X axis
Y axis
Press
punching
15m/min
(1875r/min)
12s
Servo
amplifier
X axis
servomotor
as the same shape at a high yield, positioning

is carried out with the X axis and Y axis
servos.
After positioning the table with the X axis
servo, the press head is positioned with the Y

axis servo, and is then punched with the
press.
X axis
Gear and rack & pinion
Press head
To punch insulation material or leather, etc.,
When the material type or shape changes, the
PLC
MELSEC-Q QD75
press head die is changed, and the positioning

pattern is changed.
Servo
amplifier
Y axis
X axis
Palletizer
Conveyor control
Using the servo for one axis, the palletizer is
Conveyor
positioned at a high accuracy.

The amount to lower the palletizer according to
Servomotor
(with brakes)
the material thickness is saved.

Position detector
G
Servo
amplifier
Reduction
gears
Ball screw
Palletizer
Unloader control
(From QD75)
PLC
MELSEC-Q
QD75
Compact machining center (ATC magazine positioning)

The ATC tool magazine for a compact
Servomotor
Servo
amplifier
The relation of the magazine's current value
and target value is calculated, and positioning

is carried out with forward run or reverse run to
achieve the shortest access time.
Tool
(12 pcs., 20 pcs.)
Positioning
pin
PLC
MELSEC-Q
12 1
11
QD75
machining center is positioned.
Coupling Reduction
gears
ATC tool
magazine
Rotation direction
for calling
11, 12, 1, 2 or 3
19
3
10
5
8
20 1 2
Current 18
17
value
16
retrieval 15
position 14
13 12 10 9
11
Rotation direction
for calling 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 or 10
<No. of tools: 12>
Rotation direction
for calling
17 to 20, 1 to 5
4
5
6
7
8
Current
value
retrieval
position
Rotation direction
for calling 7 to 16
<No. of tools: 20>
1-5
1 PRODUCT OUTLINE
MELSEC-Q
Lifter (Storage of Braun tubes onto aging rack)

During the aging process of Braun tubes,
Unloader
Loader/unloader
storage onto the rack is carried out by

positioning with the AC servo.
The up/down positioning of the lifter is carried
B conveyor
Aging rack
out with the 1-axis servo, and the horizontal

position of the aging rack is positioned with the
2-axis servo.
Lifter
C conveyor
A conveyor
Counterweight
Servo
amplifier
G2
Reduction
gears
G1
Loader
QD75
Servomotor
Servo
amplifier
Servomotor
(with brakes)
PLC MELSEC-Q
Index table (High-accuracy indexing of angle)

PLC
MELSEC-Q
The index table is positioned at a high accuracy
QD75
using the 1-axis servo.

Servo
amplifier
Digital switch
Index table
Detector
Servomotor
Worm gears
Inner surface grinder

Servomotor
The grinding of the workpiece's inner surface
Motor
IM
G
G
Servo
amplifier
the 1-axis inverter, and the rotation of the

grinding stone is controlled with the 2-axis
inverter. The workpiece is fed and ground with
the 3-axis servo.
IM
Inverter
Fix the grinding
stone, feed the
workpiece, and grind.
Operation panel
PLC
MELSEC-Q
QD75
The rotation of the workpiece is controlled with
Motor
Inverter
220VAC
60Hz
is controlled with the servo and inverter.
Workpiece
Grinding stone
a. Total feed
d. Rough grindamount (m)
ing speed (m/s)
b. Finishing
e. Fine grinding
feed amount (m)
speed (m/s)
c. Compensation
amount (m)
1-6
1 PRODUCT OUTLINE
MELSEC-Q
1.1.3 Mechanism of positioning control

In the positioning system using the QD75, various software and devices are used for
the following roles. The QD75 realizes complicated positioning control when it reads in
various signals, parameters and data and is controlled with the PLC CPU.
Stores the created program.
Creates control order and
conditions as a sequence
program.
GX Developer
The QD75 outputs the start signal and

stop signal following the stored program.
QD75 errors, etc., are detected.
PLC CPU
Outputs signals such as the start
signal, stop signal, limit signal and
control changeover signal to the QD75.
GX
Configurator
-QP
External signal
QD75 positioning
module
Issues commands by
transmitting pulses.
Manual pulse
generator
Sets the parameters and

positioning data for control.
Stores the parameter and data.
Outputs the start command for

JOG operation, etc., during test
operation with the test mode.
Outputs datas to the servo according to the

instructions from the PLC CPU, GX Configurator-QP,
external signals and manual pulse generator.
Monitors the positioning operation.
Servo
amplifier
Receives positioning commands and control
commands from QD75, and drives the motor.
Outputs the positioning data of the motor
data and etc. to the QD75 by the SSCNET.
Motor
Carries out the actual work according to commands

from the servo.
Workpiece
(Note): For QD75M1, 2 and 4, use SW2D5C-QD75P or later of the GX Configurator.
1-7
1 PRODUCT OUTLINE
MELSEC-Q
1.1.4 Overview of positioning control functions

The outline of the "overview of positioning control" and "overview of individual
positioning control and continuous positioning control", "overview of block positioning
control" and "overview of acceleration/deceleration processing control" is shown below.
Positioning control
An overview of positioning using positioning data described below.
(1) Linear control

(a) 1-axis linear control
This performs positioning from the start point address (location the axis is
presently stopped) defined on the specified axis to the specified position.
[Control using the absolute system]
1) This performs positioning from the start point address to the specified
position.
2) The start point address and the specified address determine the
movement direction.
[Example]
The following figure shows the operations when the start point address
is 5000 and the positioning address are 2000 and 8000:
Positioning when the specified
address is 2000
address is 8000
2000
5000
8000
Start point address
[Control using the increment system]

1) This performs positioning from the specified increment of travel from the
start point address.
2) The sign of the travel increment determines the direction of travel.
For positive travel increment.Positioning in the positive direction
(direction of address increase)
For negative travel increment...Positioning in the negative direction
(direction of address decrease)
[Example]
The following figure shows the operations when the start point address
is 5000 and the travel increments are 3000 and -3000:
address is -3000.
address is 3000.
2000
5000
Movement direction for a negative

movement amount.
8000
Movement direction for a positive
movement amount.
Start point address
1-8
1 PRODUCT OUTLINE
MELSEC-Q
(Note)
(b) 2-axis linear interpolation control

This controls interpolation along a linear locus from the start point address
(current stop position) defined by two axes.
[Control using the absolute system]
1) This performs linear interpolation using two axes from the start point
address to the endpoint address.
2) The start point address and the specified address determine the
direction of travel.
[Example]
The operation when the start point address is 800 for axis 1 and 2000
for axis 2 and the positioning address specified to 2000 for axis 1 and
8000 for axis 2, is shown below.
Axis 1
Specified address
(8000, 2000)
2000
Start point address
(2000, 800)
800
Positioning operation
Axis 2
0
8000
2000
[Control using the increment system]

1) This performs positioning from the specified increment of travel from the
start point address.
2) The sign of the travel increment determines the direction of travel.
For positive travel increment.Positioning in the positive direction
(direction of address increase)
For negative travel increment.Positioning in the negative direction
(direction of address decrease)
[Example]
The operation when the start point address is 800 for axis 1 and 2000
for axis 2 and the positioning address specified to 1200 for axis 1 and
6000 for axis 2, is shown below.
Axis 1
End position when the travel increment

is 1200 for axis 1 and 6000 for axis 2.
2000
Start point address
(2000, 800)
800
Axis 2
0
8000
2000
REMARK
(Note): The interpolation speed during linear interpolation control can be selected
from "synthesized axis" and "reference-axis speed" using the detailed
parameter 1. (Refer to the Section 5.2.3 information about setting " Pr.20
Interpolation speed designation method" of the detailed parameter 1.)
1-9
1 PRODUCT OUTLINE
MELSEC-Q
(2) Circular interpolation control (Note)

There are two types of circular interpolation controls: circular interpolation with a
specified sub point and circular interpolation with the specified center point.
(a) Circular interpolation with a specified sub point
Circular interpolation is performed using the specified endpoint address and
sub point (passing point) address.
Two methods are available: absolute system and increment system.
Forward
direction
End point
Sub point
Reverse
direction
Start point
address
Reverse
direction
Center point
(Calculated by the QD75)
Forward
direction
(b) Circular interpolation with the specified center point

Circular interpolation is performed using the specified endpoint address and
center point address.
Two methods are available: absolute system and increment system.
Also, the direction of movement can be selected from clockwise or
counterclockwise.
Forward
direction
Reverse
direction
End point
Stop position
Reverse
direction
Center point
Forward
direction
REMARK
(Note): The interpolation speed during circular interpolation control may only be set
to "synthesized speed" for the interpolation speed of the detailed parameter
1. (Refer to the Section 5.2.3 information about setting " Pr.20 Interpolation
speed designation method" of the detailed parameter 1.)
1 - 10
1 PRODUCT OUTLINE
MELSEC-Q
(3) Fixed-feed control

This performs positioning for the specified increment of travel. The fixed-feed
control includes 1-axis control and 2-axis control through linear interpolation
using the specified two axes.
Operation timing
Positioning direction
[1-axis fixed-feed control]
V
Stop position
Reverse direction
Forward direction
Movement direction for

a negative movement amount

a positive movement amount
Start
t
[2-axis fixed-feed control]

Forward
direction
Positioning
direction
Travel along
axis 1
Reverse
direction
ON
Start
OFF
command
Forward
direction
Stop position
Travel along axis 2
Reverse
direction
(4) Speed control

After command is executed, control continues with the command speed until the
stop command is input.
V
ON
(By the PLC
program creation)
Positioning start OFF

signal
ON
BUSY signal
OFF
ON
Axis stop signal
OFF
1 - 11
1 PRODUCT OUTLINE
MELSEC-Q
(5) Speed-position switching control

This starts positioning under speed control, and switches to position control
according to the input of the QD75 speed-position switching signal and perform
positioning for the specified increment of travel.
V
Speed control
Position control
Specified travel
increment
Dwell time
ON
Positioning start signal
(By the PLC

program creation)
OFF
ON
BUSY signal
OFF
ON
Speed-position switching
signal (external signal)
OFF
ON
enable flag
OFF
1 - 12
1 PRODUCT OUTLINE
MELSEC-Q
Individual positioning control and continuous positioning control

The QD75 performs positioning according to the user-set positioning data, which is a
set of information comprised of the control method (position control, speed control,
speed-position switching control), positioning address, operation pattern, and so on.
Up to 600 of positioning data are assigned respectively to positioning data Nos. 1 to
600 per axis and registered to the QD75.
The operation pattern set in each positioning data by the user determines whether to
perform positioning operation with one positioning data item or to perform continuous
positioning operation with multiple positioning data items.
(1) Independent positioning control (operation pattern = 00: positioning

complete)
The operation completed upon completion of positioning for the specified
positioning data. The positioning completion of this operation pattern is also used
as the operation pattern for the last positioning data of continuous positioning and
continuous-locus positioning.
The operation when the start point address is 5000 and the positioning address
specified to 2000 and 8000.
V
Positioning complete (00)

Dwell time
t
ON
(By the PLC
program creation)
Positioning start signal OFF

ON
Positioning start
complete signal
OFF
BUSY signal
OFF
Positioning complete
signal
OFF
ON
ON
1 - 13
1 PRODUCT OUTLINE
MELSEC-Q
(2) Continuous positioning control (operation pattern = 01: positioning

continues)
The operation stops temporarily upon the completion of positioning for the
specified positioning data, and then continues with the next positioning data
number.
This is specified when performing positioning in which the direction changes
because of multiple positioning data items having consecutive positioning data
numbers.
Dwell time
Positioning continues (01)

Address(+)
direction
t
Address(-)
direction
Positioning
complete
(00)
V
ON
(By the PLC

program creation)
Positininig start signal OFF

ON
Positioning start
complete signal
OFF
BUSY signal
OFF
signal
OFF
ON
ON
1 - 14
1 PRODUCT OUTLINE
MELSEC-Q
(3) Continuous path control (operation pattern = 11: positioning

continue)
After executing positioning using the specified positioning data, the operation
changes its speed to that of the next positioning data number and continues
positioning.
This is specified when continuously executing multiple positioning data items
having consecutive positioning data numbers at a specified speed.
V
Positioning continue (11)

Positioning
complete
(00)

Address(+)
direction
Dwell time
t
Address(-)
direction
V
ON
Positininig start signal
OFF
Positioning start
complete signal
OFF
BUSY signal
OFF
signal
OFF
(By the PLC

program creation)
ON
ON
ON
1 - 15
1 PRODUCT OUTLINE
MELSEC-Q
Block positioning control

Block positioning is a control that continuously executes the positioning of specified
blocks. One block equivalent to a series of positioning data up to the completion of
positioning (operation pattern = 00) by Independent or continuous positioning control.
A maximum of 50 blocks per axis can be specified.
Using a one-time start command from the QCPU or external, complex positioning
control can be performed.
The block positioning control can be performed by specifying the positioning start
number and positioning start information in the buffer memory.
V

Dwell time
Positioning
complete (00)
Address(+)
direction
Positioning
complete (00)
t
Positioning
continue (11)
Address(-)
direction
Positioning
continue (11)
V
One block
One block
ON
Positininig start signal OFF
ON
Start complete signal
OFF
BUSY signal
OFF
signal
OFF
ON
ON
1 - 16
One block
1 PRODUCT OUTLINE
MELSEC-Q
Overview of acceleration/deceleration processing control

Acceleration/deceleration processing for the positioning processing, manual pulsegenerator processing, OPR processing and JOG processing is performed using the
user-specified method, acceleration time and deceleration time.
(1) Acceleration/deceleration method

There are two types of acceleration and deceleration processing: the automatic
trapezoidal acceleration/deceleration processing method and S-pattern
acceleration/deceleration processing method. A detailed parameter is used to set
which method is used. The specified acceleration/deceleration method is applied
to all accelerations and decelerations when starting and completing positioning
processing, OPR processing and JOG processing, as well as when changing the
speed.
(a) Automatic trapezoidal acceleration/deceleration processing method
This is a method in which linear acceleration/deceleration is carried out
based on the acceleration time, deceleration time, and speed limit value set
by the user.
Velocity
Time
(b) S-pattern acceleration/deceleration processing method

This method reduces the load on the motor when starting and stopping.
This is a method in which acceleration/deceleration is carried out gradually,
based on the acceleration time, deceleration time, speed limit value, and
" Pr.35 S-pattern proportion" (1 to 100%) set by the user.
Velocity
Time
(2) Acceleration time, deceleration time, sudden-stop deceleration time

(a) For types each of the acceleration time and deceleration time for positioning
control can be set using basic parameters 2 and detailed parameters 2.
Acceleration time.The time elapses before the speed of 0 reaches
the limit value.
Deceleration time.The time elapses before the speed at the limit
value reaches 0.
(b) The sudden-stop deceleration time (1 to 8388608 ms) is set using the
acceleration time/deceleration time setting size selection of detailed
parameters 2.
1 - 17
1 PRODUCT OUTLINE
MELSEC-Q
1.1.5 Outline design of positioning system

The outline of the positioning system operation and design, using the QD75, is shown
below.
(1) Positioning system using QD75

PLC
CPU
QD75
Positioning command
Control command
OS
Read,
write
and
etc.
Monitor data
MR-H-BN/MR-H B/MR-J2- B/MR-J2S- B/MR-J2-Jr/MR-J2M-B
S
S
C
N
E
T
I
Interface
Positioning command
Control command
Monitor data
SSCNET
S + Positioning +
S - control
C
N
E
T
Speed
control
+
-
Current
control
+
-
Interface
Manual puse generator

A-phese/B-phese
External output signal (Refer to Section 3.3.2)
FLS
RLS
CHG
STOP
DOG
(Upper limit signal)

(Lower limit signal)
(External command signal/switching signal)
(Stop signal)
(Near-point dog signal)
Fig. 1.2 Outline of the operation of positioning system using QD75
1 - 18
Current feedback
Speed feedback
Position feedback
Inverter
Servo
motor
PLG
1 PRODUCT OUTLINE
MELSEC-Q
1.1.6 Communicating signals between QD75 and each module

The outline of the signal communication between the QD75 (positioning module) and
PLC CPU, peripheral device and servo amplifier, etc., is shown below.
(A peripheral device communicates with the QD75 via the PLC CPU to which it is
connected)
QD75
PLC CPU
Y0
X0
Y1
X1
Y8,YA,YC,YE
Y9,YB,YD,YF
Y14,Y15,Y16,Y17
PLC READY signal

QD75 READY signal
All axis servo ON signal
SSCNET
Syncronization flag
Operating information of
the servo amplifer
Positioning command,
control command
Servo parameter
Forward run JOG start signal

Reverse run JOG start signal
Execution prohibition flag
Servo
amplifer
External
interface
Y10,Y11,Y12,Y13
X14,X15,X16,X17
XC,XD,XE,XF
X10,X11,X12,X13
Y4,Y5,Y6,Y7
X4,X5,X6,X7
Manual puse generator A-phase Manual pulse
Positioning complete signal
Manual puse generator B-phase generator
BUSY signal
Upper/lower limit signal
Axis stop signal
Near-point dog signal

External command signal/
switching signal
M code ON signal
Stop signal
Interface
with
PLC CPU
X8,X9,XA,XB
Error detection signal
Data write/read
Parameter write/read
Positioning data write/read
Block start data write/read
Peripherral
device
interface
Home position return operation

(Test)
JOG operation, inching operation
(Test)
Positioning operation(Test)
Operation monitor
Peripheral
device
1 - 19
External
signal
1 PRODUCT OUTLINE
QD75
MELSEC-Q
PLC CPU
The QD75 and PLC CPU communicate the following data via the base unit.
Direction
Communication
QD75
PLC CPU
Signal indicating QD75 state

QD75 READY signal
BUSY signal
and etc.
Control signal
Parameter
Positioning data
Block start data
Control data
Monitor data
Data (read/write)
PLC CPU
QD75
Signal related to commands

PLC READY signal
Various start signals
Stop signals
and etc.
Parameter
Positioning data
Block start data
Control data
Refer to Section 3.3 "Specifications of input/output signals with PLC CPU" for details.
QD75
Peripheral device
The QD75 and peripheral device communicate the following data via the PLC CPU:
Direction
Communication
QD75
Peripheral device
Parameter
Positioning data
Data (read/write)
Test operation
Monitor data
QD75
QD75
Parameter
Positioning data
Operation monitor
Peripheral device
OPR control start command

Positioning control start command
JOG/Inching operation start command
Teaching start command
Manual pulse generator operation
enable/disable command
Servo amplifier
The QD75 and servo amplifier communicate the following data via the SSCNET.
Direction
Communication
SSCNET
QD75
Servo amplifier
Positioning commands
Control commands
Servo parameter
1 - 20
Servo amplifier
QD75
Operating information of the servo

amplifier
Servo parameter
1 PRODUCT OUTLINE
QD75
MELSEC-Q
The QD75 and manual pulse generator communicate the following data via the
external device connection connector.
(The manual pulse generator should be connected to an external device connection
connector for axis 1 or for axes 1 and 2.)
Direction
Communication
QD75
Pulse signal
QD75
QD75
Manual pulse generator A-phase

Manual pulse generator B-phase
External signal
The QD75 and external signal communicate the following data via the external
device connection connector.
Direction
Communication
QD75
External signal
External signal
QD75
Upper/lower limit signal

External command signal/switching
Control signal
signal
Stop signal
1 - 21
1 PRODUCT OUTLINE
MELSEC-Q
1.2 Flow of system operation

1.2.1 Flow of all processes
The positioning control processes, using the QD75, are shown below.
GX Configurator-QP
QD75
Servo, etc.
PLC CPU
GX Developer
1)
Understand the functions and performance, and determine the positioning operation method
(system design)
Design
2)
Installation, wiring
3)
Setting of the:
Parameters
Positioning data
Block start data
Condition data
Servo parameter
4)
Creation of PLC
program for operation
Refer to (Note)
Preparation
5)
Writing of setting data
6)
7)
8)
Connection confirmation
Monitoring with
test operation,
and debugging
of setting data
Operation
Writing of program
Monitor
Test operation
Monitoring and
debugging of
operation
program
9)
Monitor
Actual operation
(Note)
10)
Maintenance
11)
Disposal
Maintenance
1 - 22
When not using

GX Configurator
-QP, carry out
setting, monitoring
and debugging of
the data in 3) with
GX Developer.
1 PRODUCT OUTLINE
MELSEC-Q
The following work is carried out with the processes shown on the previous page.
Details
Reference
Understand the product functions and usage methods, the configuration devices
1)
and specifications required for positioning control, and design the system.
2)
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Chapter 8 to Chapter 13
Install the QD75 onto the base unit, wire the QD75 and external connection devices
Chapter 4
(drive unit, etc.).
Chapter 5
Using GX Configurator-QP, set the parameter, servo parameters, positioning data,
Chapter 8 to Chapter 13
3) block start data and condition data required for the positioning control to be
GX Configurator-QP
executed.
Operating Manual
Using GX Developer, create the PLC program required for positioning operation.
4) (When not using GX Configurator-QP, also create the PLC program for setting
data.)
5)
6)
Write the parameters and positioning data, etc., created with GX Configurator-QP
into the QD75.
Chapter 6
GX Developer Operating
Manual
Chapter 7
GX Configurator-QP
Operating Manual
Chapter 7
Using GX Developer, write the created PLC program into the PLC CPU. (When not
using GX Configurator-QP, also write in the PLC program for setting data.)
Manual
Carry out test operation and adjustments in the test mode to check the connection
with the QD75 and external connection device, and to confirm that the designated
7)
positioning operation is executed correctly. (Debug the set "parameters" and
"positioning data", etc.)
GX Configurator-QP
Operating Manual
Chapter 13
Manual
Carry out test operation and adjustment to confirm that the designated positioning
8) operation is executed correctly. (Debug the created PLC program. When not using
Manual
GX Configurator-QP, also debug the set data.
Chapter 5
Chapter 15
9)
Actually operate the positioning operation. At this time, monitor the operation state
as required. If an error or warning occurs, remedy.
GX Configurator-QP
Operating Manual
Manual
10) Service the QD75 as required.
Chapter 4
11) Dispose of the QD75.
Chapter 4
1 - 23
1 PRODUCT OUTLINE
MELSEC-Q
1.2.2 Outline of starting

The outline for starting each control is shown with the following flowchart.
It is assumed that each module is installed, and the required system configuration,
etc., has been prepared.
Flow of starting
Installation and connection of module
Preparation
Setting of hardware
Control
functions
Major positioning control
High-level positioning
control
Position control
Speed control
Speed-position
switching control
Position-speed
switching control
Other control
Block start (Normal start)

Condition start
Wait start
Simultaneous start
Repeated start
Manual control
OPR control
JOG operation
Machine OPR control

Fast OPR control
Inching operation
Positioning
parameters
Set the positioning parameters. ( Pr.1 to Pr.42 , Pr.200 , Pr.201 )
OPR
parameters
Set the OPR parameters.

( Pr.43 to Pr.57 )
Servo
parameters
Set the servo parameters. ( Pr.100 to Pr.161 )
PLC READY
Turn the PLC READY signal ON(Y0 ON)
All axis
servo ON
Turn the All axis servo ON signal(Y1 ON)
Positioning
data
Block start
data
Control data
Set the positioning data.

( Da.1 to Da.10 )
Set the block start
data.
( Da.11 to Da.19 )
Set the positioning start No. ( Cd.3 )
Set the JOG speed

( Cd.17 )
Set the positioning

starting point No.
Set the inching

movement
amount to 0.
( Cd.16 )
( Cd.4 )
Set the inching

movement
amount to 0.
( Cd.16 )
Input the start signal.
Start signal
Set the manual pulse

generator enable flag
to "1".
( Cd.21 )
Method (1) Turn ON the QD75 start signal from the

PLC CPU
Method (2) Issue the PSTRT instruction from the PLC CPU.
Method (3) Turn the QD75 external start signal ON
Control start
Operation
Control end
Stop
1 - 24
Set the manual pulse

generator 1 pulse input
magnification.
( Cd.20 )
Turn the QD75 JOG start

signal ON from the PLC
CPU
Operate the
manual pulse
generator
1 PRODUCT OUTLINE
MELSEC-Q
Setting method
: Indicates the PLC program that must be created.
<GX Configurator-QP>
Write
Set with GX Configurator-QP
Set the parameter and data for executing main function,

and the sub functions that need to be set beforehand.
QD75
<GX Developer>
Write
Create PLC program

for setting data
PLC
CPU
Write
When set with "GX Configurator-QP",

this does not need to be created.
<GX Developer>
Create PLC program for
executing main function
Create PLC program for
outputting control signals, such
as start signal, to QD75.
Write
Operation PLC program
<GX Developer>
Speed change
Current value changing
Torque limit
Restart, etc.
Create a PLC
program for the
sub functions.
1 - 25
PLC
CPU
1 PRODUCT OUTLINE
MELSEC-Q
1.2.3 Outline of stopping

Each control is stopped in the following cases.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
When each control is completed normally.

When the Servo READY signal is turned OFF.
When a PLC CPU error occurs.
When the PLC READY signal is turned OFF.
When an error occurs in the QD75.
When control is intentionally stopped (Stop signal from PLC CPU turned ON, stop
signal from an external device, etc.).
The outline for the stopping process in these cases is shown below. (Excluding (1) for
normal stopping.)
Stop cause
Axis
Stop process
operation OPR control
Manual control
M code
status
Stop
Major
High-level
Manual
ON signal
after
Machine Fast positioning positioning JOG/
axis
pulse
after stop stopping
OPR
OPR control
Inching
control
generator
operation
( Md.26 ) control control
operation
Servo READY
OFF
Servo amplifier
power supply
OFF
Each No
axis change
During
error
Hardware
stroke limit
Fatal stop
upper/lower
(Stop group 1)
limit error
occurrence
Each No
axis change
During
error
Error occurs
in PLC CPU
No
change
Forced stop
Servo alarm
Servo OFF or free run

(The operation stops with dynamic brake or
electromagnetic brake.)
Emergency
stop to the
servo amplifier
Deceleration stop/sudden stop
Emergency
PLC READY All
stop
signal OFF axes
(Stop group 2)
Error in test
mode
(Select with " Pr.37
Sudden stop group1
Deceleration
stop
sudden stop selection" )
Turns
OFF

During
error
(Select with " Pr.38
Sudden stop group2
Deceleration
stop
No
change
Axis error
detection
(Error other
Relatively safe than stop
group 1 or 2) Each No
stop
axis change
(Stop group 3) Stop signal
from
peripheral
device
During
error
"Stop signal"
ON from
external
Intentional stop source
Each No
(Stop group 3) "Axis stop
axis change
signal" ON
from PLC
CPU
When
stopped
(While
waiting)

(Select with " Pr.39 Sudden stop group3
1 - 26
Deceleration
stop
1 PRODUCT OUTLINE
MELSEC-Q
Reference
Provide the emergency stop circuits external to the servo system to prevent cases
where danger may result from abnormal operation of the overall in the event of a
power supply fault or servo system failure.
1.2.4 Outline for restarting

When a stop cause has occurred during operation with position control causing the
axis to stop, positioning to the end point of the positioning data can be restarted from
the stopped position by using the " Cd.6 Restart command".
If issued during a continuous positioning or continuous path control operation, the
restart command will cause the positioning to be re-executed using the current position
(pointed by the positioning data No. associated with the moment when the movement
was interrupted) as the start point.
When " Cd.6 Restart command" is ON

(1) If the " Md.26 Axis operation status" is stopped, positioning to the end point of
the positioning data will be restarted from the stopped position regardless of
the absolute system or incremental system.
(2) When " Md.26 Axis operation status" is not stopped, the warning "Restart not
possible" (warning code: 104) will be applied, and the restart command will be
ignored.
[Example for incremental system]
(a) The restart operation when the axis 1 movement amount is 300, and the
axis 2 movement amount is 600 is shown below.
Axis 1
Axis 1
Stop position due to stop cause

Designated end
400
Start point
point position
address
200
100
Restart

Stop position
400
after restart
200
Operation during
restart
100
100
300
700
Axis 2
100
300
700
Axis 2
Reference
If the positioning start signal [Y10 to Y13]/external command signal is turned ON
while the " Md.26 Axis operation status" is waiting or stopped, positioning will be
restarted from the start of the positioning start data regardless of the absolute
system or incremental system. ( : When the external command signal is set to
"External positioning start")
(Same as normal positioning.)
1 - 27
1 PRODUCT OUTLINE
MELSEC-Q
[Example for incremental system]

(a) The positioning start operation when the axis 1 movement amount is 300
and the axis 2 movement amount is 600 is shown below.
Axis 1
400
Axis 1
500

Designated end
Start point
point position
address
Positioning
start
200
200
100
100
100
300
700
Axis 2
1 - 28
Stop position
after restart
Operation during
positioning start
100
300
900
Axis 2
Chapter 2 System Configuration
In this chapter, the general image of the system configuration of the positioning control
using QD75, the configuration devices, applicable CPU and the precautions of configuring
the system are explained.
Prepare the required configuration devices to match the positioning control system.
2.1 General image of system .............................................................................................2- 2

2.2 Component list..............................................................................................................2- 4
2.3 Applicable system.........................................................................................................2- 6
2.4 How to check the function version and SERIAL No. ..................................................2- 8
2-1
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
MELSEC-Q
2.1 General image of system

The general image of the system, including the QD75, PLC CPU and peripheral
devices is shown below.
(The Nos. in the illustration refer to the "No." in Section 2.2 "Component list".
Main base unit
Extension
cable
Positioning
module
1
CPU
module
I/O
module
USB cable
5
Extension
system
RS-232 cable
4
REMARK
1 Refer to Section "2.3 Applicable system" for the CPU modules that can be used.
2 Refer to the CPU module User's Manual for the base units that can be used.
3 For the items with , use the software package of "2" or later.
2-2
MELSEC-Q
6
Servo
amplifer
Motor

7
SSCNET cable
8
Machine system inputs (switches)
Cable
Upper/lower stroke
limit switch
External-command
signal/switching signal
Stop signal
Peripheral device
Personal
computer
GX Configurator
-QP
SW D5C 3
-QD75P-E
(For details, refer to GX Configurator

-QP Operating Manual.)
2-3
MELSEC-Q
2.2 Component list

The positioning system using the QD75 is configured of the following devices.
No.
1
Part name
Type
Remarks
QD75M
QD75M1
Positioning module QD75M2
QD75M4
Number of control axes

M: SSCNET model
GX ConfiguratorQP
SW D5C-QD75PRefer to GX Configurator-QP Operating Manual for details.

E
Personal computer
DOS/V personal
computer
(Prepared by user)
Refer to GX Configurator-QP Operating Manual for details.
QC30R2
(Prepared by user)
An RS-232 cable is needed for connecting the CPU module with a
personal computer (DOS/V).
For details, refer to GX Configurator-QP Operating Manual.
RS-232 cable
USB cable
(Prepared by user)
A USB cable is needed for connecting the CPU module with a personal
computer (DOS/V).
For details, refer to GX Configurator-QP Operating Manual.
Servo amplifier
(Prepared by user)
Manual pulse
generator
(Prepared by user)
Recommended: MR-HDP01 (Mitsubishi Electric)
SSCNET cable 1
(For connecting
between the QD75
and the servo
amplifier)
(Prepared by user)
Cables are needed to connect the QD75 with the servo amplifier.
Cable 1
(For connecting
between the QD75
and the external
device)
(Prepared by user)
Cables are needed to connect the QD75 with the external device.
(Prepare them referring to the manuals for the connected devices and
information given in 3.4.2 of this manual.)
1: The SSCNET cable connecting the QD75 and servo amplifier, external device connection connector has been
prepared. Refer to the below table.
Part name
Type
MR-J2HBUSM
SSCNET cable
Remarks
Connection between QD75M and (MR-J2-B/MR-J2S-B/MR-J2-Jr/MRJ2M)
Connection between (MR-J2-B/MR-J2S-B/MR-J2-Jr/MR-J2M) and (MRJ2-B/MR-J2S-B/MR-J2-Jr/MR-J2M).
(0.5m(1.64ft.), 1m(3.28ft.), 5m(16.4ft.) )
MR-J2CN1: connector set (sold separately)
Connection between QD75M/MR-J2-B/MR-J2S-B/MR-J2-Jr/MR-J2M

and MR-H-BN/MR-H-BN4.
MR-J2HBUSM-A
(0.5m(1.64ft.), 1m(3.28ft.), 5m(16.4ft.) )
MR-J2CN1-A: connector set (sold separately)
MR-HBUSM
Applicable connector
Connection between MR-H-BN/MR-H-BN4 and MR-H-BN/MR-H-BN4

(0.5m(1.64ft.), 1m(3.28ft.), 5m(16.4ft.) )
MR-HBCNS: connector set (sold separately)
A6CON1, A6CON2, A6CON3, A6CON4 (sold separately)
Applicable wire size
0.3 mm (when A6CON1and A6CON4 are used), AWG#24 to 28 (when A6CON2 is used),
AWG#28 (twisted)/AWG#30 (single wire) (when A6CON3 is used)
(Note): The overall extension of the SSCNET cable is up to 30m.
2-4
MELSEC-Q
Specifications of recommended manual pulse generator

Item
Specification
Model name
MR-HDP01
Pulse resolution
25PLS/rev (100 PLS/rev after magnification by 4)
Output method
Voltage-output (power supply voltage -1V or more),

Output current Max. 20mA
Power supply voltage
4.5 to 13.2VDC
Current consumption
60mA
Life time
100 revolutions (at 200r/min)

Radial load: Max. 19.6N
Permitted axial loads
Thrust load: Max. 9.8N
Operation temperature
-10 to 60C (14 to 140F )
Weight
0.4 (0.88) [kg(lb)]
Number of max. revolution
Instantaneous Max. 600r/min. normal 200r/min
Pulse signal status
2 signals: A phase, B: phase, 90 phase difference
Friction torque
0.1N/m (at 20C (68F))
2-5
MELSEC-Q
2.3 Applicable system

The QD75 can be used in the following system.
(1) Applicable modules and the number of installable modules

The following table indicates the CPU modules and network modules (for remote
I/O station) usable with the QD75 and the number of installable modules.
Applicable modules
Number of installable modules
Q00JCPU
Remarks
Max. 16 modules
( 1)
Q00CPU
Max. 24 modules
Q01CPU
Q02CPU
CPU
Q02HCPU
Installable in the Q mode
module
Max. 64 modules
only
Q06HCPU
Q12HCPU
( 1)
Q25HCPU
Q12PHCPU
Max. 64 modules
( 1)
Q25PHCPU
QJ72LP25-25
Network
QJ72BR15
MELSECNET/H remote I/O
Max. 64 modules
module
station ( 2)
QJ72LP25G
QJ72LP25GE
1 Refer to the User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals) of the CPU
module used.
2 Refer to the Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual
(Remote I/O Network).
(2) Usable base unit

The QD75 can be installed in any of the I/O slots ( 3) of a base unit.
When installing the QD75, always consider the power supply capacity since a
shortage of the power supply capacity may occur depending on the combination
with the other installed module and the number of installed module.
3 Within the I/O point range of the CPU module and network module (for remote
I/O station).
(3) Compatibility with Multiple PLC system

When using the QD75 in a Multiple PLC system, first refer to the QCPU (Q mode)
User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals).
2-6
MELSEC-Q
(4) Supported software packages

The following table lists the compatibility between the systems using the QD75 and
the software packages. GX Developer is required for use of the QD75.
Software version
GX Developer
GX Configurator-QP
Single PLC
system
Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU
Multiple PLC
system
Single PLC
system
Q02/Q02H/Q06H/
Q12H/Q25HCPU
Multiple PLC
system
Single PLC
system
Q12PH/Q25PHCPU
Multiple PLC
system
For use on MELSECNET/H remote
I/O station
2-7
Version 7 or more
Version 8 or more
Version 2.10L or more
Version 4 or more
Version 6 or more
Version 2.13P or
more
Version 6 or more
MELSEC-Q
2.4 How to check the function version and SERIAL No.

The function version and the SERIAL No. of the QD75 can be checked in the following
methods.
[1] Method using the rated plate on the module side face
[2] Method using the software
[1] Method using the rated plate on the module side face
Check the alphabet of "SERIAL".
SERIAL No. (The first six digits)

Function version
027510
[2] Method using the software

Check the alphabet at the end of "Product information" displayed on System
1
monitor "Module's Detailed Information" of GX Developer
or on "OS
2
information" of GX Configurator-QP .
<GX Developer display screen>
<GX Configurator-QP display screen>
SERIAL No.
Function version
1: This check can be made using the version of SW4D5C-GPPW-E or more. For details, refer
to GX Developer Operating Manual.
2: For details, refer to GX Configurator-QP Operating Manual.
2-8
Chapter 3 Specifications and Functions

3
The various specifications of the QD75 are explained in this chapter.

The "General specifications", "Performance specifications", "List of functions",
"Specifications of input/output signals with PLC CPU", and the "Specifications of
input/output interfaces with external devices", etc., are described as information required
when designing the positioning system.
Confirm each specification before designing the positioning system.
3.1 Performance specifications ..........................................................................................3- 2

3.2 List of functions ............................................................................................................3- 4
3.2.1
QD75 control functions ...................................................................................3- 4
3.2.2
QD75 main functions ......................................................................................3- 6
3.2.3
QD75 sub functions and common functions..................................................3- 8
3.2.4
Combination of QD75 main functions and sub functions .............................3- 12
3.3 Specifications of input/output signals with PLC CPU.................................................3- 14

3.3.1
List of input/output signals with PLC CPU ....................................................3- 14
3.3.2
Details of input signals (QD75
3.3.3
Details of output signals (PLC CPU
PLC CPU) ................................................3- 15

QD75)...............................................3-17
3.4 Specifications of input/output interfaces with external devices..................................3- 18

3.4.1
Electrical specifications of input signals ........................................................3- 18
3.4.2
Signal layout for external device connection connector ...............................3- 19
3.4.3
List of input signal details...............................................................................3- 20
3.4.4
Interface internal circuit..................................................................................3- 21
3.5 External circuit design .................................................................................................3- 22
3-1
3 SPECIFICATIONS AND FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
3.1 Performance specifications

Model
Item
No. of control axes
Interpolation function
Control system
Control unit
Positioning data
Backup
Positioning system
Positioning range
Positioning
Speed command
Acceleration/
deceleration process
Acceleration/
deceleration time
Sudden stop
deceleration time
QD75M1
QD75M2
1 axis
2 axes
QD75M4
4 axes
2-, 3-, or 4-axis linear
2-axis linear interpolation
None
interpolation
2-axis circular interpolation
PTP (Point To Point) control, path control (both linear and arc can be set), speed control, speedposition switching control, position-speed switching control
mm, inch, degree, PLS
600 data (positioning data Nos. 1 to 600)/axis
(Can be set with peripheral device or PLC program.)
Parameters, positioning data, and block start data can be saved on flash ROM
(battery-less backup)
PTP control:
Incremental system/absolute system
Speed-position switching control: Incremental system/absolute system 1
Position-speed switching control: Incremental system
Path control:
Incremental system/absolute system
In absolute system
214748364.8 to 214748364.7 (m)
21474.83648 to 21474.83647 (inch)
0 to 359.99999 (degree)
2147483648 to 2147483647 (PLS)
In incremental system
214748364.8 to 214748364.7 (m)
21474.83648 to 21474.83647 (inch)
21474.83648 to 21474.83647 (degree)
2147483648 to 2147483647 (PLS)
In speed-position switching control (INC mode) / position-speed switching control
0 to 214748364.7 (m)
0 to 21474.83647 (inch)
0 to 21474.83647 (degree)
0 to 2147483647 (PLS)
In speed-position switching control (ABS mode) 1
0 to 359.99999 (degree)
0.01 to 20000000.00 (mm/min)
0.001 to 2000000.000 (inch/min)
0.001 to 2000000.000 (degree/min)
1 to 10000000 (PLS/s)
Automatic trapezoidal acceleration/deceleration, S-pattern acceleration/deceleration
1 to 8388608 (ms)
Four patterns can be set for each of acceleration time and deceleration time
1 to 8388608 (ms)
1: In speed-position switching control (ABS mode), the control unit available is "degree" only. (For details, refer to "Section 9.2.17 Speedposition switching control (ABS mode)".
3-2
Model
MELSEC-Q
QD75M1
Item
QD75M2
1-axis linear control

1-axis speed control
2-axis linear interpolation control (Composite speed)
2-axis linear interpolation control (Reference axis speed)
2-axis circular interpolation control
Starting time (ms) 2
3-axis linear interpolation control (Composite speed)
3-axis linear interpolation control (Reference axis speed)
4-axis linear interpolation control
External wiring connection system 40-pin connector
QD75M4
6 Factors in starting time extension
6 The following times will be added to
7 the starting time in the described
7 conditions:
7 S-pattern acceleration/
deceleration is selected: 0.5
6
Other axis is in
7
operation:
1.5
7
During continuous
6
positioning control:
0.2
7 During continuous path
7
control:
1.0
0.3 mm (when A6CON1 and A6CON4 are used), AWG#24 to 28 (when A6CON2 is used),
AWG#28 (twisted)/AWG#30 (single wire) (when A6CON3 is used)
Applicable connector for external

device
A6CON1, A6CON2, A6CON3, A6CON4 (sold separately)
SSCNET cable
MR-HBUSM

(0.5m(1.64ft.), 1m(3.28ft.), 5m(16.4ft.) )
MR-J2HBUSM
Connection between QD75M and (MR-J2-B/MR-J2S-B/MR-J2-Jr/MR-J2M-B)

Connection between (MR-J2-B/MR-J2S-B/MR-J2-Jr/MR-J2M-B) and (MR-J2B/MR-J2S-B/MR-J2-Jr/MR-J2M-B).
(0.5m(1.64ft.), 1m(3.28ft.), 5m(16.4ft.) )
Connection between QD75M/MR-J2-B/MR-J2S-B/MR-J2-Jr/MR-J2M-B and

MR-H-BN/MR-H-BN4.
MR-J2HBUSM-A
(0.5m(1.64ft.), 1m(3.28ft.), 5m(16.4ft.) )
SSCNET cable over all length (m)
30
Internal current consumption
QD75M1 : 0.40A
QD75M2 : 0.40A
QD75M4 : 0.40A
(5VDC)
Flash ROM write count
Max. 100000 times
No. of occupied I/O points (points) 32 (I/O assignment: 32 points for intelligent function module)
Outline dimensions (mm(inch))
98 (3.86) (H) 27.4 (1.08) (W) 90 (3.54) (D)
Weight (kg)
0.15
0.15
0.16
2: Using the "Pre-reading start function", the virtual start time can be shortened. (For details, refer to "Section 12.7.8 Pre-reading start
function".
3-3
MELSEC-Q
3.2 List of functions

3.2.1 QD75 control functions
The QD75 has several functions. In this manual, the QD75 functions are categorized
and explained as follows.
Main functions
(1) OPR control
"OPR control" is a function that established the start point for carrying out
positioning control, and carries out positioning toward that start point. This is
used to return a workpiece, located at a position other than the OP when the
power is turned ON or after positioning stop, to the OP. The "OPR control" is
preregistered in the QD75 as the "Positioning start data No. 9001 (Machine
OPR)", and "Positioning start data No. 9002 (Fast OPR). (Refer to Chapter 8
"OPR Control".)
(2) Major positioning control
This control is carried out using the "Positioning data" stored in the QD75.
Positioning control, such as position control and speed control, is executed by
setting the required items in this "positioning data" and starting that positioning
data. An "operation pattern" can be set in this "positioning data", and with this
whether to carry out control with continuous positioning data (ex.: positioning
data No. 1, No. 2, No. 3, ...) can be set. (Refer to Chapter 9 "Major Positioning
Control".)
(3) High-level positioning control
This control executes the "positioning data" stored in the QD75 using the
"block start data". The following types of applied positioning control can be
carried out.
Random blocks, handling several continuing positioning data items as

"blocks", can be executed in the designated order.
"Condition judgment" can be added to position control and speed control.
The operation of the designated positioning data No. that is set for multiple
axes can be started simultaneously. (Pulses are output simultaneously to
multiple servos.)
The designated positioning data can be executed repeatedly, etc.,
(Refer to Chapter 10 "High-level Positioning Control".)
(4) Manual control
By inputting a signal into the QD75 from an external source, the QD75 will
output a random pulse train and carry out control. Use this manual control to
move the workpiece to a random position (JOG operation), and to finely adjust
the positioning (inching operation, manual pulse generator operation), etc.
(Refer to Chapter 11 "Manual Control".)
Sub functions
When executing the main functions, control compensation, limits and functions can
be added. (Refer to Chapter 12 "Control Sub Functions".)
Common functions
Common control using the QD75 for "parameter initialization" or "backup of
execution data" can be carried out. (Refer to Chapter 13 "Common Functions".)
3-4
MELSEC-Q
Main functions
OPR control
Sub functions
Control registered in QD75

(Functions characteristic to
machine OPR)
OPR retry function
[Positioning start No.]

[9001]
Machine OPR
[9002]
Fast OPR
OP shift function
<Functions that compensate
control>
Backlash compensation function
Control using "Positioning data"
<Control system>
Position control
Speed control
Electronic gear function

Near pass function

interpolation control
1-axis fixed-feed
control
2-, 3-, or 4-axis fixed-feed
control
control
<Operation
pattern>
Independent
positioning control
(Positioning complete)
Continuous
positioning control
Position-speed switching control

Current value changing,
NOP instruction
JUMP instruction,
LOOP to LEND
Major positioning
control
[Block start data]
[Positioning start No.]

[9004]
Manual control

Condition start
Wait start
Simultaneous start
Repeated start
(FOR loop)
Repeated start
(FOR condition)
Multiple axes
simultaneous start
control
Control with signals input from external source
[Positioning start signal]

JOG start signal ON
Pulse input from manual
pulse generator
Hardware stroke limit function
<Absolute position system>
Control using "positioning data"

+ "Block start data"
High-level positioning control
Software stroke limit function
<Functions that change

control details>
Speed change function
Override function
Acceleration/deceleration
time change function
Torque change function
Continuous path
control
Speed-position switching control
Other control
<Functions that limit control>

Speed limit function
Torque limit function
JOG operation, Inching operation

operation
<Other functions>
Step function
Skip function
Continuous operation
interrupt function
M code output function
Teaching function
Target position change
function
Command in-position
function
processing function
Pre-reading start function
Deceleration start flag
function
Stop command processing
for deceleration stop function
Follow up function
Common functions
Parameter initialization function
Execution data backup function
External I/O signal monitor function
3-5
External I/O signal logic switching function
MELSEC-Q
3.2.2 QD75 main functions

The outline of the main functions for positioning control with the QD75 is described
below. (Refer to "Section 2" for details on each function.)
Details
Reference
section
Machine OPR control
Mechanically establishes the positioning start point using

a near-point dog or stopper. (Positioning start No. 9001)
8.2
Fast OPR control
Positions a target to the OP address ( Md.21 Machine

feed value) stored in the QD75 using machine OPR.
(Positioning start No. 9002)
8.3
OPR control
Main functions
Linear control
(1-axis linear control)
(2-axis linear interpolation control)
Fixed-feed control
Position
control (1-axis fixed-feed control)
(2-axis fixed-feed control)
Speed
control
Linear control
(1-axis linear control)
Other
control
NOP instruction
JUMP instruction
LOOP
LEND
Positions a target using a linear path to the address set in

the positioning data or to the position designated with the
movement amount.
Positions a target by the movement amount designated
with the amount set in the positioning data.
(With fixed-feed control, the" Md.20 Current feed value"
is set to "0" when the control is started. With
2-, 3-, or 4-axis fixed-feed control, the fixed-feed is fed
along a linear path obtained by interpolation.)
Positions a target using an arc path to the address set in
the positioning data, or to the position designated with the
movement amount, sub point or center point.
Continuously outputs the command corresponding to the

command speed set in the positioning data.
First, carries out speed control, and then carries out

position control (positioning with designated address or
movement amount) by turning the "speed-position
switching signal" ON.
First, carries out position control, and then carries out
speed control (continuous output of the command
corresponding to the designated command speed) by
turning the "position-speed switching signal" ON.
Changes the Current feed value ( Md.20 ) to the address
set in the positioning data.
The following two methods can be used.
(The machine feed value cannot be changed.)
Current value changing using positioning data
Current value changing using current value changing
start No. (No. 9003)
No execution control system. When NOP instruction is
set, this instruction is not executed and the operation of
the next data is started.
Unconditionally or conditionally jumps to designated
positioning data No.
Carries out loop control with repeated LOOP to LEND.
Returns to the beginning of the loop control with repeated
LOOP to LEND.
3-6
9.2.2
9.2.3
9.2.4
9.2.5
9.2.6
9.2.7
9.2.8
9.2.9
9.2.10
9.2.11
9.2.12
9.2.13
9.2.14
9.2.15
9.2.16
9.2.17
9.2.18
9.2.19
9.2.20
9.2.21
9.2.22
9.2.23
MELSEC-Q
Details
Reference
section
With one start, executes the positioning data in a random block

with the set order.
10.3.2
Condition start
Carries out condition judgment set in the "condition data" for

the designated positioning data, and then executes the "block
start data".
When the condition is established, the "block start data" is
executed. When not established, that "block start data" is
ignored, and the next point's "block start data" is executed.
10.3.3
Wait start
Carries out condition judgment set in the "condition data" for

the designated positioning data, and then executes the "block
start data".
When the condition is established, the "block start data" is
executed. When not established, stops the control until the
condition is established. (Waits.)
10.3.4
Simultaneous start
Simultaneously executes the positioning data having the No.

for the axis designated with the "condition data". (Outputs
pulses at the same timing.)
10.3.5
Repeated start (FOR loop)
Repeats the program from the block start data set with the
"FOR loop" to the block start data set in "NEXT" for the
designated No. of times.
10.3.6
Repeated start (FOR condition)
Repeats the program from the block start data set with the
"FOR condition" to the block start data set in "NEXT" until the
conditions set in the "condition data" are established.
10.3.7
Multiple axes simultaneous start

control
Starts the operation of multiple axes simultaneously according

to the pulse output level.
(Positioning start No. 9004, same as the "simultaneous start"
above)
10.5
JOG operation
Outputs a pulse to servo amplifier while the JOG start signal is

ON.
11.2
Inching operation
Outputs pulses corresponding to minute movement amount by

manual operation to servo amplifier.
(Performs fine adjustment with the JOG start signal.)
11.3
Outputs pulses commanded with the manual pulse generator to

servo amplifier. (Carry out fine adjustment, etc., at the pulse
level.)
11.4
Manual control
Main functions
With the "major positioning control" ("high-level positioning control"), whether or not to
continuously execute the positioning data can be set with the "operation pattern".
Outlines of the "operation patterns" are given below.
Da.1 Operation pattern
Details
Independent positioning control

(positioning complete)
When "independent positioning control" is set for the operation

pattern of the started positioning data, only the designated
positioning data will be executed, and then the positioning will
end.
Continuous positioning control
When "continuous positioning control" is set for the operation

pattern of the started positioning data, after the designated
positioning data is executed, the program will stop once, and
then the next following positioning data will be executed.
Continuous path control
When "continuous path control" is set for the operation pattern

of the started positioning data, the designated positioning data
will be executed, and then without decelerating, the next
following positioning data will be executed.
3-7
Reference
section
9.1.2
MELSEC-Q
3.2.3 QD75 sub functions and common functions

Sub functions
The functions that assist positioning control using the QD75 are described below.
(Refer to Section 2 for details on each function.
Sub function
Functions
characteristic
to machine
OPR
Details
OPR retry function
OP shift function
Backlash compensation
function
Functions that
compensate
control
Near pass function
This function retries the machine OPR with the upper/lower

limit switches during OPR. This allows machine OPR to be
carried out even if the axis is not returned to before the nearpoint dog with JOG operation, etc.
After returning to the machine OP, this function compensates
the position by the designated distance from the machine OP
position and sets that position as the OP address.
This function compensates the mechanical backlash. Feed
pulses equivalent to the set backlash amount are output each
time the movement direction changes.
By setting the movement amount per pulse, this function can
freely change the machine movement amount per commanded
pulse.
When the movement amount per pulse is set, a flexible
positioning system that matches the machine system can be
structured.
This function suppresses the machine vibration when the
speed changes during continuous path control in the
interpolation control.
If the command speed exceeds " Pr.8 Speed limit value"
during control, this function limits the commanded speed to
Reference
section
12.2.1
12.2.2
12.3.1
12.3.2
12.3.3
12.4.1
within the " Pr.8 Speed limit value" setting range.
Functions that Torque limit function

limit control
Software stroke limit
function
Hardware stroke limit
function
If the torque generated by the servomotor exceeds " Pr.17

Torque limit setting value" during control, this function limits the
generated torque to within the " Pr.17 Torque limit setting
value" setting range.
If a command outside of the upper/lower limit stroke limit
setting range, set in the parameters, is issued, this function will
not execute positioning for that command.
This function carries out deceleration stop with the limit switch
connected to the QD75 external device connector.
This function changes the speed during positioning.
Set the new speed in the speed change buffer memory
( Cd.14 New speed value), and change the speed with the
12.4.2
12.4.3
12.4.4
12.5.1
Speed change request ( Cd.15 ).

Functions that
change control
Override function
details
Absolute position system
This function changes the speed within a percentage of 1 to

300% during positioning. This is executed using " Cd.13
Positioning operation speed override".
This function changes the acceleration/deceleration time during
speed change.
This function changes the "torque limit value" during control.
This function restores the absolute position.
12.5.2
12.5.3
12.5.4
12.6
1: The near pass function is featured as standard and is valid only for position control. It cannot be set to be invalid with parameters.
3-8
MELSEC-Q
Details
Reference
section
Step function
This function temporarily stops the operation to confirm the

positioning operation during debugging, etc.
The operation can be stopped at each "automatic deceleration"
or "positioning data".
12.7.1
Skip function
This function stops (decelerates to a stop) the positioning being

executed when the skip signal is input, and carries out the next
positioning.
12.7.2
This function issues a command for a sub work (clamp or drill

stop, tool change, etc.) corresponding to the M code No.
(0 to 65535) that can be set for each positioning data.
12.7.3
Sub function
Teaching function
This function stores the address positioned with manual control

into the positioning address having the designated positioning
12.7.4
data No. ( Cd.39 ).

function
This function changes the target position during positioning.

Position and speed can be changed simultaneously.
12.7.5
At each automatic deceleration, this function calculates the

remaining distance for the QD75 to reach the positioning stop
position. When the value is less than the set value, the
"command in-position flag" is set to "1".
When using another auxiliary work before ending the control,
use this function as a trigger for the sub work.
12.7.6
process function
This function adjusts the control acceleration/deceleration.
12.7.7
interrupt function
This function interrupts continuous operation. When this

request is accepted, the operation stops when the execution of
the current positioning data is completed.
6.5.4
This function shortens the virtual start time.
12.7.8

function
Function that turns ON the flag when the constant speed

status or acceleration status switches to the deceleration
status during position control, whose operation pattern is
"Positioning complete", to make the stop timing known.
12.7.9
Other functions Command in-position

function

Function that selects a deceleration curve when a stop cause
for deceleration stop
occurs during deceleration stop processing to speed 0.
function
12.7.10
This function monitors the motor rotation amount with the servo
turned OFF, and reflects it on the current feed value.
12.8.2
Follow up function
3-9
MELSEC-Q
Common functions
The outline of the functions executed as necessary are described below.
(Refer to Section 2 for details on each function.)
Common functions
Details
Reference
section
Parameter initialization function
This function returns the "parameters" stored in the QD75

buffer memory and flash ROM to the default values.
The following two methods can be used.
1) Method using PLC program
2) Method using GX Configurator-QP
13.2
Execution data backup function
This functions stores the "setting data", currently being

executed, into the flash ROM.
1) Method using PLC program
2) Method using GX Configurator-QP
13.3
This function switches I/O signal logic according to externally

connected devices.
This function enables the use of the system that does not use b
(N.C.)-contact signals, such as Upper/lower limit signal, by
setting parameters to positive logic.
13.4
This function monitors the external I/O signal monitor

information in the module's detailed information which can be
displayed on the system monitor of GX Developer 1.
13.5
1: Usable on GX Developer (SW6D5C-GPPW-E or later).
3 - 10
MELSEC-Q
MEMO
3 - 11
MELSEC-Q
3.2.4 Combination of QD75 main functions and sub functions

With positioning control using the QD75, the main functions and sub functions can be
combined and used as necessary. A list of the main function and sub function
combinations is given below.
OPR control
OP shift function
Combination with operation

pattern. 1
Main functions
Functions characteristic
to machine OPR
OPR retry function
Sub functions
Machine OPR control

Fast OPR control
Position control
1-axis fixed-feed
control
(Continuous path control

cannot be set)
2-, 3-, or 4-axis fixedfeed control

(interpolation)

cannot be set)
2-axis circular
Major positioning
control
Speed control (1- to 4-axis)
(Only independent positioning

control can be set)

cannot be set)
(Only independent positioning

control can be set)

Other control

cannot be set)
NOP instruction
JUMP instruction
LOOP to LEND
Manual control
JOG operation, inching operation

: Always combine, : Combination possible, : Combination limited, : Combination not possible

1 The operation pattern is one of the "positioning data" setting items.
2 The near pass function is featured as standard and is valid only for setting continuous path control for position control.
3 Invalid during creep speed.
4 Invalid during continuous path control.
5 Inching operation does not perform acceleration/deceleration processing.
6 Valid for the reference axis only.
7 Valid for only the case where a deceleration start is made during position control.
8 Disabled for a start of positioning start No. 9003.
3 - 12
3 - 13
3
4
6
REMARK
The "common functions" are functions executed as necessary. (These are not combined
"High-level positioning control" is a control used in combination with the "major positioning
with the control.)
control". For combinations with the sub functions, refer to the combinations of the "major
positioning control" and sub functions.
Stop command
processing for
deceleration stop function

function
process function
Command in-position
function
Functions that change

control details

function
Teaching function
Skip function
Step function
Acceleration/ deceleration
Override function
Functions that limit

control

function

function
Torque limit function
Functions that
compensate
control
Near pass function
function
MELSEC-Q
Other functions
MELSEC-Q
3.3 Specifications of input/output signals with PLC CPU

3.3.1 List of input/output signals with PLC CPU
The QD75 uses 32 input points and 32 output points for exchanging data with the PLC
CPU.
The input/output signals when the QD75 is mounted in slot No. 0 of the main base unit
are shown below.
Device X refers to the signals input from the QD75 to the PLC CPU, and device Y
refers to the signals output from the PLC CPU to the QD75.
Signal direction: QD75 PLC CPU
Device No.
Signal name
X0
QD75 READY
X1
Synchronization flag
X2
Use prohibited
X3
X4
Axis 1
X5
Axis 2
M code ON
X6
Axis 3
X7
Axis 4
X8
Axis 1
X9
Axis 2
Error detection
XA
Axis 3
XB
Axis 4
XC
Axis 1
XD
Axis 2
BUSY
XE
Axis 3
XF
Axis 4
X10
Axis 1
X11
Axis 2
Start complete
X12
Axis 3
X13
Axis 4
X14
Axis 1
X15
Axis 2
X16
Axis 3
X17
Axis 4
X18
X19
X1A
X1B
Use prohibited
X1C
X1D
X1E
X1F
Signal direction: PLC CPU QD75

Device No.
Signal name
Y0
PLC READY
Y1
All axis servo ON
Y2
Use prohibited
Y3
Y4
Axis 1
Y5
Axis 2
Axis stop
Y6
Axis 3
Y7
Axis 4
Y8
Axis 1
Forward run JOG start
Y9
Axis 1
Reverse run JOG start
YA
Axis 2
YB
Axis 2
YC
Axis 3
YD
Axis 3
YE
Axis 4
YF
Axis 4
Y10
Axis 1
Y11
Axis 2
Positioning start
Y12
Axis 3
Y13
Axis 4
Y14
Axis 1
Y15
Axis 2
Execution prohibition flag
Y16
Axis 3
Y17
Axis 4
Y18
Y19
Y1A
Y1B
Use prohibited
Y1C
Y1D
Y1E
Y1F
Important
[Y2 to Y3], [Y18 to Y1F], [X2, X3], and [X18 to X1F] are used by the system, and cannot be
used by the user.
If these devices are used, the operation of the QD75 will not be guaranteed.
3 - 14
3.3.2 Details of input signals (QD75
MELSEC-Q
PLC CPU)
The ON/OFF timing and conditions of the input signals are shown below.
Device
Signal name
Details
No.
X0 QD75 READY
ON: READY
When the PLC READY signal [Y0] turns from OFF to ON, the parameter setting
OFF: Not READY/ range is checked. If no error is found, this signal turns ON.
Watch dog When the PLC READY signal [Y0] turns OFF, this signal turns OFF.
timer error When watch dog timer error occurs, this signal turns OFF.
This signal is used for interlock in a PLC program, etc.
ON
PLC READY signal [Y0]
OFF
ON
QD75 READY signal [X0] OFF
X1
Synchronization
flag
OFF: Module
access
disabled
ON: Module
access
enabled
M code ON OFF: M code is
not set
ON: M code is
set
X4
X5
X6
X7
Axis 1
Axis 2
Axis 3
Axis 4
After the PLC is turned ON or the CPU module is reset, this signal turns ON if the
access from the CPU module to the QD75 is possible.
When "Asynchronous" is selected in the module synchronization setting of the CPU
module, this signal can be used as interlock for the access from a PLC program to
the QD75.
In the WITH mode, this signal turns ON when the positioning data operation is
started. In the AFTER mode, this signal turns ON when the positioning data
operation is completed.
This signal turns OFF with the " Cd.7 M code OFF request".
When M code is not designated (when" Da.10 M code" is "0"), this signal will remain
X8
X9
XA
XB
XC
XD
XE
XF
Axis 1 Error
Axis 2 detection
Axis 3
Axis 4
Axis 1 BUSY 1
Axis 2
Axis 3
Axis 4
OFF: No error
ON: Error
occurrence
OFF: Not BUSY
ON: BUSY
OFF.
With using continuous path control for the positioning operation, the positioning will
continue even when this signal does not turn OFF. However, a warning will occur.
(Warning code: 503)
When the PLC READY signal [Y0] turns OFF, the M code ON signal will also turn
OFF.
If operation is started while the M code is ON, an error will occur.
This signal turns ON when an error listed in Section 15.1 occurs, and turns OFF
when the error is reset on " Cd.5 Axis error rest".
This signal turns ON at the start of positioning, OPR or JOG operation. It turns OFF
when the " Da.9 Dwell time" has passed after positioning stops. (This signal
remains ON during positioning.) This signal turns OFF when the positioning is
stopped with step operation.
During manual pulse generator operation, this signal turns ON while the " Cd.21
Manual pulse generator enable flag" is ON.
This signal turns OFF at error completion or positioning stop.
X10
X11
X12
X13
Axis 1 Start
Axis 2 complete
Axis 3
Axis 4
OFF: Start
incomplete
ON: Start
complete
This signal turns ON when the positioning start signal turns ON and the QD75 starts
the positioning process.
(The start complete signal also turns ON during OPR control.)
ON
Positioning start signal [Y10]
OFF
Start complete signal [X10]
OFF
ON
X14
X15
X16
X17
Axis 1 Positioning
Axis 2 complete
Axis 3 2
Axis 4
OFF: Positioning
incomplete
ON: Positioning
complete
This signal turns ON for the time set in " Pr.40 Positioning complete signal output
time" from the instant when the positioning control for each positioning data No. is
completed.
(It does not turn ON when " Pr.40 Positioning complete signal output time" is "0".)
If positioning (including OPR), JOG/Inching operation, or manual pulse generator
operation is started while this signal is ON, the signal will turn OFF.
This signal will not turn ON when speed control or positioning is canceled midway.
3 - 15
MELSEC-Q
Important
1: The BUSY signal turns ON even when position control of movement amount 0 is
executed. However, since the ON time is short, the ON status may not to be detected in the
PLC program.
2: "Positioning complete" of the QD75 refers to the point when the pulse output from QD75 is
completed.
Thus, even if the QD75's positioning complete signal turns ON, the system may continue
operation.
3 - 16
3.3.3 Detail of output signals (PLC CPU
MELSEC-Q
QD75)
The ON/OFF timing and conditions of the output signals are shown below.
Device No.
Y0
PLC READY
Signal name
OFF:
PLC READY OFF
ON:
PLC READY ON
Details
(a) This signal notifies the QD75 that the PLC CPU is normal.
It is turned ON/OFF with the PLC program.
The PLC READY signal is turned ON during positioning
control, OPR control, JOG operation, inching operation, and
manual pulse generator operation, unless the system is in the
peripheral device test mode.
(b) When the data (parameter etc.) are changed, the PLC READY
signal is turned OFF depending on the parameter (Refer to
Chapter 7.).
(c) The following processes are carried out when the PLC READY
signal turns from OFF to ON.
The parameter setting range is checked.
The QD75 READY signal [X0] turns ON.
(d) The following processes are carried out when the PLC READY
signal turns from ON to OFF.
In these cases, the OFF time should be set to 100ms or more.
The QD75 READY signal [X0] turns OFF.
The operating axis stops.
The M code ON signal [X4 to X7] for each axis turns OFF, and
"0" is stored in " Md.25 Valid M code".
Y1
All axis servo ON
Y4
Y5
Y6
Y7
Axis 1 Axis stop

Axis 2
Axis 3
Axis 4
OFF:
Servo OFF
ON:
Servo ON
OFF:
Axis stop not
requested
ON:
Axis stop requested
(e) When parameters or positioning data (No. 1 to 600) are written

from the peripheral device or PLC CPU to the flash ROM, the
PLC READY signal will turn OFF.
The servo for all the servo amplifiers connected to the QD75 is
turned ON or OFF.
When the axis stop signal turns ON, the OPR control, positioning
control, JOG operation, inching operation and manual pulse
generator operation will stop.
By turning the axis stop signal ON during positioning operation, the
positioning operation will be "stopped".
Whether to decelerate or suddenly stop can be selected with
" Pr.39 Stop group 3 sudden stop selection".
Y8
Y9
YA
YB
YC
YD
YE
YF
Y10
Y11
Y12
Y13
Axis 1
Axis 1
Axis 2
Axis 2
Axis 3
Axis 3
Axis 4
Axis 4
Axis 1
Axis 2
Axis 3
Axis 4
Y14
Y15
Y16
Y17
Axis 1
Axis 2
Axis 3
Axis 4
Forward run JOG start OFF:

JOG not started
Forward run JOG start ON:
JOG started
Positioning start
OFF:
Positioning start not
requested
ON:
Positioning start
requested
Execution prohibition OFF:
flag
Not during execution
prohibition
ON:
During execution
prohibition
During interpolation control of the positioning operation, if the axis

stop signal of any axis turns ON, all axes in the interpolation
control will decelerate and stop.
When the JOG start signal is ON, JOG operation will be carried
out at the " Cd.17 JOG speed". When the JOG start signal turns
OFF, the operation will decelerate and stop.
When inching movement amount is set, the designated movement
amount is output for one control cycle and then the operation
stops.
OPR operation or positioning operation is started.
The positioning start signal is valid at the rising edge, and the
operation is started.
When the positioning start signal turns ON during BUSY, the
operation starting warning will occur (warning code: 100).
If the execution prohibition flag is ON when the positioning start
signal turns ON, positioning control does not start until the
execution prohibition flag turns OFF.
Used with the "Pre-reading start function". (Refer to Section
12.7.8)
3 - 17
MELSEC-Q
3.4 Specifications of interfaces with external devices

3.4.1 Electrical specifications of input signals
Input specifications
Signal name
Rated input
Working
voltage/current voltage range
Stop signal (STOP)

Upper limit signal
(FLS)
Lower limit signal
(RLS)
24VDC/5mA
19.2 to
26.4VDC
5VDC/5mA
4.5 to 6.1VDC
ON
voltage/current
OFF
voltage/current
Input
resistance
Response
time
17.5VDC or more/ 7VDC or less/

Approx. 6.8k 4ms or less
3.5mA or more
1.0mA or less
2.5VDC or more/
1mA or more
1VDC or less/
0.1mA or less
Pulse width
4ms or more
Manual pulse
generator A phase
(PULSE
GENERATOR A)
Manual pulse
generator B phase
(PULSE
GENERATOR B)
2ms
or more
2ms or more
(Duty ratio: 50%)

2
Phase difference
A phase
When the A phase leads the B phase, the

positioning address (current value) increases.
B phase
1ms or more

(DOG)
External command
signal (CHG)
24VDC/5mA
19.2 to
26.4VDC
17.5VDC or more/ 7VDC or less/

3.5mA or more
1.0mA or less
3 - 18
MELSEC-Q
3.4.2 Signal layout for external device connection connector

The specifications of the connector section, which is the input/output interface for the
QD75 and external device, are shown below.
The signal layout for the QD75 external device connection connector is shown.
QD75M1
RUN
QD75M2
AX1
ERR
RUN
QD75M4
AX1
AX2
ERR
RUN
ERR
AX1
AX2
AX3
AX4
QD75M4
AX1
AX2
AX1
QD75M1
Pin layout
B20
B19
B18
B17
B16
B15
B14
B13
B12
B11
B10
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
A20
A19
A18
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
Front view of
the module
Axis 4(AX4)
Pin No. Signal name
2B20
No connect
2B19
No connect
2B18
No connect
2B17
No connect
2B16
No connect
2B15
No connect
2B14
No connect
2B13
No connect
2B12
No connect
2B11
No connect
2B10
No connect
2B9
No connect
2B8
No connect
2B7
COM
2B6
COM
2B5
CHG
2B4
STOP
2B3
DOG
2B2
RLS
2B1
FLS
AX3
AX4
AX1
AX2
QD75M2
Axis 3(AX3)
Pin No. Signal name
2A20
No connect
2A19
No connect
2A18
No connect
2A17
No connect
2A16
No connect
2A15
No connect
2A14
No connect
2A13
No connect
2A12
No connect
2A11
No connect
2A10
No connect
2A9
No connect
2A8
No connect
2A7
COM
2A6
COM
2A5
CHG
2A4
STOP
2A3
DOG
2A2
RLS
2A1
FLS
Axis 2(AX2)
Pin No. Signal name
1B20
PULSER B
1B19
PULSER A
1B18
No connect
1B17
No connect
1B16
No connect
1B15
No connect
1B14
No connect
1B13
No connect
1B12
No connect
1B11
No connect
1B10
No connect
1B9
No connect
1B8
No connect
1B7
COM
1B6
COM
1B5
CHG
1B4
STOP
1B3
DOG
1B2
RLS
1B1
FLS
Axis 1(AX1)
Pin No. Signal name
1A20
PULSER B+
1A19
PULSER A+
1A18
No connect
1A17
No connect
1A16
No connect
1A15
No connect
1A14
No connect
1A13
No connect
1A12
No connect
1A11
No connect
1A10
No connect
1A9
No connect
1A8
No connect
1A7
COM
1A6
COM
1A5
CHG
1A4
STOP
1A3
DOG
1A2
RLS
1A1
FLS
1: Pin No. "1

" indicates the pin No. for the right connector. Pin No. "2
" indicates the pin No. for the left connector.
2: When a 1-axis module is used, pin Nos. 1B1 to 1B18 are "No connect".
3: For 1-axis module and 2-axis module do not have AX3 and AX4 connector of the left side.
3 - 19
MELSEC-Q
3.4.3 List of input signal details

The details of each QD75 external device connection connector are shown below:
Pin No.
Signal name
AX1 AX2 AX3 AX4

Manual pulse generator A
phase
Manual pulse generator B
phase
1A19
1A20
Signal details
(Negative logic is selected by external input signal logic selection)
Input the pulse signal from the manual pulse generator A phase and B
phase.
If the A phase leads the B phase, the positioning address will increase at the
rising and falling edges of each phase.
If the B phase leads the A phase, the positioning address will decrease at the
rising and falling edges of each phase.
[When increased]
Manual pulse generator A

common
Manual pulse generator B
common
Upper limit signal
1B19
1B20
1A1
1B1
[When decreased]
A phase
A phase
B phase
B phase
Positioning
address +1+1+1+1+1+1+1+1
Positioning
-1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1
address
2A1
This signal is input from the limit switch installed at the upper limit position of
the stroke.
2B1 Positioning will stop when this signal turns OFF.
When OPR retry function is valid, this will be the upper limit for finding the
near-point dog signal.
Lower limit signal
1A2
1B2
2A2
This signal is input from the limit switch installed at the lower limit position of
the stroke.
2B2 Positioning will stop when this signal turns OFF.
When OPR retry function is valid, this will be the lower limit for finding the
near-point dog signal.
1A3
1B3
2A3
This signal is used for detecting the near-point dog during OPR.
2B3 The near-point dog OFF
ON is detected at the rising edge.
The near-point dog ON
OFF is detected at the falling edge.
2A4
Input this signal to stop positioning.

When this signal turns ON, the QD75 will stop the positioning being
2B4 executed.
After that, even if this signal is turned from ON to OFF, the system will not
start.
Stop signal

switching signal
1A4
1A5
1B4
1B5
2A5
Input a control switching signal during speed-position or position-speed

switching control.
Use this signal as the input signal of positioning start, speed change request,
2B5
and skip request from an external source.
Set the function to use this signal in " Pr.42 External command function
selection".
Common
1A6
1A7
1B6
1B7
2A6
2A7
2B6 Common for upper/lower limit, near-point dog, stop, and external command
2B7 signal/switching signals.
3 - 20
MELSEC-Q
3.4.4 Interface internal circuit

The outline diagrams of the internal circuits for the QD75M1 external device
connection interface are shown below.
(1) Input
External wiring
Pin No.
When upper-limit
switch is not used
When lower-limit
switch is not used
Internal circuit
Upper-limit LS signal
FLS
1A2
Lower-limit LS signal
RLS
1A3
DOG
1A4
Stop signal
STOP
1A5
External command
signal/switching signal
CHG
Common
COM
1A6
A
5 V DC
1A1
24 V DC
5V
Need for wiring
Signal name
1A7
(+)
1A19
PULSER A+
A phase
()
1B19
PULSER A
OV
Manual pulse
generator
(MR-HDP01)
(+)
1A20
PULSER B+
B phase
()
1B20
PULSER B
1A11
1A12
1A8
1A9
1A10
1: The symbols in Need for wiring column indicate the following meanings:
: Wiring is necessary for positioning.
: Wiring is necessary depending on the situation.
2: Either polarity can be connected to the common (COM).
3 - 21
MELSEC-Q
3.5 External circuit design

The outline diagrams of the internal circuits for the QD75M1 external device
connection interface are shown below.
Alarm
Ra1
Operation ready
Forced stop
OFF
ON
MC
MC
SK
MC
NFB
Servo amplifer
Servomotor
L2 MR-J2S-B
L3
L1 MR-J2-B/
3-phase
200VAC to
230VAC
CP3
SM
Ra2
Ground
Electromagnetic
breake
3
L11
L21
COM
Q61P-A2 QnCPU QD75M QX41 QY41P
MBR
Alarm
CP1
EM1
Ra1
COM
CP2
Forced stop
Ra2
SG
COM
24VDC
24VDC
24VDC
Powerr
supply 24GDC
Forced stop
1: Configure up the power supply circuit which switch off the electromagnetic contactor (MC) after detection alarm
occurrence on the PLC CPU.
2: The dynamic brake is operated, and servomotor occurs to the free run when EM1 (forced stop) of servo amplifier turn
OFF. At the time, the display shows the servo forced stop warning (E6).
During ordinary operation, do not used forced stop signal to alternate stop and run.
The service life of the servo amplifier may be shortened.
3: Power supply for the electromagnetic brake is possible to use a full wave rectified power supply.
3 - 22
Chapter 4 Installation, Wiring and Maintenance

of the Product
4
The installation, wiring and maintenance of the QD75 are explained in this chapter.
Important information such as precautions to prevent malfunctioning of the QD75,
accidents and injuries as well as the proper work methods are described.
Read this chapter thoroughly before starting installation, wiring or maintenance,
and always following the precautions.
4.1 Outline of installation, wiring and maintenance ...........................................................4- 2

4.1.1 Installation, wiring and maintenance procedures ..........................................4- 2
4.1.2 Names of each part ........................................................................................4- 3
4.1.3 Handling precautions ......................................................................................4- 5
4.2 Installation.....................................................................................................................4- 7
4.2.1 Precautions for installation .............................................................................4- 7
4.3 Wiring .........................................................................................................................4- 9
4.3.1 Precautions for wiring .....................................................................................4- 9
4.4 Confirming the installation and wiring .........................................................................4- 14
4.4.1 Items to confirm when installation and wiring are completed.......................4- 14
4.5 Maintenance ................................................................................................................4- 15
4.5.1 Precautions for maintenance.........................................................................4- 15
4.5.2 Disposal instructions......................................................................................4- 15
4-1
4 INSTALLATION, WIRING AND MAINTENANCE OF THE PRODUCT
MELSEC-Q
4.1 Outline of installation, wiring and maintenance

4.1.1 Installation, wiring and maintenance procedures
The outline and procedures for QD75 installation, wiring and maintenance are shown
below.
STEP 1
Preparation
Refer to
Section 4.1
Installing the
module
Refer to
Section 4.2
STEP 2
STEP 3
Refer to
Section 4.3
Wiring the
module
STEP 4
Refer to
Section 4.3
Understand the "Handling precautions" and

"Names of each part" of the module (QD75)
Install the module (QD75) on the base unit.
Wire the external device connection

connector pins, and assemble the connector.
Connect the cable to the module (QD75)
The cables used to connect the QD75 with the

drive unit, with the mechanical system input
(each input/output signal), and with the manual
pulse generator are manufactured by soldering
each signal wire onto the "external device
connection connector" sold separately.(Refer to
"Applicable connector for external wiring" in
Section 3.1 "Performance specifications" for
the optional connector.)
Wire and connect the manufactured cable to QD75
after reading the precautions for wiring.
Confirming the
installation and
wiring
STEP 5
Confirm the connection
Check the connection using GX Configurator-QP.
Refer to
Section 4.4
Operation of the positioning system.
STEP 6
Servicing the
module
Refer to
Section 4.5
STEP 7
Refer to
Section 4.5
Carry out maintenance
Dispose of the QD75
4-2
Carry out maintenance as necessary.
When the QD75 is no longer necessary,

dispose of it with the specified methods.
MELSEC-Q
4.1.2 Names of each part

(1) The part names of the QD75 are shown below:
For QD75M4
(1) RUN indicator LED, ERR indicator LED
QD75M4
RUN
ERR
AX1
AX2
AX3
AX4
(2) Axis display LED
QD75M4
AX3
AX4
AX1
AX2
(3) External device connector

(40-pin connector)
AX1: Axis 1
AX2: Axis 2
AX3: Axis 3
AX4: Axis 4
Refer to Section 3.4.2 "Signal layout for external
device connection connector" for details.
(4) SSCNET cable connector
No.
Name
Details
(1)
RUN indicator LED, ERR indicator LED
(2)
Axis display LED (AX1 to AX4)
(3)
External device connector
A connector connected with a drive unit, mechanical system

input, or manual pulse generator.
(4)
SSCNET cable connector
A connector connected with servo amplifier.
Refer to the next page.
4-3
MELSEC-Q
(2) The LED display indicates the following operation statuses of the QD75 and axes.
QD75M 4
RUN
AX1
AX2
AX3
AX4
ERR
QD75M4
Display
RUN
ERR
RUN
ERR
RUN
ERR
RUN
ERR
Attention point
Description
AX1
AX2
RUN is OFF.
AX3
AX4
Display
Hardware failure,
watch dog timer
error
AX1
AX2 RUN illuminates.
AX3 ERR is OFF.
AX4
AX1
AX2
AX3 ERR illuminates.
AX4
AX1
AX2 AX1 to AX4 are
AX3 OFF.
AX4
RUN
ERR
RUN
The module
operates
normally.
ERR
RUN
System error
ERR
Attention point
Description
AX1
AX2
AX3
AX4
The
AX1 (or other
corresponding
axis) illuminates. axis is in
operation.
AX1
AX2
AX3
AX4
ERR flashes.
AX1 (or other
axis) flashes.
An error occurs
on the
corresponding
axis.
AX1
AX2
AX3
AX4
All LEDs
illuminate.
Hardware failure
The axes are

stopped or on
standby.
The symbols in the Display column indicate the following
statuses:
: Turns OFF. : Illuminates. : Flashes.
(3)
The interface for each QD75 is shown below:

QD75M1
QD75M1
RUN
QD75M2
QD75M2
AX1
ERR
RUN
QD75M4
QD75M4
AX1
AX2
ERR
RUN
ERR
AX1
AX2
AX3
AX4
QD75M4
AX1
AX2
AX1
QD75M1
QD75M2
4-4
AX3
AX4
AX1
AX2
MELSEC-Q
4.1.3 Handling precautions

Handle the QD75 and cable while observing the following precautions.
[1] Handling precautions

!
CAUTION
Use the PLC within the general specifications environment given in this manual.
Do not directly touch the conductive section and electronic parts of the module.
Failure to observe this could lead to module malfunctioning or trouble.
Make sure that foreign matter, such as cutting chips or wire scraps, do not enter the module.
Failure to observe this could lead to fires, trouble or malfunctioning.
Completely turn off all lines of power supply externally before loading or unloading the module. Not
doing so could result in electric shock or damage to the product.
Because the connector has its orientation, check it before attaching or detaching the connector
straight from the front.
Unless it is properly installed, a poor contact may occur, resulting in erroneous input and output.
Do not directly touch the module's conductive parts and electronic components of the module.
Touching the conductive parts and electronic components of the module could cause an
operation failure or give damage to the module.
4-5
MELSEC-Q
[2] Other precautions

(1) Main body
The main body case is made of plastic. Take care not to drop or apply
strong impacts onto the case.
Do not remove the QD75 PCB from the case. Failure to observe this
could lead to faults.
(2) Cable
Do not press on the cable with a sharp object.

Do not twist the cable with force.
Do not forcibly pull on the cable.
Do not step on the cable.
Do not place objects on the cable.
Do not damage the cable sheath.
(3) Installation environment

Do not install the module in the following type of environment.
Where the ambient temperature exceeds the 0 to 55C range.

Where the ambient humidity exceeds the 5 to 95%RH range.
Where there is sudden temperature changes, or where dew condenses.
Where there is corrosive gas or flammable gas.
Where there are high levels of dust, conductive powder, such as iron
chips, oil mist, salt or organic solvents.
Where the module will be subject to direct sunlight.
Where there are strong electric fields or magnetic fields.
Where vibration or impact could be directly applied onto the main body.
4-6
MELSEC-Q
4.2 Installation
4.2.1 Precautions for installation
The precautions for installing the QD75 are given below. Refer to this section as well
as "4.1.3 Handling precautions" when carrying out the work.
[1] Precautions for SSCNET cable wiring

If the duct is below the bottom of the module, leave sufficient clearance to
eliminate effects on the SSCNET cable, limit the space height to 70 mm (2.76
inch) MIN.
70(2.76)
Unit: mm(inch)
4-7
MELSEC-Q
[2] Precautions for installation

!
DANGER
screws.
CAUTION

module.
Use the PLC within the general specifications environment given in CPU module User's
manual.
Don't directly touch the conductive area or electronic components of the module.
Failure to observe this could lead to trouble or malfunctioning.
Hold down the module mounting lever at the bottom of the module and securely insert the
module fixing projection into the fixing holes of the base module. Improper mounting of the
module may lead to malfunctioning, faults, or dropping.
When using the module in the environment subject to much vibration, secure the module with a
screw.
Tighten the screw within the range of the specified tightening torque.
Insufficient tightening may lead to dropping, short-circuit, or malfunctioning.
Excessive tightening may damage the screw or module, leading to dropping, short-circuit, or
malfunctioning.
4-8
MELSEC-Q
4.3 Wiring
The precautions for wiring the QD75 are given below. Refer to this section as well as
"4.1.3 Handling precautions" when carrying out the work.
4.3.1 Precautions for wiring
DANGER
Switch all phases of the external power supply off when installing or placing wiring.
Not doing so may cause electric shock or damage to the product.
CAUTION
Check the layout of the terminals and then properly route the wires to the module.
Solder connector for external input signal cable and SSCNET cable device properly.
Insufficient soldering may cause malfunction.
Be careful not to let foreign matter such as sawdust or wire chips get inside the module.
These may cause fires, failure or malfunction.
The top surface of the module is covered with protective films to prevent foreign objects such as
cable off cuts from entering the module when wiring.
Do not remove this film until the wiring is complete.
Before operating the system, be sure to remove the film to provide adequate ventilation.
Securely connect the connector for the SSCNET cable to the bottom connector on the module.
When removing the cable or power supply cable from the module, do not pull the cable. When
removing the cable with a connector, hold the connector on the side that is connected to the
module.
Pulling the cable that is still connected to the module may cause malfunction or damage to the
module or cable.
The cable used for connecting the QD75 external input signal cable and SSCNET cable should
not be routed near or bundled with the main circuit cable, power cable and/or other such load
carrying cables other than those for the PLC. These cables should be separated by at least 100
mm (3.94 inch) They can cause electrical interference, surges and inductance that can lead to
mis-operation.
4-9
MELSEC-Q
[1] Precautions for wiring

(1) Use separate cables for connecting to the QD75 and for the power cable
that create surge and inductance.
(2) The shielded cable for connecting QD75 can be secured in place.
If the shielded cable is not secured, unevenness or movement of the
shielded cable or careless pulling on it could result in damage to the QD75
or drive unit or shielded cable or defective cable connections could cause
mis-operation of the unit.
(3) If a duct is being used and cables to connect to QD75 are separated from
the power line duct, use metal piping.
Ground the pipes securely after metal piping.
(4) The cable is to use the twisted pair shielded cable (wire size 0.3 mm 2 ). The
shielded must be grounded on the QD75 side.
[Wiring example of shielded cable]

The following shows a wiring example for noise reduction in the case where the
connector A6CON1 is used.
Connector
(A6CON1)
To external
devices
Shielded
cable
To external device
To external device
To QD75
The length between the connector and the shielded
cables should be the shortest possible.
4 - 10
Use the shortest possible length to

ground the 2mm or more FG wire.
(The shield must be grounded on
the QD75 side.)
[Processing example of shielded cables]

Connections of FG wire and each shielded cable
Remove the covering from all shielded cables and bind
the appeared shield with a conductive tape.
Coat the wire with
insulaing tape.
Solder the shield of any one of the

shielded cables to the FG wire.
Assembling of connector (A6CON1)
Wrap the coated parts

with a heat contractile
tube.
4 - 11
MELSEC-Q
MELSEC-Q
(5) To make this product conform to the EMC directive and low voltage
instruction, be sure to used of a AD75CK type cable clamp (manufactured
by Mitsubishi Electric) for grounding connected to the control box and the
shielded cable/ the SSCNET cable.
Inside control box

QD75
20cm(7.88inch)
to 30cm(11.82inch)
AD75CK
[How to ground shielded cable using AD75CK]
Shielded cable
Shield
Ground terminal
Ground terminal installation screw (M4 8 screw)

Installation screw to control box (M4 screw)
Using the AD75CK, you can tie four cables of about 7mm outside diameter together for
grounding.
4 - 12
MELSEC-Q
[Wiring examples using duct (incorrect example and corrected example)]

Wiring duct
Relay
Relay
Servo
Servo
amplifier
amplifier
Relay
Control panel
QD
PLC
75
The servo amplifiers are placed
Noise source
near the noise source.

(Power system,
etc.)
The connection cable between

the QD75 and servo amplifiers is
too long.
Changed
Wiring duct
Relay
Relay
Relay
Control panel
PLC
QD
75
Noise source
The QD75 and servo amplifiers are

placed closely. The connection
cable between the QD75 and
servo amplifier is separately laid
(Power system,
etc.)
Servo
Servo
amplifier
amplifier
from the power line (in this

example, the cable is outside of
the duct) and is as short as possible.
4 - 13
MELSEC-Q
4.4 Confirming the installation and wiring

4.4.1 Items to confirm when installation and wiring are completed
Check the following points when completed with the QD75 installation and wiring.
Is the module correctly wired? ... "Connection confirmation"

With "connection confirmation", the following three points are confirmed using GX
Configurator-QP's connection confirmation function. (GX Configurator-QP is
required for this "connection confirmation".)
Are the QD75 and servo amplifier correctly connected?

Are the servo amplifier and servomotor correctly connected?
Are the QD75 and external device (input/output signal) correctly connected?
With this "connection confirmation", "whether the direction that the QD75
recognizes as forward run matches the address increment direction in the actual
positioning work", and "whether the QD75 recognizes the external input/output
signals such as the near-point dog signal and stop signal" can be checked.
Refer to GX Configurator-QP Operating Manual for details on "Connection
confirmation".
Note that GX Developer may also be used to "confirm the connection between
the QD75 and external device (I/O signals).
For details, refer to Section 13.5 "External I/O signal monitor function" and GX
Developer Operating Manual (SW6D5C-GPPW-E or later).
Important
If the QD75 is faulty, or when the required signals such as the near-point dog signal and stop signal are
not recognized, unexpected accidents such as "not decelerating at the near-point dog during machine
OPR and colliding with the stopper", or "not being able to stop with the stop signal" may occur.
The "connection confirmation" must be carried out not only when structuring the positioning system, but
also when the system has been changed with module replacement or rewiring, etc.
4 - 14
MELSEC-Q
4.5 Maintenance
4.5.1 Precautions for maintenance
The precautions for servicing the QD75 are given below. Refer to this section as well
as "4.1.3 Handling precautions" when carrying out the work.
DANGER
screws.
CAUTION

module.
4.5.2 Disposal instructions

!
CAUTION
When disposing of the product, handle it as industrial waste.
4 - 15
MEMO
4 - 16
MELSEC-Q
Chapter 5 Data Used for Positioning Control
5
The parameters and data used to carry out positioning control with the QD75 are explained
in this chapter.
With the positioning system using the QD75, the various parameters and data explained
in this chapter are used for control. The parameters and data include parameters set
according to the device configuration, such as the system configuration, and parameters
and data set according to each control. Read this section thoroughly and make settings
according to each control or application.
Refer to Section 2 for details on each control.
5.1 Types of data ................................................................................................................5- 2

5.1.1 Parameters and data required for control ......................................................5- 2
5.1.2 Setting items for positioning parameters........................................................5- 4
5.1.3 Setting items for OPR parameters .................................................................5- 6
5.1.4 Setting items for servo parameters ................................................................5- 7
5.1.5 Setting items for positioning data ...................................................................5- 9
5.1.6 Setting items for block start data ...................................................................5- 12
5.1.7 Setting items for condition data .....................................................................5- 13
5.1.8 Types and roles of monitor data....................................................................5- 14
5.1.9 Types and roles of control data .....................................................................5- 18
5.2 List of parameters........................................................................................................5- 22
5.2.1 Basic parameters 1........................................................................................5- 22
5.2.2 Basic parameters 2........................................................................................5- 26
5.2.3 Detailed parameters 1 ...................................................................................5- 28
5.2.4 Detailed parameters 2 ...................................................................................5- 36
5.2.5 OPR basic parameters ..................................................................................5- 48
5.2.6 OPR detailed parameters ..............................................................................5- 54
5.2.7 Servo basic parameters.................................................................................5- 58
5.2.8 Servo adjustment parameters .......................................................................5- 64
5.2.9 Servo expansion parameters ........................................................................5- 74
5.2.10 Servo expansion parameters 2 .....................................................................5- 78
5.3 List of positioning data.................................................................................................5- 82
5.4 List of block start data .................................................................................................5- 98
5.5 List of condition data...................................................................................................5-104
5.6 List of monitor data .....................................................................................................5-110
5.6.1 System monitor data.....................................................................................5-110
5.6.2 Axis monitor data ..........................................................................................5-120
5.7 List of control data ......................................................................................................5-138
5.7.1 System control data ......................................................................................5-138
5.7.2 Axis control data ...........................................................................................5-140
5-1
5 DATA USED FOR POSITIONING CONTROL
MELSEC-Q
5.1 Types of data

5.1.1 Parameters and data required for control
The parameters and data required to carry out control with the QD75 include the
"setting data", "monitor data" and "control data" shown below.
Setting data
(Data set beforehand according to the machine and application, and stored in the flash ROM.)
Positioning
parameters
Parameters
Basic parameters 1
Pr.1 to Pr.57 )
)
Pr.1 to Pr.42 )
Pr.200 to Pr.201 )
Basic parameters 2
Set according to the machine and applicable

motor when system is started up.
Note)
If the setting of the basic parameters 1 is incorrect, the rotation direction
may be reversed, or no operation may take place.
Detailed parameters 1
Set according to the system configuration when

the system is started up.
Note)
Detailed parameters 2 are data items for using the QD75 functions to the fullest.
Set as required.
Servo
parameters
Servo basic parameters

Servo adjustment parameters
Pr.100 to Pr.161 )
Servo expansion parameters
Set the data that is determined

by the specification of the servo
being used.
Servo expansion parameters 2

OPR
parameters
)
Positioning data
OPR basic parameters

OPR detailed parameters
Pr.43 to Pr.57 )
Set the values required for carrying

out OPR control.
Positioning data
Set the block start data for "major positioning control".
Block start data
Set the data for "high-level positioning control".
Da.1 to Da.10 )
Block start data
Condition data
)
Da.11 to Da.19 )
Da.11 to Da.14 )
Set the condition data for "high-level positioning control".
Da.15 to Da.19 )
Set the condition judgment values for the condition

data used in "high-level positioning control".
Memo data
The data is set with the PLC program or peripheral device.

In this chapter, the method using the peripheral device will be explained.
(Refer to "Point" on the next page.)
The basic parameters 1, detailed parameters 1, and OPR parameters become valid
when the PLC READY signal [Y0] turns from OFF to ON.
The basic parameters 2 and detailed parameters 2 become valid immediately when
they are written to the buffer memory, regardless of the state of the PLC READY
signal [Y0].
Even when the PLC READY signal [Y0] is ON, the values or contents of the
following can be changed: basic parameters 2, detailed parameters 2, positioning
data, and block start data.
5-2
MELSEC-Q
The only valid data assigned to these parameters are the data read at the moment
when a positioning or JOG operation is started. Once the operation has started, any
modification to the data is ignored.
Exceptionally, however, modifications to the following are valid even when they are
made during a positioning operation: acceleration time 0 to 3, deceleration time 0 to
3, and external start command.
Acceleration time 0 to 3 and deceleration time 0 to 3:
Positioning data are pre-read and pre-analyzed. Modifications to the
data four or more steps after the current step are valid.
External command function selection: The value at the time of detection is valid.
Monitor data
(Data that indicates the control state. Stored in the buffer memory, and monitors as necessary.)
: Md.1 to Md.48
System monitor data
Monitors the QD75 specifications and the operation history.
Md.1 to Md.19 )
Monitors the data related to the operating axis, such as the current position
and speed.
Axis monitor data
Md.20 to Md.48 , Md.101 to Md.112 )
The data is monitored with the PLC program or peripheral device. In this chapter,
the method using the peripheral device will be explained.
(Data for user to control positioning system.) :
System control data
Control data
Cd.1 to Cd.42 , Cd.100 to Cd.104 )
Writes/initializes the "setting data" in the module.
Cd.1 to Cd.2 , Cd.41 , Cd.42 )
Makes settings related to the operation, and controls the speed change during
operation, and stops/restarts the operation.
Axis control data
Cd.3 to Cd.40 , Cd.100 to Cd.104 )
Control using the control data is carried out with the PLC program.
" Cd.40 " Deceleration start flag valid" is valid for only the value at the time
when the PLC READY signal [Y0] turns from OFF to ON.
POINT
(1) The "setting data" is created for each axis.
(2) The "setting data" parameters have determined default values, and are set to
the default values before shipment from the factory. (Parameters related to
axes that are not used are left at the default value.)
(3) The "setting data" can be initialized with GX Configurator-QP or the PLC
program.
(4) It is recommended to set the "setting data" with GX Configurator-QP. When
executed with the PLC program, many PLC programs and devices must be
used. This will not only complicate the program, but will also increase the scan
time.
5-3
MELSEC-Q
5.1.2 Setting items for positioning parameters

The table below lists items set to the positioning parameters. Setting of positioning
parameters is similarly done for individual axes for all controls achieved by the QD75.
For details of controls, refer to Section 2. For details of setting items, refer to "5.2 List
of parameters".
Unit setting
Pr.2
No. of pulses per rotation (AP)

(Unit: PLS)
Pr.3
Movement amount per rotation (AL)
Pr.4
Unit magnification (AM)
Pr.7
Bias speed at start
Pr.8
Speed limit value
Pr.9
Acceleration time 0
Pr.10
Deceleration time 0
Pr.11
Back compensation amount
Pr.12
Software stroke limit upper limit value
Pr.13
Software stroke limit lower limit value
Pr.14
Software stroke limit selection
Pr.15
Software stroke limit valid/invalid

selection
Pr.16
Command in-position width
Pr.17
Torque limit setting value
Pr.18
M code ON signal output timing
Pr.19
Speed switching mode
Pr.20
Interpolation speed designation method
Pr.21
Current feed value during speed control
Pr.22
Input signal logic selection
Pr.24
Manual pulse generator input selection
Basic parameters 1
Related sub function
Pr.1
12.3.2
12.4.1
12.7.7
Pr.200 Speed-position function selection

:
:
:
:
:
JOG operation
Inching operation
JUMP instruction, NOP instruction,

LOOP to LEND
Speed-position or position-speed
control
1 to 4 axis speed control
1-axis fixed-feed control

2/3/4-axis fixed-feed control

2/3/4-axis linear interpolation control
Manual control
Other control
Basic
parameters 2
Positioning parameter

Position control
OPR control
Control
12.3.1
12.4.3
12.7.6
12.4.2
12.7.3
Always set
Set as required (Read "" when not required.)
Setting not possible
Setting restricted
Setting not required. (This is an irrelevant item, so the set value will be ignored. If the value is the default value or within the setting range, there is no
problem.)
5-4
Manual control
Pr.28
Deceleration time 1
Pr.29
Deceleration time 2
Pr.30
Deceleration time 3
Pr.31
JOG speed limit value
Pr.32
Pr.33
Pr.34
JOG operation acceleration time

selection
JOG operation deceleration time
selection
Acceleration/deceleration process
selection
Related sub function
Acceleration time 3
JOG operation
Inching operation
JUMP instruction, NOP instruction,

LOOP to LEND
Pr.27
Speed-position or position-speed
control
Acceleration time 2

Acceleration time 1
Pr.26
OPR control
Other control
Pr.25
Positioning parameter

Position control

2/3/4-axis linear interpolation control
Control
MELSEC-Q
12.7.7
12.4.1
12.7.7
Pr.35
S-pattern proportion
Pr.36
Sudden stop deceleration time
Pr.37
Stop group 1 sudden stop selection
Pr.38
Pr.39
Pr.40
Positioning complete signal output time
Pr.41
Allowable circular interpolation error

width
Pr.42
Pr.201
External command function selection
Restart allowable range when servo OFF

to ON
12.5.1
12.7.2
5.2.4
: Always set
: Set as required ("" when not set)
: Setting not required (This is an irrelevant item, so the setting value will be ignored. If the value is the default value or within the setting range, there is no
problem.)
Checking the positioning parameters

Pr.1 to Pr.42
are checked with the following timing.
(1) When the "PLC READY signal [Y0]" output from the PLC CPU to the QD75
changes from OFF to ON
(2) When the test operation button is turned ON in the test mode using GX
Configurator-QP
(3) When an error check is carried out with GX Configurator-QP
REMARK
"High-level positioning control" is carried out in combination with the "major

positioning control".
Refer to the "major positioning control" parameter settings for details on the
parameters required for "high-level positioning control".
5-5
MELSEC-Q
5.1.3 Setting items for OPR parameters

When carrying out "OPR control", the "OPR parameters" must be set. The setting
items for the "OPR parameters" are shown below.
The "OPR parameters" are set commonly for each axis.
Refer to Chapter 8 "OPR control" for details on the "OPR control", and to Section 5.2
"List of parameters" for details on each setting item.
OPR control
Fast
OPR control
Machine OPR control
Data set method
Count method 2)
Count method 1)
Near-point dog
method
OPR parameters
Pr.43
OPR method
Pr.44
OPR direction
Pr.45
OP address
Pr.46
OPR speed
Pr.47
Creep speed
Pr.48
OPR retry
Pr.49
OPR dwell time
Pr.50
Setting for the movement amount after nearpoint dog ON
Pr.51
OPR acceleration time selection
Pr.52
OPR deceleration time selection
Pr.53
OP shift amount
Pr.54
OPR torque limit value
Pr.56
Speed designation during OP shift
Pr.57
Dwell time during OPR retry
: Always set
: Preset parameters are used for machine OPR control.
: Setting not required (This is an irrelevant item, so the setting value will be ignored. If the value is the default
value or within the setting range, there is no problem.)
R : Set when using the "12.2.1 OPR retry function". ("" when not set.)
S : Set when using the "12.2.2 OP shift function". ("" when not set.)
Checking the OPR parameters.

Pr.43 to Pr.57
are checked with the following timing.
(1) When the "PLC READY signal [Y0]" output from the PLC CPU to the QD75
changes from OFF to ON
(2) When the test operation button is turned ON in the test mode using GX
Configurator-QP
5-6
MELSEC-Q
5.1.4 Setting items for servo parameters

The servo parameters are used to control the servomotor and the data that is
determined by the specification of the servo being used.
The table below lists items set to the servo parameters.
Servo amplifier
MR-H-BN MR-H-BN4
MR-J2-B
MR-J2S-B
MR-J2-Jr
MR-J2M-B
Remark
Servo parameters
Pr.100 Servo series
Pr.101 Amplifier setting
Pr.102 Regenerative brake resistor

Pr.103 Motor type
Pr.104 Motor capacity
Pr.105 Servo motor speed
Pr.106 Feed back pulse
Pr.107 Rotation direction selection
Pr.108 Auto tuning
Pr.109 Servo response
Pr.112 Load inertia ratio
Pr.113 Position loop gain 1
Pr.114 Speed loop gain 1
Refer to the
section
5.2.7

Pr.117 Speed integral compensation
Pr.118
Machine resonance suppression

filter
Pr.119 Feed forward gain

Pr.120 In-position range
Pr.121
Electromagnetic brake sequence

output
Pr.122 Analog monitor output
Pr.123 Optional function 1

Pr.125
:
:
:
:
Adaptive vibration suppression

control/ low pass filter
Always set
Set as required ("" when not set)
Setting restricted
Setting not required (This is an irrelevant item, so the setting value will be ignored. If the value is the default value or within the setting range, there is no
problem.)
5-7
MELSEC-Q
Servo amplifier
MR-H-BN MR-H-BN4
MR-J2-B
MR-J2S-B
MR-J2-Jr
MR-J2M-B
Remark
Servo parameters
Pr.127 Monitor output 1 offset
Pr.129 Pre-alarm data selection
Pr.130 Zero speed

Pr.131 Error excessive alarm level
Slight vibration suppression control

selection 1
Slight vibration suppression control

Pr.144
selection 2
Pr.145 Induction voltage compensation
Pr.149 Gain changing selection
Pr.150 Gain changing condition
Pr.151 Gain changing time constant
Pr.153 Position loop gain 2 changing ratio
Pr.154 Speed loop gain 2 changing ratio
PI-PID control switch-over position

Pr.134
droop
Pr.136 Speed differential compensation
Pr.138 Encoder output pulses
Pr.143
Pr.152
Pr.155
Ratio of load inertia moment to

servomotor inertia moment 2
Speed integral compensation

changing ratio
Pr.160 Optional function C

Pr.161
:
:
:
:
Machine resonance suppression

filter 2
Refer to
the section
5.2.7
Always set
Set as required ("" when not set)
Setting restricted
Setting not required (This is an irrelevant item, so the setting value will be ignored. If the value is the default value or within the setting range, there is no
problem.)
5-8
MELSEC-Q
5.1.5 Setting items for positioning data

Positioning data must be set for carrying out any "major positioning control". The table
below lists the items to be set for producing the positioning data.
One to 600 positioning data items can be set for each axis.
For details of the major positioning controls, refer to Chapter 9 "Major Positioning
Control". For details of the individual setting items, refer to Section 5.3 "List of
positioning data".
Forward
run
speed/
position
Reverse
run
speed/
position
LEND
Linear 1
Linear 2
Linear 3
Linear 4
Fixedfeed 1
Fixedfeed 2
Fixedfeed 3
Fixedfeed 4
Forward
run speed 1
Reverse run
speed 1
Forward
Circular
run speed 2
sub
Reverse run
Circular
speed 2
right
Forward
Circular run speed 3
left
Reverse run
speed 3
Forward
run speed 4
Reverse run
speed 4
LOOP
Independent
positioning
control
Operation Continuous
pattern
positioning
control
Continuous path
control
Current
value
changing
JUMP
instruction
LOOP
LEND
NOP instruction
Position-speed switching
control
control

control
Other control
JUMP instruction
Da.1

Positioning data
Position control

2/3/4-axis linear
Forward
run
position/
speed
NOP
Reverse instruction
run
position/
speed
Da.2
Control system
Da.3
Acceleration time No.
Da.4
Deceleration time No.
Da.5
Axis to be
interpolated
New
address
JUMP
destination
positioning
data No.
JUMP
condition
data No.
No. of
LOOP to
LEND
repetitions
Da.6
: 2 axes
: 1/3/4 axes
Positioning address/
movement amount
Da.7
Arc address
Da.8
Command speed
Da.9
Dwell time
(JUMP destination
positioning data No.)
Da.10
M code
(JUMP condition data No.)
: Always set
: Set as required (Read "" when not required.)
: Setting not possible
: Setting not required.
(This is an irrelevant item, so the set value will be ignored. If the value is the default value or within the setting range, there is no problem.)
: Two control systems are available: the absolute (ABS) system and incremental (INC) system.
5-9
Checking the positioning data

The items Da.1 to Da.10 are checked at the following timings:
(1) Startup of a positioning operation
(2) Error check performed by GX Configurator-QP
5 - 10
MELSEC-Q
MEMO
5 - 11
MELSEC-Q
MELSEC-Q
5.1.6 Setting items for block start data

The "block start data" must be set when carrying out "high-level positioning control".
The setting items for the " block start data" are shown below.
Up to 50 points of " block start data" can be set for each axis.
Refer to Chapter 10 "High-level Positioning Control" for details on the "high-level
positioning control", and to Section 5.4 "List of block start data" for details on each
setting item.
control
Block start
(Normal start)
Condition
start
Wait start
Simultaneous
start
Block start data

Da.11
Shape (end/continue)
Da.12
Start data No.
Da.13
Special start instruction
Da.14
Parameter
Repeated
start
(FOR loop)
Repeated
start
(FOR
condition)

: Setting not required (This is an irrelevant item, so the setting value will be ignored. If the value is the default value or within the
setting range, there is no problem.)
Checking the block start data

Da.11 to Da.14 are checked with the following timing.
(1) When the "Block start data" starts

5 - 12
MELSEC-Q
5.1.7 Setting items for condition data

When carrying out "high-level positioning control" or using the JUMP instruction in the
"major positioning control", the "condition data" must be set as required. The setting
items for the "condition data" are shown below.
Up to 10 "condition data" items can be set for each axis.
Refer to Chapter 10 "High-level Positioning Control" for details on the "high-level
positioning control", and to Section 5.5 "List of condition data" for details on each
setting item.
Control
Condition data
Major positioning
control
Other than
Block start
JUMP
Condition
JUMP
(Normal
Wait start
instruction
start
instruction
start )
Simultaneous
start
Repeated Repeated
start
start
(FOR
(FOR
loop)
condition)
Da.15
Condition target
Da.16
Condition operator
Da.17
Address
Da.18
Parameter 1
Da.19
Parameter 2

: Setting limited
: Setting not required (This is an irrelevant item, so the setting value will be ignored. If the value is the default value or within the
setting range, there is no problem.)
Checking the condition data

Da.15 to Da.19 are checked with the following timing.
(1) When the " Block start data" starts

(2) When "JUMP instruction" starts
5 - 13
MELSEC-Q
5.1.8 Types and roles of monitor data

The monitor data area in the buffer memory stores data relating to the operating state
of the positioning system, which are monitored as required while the positioning
system is operating.
The following data are available for monitoring.
System monitoring:
Monitoring of the QD75 configuration and operation history (through the system
monitor data Md.1 through Md.19 )
Axis operation monitoring:

Monitoring of the current position and speed, and other data related to the
movements of axes (through the axis monitor data Md.20 through Md.48 )
The axis monitor data are refreshed every 3.5 ms. Note that " Md.21 Machine
feed value" and " Md.22 Feedrate" are refreshed every 56.8ms. Also,
" Md.23 Valid M code", is updated when the "M code ON signal [X4, X5, X6, X7]"
turns ON.
[1] Monitoring the system

Monitoring the positioning system operation history
Monitoring details
Corresponding item
Md.1
In test mode flag
Start information
Md.3
Start information
Start No.
Md.4
Start No.
Md.5
Start
(Hour)
Minute:second Md.6
Start
(Minute:second)
Whether the system is in the test mode or not
History of data that

started an operation
Hour
Start
Error upon starting
Md.7
Error judgment
Latest pointer No.
Md.8
Start history pointer
Axis in which the error occurred
Md.9
Axis in which the error occurred
Axis error No.
Md.10
Axis error No.
Md.11
Axis error occurrence
(Hour)
Minute:second Md.12
(Minute:second)
History of all errors
Hour
History of all warnings
Latest pointer No.
Md.13
Error history pointer
Axis in which the warning occurred
Md.14
Axis in which the warning occurred
Axis warning No.
Md.15
Axis warning No.
Md.16
Axis warning occurrence (Hour)
Axis warning
occurrence
Hour
Minute:second Md.17
Md.18
Latest pointer No.
Number of write accesses

to the flash ROM after the Number of write accesses to flash ROM Md.19
power is switched ON
5 - 14
Axis warning occurrence (Minute:second)

Warning history pointer
No. of write accesses to flash ROM
MELSEC-Q
[2] Monitoring the axis operation state

Monitoring the position
Monitor details
Corresponding item
Monitor the current machine feed value
Md.21
Machine feed value
Monitor the current "current feed value"
Md.20
Current feed value
Monitor the current target value
Md.32
Target value
Monitoring the speed

Monitor details
During independent axis control
Corresponding item
Indicates the
speed of each
axis
When "0:
Composite speed" is Indicates the
composite
set for " Pr.20
Interpolation speed speed
During
Monitor the
designation method"
current speed interpolaWhen "1:
tion
Reference axis
control
Indicates the
speed" is set for
reference axis
" Pr.20 Interpolatio
speed
n speed designation
method"
Constantly indicates the speed of each axis
Monitor the current target speed
5 - 15
Md.22
Feedrate
Md.28
Axis feedrate
Md.33
Target speed
MELSEC-Q
Monitoring the state

Monitor details
Corresponding item
Monitor the axis operation state
Md.26
Axis operation status
Monitor the latest error code that occurred with the axis
Md.23
Axis error No.
Monitor the latest warning code that occurred with the axis
Md.24
Axis warning No.
Md.30
External input/output signal
Md.31
Status
Monitor the valid M codes
Md.25
Valid M code
Monitor whether the speed is being limited
Md.39
In speed control flag
Monitor whether the speed is being changed
Md.40
In speed change processing flag
Monitor the "start data" point currently being executed
Md.43
Start data pointer being executed
Monitor the "positioning data No." currently being executed
Md.44
Positioning data No. being executed
Monitor the remaining No. of repetitions (special start)
Md.41
Special start repetition counter
Monitor the remaining No. of repetitions (control system)
Md.42
Control system repetition counter
Monitor the block No.
Md.45
Block No. being executed
Monitor the current torque limit value
Md.35
Torque limit stored value
Monitor the "instruction code" of the special start data when using
special start
Md.36
Special start data instruction code setting

value
Monitor the "instruction parameter" of the special start data when

using special start
Md.37
Special start data instruction parameter

setting value
Monitor the "start data No." of the special start data when using
special start
Md.38
Start positioning data No. setting value
Monitor the "positioning data No." executed last
Md.46
Last executed positioning data No.
Monitor the positioning data currently being executed
Md.47
Positioning data being executed
Monitor the movement amount after the current position control

switching when using "speed-position switching control (INC
mode)".
Md.29

positioning amount
Monitor switching from the constant speed status or acceleration

status to the deceleration status during position control whose
operation pattern is "Positioning complete"
Md.48 Deceleration start flag
Monitor the external input/output signal and flag
5 - 16
MEMO
5 - 17
MELSEC-Q
MELSEC-Q
5.1.9 Types and roles of control data

Operation of the positioning system is achieved through the execution of necessary
controls. (Data required for controls are given through the default values when the
power is switched ON, which can be modified as required by the PLC program.)
Controls are performed over system data or machine operation.
Controlling the system data :

Setting and resetting QD75 setting data (through the system control data Cd.1 ,
Cd.2 and Cd.41 )
Controlling the operation :

Setting operation parameters, changing speed during operation, interrupting or
restarting operation (through the axis control data Cd.3 to Cd.42 )
[1] Controlling the system data

Setting and resetting the setting data
Control details
Controlled data item
Write setting data from buffer memory to flash ROM.
Cd.1
Flash ROM write request
Reset (initialize) parameters.
Cd.2
Parameter initialization request
5 - 18
MELSEC-Q
[2] Controlling the operation

Controlling the operation
Control details
Corresponding item
Set which positioning to execute (start No.).
Cd.3
Positioning start No.
Clear (reset) the axis error ( Md.23 ) and warning ( Md.24 ).
Cd.5
Axis error reset
Issue instruction to restart (When axis operation is stopped).
Cd.6
Restart command
End current positioning (deceleration stop), and start next

positioning.
Cd.37
Skip command
Set start point No. for executing block start.
Cd.4
Positioning starting point No.
Stop continuous control.
Cd.18
Interrupt request during continuous

operation
Cd.30
Simultaneous starting axis start data No.

(axis 1 start data No.)
Cd.31

Cd.32

Cd.33

Specify write destination for teaching results.
Cd.38
Teaching data selection
Specify data to be taught.
Cd.39
Teaching positioning data No.
Set start data Nos. for axes that start up simultaneously.
Controlling operation per step

Control details
Corresponding item
Stop positioning operation after each operation.
Cd.35
Step valid flag
Set unit to carry out step.
Cd.34
Step mode
Issue instruction to continuous operation or restart from stopped

step.
Cd.36
Step start information
Controlling the speed

Control details
Corresponding item
Set new speed when changing speed during operation.
Cd.14
New speed value
Issue instruction to change speed in operation to Cd.14 value.
Cd.15
Speed change request
Change positioning operation speed between 1 and 300% range.
Cd.13
Positioning operation speed override
Set inching movement amount.
Cd.16
Inching movement amount
Set JOG speed.
Cd.17
JOG speed
When changing acceleration time during speed change, set new

acceleration time.
Cd.10
New acceleration time value
When changing deceleration time during speed change, set new

deceleration time.
Cd.11
New deceleration time value
Set acceleration/deceleration time validity during speed change.
Cd.12
Acceleration/deceleration time change

during speed change, enable/disable
selection
(Only during positioning operation and JOG operation).
5 - 19
MELSEC-Q
Making settings related to operation

Control details
Corresponding item
Turn M code ON signal OFF.
Cd.7
M code OFF request
Set new value when changing current value.
Cd.9
New current value
Validate speed-position switching signal from external source.
Cd.24
Speed-position switching enable flag
Change movement amount for position control during speedposition switching control (INC mode).
Cd.23

movement amount change register
Validate external position-speed switching signal.
Cd.26
Position-speed switching enable flag
Change speed for speed control during position-speed switching

control.
Cd.25
Position-speed switching control speed

change register
Set up a flag when target position is changed during positioning.
Cd.29
Target position change request flag
Set new positioning address when changing target position during

positioning.
Cd.27
Target position change value(new

address)
Set new speed when changing target position during positioning.
Cd.28
Target position change value(new speed)
Set absolute (ABS) moving direction in degrees.
Cd.40
ABS direction in degrees
Set manual pulse generator operation validity.
Cd.21
Manual pulse generator enable flag
Set scale per pulse of No. of input pulses from manual pulse
generator.
Cd.20
Manual pulse generator 1 pulse input

magnification
Change OPR request flag from "ON to OFF".
Cd.19
OPR request flag OFF request
Validate external command signal.
Cd.8
External command valid
Change Md.35 Torque limit stored value.
Cd.22
New torque value
Set whether " Md.48 Deceleration start flag" is valid or invalid
Cd.41
Deceleration start flag valid
Set the stop command processing for deceleration stop function

(deceleration curve re-processing/deceleration curve
continuation)
Cd.42
Stop command processing for

deceleration stop selection
Turn Servo ON/OFF command ON by the buffer memory ON.

Set torque limit value
5 - 20
Cd.100 Servo OFF command

Cd.101 Torque output setting
MEMO
5 - 21
MELSEC-Q
MELSEC-Q
5.2 List of parameters

5.2.1 Basic parameters 1
Setting value, setting range
Item
Pr.1 Unit setting
Value set with peripheral device

0 : mm
1 : inch
2 : degree
3 : PLS
Value set with PLC program

0
1
2
3
Default
value
Setting value buffer memory

address
Axis 1 Axis 2 Axis 3 Axis 4
150
300
450
20000
2
3
152
153
302
303
452
453
20000
4
5
154
155
304
305
454
455
151
301
451
6
7
156
157
306
307
456
457
Movement amount per pulse
Pr.2
No. of pulses per

rotation (AP)
(Unit : PLS)
1 to 200000000
1 to 200000000
The setting value range differs according to the " Pr.1

Pr.3
Movement amount per

rotation (AL)
Pr.4

Pr.7
Bias speed at start
setting".
Here, the value within the [Table 1] range is set.
Unit
[Table 1] on right page

1 : 1 times
10 : 10 times
100 : 100 times
1000 : 1000 times
1
10
100
1000
Not used
: This buffer memory address in QD75M is different from QD75P.
Pr.1 Unit setting

Set the unit used for defining positioning operations. Choose from the following
units depending on the type of the control target: mm, inch, degree, or PLS.
Different units can be defined for different axes (axis 1 to 4).
(Example) Different units (mm, inch, degree, and PLS) are applicable to different
systems:
mm or inch .... X-Y table, conveyor (Select mm or inch depending on the
machine specifications.)
degree ........... Rotating body (360 degrees/rotation)
PLS................ X-Y table, conveyor
When you change the unit, note that the values of other parameters and data
will not be changed automatically.
After changing the unit, check if the parameter and data values are within the
allowable range.
Set "degree" to exercise speed-position switching control (ABS mode).
5 - 22
MELSEC-Q
Pr.2 to Pr.4 Electronic gear

Mechanical system value used when the QD75 performs positioning control.
The settings are made using Pr.2 to Pr.4 .
The electronic gear is expressed by the following equation.
Electronic gear =
No. of pulses per rotation (AP)

When positioning has been performed, an error (mechanical system error) may
be produced between the specified movement amount and the actual movement
amount. (Refer to Section 12.3.2 "Electronic gear function".)
Pr.2 No. of pulses per rotation (AP)

Set the number of pulses required for a complete rotation of the motor shaft.
If you are using the Mitsubishi servo amplifier MR-H-BN/MR-J2-B/MR-J2S-B/MRJ2-03B5 set the value given as the "resolution per servomotor rotation" in the
speed/position detector specifications.
No. of pulses per rotation (AP) = Resolution per servomotor rotation
[Table 1]
(unit)

(unit) 1
0 : mm
0.1 to 2000000.0 (m)
1 to 200000000 ( 10-1m)
1 : inch
0.00001 to 2000.00000 (inch)
1 to 200000000 ( 10-5inch)
2 : degree
0.00001 to 2000.00000 (degree)
1 to 200000000 ( 10-5degree)
3 : PLS
1 to 200000000 (PLS)
1 to 200000000 (PLS)
Pr.1 setting value
Pr.3 Movement amount per rotation (AL), Pr.4 Unit magnification (AM)
The amount how the workpiece moves with one motor rotation is determined by
the mechanical structure.
If the worm gear lead (m/rev) is PB and the deceleration rate is 1/n, then
Movement amount per rotation (AL) = PB 1/n
5 - 23
MELSEC-Q
However, the maximum value that can be set for this "movement amount per
rotation (AL)" parameter is 20000000.0m (20m). Set the "movement amount per
rotation (AL)" as shown below so that the "movement amount per rotation (AL)"
does not exceed this maximum value.
= PB 1/n
= Movement amount per rotation (AL) Unit magnification (AM)
Note) The unit magnification (AM) is a value of 1, 10, 100 or 1000. If the "PB
1/n" value exceeds 20000000.0m (20m), adjust with the unit magnification
so that the "movement amount per rotation (AL) " does not exceed
20000000.0m (20m).
1: Refer to the section 12.3.2 Electric gear function information about electric
gear.
Pr.7 Bias speed at start

Do not set other than the default value "0".
5 - 24
MEMO
5 - 25
MELSEC-Q
MELSEC-Q
5.2.2 Basic parameters 2

Item

Default
value

address
The setting range differs depending on the " Pr.1 Unit setting".
Pr.8
Speed limit value
Pr.9
200000
10
11
160
161
310
311
460
461
1 to 8388608 (ms)
1 to 8388608 (ms)
1000
12
13
162
163
312
313
462
463
1 to 8388608 (ms)
1 to 8388608 (ms)
1000
14
15
164
165
314
315
464
465
Acceleration time 0
Pr.10
Deceleration time 0
5 - 26
MELSEC-Q
[Table 1]
Pr.1 setting value
Value set with peripheral device (unit)
Value set with PLC program (unit)
0 : mm
0.01 to 20000000.00 (mm/min)
1 to 2000000000 (10-2mm/min)
1 : inch
0.001 to 2000000.000 (inch/min)
1 to 2000000000 (10-3inch/min)
2 : degree
3 : PLS
0.001 to 2000000.000 (degree/min)

1 to 10000000 (PLS/s)
1 to 2000000000 (10-3degree/min)
1 to 10000000 (PLS/s)
Pr.8 Speed limit value

Set the maximum speed during positioning and OPR operations.
The maximum speed during positioning control has to be limited in consideration
of the drive unit and control target specifications.
Take account of the following when determining the speed limit value:
1) Motor speed
2) Workpiece movement speed
Pr.9 Acceleration time 0, Pr.10 Deceleration time 0

" Pr.9 Acceleration time 0" specifies the time for the speed to increase from zero
to the speed limit value ( Pr.8 ).
" Pr.10 Deceleration time 0" specifies the time for the speed to decrease from the
speed limit value ( Pr.8 ) to zero.
Velocity

Positioning speed
Time
Actual
Actual deceleration time
acceleration
time
Pr.10 Deceleration time 0
Pr.9
Acceleration time 0
1) If the positioning speed is set lower than the parameter-defined speed limit
value, the actual acceleration/deceleration time will be relatively short. Thus,
set the maximum positioning speed equal to or only a little lower than the
parameter-defined speed limit value.
2) These settings are valid for OPR, positioning and JOG operations.
3) When the positioning involves interpolation, the acceleration/deceleration time
defined for the reference axis is valid.
5 - 27
MELSEC-Q
5.2.3 Detailed parameters 1

Item
Value set with PLC

program
Default value

address
The setting value range differs according to the " Pr.1 Unit
Pr.11
amount
setting".
17
167
317
467
2147483647
18
19
168
169
318
319
468
469
2147483648
20
21
170
171
320
321
470
471
22
172
322
472
23
173
323
473
Pr.12
The setting value range differs according to the " Pr.1 Unit
Software stroke limit upper

limit value
setting".
Pr.13
Software stroke limit lower

limit value
Pr.14

selection
Pr.15

valid/invalid setting

0 : Apply software stroke limit on current
feed value
1 : Apply software stroke limit on
machine feed value
0 : Software stroke limit valid during JOG
operation, inching operation and
manual pulse generator operation
1 : Software stroke limit invalid during
JOG operation, inching operation and
manual pulse generator operation
0
1
0
Pr.11 Backlash compensation amount

The error that occurs due to backlash when moving the machine via gears can be
compensated.
When the backlash compensation amount is set, pulses equivalent to the
compensation amount will be output each time the direction changes during
positioning.
Pr.44 OPR direction
Workpiece
(moving body)
Worm gear
Backlash
(compensation amount)
1) The backlash compensation is valid after machine OPR. Thus, if the backlash
compensation amount is set or changed, always carry out machine OPR once.
2) " Pr.2 No. of pulses per rotation", " Pr.3 Movement amount per pulse" and
" Pr.11 Backlash compensation amount" which satisfies the following (1) can
be set up.
5 - 28
( Pr.11 Backlash compensation amount)
MELSEC-Q
( Pr.2 No. of pulses per rotation)
( Pr.3 Movement amount per pulse)
( = A) 65535 (PLS) .(1)
An error (error code: 920) occurs when " Pr.2 No. of pulses per rotation",
" Pr.3 Movement amount per pulse" and " Pr.11 Backlash compensation
amount" setting range is 0 to 65535. (the calculation result of the following (1) )
A servo alarm (error code: 2032, 2035 etc.) may be made to occur by kinds of
servo amplifier (servomotor), load inertia and the amount of command of a
cycle time (QD75) is set so that the calculation result of the following (1) may
satisfy " Pr.2 No. of pulses per rotation", " Pr.3 Movement amount per pulse"
and " Pr.11 Backlash compensation amount" setting range is 65536 and
lower 0.
A
(Maximum motor speed (r/min) ) 1.2 (Encoder resolution (PLS/r) )

60(s) 1000 (ms)
3.5 (ms)
(PLS) ....(2)
[Table 1]
Pr.1

(unit)
setting value

(unit)
0 : mm
0 to 6553.5 (m)
0 to 65535 ( 10-1m)
1 : inch
0 to 0.65535 (inch)
0 to 65535 ( 10-5inch)
2 : degree
0 to 0.65535 (degree)
0 to 65535 ( 10-5degree)
3 : PLS
0 to 65535 (PLS)
0 to 65535 (PLS)
1 to 32767
: Set as a decimal
32768 to 65535 : Convert into hexadecimal and set
[Table 2]
Pr.1
setting value

(unit)

(unit)
0 : mm
-214748364.8 to 214748364.7 (m)
-2147483648 to 2147483647 ( 10-1m)
1 : inch
-21474.83648 to 21474.83647(inch)
5
-2147483648 to 2147483647 ( 10- inch)
2 : degree
0 to 359.99999 (degree)
0 to 35999999 ( 10-5degree)
3 : PLS
-2147483648 to 2147483647(PLS)
-2147483648 to 2147483647 (PLS)
Pr.12 Software stroke limit upper limit value

Set the upper limit for the machine's movement range during positioning control.
Pr.13 Software stroke limit lower limit value

Set the lower limit for the machine's movement range during positioning control.
Software stroke
limit lower limit
Emergency stop
limit switch
Software stroke
limit upper limit
(Machine movement range)

OP
5 - 29
Emergency stop
limit switch
MELSEC-Q
1) Generally, the OP is set at the lower limit or upper limit of the stroke limit.
2) By setting the upper limit value or lower limit value of the software stroke limit,
overrun can be prevented in the software. However, an emergency stop limit
switch must be installed nearby outside the range.
To invalidate the software stroke limit, set the setting value to "upper limit
value = lower limit value". (The setting value can be anything.)
When the unit is "degree", the software stroke limit check is invalid during
speed control (including speed-position switching control, position-speed
switching control) or during manual control.
Pr.14 Software stroke limit selection

Set whether to apply the software stroke limit on the "current feed value" or the
"machine feed value". The software stroke limit will be validated according to the
set value.
To invalidate the software stroke limit, set the setting value to "current feed value".
Pr.15 Software stroke limit valid/invalid setting

Set whether to validate the software stroke limit during JOG/Inching operation and
manual pulse generator operation.
Item
The setting value range differs depending on the " Pr.1

Pr.16
setting".
Default
value

address
Unit
100
24
25
174
175
324
325
474
475
300
26
176
326
476
27
177
327
477
Command in-position width

Pr.17
1 to 500 (%)
1 to 500 (%)

Pr.18
0 : WITH mode
M code ON signal output

timing
1 : AFTER mode
Pr.16 Command in-position width

Set the remaining distance that turns the command in-position ON. The command
in-position signal is used as a front-loading signal of the positioning complete
signal. When positioning control is started, the "command in-position flag" (3rd flag
from right) in " Md.31 Status" turns OFF, and the "command in-position flag" turns
ON at the set position of the command in-position signal.
Velocity
Position control start
ON
Command
in-position flag
OFF
5 - 30
MELSEC-Q
Pr.17 Torque limit setting value

Set the maximum value of the torque generated by the servomotor as a
percentage between 1 and 500%.
The torque limit function limits the torque generated by the servomotor within
the set range.
If the torque required for control exceeds the torque limit value, it is controlled
with the set torque limit value.
(Refer to "12.4.2 Torque limit function ".)
[Table 1]
(unit)
Pr.1 setting value
0 : mm
0.1 to 214748364.7 (m)
1 to 2147483647 (101m)
1 : inch
0.00001 to 21474.83647 (inch)
1 to 2147483647 (105inch)
2 : degree
0.00001 to 21474.83647 (degree)
1 to 2147483647 (105degree)
3 : PLS
1 to 2147483647 (PLS)
1 to 2147483647 (PLS)
Pr.18 M code ON signal output timing

This parameter sets the M code ON signal output timing.
Choose either WITH mode or AFTER mode as the M code ON signal output
timing.
WITH mode......... An M code is output and the M code ON
signal is turned ON when a positioning
operation starts.
AFTER mode ...... An M code is output and the M code ON

signal is turned ON when a positioning
operation completes.
[X14,X15,X16,X17]

[Y10,Y11,Y12,Y13]
BUSY signal
[XC,XD,XE,XF]
BUSY signal
[XC,XD,XE,XF]
M code ON signal
[X4,X5,X6,X7]
M code ON signal
[X4,X5,X6,X7]
Cd.7 M code OFF request

[1504,1604,1704,1804]

[1504,1604,1704,1804]
Md.25
Valid M code
m1
Md.25
m2
Positioning
Positioning
Da.1
Da.1
m2
m1
Valid M code
Operation pattern
01 (continuous)
00 (end)
Operation pattern
01 (continuous)
00 (end)
: m1 and m2 indicate set M codes.
: m1 and m2 indicate set M codes.
Note: If AFTER mode is used with speed control, an M code will not be output and the M code ON signal will not be
turned ON.
An M code is a number between 0 and 65535 that can be assigned to each positioning
data ( Da.10 ).
The sequence program can be coded to read an M code from the buffer memory
address specified by " Md.25 Valid M code" whenever the M code ON signal [X4, X5,
X6, X7] turns ON so that a command for the sub work (e.g. clamping, drilling, tool
change) associated with the M code can be issued.
5 - 31
MELSEC-Q
Item
Pr.19
0 : Standard speed switching mode
Speed switching mode
1 : Front-loading speed switching

mode
Pr.20
0 : Composite speed
Interpolation speed
designation method
1 : Reference axis speed
0 : Do not update current feed value
1 : Update current feed value
2 : Clear current feed value to zero
Default
value

address
28
178
328
478
29
179
329
479
30
180
330
480
31
181
331
481
33
34
184
334
484
Pr.21
Current feed value during

speed control
b0
b1
b2
b3
b4
Pr.22
b5
b6
b7
b8
Pr.24

input selection
Pr.200
Speed-position function
selection
Lower limit
Upper limit
Not used
Stop signal
External
command
0: Negative
Not used
logic
Near-point
1: Positive
signal
logic
Not used
Manual pulse
generator input
151413121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 b0
b9
to Not used
b15
0: A-phase/B-phase multiplied by 4
3: PLS/SIGN
0: Speed-position switching control
(INC mode)
2: Speed-position switching control
(ABS mode)
5 - 32
Always "0" is set to

the part not used.
0
1
2
3
0
2
MELSEC-Q
Pr.19 Speed switching mode

Set whether to switch the speed switching mode with the standard switching or
front-loading switching mode.
0 : Standard switching............... Switch the speed when executing the next
positioning data.
1 : Front-loading switching ........ The speed switches at the end of the positioning
data currently being executed.
Velocity
Switch the speed when
executing the next positioning data
Velocity
The next positioning data starts
positioning at the designated speed
t
n: Positioning
data No.
n+1
n+1
<For front-loading switching>
<For standard switching>
Pr.20 Interpolation speed designation method

When carrying out linear interpolation/circular interpolation, set whether to
designate the composite speed or reference axis speed.
0: Composite speed .................. The movement speed for the control target is
designated, and the speed for each axis is
calculated by the QD75.
1: Reference axis speed ........... The axis speed set for the reference axis is
designated, and the speed for the other axis
carrying out interpolation is calculated by the
QD75.
X axis
X axis
Designate composite speed
Designate speed
for reference axis
Y axis
Y axis
Calculated by QD75
Calculated by QD75
<When composite speed is designated>
<When reference axis speed is designated>
Note: Always specify the reference axis speed if the 4-axis linear interpolation or 2 to 4 axis
speed control has to be performed.
If you specify the composite speed for a positioning operation that involves the 4-axis
linear interpolation or 2 to 4 axis speed control, the error code 523 "interpolation mode
error" will be output when the positioning operation is attempted.
For a positioning operation that involves the circular interpolation, specify the composite
speed always.
5 - 33
MELSEC-Q
Pr.21 Current feed value during speed control

Specify whether you wish to enable or disable the update of " Md.20 Current feed
value" while operations are performed under the speed control (including the
speed-position and position-speed switching control).
0: The update of the current feed value is disabled
The current feed value will not change.
(The value at the beginning of the speed control
will be kept.)
1: The update of the current feed value is enabled
The current feed value will be updated.
(The current feed value will change from the
initial.)
2: The current feed value is cleared to zero
The current feed will be set initially to zero and
change from zero while the speed control is in
effect.
Note1: When the speed control is performed over two to four axes, the choice
between enabling and disabling the update of " Md.20 Current feed value"
depends on how the reference axis is set.
Note2: Set "1" to exercise speed-position switching control (ABS mode).
Pr.22 Input signal logic selection

Set the input signal logic that matches the signaling specification of the connected
external device.
Negative logic
(1) When the input signal contact is not flowed with the current.
(a) FLS, RLS : ON (Limit signal turn ON)
(b) DOG, STOP, CHG
OFF
(2) When the input signal contact is flowed with the current.
(a) FLS, RLS
OFF (Limit signal turn OFF)
(b) DOG, STOP, CHG
ON
Positive logic
Opposite the concept of negative logic.
Note1: A mismatch in the signal logic will disable normal operation. Be careful of
this when you change from the default value.
Note2: Set the manual pulse generator input logic selection (b8) to axis 1. (Setting
of any of axes 2 to 4 is invalid.)
5 - 34
MELSEC-Q
Pr.24 Manual pulse generator input selection

Set the manual pulse generator input pulse mode. (Only the value specified
against the axis 1 is valid.)
0: A-phase/B-phase; multiplied by 4
3: PLS/SIGN

Select the mode of speed-position switching control.
0: INC mode
2: ABS mode
Note1: If the setting is other than 0 and 2, operation is performed in the INC mode
with the setting regarded as 0.
5 - 35
MELSEC-Q
5.2.4 Detailed parameters 2

Item
Value set with PLC

program
Default
value

address
1000
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
20000
48
49
198
199
348
349
498
499
50
200
350
500
51
201
351
501
Pr.25 Acceleration time 1

1 to 8388608 (ms)
1 to 8388608 (ms)

The setting range differs depending on the " Pr.1 Unit setting".
Pr.31
Pr.32

0: Pr.9 Acceleration time 0
JOG operation acceleration

time selection
2
3
0: Pr.10 Deceleration time 0

JOG operation deceleration
time selection
Pr.33
2
3
Pr.25 Acceleration time 1 to Pr.27 Acceleration time 3

These parameters set the time for the speed to increase from zero to the speed
limit value ( Pr.8 ) during a positioning operation.
Pr.28 Deceleration time 1 to Pr.30 Deceleration time 3

These parameters set the time for the speed to decrease from the speed limit
value ( Pr.8 ) to zero during a positioning operation.
5 - 36
MELSEC-Q
[Table 1]
Pr.1 setting value

(unit)
0 : mm
0.01 to 20000000.00 (mm/min)
1 to 2000000000 ( 10-2mm/min)
1 : inch
0.001 to 2000000.000 (inch/min)
1 to 2000000000 ( 10-3inch/min)
2 : degree
0.001 to 2000000.000 (degree/min) 1 to 2000000000 ( 10-3degree/min)
1 to 10000000 (PLS/s)
1 to 10000000 (PLS/s)
3 : PLS
1: For Select type, refer to GX Configurator-QP Operating Manual.
Pr.31 JOG speed limit value

Set the maximum speed for JOG operation.
Note)
Set the "JOG speed limit value" to less than " Pr.8 Speed limit value".
If the "speed limit value" is exceeded, the "JOG speed limit value error"
(error code: 956) will occur.
Pr.32 JOG operation acceleration time selection

Set which of "acceleration time 0 to 3" to use for the acceleration time during JOG
operation.
0 : Use value set in " Pr.9 Acceleration time 0".
Pr.33 JOG operation deceleration time selection

Set which of "deceleration time 0 to 3" to use for the deceleration time during JOG
operation.
0 : Use value set in " Pr.10 Deceleration time 0".
5 - 37
MELSEC-Q
Item
Pr.34
process selection

0 : Automatic trapezoid
acceleration/deceleration process
1 : S-pattern
acceleration/deceleration process
Pr.35
Default
value

address
0
0
52
202
352
502
1 to 100 (%)
1 to 100 (%)
100
53
203
353
503
1 to 8388608 (ms)
1 to 8388608 (ms)
1000
54
55
204
205
354
355
504
505
56
206
356
506
57
207
357
507
58
208
358
508
S-pattern ratio
Pr.36
Sudden stop deceleration

time
Pr.37
Stop group 1 sudden stop

selection
0 : Normal deceleration stop
Pr.38

selection
Pr.39
1 : Sudden stop

selection
Pr.34 Acceleration/deceleration process selection

Set whether to use automatic trapezoid acceleration/deceleration or S-pattern
acceleration/deceleration for the acceleration/deceleration process.
Note) Refer to Section 12.7.7 "Acceleration/deceleration process function" for
details.
Velocity
The acceleration and

deceleration are linear.
Time
<Automatic trapezoid acceleration/deceleration>
5 - 38
Velocity
The acceleration and

deceleration follow a Sin curve.
Time
<S-pattern acceleration/deceleration>
MELSEC-Q
Pr.35 S-pattern ratio

Set the S-pattern ratio (1 to 100%) for carrying out the S-pattern
acceleration/deceleration process.
The S-pattern ratio indicates where to draw the acceleration/deceleration curve
using the Sin curve as shown below.
(Example)
A
Positioning
speed
B
B/2
B/2
t
When S-pattern ratio is 100%
V
Positioning
speed
b
sin curve
S-pattern ratio = B/A
100%
5 - 39
b/a = 0.7
t
When S-pattern ratio is 70%
MELSEC-Q
Pr.36 Sudden stop deceleration time

Set the time to reach speed 0 from " Pr.8 Speed limit value" during the sudden
stop.
The illustration below shows the relationships with other parameters.
1) Positioning start
When positioning is started,
the acceleration starts following
the "acceleration time".
2) Sudden stop cause occurrence

When a "sudden stop cause" occurs,
the deceleration starts following the
"sudden stop deceleration time".
Pr.8
3) Positioning stop
When a "sudden stop cause"
does not occur, the deceleration starts toward the stop
position following the "deceleration time".
Speed limit
value
Da.8
Command
speed
Actual acceleration time
Actual sudden stop

deceleration time
Pr.36
Sudden stop
deceleration time
Acceleration time
Deceleration time
5 - 40
MELSEC-Q
Pr.37 Stop group 1 sudden stop selection

to
Set the method to stop when the stop causes in the following stop groups occur.
Stop group 1 .............. Stop with hardware stroke limit
Stop group 2 .............. Error occurrence of the PLC CPU, PLC READY signal
[Y0] OFF, Fault in test mode
Stop group 3 .............. External stop signal
Stop signal from PLC CPU
Stop signal from peripheral device
Error occurrence (excludes errors in stop groups 1 and 2:
includes only the software stroke limit errors during JOG
operation, speed control, speed-position switching control,
and position-speed switching control)
Stop made when the near-point dog signal turns from
OFF to ON in counter method machine OPR
The methods of stopping include "0: Normal deceleration stop" and "1: Sudden
stop".
If "1: Sudden stop" is selected, the axis will suddenly decelerate to a stop when the
stop signal is input.
5 - 41
MELSEC-Q
Item

Pr.40
0 to 65535 (ms)

output time

0 to 65535 (ms)
0 to 32767 :
Set as a decimal
32768 to 65535:
Convert into hexadecimal
and set

Pr.41
Allowable circular
interpolation error width
Default
value

address
300
59
209
359
509
100
60
61
210
211
360
361
510
511
62
212
362
512
64
65
214
215
364
365
514
515
Unit
setting".
0: External positioning start

1: External speed change
request
External command function 2: Speed-position, positionselection
speed switching request
3: Skip request
Pr.201
0, 1 to 163840 [PLS]
Restart allowable range
0: restart not allowed
when servo OFF to ON
Pr.42
1
2
3
Pr.40 Positioning complete signal output time

Set the output time of the positioning complete signal [X14, X15, X16, X17] output
from the QD75.
A positioning completes when the specified dwell time has passed after the QD75
had terminated the output.
PLC
PLC CPU
Positining Start signal
QD75
[Y10, Y11, Y12, Y13]
M
Positioning
complete signal
Positioning
[X14, X15, X16, X17]

[Y10, Y11,Y12,Y13]
[X10, X11, X12, X13]
(after dwell time has passed)
BUSY signal
[XC, XD, XE, XF]
[X14, X15, X16, X17]
Output time
Positioning complete signal output time
5 - 42
MELSEC-Q
[Table 1]
Pr.1 setting value

(unit)

(unit)
0 : mm
0 to 10000.0 (m)
0 to 100000 ( 10-1m)
1 : inch
0 to 1.00000 (inch)
0 to 100000 ( 10-5inch)
2 : degree
0 to 1.00000 (degree)
0 to 100000 ( 10-5degree)
3 : PLS
0 to 100000 (PLS)
0 to 100000 (PLS)
Pr.41 Allowable circular interpolation error width

With the "allowable circular interpolation error width", the allowable error range of
the calculated arc path and end point address is set. If the error of the calculated
arc path and end point address is within the set range, circular interpolation will be
carried out to the set end point address while compensating the error with spiral
interpolation.
The allowable circular interpolation error width is set in the following axis buffer
memory addresses.
If axis 1 is the reference axis, set in the axis 1 buffer memory address
[60, 61].
[210, 211].
[360, 361].
[510, 511].
Path with spiral interpolation
Error
End point address

with calculation
End point address
Start point address
Center point address
With circular interpolation control using the center point designation, the arc
path calculated with the start point address and center point address and the
end point address may deviate.
5 - 43
MELSEC-Q
Pr.42 External command function selection

Select a command with which the external command signal should be associated.
0: External positioning start
The external command signal input is used to start a positioning
operation.
1: External speed change request
The external command signal input is used to change the speed
in the current positioning operation. The new speed should be set
in the " Cd.14 Speed change value"
2: Speed-position, position-speed switching request
The external command signal input is used to switch from the
speed control to the position control while in the speed-position
switching control mode, or from the position control to the speed
control while in the position-speed switching control mode.
To enable the speed-position switching control, set the
" Cd.24 Speed-position switching enable flag" to "1".
To enable the position-speed switching control, set the
" Cd.26 Position-speed switching enable flag" to "1".
3: Skip request
The external command signal input is used skip the current
positioning operation.
POINT
To enable the external command signal, set the " Cd.8 External command enable"
to "1".
Pr.201 Restart allowable range when servo OFF to ON

(1) What is the restart function when servo OFF to ON ?
The QD75 restart function when servo OFF changes to ON, performs
continuous positioning operation (positioning start, restart) when the servo is
switched from OFF to ON in the stopped state (including servo emergency
stop).
Restart when servo OFF changes to ON can be performed when the
difference between the last command position for the QD75 when it stopped
and the present value when servo OFF changed to ON, is less than the value
set in the buffer memory for the restart allowable range setting.
(a) Servo emergency stop processing
1) For stop caused by a servo emergency stop signal, positioning
operation is judged as stopped and can be restarted if the difference
between the last command position for the QD75 when the servo
stop signal turned ON and present value at the time the servo stop
signal turned OFF is lower than the value set in the buffer memory
for the restart allowable range setting.
5 - 44
MELSEC-Q
2) When the difference between the last command position of the QD75
at the time the servo stop signal turned ON and the present value at
the time the servo stop signal turned OFF is greater than the value
set in the buffer memory for the restart allowable range setting, the
positioning operation is judged as on-standby and cannot be
restarted.
ON
Servo emergency OFF
stop signal
Axis status
Error
Operation
Servo OFF
Last command position
Stopping/Waitting
Restart invalid
Restart valid
Servo ON
(b) Processing when the servo ON signal changes from OFF to ON.
1) The positioning operation is stopped and restart can be performed
when the difference between the last command position of the QD75
when the servo ON signal went from OFF to ON is lower than the
value set in the buffer memory for restart allowable range setting.
2) When the difference between the last command position of the QD75
at the time the servo ON signal when from ON to OFF and the
present value at the time the servo ON signal went from OFF to ON
is greater than the value set in the buffer memory for the restart
allowable range setting, the positioning operation is judged as onstandby and cannot be restarted.
Servo emergency
stop signal
ON
OFF
Axis status
Positioning
Stopping
Servo OFF
Stop command
Stopping/Waiting
Servo ON
Servo OFF
Waitting
Restart invalid
Restart valid Servo ON
Restart invalid
(2) Setting method

When performing restart at the time servo OFF changes to ON, set the restart
allowable range in the following buffer memory.
address
Item
Setting range
Default value

64
65
214
215
364
365
514
515
Pr.201 Restart allowable range

setting when servo OFF changes
to ON
0, 1 to 163840 (PLS)
0: restart not allowed
[Setting example]
A program in which the restart allowable range for axis 1 is set to 10000 PLS
is shown below.
DMOVP K10000 D0
DTOP H0 K64 D0 K1
5 - 45
Restart allowable range (10000 PLS)

is stored in D0, D1.
Data for D0, D1 is stored in buffer
memory 64, 65 of the QD75.
MELSEC-Q
(3) Precautionary notes

(a) The setting for the "restart allowable range when servo OFF changes to
ON" is validated when the PLC READY signal (Y0) rises (OFF to ON).
After setting the "restart allowable range when servo OFF changes to
ON", the PLC READY signal (Y0) rises (OFF to ON).
(b) The difference between the last command position when the servo turned
OFF and the present value when the servo turned ON, is output at the
first operation of restart. If the restart allowable range is large at this time,
an overload may occur on the servo side.
Set the "restart allowable range when servo OFF changes to ON" to a
value where the mechanical system will not be affected by a signal
output.
(c) The restart servo OFF changes to ON is valid only for the first time servo
OFF changes to ON. From the second time servo OFF changes to ON,
the setting for restart allowable range when servo OFF changes to ON is
disregarded.
(d) Execute servo OFF when the mechanical system is in complete stop
state. The restart when servo OFF changes to ON cannot be applied to a
system in which the mechanical system operated by external pressure or
other force while the servo is OFF.
(e) Restart can only be executed while the operating status of the axis is
"stop". Restart cannot be executed when the operation status of the axis
is other than "stop".
(f)
Do not restart while a stop command is ON.

If restart is executed while stopped, an error (error code 106: Started
during stop command ON) is generated, and the operating status of the
axis becomes "ERR".
Therefore, restart cannot be performed even if the error is reset.
(g) Restart can also be executed while the positioning starts signal is ON.
However do not set the positioning start signal from OFF to ON while
stopped.
If the positioning start signal switches ON from OFF, positioning is
performed from the positioning data number set in the buffer memory at
1500 or from the positioning data number of the specified point.
(h) If positioning is terminated by a continuous-operation interrupt request,
restart cannot be performed.
If a restart request is made, a warning (warring code 104: Restart
disabled) is generated.
[Operation at the time an emergency stop is input]
[Operation when a restart is performed]

Restart operation
Emergency stop input

(Last command position)
Stop position at the

time of servo OFF
Movement while
servo is OFF
Last command
position
(Present value time of servo ON)

Stop position at time of servo OFF
Output once at
the time of restart
5 - 46
MEMO
5 - 47
MELSEC-Q
MELSEC-Q
5.2.5 OPR basic parameters

Item

0 : Near-point dog method
4 : Count method 1)
5 : Count method 2)
6 : Data set method
Pr.43
OPR method

0
4
5
6
Default
value

address
70
220
370
520
Pr.43 OPR method

Set the "OPR method" for carrying out machine OPR.
0 : Near-point dog method ........ After decelerating at the near-point dog ON, stop
at the zero signal and complete the machine
OPR.
4 : Count method 1) .................. After decelerating at the near-point dog ON, move
the designated distance, and complete the
machine OPR with the zero signal.
5 : Count method 2) .................. After decelerating at the near-point dog ON, move
the designated distance, and complete the
machine OPR.
6 : Data set method................... The position where the machine OPR has been
made will be the OP.
Note) Refer to Section 8.2.2 "Machine OPR method" for details on the OPR
methods.
OPR method
0 : Near-point dog method
(1) Start machine OPR.
(Start movement at the " Pr.46
" Pr.44
OPR speed" in the

V
OPR direction".)
Pr.46 OPR speed
(2)
(2) Detect the near-point dog ON, and start deceleration.

(3) Decelerate to " Pr.47
Pr.47
Creep speed
Creep speed", and move with the
creep speed.
(At this time, the near-point dog must be ON. If the nearpoint dog is OFF, the axis will decelerate to a stop.)
(4) At the first zero signal after the near-point dog turned OFF,
machine OPR is completed.
Note) After the servo amplifier has been turned on, the zero
point of the encoder must be passed at least once
before point A is reached.
5 - 48
(3)
(1)
ON
Near-point dog OFF
Zero signal
(4)
A
MELSEC-Q
4 : Count method 1)
(Start movement at the " Pr.46 OPR speed" in the
Pr.50
" Pr.44 OPR direction".)
Pr.46 OPR speed
Setting for the movement

amount after near-poing dog ON
(2)
Pr.47 Creep speed

(3) Decelerate to " Pr.47 Creep speed", and move with the
(3)
(4)
(1)
creep speed.
(4) After the near-point dog turns ON and the movement
amount set in " Pr.50 Setting for the movement amount
Md.34 Movement amount after

near-point dog ON
The near-point dog must turn OFF
at a sufficient distance away from
the OP position.
ON
Near-point dog OFF
after near-point dog ON" has passed, the QD75 stops with
the first zero signal, and the machine OPR is completed.
Note) After the servo amplifier has been turned on, the zero
point of the encoder must be passed at least once before
point A is reached.
First zero signal after moving the

movement amount after nearpoint dog ON
Zero signal
5 : Count method 2)
(Start movement at the " Pr.46 OPR speed" in the
V
" Pr.44 OPR direction".)
Pr.46 OPR speed
Pr.50
(2)

amount after near-poing dog ON
Pr.47 Creep speed
(3)
(3) Decelerate to " Pr.47 Creep speed", and move with the
creep speed.
(4) After the near-point dog turns ON and the movement
(4)
(1)
t
near-point dog ON
amount set in " Pr.50 Setting for the movement amount

after near-point dog ON" has passed, machine OPR is
completed.
ON
Near-point dog OFF
6 : Data set method

The position where the machine OPR has been made will be the OP.
(Perform after the servo amplifier has been turned ON and the servomotor has been rotated at least once using the
JOG or similar operation.)
5 - 49
MELSEC-Q

Item
Value set with PLC

program

Pr.44
OPR direction
0 : Positive direction (address

increment direction)
1 : Negative direction (address
decrement direction)
Default
value

address
0
0
71
221
371
521
72
73
222
223
372
373
522
523
74
75
224
225
374
375
524
525
The setting value range differs depending on the " Pr.1 Unit
Pr.45
setting".
OP address

Pr.46
setting".
OPR speed
Pr.44 OPR direction

Set the direction to start movement when starting machine OPR.
0: Positive direction (address increment direction)
Moves in the direction that the address increments. (Arrow 2))
1: Negative direction (address decrement direction)
Moves in the direction that the address decrements. (Arrow 1))
Normally, the OP is set near the lower limit or the upper limit, so " Pr.44
OPR
direction" is set as shown below.
When the zero point is set at the lower

limit side, the OPR direction is in the
direction of arrow 1).
Set "1" for Pr.44 .
Lower limit
Upper limit
1)
OP
Address decrement
direction
Address increment
direction
Lower limit
Upper limit
Address decrement
direction
2)
When the OP is set at the upper

limit side, the OPR direction
is in the direction of arrow 2).
Set "0" for Pr.44 .
5 - 50
OP
Address increment
direction
MELSEC-Q
[Table 1]
(unit)
Pr.1 setting value

(unit)
0 : mm
-214748364.8 to 214748364.7 (m)
-2147483648 to 2147483647 ( 10-1m)
1 : inch
-21474.83648 to 21474.83647 (inch)
-2147483648 to 2147483647 ( 10-5inch)
2 : degree
0 to 359.99999 (degree)
0 to 35999999 ( 10-5degree)
3 : PLS
-2147483648 to 2147483647 (PLS)
-2147483648 to 2147483647 (PLS)
[Table 2]
Pr.1 setting value

(unit)

(unit)
0 : mm
0.01 to 20000000.00 (mm/min)
1 to 2000000000 ( 10-2mm/min)
1 : inch
0.001 to 2000000.000 (inch/min)
1 to 2000000000 ( 10-3inch/min)
2 : degree
0.001 to 2000000.000 (degree/min)
1 to 2000000000 ( 10-3degree/min)
3 : PLS
1 to 10000000 (PLS/s)
1 to 10000000 (PLS/s)
Pr.45 OP address
Set the address used as the reference point for positioning control (ABS system).
(When the machine OPR is completed, the stop position address is changed to the
address set in " Pr.45 OP address". At the same time, the " Pr.45 OP address"
is stored in " Md.20 Current feed value" and " Md.21 Machine feed value".)
Pr.46 OPR speed

Set the speed for OPR.
Note) Set the "OPR speed" to less than " Pr.8 Speed limit value". If the "speed
limit value" is exceeded, the "OPR speed" will be limited by " Pr.8 Speed
limit value".
The "OPR speed" should be equal to or faster than the " Pr.7 Bias speed
at start" and " Pr.47 Creep speed".
5 - 51
MELSEC-Q
Item

Pr.47
Default
value

address
Unit
setting".
76
77
226
227
376
377
526
527
78
228
378
528
Creep speed

Pr.48
OPR retry
0 : Do not retry OPR with limit

switch
1 : Retry OPR with limit switch
0
1
Pr.47 Creep speed

Set the creep speed after near-point dog ON (the low speed just before stopping
after decelerating from the OPR speed).
The creep speed is set within the following range.
( Pr.46 OPR speed )
( Pr.47 Creep speed)
V
Pr.46 OPR speed
Machine OPR
start
Pr.47 Creep speed
ON
Near-point
dog signal
OFF
Zero signal
5 - 52
MELSEC-Q
[Table 1]
(unit)
Pr.1 setting value

(unit)
0 : mm
0.01 to 20000000.00 (mm/min)
1 to 2000000000 ( 10-2mm/min)
1 : inch
0.001 to 2000000.000 (inch/min)
1 to 2000000000 ( 10-3inch/min)
2 : degree
0.001 to 2000000.000 (degree/min) 1 to 2000000000 ( 10-3degree/min)
3 : PLS
1 to 10000000 (PLS/s)
1 to 10000000 (PLS/s)
Pr.48 OPR retry

Set whether to carry out OPR retry.
When the OPR retry function is validated and the machine OPR is started, first the
axis will move in the OPR direction (1)). If the upper/lower limit signal turns OFF
before the near-point dog signal ON is detected (2)), the axis will decelerate to a
stop, and then will move in the direction opposite the OPR direction (3)). If the
following edge of the near-point dog signal is detected during movement in the
opposite direction, the axis will decelerate to a stop (4)), and then will carry out
machine OPR again (5), 6)).
2)
1)
5)
6)
Start position
4)
3)
ON
Limit switch OFF state
Zero signal
[Operation for OPR retry function]

1) Movement in the OPR direction starts with the machine OPR start.
2) The axis decelerates when the limit switch is detected.
3) After stopping at detection the limit signal OFF, the axis moves at the OPR speed in the
direction opposite to the specified OPR direction.
4) The axis decelerates when the near-point dog signal turns OFF.
5), 6) After stopping with the near-point dog signal OFF, carries out OPR in the OPR
direction.
5 - 53
MELSEC-Q
5.2.6 OPR detailed parameters
Item

Default
value

address
Unit
Pr.50
setting".
amount after near-point dog
ON
0 : Pr.9 Acceleration time 0
Pr.51
OPR acceleration time

selection
0 : Pr.10 Deceleration time 0
Pr.52
OPR deceleration time

selection
80
81
230
231
380
381
530
531
82
232
382
532
83
233
383
533
Pr.50 Setting for the movement amount after near-point dog ON

When using the count method 1) or 2), set the movement amount to the OP after
the near-point dog signal turns ON.
(The movement amount after near-point dog ON should be equal to or greater
than the sum of the "distance covered by the deceleration from the OPR speed to
the creep speed" and "distance of movement in 10 ms at the OPR speed".)
5 - 54
MELSEC-Q
[Table 1]
Pr.1 setting value

(unit)

(unit)
0 : mm
0 to 214748364.7 (m)
0 to 2147483647 ( 10-1m)
1 : inch
0 to 21474.83647 (inch)
0 to 2147483647 ( 10-5inch)
2 : degree
0 to 21474.83647 (degree)
0 to 2147483647 ( 10-5degree)
3 : PLS
0 to 2147483647 (PLS)
0 to 2147483647 (PLS)
Example of setting for " Pr. 50 Setting for the movement amount after near-point dog ON"
Assuming that the " Pr. 8 Speed limit value" is set to 200 kPLS/s, " Pr. 46 OPR speed" to 10 kPLS/s,
" Pr. 47 Creep speed" to 1 kPLS/s, and deceleration time to 300 ms, the minimum value of " Pr. 50 Setting for the Movement
amount after near-point dog ON" is calculated as follows:
1
[Deceleration distance] = 2
Vz
1000
t + 0.01 Vz
Movement amount for
10ms at OPR speed.
Vz
Tb Vz
+ 0.01 Vz
= 2000
Vp
3
3
3
300
10 10
10 10
+ 0.01 10 10
= 2000
200 10 3
[OPR operation]
Pr.8 Speed limit value: Vp=200 kPLS/s
Pr.46 OPR speed:

Vz=10 kPLS/s
= 75 + 100
= 175
Pr.47 Creep speed: Vc=1 kPLS/s
Actual deceleration time:t = Tb
Vz
Vp
Setting for the movement amount after nearpoint

dog ON ( Pr. 50 ) should be equal to or larger
than 175.
t
Deceleration time: Tb=300 ms
Pr.51 OPR acceleration time selection

Set which of "acceleration time 0 to 3" to use for the acceleration time during OPR.
0 : Use the value set in " Pr.9 Acceleration time 0".
Pr.52 OPR deceleration time selection

Set which of "deceleration time 0 to 3" to use for the deceleration time during OPR.
0 : Use the value set in " Pr.10 Deceleration time 0".
5 - 55
MELSEC-Q

Item
Value set with peripheral

device
Default
value

address
The setting value range differs depending on the " Pr.1 Unit setting".
Pr.53
OP shift amount
Pr.54
84
85
234
235
384
385
534
535
300
86
236
386
536
88
238
388
538
89
239
389
539

1 to 300 (%)
1 to 300 (%)

Pr.56
0 : OPR speed
Speed designation
during OP shift
1 : Creep speed
Pr.57
Dwell time during

OPR retry
0 to 65535 (ms)
0 to 65535 (ms)
0 to 32767 :
Set as a decimal
32768 to 65535 :
Convert into hexadecimal and set
Pr.53 OP shift amount

Set the amount to shift (move) from the position stopped at with machine OPR.
The OP shift function is used to compensate the OP position stopped at with
machine OPR.
If there is a physical limit to the OP position, due to the relation of the near-point
dog installation position, use this function to compensate the OP to an optimum
position.
Pr.44 OPR direction
When " Pr.53 OP

shift amount" is positive
Shift point
Shift point
Start point
When " Pr.53 OP

shift amount" is negative
Zero signal
5 - 56
Shift after deviation

counter clear is canceled
MELSEC-Q
[Table 1]
(unit)
Pr.1 setting value

(unit)
0 : mm
-214748364.8 to 214748364.7 (m)
-2147483648 to 2147483647 ( 10-1m)
1 : inch
-21474.83648 to 21474.83647 (inch)
-2147483648 to 2147483647 ( 10-5inch)
2 : degree
-21474.83648 to 21474.83647 (degree)
-2147483648 to 2147483647 ( 10-5degree)
3 : PLS
-2147483648 to 2147483647 (PLS)
-2147483648 to 2147483647 (PLS)
Pr.54 OPR torque limit value

Set the value to limit the servomotor torque after reaching the creep speed during
machine OPR.
Refer to Section 12.4.2 "Torque limit function" for details on the torque limits.
Pr.56 Speed designation during OP shift

Set the operation speed for when a value other than "0" is set for " Pr.53 OP shift
amount". Select the setting from " Pr.46 OPR speed" or " Pr.47 Creep speed".
0 : Designate " Pr.46 OPR speed" as the setting value.
1 : Designate " Pr.47 Creep speed" as the setting value.
Pr.57 Dwell time during OPR retry

When OPR retry is validated (when "1" is set for Pr.48 ), set the stop time after
decelerating in 2) and 4) in the following drawing.
Temporarily stop for

the time set in Pr. 57
5)
1)
6)
Start position
4)
3)
5 - 57
2)
Temporarily stop for

the time set in Pr. 57
MELSEC-Q
5.2.7 Servo basic parameters

The Pr.101 correspond with "parameter No.1 of the servo amplifier". The following parameter correspond with
"servo amplifier parameters No." in the same way.
Item
Setting details
Setting value 1
0: MR-H-BN
Pr.100
Servo series
Used to select the servo amplifier series, which is

connected to the QD75.
Example) For used MR-J2-B
Set up "2: MR-J2-B".
1: MR-H-BN4-B
2: MR-J2-B
3: MR-J2S-B/MR-J2M-B
4: MR-J2-Jr
Pr.101
2
Amplifier setting
Used to select the absolute position detection system.

When used to the incremental: "0: invalid"
When used to the absolute position detection system: Absolute position detection
"1: valid"
selection
POINT
0: Invalid
When absolute position detection selection invalid is 1: Valid
selected with incremental encoder, a parameter
error occurs.
00: Not used
01: FR-RC, FR-BU
02: MR-RB013
03: MR-RB033
05: MR-RB32
06: MR-RB34
07: MR-RB54
08: MR-RB30
09: MR-RB50
0B: MR-RB31
0C: MR-RB51
Pr.102
2
Regenerative
Regene
selection brake
rative
option
brake
resistor
0E: Standard + fan

10: MR-RB032
Used to select the regenerative selection brake option
11: MR-RB12
and external dynamic brake.
12: MR-RB14
13: MR-RB5E
14: MR-RB5E + fan
15: MR-RB67
16: MR-RB67 + fan
17: MR-RB9F
18: MR-RB9F + fan
80: MR-RB3H-4
81: MR-RB5H-4
82: MR-RB3G-4
83: MR-RB5G-4
0:Invalid
1: Valid
Select the external

dynamic brake
5 - 58
MELSEC-Q
Setting Value, setting range

address

Servo amplifier setting invalid (
MRH-BN
MRH-BN4
MRJ2-B
: Invalid,
MRJ2S-B
MRJ2-Jr
: Valid)
Default
value
0 to 4
30100 30200 30300 30400
0 to 1
30101 30201 30301 30401
0000H
30102 30202 30302 30402
MRJ2M-B
H
Regenerative selection
brake option
Select the external
dynamic brake
1:
is used to set up the setting

value. (Hexadecimal)
3
3
3
3
2: Set the parameter value and switch power off once (The parameter is transferred to servo amplifier from QD75), then switch it on
again to make that parameter setting valid.
3: Servo amplifier type of 400V is made the target.
5 - 59
Item
MELSEC-Q
Setting details
Setting value 1
00: HA-SH Standard

01: HA-LH Low inertia
02: HA-UH Flat
03: HA-FH/HA-FF
05: HA-MH
Pr.103
Motor type
Used to select the motor type.

Use it "0080H: Automatic setting" usually.
POINT
07: HC-SF
08: HC-RF
09: HC-UF
Set up a motor type in "FFH" with PLC program when 0A: HA-FF
servo amplifier is MR-J2B-A15 (Motor: HC-KF).
0B: HC-MF
0C: HA-LF(400V[Class])
0E: HA-LF(200V[Class])
10: HA-LFIM(400V[Class])
13: HA-LFIM(200V[Class])
80: Automatic setting
Pr.104
Motor capacity
Used to select 100 times of the output capacity (kW)

of the motor by the number of hexadecimal.
Refer to the instruction manual of servo amplifier to
use for the output capacity of the motor.
Example 1) For used motor capacity is 50W
0.05(kW)
100 = 5
Set up "5H".
Example 2) For used motor capacity is 22kW
22(kW)
100 = 2200
Set up "2200H".
POINT
0000 to FFFF
Be sure to set up motor capacity.

Communication with servo amplifier isn't started by
the initial value "0" in default value. (The LED
indication of servo amplifier indicates "Ab".)
Pr.105
Servo motor speed
Used to select the rated speed[r/min] of the

servomotor.
Refer to the instruction manual of servomotor to use
for the rated rotation speed of servomotor.
1: 1000[r/min]
2: 2000[r/min]
3: 3000[r/min]
000: 16384[PLS]
001: 8192[PLS]
Pr.106
2
Feed back pulse
Used to select the feed back pulse. (The servomotor

resolution of a per rotation)
006: 32768[PLS]
007: 131072[PLS]
255: Depending on the number
of motor resolution pulses.
Pr.107
2
0: Forward rotation (CCW) with

the increase of the positioning
address.
Rotation direction selection
Used to set the rotation direction of the servomotor.
5 - 60
1: Reverse rotation (CW) with

the increase of the positioning
address.
MELSEC-Q

address

MRH-BN
MRH-BN4
MRJ2-B
: Invalid,
MRJ2S-B
MRJ2-Jr
: Valid)
Default
value
MRJ2M-B
0 0
H
80H
30103 30203 30303 30403
0000 to FFFF
0000H
30104 30204 30304 30404
1 to 3
30105 30205 30305 30405
0255
30106 30206 30306 30406
30107 30207 30307 30407
Motor type selection

1:

0
1:
Feedback pulse
number
0 to 1
5 - 61
Item
MELSEC-Q
Setting details
Setting value 1
Pr.108
Auto tuning
Used to select the auto tuning.
0: Auto tuning selected for use

of interpolation axis control,
etc. in position
1: Auto tuning for ordinary
operation.
2: Invalid (No auto tuning)
0: Interpolation mode
1: Auto tuning mode 1
2: Manual mode 2
3: Auto tuning mode 2
4: Manual mode 1
1: Normal mode
2: Normal mode
3: Normal mode
4: Normal mode
5: Normal mode
8: Large friction mode
9: Large friction mode
A: Large friction mode
B: Large friction mode
Pr.109
Servo response
Used to set the response of auto tuning.

(When " Pr.108 Auto tuning" is valid)
Optimum response can be selected according to the
rigidity of the machine. As machine rigidity is higher,
faster response can be set to improve tracking
performance in response to a command and to
reduce setting time.
C: Large friction mode

1: Low response (15Hz)
8: Middle response (70Hz)
9: High response (85Hz)
A: High response (105Hz)
B: High response (130Hz)
C: High response (160Hz)
D: High response (200Hz)
E: High response (240Hz)
F: High response (300Hz)
5 - 62
MELSEC-Q

address

MRH-BN
MRH-BN4
MRJ2-B
: Invalid,
MRJ2S-B
MRJ2-Jr
: Valid)
Default
value
MRJ2M-B
0 to 2
30108 30208 30308 30408
5H
30109 30209 30309 30409
0 to 4
1 to 5, 8 to C
1 to F
5 - 63
MELSEC-Q
5.2.8 Servo adjustment parameters
Item
Setting details
Setting value 1
Used to set the ratio of the load inertia to the inertia

moment of the servomotor.
When auto tuning is selected, the result of auto tuning
is automatically used.
0 to 100.0[times]
POINT
Pr.112 Load inertia ratio to Pr.117 Speed integral

compensation is transferred to servo amplifier in PLC
CPU power on, reset and PLC READY signal (Y0)
on. When auto tuning is executed, it is changed to the
optimum value inside servo amplifier.
The result of auto tuning is transferred to QD75 at this
time.
When auto tuning is invalid and wants to keep gain
adjustment result by "GX Configurator-QP", a reading
0 to 300.0[times]
stock is executed by Cd.102 Servo amplifier read to
QD75.
After that, execute Cd.1 Flash ROM write request,
and keep it in the flash ROM.
Pr.112
Load inertia ratio
Pr.113
Position loop gain 1
Used to set the gain of position loop 1. Increase the 4 to 1000[rad/s]

gain to improve trackability performance in response
to the position command.
4 to 2000[rad/s]
Pr.114
Speed loop gain 1
Normally this parameter setting need not be

changed. Higher setting increases the response
level but is liable to generate vibration and/or noise.
Pr.115
Pr.116
Pr.117
Position loop gain 2
Speed loop gain 2
Used to set the gain of the position loop.

Set this parameter to increase position response to
load disturbance.
Higher setting increases the response level but is
liable to generate vibration and/or noise.
20 to 5000[rad/s]
20 to 8000[rad/s]
1 to 500[rad/s]
1 to 1000[rad/s]
Set this parameter when vibration occurs on

machines of lowrigidity or large backlash.
Higher setting increases the response level but is
liable to generate vibration and/or noise.
20 to 20000[rad/s]
Used to set the constant of integral compensation.
1 to 1000[ms]
5 - 64
20 to 8000[rad/s]
MELSEC-Q

address

MRH-BN
MRH-BN4
MRJ2-B
: Invalid,
MRJ2S-B
MRJ2-Jr
: Valid)
Default
value
MRJ2M-B
0 to 1000
70
30112 30212 30312 30412
35
30113 30213 30313 30413
177
30114 30214 30314 30414
35
30115 30215 30315 30415
817
30116 30216 30316 30416
20
30117 30217 30317 30417
0 to 3000
4 to 1000
4 to 2000
20 to 5000
20 to 8000
1 to 500
1 to 1000
20 to 8000
20 to 20000
1 to 1000
5 - 65
Item
MELSEC-Q
Setting details
Setting value 1
00: Not used
Pr.118
Machine resonance suppression filter
01: 1125[Hz]
02: 563[Hz]
03: 375[Hz]
04: 282[Hz]
05: 225[Hz]
06: 188[Hz]
07: 161[Hz]
Notch filter selection

Used to set the notch frequency to match the
response frequency of the mechanical system.
Feed forward gain
08: 141[Hz]
01: 1125[Hz]
09: 125[Hz]
02: 563[Hz]
10: 113[Hz]
03: 375[Hz]
11: 102[Hz]
04: 282[Hz]
12: 94[Hz]
05: 563[Hz]
13: 87[Hz]
06: 375[Hz]
14: 80[Hz]
07: 282[Hz]
15: 75[Hz]
00: Invalid
10: 281.3[Hz]
01: 4500[Hz]
11: 264.7[Hz]
02: 2250[Hz]
12: 250[Hz]
03: 1500[Hz]
13: 236.8[Hz]
04: 1125[Hz]
14: 225[Hz]
05: 900[Hz]
15: 214.3[Hz]
06: 750[Hz]
16: 204.5[Hz]
07: 642.9[Hz]
17: 195.7[Hz]
08: 562.5[Hz]
18: 187.5[Hz]
09: 500[Hz]
19: 180[Hz]
0A: 450[Hz]
1A: 173.1[Hz]
0B: 409.1[Hz]
1B: 166.7[Hz]
0C: 375[Hz]
1C: 160.1[Hz]
0D: 346.2[Hz]
1D: 155.2[Hz]
0E: 321.4[Hz]
1E: 150[Hz]
0F: 300[Hz]
1F: 145.2[Hz]
0: Deep (-40db)
1:
(-14db)
2:
(-8db)
3: Shallow (-4db)
Notch depth selection
Pr.119
00: Invalid
Used to set the feed forward gain for position control.

Set "100" to nearly zero the droop pulse value when
operation is performed at constant speed.
Note that sudden acceleration/deceleration will
increase overshoot.
POINT
Be sure to set up this parameter "2: Invalid (No auto
tuning) when you set up Pr.108 Auto tuning.
5 - 66
0 to 100[%]
MELSEC-Q

address

MRH-BN
MRH-BN4
MRJ2-B
: Invalid,
MRJ2S-B
MRJ2-Jr
: Valid)
Default
value
MRJ2M-B
H
Notch filter
selection
1:
0000H
30118 30218 30318 30418
30119 30219 30319 30419

0 to 100
5 - 67
Item
MELSEC-Q
Setting details
Setting value 1
Pr.120
In-position range
Used to set the droop pulse range in which the inposition signal will be output to the servo system
controller.
0 to 50000[PLS]
POINT
Only MR-J2S-B sets up " Pr.106 Feed back pulse" in
the feed back pulse unit.
Electromagnetic brake
sequence output
Used to set a time delay from when the

electromagnetic brake interlock signal (MBR) turns
off until the base circuit is shut off.
Pr.121
0 to 1000[ms]
0: Speed ( output)
1: Torque ( output)
2: Speed ( output)
3: Torque ( + output)
4: Current command ( output)
5: Command speed ( output)
6: Droop pulses 1/1 ( output)
Pr.122
Analog monitor output

Monitor output mode
selection
(ch1, ch2)
A: Droop pulses 1/64 ( output)

Used to set the output signal from analog monitor ch1
and ch2 of the servo amplifier.
0: Speed ( output)
1: Torque ( output)
2: Speed ( output)
3: Torque (+ output)
4: Current command ( output)
5: Command speed ( output)
A: Droop pulses 1/1024 ( output)
5 - 68
MELSEC-Q

address

MRH-BN
MRH-BN4
MRJ2-B
: Invalid,
MRJ2S-B
MRJ2-Jr
: Valid)
Default
value
MRJ2M-B
0 to 50000
100
30120 30220 30320 30420
0 to 1000
30121 30221 30321 30421
0001H
30122 30222 30322 30422
Monitor 1
output setting
1:
H
Monitor 2
output setting

5 - 69
Item
MELSEC-Q
Setting details
Setting value 1
0: Servo motor speed ( 8V/max.

speed)
1: Generated torque ( 8V/max.
torque)
2: Motor speed ( + 8V/max. speed)
Pr.122
Analog monitor output
3: Generated torque ( + 8V/max.

torque)
4: Current command ( 8V/max.
current command)
Monitor output mode

selection
(ch1, ch2)
5: Command speed ( 8V/max.

command speed)
Used to set the output signal from analog monitor ch1

6: Droop pulses ( 10V/128
and ch2 of the servo amplifier.
pulses)

pulses)
pulses)
pulses)
A: Droop pulses ( 10V/131072
pulses)
B: Bus voltage (servo amplifier of
100V/200V: + 8V/400V, servo
amplifier of 400V: + 8V/800V)
Used to set the optional function 1 (Carrier frequency
(Low acoustic noise mode selection) )
Carrier frequency (Low acoustic noise mode
selection)
20[dB] can decrease the electromagnetic noise
Low acoustic noise mode
which occurs from servomotor when "1: 9.0[KHz]" is
selection
selection.
Pr.123
2
Optional function 1
Servo forced stop

selection
0: Valid (Use the forced stop

signal.)
1: Invalid (Do not use the forced
stop signal.)
0: 2.25[KHz]
2: 6.375[KHz]
3: 9.0[KHz]
0: 2-wire
Serial encoder cable
Used to set serial encoder cable selection.
5 - 70
1: 4-wire (Supports long distance

cables)
MELSEC-Q

address

MRH-BN
MRH-BN4
MRJ2-B
: Invalid,
MRJ2S-B
MRJ2-Jr
: Valid)
Default
value
MRJ2M-B
0
3
H
Monitor 2
output setting
Monitor 1
output setting
1:
0001H
30122 30222 30322 30422
0000H
30123 30223 30323 30423

H
Servo forced
stop selection
Low acoustic noise
mode selection
Serial encoder
cable setting
1:

3: Don't change setting value "0001H" by any means.
5 - 71
Item
MELSEC-Q
Setting details
Setting value
0: Invalid
1: Valid(Gain adjustment
mode: Manual mode Pr.108
Slight vibration
suppression control
selection
is set up "2" ))
Pr.124
2
Optional function 2
Motor-less operation
selection
0: Invalid
1: Valid
Used to set the optional function 2.

Motor operation-less
When the motor operation-less is made effective,
without connecting servomotor, a signal is
outputted, condition indication can be executed.
Electromagnetic brake
interlock output timing
Pr.125
Adaptive
vibration
suppression
control/ low
pass filter
0: There are no relations in

motor rotation speed, and it is
outputted under the next
condition.
1) Servo OFF
2) Alarm occurs
3) Emergency stop input turn
off (Valid)
1: Output is executed when
status of 1) to 3) and rotation
speed of the servomotor are
less than Pr.130 .
Low pass filter

selection
0: Valid (Automatic adjustment)

1: Invalid (But, the selection of
manual low pass filter
frequency is effective.)
Adaptive
vibration
Used to set the low pass filter and the adaptive
suppression
vibration suppression control.
control selection
0: Invalid
1: Valid (Machine resonance
frequency is always detected
and the filter is generated in
response to resonance to
suppress machine vibration.
2: Held (The characteristics of
the filter generated so far are
held, and detection of
machine resonance is
stopped.
Adaptive
vibration
suppression
control
sensitivity
0: Normal
1: Large sensitivity
5 - 72
MELSEC-Q

address

MRH-BN
MRH-BN4
MRJ2-B
: Invalid,
MRJ2S-B
MRJ2-Jr
: Valid)
Default
value
MRJ2M-B
0H
0000H
30124 30224 30224 30424
0000H
30125 30225 30325 30425
Slight vibration
suppression
control setting
Motor-less operation
selection
Electromagnetic brake interlock
output timing setting
1:

Low pass filter selection

control selection
control sensitivity selection
1: is used to set up the setting
5 - 73
MELSEC-Q
5.2.9 Servo expansion parameters
Item
Setting details
Setting value 1
Pr.127
Pr.128
Monitor output 1 offset

(Analog monitor 1 offset)
Used to set the offset voltage for monitor output 1.
Monitor output 2 offset

(Analog monitor 2 offset)
Used to set the offset voltage for monitor output 2.
-9999 to 9999
-999 to 999
-9999 to 9999
-999 to 999
0: Speed
1: Torque
Pre-alarm data selection
Pr.129
2: Speed (+)
3: Torque (+)
4: Current command output
5: Command (F
T)
6: Droop pulses 1/1

2
Used to set the pre-alarm data selection.
7: Droop pulses 1/4

8: Droop pulses 1/16
9: Droop pulses 1/32
A: Droop pulses 1/64
0: 1.77[ms]
1: 3.55[ms]
Pre-alarm data sampling

time selection
2: 7.11[ms]
3: 14.22[ms]
4: 28.44[ms]
Pr.130
Zero speed
Used to set the output range of the Zero speed signal

0 to 10000[r/min]
(ZSP).
Pr.131
Error excessive alarm level
Used to set the output range of the error excessive

alarm.
Pr.132
Optional function 5

1
PI-PID control switch-over Used to select the PI-PID control switch-over.
0 to 1000[PLS]
0.1 to 100.0[0.25rev]
0: PI control is always valid.

1: Switched to PI control when
the droop value is reached or
exceeded.
2: PID control is always valid.
Servo reading character

Use to read the reason after the amplifier 0400H why 0: Japanese
(Servo retrieve character)
it doesn't rotate, data, parameter item and alarm item. 1: English
5
5 - 74
MELSEC-Q

address

MRH-BN
MRH-BN4
MRJ2-B
: Invalid,
MRJ2S-B
MRJ2-Jr
: Valid)
Default
value
MRJ2M-B
-9999 to 9999
3
0000
30127 30227 30327 30427
0000
30128 30228 30328 30428
0001H
30129 30229 30329 30429
0 to 10000
50
30130 30230 30330 30430
1 to 1000
80
30131 30231 30331 30431
0000H
30132 30232 30332 30432
-999 to 999
-9999 to 9999
-999 to 999
H
Pre-alarm data
selection 2
Pre-alarm data
selection 1
Pre-alarm data sampling
time selection
00
PI-PID control switch

over selection
Servo reading character selection
1:

3: Don't change setting value "0000H".
4: You cannot change parameter "Serial communication response delay time setting" and "Serial communication baud rate setting".
5: Don't use to the parameter (normal). Don't change setting value "Default value" by any means.
6: The unit setting differs according to the software version of the servo amplifier. Refer to the "Servo Amplifier Instruction Manual".
5 - 75
Item
MELSEC-Q
Setting details
Pr.133
Pr.134
Optional function 6
Setting value 1
Serial communication
baud rate selection
0: 9600[bps] 2: 38400[bps]
1: 19200[bps] 3: 57600[bps]
response delay time
selection
A communication baud rate selection and

0: Invalid
communication answer delay time and encoder output 1: Valid (It answer after delay
time of more than 888s)
pulse setup selection.
0: Output pulse setting selection

1: Divided perimeter ratio
0: It is necessary to pass through
OPR set condition
the Z phase after the power
on.
A condition to execute the OPR set from servo system
selection
1: It is not necessary to pass
(Zeroing condition setting controller is selection.
through the Z phase after the
selection)
power on.
Encoder output pulse
setting selection
PI-PID control switch-over

position droop
Used to select the position droop value (Number of

pulse) which PI control is switched over to PID control.
0 to 50000[PLS]
Pr.132 becomes effective when a parameter is made
"0001H".
Pr.136
Speed differential
compensation
Used to select the differential compensation value.

Setting speed integral compensation value to 1000 in
PI (proportionally integral) control specifies the
ordinary P (proportional) control range, setting the
value to less than 1000 increase the P control range.
0 to 1000
Used to set the encoder pulse (A-phase, B-phase)

output by the servo amplifier. (after the 4 times )
You can use Pr.133 to choose the output pulse
Pr.138
2
Encoder output pulses
setting or output division ratio setting.

The number of A-phase and B-phase pulse actually
output 1/4 times greater than the present number of
pulse.
The maximum output frequency is 1.3Mpps (after
multiplication by 4). Use this parameter within this
range.
5 - 76
0 to 65535
MELSEC-Q

address

MRH-BN
MRH-BN4
MRJ2-B
: Invalid,
MRJ2S-B
MRJ2-Jr
: Valid)
Default
value
MRJ2M-B
H
baud rate selection
response delay time selection
0000H
30133 30233 30333 30433
0 to 50000
30134 30234 30334 30434
0 to 1000
980
30136 30236 30336 30436
0 to 65535
4000
30138 30238 30338 30438
Encoder output pulse setting selection

OPR set condition selection
4: You cannot change parameter "Serial communication response delay time setting" and "Serial communication baud rate setting".
5 - 77
MELSEC-Q
5.2.10 Servo expansion parameters 2
Item
Setting details
Pr.143
3
Slight vibration suppression

control selection 1
Setting value 1
Position gain 2 shift

value
Speed gain 2 shift
value
Used to set each of the gain shift value which the

slight vibration suppression control selected.
0: 1.0[times]
1: 0.75[times]
2: 0.5[times]
3: 0.25[times]
Speed integral
compensation shift
value
Pr.144
3
Slight vibration suppression

control selection 2
Used to set the time after in-position completion gain

shift value which the slight vibration suppression
control selected.
0 to 1000[ms]
Pr.145
3
Induction voltage
compensation
Use to set the induction voltage compensation range.
0 to 100[%]
Gain changing selection
Used to set the gain changing selection.

The gain changing function becomes effective when
the gain adjustment mode is used manual mode 2.
( Pr.108 is set "2").
0: Invalid
2: (Effective in more than)
Command frequency [KPPS]
Droop pulse [PLS]
Model speed [r/min]
Pr.150
Gain changing condition
Used to set the ratio of changing Pr.152 to Pr.155

when gain changing is valid.
0 to 9999
Used to set Pr.149 when command frequency, droop
pulse or model speed is selection.
Pr.151
Gain changing time constant
Used to set the time constant at which the gains will

change in response to the conditions set in Pr.149
and Pr.150 .
0 to 100[ms]
Pr.152
Ratio of load inertia moment

to servomotor inertia
moment 2
(Load moment of inertia ratio
2)
Used to set the ratio of load inertia moment to servo

motor inertia moment when gain changing is valid.
Made valid when auto tuning is invalid.
0 to 300.0[times]
Pr.153
Used to set the ratio of changing the position loop

Position loop gain 2 changing
gain 2 when gain changing is valid.
ratio
Pr.154
Speed loop gain 2 changing

ratio
Pr.149
2
Used to set the ratio of changing the speed loop gain

2 when gain changing is valid.
5 - 78
10 to 200[%]
10 to 200[%]
MELSEC-Q

address

MRH-BN
MRH-BN4
MRJ2-B
: Invalid,
MRJ2S-B
MRJ2-Jr
: Valid)
Default
value
MRJ2M-B
H
Position gain 2 shift value
Speed gain 2 shift value
1:
0111H
30143 30243 30343 30443
0 to 1000
20
30144 30244 30344 30444
0 to 100
50
30145 30245 30345 30445
0, 2 to 4H
0000H
30149 30249 30349 30449
0 to 9999
10
30150 30250 30350 30450
0 to 100
30151 30251 30351 30451
0 to 3000
70
30152 30252 30352 30452
10 to 200
100
30153 30253 30353 30453
10 to 200
100
30154 30254 30354 30454
Speed integral compensation shift value

3: Don't use to the parameter (normal). Don't change setting value "Default value" by any means.
5 - 79
Item
MELSEC-Q
Setting details
Setting value 1
Pr.161
Optional function C
Pr.160
Machine resonance suppression filter 2
Pr.155

changing ratio
(VEL. INTGRL. COMPS.
Gain 2 change ratio.)
Encoder output pulse

direction
Used to set the ratio of changing the speed integral

compensation when gain changing is valid. Made
valid when auto tuning is invalid.
50 to 1000[%]
Used to set the encoder output pulse direction
0: CCW progress to A phases 90

1: CW progress to A phases 90
Notch filter frequency

selection
Used to set the machine resonance suppression
filter.
About adaptive vibration suppression control, "Valid"
or when it is set as "Held" ( Pr.125 : 1 or
2), a Machine resonance suppression filter
becomes invalid.
00: Invalid
10: 281.3[Hz]
01: 4500[Hz]
11: 264.7[Hz]
02: 2250[Hz]
12: 250[Hz]
03: 1500[Hz]
13: 236.8[Hz]
04: 1125[Hz]
14: 225[Hz]
05: 900[Hz]
15: 214.3[Hz]
06: 750[Hz]
16: 204.5[Hz]
07: 642.9[Hz]
17: 195.7[Hz]
08: 562.5[Hz]
18: 187.5[Hz]
09: 500[Hz]
19: 180[Hz]
0A: 450[Hz]
1A: 173.1[Hz]
0B: 409.1[Hz]
1B: 166.7[Hz]
0C: 375[Hz]
1C: 160.1[Hz]
0D: 346.2[Hz]
1D: 155.2[Hz]
0E: 321.4[Hz]
1E: 150[Hz]
0F: 300[Hz]
1F: 145.2[Hz]
0: Deep (-40db)
1:
(-14db)
2:
(-8db)
3: Shallow (-4db)
5 - 80
MELSEC-Q

address

MRH-BN
MRH-BN4
MRJ2-B
: Invalid,
MRJ2S-B
MRJ2-Jr
: Valid)
Default
value
MRJ2M-B
50 to 1000
00
100
30155 30255 30355 30455
0000H
30160 30260 30360 30460
0000H
30161 30261 30361 30461
Encoder output
pulse direction selection
1:

H
Notch filter frequency
selection
1:

5 - 81
MELSEC-Q
5.3 List of positioning data

Before explaining the positioning data setting items Da.1 to Da.10 , the configuration
of the positioning data will be shown below.
The positioning data stored in the QD75 buffer memory has the following type of
configuration.
fu
[
^
f@[ ^ 599
@ 600
u

Positioning data No.
u

u
q
7980 7990
3
Da.1@
` @ Da.4
Da.1@
` @ Da.4

q
u

identifier

u
q
Positioning
2020
2010Da.5
Da.1@
` @ Da.5
Da.4
2000
7981 7991
Da.1@
`
@
Da.4
Da.1 to Da.5

A
h

X
u

Au
h
X
Da.5
Da.6
Axis 1
Da.6
2022
2012Da.7
Da.7
2002
~
A
h
X
X
wx

x
Dwell time
w
Da.9
One positioning data item is configured of the items shown in the

bold box.
2021
Da.10 Da.5
2011Da.6
Da.6
2001
7982 7992

A
h

X

Au
h
A
h

X
M code u
~
Up to 600 positioning data items can be set (stored) for each axis
in the buffer memory address shown on the left.
This data is controlled as positioning data No. 1 to 600 for each axis.
7984 7994
7985 7995
2024
Da.7
2014Da.8
2004 Da.8
7986 7996
x

x2005 2015 2025
w
speed
w

E
F

^
C
7987 7997
Command
h
E
Fh
^
Da.8
Da.7
2026
Da.6 Da.8 Da.8
2016Da.9
2006 Da.9
h
E address/
F
^
C
h
E
F
2007
^
C
2017 2027
Positioning
M
R [ h
M
R [ h
movement amount
Da.9
2028
2008 2018
Da.7 Da.9
M
R [ h
2009 2019 2029
M
R [ h
Arc address
7988 7998
7989 7999
[
^
f@[ ^ 599
@ 600
u

fu
u

u
q
13990
3
Da.1@
`
@ 13980
Da.4
Da.1@ ` @ Da.4

q
u

identifier

u
q
Positioning
8020
8010Da.5
Da.1@
`
@ Da.5
Da.4
8000
13981 13991
Da.1 Da.1@
to Da.5` @ Da.4

A
h

X
u

Au
h
Da.6
Axis 2
Da.6
8022
8012Da.7
Da.7
8002
X
w

x
Dwell time
w
Da.9
13984 13994
13985 13995
8024
Da.7
8014Da.8
8004Da.8
13986 13996
8025
wx

x8005 8015
h
E
F

^
C
13987 13997
Command speed

h
E
F
^
Da.8
b15
b12
b8
b4
b0
Buffer memory
Da.5
8021
Da.10 Da.5
8011Da.6
Da.6
13982 13992

A8001
h

X

Au
h
A
h

X
M code
~
Configuration of positioning identifier
Da.7
8026
Da.8
Da.6
8016Da.9
8006Da.9
8027
h
E
F
8007
^
C
8017 M
Positioning
h
E address/
F
M
R [ h
R [ h
movement amount
8028
Da.9
8008 8018
Da.7 Da.9
M
R [ h
8009 8019 8029
M
R [ h
Arc address
13988 13998
13989 13999
5 - 82
Da.2 Control system

Da.5
Axis to be
interpolated
Da.3 Acceleration time No.

Da.4 Deceleration time No.
599
MELSEC-Q
600

q
u
u

q
19990
3
Da.1@
`
@ 19980
Da.4
2
Da.1@ ` @ Da.4

q
u

identifier

u
q
Positioning
14020
Da.5
14010
Da.1@
` @ Da.5
Da.4
14000
19981 19991
Da.1@
`
@
Da.4
Da.1 to Da.5

h

AX

X
u

Au

Da.6
14022
14012Da.7
Da.7
A14002

X
A h
Xh
wx

x
Dwell time
w
Da.6
Da.9
Axis 3
Da.5
14021
Da.10 Da.5
Da.6
14011Da.6
19992

u

h
14001
AX
h

X
A

19982
X
M code
~

A h
Xh
19984 19994
19985 19995
14024
14014Da.8
14004Da.8
19986 19996
14025
14015
x
14005
w
speed
x
h
E
F

^
C
19987 19997
Command
h
E F
^
C
Da.8
Da.7
Da.7
Da.8
14026
Da.6
14016Da.9
14006Da.9
14027
14017
h
E
F
Positioning
address/
h
E
F
^
C
14007 M
R [ h
R [ h
M
movement amount
Da.9
14028
Da.7 Da.9
14008 14018
R [ h
14009 14019 14029
M
R [ h
M
Arc address
19988 19998
19989 19999
Buffer memory address

599
600

q
u

u

q
25990
3
` @ 25980
Da.4
Da.1@ Da.1@
` @ Da.4

q
u

identifier

u
q
Positioning
20020
Da.5
20010
Da.1@
`
@ Da.5
Da.4
20000
25981 25991
Da.1@
Da.1 to
Da.5 ` @ Da.4

h

A

X
u

Au

Xh
Da.6
20022
20012Da.7
Da.7
~
A20002

X

h
A
Xh
wx

x
Dwell time
w
Da.9
Axis 4
Da.6
Da.5
20021
Da.10 Da.5
Da.6
20011Da.6
25992

h
20001
A

X

Au

Xh
~
A

25982
X
M code
~

A h
Xh
25984 25994
25985 25995
20024
Da.7
20014Da.8
20004Da.8
25986 25996
20025
wx

x20005 20015
E
F

^
C
25987 25997
Command speed

h
E F
h
^
C
Da.8
Da.7
Da.8
20026
Da.6
20016Da.9
20006Da.9
h
E
F
20007
^
C
20017 20027
Positioning
h
Eaddress/
F
^
C
R [ h
M
R [ h
M
movement amount
25988 25998
25989 25999
Da.9
20028
20008 20018
M
R [ h
20009 20019 20029
M
R
[
h
Arc address
Da.7
Da.9
The descriptions that follow relate to the positioning data set items Da.1 to Da.10 .
(The buffer memory addresses shown are those of the "positioning data No. 1" for the
axes 1 to 4.)
5 - 83
Default
value
Setting value
Item
Da.1
Operation
pattern
MELSEC-Q
00: Positioning complete
00
01: Continuous positioning control
01
11: Continuous path control
11
ABS1 : 1-axis linear control (ABS)

INC1 : 1-axis linear control (INC)
FEED1 : 1-axis fixed-feed control
VF1 : 1-axis speed control (forward run)
VR1 : 1-axis speed control (reverse run)
VPF : Speed-position switching control (forward
run)
VPR : Speed-position switching control (reverse
run)
PVF : Position-speed switching control (forward
run)
PVR : Position-speed switching control (reverse
run)
ABS2 : 2-axis linear interpolation control (ABS)
INC2 : 2-axis linear interpolation control (INC)
FEED2 : Fixed-feed control by 2-axis linear
interpolation
ABS : Circular interpolation control with sub point
specified (ABS)
INC
: Circular interpolation control with sub point
specified (INC)
ABS . : Circular interpolation control with center
point specified (ABS, CW)
ABS . : Circular interpolation control with center
point specified (ABS, CCW)
INC . : Circular interpolation control with center
point specified (INC, CW)
INC . : Circular interpolation control with center
point specified (INC, CCW)
NOP : NOP instruction
POS : Current value changing
JUMP : JUMP instruction
LOOP : Declares the beginning of LOOP to LEND
section
LEND : Declares the end of LOOP to LEND
section
01H
02H
03H
04H
05H

address
Operation pattern
06H
07H
08H
09H
0AH
0BH
0CH
0DH
Positioning identifier
Da.2
Control
system
0EH
0FH
11H
Setting value
12H
13H
14H
15H
16H
H
Convert into
hexadecimal
17H
18H
19H
1AH
1BH
b15 b12
b8
b4
b0
1CH
1DH
1EH
80H
81H
82H
83H
84H
00
Da.3
Acceleration
time No.
01
0: Pr.10
Da.4
1: Pr.28
Deceleration
2: Pr.29
time No.
3: Pr.30
Deceleration time 0
00
Deceleration time 1
01
Deceleration time 2
10
Deceleration time 3
11
0: Axis1
Da.5
1: Axis 2
Axis to be
interpolated 2: Axis 3
3: Axis 4
Control system
10H
10
11
Acceleration
time
Deceleration time
00
01
10
11
Axis to be interpolated
(in 2-axis interpolation only)
5 - 84
0000H 2000
8000 14000 20000
MELSEC-Q

The operation pattern designates whether positioning of a certain data No. is to be
ended with just that data, or whether the positioning for the next data No. is to be
carried out in succession.
[Operation pattern]
Positioning complete ...................................................................... Independent positioning control
Continuous positioning with one start signal .......... Continuous positioning control
Positioning
continued
Continuous path positioning with speed change ..... Continuous path control
1) Positioning complete..................... Set to execute positioning to the designated

address, and then complete positioning.
2) Continuous positioning control ..... Positioning is carried out successively in
order of data Nos. with one start signal.
The operation halts at each position
indicated by a positioning data.
3) Continuous path control................ Positioning is carried out successively in
order of data Nos. with one start signal.
The operation does not stop at each
positioning data.
Da.2 Control system

Set the "control system" for carrying out positioning control.
Note)
When "JUMP instruction" is set for the control system, the " Da.9
Dwell time" and " Da.10 M code" setting details will differ.
In case you selected "LOOP" as the control system, the " Da.10
M code" should be set differently from other cases.

Refer to Chapter 9 "Major positioning control" for details on the control
systems.
If "degree" is set for " Pr.1 Unit setting", circular interpolation control
cannot be carried out. (The "Circular interpolation not possible error"
will occur when executed (error code: 535).)

Set which of "acceleration time 0 to 3" to use for the acceleration time during
positioning.
5 - 85
MELSEC-Q

Set which of "deceleration time 0 to 3" to use for the deceleration time during
positioning.
Da.5 Axis to be interpolated

Set the target axis (partner axis) for operations under the 2-axis interpolation
control.
0 : Selects the axis 1 as the target axis (partner axis).
Do not specify the own axis number or any number except the above.
Note)
(If you do, the "Illegal interpolation description command error" will
occur during the program execution (error code: 521).)
This item does not need to be set in case 3 or 4-axis interpolation is
selected.
Item
Default
value

address
2006 8006 14006 20006

2007 8007 14007 20007
The setting value range differs according to the " Da.2 Control
Da.6
movement amount
system".
Here, the value within the following range of [Table 1] range is set.
Da.6 Positioning address/movement amount

Set the address to be used as the target value for positioning control.
The setting value range differs according to the " Da.2 Control system".
((1) to (4))
(1) Absolute (ABS) system, current value changing
The setting value (positioning address) for the ABS system and current value
changing is set with an absolute address (address from OP).
Stop position
(positioning start address)
-1000
1000
Movement
amount
: 2000
5 - 86
3000
Movement
amount
: 2000
MELSEC-Q
(2) Incremental (INC) system, fixed-feed 1, fixed-feed 2, fixed-feed 3,

fixed-feed 4
The setting value (movement amount) for the INC system is set as a
movement amount with sign.
When movement amount is positive: Moves in the positive direction (address
increment direction)
When movement amount is negative: Moves in the negative direction (address
decrement direction)
Stop position
(positioning start position)
(Movement amount)
-30000
Moves in
negative direction
(Movement amount)
30000
Moves in
positive direction
[Table 1]
When " Pr.1 Unit Setting" is "mm"
The table below lists the control systems that require the setting of the positioning
address or movement amount and the associated setting ranges.
(With any control system excluded from the table below, neither the positioning
address nor the movement amount needs to be set.)
(m)
Da.2 setting value
ABS Linear 1
:
ABS Linear 2
:
ABS Linear 3
:
ABS Linear 4
:
:
INC Linear 1
:
INC Linear 2
:
INC Linear 3
:
INC Linear 4
:
Fixed-feed 1
:
Fixed-feed 2
:
Fixed-feed 3
:
Fixed-feed 4
:
Forward run speed/position :
Reverse run speed/position :
Forward run position/speed :
Reverse run position/speed :
ABS circular sub
:
ABS circular right
:
ABS circular left
:
INC circular sub
:
INC circular right
:
INC circular left
:
01H
0AH
15H
1AH
81H
02H
0BH
16H
1BH
03H
0CH
17H
1CH
06H
07H
08H
09H
0DH
0FH
10H
0EH
11H
12H

( 10-1m)
Set the address

-214748364.8 to 214748364.7
Set the address

-2147483648 to 2147483647
Set the movement amount

-214748364.8 to 214748364.7

-2147483648 to 2147483647

0 to 214748364.7

0 to 2147483647
Set the address

-214748364.8 to 214748364.7
Set the address

-2147483648 to 2147483647

-214748364.8 to 214748364.7

-2147483648 to 2147483647
1: Set an integer because the PLC program cannot handle fractions.

(The value will be converted properly within the system.)
5 - 87
MELSEC-Q
(3) Speed-position switching control
INC mode:
Set the amount of movement after the switching from speed control to position
control.
ABS mode:
Set the absolute address which will be the target value after speed control is
switched to position control. (The unit is "degree" only)
Speed
Movement amount setting (INC mode)
Speed
control
Position
control
Target address setting (ABS mode)

Time
(4) Position-speed switching control
Set the amount of movement before the switching from position control to
speed control.
When " Pr.1 Unit Setting" is "degree"

(degree)
Da.2 setting value
ABS Linear 1
ABS Linear 2
ABS Linear 3
ABS Linear 4
INC Linear 1
INC Linear 2
INC Linear 3
INC Linear 4
Fixed-feed 1
Fixed-feed 2
Fixed-feed 3
Fixed-feed 4
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
01H
0AH
Set the address
15H
0 to 359.99999
1AH
81H
02H
0BH
16H
1BH Set the movement amount
03H
-21474.83648 to 21474.83647
0CH
17H
1CH
In INC mode
0 to 21474.83647
Forward run speed/position : 06H
Reverse run speed/position : 07H In ABS mode
Set the address
0 to 359.99999
Forward run position/speed : 08H
Reverse run position/speed : 09H

0 to 21474.83647

5 - 88

( 10-5 degree)
Set the address
0 to 35999999

-2147483648 to 2147483647
In INC mode
0 to 2147483647
In ABS mode
Set the address
0 to 35999999
0 to 2147483647
MELSEC-Q
When " Pr.1 Unit Setting" is "PLS"

(PLS)
Da.2 setting value
ABS Linear 1
:
ABS Linear 2
:
ABS Linear 3
:
ABS Linear 4
:
:
INC Linear 1
:
INC Linear 2
:
INC Linear 3
:
INC Linear 4
:
Fixed-feed 1
:
Fixed-feed 2
:
Fixed-feed 3
:
Fixed-feed 4
:
ABS circular sub
:
ABS circular right
:
ABS circular left
:
INC circular sub
:
INC circular right
:
INC circular left
:
01H
0AH
15H
1AH
81H
02H
0BH
16H
1BH
03H
0CH
17H
1CH
06H
07H
08H
09H
0DH
0FH
10H
0EH
11H
12H
1 (PLS)
Set the address

-2147483648 to 2147483647
Set the address

-2147483648 to 2147483647

-2147483648 to 2147483647

-2147483648 to 2147483647

0 to 2147483647

0 to 2147483647
Set the address

-2147483648 to 2147483647
Set the address

-2147483648 to 2147483647

-2147483648 to 2147483647

-2147483648 to 2147483647

5 - 89
MELSEC-Q
When " Pr.1 Unit Setting" is "inch"

(inch)
Da.2 setting value
ABS Linear 1
:
ABS Linear 2
:
ABS Linear 3
:
ABS Linear 4
:
:
INC Linear 1
:
INC Linear 2
:
INC Linear 3
:
INC Linear 4
:
Fixed-feed 1
:
Fixed-feed 2
:
Fixed-feed 3
:
Fixed-feed 4
:
ABS circular sub
:
ABS circular right
:
ABS circular left
:
INC circular sub
:
INC circular right
:
INC circular left
:
01H
0AH
15H
1AH
81H
02H
0BH
16H
1BH
03H
0CH
17H
1CH
06H
07H
08H
09H
0DH
0FH
10H
0EH
11H
12H

( 10-5 inch)
Set the address

-21474.83648 to 21474.83647
Set the address

-2147483648 to 2147483647

-21474.83648 to 21474.83647

-2147483648 to 2147483647

0 to 21474.83647

0 to 2147483647
Set the address

-21474.83648 to 21474.83647
Set the address

-2147483648 to 2147483647

-21474.83648 to 21474.83647

-2147483648 to 2147483647

5 - 90
MEMO
5 - 91
MELSEC-Q
Item
MELSEC-Q

Default
value

address
2008 8008 14008 20008

2009 8009 14009 20009
Da.7
system".
Arc address
Da.7 Arc address

The arc address is data required only when carrying out circular interpolation
control.
(1) When carrying out circular interpolation with sub point designation, set the sub
point (passing point) address as the arc address.
(2) When carrying out circular interpolation with center point designation, set the
center point address of the arc as the arc address.
End point address
(Address set with Da.6 )
End point address


Sub point
Start point address (Address before starting positioning)
<(1) Circular interpolation with sub

point designation>
Start point address (Address before starting positioning)
<(2) Circular interpolation with center

point designation>
When not carrying out circular interpolation control, the value set in " Da.7 Arc
address" will be invalid.
5 - 92
MELSEC-Q
[Table 1]
When " Pr.1 Unit Setting" is "mm"
The table below lists the control systems that require the setting of the arc address
and shows the setting range.
(With any control system excluded from the table below, the arc address does not
need to be set.)
(m)
Da.2 setting value
ABS circular sub

ABS circular right
ABS circular left
INC circular sub
INC circular right
INC circular left
:
:
:
:
:
:
0DH
0FH Set the address

-214748364.8 to 214748364.7
10H
0EH
11H
-214748364.8 to 214748364.7
12H

( 10-1m)
Set the address

-2147483648 to 2147483647
-2147483648 to 2147483647

When " Pr.1 Unit Setting" is "degree"

No control system requires the setting of the arc address by "degree".
When " Pr.1 Unit Setting" is "PLS"
need to be set.)
(PLS)
Da.2 setting value
ABS circular sub

ABS circular right
ABS circular left
INC circular sub
INC circular right
INC circular left
:
:
:
:
:
:
0DH
0FH Set the address

-2147483648 to 2147483647
10H
0EH
11H
-2147483648 to 2147483647
12H
1 (PLS)
Set the address

-2147483648 to 2147483647
-2147483648 to 2147483647

When " Pr.1 Unit Setting" is "inch"

need to be set.)
(inch)
Da.2 setting value
ABS circular sub

ABS circular right
ABS circular left
INC circular sub
INC circular right
INC circular left
:
:
:
:
:
:
0DH
0FH Set the address

-21474.83648 to 21474.83647
10H
0EH
11H
-21474.83648 to 21474.83647
12H

5 - 93

(10-5 inch)
Set the address
-2147483648 to 2147483647
-2147483648 to 2147483647
MELSEC-Q
Item
Default
value

address
setting".
Da.8
Command speed
-1: Current speed
(Speed set for previous
positioning data No.)
2004
2005
8004 14004 20004

8005 14005 20005
2002
8002 14002 20002
2001
8001 14001 20001
-1
Dwell time
system".
Dwell time/
JUMP
JUMP
destination
positioning data destination
positioning
No.
data No.
Da.9
M code
Da.10
M code
The setting value range differs according to the" Da.2 Control
system".
Condition
data No.
No. of
LOOP to
LEND
repetitions
Da.8 Command speed

Set the command speed for positioning.
(1) If the set command speed exceeds " Pr.8 Speed limit value", positioning will
be carried out at the speed limit value.
(2) If "-1" is set for the command speed, the current speed (speed set for previous
positioning data No.) will be used for positioning control. Use the current
speed for uniform speed control, etc. If "-1" is set for continuing positioning
data, and the speed is changed, the following speed will also change.
(Note that when starting positioning, if the "-1" speed is set for the positioning
data that carries out positioning control first, the error "Command speed is
not set"(error code: 503) will occur, and the positioning will not start.
Refer to Section 15.2 "List of errors" for details on the errors.)
5 - 94
MELSEC-Q
Da.10 M code (or condition data No./No. of LOOP to LEND repetitions)

Set an "M code", a "condition data No. ", or the "number of LOOP to LEND
repetitions" depending on how the " Da.2 Control system" is set.
If a method other than "JUMP instruction" and "LOOP" is selected as the

" Da.2 Control system"
............... Set an "M code".
If no "M code" needs to be output, set "0" (default value).
If "JUMP instruction" or "LOOP" is selected as the " Da.2 Control system"

............... Set the "condition data No." for JUMP.
0
: Unconditional JUMP to the positioning data specified
by Da.9 .
1 to 10 : JUMP performed according to the condition data No.
specified (a number between 1 and 10).
Make sure that you specify the number of LOOP to LEND repetitions
by a number other than "0". The "Control system LOOP setting error"
will occur if you specify "0". (error code: 545)
The condition data specifies the condition for the JUMP instruction to be
executed.
(A JUMP will take place when the condition is satisfied.)
[Table 1]
Pr.1 setting value

(unit)
0 : mm
0.01 to 20000000.00 (mm/min)
1 to 2000000000 ( 10-2mm/min)
1 : inch
0.001 to 2000000.000 (inch/min)
1 to 2000000000 ( 10-3inch/min)
2 : degree
0.001 to 2000000.000 (degree/min)
1 to 2000000000 ( 10-3degree/min)
3 : PLS
1 to 10000000 (PLS/s)
1 to 10000000 (PLS/s)
[Table 2]
Da.2 setting value
Setting item
JUMP instruction: 82H
Other than JUMP instruction
Dwell time

device
Value set with PLC

program
1 to 600
1 to 600
0 to 65535 (ms)
0 to 65535 (ms)

device
Value set with PLC

program
[Table 3]
Da.2 setting value
Setting item
JUMP instruction: 82H
Condition data No.
0 to 10
0 to 10
Other than JUMP instruction
M code
0 to 65535
0 to 65535
LOOP: 83H
Repetition count
1 to 65535
1 to 65535
5 - 95
MELSEC-Q
Da.9 Dwell time/JUMP designation positioning data No.

Set the "dwell time" or "positioning data No." corresponding to the " Da.2 Control
system".
When a method other than "JUMP instruction " is set for " Da.2 Control system"
..... Set the "dwell time".

When "JUMP instruction " is set for " Da.2 Control system"
..... Set the "positioning data No." for the JUMP destination.
When the "dwell time" is set, the setting details of the "dwell time" will be as follows
according to " Da.1 Operation pattern".
1) When " Da.1 Operation pattern" in "00: Positioning complete"
Positioning control
Set the time from when the positioning ends to when the
"positioning complete signal" turns ON as the "dwell time".
t
ON
OFF
Da.9
Dwell time
V
2) When " Da.1 Operation pattern" is "01: Continuous positioning control"
Positioning control
Next positioning
control
Set the time from when positioning control ends to when

the next positioning control starts as the "dwell time".
Da.9
Dwell time
3) When " Da.1 Operation pattern" is "11: Continuous path control"
The setting value is irrelevant to the control.
(The "dwell time" is 0ms.)
Positioning control
Next positioning control
t
No dwell time (0ms)
5 - 96
MEMO
5 - 97
MELSEC-Q
MELSEC-Q
5.4 List of block start data

The illustrations below show the organization of the block start data stored in the QD75
buffer memory. The block start data setting items Da.11 to Da.14 are explained in
the pages that follow.
50th point
Buffer memory
address
Setting item
2nd point
1st point
Setting item
Buffer memory
address
Axis 1 (Start block 0)
Setting item

u

n f [ ^
b15
b8 b7
Buffer memory
address
26049
For information on the organization of the

buffer memory addresses assigned to the
start blocks 1 to 4, refer to Appendix
7 "List of buffer memory addresses".
26001
b0
26000
Da.12 Start data No.
Da.11 Shape
b15
b8 b7
26099
26051
b0
26050
Da.13 Special start
instruction
Da.14 Parameter
50th point
Buffer memory
address
Setting item
2nd point
1st point
Setting item
Buffer memory
address
Setting item

u

n f [ ^
b15
b8 b7
Buffer memory
address
27049
27001
b0
27000
Da.11 Shape
b15
b8 b7
27099
27051
b0
27050
Da.13 Special start
instruction
Da.14 Parameter
5 - 98
Up to 50 block start data points can be set

(stored) for each axis in the buffer memory
addresses shown on the left.
Items in a single unit of block start data are
shown included in a bold frame.
Each axis has five start blocks (block Nos.
0 to 4).
MELSEC-Q
50th point
Buffer memory
address
Setting item
2nd point
1st point
Setting item
Buffer memory
address
Setting item

u

n f [ ^
b15
b8 b7
Buffer memory
address
28049
28001
b0
28000
Da.11 Shape
b15
b8 b7
28099
28051
b0
28050
Da.13 Special start
instruction
Da.14 Parameter
50th point
Buffer memory
address
Setting item
2nd point
1st point
Setting item
Buffer memory
address
Setting item

u

n f [ ^
b15
b8 b7
Buffer memory
address
29049
29001
b0
29000
Da.11 Shape
b15
b8 b7
29099
29051
b0
29050
Da.13 Special start
instruction
Da.14 Parameter
The pages that follow explain the block start data setting items ( Da.11 to Da.14 ).
(The buffer memory addresses shown are those of the "1st point block start data (block
No. 7000)" for the axes 1 to 4.)
5 - 99
MELSEC-Q
REMARK
To perform an high-level positioning control using block start data, set a number
between 7000 and 7004 to the " Cd.3 Positioning start No." and use the
" Cd.4 Positioning starting point No." to specify a point number between 1 and 50, a
position counted from the beginning of the block.
The number between 7000 and 7004 specified here is called the "block No.".
With the QD75, up to 50 "block start data" points and up to 10 "condition data" items
can be assigned to each "block No.".
Block
No.
Axis
Block start data
Axis 1
7000
7001
7002
7003
7004
Axis 2
Axis 3
Condition
Start block 0
Condition data (1 to 10)

Start block 1

Axis 4
Axis 1
Axis 3
Start block 2

Axis 4
Axis 1
Axis 2
Axis 3
Start block 3

Axis 4
Axis 1
Axis 2
Axis 3
Axis 4
Supports the
settings
Axis 1
Axis 2
Supports the
settings

Axis 3
GX
ConfiguratorQP
Axis 4
Axis 2
Buffer memory
Start block 4

: Setting cannot be made when the "Pre-reading start function" is used. If you set any of Nos.
7000 to 7004 and perform the Pre-reading start function, "Outside start No. range error
(error code: 543)" will occur.
(For details, refer to Section 12.7.8 "Pre-reading start function".)
5 - 100
MELSEC-Q
Setting value
Item

device
Default
value
0 : End
1 : Continue

address
Da.11
Shape
b15
b11
0 0 0
b7
b3
b0
0000H 26000 27000 28000 29000

Shape
Da.12
Start data No.
Positioning data No.:

1 to 600
(01H to 258H)
01H
to
258H
0 : Block start (normal start)
00H
1 : Condition start
01H
2 : Wait start
02H
3 : Simultaneous start
03H
4 : FOR loop
04H
5 : FOR condition
05H
Start data No.
b15
b11
b7
b3
b0
Da.13
Special start
instruction
0000H 26050 27050 28050 29050
Special start
instruction
Da.14
Parameter
6 : NEXT start
06H
Condition data No.:

1 to 10 (01H to 0AH)
No. of repetitions:
0 to 255 (00H to FFH)
00H
to
FFH
Parameter
5 - 101
MELSEC-Q
Da.11 Shape
Set whether to carry out only the local "block start data" and then end control, or to
execute the "block start data" set in the next point.
Setting value
Setting details
0 : End
Execute the designated point's "block start data", and then complete the control.
1 : Continue
Execute the designated point's "block start data", and after completing control, execute the next
point's "block start data".

Set the "positioning data No." designated with the "block start data".
Da.13 Special start instruction

Set the "special start instruction " for using "high-level positioning control". (Set
how to start the positioning data set in " Da.12 Start data No.".)
Setting value
Setting details
00H : Block start

(Normal start)
Execute the random block positioning data in the set order with one start.
01H : Condition start
Carry out the condition judgment set in "condition data" for the designated positioning data, and
when the conditions are established, execute the "block start data". If not established, ignore
that "block start data", and then execute the next point's "block start data".
02H : Wait start
Carry out the condition judgment set in "condition data" for the designated positioning data, and
when the conditions are established, execute the "block start data". If not established, stop the
control (wait) until the conditions are established.
03H : Simultaneous
start
Simultaneous execute (output pulses at same timing) the positioning data with the No.
designated for the axis designated in the "condition data".
Up to four axes can start simultaneously.
04H : Repeated start

(FOR loop)
Repeat the program from the block start data with the "FOR loop" to the block start data with
"NEXT" for the designated No. of times.
05H : Repeated start

(FOR condition)
Repeat the program from the block start data with the "FOR condition" to the block start data
with "NEXT" until the conditions set in the "condition data" are established.
06H : NEXT start
Set the end of the repetition when "05H: Repetition start (FOR loop)" or "06H: Repetition start
(FOR condition)" is set.
Refer to Chapter 10 "High-level Positioning Control" for details on the control.
Da.14 Parameter
Set the value as required for " Da.13 Special start instruction ".
Setting value
Condition start
Setting details
Not used. (There is no need to set.)
1 to 10
Set the condition data No. (Data No. of

"condition data" is set up for the
condition judgment.)
Repeated start (FOR loop)
0 to 255
Set the No. of repetitions.
Repeated start (FOR condition)
1 to 10
Set the condition data No. (Data No. of

"condition data" is set up for the
condition judgment.)
Wait start
Simultaneous start
5 - 102
MEMO
5 - 103
MELSEC-Q
MELSEC-Q
5.5 List of condition data

The illustrations below show the organization of the condition data stored in the QD75
buffer memory. The condition data setting items Da.15 to Da.19 are explained in the
pages that follow.
ditio
Con
at a
nd
No.
No.10
Buffer memory
address
Setting item
No.2
No.1
Setting item
Setting item
Axis 1 (start block 0)
b15
b12 b11
b8 b7
Buffer memory
address
b0
26190
26110
26191
26192
26193
26194
26195
26196
26197
26198
26199
26100
Da.16 Condition
operator
Da.15 Condition
target
Open
Da.17 Address
Da.18 Parameter 1
Da.19 Parameter 2
Open
Con
n
ditio
26111
26112
26113
26114
26115
26116
26117
26118
26119
26101
26102
26103
26104
26105
26106
26107
26108
26109
o.
aN
dat
No.10
Buffer memory
address
Setting item
No.2
No.1
Setting item
Setting item
b15
b12 b11
b8 b7
Buffer memory
address
b0
Buffer memory
address
27110
27100
Da.16 Condition
operator
Da.15 Condition
target
Open
Da.17 Address
Da.18 Parameter 1
Da.19 Parameter 2
Open
27101
27102
27103
27104
27105
27106
27107
27108
27109
27111
27112
27113
27114
27115
27116
27117
27118
27119
5 - 104
27190
27191
27192
27193
27194
27195
27196
27197
27198
27199
Up to 10 block start data points can be set (stored)

for each axis in the buffer memory addresses shown
on the left.
Items in a single unit of condition data are shown
included in a bold frame.
Each axis has five start blocks (block Nos. 0 to 4).
For information on the organization of the buffer
memory addresses assigned to the start blocks 1
to 4, refer to Appendix 7 "List of buffer memory
addresses".
n
ditio
Con
o.
aN
dat
MELSEC-Q
No.10
Buffer memory
address
Setting item
No.2
No.1
Setting item
Setting item
b15
b12 b11
b8 b7
Buffer memory
address
b0
28110
28100
Da.16 Condition
operator
Da.15 Condition
target
Da.17 Address
Da.18 Parameter 1
Da.19 Parameter 2
Open
Con
n
ditio
dat
28111
28112
28113
28114
28115
28116
28117
28118
28119
28101
28102
28103
28104
28105
28106
28107
28108
28109
Open
o.
aN
28190
28191
28192
28193
28194
28195
28196
28197
28198
28199
No.10
Buffer memory
address
Setting item
No.2
No.1
Setting item
Setting item
b15
b12 b11
b8 b7
Buffer memory
address
b0
29110
29100
Da.16 Condition
operator
Da.15 Conditiion
target
Open
Da.17 Address
Da.18 Parameter 1
Da.19 Parameter 2
Open
29101
29102
29103
29104
29105
29106
29107
29108
29109
29111
29112
29113
29114
29115
29116
29117
29118
29119
29190
29191
29192
29193
29194
29195
29196
29197
29198
29199
The pages that follow explain the condition data setting items ( Da.15 to Da.19 ).
(The buffer memory addresses shown are those of the "condition data No. 1 (block No.
7000)" for the axes 1 to 4.)
5 - 105
MELSEC-Q
REMARK
To perform an high-level positioning control using block start data, set a number
between 7000 and 7004 to the " Cd.3 Positioning start No." and use the
" Cd.4 Positioning starting point No." to specify a point number between 1 and 50, a
position counted from the beginning of the block.
The number between 7000 and 7004 specified here is called the "block No.".
With the QD75, up to 50 "block start data" points and up to 10 "condition data" items
can be assigned to each "block No.".
Block
No.
Axis
Block start data
Axis 1
7000
7001
7002
7003
7004
Axis 2
Axis 3
Condition
Start block 0

Start block 1

Axis 4
Axis 1
Axis 3
Start block 2

Axis 4
Axis 1
Axis 2
Axis 3
Start block 3

Axis 4
Axis 1
Axis 2
Axis 3
Axis 4
Supports the
settings
Axis 1
Axis 2
Supports the
settings

Axis 3
GX
ConfiguratorQP
Axis 4
Axis 2
Buffer memory
Start block 4

: Setting cannot be made when the "Pre-reading start function" is used. If you set
any of Nos. 7000 to 7004 and perform the Pre-reading start function, "Outside
start No. range error (error code: 543)" will occur.
(For details, refer to Section "12.7.8 Pre-reading start function".)
5 - 106
Condition identifier
Condition
target
Da.16
Condition
operator
01 : Device X
01H
02 : Device Y
02H
03 : Buffer memory (1-word)
03H
04 : Buffer memory (2-word)
04H
05 : Positioning data No.
05H
01 : =P1
02 : P1
03 : P1
04 : P1
05 : P1 P2
06 : P1, P2
07 : DEV=ON
08 : DEV=OFF
10: Axis 1 selected
20: Axis 2 selected
30: Axes 1 and 2 selected
40: Axis 3 selected
70: Axes 1, 2, and 3 selected
80: Axis 4 selected
A0: Axes 2 and 4 selected
B0: Axes 1, 2, and 4 selected
C0: Axes 3 and 4 selected
D0: Axes 1, 3, and 4 selected
E0: Axes 2, 3, and 4 selected
01H
02H
03H
Condition operator
04H
05H
06H
07H
b15
b8 b7
08H
10H
20H
30H
40H
50H
60H
70H
80H
90H
A0H
B0H
C0H
D0H
E0H
Example)
b31

address
Condition target
26103
Da.17
Default
value
Setting value
Item
Da.15
MELSEC-Q
(High-order)
0000H 26100 27100 28100 29100
b0
26102
b16 b15
(Low-order)
b0
0000H
26102 27102 28102 29102

26103 27103 28103 29103
b0
0000H
26104 27104 28104 29104

26105 27105 28105 29105
b0
0000H
26106 27106 28106 29106

26107 27107 28107 29107
Address
Example)
26105
Da.18
Value
b31
(High-order)
26104
b16 b15
(Low-order)
Parameter 1
Value
Example)
26106
26107
Da.19
Value
b31
(High-order)
b16 b15 (Low-order)
Parameter 2
Value
5 - 107
MELSEC-Q
Da.15 Condition target

Set the condition target as required for each control.
Setting value
Setting details
01H : Device X
Set the input/output signal ON/OFF as the conditions.
02H : Device Y
03H : Buffer memory (1-word) Set the value stored in the buffer memory as the condition.
03H: The target buffer memory is "1-word (16 bits)"
04H : Buffer memory (2-word)
04H: The target buffer memory is "2-word (32 bits)"
05H : Positioning data No.
Select only for "simultaneous start".
Da.16 Condition operator

Set the condition operator as required for the " Da.15 Condition target".
Setting value
Setting details
01H: Device X
02H: Device Y
07H : DEV=ON
08H : DEV=OFF
01H : =P1
02H : P1
The state (ON/OFF) of an I/O signal is defined as the

condition. Select ON or OFF as the trigger.
03H: Buffer memory (1-word)

04H: Buffer memory (2-word)
03H : P1
04H : P1
Select how to use the value () in the buffer memory

as a part of the condition.
05H : P1P2
06H : P1, P2
10H : Axis 1 selected
30H : Axes 1 and 2 selected
70H : Axes 1, 2, and 3 selected
A0H : Axes 2 and 4 selected
B0H : Axes 1, 2, and 4 selected
C0H : Axes 3 and 4 selected
D0H : Axes 1, 3, and 4 selected
E0H : Axes 2, 3, and 4 selected
05H: Positioning data No.
If "simultaneous start" is specified, select the axis

(or axes) that should start simultaneously.
Da.17 Address
Set the address as required for the " Da.15 Condition target".
01H :
02H :
03H :
Device X
Device Y
Buffer memory (1-word)
04H :
Buffer memory (2-word)
05H :
Setting value
Setting details
Set the target "buffer memory address".

Value
(For 2 word, set the low-order buffer memory
(Buffer memory address)
address.)
5 - 108
MELSEC-Q
Da.18 Parameter 1
Set the parameters as required for the " Da.16 Condition operator".
Setting value
01H : =P1
02H : P1
03H : P1
04H : P1
Value
05H : P1P2
06H : P1, P2
07H : DEV=ON
08H : DEV=OFF
Value
(bit No.)
Setting details
The value of P1 should be equal to or smaller than the value of

P2. (P1P2)
If P1 is greater than P2 (P1>P2), the "condition data error" (error
code 533) will occur.
Set the device bit No.

X: 0H to 1H, 4H to 11H Y: 0, 4H to 17H
Set the positioning data No. for starting axis 1 and/or axis 2.
Low-order 16-bit
Value
: Axis 1 positioning data No. 1 to 600 (01H to 258H)
(positioning data No.)
High-order 16-bit
Da.19 Parameter 2
Set the parameters as required for the " Da.16 Condition operator".
01H : =P1
02H : P1
03H : P1
04H : P1
Setting value
05H : P1P2
06H : P1, P2
Value
Setting details
Not used. (No need to be set.)
The value of P2 should be equal to or greater than the value of

P1. (P1P2)
If P1 is greater than P2 (P1>P2), the "condition data error" (error
code 533) will occur.
07H : DEV=ON
08H : DEV=OFF
Not used. (No need to be set.)

70H : Axes 1, 2, and 3 selected
Set the positioning data No. for starting axis 3 and/or axis 4.
Low-order 16-bit
Value
(positioning data No.)
High-order
16-bit
A0H : Axes 2 and 4 selected
:
Axis
4 positioning data No. 1 to 600 (01H to 258H)
B0H : Axes 1, 2, and 4 selected
C0H : Axes 3 and 4 selected
D0H : Axes 1, 3, and 4 selected
5 - 109
MELSEC-Q
5.6 List of monitor data

5.6.1 System monitor data
Storage item
Md.1 In test mode flag
Storage details0
Whether the mode is the test mode from the peripheral device or not is stored.
When not in test mode : OFF
When in test mode
: ON
5 - 110
Reading the monitor value
MELSEC-Q
Default value
Storage buffer
memory address
(common for axis 1 to
axis 4)
1200
Monitoring is carried out with a decimal.

Monitor
value
Storage value
0: Not in test mode
1: In test mode
(Unless noted in particular, the monitor value is saved as binary data.)
5 - 111
Storage item
Storage details
[Storage details]
This area stores the start information (restart flag, start origin, and start
axis):
Restart flag: Indicates whether the operation has or has not been
halted and restarted.
Start origin : Indicates the source of the start signal.
Start axis : Indicates the started axis.
Monitoring is carried out with a hexadecimal display.
[Reading the monitor value]
b15
Md.3
Start
information
MELSEC-Q
Buffer
memory
b12
b8
b4
b0
0 0 0 0 0
Monitor
value
Not used
Start axis
Stored contents
Axis 1
Start origin
Starting history (Up to 16 records can be stored)
Stored contents
Storage value
PLC CPU
00
External signal
01
1
2
Axis 2
10
Peripheral device
Storage value
Axis 3
Axis 4
Restart flag
Stored contents
Storage value
Restart flag OFF
Restart flag ON

A
Buffer
memory
b15
B
b12
b8
b4
C
Monitor value
b0
A B C D
Start No.
Stored contents
Md.4
The starting No. is stored.
Storage value
B
C
Reference
(Decimal)
001
to
Start No.
JOG operation
Machine OPR
Fast OPR
Simultaneous start
600
1
1
1
1
1
B
B
B
5
5
5
B
B
3
3
5
5
3
3
8
9
A
B
7000
7001
7002
7003
7004
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
C
2
3
9
A
9010
9011
9001
9002
9003
B
C
9004

Md.5
Start
Hour
Buffer memory (stored with BCD code)
The starting time is stored.
0
0
Not used
0 to 2
Monitor value
b15
b12
b8
b4
b0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1
0 to 3
00 to 23 (hour)

Md.6
Start
Minute:
second
The starting time is stored.
0 to 5
0 to 9
Monitor value
b15
b12
b8
b4
b0
0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1
0 to 5 0 to 9
00 to 59 (minute) 00 to 59 (second)
Note: If a start signal is issued against an operating axis, a record relating to this event may be output before a
record relating to an earlier start signal is output.
5 - 112
Default value
MELSEC-Q
Storage buffer memory address (common to axes 1 to 4)
Md.8
1292
0000H
Indicates a pointer No. that is next to the Pointer No.
assigned to the latest of the existing starting history records.
Pointer No.
Pointer No.
Md.3
Start information
Starting history
Md.4
Start No.
Md.5
Start
hour
Md.6
Start
min: sec
Md.7
0000H
Error judgement
Item
10
11
12
13
14
15
1272 1277
1262 1267
1252 1257
1247
1242
1232 1237
1222 1227
1212 1217
1278
1268 1273
1258 1263
1253
1243 1248
1233 1238
1223 1228
1213 1218
1274 1279
1264 1269
1254 1259
1249
1244
1234 1239
1224 1229
1214 1219
1280
1270 1275
1260 1265
1250 1255
1245
1235 1240
1225 1230
1215 1220
1281
1271 1276
1261 1266
1256
1246 1251
1236 1241
1226 1231
1216 1221
1282 1287
1283 1288
1284 1289
1285 1290
1286 1291
Each group of buffer memory addresses storing a complete starting history

record is assigned a pointer No.
Example: Pointer No. 0 = Buffer memory addresses 1212 to 1216
Pointer No. 1 = Buffer memory addresses 1217 to 1221

Each history record is assigned a pointer No. in the range between 0 and 15.
If the pointer No. 15 has been assigned to a new record, the next record will
be assigned the pointer number 0.
0000
(A new record replaces an older record when a pointer No. is reassigned.)
0000
5 - 113
Storage item
Storage details
Starting history (Up to 16 records can be stored)
[Storage details]
This area stores the following results of the error judgment performed
upon starting:
BUSY start warning flag
Error flag
Error No.
[Reading the monitor value]

A
Md.7
Error
judgment
MELSEC-Q
b15
B
b12
C
b8
D
b4
Buffer memory
a
A B C D
Error flag
Stored contents
Error flag OFF
Error flag ON
Monitor value
b0
Storage value
0
1
Error No.
Convert the hexadecimal value "a, B, C, D" into a decimal value and
match it with "15.2 List of errors".
BUSY start warning flag

Stored contents
Md.8
Start history
pointer
Indicates a pointer No. that

is next to the Pointer No.
assigned to the latest of the
existing starting history
records.
Storage value
BUSY start
warning OFF
BUSY start
warning ON
Monitoring is carried out with a decimal display.

Monitor value
5 - 114
Storage value (Pointer number)

0 to 15
Default value
MELSEC-Q

Md.8
1292

assigned to the latest of the existing starting history records.
Pointer No.
Pointer No.
Md.3
Start information
0000H
Starting histroy
Md.4
Start No.
Md.5
Start hour
Md.6
Start min: sec
Md.7
Error judgement
Item
10
11
12
13
14
15
1272 1277
1262 1267
1252 1257
1247
1242
1232 1237
1222 1227
1212 1217
1278
1268 1273
1258 1263
1253
1243 1248
1233 1238
1223 1228
1213 1218
1274 1279
1264 1269
1254 1259
1249
1244
1234 1239
1224 1229
1214 1219
1275 1280
1265 1270
1255 1260
1250
1245
1235 1240
1225 1230
1215 1220
1281
1271 1276
1261 1266
1256
1246 1251
1236 1241
1226 1231
1216 1221
1282 1287
1283 1288
1284 1289
1285 1290
1286 1291
Each group of buffer memory addresses storing a complete starting history


1292
5 - 115
Storage item
MELSEC-Q
Storage details
Md.9
Stores a number (Axis No.)

Axis in which that indicates the axis that
the error
encountered an error.
occurred
Monitor
value
Storage value
1: Axis 1
2: Axis 2
3: Axis 3
4: Axis 4
Error history (Up to 16 records can be stored)

Md.10
Stores an axis error No.
Monitor value
Error No.
For details on the error Nos.
(Error codes),
refer to Section 15.2 "List of
errors".
Axis error No.
Md.11
Axis error
occurrence
(Hour)
Stores the time at which an

axis error was detected.
Not used
0 to 2
Monitor value
0 to 3
00 to 23 (hour)
Md.12
Axis error
occurrence
(Minute:
second)

axis error was detected.
Md.13

existing records.
Error history
pointer
b15
b12
b8
b4
b0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1
0 to 5
0 to 9
Monitor value
b15
b12
b8
b4
b0
0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1
0 to 5 0 to 9

Monitor value
5 - 116
Storage value
(Pointer number)
0 to 15
Default value
MELSEC-Q
Md.13
Error history pointer
1357

assigned to the latest of the existing error history records.
Pointer No.
Error history
0000
12
13
14
15
1349 1353
1350 1354
1351 1355
1352 1356
min: sec
Item
0000
11
1345
1337 1341
1329 1333
1321 1325
1317
1313
1305 1309
Md.9
1297 1301
1293
1346
Axis in which the error
1338 1342
occured
1330 1334
1326
1318 1322
1310 1314
Md.10
1302 1306
1294 1298
1343 1347
Axis error No.
1335 1339
1327 1331
1323
1315 1319
1307 1311
Md.11
1299 1303
Axis error occurrence 1295
1348
1340 1344
hour
1332 1336
1324 1328
1320
1316
1308 1312
Md.12
1300 1304
Axis error occurrence 1296
Pointer No.
10
Each group of buffer memory addresses storing a complete error history


1357
5 - 117
Storage item
MELSEC-Q
Storage details
Md.14
Stores a number (Axis No.)

Axis in which that indicates the axis that
the warning
encountered a warning.
occurred
Monitor
value
Storage value
1: Axis 1
2: Axis 2
3: Axis 3
4: Axis 4
Warning history (Up to 16 records can be stored)

Md.15
Axis warning
No.
Stores an axis warning No.
Warning No.
For details of warning Nos.
(warning codes), refer to
Section 15.3 "List of
warnings".
Md.16
Axis warning
occurrence
(Hour)
Monitor
value

axis warning was detected.
Not used
0 to 2
Monitor value
b15
b12
b8
b4
b0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1
0 to 3
00 to 23 (hour)
Md.17
Axis warning
occurrence
(Minute:
second)

axis warning was detected.

Warning
history pointer existing records.
Md.18
Stores the number of write

accesses to the flash ROM
after the power is switched
Md.19
ON.
No. of write
The count is cleared to "0"
accesses to flash when the number of write
ROM
accesses reach 26 and an
error reset operation is
performed.
0 to 5
0 to 9
Monitor value
b15
b12
b8
b4
b0
0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1
0 to 5 0 to 9

Monitor value
Storage value
(Pointer number)
0 to 15

Monitor value
5 - 118
Storage value
0 to 25
Default value
MELSEC-Q
Md.18
Warning history
pointer
1422

assigned to the latest of the existing warning history records.
Pointer No.
Warning history
0000
Item
0000
10
11
12
13
14
15
1414
1406 1410
1398 1402
1390 1394
1386
1378 1382
1370 1374
Md.14
1362 1366
1358
1411 1415
Axis in which the
1403 1407
warning occured
1395 1399
1391
1383 1387
1375 1379
Md.15
1367 1371
1363
1359
1412 1416
Axis warning No.
1404 1408
1396 1400
1392
1388
1380 1384
1372 1376
Md.16
1364 1368
1360
1417
Axis warning occurrence
1409 1413
1401 1405
hour
1397
1389 1393
1381 1385
1373 1377
Md.17
1369
1365
Axis warning occurrence 1361
min: sec
Pointer No.
1418
1419
1420
1421
Each group of buffer memory addresses storing a complete warning history


1422
1424
1425
5 - 119
MELSEC-Q
5.6.2 Axis monitor data
Storage item
Md.20 Current feed value
Storage details
The currently commanded address is stored.

(Different from the actual motor position during operation)
The current position address is stored.
If "degree" is selected as the unit, the addresses will have a ring structure for values
between 0 and 359.9999 degrees.
Update timing : 3.5ms
The OP address is stored when the machine OPR is completed.
When the current value is changed with the current value changing function, the
changed value is stored.
Md.21 Machine feed value
The address of the current position according to the machine coordinates will be
stored. (Different from the actual motor position during operation)
Note that the current value changing function will not change the machine feed
value.
Under the speed control mode, the machine feed value is constantly updated
always, irrespective of the parameter setting.
The value will not be cleared to "0" at the beginning of fixed-feed control.
Even if "degree" is selected as the unit, the addresses will not have a ring structure
for values between 0 and 359.99999 degrees.
Machine coordinates: Characteristic coordinates determined with machine
Update timing: 56.8ms
The speed of the operating workpiece is stored. (May be different from the actual
motor speed during operation)
During interpolation operation, the speed is stored in the following manner.
Reference axis
: Composite speed or reference axis speed

(Set with Pr.20 )
Md.22 Feedrate
Interpolation axis : 0
POINT
In case of the single axis operation, Md.22 Feedrate and Md.28 Axis feedrate
are identical.
In the composite mode of the interpolation operation, Md.22 Feedrate is a
speed in a composite direction and Md.28 Axis feedrate is that in each axial
direction.
Md.23 Axis error No.
When an axis error is detected, the error code corresponding to the error details is
stored.
The latest error code is always stored.
(When a new axis error occurs, the error code is overwritten.)
When " Cd.5 Axis error reset" (axis control data) turns ON, the axis error No. is
cleared (set to 0).
5 - 120
MELSEC-Q
Default
value
Monitoring is carried out with a hexadecimal.

Low-order buffer memory Example) 800
Monitor
value
b15
b12
b8
b4
Storage buffer
memory address
0000H
800
801
900
901
1000 1100
1001 1101
0000H
802
803
902
903
1002 1102
1003 1103
0000H
804
805
904
905
1004 1104
1005 1105
806
906
1006 1106
b0
H
E
High-order buffer memory Example) 801

b31
b28
b24
b20
b16
D
A
Sorting
(High-order buffer memory) (Low-order buffer memory)
Converted from
hexadecimal to decimal
Decimal integer
value
Unit conversion table

Md.20 Md.21 )
Unit
-1
-5
inch
-5
degree
PLS
Unit conversion
R
10 n

Md.22 )
Actual value

Md.22 Feedrate
Unit
-2
mm/min
-3
inch/min
-3
degree/min
PLS/s
Monitoring is carried out with a decimal.

Monitor
value
Error code
Refer to Section 15.2 "List of
errors" for details on the error
Nos. (error codes).
5 - 121
Storage item
Md.24 Axis warning No.
MELSEC-Q
Storage details
Whenever an axis warning is reported, a related warning code is stored.

This area stores the latest warning code always. (Whenever an axis warning is
reported, a new warning code replaces the stored warning code.)
When the " Cd.5 Axis error reset" (axis control data) is set to ON, the axis
warning No. is cleared to "0".
This area stores an M code that is currently active (i.e. set to the positioning data
relating to the current operation).
Md.25 Valid M code
Update timing
: turning ON of the M code ON signal
When the PLC READY signal (Y0) goes OFF, the value is set to "0".
Md.26 Axis operation status
This area stores the axis operation status.
The " Da.8 Command speed" used by the positioning data currently being
executed is stored. (Stores "0" under the speed control.)
If " Da.8 Command speed" is set to "-1", this area stores the command speed
Md.27 Current speed
set by the positioning data used one step earlier.

If " Da.8 Command speed" is set to a value other than "-1", this area stores the
command speed set by the current positioning data.

When speed change function is executed, this area stores " Cd.14 New speed
value". (For details of change speed function, refer to section 12.5.1.)
5 - 122
MELSEC-Q
Default
value
Storage buffer
memory address

Monitor
value
Warning No.
For details of warning Nos.
(warning codes), refer to
Section 15.3 "List of warnings".
807
907
1007 1107
808
908
1008 1108
809
909
1009 1109
810
811
910
911
1010 1110
1011 1111

Monitor
value
M code No.
(0 to 65535)

Monitor value
-2: Step standby
-1: Error
0: Standby
1: Stopped
2: Interpolation
3: JOG operation
4: Manual pulse generator operation
5: Analyzing
6: Special start standby
7: OPR
8: Position control
9: Speed control
10: Speed control in speed-position switching control
11: Position control in speed-position switching control
12: Position control in position-speed switching control
13: Speed control in position-speed switching control
14: Absolute position returning
20: Servo amplifer has not been connected/
servo amplifier power OFF
21: Servo OFF
Decimal integer
value
Unit conversion
R
Actual
value
10 n
Md.27 Current speed

Md.27 )
Monitor
value
Unit
-2
mm/min
-3
inch/min
-3
degree/min
PLS/s
5 - 123
Storage item
MELSEC-Q
Storage details
The speed which is actually output as a command at that time in each axis is
Md.28 Axis feedrate
stored. (May be different from the actual motor speed)

"0" is stored when the axis is at a stop.
POINT
Refer to Md.22 Feedrate
Md.29 Speed-position switching
control positioning amount
Md.30 External input signal
The value set as the movement amount for the position control to end after
changing to position control with the speed-position switching control (INC mode)
is stored.
The ON/OFF state of the external input/output signal is stored.

The following items are stored.
Upper limit signal
Lower limit signal
Stop signal
External command signal/switching signal
5 - 124
MELSEC-Q
Default
value
Storage buffer
memory address

b15
Monitor
value
b12
b8
b4
b0
H
E

b31
b28
b24
b20
b16
D
A
0000H
812
813
912
913
1012 1112
1013 1113
0000H
814
815
914
915
1014 1114
1015 1115
0000H
816
916
1016 1116
Sorting
H
Md.28 )
Converted from
Decimal integer
value
Unit
-2
mm/min
-3
inch/min
-3
degree/min
PLS/s
Unit conversion
R

Md.29 )
10 n
n
Actual value
Md.28 Axis feedrate

Md.29 Speed-position switching
control positioning amount
Unit
-1
-5
inch
-5
degree
PLS
Monitor
value
b12
b8
b4
b0
Buffer b15
memory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Not used
Stored items
D e fau lt
va lu e
b0 Lower limit signal
b1 Upper limit signal
b2 Not used
b3 Stop signal

b4 switching signal
b5 Not used
b6 Near-point signal
b7 Not used
b8 Not used
5 - 125
Meaning
0: OFF
1: ON
Storage item
Md.31 Status
MELSEC-Q
Storage details
This area stores the states (ON/OFF) of various flags.

Information on the following flags is stored.
In speed control flag:
This signal that comes ON under the speed control can be used to judge whether the
operation is performed under the speed control or position control. The signal goes OFF
when the power is switched ON, under the position control, and during JOG operation or
manual pulse generator operation. During the speed-position or position-speed switching
control, this signal comes ON only when the speed control is in effect. During the speedposition switching control, this signal goes OFF when the speed-position switching signal
executes a switching over from speed control to position control. During the positionspeed switching control, this signal comes ON when the position-speed switching signal
executes a switching over from position control to speed control.
Speed-position switching latch flag:
This signal is used during the speed-position switching control (INC mode) for interlocking
the movement amount change function. During the speed-position switching control (INC
mode), this signal comes ON when position control takes over. This signal goes OFF
when the next positioning data is processed, and during JOG operation or manual pulse
generator operation.
Command in-position flag:
This signal is ON when the remaining distance is equal to or less than the command inposition range (set by a detailed parameter). This signal remains OFF with data that
specify the continuous path control (P11) as the operation pattern. The state of this signal
is monitored every 3.5 ms except when the monitoring is canceled under the speed control
or while the speed control is in effect during the speed-position or position-speed switching
control. While operations are performed with interpolation, this signal comes ON only in
respect of the starting axis. (This signal goes OFF in respect of all axes upon starting.)
OPR request flag:
This signal comes ON when the power is switched ON, when the absolute system has not
been set, when the machine OPR has not been executed at the absolute position system,
when the PLC READY signal goes ON, when a machine OPR operation starts. This
signal goes OFF when a machine OPR operation completes.
OPR complete flag:
This signal comes ON when a machine OPR operation completes normally. This signal
goes OFF when the operation start.
Position-speed switching latch flag:
This signal is used during the position-speed switching control for interlocking the
command speed change function. During the position-speed switching control, this signal
comes ON when speed control takes over. This signal goes OFF when the next
positioning data is processed, and during JOG operation or manual pulse generator
operation.
Axis warning detection flag:
This signal comes On when an axis warning is reported and goes OFF when the axis error
reset signal comes ON.
Speed change 0 flag:
This signal comes ON when a speed change request that specifies 0 as the new speed
value is issued. This signal comes ON when a speed change request that specifies a new
speed value other than 0 is issued.
This area stores the target value ( Da.6 Positioning address/movement amount)
for a positioning operation.
Md.32 Target value
At the beginning of positioning control: Stores the value of " Da.6 Positioning
address/movement amount".
: Stores "0".
At other times
5 - 126
MELSEC-Q
Default
value
Storage buffer
memory address

Monitor
value
0
b12
b8
b4
b0
Buffer b15
memory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Not used
Not used
Default
value Meaning
Stored items
b0 In speed control flag
b1 Speed-position switching latch flag
b2 Command in-position flag
b3 OPR request flag
0: OFF
b4 OPR complete flag
1: ON
b5 Position-speed switching latch flag
b9 Axis warning detection
b10 Speed change 0 flag
0000H
817
917
1017 1117
818
819
918
919
1018 1118
1019 1119
Decimal integer
value
Unit conversion
R
Actual
value
Md.32 Target value
10 n

Md.32 )
Monitor
value
Unit
-1
-5
inch
-5
degree
PLS
5 - 127
Storage item
MELSEC-Q
Storage details
During operation with positioning data
Md.33 Target speed
: The actual target speed, considering

the override and speed limit value,
etc., is stored. "0" is stored when
positioning is completed.
During interpolation
: The composite speed or reference
axis speed is stored in the reference
axis address, and "0" is stored in the
interpolation axis address.
During JOG operation
: The actual target speed, considering
the JOG speed limit value for the
JOG speed, is stored.
During manual pulse generator operation : "0" is stored.
POINT
The target speed is when an override is made to the command speed.

When the speed limit value is overridden, the target speed is restricted to the
speed limit value. The target speed changes every time data is switched, but
does not change in an acceleration/deceleration state inside each piece of data
(changes with the speed change because the target speed changes.)
"0" is stored when machine OPR starts.

After machine OPR starts, the movement amount from the near-point dog ON to
near-point dog ON
the machine OPR completion is stored.

(Movement amount: Movement amount to machine OPR completion using nearpoint dog ON as "0".)
"0" is always stored when not using the near-point dog.
The" Pr.17 Torque limit setting value", " Cd.101 Torque output setting value" or
" Cd.22 New torque value", " Pr.54 OPR torque limit value" is stored.
During positioning start, JOG operation start, manual pulse generator operation
...The" Pr.17 Torque limit setting value" or " Cd.101 Torque output setting
value" is stored.
Md.35 Torque limit stored value
When value is changed to" Cd.22 New torque value" during operation
...The" Cd.22 New torque value" is stored.

When OPR
...The" Pr.17 Torque limit setting value" or " Cd.101 Torque output setting
value" is stored. But " Pr.54 OPR torque limit value" is stored after
the" Pr.47 Creep speed" completion.
5 - 128
MELSEC-Q
Default
value
Storage buffer
memory address

Monitor
value
b15
b12
b8
b4
b0
H
E

b31
b28
b24
b20
b16
D
A
0000H
820
821
920
921
1020 1120
1021 1121
0000H
822
823
922
923
1022 1124
1023 1125
300
826
926
1026 1126
Sorting
Converted from
Decimal integer
value

Md.33 )
Unit
-2
mm/min
-3
inch/min
-3
degree/min
PLS/s
Unit conversion
R
10 n

Md.34 )
n
Actual value
Md.33 Target speed

near-point dog ON
Unit
-1
-5
inch
-5
degree
PLS

Monitor
value
Storage value
1 to 500 (%)
5 - 129
Storage item
Md.36 Special start data instruction
code setting value
Md.37 Special start data instruction
parameter setting value
Md.38 Start positioning data No.
setting value
MELSEC-Q
Storage details
The " instruction code" used with special start and indicated by the start data
pointer currently being executed is stored.
The "instruction parameter" used with special start and indicated by the start data
pointer currently being executed is stored.
The stored value differs according to the value set for Md.36 .
The "positioning data No." indicated by the start data pointer currently being
executed is stored.
If the speed exceeds the " Pr.8 Speed limit value" due to a speed change or
Md.39 In speed limit flag
override, the speed limit functions, and the in speed limit flag turns ON.
When the speed drops to less than " Pr.8 Speed limit value", or when the axis
stops, the in speed limit flag turns OFF.
The speed change process flag turns ON when the speed is changed during
Md.40 In speed change processing
flag
positioning control.
After the speed change process is completed or when deceleration starts with the
stop signal during the speed change process, the in speed change process flag
turns OFF.
5 - 130
MELSEC-Q
Default
value
Storage buffer
memory address

Monitor
value
Storage value
00: Block start (Normal start)
01: Condition start
02: Wait start
03: Simultaneous start
04: FOR loop
05: FOR condition
06: NEXT
827
927
1027 1127
828
928
1028 1128
829
929
1029 1129
830
930
1030 1130
831
931
1031 1131

Monitor value
Storage value
Md.36 setting value
Stored contents Storage value
00
06
None
None
01
02
03
05
Condition data
No.
1 to 10
04
No. of
repetitions
0 to 255

Monitor
value
Storage value
1 to 600

Monitor
value
Storage value
0: Not in speed limit (OFF)
1: In speed limit (ON)

Monitor
value
Storage value
0: Not in speed change (OFF)
1: In speed change (ON)
5 - 131
Storage item
MELSEC-Q
Storage details
This area stores the remaining number of repetitions during "repetitions" specific
Md.41 Special start repetition
counter
to special starting.
The count is decremented by one (-1) at the loop end.
The control comes out of the loop when the count reaches "0".
This area stores "0" within an infinite loop.
This area stores the remaining number of repetitions during "repetitions" specific
Md.42 Control system repetition
counter
to control system.
The count is decremented by one (-1) at the loop end.
The control comes out of the loop when the count reaches "0".
This area stores "0" within an infinite loop.
Md.43 Start data pointer being
executed
Md.44 Positioning data No. being
executed
This area stores a point No. (1 to 50) attached to the start data currently being
executed.
This area stores "0" after completion of a positioning operation.
This area stores a positioning data No. attached to the positioning data currently
being executed.
When the operation is controlled by "block start data", this area stores a block
Md.45 Block No. being executed
number (7000 to 7004) attached to the block currently being executed.

At other times, this area stores "0".
Md.46 Last executed positioning
data No.
Md.47 Positioning data being
executed
This area stores the positioning data No. attached to the positioning data that was
executed last time.

The value is retained until a new positioning operation is executed.
The addresses shown to the right store details of the positioning data currently
being executed (positioning data No. given by Md.44 ).
5 - 132
MELSEC-Q
Default
value
Storage buffer
memory address

Storage value
0 to 255
Monitor value
832
932
1032 1132
0000H
833
933
1033 1133
834
934
1034 1134
835
935
1035 1135
836
936
1036 1136
837
937
1037 1137
838
to
847
938
to
947
1038 1138
to
to
1047 1147

Storage value
0 to FFFF
Monitor value

Storage value
1 to 50
Monitor value

Storage value
1 to 600
Monitor value

Storage value
1 to 50
Monitor value

Storage value
1 to 600
Monitor value
Information is stored in the following addresses:

Stored address (Monitor value)
Axis1 Axis2 Axis3 Axis4
Stored item
Reference
838
938
1038
1138 Positioning identifier
839
939
1039
1139
M code
Da.10
840
940
1040
1140
Dwell time
Da.9
841
941
1041
1141
Open
842
942
1042
1142
843
943
1043
1143
844
944
1044
1144
845
945
1045
1145
846
946
1046
1146
847
947
1047
1147
Da.1 to Da.5
Command speed
Da.8
Positioning address
Da.6
Arc address
Da.7
5 - 133
MELSEC-Q
Storage item
Storage details
"1" is stored when the constant speed status or acceleration status switches to
the deceleration status during position control whose operation pattern is

"Positioning complete".
"0" is stored at the next operation start or manual pulse generator operation
enable.
This area stores the travel distance during the OPR travel to the zero point that
Md.100 OPR re-travel value
was executed last time.

For setting units
Example) mm
(Buffer memory
0.1) m
This area stores the present value (feed present value deviation counter droop
pulses).
Md.101 Real current value
Example) mm
(Buffer memory
0.1) m
This area stores the difference between the feed present and the actual present
Md.102 Deviation counter value
value.
(Buffer memory details) PLS
This area stores the present rotation speed of the servomotor.

Md.103 Motor rotation speed
(Buffer memory
0.1) rpm
This area stores the present motor current value of the motor.
Md.104 Motor current value
(Buffer memory
0.1) %
Md.105 Servo parameter
This area stores the parameter
currently used by the servo

amplifier.
Auto tuning
Load inertia ratio (Buffer memory details
Position loop gain 1 [rad/s]
Speed loop gain 1 [rad/s]
Position loop gain 2 [rad/s]
Speed loop gain 2 [rad/s]
Speed integral compensation [ms]
5 - 134
0.1)
MELSEC-Q
Default
value
Storage buffer
memory address

Storage value
0: Status other than below
1: Status from deceleration
start to next operation
start or manual pulse
generator operation enable
Monitor value
899
999
1099 1199
848
849
948
949
1048 1148
1049 1149
850
851
950
951
1050 1150
1051 1151
852
853
952
953
1052 1152
1053 1153
854
855
954
955
1054 1154
1055 1155
856
956
1056 1156
857
957
1057 1157
858
958
1058 1158
859
959
1059 1159
860
960
1060 1160
861
961
1061 1161
862
962
1062 1162
863
963
1063 1163

Monitor
value
b15
b12
b8
b4
b0
H
E

b31
b28
b24
b20
b16
D
A
Sorting
H
Md.100 Md.101 )
Converted from
Decimal integer
value
Unit
-1
-5
inch
-5
degree
PLS
Unit conversion
R

Md.102 )
10 n
n
Actual value
Unit
PLS

Md.103 )
Md.102 Divation counter value

Unit
-1
rpm
Actual value
Converted from
hexadecimal to
decimal
Unit conversion
R 10 n

Md.104 )
Decimal integer
value
n
-1
Unit
%
Md.104 Motor currentvalue

Monitor value
0
Servo parameter
: Usable with the module whose first six digits of SERIAL No. are 050224" or later.
5 - 135
Storage item
Md.106 Servo amplifier Software No.
MELSEC-Q
Storage details
This area stores the Software No. of the servo amplifier used.
Parameter error (No.1 to 15)

When a servo parameter error occurs, the Parameter error (No.32 to 47)
Md.107 Parameter error No.
bit that corresponds to the parameter

number affected by the error comes ON. Parameter error (No.64 to 75)
Not used
Not used
This area stores the servo status.
READY ON
Indicates the ready ON/OFF.

Servo ON
Indicates the servo ON/OFF.

Zeroing point pass
Turns ON if the zero point of the encoder has been passed even once.
In-position
Md.108 Servo status
The dwell pulse turns ON within the servo parameter in-position.

Zeroing speed
Turns ON when the motor speed is lower than the servo parameter zero speed.
Torque being restricted
Turns ON when the servo amplifier is having the torque restricted.

Servo alarm
Turn ON during the servo alarm.

Servo warning
Turn ON during the servo warning.

The rate of regenerative power to the allowable regenerative power is indicated
as a percentage.
Md.109 Regenerative load ratio
When the regenerative option is used, the rate to the allowable regenerative
power of the option is indicated.

(Buffer memory 0.1) %
Update timing: 1 s
The continuous effective load torque is indicated.
The average value of the load rates for the past 15 seconds to the rated torque is
Md.110 Effective load torque
Md.111 Peak torque ratio
stored as a percentage, rated torque being 100%.

(Buffer memory 0.1) %
Update timing: 1s
The maximum torque is indicated. (Holding value)
The peak values for the past 15 seconds are indicated, rated torque being 100%.
0.1) %
(Buffer memory
Update timing: 1s
5 - 136
MELSEC-Q
Default
value
Storage buffer
memory address

Monitor value
Software
No.
The monitor value is character

code (JIS 8 unit code).
Example) B20W200-A4
Address Monitor Storing
value
value
864
3242
2B
865
5730
W0
866
3032
02
867
2D32
-0
868
3441
4A
869
0020
NUL SPACE
864
to
869
870
970
1070 1170
871
971
1071 1171
872
972
1072 1172
873
973
1073 1173
874
974
1074 1174
875
975
1075 1175
876
976
1076 1176
877
977
1077 1177
878
978
1078 1178
879
979
1079 1179
880
980
1080 1180

b15
b12
b8
b4
b0
Stored items
b0 READY ON
b1 Servo ON
b4 Zero point pass
b5 In-position
b6 Zero speed
b7 Torque limit
b13 Servo alarm
b14 Servo warning
Meaning
0: OFF
1: ON
POINT
When the servo forced stop occurs, the "b13: servo alarm" and the "b14: servo
warning" is turned ON. When the servo forced stop is reset, the "b13: servo
alarm" and the "b14: servo warning" is turned OFF.

Monitor
value
Regenerative load ratio

Monitor
value
Effective load torque

Monitor
value
Peek torque ratio
5 - 137
MELSEC-Q
5.7 List of control data

5.7.1 System control data
Setting item
Setting details
Requests writing of data (parameters, positioning data, and block start data) from
the buffer memory to the flash ROM.

POINT
Cd.1 Flash ROM write request
(1) Do not turn the power OFF or reset the PLC CPU while writing to the flash ROM.
If the power is turned OFF or the PLC CPU is reset to forcibly end the process,
the data backed up in the flash ROM will be lost.
(2) Do not write the data to the buffer memory before writing to the flash ROM is
completed.
(3) The number of writes to the flash ROM with the PLC program is 25 max. while
the power is turned ON.
Writing to the flash ROM beyond 25 times will cause an error (error code: 805).
Refer to Section 15.2 "List of errors" for details.
(4) Monitoring is the number of writes to the flash ROM by the " Md.19 No. of write
accesses to flash ROM".
Requests initialization of setting data.
Initialization: Resetting of setting data to default values

Note: After completing the initialization of setting data, reset the PLC CPU or reboot
the PLC power.
Cd.2 Parameter initialization request
Initialized setting data

Parameters ( Pr.1 to Pr.57 , Pr.100 to Pr.161 , Pr.200 , Pr.201 )
Positioning data (No. 1 to 600)
Block start data (No. 7000 to 7004)
Set whether " Md.48 Deceleration start flag" is made valid or invalid.
Cd.41 Deceleration start flag valid
POINT
The " Cd.41 Deceleration start flag valid" become valid when the PLC READY
signal [Y0] turns from OFF to ON.
Cd.42 Stop command processing

selection
Set the stop command processing for deceleration stop function (deceleration
curve re-processing/deceleration curve continuation).
5 - 138
Setting value
MELSEC-Q
Default value
Storage buffer
memory address
(common to axes 1
to 4)
1900
1901
1905
1907
Set with a decimal.
Setting
value
1
Flash ROM write request
1: Requests write access to flash ROM.
The QD75 resets the value to "0" automatically when the write access completes.
(This indicates the completion of write operation.)
Set with a decimal.
Setting
value
1
Parameter initialization request
1: Requests parameter initialization.
The QD75 resets the value to "0" automatically when the initialization completes.
(This indicates the completion of parameter initialization.)
Set with a decimal.
Setting
value
K
Deceleration start flag valid
0: Deceleration start flag invalid
1: Deceleration start flag valid
Set with a decimal.
Setting
value
K
Stop command processing for deceleration
stop selection
0: Deceleration curve re-processing
1: Deceleration curve continuation
: Usable with the module whose first six digits of SERIAL No. are 050224" or later.
5 - 139
MELSEC-Q
5.7.2 Axis control data
Setting item
Setting details
Set the positioning start No.
Cd.3 Positioning start No.
Cd.4 Positioning starting point No.
(Only 1 to 600 for the Pre-reading start function. For details, refer to Section
12.7.8 "Pre-reading start function".)
Set a " starting point No." (1 to 50) if block start data is used for positioning.
(Handled as "1" if the value of other than 1 to 50 is set.)
Clears the axis error detection, axis error No., axis warning detection and axis
Cd.5 Axis error reset
warning No.
When the QD75 axis operation state is "in error occurrence", the error is cleared
and the QD75 is returned to the "waiting" state.
When positioning is stopped for any reason (when axis operation state is
Cd.6 Restart command
"stopped"), set "1" in Cd.6 . Positioning will be carried out again from the stopped
position to the end point of the stopped positioning data.
The M code ON signal turns OFF.
5 - 140
MELSEC-Q
Default
value
Setting value
Storage buffer
memory address
Set with a decimal.
Setting
value
K
: Positioning data No.
1 to 600
: Block start designation
7000 to7004
: Machine OPR
9001
: Fast-OPR
9002
: Current value changing
9003
: Simultaneous starting of multiple axes
9004
1500 1600 1700 1800
1501 1601 1701 1801
1502 1602 1702 1802
1503 1603 1703 1803
1504 1604 1704 1804
Set with a decimal.
Setting
value
Positioning starting point No.
1 to 50
The value is set to "0" by the QD75 automatically when the continuous
operation is interrupted.
Set with a decimal.

Setting value
1
Error reset request
1: Axis error is reset.
After the axis error reset is completed, "0" is stored by the QD75 automatically.
(Indicates that the axis error reset is completed.)
Set with a decimal.

Setting value
1
Restart command
1: Restarts
After restart acceptance is completed, "0" is stored by the QD75 automatically.

(Indicates that the restart acceptance is completed.)
Set with a decimal.

Setting value
1
M code OFF request
1: M code ON signal turns OFF
After the M code ON signal turns OFF, "0" is stored by the QD75 automatically.
(Indicates that the OFF request is completed.)
5 - 141
Setting item
Cd.8 External command valid
MELSEC-Q
Setting details
Validates or in validates external command signals.
When changing the "current feed value" using the start No. "9003", use this data
item to specify a new feed value.

Set a value within the following range:
Cd.9 New current value
Pr.1
Setting range
mm
(10-1 m)
inch
(10-5 inch)
degree
(10-5 degree)
PLS
(PLS)
-2147483648 -2147483648
-2147483648
to
to
0 to 35999999
to
+2147483647 +2147483647
+2147483647
5 - 142
MELSEC-Q
Default
value
Setting value
Storage buffer
memory address
Set with a decimal.
Setting value
1505 1605 1705 1805
1506 1606 1706 1806

1507 1607 1707 1807

0: Invalidates an external command.
1: Validates an external command.
Set with a decimal.

Actual value Cd.9 New current value
Conversion into an integer value
Unit conversion table ( Cd.9 )
10n
Setting value
(Decimal)
Unit
-1
-5
inch
-5
degree
PLS
5 - 143
Setting item
MELSEC-Q
Setting details
When changing the acceleration time during a speed change, use this data item
to specify a new acceleration time.

Cd.10 New acceleration time value
Cd.10 setting range (unit)
0 to 8388608 (ms)
When changing the deceleration time during a speed change, use this data item
to specify a new deceleration time.

Cd.11 New deceleration time value
Cd.11 setting range (unit)
0 to 8388608 (ms)
Cd.12 Acceleration/deceleration time
change during speed change,

enable/disable selection
Enables or disables modifications to the acceleration/deceleration time during a
speed change.
5 - 144
Default
value
Setting value
Set with a decimal.

Setting
value
MELSEC-Q
Storage buffer
memory address
1508 1608 1708 1808

1509 1609 1709 1809
1510 1610 1710 1810

1511 1611 1711 1811
1512 1612 1712 1812

Example: When the " Cd. 10 New acceleration

time value" is set as "60000 ms", the
buffer memory stores "60000".
Set with a decimal.
Setting
value
K
during speed change, enable/disable selection
1
: Enables modifications to
acceleration/deceleration time
Other than 1: Disables modifications to
acceleration/deceleration time
5 - 145
Setting item
MELSEC-Q
Setting details
To use the positioning operation speed override function, use this data item to
Cd.13 Positioning operation speed
override
specify an "override" value.

For details of the override function, refer to Section 12.5.2 "Override function".
If the speed resulting from a small override value (e.g. 1%) includes fractions
below the minimum unit, the speed is raised to make a complete unit and the
warning No. 110 is output.
When changing the speed, use this data item to specify a new speed.
The operation halts if you specify "0".
Pr.1
Setting range
mm
-2
( 10 mm/min)
0 to
2000000000
inch
degree
-3
-3
( 10 inch/min) ( 10 degree/min)
0 to
2000000000
0 to
2000000000
PLS
(PLS/s)
0 to 10000000
Cd.14 New speed value
Cd.15 Speed change request
After setting the " Cd.14 New speed value", set this data item to "1" to execute
the speed change (through validating the new speed value).
5 - 146
MELSEC-Q
Default
value
Setting value
Storage buffer
memory address
Set with a decimal.
Setting value
100
1513 1613 1713 1813
1514 1614 1714 1814

1515 1615 1715 1815
1516 1616 1716 1816
Override value (%)

1 to 300
Set with a decimal.

Actual value Cd.14 New speed value

10n
Setting value
(Decimal)
Unit
-2
mm/min
-3
inch/min
-3
degree/min
PLS/s
Example: When the " Cd. 14 New speed

value" is set as "20000.00mm
/min", the buffer memory
stores "2000000".
Set with a decimal.
Setting
value
1
1: Executes speed change.
The QD75 resets the value to "0" automatically

when the speed change request has been processed.
(This indicates the completion of speed change request.)
5 - 147
Setting item
MELSEC-Q
Setting details
Use this data item to set the amount of movement by inching.

The machine performs a JOG operation if "0" is set.
Cd.16 Inching movement amount
Pr.1
mm
(10-1 m)
inch
(10-5 inch)
degree
(10-5 degree)
PLS
(PLS)
Setting range
0 to 65535
0 to 65535
0 to 65535
0 to 65535
Use this data item to set the JOG speed.

Cd.17 JOG speed
Pr.1
Setting range
Cd.18 Interruption request during
continuous operation
mm
-2
( 10 mm/min)
0 to
2000000000
inch
degree
-3
-3
0 to
2000000000
0 to
2000000000
PLS
(PLS/s)
0 to 10000000
To interrupt a continuous operation, set "1" to this data item.

After processing the interruption request ("1"), the QD75 automatically resets the
value to "0".
5 - 148
MELSEC-Q
Default
value
Setting value
Storage buffer
memory address
Set with a decimal.

Actual value Cd.16 Inching movement amount

10n
Setting value
(Decimal)
Unit
-1
-5
inch
-5
degree
PLS
1517 1617 1717 1817
1518 1618 1718 1818

1519 1619 1719 1819
1520 1620 1720 1820
Example: When the " Cd. 16 Inching

movement amount" is set as
"1.0 m", the buffer memory
stores "10".
Set with a decimal.

Actual value Cd.17 JOG speed

10n
Setting value
(Decimal)
Unit
-2
mm/min
-3
inch/min
-3
degree/min
PLS/s
Example: When the " Cd. 17 JOG

speed" is set as "20000.00mm
/min", the buffer memory
stores "2000000".
Set with a decimal.
Setting
value
Interruption request continuous operation

1: Interrupts continuous operation control
or continuous path control.
The QD75 resets the value to "0" automatically when the continuous
control interruption request is processed.
(This indicates the completion of continuous operation interruption request.)
5 - 149
Setting item
Cd.19 OPR request flag OFF
request
MELSEC-Q
Setting details
The PLC program can use this data item to forcibly turn the OPR request flag
from ON to OFF.
This data item determines the factor by which the number of pulses from the
Cd.20 Manual pulse generator 1
pulse input magnification
Cd.21 Manual pulse generator
enable flag
manual pulse generator is magnified.

Value "0"
: read as "1".
Value "101" or less: read as "100".
This data item enables or disables operations using a manual pulse generator.
When changing the " Md.35 Torque limit stored value", use this data item to
Cd.22 New torque value
specify a new torque limit stored value.

Set a value within the allowable range of the " Pr.17 Torque limit setting value".
5 - 150
MELSEC-Q
Default
value
Setting value
Storage buffer
memory address
Set with a decimal.
Setting
value
1
1: Turns the "OPR request flag"
from ON to OFF.
1521 1621 1721 1821
1522 1622 1722 1822

1523 1623 1723 1823
1524 1624 1724 1824
1525 1625 1725 1825
The QD75 resets the value to "0" automatically when the OPR
request flag is turned OFF.
(This indicates the completion of OPR request flag OFF request.)
Set with a decimal.
Setting value
K
Manul pulse generator
1 pulse input
magnification
1 to 100
Set with a decimal.
Setting value
K
0: Disable manual pulse generator operation.
1: Enable manual pulse generator operation.
Set with a decimal.
Setting value
Torque change value
1 to Pr.17 Torque limit setting value
5 - 151
Setting item
MELSEC-Q
Setting details
During the speed control stage of the speed-position switching control (INC
Cd.23 Speed-position switching
control movement amount

change register
mode), it is possible to change the specification of the movement amount during

the position control stage. For that, use this data item to specify a new movement
amount.
The new movement amount has to be set during the speed control stage of the
speed-position switching control (INC mode).
The value is reset to "0" when the next operation starts.
Pr.1
Setting range
enable flag
mm
(10-1 m)
inch
(10-5 inch)
0 to
2147483647
0 to
2147483647
degree
(10-5 degree)
0 to
2147483647
PLS
(PLS)
0 to
2147483647
Set whether the external control signal (external command signal [CHG]: "speed-
position, position-speed switching request" is selected) is enabled or not.
During the position control stage of the position-speed switching control, it is
possible to change the specification of the speed during the speed control stage.
For that, use this data item to specify a new speed.
The new speed has to be set during the position control stage of the positionspeed switching control.
The value is reset to "0" when the next operation starts.

Cd.25 Position-speed switching
control speed change register Set a value within the following range:
Pr.1
Setting range
mm
-2
( 10 mm/min)
0 to
2000000000
5 - 152
inch
degree
-3
-3
0 to
2000000000
0 to
2000000000
PLS
(PLS/s)
0 to 10000000
MELSEC-Q
Default
value
Setting value
Storage buffer
memory address
Set with a decimal.

Actual value

change register
10
Setting value
(Decimal)
Unit
-1
-5
inch
-5
degree
PLS
1526 1626 1726 1826

1527 1627 1727 1827
1528 1628 1728 1828
1530 1630 1730 1830

1531 1631 1731 1831
Example: If " Cd. 23 Speed-position

switching control movement
amount change register" is set
as "20000.0 m", the buffer
memory stores "200000".
Set with a decimal.
Setting
value
K
Speed-position switching enable flag
0: Speed control will not be taken over
by position control even when the
external command signal comes ON.
1: Speed control will be taken over by
position control when the external
command signal comes ON.
Set with a decimal.

Actual value

control speed change
register
10n
Setting value
(Decimal)
Unit
-2
-3
mm/min
inch/min
-3
degree/min
PLS/s
Example: If " Cd. 25 Position-speed

switching control speed
change register" is set
as "2000.00 mm/min", the
buffer memory stores "200000".
5 - 153
Setting item
control enable flag
MELSEC-Q
Setting details
Set whether the external control signal (external command signal [CHG]: "speed-
position, position-speed switching request" is selected) is enabled or not.
When changing the target position during a positioning operation, use this data
item to specify a new positioning address.

Pr.1
Cd.27 Target position change value
(New address)
mm
(10-1 m)
inch
(10-5 inch)
degree
(10-5 degree)
PLS
(PLS)
ABS
-2147483648 -2147483648
to
to
0 to 35999999
+2147483647 +2147483647
-2147483648
to
+2147483647
INC
-2147483648 -2147483648 -2147483648 -2147483648

to
to
to
to
+2147483647 +2147483647 +2147483647 +2147483647
When changing the target position during a positioning operation, use this data
item to specify a new speed.

The speed will not change if "0" is set.
Cd.28 Target position change value
(New speed)
Pr.1
Setting range
Cd.29 Target position change
request flag
mm
-2
( 10 mm/min)
0 to
2000000000
inch
degree
-3
-3
0 to
2000000000
0 to
2000000000
PLS
(PLS/s)
0 to 10000000
Requests a change in the target position during a positioning operation.
5 - 154
MELSEC-Q
Default
value
Setting value
Storage buffer
memory address
Set with a decimal.
Setting value
K
enable flag
0: Position control will not be taken
over by speed control even when the
1: Position control will be taken
over by speed control when the
1532 1632 1732 1832
1534 1634 1734 1834

1535 1635 1735 1835
1536 1636 1736 1836

1537 1637 1737 1837
1538 1638 1738 1838
Set with a decimal.

Actual value
Cd. 27 Target position change value (address)

Cd. 28 Target position change value (speed)
10n
Setting value
(Decimal)
Unit
-1
-5
inch
-5
degree
PLS
Example: If " Cd. 28 Target position change

value (speed) is set as "10000.00
mm/min", the buffer memory stores
"1000000".
Unit
-2
mm/min
-3
inch/min
-3
degree/min
PLS/s
Set with a decimal.
Setting
value
1
1: Requests a change in the target position

when the new target position value has been written.
(This indicates the completion of write operation.)
5 - 155
Setting item
MELSEC-Q
Setting details
Cd.30 Simultaneous starting axis
start data No. (axis 1 start

data No.)

data No.)
Use these data items to specify a start data No. for each axis that has to start
simultaneously.
Set "0" to any axis that should not start simultaneously.

data No.)

data No.)
Cd.34 Step mode
Cd.35 Step valid flag
To perform a step operation, use this data item to specify the units by which the
stepping should be performed.
This data item validates or invalidates step operations.
5 - 156
MELSEC-Q
Default
value
Setting value
Storage buffer
memory address
1540 1640 1740 1840
1541 1641 1741 1841
1542 1642 1742 1842
1543 1643 1743 1843
1544 1644 1744 1844
1545 1645 1745 1845
Set with a decimal.
Setting
value
K
Cd.30 to Cd.33
Simultaneous starting
axis start data No.:
1 to 600
Set with a decimal.
Setting
value
K
Step mode
0: Stepping by deceleration units
1: Stepping by data No. units
Set with a decimal.
Setting
value
K
Step valid flag
0: Invalidates step operations
1: Validates step operations
5 - 157
Setting item
Cd.36 Step start information
MELSEC-Q
Setting details
During a step operation, this data item determines whether the operation is
continued or restarted.
Cd.37 Skip command
To skip the current positioning operation, set "1" in this data item.
Cd.38 Teaching data selection
This data item specifies the teaching result write destination.
Cd.39 Teaching positioning data No.
This data item specifies data to be produced by teaching.

If a value between 1 and 600 is set, a teaching operation is done.
The value is cleared to "0" when the QD75 is initialized, when a teaching
operation completes, and when a illegal value (601 or higher) is entered.
Cd.40 ABS direction in degrees
This data item specifies the ABS moving direction carrying out the position control
when "degree" is selected as the unit.
5 - 158
MELSEC-Q
Default
value
Setting value
Storage buffer
memory address
Set with a decimal.
Setting
value
K
1: Continues step opration
2: Restarts operation
1546 1646 1746 1846
1547 1647 1747 1847
1548 1648 1748 1848
1549 1649 1749 1849
1550 1650 1750 1850

when processing of the step start request completes.
Set with a decimal.
Setting
value
1
Skip request
1: Issues a skip request to have
the machine decelerate, stop,
and then start the next positioning
operation.

when processing of the skip request completes.
Set with a decimal.
Setting
value
K
Teaching data selection
0: Takes the current feed value as a positioning
address.
1: Takes the current feed value as an arc data.
Set with a decimal.
Setting value
K
Teaching
positioning
data No.
1 to 600
Set with a decimal.
Setting
value
K
ABS direction in degrees
0: Takes a shortcut.
(Specified direction ignored.)
1: ABS circular right
2: ABS circular left
5 - 159
Setting item
MELSEC-Q
Setting details
Turns OFF each axis servo.
POINT
When you want to turn ON the servo for two to four axes with only the servo for
one axis turned OFF, write "1" to storage buffer memory address 1551 and then
turn ON all axis servo ON (Y1) signal.
Sets the torque output value.

POINT
If the " Cd.101 Torque output setting value" is "0", the " Pr.17 Torque limit
setting value" will be its value.

If a value beside "0" is set in the " Cd.101 Torque output setting value", the
torque generated by the servomotor will be limited by that value.

Cd.101 Torque output setting value
The " Pr.17 Torque limit setting value" of the servo adjustment parameter
torque output setting value becomes effective at the PLC ready signal rising
edge.
The " Cd.101 Torque output setting value" (refer to the start) axis control data
can be changed at all times. Therefore in the " Cd.101 Torque output setting
value" is used when you must change.
(Refer to Section 12.5.4 "Torque change function ".)
Reads a servo parameter from the servo amplifier to the buffer memory.
Cd.102 Servo amplifier data read
(Load inertia ratio/Positional control gain 1, 2/Speed control gain 1, 2/Speed

integration compensation)
5 - 160
MELSEC-Q
Default
value
Setting value
Storage buffer
memory address
Set with a decimal.
Setting
value
K
Servo OFF command
0: Servo ON
1: Servo OFF
1551 1651 1751 1851
1552 1652 1752 1852
1553 1653 1753 1853
When all axis servo ON is valid.
Set with a decimal.
Setting
value
K
Torque output setting
0 to 500
Set with a decimal.
Setting
value
K
Servo amplifier read request
0: Servo amplifier read complete
1: Servo amplifier read request
5 - 161
MEMO
5 - 162
MELSEC-Q
Chapter 6 PLC Program Used for Positioning

Control
6
The programs required to carry out positioning control with the QD75 are explained
in this chapter.
The PLC program required for control is created allowing for the "start conditions",
"start time chart", "device settings" and general control configuration. (The parameters,
positioning data, block start data and condition data, etc., must be set in the QD75
according to the control to be executed, and program for setting the control data or a
program for starting the various control must be created.)
The first half of this chapter explains the program configuration of general control, and
the latter half explains the program details. Create the required program while referring
to the various control details explained in Section 2, and to Chapter 5 "Data used for
positioning control".
6.1 Precautions for creating program ...............................................................................6- 2

6.2 List of devices used .....................................................................................................6- 5
6.3 Creating a program .....................................................................................................6- 15
6.3.1 General configuration of program .................................................................6- 15
6.3.2 Positioning control operation program ..........................................................6- 16
6.4 Positioning program examples................................................................................... 6- 20
6.5 Program details .......................................................................................................... 6- 53
6.5.1 Initialization program..................................................................................... 6- 53
6.5.2 Start details setting program......................................................................... 6- 54
6.5.3 Start program ................................................................................................ 6- 56
6.5.4 Continuous operation interrupt program ...................................................... 6- 65
6.5.5 Restart program ............................................................................................ 6- 67
6.5.6 Stop program ................................................................................................ 6- 70
6-1
6 PLC PROGRAM USED FOR POSITIONING CONTROL
MELSEC-Q
6.1 Precautions for creating program

The common precautions to be taken when writing data from the PLC CPU to the
QD75 buffer memory are described below.
(1) Reading/writing the data

Setting the data explained in this chapter (various parameters, positioning data,
block start data) should be set using GX Configurator-QP.
When set with the PLC program, many PLC programs and devices must be
used. This will not only complicate the program, but will also increase the scan
time.
When rewriting the positioning data during continuous path control or continuous
positioning control, rewrite the data four positioning data items before the actual
execution. If the positioning data is not rewritten before the positioning data four
items earlier is executed, the process will be carried out as if the data was not
rewritten.
(2) Restrictions to speed change execution interval

Provide an interval of 100ms or more when changing the speed with the QD75.
(3) Process during overrun

Overrun is prevented by the setting of the upper and lower stroke limits with the
detail parameter 1.
However, this applies only when the QD75 is operating correctly.
It is recommended to create an external circuit including a boundary limit switch
to ensure the whole system safety as follows: the external circuit powers OFF
the motor when the boundary limit switch operates.
6-2
MELSEC-Q
(4) System configuration

Unless particularly designated, the PLC program for the following system is
shown in this chapter and subsequent.
Refer to Section 6.2 for the application of the devices to be used.
power supply module
Q35B
Q
25
H
C
P
U
Q
D
75
M
4
Q
X
41
Q
X
40
00
to
1F
X20
to
X3F
X40
to
X4F
X40 to X4F
Extenal
devices
X20 to X3F
Servo
amplifier
Servomotor
(5) Control unit

In the program, the unit of "0 (mm), 2 (degree)" is set for the basic parameter 1.
(6) Communication with QD75

There are two methods for communication with QD75 using the PLC program: a
method using an "intelligent function device" and a method using a FROM/TO
command.
In the PLC program in this chapter and subsequent, the program example using
the "intelligent function device" is shown without using an FROM/TO command
for communication with QD75.
When using the FROM/TO command for communication with QD75, change the
circuit incorporating the "intelligent function device" as follows.
(a) When the circuit uses the "intelligent function device" on the destination (D)
side of a MOV command, change the command to a TO command.
Intelligent function device
K1
U0\
G1505
K1
K1
X21
0
MOVP
X21
0
TOP
6-3
H0
K1505
Designated
value
at U0
Designated
value
at G1505
Number of
write data (1)
MELSEC-Q
(b) When the circuit uses the "intelligent function device" on the source(s) side
and the destination (D) side of a MOV command, change the command to a
FROM command and a TO command.
X15
X0C
MOVP
U0\
G826
U6\
G1
Set the
same device.
X15
X0C
FROMP H0
K826
D100
K1
TOP
K1
D100
K1
H6
(c) When the circuit uses the "intelligent function device" for a COMPARISON
command, change the command to a FROM command and a
COMPARISON command.
M0
0
U0\
G1521
K0
RST
M0
D102
K1
RST
M0
M0
FROMP H0
0
=
D102
K0
K1521
Data read out
(d) When the circuit uses the "intelligent function device" for a WAND command,
change the command to a FROM command and a WAND command.
M2
U0\
WANDP G817
H8
D0
D101
K1
M2
0
FROMP H0
K817
WANDP D101
Data read out

H8
D0
REMARK
Refer to QCPU (Q mode) User's Manual (Functions and Programs Basic Part) for
the intelligent function devices.
Refer to QCPU (Q mode) Programming Manual (Common Commands Part) for
detail commands used in those programs shown in this chapter and subsequent.
6-4
MELSEC-Q
6.2 List of devices used

In the PLC programs shown in this chapter and subsequent, the application of the
devices used are as follows.
The I/O numbers for QD75 indicate those when QD75 is mounted in the 0-slot of the
main base.
If it is mounted in the slot other than the 0-slot of the main base, change the I/O
number to that for the position where QD75 was installed.
In addition, change the external inputs, external outputs, internal relays, data resisters,
and timers according to the system used.
(1) Inputs/outputs, external inputs/external outputs, and internal relays

of QD75
Device
name
Device
X0
QD75 READY signal
X1
X4
Input
Application
X5
Details when ON
Preparation completed
QD75 buffer memory accessible
X6
X7
M code ON signal
M code outputting
X8
X9
XA
XB
Error detected
XC
XD
XE
XF
BUSY signal
BUSY (operating)
Inputs/
X10
X11
X12
X13 Start complete signal
Start completed
outputs
X14
X15
X16
X17 Positioning complete signal
Positioning completed
of
Y0
QD75
Y1
Y4
Output
External
input
(command)
Y5
PLC READY signal
PLC CPU preparation completed
Y6
Y7
Axis stop signal
Requesting stop
Y8
YA
YC
YE
Starting forward run JOG
Y9
YB
YD
YF
Starting reverse run JOG
Y10
Y11
Y12
Y13 Positioning start signal
Requesting start
Y14
Y15
Y16
Y17 Execution prohibition request
Execution prohibition
X20
OPR request OFF command
Commanding OPR request OFF
X21
External command valid command
Commanding external command valid

setting
X22
External command invalid command
Commanding external command

invalid
X23
Machine OPR command
Commanding machine OPR
X24
Fast OPR command
Commanding fast OPR
X25
Positioning start command
Commanding positioning start
Speed-position switching operation

command
Commanding speed-position switching

operation
X27
Speed-position switching enable

command

enable command
X28
Speed-position switching prohibit

command

prohibit
X29
Movement amount change command
Commanding movement amount

change
X2A
High-level positioning control start

command
Commanding high-level positioning

control start
X2B
Positioning start command (dedicated

Commanding positioning start
instruction)
X26
6-5
Device
name
Device
Details when ON
X2C
M code OFF command
Commanding M code OFF
X2D
JOG operation speed setting

command
X2E
Forward run JOG/inching command
X2F
Reverse run JOG/inching command
Commanding JOG operation speed

setting
Commanding forward run JOG/inching
operation
Commanding reverse run JOG/inching
operation
Commanding manual pulse generator
operation enable
operation disable

enable command
disable command
X30
X31
Speed change command
Commanding speed change
Override command
Commanding override

command
disable command
Commanding acceleration/deceleration
time change
Commanding acceleration/deceleration
time change disable
X36
Torque change command
Commanding torque change
X37
Step operation command
Commanding step operation
X38
Skip operation command
Commanding skip operation
X39
Teaching command
Commanding teaching
X3A
Continuous operation interrupt

command
Commanding continuous operation

interrupt command
X32
X33
X34
X35
External
input
(command)
Application
MELSEC-Q
Restart command
Commanding restart
X3C
Parameter initialization command
Commanding parameter initialization
X3D
Flash ROM write command
Commanding flash ROM write
Error reset command
Commanding error reset
X3B
X3E
Stop command
Commanding stop
Position-speed switching operation

command
Position-speed switching enable
command
Position-speed switching prohibit
command
Position-speed switching operation

command
Position-speed switching enable
command
Position-speed switching prohibit
command
X43
X44
Inching movement amount setting

command
Inching movement amount setting

command
Target position change command
Step start information command
Step start information command
X47
Positioning start command k10
Positioning start command k10
X48
Override initialization value command Override initialization value command
X3F
X40
X41
X42
X45
X46
X49
Servo parameter read
X4A
Servo parameter write
Servo parameter write
X4B
PLC READY ON
PLC READY ON
X4D
For unit (degree)
For unit (degree)
X4E
Positioning start command (Y start)
Positioning start command being given
X4F
All axis servo ON command
All axis servo ON command
6-6
Device
name
Device
Details when ON
M0
OPR request OFF command
Commanding OPR request OFF
M1
OPR request OFF command pulse
OPR request OFF commanded
M2
OPR request OFF command storage OPR request OFF command held
M3
Fast OPR command
Commanding fast OPR
M4
Fast OPR command storage
Fast OPR command held
M5
Positioning start command pulse
Positioning start commanded
M6
Positioning start command storage
Positioning start command held
M7
In-JOG/Inching operation flag
In-JOG/Inching operation flag
M8

enable command

operation enable
M9
Manual pulse generator operating flag Manual pulse generator operating flag
M10

disable command

operation disable
Speed change command pulse
Speed change commanded
M11
M12
Internal relay
Application
MELSEC-Q
Speed change command storage
Speed change command held
M13
Override command
Requesting override
M14
Acceleration/deceleration time change Requesting acceleration/deceleration

command
time change
M15
Torque change command
Requesting torque change
M16
Step operation command pulse
Step operation commanded
M17
Skip command pulse
Skip commanded
M18
Skip command storage
Skip command held
M19
Teaching command pulse
Teaching commanded
M20
Teaching command storage
Teaching command held
M21
Continuous operation interrupt

command
Requesting continuous operation

interrupt
M22
Restart command
Requesting restart
M23
Restart command storage
Restart command held
M24

pulse
Parameter initialization commanded
M25

storage
Parameter initialization command held
M26
Flash ROM write command pulse
Flash ROM write commanded
M27
Flash ROM write command storage
Flash ROM write command held
M28
Error reset
Error reset completed
M29
Stop command pulse
Stop commanded
M30

pulse
Target position change commanded

storage
Target position change command held
M32
PSTRT1 instruction complete device
PSTRT1 instruction completed
M33
PSTRT1 instruction error complete

device
PSTRT1 instruction error completed
M31
6-7
Device
name
Device
Application
MELSEC-Q
Details when ON
M34
TEACH1 instruction complete device
TEACH1 instruction completed
M35
TEACH1 instruction error complete

device
TEACH1 instruction error completed
M36
PINIT instruction complete device
PINIT instruction completed
M37
PINIT instruction error complete device
PINIT instruction error completed
M38
PFWRT instruction complete device
PFWRT instruction completed
PFWRT instruction error complete

device
PFWRT instruction error completed
Internal relay M39
M40
Override initialization value
Override initialization value
M41
M42
Unused
M50
Parameter setting complete device
M54
ERRD complete device
ERRD completed
M56
ERRCLR complete device
ERRCLR completed
Parameter setting completed
(2) Data resisters and timers

Device
name
Device
Application
Details of storage
D0
OPR request flag
( Md.31 Status: b3)
D1
Speed (low-order 16 bits)
D2
Speed (high-order 16 bits)
( Cd.25 Position-speed switching

control speed change resister)
D3
Movement amount (low-order 16 bits)
D4
Movement amount (high-order 16 bits)
( Cd.23 Speed-position switching

control movement amount change
resister)
D5
( Cd.16 Inching movement amount)
D6
JOG operation speed (low-order 16 bits)
D7
JOG operation speed (high-order 16

bits)
Data register
( Cd.17 JOG operation speed)
D8

magnification (low-order)
D9

magnification (high-order)
pulse input magnification)
D10

enable
( Cd.21 Manual pulse generator

enable flag)
D11
Speed change value (low-order 16 bits)
D12
Speed change value (high-order 16 bits)
D13
( Cd.15 Speed change request)
D14
Override value
( Cd.13 Positioning operation speed

override value)
6-8
( Cd.20 Manual pulse generator 1
( Cd.14 New speed value)
Device
name
Data register
Device
Application
MELSEC-Q
Details of storage
D15
Acceleration time setting

(low-order 16 bits)
D16
Acceleration time setting

(high-order 16 bits)
D17
Deceleration time setting

(low-order 16 bits)
D18
Deceleration time setting

D19

enable
( Cd.12 Acceleration/deceleration
time change enable/disable selection
in speed change)
D20
Step valid flag
( Cd.35 Step valid flag)
D21
Step mode
( Cd.34 Step mode)
( Cd.10 New acceleration time

value)
( Cd.11 New deceleration time

value)
D22
D23
Target position (low-order 16 bits)
( Cd.27 New target position value
D24
Target position (high-order 16 bits)
(address))
D25
Target speed (low-order 16 bits)
D26
Target speed (high-order 16 bits)
( Cd.28 New target position value

(speed))
( Cd.29 New target position change

value flag)
D27
Target position change request
D28
Unused
D29
Unused
D30
PSTRT1 instruction control data
D31
Completion status
D32
Start number
D33
TEACH1 instruction control data
D34
Completion status
D35
Teaching data
D36
D37
PINIT instruction control data
D38
Completion status
D39
PFWRT instruction control data
D40
Completion status
D50
Unit setting
( Pr.1 Unit setting)
D51
Unit magnification
( Pr.4 Unit magnification)
6-9
Device
Application

D52
No. of pulses per rotation

(low-order 16 bits)
D53

D54
Movement amount per rotation

(low-order 16 bits)
D55
Movement amount per rotation

D56
Bias speed at start (low-order 16 bits)
D57
Bias speed at start (high-order 16 bits)
D68
Point 1 (shape, start No.)
D69
D70
D71
D72
D73
D74
D75
Data register D76
D77
Block start data (Block 0)
Device
name
MELSEC-Q

Details of storage
( Pr.2 No. of pulses per rotation)
( Pr.3 Movement amount per

rotation)
( Pr.7 Bias speed at start)
( Da.11 Shape)
( Da.12 Start data No.)
Point 1 (special start instruction)
( Da.13 Special start instruction)
( Da.14 Parameter)

D78
Torque change value
D79
Error code
( Md.23 Bias speed at start)
D80
Servo series
D81
Absolute position system valid/invalid
D82
Motor capacity
D85
Return home position method
D100
D101
M code
Data No.1
( Da.1 Operation pattern)
D102
Dwell time
( Da.2 Control system)
D103
Unused
( Da.3 Acceleration time No.)
D104
Command speed (low-order 16 bits)
( Da.4 Deceleration time No.)
D105
Command speed (high-order 16 bits)
( Da.5 Axis to be interpolated)
D106
Positioning address (low-order 16 bits)
( Da.6 Positioning address/

movement amount)
6 - 10
Device
name
Device
D107
Details of storage
D111
Positioning address (high-order 16 bits) ( Da.7 Circular interpolation address)

Circular interpolation address
( Da.8 Command speed)
(low-order 16 bits)
( Da.9 Dwell time)
( Da.10 M code)
Data No.2
M code
D112
Dwell time
D113
Unused
D114
D115
D116
D108
D109
D110

movement amount)
Positioning address (high-order 16 bits)
( Da.7 Circular interpolation address)
(low-order 16 bits)
D117
D118

D119
( Da.9 Dwell time)
D121
M code
( Da.10 M code)
Data No.3
D122
Dwell time
D123
Unused
D124
D120
D125
Data register
Application
MELSEC-Q
D126
D127
D128
D129

movement amount)
(low-order 16 bits)
( Da.9 Dwell time)
D130
D131
M code
( Da.10 M code)
Data No.4
D132
Dwell time
D133
Unused
D134
D135
D136
D137
D138
D139

movement amount)
(low-order 16 bits)
( Da.9 Dwell time)
D140
D141
M code
( Da.10 M code)
Data No.5
D142
Dwell time
D143
Unused
6 - 11
Device
name
Device
Application

D144
MELSEC-Q
Details of storage
D145
D146
D151

Positioning address (high-order 16 bits) ( Da.8 Command speed)
( Da.9 Dwell time)
(low-order 16 bits)
( Da.10 M code)
Data No.6
M code
D152
Dwell time
D153
Unused
D154
D155
D156
D157
D158

(low-order 16 bits)

movement amount)
Da.7
(
Circular interpolation address)
D159

( Da.9 Dwell time)
D147
D148
D149
D150
( Da.10 M code)
M code
Data No10
Dwell time
D193
Unused
D194
D195
D196
D197
D198

(low-order 16 bits)

movement amount)
D199

( Da.9 Dwell time)
D190
D191
Data register D192
( Da.10 M code)
D201
M code
Data No11
D202
Dwell time
D203
Unused
D204
D205
D206
D200
D207
D208
D209

movement amount)
(low-order 16 bits)
6 - 12
( Da.9 Dwell time)

( Da.10 M code)
Device
name
Device
Details of storage
D241
M code
Data No.15
D242
Dwell time
D243
Unused
D244
D245
D246

movement amount)
D240
Data register D247
Timer
Application
MELSEC-Q
D248

(low-order 16 bits)
D249


( Da.9 Dwell time)
( Da.10 M code)
SD1026
Day, hour data
SD1026
Minute, second data
T0
T1
PLC READY signal OFF confirmation

PLC READY signal OFF confirmation
6 - 13
PLC READY signal OFF
Device
name
Device
Details of storage
U0\G806
Error code
( Md.23 Axis error No.)
U0\G809
( Md.26 Axis operation status)
U0\G817
Status
( Md.31 Status)
U0\G1500
( Cd.3 Positioning start No.)
U0\G1502
Axis error reset
( Cd.5 Axis error reset)
U0\G1503
Restart command
( Cd.6 Restart command)
U0\G1504
M code OFF request (Buffer memory)
( Cd.7 M code OFF request)
U0\G1505
( Cd.8 External command valid)
U0\G1513
Positioning operation speed override
( Cd.13 Positioning operation speed

override)
U0\G1516
( Cd.15 Speed change request)
U0\G1517
( Cd.16 Inching movement amount)
U0\G1520
Code
Application
MELSEC-Q
Interruption request during continuous

operation
( Cd.18 Interruption request during

continuous operation)
U0\G1521
( Cd.19 OPR request flag OFF

request)
U0\G1524
( Cd.21 Manual pulse generator

enable flag)
( Cd.23 Speed-position switching
change register)
U0\G1526

U0\G1528
Speed-position switching control enable ( Cd.24 Speed-position switching

flag
control enable flag)
U0\G1530
Position-speed switching control speed

change register
U0\G1532
Position-speed switching control enable ( Cd.26 Position-speed switching

flag
control enable flag)
( Cd.25 Position-speed switching

register)
U0\G1538
( Cd.29 Target position change

request flag)
U0\G1545
Step valid flag
( Cd.35 Step valid flag)
U0\G1547
Skip command
( Cd.37 Skip command)
6 - 14
MELSEC-Q
6.3 Creating a program

The "positioning control operation program" actually used is explained in this chapter.
The functions and programs explained in Section 2 are assembled into the "positioning
control operation program" explained here. (To monitor the control, add the required
monitor program that matches the system. Refer to Section 5.6 "List of monitor data"
for details on the monitor items.)
6.3.1 General configuration of program

The general configuration of the "positioning control operation program" is shown
below.
Start of program creation
Parameter and
data are...
Set using the PLC program
Set using GX
Configurator-QP
Parameter and data setting program
Servo parameter
Initialization program
Start details setting program
Program for carrying out initialization
Program required to carry out "OPR control",

"major positioning control" and "high-level positioning control"
Start program
JOG operation program
Program required to carry out "manual control"
Inching operation program

operation program
Sub program
Stop program
Program required for

"sub functions" and "common functions"
Program for stopping control
Completion of program
creation
6 - 15
MELSEC-Q
6.3.2 Positioning control operation program

The various programs that configure the "positioning control operation program" are
shown below. When creating the program, refer to the explanation of each program
and Section 6.4 "Positioning program examples", and create an operation program that
matches the positioning system. (Numbers are assigned to the following programs.
Configuring the program in the order of these numbers is recommended.)
Start of program creation
Parameter and
data are...
Set using GX
Configurator-QP
Set using PLC program

(TO command)
Parameter and data
setting program
No.1
Parameter setting program
When not carrying out "OPR
control", the OPR parameters
do not need to be set.
No.2
Positioning data setting program
No.3
Block start data setting program
No.4
Servo parameter
Continued on next page
6 - 16
MELSEC-Q
Continued from previous page
Initialization program
Not carried out
OPR is...
No.5
OPR request OFF program
Carried out
No.6
No.7
External command function valid

setting program
Refer to Section 6.5.1
PLC READY signal [Y0] ON

program
Required
All axis servo ON [Y1] program
Required
No.8
Absolute system ?
No
Yes
OPR uncomplte ?
No
Yes
No.29
Error reset program
6 - 17
MELSEC-Q

Start details setting program
No.9

setting program
Program required to carry out

"OPR control"
"Major positioning control"
"High-level positioning control"
Start program
No.10
Positioning start program
No.11
Program to reset the start

signal and turn the M code
ON signal OFF
M code OFF program
No.12

No.14
No.13

No.14

operation program
No.15

operation program
6 - 18
Program required to carry out

"manual control"
MELSEC-Q

Sub program
No.16
No.17
No.18
No.19
No.20
No.21
No.22
No.23
No.24
No.25
No.26
No.27
No.28
No.29
Program added according to control details.

(Create as required.)
Speed change program
Override program
Acceleration/deceleration time
change program
Torque change program
Step operation program
Skip program
Refer to Section12.7.2
Teaching program
Continuous operation interrupt program
Target position change program
Restart program
Parameter initialization program
Refer to Section 13.2
Flash ROM write program
Servo parameter read program
Error reset program
The servo parameter read

it from servo amplifier to
buffer memory
Program required to
reset errors
Stop program
Program used to stop control
No.30
Stop program
End of program creation
6 - 19
MELSEC-Q
6.4 Positioning program examples

An example of the "Axis 1" positioning program is given in this section.
[No. 1] to [No. 3] parameter and data setting program
When setting the parameters or data with the PLC program, set them in the QD75 using the
TO command from the PLC CPU. (Carry out the settings while the PLC READY signal [Y0] is
OFF.)
When setting the parameters or data with GX Configurator-QP, the [No. 1] to [No. 3] program
is not necessary.
6 - 20
6 - 21
MELSEC-Q
6 - 22
MELSEC-Q
6 - 23
MELSEC-Q
6 - 24
MELSEC-Q
6 - 25
MELSEC-Q
6 - 26
MELSEC-Q
6 - 27
MELSEC-Q
6 - 28
MELSEC-Q
6 - 29
MELSEC-Q
6 - 30
MELSEC-Q
6 - 31
MELSEC-Q
6 - 32
MELSEC-Q
6 - 33
MELSEC-Q
6 - 34
MELSEC-Q
6 - 35
MELSEC-Q
6 - 36
MELSEC-Q
6 - 37
MELSEC-Q
6 - 38
MELSEC-Q
6 - 39
MELSEC-Q
6 - 40
MELSEC-Q
6 - 41
MELSEC-Q
6 - 42
MELSEC-Q
6 - 43
MELSEC-Q
6 - 44
MELSEC-Q
6 - 45
MELSEC-Q
6 - 46
MELSEC-Q
6 - 47
MELSEC-Q
6 - 48
MELSEC-Q
6 - 49
MELSEC-Q
6 - 50
MELSEC-Q
6 - 51
MELSEC-Q
6 - 52
MELSEC-Q
MELSEC-Q
6.5 Program details

6.5.1 Initialization program
[1] OPR request OFF program
This program forcibly turns OFF the "OPR request flag" ( Md.31 Status: b3)
which is ON.
When using a system that does not require OPR, assemble the program to
cancel the "OPR request" made by the QD75 when the power is turned ON, etc.
Data requiring setting

Set the following data to use the OPR request flag OFF request.
Setting
value
Setting item
Cd.19
OPR request flag OFF

request
Setting details
Set to "1: Turn OPR request flag OFF".
1521
1621
1721
1821
Refer to Section 5.7 "List of control data" for details on the setting details.
Time chart for OPR OFF request

ON
PLC READY signal
[Y0]
OFF
ON
[X0]
QD75 READY signal
OFF
OFF (0)
OPR request OFF flag

[ Md. 31 Status: b3]
Cd. 19 OPR request flag OFF request
Fig. 6.1 Time chart for OPR OFF request
[2] External command function valid setting program

This program is used to validate the "external command signal" beforehand when
using the external command functions (external start, speed change, speedposition switching, position-speed switching, skip). (Set which function to use
beforehand in " Pr.42 External command function selection".)
Set the following data to validate the "external command signal".
Setting item
Cd.8
Setting
value
1
Setting details
Set to "1: Validate external command".
6 - 53

1505 1605 1705 1805
MELSEC-Q
6.5.2 Start details setting program

This program sets which control, out of "OPR", "major positioning control" or "high-level
positioning control" to execute. For " high-level positioning control", "fast OPR", "speedposition switching control" and "position-speed switching control", add the respectively
required PLC program.
(Refer to "Chapter 10" for details on starting the " high-level positioning control.)
Procedures for setting the starting details

(1) Set the "positioning start No." corresponding to the control to be started in
" Cd.3 Positioning start No.".
Setting
value
Setting item
Cd.3
Setting details
1 to 600
9001
9002
9003
9004
7000 to 7004
:
:
:
:
:
:

Machine OPR
Fast OPR
Simultaneous start
Block No.
(For "high-level positioning
control")

1500 1600 1700 1800
(2) For "high-level positioning control", set the "positioning start point No." of the
block to be started in " Cd.4 Positioning start point No.".
Setting
value
Setting item
Cd.4
Positioning start point No.
Setting details
1 to 50 : Point No. of block start data

1501 1601 1701 1801
(3) Set the following control data for "speed-position switching control (INC
mode)".
(Set " Cd.23 Speed-position switching control movement amount change
register as required". Setting is not required in the ABS mode.)
Setting item
Cd.23
change register
Cd.24
enable flag
Setting
value
Setting details

Set the new value when the position control's

movement amount is to be changed during
speed control.
1526 1626 1726 1826

1527 1627 1727 1827
When "1" is set, the speed-position switching

signal will be validated.
1528 1628 1728 1828
6 - 54
MELSEC-Q
(4) For "position-speed switching control", set the control data shown below.
(As required, set the " Cd.25 Position-speed switching control speed change
resister".)
Setting item
Cd.25
resister
Cd.26
enable flag
Setting
value
Setting details

Used to set a new value when speed is changed 1530 1630 1730 1830
during positioning control.
1531 1631 1731 1831
1
To validate position-speed switching signal, this

is set to 1.
6 - 55
1532 1632 1732 1832
MELSEC-Q
6.5.3 Start program

This program is used to start the control with start commands.
The control can be started with the following two methods.
[1] Starting by inputting positioning start signal [Y10, Y11, Y12, Y13]
[2] Starting by inputting external command signal
Buffer memory
3)
Control with
positioning data
No. 1
1)
1
Servo amplifier
1500
PLC CPU
2)
ON
Input/output signal
Y10
1)
2)
3)
When starting positioning with the scan

after the completion of positioning,
insert X10 as an interlock so that
positioning is started after Y10 is turned
OFF and X10 is turned OFF.
Set the "positioning start No." in " Cd.3 Positioning start No." according to the control to
be started.
(In the above example, set positioning data No. "1".)
Input the positioning start signal [Y10] or the external command signal.
The positioning data No. "1" will start.
Fig. 6.2 Procedures for starting control (for axis 1)
6 - 56
MELSEC-Q
Servo ON conditions
Setting of servo parameter
PLC READY signal
Y0 ON
All axis servo ON
Y1 ON
Starting conditions
To start the control, the following conditions must be satisfied.
The necessary start conditions must be incorporated in the PLC program so that
the control is not started when the conditions are not satisfied.
Signal name
PLC READY signal
Signal state
Device
ON PLC CPU preparation completed
Y0
QD75 READY signal
ON QD75 preparation completed
X0
All axis servo ON
ON All axis servo is ON
Y1
Interface
signal
Axis stop signal
ON
QD75 buffer memory

Accessible
X1
OFF Axis stop signal is OFF.
Y4
Y5
Y6
Y7
M code ON signal
OFF M code ON signal is OFF.
X4
X5
X6
X7
OFF No error is present.
X8
X9
XA
XB
BUSY signal
OFF BUSY signal is OFF.
XC
XD
XE
XF
OFF Start complete signal is OFF.
X10
X11
X12
X13
Stop signal
OFF Stop signal is OFF.
External
Upper limit (FLS)
signal
Lower limit (RLS)
ON Within limit range
: When the synchronous setting of the PLC CPU is made in the nonsynchronous mode, this must be
provided as an interlock.
When it is made in the synchronous mode, no interlock must be provided in the program because the
flag is turned ON when calculation is run on the PLC CPU.
6 - 57
MELSEC-Q
[1] Starting by inputting positioning start signal

Operation when starting
(1) When the positioning start signal turns ON, the start complete signal and
BUSY signal turn ON, and the positioning operation starts.
It can be seen that the axis is operating when the BUSY signal is ON.
(2) When the positioning start signal turns OFF, the start complete signal also
turns OFF.
If the positioning start signal is ON even after positioning is completed, the
start complete signal will remain ON.
(3) If the positioning start signal turns ON again while the BUSY signal is ON, the
warning "operating start (warning code: 100)" will occur.
(4) The process taken when positioning is completed will differ according to case
(a) and (b) below.
(a) When next positioning is not to be carried out
If a dwell time is set, the system will wait for the set time to pass, and then
positioning will be completed.
When positioning is completed, the BUSY signal will turn OFF and the
positioning complete signal will turn ON. However, when using speed
control or when the positioning complete signal ON time is "0", the signal
will not turn ON.
When the positioning complete signal ON time is passed, the positioning
complete signal will turn OFF.
(b) When next positioning is to be carried out
If a dwell time is set, the system will wait for the set time to pass.
When the set dwell time is passed, the next positioning will start.
V
Dwell time
Positioning
ON
All axis servo ON

[Y1]
OFF
ON

OFF
[Y10, Y11, Y12, Y13]
ON

OFF
[X10, X11, X12, X13]
ON
BUSY signal
[XC, XD, XE, XF]
OFF
ON

[X14, X15, X16, X17] OFF
Fig. 6.3 ON/OFF timing of each signal at start of positioning
6 - 58
MELSEC-Q
POINT
The BUSY signal [XC, XD, XE, XF] turns ON even when position control of
movement amount 0 is executed. However, since the ON time is short, the ON
status may not be detected in the PLC program.
(The ON status of the start complete signal [X10, X11, X12, X13], positioning
complete signal [X14, X15, X16, X17] and M code ON signal [X4, X5, X6, X7] can
be detected in the PLC program.)
Starting time chart

The time chart for starting each control is shown below.
(1) Time chart for starting "machine OPR"
V
t
Near-point dog
Zero signal
ON
All axis servo ON
PLC READY signal
[Y10]
[Y1]
[Y0]
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
QD75 READY signal
[X0]
OFF
ON
[X10]
OFF
ON
BUSY signal
[XC]
[X8]
OFF
OFF
Cd. 3 Positioning start No.
9001
ON
OPR request flag

OFF
OPR complete flag

OFF
ON
Fig. 6.4 Time chart for starting "machine OPR"
6 - 59
MELSEC-Q
(2) Time chart for starting "fast OPR"

V
ON
[Y10]

All axis servo ON
[Y1]
PLC READY signal
[Y0]
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
[X0]
QD75 READY signal
OFF
ON
[X10]
OFF
ON
BUSY signal
[XC]
[X8]
OFF
OFF
9002
Fig. 6.5 Time chart for starting "fast OPR"

(3) Time chart for starting "major positioning control"
Operation pattern
V
1(11)
Dwell time
2(00)
t
[Y10]
All axis servo ON
[Y1]
PLC READY signal
[Y0]
QD75 READY signal
[X0]
[X10]
BUSY signal
[XC]

[X14]
[X8]
Fig. 6.6 Time chart for starting "major positioning control"
6 - 60
MELSEC-Q
(4) Time chart for starting "speed-position switching control"

V
Speed control Position control
Operation pattern(00)
Positioning data No.(1)
Dwell time
[Y10]
All axis servo ON
[Y1]
PLC READY signal
[Y0]
QD75 READY signal
[X0]
[X10]
BUSY signal
[XC]

[X14]
[X8]
Speed-position switching signal

(external)
Cd. 24 Speed-position
switching enable flag
Fig. 6.7 Time chart for starting "speed-position switching control"

(5) Time chart for starting "position-speed switching control"
V
Operation pattern (00) Position control

Positioning data No. (1)
Speed control
[Y10]
All axis servo ON
[Y1]
Sequencer READY signal
[Y0]
QD75 READY complete signal
[X0]
[X10]
BUSY signal
[XC]

[X14]
[X8]
Position-speed switching signal

(external)
Stop command
Cd. 26 Position-speed
Fig. 6.8 Time chart for starting "position-speed switching control"
6 - 61
MELSEC-Q
Machine OPR operation timing and process time
Positioning start
[Y10, Y11, Y12, Y13]
signal
BUSY signal [XC, XD, XE, XF]
t1
[X10, X11, X12, X13]
t4
Waiting
Md. 26 Axis operation status
In OPR
Waiting
t2
OPR request flag
t3
OPR complete flag

Fig. 6.9 Machine OPR operation timing and process time

Normal timing time
Unit: ms
t1
t2
t3
t4
1.0 to 1.4
5.5 to 7.9
0 to 3.5
0 to 3.5
The t1 timing time could be delayed depending on the operating conditions of

the other axis.
6 - 62
MELSEC-Q
Position control operation timing and process time

[Y10, Y11, Y12, Y13]
BUSY signal [XC, XD, XE, XF]
t1
M code ON signal
(WITH mode) [X4, X5, X6, X7]
t2
Cd. 7 M code OFF request

Positioning start complete
[X10, X11, X12, X13]
signal
t3
Waiting
Controlling position
Waiting
t4
t5
[X14, X15, X16, X17]
M code ON signal
(AFTER mode)
[X4, X5, X6, X7]
t6
t2

OPR complete flag
Fig. 6.10 Position control operation timing and process time
When the positioning start signal turns ON, if all signals marked with an
asterisk ( ) are already ON, the signals marked with an asterisk ( ) will turn
OFF when the positioning start signal turns ON.
Normal timing time
Unit: ms
t1
t2
t3
t4
t5
t6
1.2 to 2.3
0 to 3.5
0 to 3.5
5.5 to 7.9
0 to 3.5
Follows
parameters
The t1 timing time could be delayed depending on the operating conditions of

the other axis.
6 - 63
MELSEC-Q
[2] Starting by inputting external command signal

When starting positioning control by inputting the external command signal, the
start command can be directly input into the QD75. This allows the variation time
equivalent to one scan time of the PLC CPU to be eliminated. This is an effective
procedure when operation is to be started as quickly as possible with the start
command or when the starting variation time is to be suppressed. To start
positioning control by inputting the external command signal, set the "data
required to be set" and then turn ON the external command signal.
Restrictions
When starting by inputting the external command signal, the start complete signal
[X10, X11, X12, X13] will not turn ON.
Data required to be set

To execute positioning start with the external command signal, set parameter
( Pr.42 ) beforehand, and validate the "external command signal" with the
"external command signal validity setting program (program No. 5).
Setting
value
Setting item
Setting details
Pr.42
External command
function selection
Set to "0: External positioning start".
Cd.8
Set to "1: Validate external command".

62
212
362
512
1505 1605 1705 1805
Refer to Chapter 5 "Data Used for Positioning Control" for details on the setting details.
Starting time chart
Operation pattern
Dwell time
1(00)
t
[Y10]
All axis servo ON
[Y1]
PLC READY signal
[Y0]
QD75 READY signal
[X0]
Positioning start complete signal [X10]

BUSY signal
[XC]

[X14]
[X8]
External command signal

Pr. 42 External command function selection
Cd. 8 External command valid
Fig. 6.11 Time chart for starting with external start signal
6 - 64
MELSEC-Q
6.5.4 Continuous operation interrupt program

During positioning control, the control can be interrupted during continuous positioning
control and continuous path control (continuous operation interrupt function). When
"continuous operation interruption" is execution, the control will stop when the
operation of the positioning data being executed ends. To execute continuous
operation interruption, set "1: Continuous operation interrupt request" for " Cd.18
Interrupt request during continuous operation".
[1] Operation during continuous operation interruption

[For Stop comand ON]
V
ON
Stop command
Stop process when stop command turns ON
Start
Positioning data No. 10
[For Cd.18 is set "1" ]

V
ON
Cd.18 is set "1"

Stop process at continuous operation
interrupt request
Start
Fig. 6.12 Operation during continuous operation interruption
[2] Restrictions
(1) When the "continuous operation interrupt request" is executed, the positioning
will end.
Thus, after stopping, the operation cannot be "restarted".
When " Cd.6 Restart command" is issued, a warning "Restart not possible"
(warning code: 104) will occur.
(2) Even if the stop command is turned ON after executing the "continuous
operation interrupt request", the "continuous operation interrupt request"
cannot be canceled.
Thus, if "restart" is executed after stopping by turning the stop command ON,
the operation will stop when the positioning data No. where "continuous
operation interrupt request" was executed is completed.
6 - 65
MELSEC-Q
(3) If the operation cannot be decelerated to a stop because the remaining

distance is insufficient when "continuous operation interrupt request" is
executed with continuous path control, the interruption of the continuous
operation will be postponed until the positioning data shown below.
Positioning data No. have sufficient remaining distance

Positioning data No. for positioning complete (pattern: 00)
Positioning data No. for continuous positioning control (pattern: 01)
Even when the continuous operation interrupt is requested,
the remaining distance is insufficient, and thus, the
operation cannot stop at the positioning No. being executed.
Stop process when operation cannot stop

at positioning data No. 10
interrupt request
Start
t
Positioninig data No. 10
(4) When operation is not performed (BUSY signal [XC, XD, XE, XF] is OFF), the
interrupt request during continuous operation is not accepted. It is cleared to 0
at a start or restart.
[3] Control data requiring settings

Set the following data to interrupt continuous operation.
Setting item
Cd.18
Interrupt request during

continuous operation
Setting
value
1
Setting details
Set "1: Interrupt request during continuous
operation".
6 - 66

1520 1620 1720 1820
MELSEC-Q
6.5.5 Restart program

When a stop factor occurs during position control and the operation stops, the
positioning can be restarted from the stopped position to the position control end point
by using the "restart command" ( Cd.6 Restart command).
("Restarting" is not possible when "continuous operation is interrupted.")
[1] Restart operation

Axis 1
Positioning with positioning data No. 11

continues with restart
command
Stop with stop command
Axis 2
Fig. 6.13 Restart operation
[2] Restrictions
(1) Restarting can be executed only when the " Md.26 Axis operation status" is
"stopped".
If the axis operation is not "stopped", restarting is not possible.
(2) Do not execute restart while the stop command is ON.
If restart is executed while stopped, an error "Stop signal ON at start" (error
code: 106) will occur, and the " Md.26 Axis operation status" will change to
"error occurring".
Thus, even if the error is reset, the operation cannot be restarted.
(3) Restarting can be executed even while the positioning start signal is ON.
However, make sure that the positioning start signal does not change from
OFF to ON while stopped.
If the positioning start signal changes from OFF to ON, positioning will start
from the positioning data No. of designated point's positioning data No. set in
" Cd.3 Positioning start No.".
(4) If positioning is ended with the continuous operation interrupt request, the
operation cannot be restarted.
If restart is requested, a warning "Restart not possible" (warning code: 104)
will occur.
(5) When stopped with interpolation operation, write "1: Restarts" into
" Cd.6 Restart command" for the reference axis, and then restart.
(6) If the " Md.26 Axis operation status" is not "stopped" when restarting, a
warning "Restart not possible" (warning code: 104) will occur, and the process
at that time will be continued.
6 - 67
MELSEC-Q
REMARK
Restarting after stopping is possible even for the following control.
Incremental system position control Continuous positioning control
Block start
[3] Control data requiring setting

Set the following data to execute restart.
Cd.6
Setting item
Setting
value
Restart command
Setting details
Set "1: Restarts".

1503 1603 1703 1803
[4] Restarting conditions

The following conditions must be satisfied when restarting. (Assemble the
required conditions into the PLC program as an interlock.)
(1) Operation state
" Md.26 Axis operation status" is "1: Stopped"
(2) Signal state
Signal name
PLC READY signal
Signal state
Device
Y0
QD75 READY signal
X0
All axis servo ON
ON All axis servo ON
Y1
Interface
signal
Axis stop signal
ON
QD75 buffer memory

Accessible
X1
OFF Axis stop signal is OFF
Y4
Y5
Y6
Y7
M code ON signal
OFF M code ON signal is OFF
X4
X5
X6
X7
OFF No error is present
X8
X9
XA
XB
BUSY signal
OFF BUSY signal is OFF
XC
XD
XE
XF
OFF Start complete signal is OFF
X10
X11
X12
X13
Stop signal
OFF Stop signal is OFF
External
Upper limit (FLS)
signal
Lower limit (RLS)
: When the synchronous setting of the PLC CPU is made in the nonsynchronous mode, this must be
provided as an interlock.
When it is made in the synchronous mode, no interlock must be provided in the program because the
flag is turned ON when calculation is run on the PLC CPU.
6 - 68
MELSEC-Q
(5) Time chart for restarting

Dwell time
[Y10]
All axis servo ON
[Y1]
Axis stop signal
[Y4]
PLC READY signal
[Y0]
QD75 READY signal
[X0]
[X10]
BUSY signal
[XC]
[X14]
[X8]
Cd. 6 Restart command
8
0
Fig. 6.14 Time chart for restarting
6 - 69
8
1
0
0
MELSEC-Q
6.5.6 Stop program

The axis stop signal [Y4, Y5, Y6, Y7] or a stop signal from an external source is used
to stop the control.
Create a program to turn ON the axis stop signal [Y4, Y5, Y6, Y7] as the stop program.
The process for stopping control is explained below.
Each control is stopped in the following cases.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
When each control is completed normally.

When the Servo READY signal is turned OFF.
When a PLC CPU error occurs.
When the PLC READY signal is turned OFF.
When an error occurs in QD75.
When control is intentionally stopped
(Stop signal from PLC CPU turned ON, stop signal from peripheral devices)
The stop process for the above cases is shown below.

(Excluding item (1) above "When each control is completed normally".)
[1] Stop process
Stop cause
Stop
axis
Axis
Stop process
OPR control
Manual control
M code operation
status
ON
Major
High-level
Manual
signal ( Md.26 ) Machine Fast OPR positioning positioning JOG/
pulse
Inching
OPR
after stop
control
control
control
generator
after
operation
control
operation
stopping
Servo READY OFF
Forced stop
Servo amplifier
power supply
OFF
Servo alarm
Each
axis
No
change
During
error
Each
axis
No
change
During
error
Servo OFF or free run
Emergency stop
of PLC CPU
Fatal stop
(Stop group 1)
Hardware stroke
limit upper/lower
limit error
occurrence
Error occurs in
PLC CPU

(Select with " Pr.37 Sudden stop group 1 sudden stop
Deceleration
stop
selection".
No
change
Emergency stop PLC READY

All axes Turns
(Stop group 2)
OFF
signal OFF
Error in test
No
mode
change
Axis error
detection (Error
Relatively safe
Each
No
other than stop
stop
axis
change
group 1 or 2)
(Stop group 3)
"Stop" input from
peripheral device
"Stop signal" ON
from external
Intentional stop source
Each
No
(Stop group 3)
change
"Axis stop signal" axis
ON from PLC
CPU
Delegation stop/sudden stop

During
error
Deceleration
stop
selection".
During
error
During selection".
stop
(during
standing
by)
6 - 70
Deceleration
stop
MELSEC-Q
[2] Types of stop processes

The operation can be stopped with deceleration stop, sudden stop or immediate
stop.
(1) Deceleration stop
The operation stops with "deceleration time 0 to 3" ( Pr.10 , Pr.28 , Pr.29 ,
Pr.30 ).
Which time from "deceleration time 0 to 3" to use for control is set in positioning
data ( Da.4 ).
(2) Sudden stop
The operation stops with " Pr.36 Sudden stop deceleration time".
(3) Servo OFF or free run (The operation stops with dynamic brake or
electromagnetic brake.)
The operation does not decelerate.
The QD75 immediately stops the command, but the operation will coast for the
droop pulses accumulated in the servo amplifier deviation counter.
Positioning speed
Positioning speed
Positioning speed
Actual sudden stop

deceleration time
Pr. 36 Sudden stop

deceleration time
Set deceleration time
Coast for the droop pulses accumulated

in the servo amplifier deviation counter.
Fig. 6.15 Types of stop processes
REMARK
1 "Deceleration stop" and "sudden stop" are selected with the details parameter 2
"stop group 1 to 3 sudden stop selection". (The default setting is "deceleration
stop".)
6 - 71
MELSEC-Q
[3] Order of priority for stop process

The order of priority for the QD75 stop process is as follows.
Deceleration stop < Sudden stop < Servo OFF
(1) If the deceleration stop command ON (stop signal ON) or deceleration stop
cause occurs during deceleration to speed 0 (including automatic
deceleration), operation changes depending on the setting of " Cd.42 Stop
command processing for deceleration stop selection".
(a) Manual control
Independently of the Cd.42 setting, a deceleration curve is re-processed
from the speed at stop cause occurrence.
(b) OPR control, positioning control
When Cd.42 = 0 (deceleration curve re-processing):
A deceleration curve is re-processed from the speed at stop cause
occurrence.
When Cd.42 = 1 (deceleration curve continuation):
The current deceleration curve is continued after stop cause occurrence.
(For details, refer to Section 12.7.10 "Stop command processing for
deceleration stop function".)
(2) If the stop signal designated for sudden stop turns ON or a stop cause occurs
during deceleration, the sudden stop process will start from that point.
However, if the sudden stop deceleration time is longer than the deceleration
time, the deceleration stop process will be continued even if a sudden stop
cause occurs during the deceleration stop process.
Example
The process when a sudden stop cause occurs during deceleration stop is shown below.
Positioning speed
Deceleration
stop process
Positioning speed
Sudden
stop cause
Stop
Sudden stop deceleration process
Deceleration stop process continues
Deceleration
stop process
Sudden
stop cause
Stop
Process for sudden stop
[4] Inputting the stop signal during deceleration

(1) Even if stop is input during deceleration (including automatic deceleration), the
operation will stop at that deceleration speed.
(2) If stop is input during deceleration for OPR, the operation will stop at that
deceleration speed. If input at the creep speed, the operation will stop
immediately.
(3) If a stop cause, designated for sudden stop, occurs during deceleration, the
sudden stop process will start from that point.
The sudden stop process during deceleration is carried out only when the
sudden stop time is shorter than the deceleration stop time.
6 - 72
Chapter 7 Memory Configuration and Data

Process
7
The QD75 memory configuration and data transmission are explained in this chapter.
The QD75 is configured of two memories. By understanding the configuration and
roles of two memories, the QD75 internal data transmission process, such as "when
the power is turned ON" or "when the PLC READY signal changes from OFF to ON"
can be easily understood. This also allows the transmission process to be carried out
correctly when saving or changing the data.
7.1 Configuration and roles of QD75 memory...................................................................77.1.1 Configuration and roles of QD75 memory .....................................................77.1.2 Buffer memory area configuration..................................................................77.2 Data transmission process...........................................................................................7-
7-1
2
2
5
8
7 MEMORY CONFIGURATION AND DATA PROCESS
MELSEC-Q
7.1 Configuration and roles of QD75 memory

7.1.1 Configuration and roles of QD75 memory
The QD75 is configured of the following two memories.
Backup
Servo parameter area
Area for backing up data required

for positioning.
PLC CPU memo area
Flash ROM
Block start data area

(No.7000 to 7004)
Area that can be directly accessed

with PLC program from PLC CPU.
Positioning data area

(No. 1 to 600)
Buffer memory
Control data area
Role
Monitor data area
Memory
configuration
Parameter area
Area configuration
Not
possible
: Setting and storage area provided, Not possible: Data is lost when power is turned OFF
: Setting and storage area not provided, Possible: Data is held even when power is turned OFF
7-2
Possible
MELSEC-Q
Details of areas
Parameter area
Area where parameters, such as positioning parameters and OPR parameters,
required for positioning control are set and stored.
(Set the items indicated with Pr.1 to Pr.57 , Pr.200 to Pr.201 for each axis.)
Monitor data area

Area where positioning system or QD75 operation state is stored.
(Set the items indicated with Md.1 to Md.48 , Md.100 to Md.111 .)
Control data area

Area where data for operating and controlling positioning system is set and
stored. (Set the items indicated with Cd.1 to Cd.42 , Cd.100 to Cd.102 .)
Positioning data area (No.1 to 600)

Area where positioning data No.1 to 600 is set and stored.
(Set the items indicated with Da.1 to Da.10 for each positioning data.)
Block start data area (No.7000 to 7004)

Area where information required only when carrying out block No. 7000 to 7004
high-level positioning is set and stored. (Set the items indicated with Da.11 to
Da.19 .)
PLC CPU memo area

Area where condition judgment values required for special positioning, etc., are
set and stored.

Area where parameters, such as servo parameters, required for positioning
control on servo amplifier are set and stored.
(Set the items indicated with Pr.100 to Pr.161 for each axis.)
7-3
MELSEC-Q
User accesses
here.
Data is backed up
here.
Flash ROM
Buffer memory
Parameter area
Parameter area
(No.1 to 600)

(No.1 to 600)

(No.7000 to 7004)
(No.30100 to 30499)

(No. 7000 to 7004)
(No. 30100 to 30499)
Copy
Monitor data area

Control data area
PLC CPU
memo area
QD75
7-4
MELSEC-Q
7.1.2 Buffer memory area configuration

The QD75 buffer memory is configured of the following types of areas.
Buffer memory area configuration
Parameter area
Monitor data area

Control data area
(No.1 to 600)

(No.7000)
Axis 2
Axis 3
Axis 4
Basic parameter area
0 to 15
150 to 165
300 to 315
450 to 465
Detailed parameter area
17 to 69
167 to 219
317 to 369
467 to 519
OPR basic parameter area
70 to 78
220 to 228
370 to 378
520 to 528
OPR detailed parameter area
79 to 89
229 to 239
379 to 389
529 to 539
System monitor area

Axis monitor area
1900 to 1999
2000 to 7999
8000 to
13999
14000 to
19999
20000 to
25999
26000 to
26049
27000 to
27049
28000 to
28049
29000 to
29049
26050 to
26099
27050 to
27099
28050 to
28099
29050 to
29099
26100 to
26199
27100 to
27199
28100 to
28199
29100 to
29199
26200 to
26249
27200 to
27249
28200 to
28249
29200 to
29249
26250 to
26299
27250 to
27299
28250 to
28299
29250 to
29299
26300 to
26399
27300 to
27399
28300 to
28399
29300 to
29399
26400 to
26449
27400 to
27449
28400 to
28449
29400 to
29449
26450 to
26499
27450 to
27499
28450 to
28499
29450 to
29499
26500 to
26599
27500 to
27599
28500 to
28599
29500 to
29599
26600 to
26649
27600 to
27649
28600 to
28649
29600 to
29649
26650 to
26699
27650 to
27699
28650 to
28699
29650 to
29699
26700 to
26799
27700 to
27799
28700 to
28799
29700 to
29799
26800 to
26849
27800 to
27849
28800 to
28849
29800 to
29849
26850 to
26899
27850 to
27899
28850 to
28899
29850 to
29899
26900 to
26999
27900 to
27999
28900 to
28999
29900 to
29999
Condition data area

PLC CPU memo area
1000 to 1099 1100 to 1199
Condition data area

(No.7004)
900 to 999
1500 to 1599 1600 to 1699 1700 to 1799 1800 to 1899
Condition data area

(No.7003)
800 to 899
Axis control data area
Condition data area

(No.7002)
1200 to 1499
System control data area
Condition data area

(No.7001)

Axis 1
PLC CPU memo area
30000 to 30099
7-5
Writing
possibility
Possible
Not possible
Possible
Possible
Possible
Buffer memory area configuration
MELSEC-Q

Axis 1
Axis 2
Axis 3
Axis 4
Servo basic parameter area
30100 to
30111
30200 to
30211
30300 to
30311
30400 to
30411
Servo adjustment parameter

area
30112 to
30126
30212 to
30226
30312 to
30326
30412 to
30426
Servo expansion parameter

area
30127 to
30149
30227 to
30249
30327 to
30349
30427 to
30449
Servo expansion parameter

area 2
30150 to
30199
30250 to
30299
30350 to
30399
30450 to
30499
Writing
possibility
Possible
Use of address Nos. skipped above is prohibited. If used, the system may not operate correctly.
7-6
MEMO
7-7
MELSEC-Q
MELSEC-Q
7.2 Data transmission process

The data is transmitted between the QD75 memories with steps (1) to (10) shown
below.
The data transmission patterns numbered (1) to (10) on the right page correspond to
the numbers (1) to (10) on the left page.
PLC CPU
(4) FROM command
(2) TO command
QD75
Buffer memory
(2) Valid upon execution of

the TO instruction.
Parameter area (b)
Parameter area (a)

Parameter area (b)
(No.1 to 600)
(No.7000 to 7004)
(No.30100 to 30499)
Monitor data area
Control data area
(1) Power supply ON/
PLC CPU reset
PLC CPU
memo area
Pr.8 to Pr.10
Pr.25 to Pr.42
(3) PLC READY signal

[Y0] OFF ON
For PLC READY signal ON : Valid
Parameter area (a)
Pr.1 to Pr.7
Pr.11 to Pr.24
Pr.43 to Pr.57
Pr.200 Pr.201
Flash ROM
ROM
Parameter area (a)

Parameter area (b)
(No.1 to 600)
(No.7000 to 7004)
(No.30100 to 30499)
(5) Servo amplifier read
Servo amplifer
7-8
MELSEC-Q
(1) Transmitting data when power is turned ON or PLC CPU is reset

)
(
When the power is turned ON or the PLC CPU is reset, the "parameters",
"positioning data" and "block start data" stored (backed up) in the flash ROM is
transmitted to the buffer memory.
(2) Transmitting data with TO command from PLC CPU (
The parameters or data is written from the PLC CPU to the buffer memory using
the TO command. At this time, when the "parameter area (b) 1", "positioning
data (No. 1 to 600)", "block start data (No. 7000 to 7004)", "control data" and
"PLC CPU memo area" are written into the buffer memory with the TO command,
it is simultaneously valid.
1 Parameter area (b) ...... Parameters validated simultaneously with the writing
to the buffer memory with the TO command.
( Pr.8 to Pr.10 , Pr.25 to Pr.42 )
POINT
When a value other than "0" has been set to the motor capacity of servo parameter
Pr.104 inside the flash ROM, the power is turned ON or PLC CPU is reset to
transmit the servo parameter inside the flash ROM to the servo amplifier (servo
amplifier LED indicates "b").
After that, the TO instruction writes the servo parameter from the PLC CPU to the
buffer memory so that the servo parameter in the buffer memory is not transmitted
to the servo amplifier even if the PLC READY signal [Y0] is turned OFF then ON.
Change the servo parameter with the above method, after setting the motor
capacity of servo parameter Pr.104 inside the flash ROM, to "0".
7-9
MELSEC-Q
(3) Validate parameters when PLC READY signal [Y0] changes from
OFF to ON
When the PLC READY signal [Y0] changes from OFF to ON, the data stored in
the buffer memory's "parameter area (a) 2" is validated.
2: Parameter area (a) ..... Parameters validated when PLC READY signal [Y0]
changes from OFF to ON.
( Pr.1 to Pr.7 , Pr.11 to Pr.24 , Pr.43
to Pr.57 , Pr.200 , Pr.201 )
When the motor capacity of servo parameter Pr.104
inside the flash ROM is set to 0 and a value other
than 0 is set to Pr.104 in the above step (2), the
servo parameter data is transmitted to the servo
amplifier.
POINT
The setting values of the parameters that correspond to parameter area (b) are
valid when written into the buffer memory with the TO command.
However, the setting values of the parameters that correspond to parameter area
(a) are not validated until the PLC READY signal [Y0] changes from OFF to ON.
(4) Accessing with FROM command from PLC CPU (
The data is read from the buffer memory to the PLC CPU using the FROM
command.
(5) Reading the servo parameter from the servo amplifier (
When 1 is written to Cd.102 , the servo parameter is read from the servo amplifier
to the buffer memory.
7 - 10
MEMO
7 - 11
MELSEC-Q
MELSEC-Q
Pheripharal devices
(7) Flash ROM request (Write)
PLC CPU
(6) Flash ROM write

(Set "1" in Cd.1 with TO
command)
QD75
Buffer memory
Parameter area (a)
Parameter area (b)
(No.1 to 600)
(No.7000 to 7004)
(No.30100 to 30499)
Monitor data area
Control data area
(6) Flash ROM write
PLC CPU
memo area
Flash ROM
Parameter area (a)
Parameter area (b)
(No.1 to 600)
(No.7000 to 7004)
(No.30100 to 30499)
Servo amplifier
7 - 12
Parameter area (a)

Pr.1 to Pr.7
Pr.11 to Pr.24
Pr.43 to Pr.57
Pr.200
Parameter area (b)
Pr.8 to Pr.10
Pr.25 to Pr.42
Pr.201
MELSEC-Q
(6) Writing the flash ROM by a PLC CPU request (
The following transmission process is carried out by setting "1" in " Cd.1 Flash
ROM write request" (buffer memory [1900]).
1) The "parameters", "positioning data (No. 1 to 600)", "block start data (No.
7000 to 7004)" and "servo parameter" in the buffer memory area are
transmitted to the flash ROM.
The writing to the flash ROM may also be carried out using a dedicated
instruction "PFWRT". (Refer to Chapter 14 "Dedicated instructions" for details.)
(7) Writing the flash ROM by a peripheral device request (
The following transmission processes are carried out with the [flash ROM
request] (write) from the peripheral device.
1) The "parameters", "positioning data (No. 1 to 600)", "block start data (No.
7000 to 7004)" and "servo parameter" in the buffer memory area are
transmitted to the flash ROM.
Note) This transmission process is the same as (7) above.
IMPORTANT
(1) Do not turn the power OFF or reset the PLC CPU while writing to the flash
ROM. If the power is turned OFF or the PLC CPU is reset to forcibly end the
process, the data backed up in the flash ROM will be lost.
(2) Do not write the data to the buffer memory before writing to the flash ROM is
completed.
(3) The number of writes to the flash ROM with the PLC program is 25 max. while
the power is turned ON.
Writing to the flash ROM beyond 25 times will cause an error (error code: 805).
Refer to Section 15.2 "List of errors" for details.
(4) Monitoring is the number of writes to the flash ROM by the " Md.19 No. of write
accesses to flash ROM".
7 - 13
MELSEC-Q
@ devices
Pheripharal
(9) Data write
(8) Data read
PLC CPU
(9) Data write
(8) Data read
QD75
Buffer memory
Parameter area (a)
Parameter area (a)

Parameter area (b)
(No.1 to 600)
(No.7000 to 7004)
(No.30100 to 30499)
Monitor data area
Control data area
PLC CPU
memo area
Flash ROM
ROM
Parameter area (a)

Parameter area (b)
(No.1 to 600)
(No.7000 to 7004)
(No.30100 to 30499)
Servo amplifier
7 - 14
Pr.1 to Pr.7
Pr.11 to Pr.24
Pr.43 to Pr.57
Pr.200
Parameter area (b)
Pr.8 to Pr.10
Pr.25 to Pr.42
Pr.201
MELSEC-Q
(8) Reading data from buffer memory to peripheral device (
The following transmission processes are carried out with the [Read from
module] from the peripheral device.
1) The "parameters", "positioning data (No. 1 to 600)" and "block start data (No.
7000 to 7004)" in the buffer memory area are transmitted to the peripheral
device via the PLC CPU.
The following transmission processes are carried out with the [monitor] from the
peripheral device.
2) The "monitor data" in the buffer memory area is transmitted to the peripheral
device via the PLC CPU.
(9) Writing data from peripheral device to buffer memory (
The following transmission processes are carried out with the [Write to module]
from the peripheral device.
1) The "parameters", "positioning data (No. 1 to 600)" and "block start data (No.
7000 to 7004)" in the peripheral device area transmitted to the buffer memory
via the PLC CPU.
At this time, when [Flash ROM automatic write] is set with the peripheral device,
the transmission processes indicated with the following are carried out.
(7) Flash ROM write
7 - 15
MELSEC-Q
QD75
Buffer memory
Parameter area (a)
For MR-J2S-B
1
Pr.166
Pr.100 to
Parameter area (b)

(No.1 to 600)
(No.7000 to 7004)
(No.30100 to 30499)
Monitor data area
Control data area
PLC CPU
memo area
Flash ROM
Parameter area (a)
Parameter area (b)
(No.1 to 600)
(No.7000 to 7004)
(No.30100 to 30499)
(10) Servo parameter transfer
Servo amplifier
7 - 16
Other than MR-J2S-B

1
Pr.100 to Pr.144
1: Exclude Pr.140 , Pr.141
MELSEC-Q
(10) Transmitting servo parameter from the buffer memory area to

)
servo amplifier (
The servo parameter in the buffer memory area is transmitted to the servo
amplifier by the following timing.
1) The servo parameter transmitted to the servo amplifier when communications
with servo amplifier start.
The servo parameter in the buffer memory area is transmitted to the servo
amplifier.
2) The following servo parameter in the buffer memory area carried out to the
servo amplifier when the PLC READY signal [Y0] turns from OFF to ON.
Pr.108 Auto tuning (Servo basic parameter)
Pr.112 Load inertia ratio (Servo adjustment parameter)
Pr.113 Position loop gain 1 (Servo adjustment parameter)
Pr.115 Position loop gain 2 (Servo adjustment parameter)
Pr.114 Speed loop gain 1 (Servo adjustment parameter)
Pr.116 Speed loop gain 2 (Servo adjustment parameter)
Pr.117 Speed integral compensation (Servo adjustment parameter)
Pr.119 Feed forward gain (Servo adjustment parameter)
About the communication start with servo amplifier

Communication with servo amplifier is valid when following condition is realized
together.
1) The power of QD75 and servo amplifier is turned ON.
2) When the motor capacity of servo parameter Pr.104 inside the buffer memory
area is set to the value other than "0" in QD75.
When the power is turned ON or the PLC CPU is reset, the data stored in the
flash ROM is transmitted to the buffer memory.
Therefore the motor capacity of servo parameter Pr.104 inside the flash ROM is
stored to the value other than "0", and communication with servo amplifier is
started when the power is turn ON in order of the servo amplifier, QD75.
After the servo parameter stored in the flash ROM is transmitted to the servo
amplifier.
How to transfer the servo parameter setup from PLC program to the
servo amplifier
The motor capacity of servo parameter Pr.104 inside the flash ROM set to "0".
(Initial value: "0")
The setting values of the parameters that correspond to the motor capacity of
servo parameter Pr.104 inside the flash ROM are not started when the power is
turned ON or the PLC CPU is reset, after the communication with servo amplifier
is not started.
7 - 17
MELSEC-Q
How to transfer the servo parameter which wrote it in the flash ROM
to servo amplifier
Flash ROM writing carried out after the servo parameter is set up in the buffer
memory.
After that, when the power is turned ON or the PLC CPU is reset, the servo
parameters stored in the flash ROM is transmitted to the buffer memory.
When the servo parameter is written in the flash ROM, it is unnecessary to use a
setup from the PLC program.
Servo parameter of the buffer memory

The following shows details about the operation timing and details the servo
parameter transfer of the buffer memory.
QD75
power ON
Buffer memory Initialization

data setting
completion
of QD75 (A)
PLC CPU
RUN
Servo parameter PLC READY signal [Y0]

setting from PLC OFF ON (B)
program (C)
3
t
Communication
operation status
with servo amplifer
Communication
start valid
1
Servo parameter of Indefinite value

buffer memory
Communication 2
start invalid
Value of flash ROM
Write value by PLC program
1 : The servo parameter that it is stored into the flash ROM is transfered to the buffer memory by the QD75
initialization of the data, when the power is turned ON.
2 : Communication with servo amplifer is carried out if the QD75 initialization of the data is completed after
power supply ON.
3 : When the servo parameter is written in the flash ROM, it is unnecessary to use a setup from the PLC program.
Fig. 7.1 Operation timing in the servo parameter transfer of the buffer memory
Operation details
(1) Servo parameter transfers when servo amplifier had started and the power
supply of QD75 is turned ON.
(a) When the servo parameter " Pr.104 motor capacity" "0" is stored flash
ROM.
Communication start timing to the servo amplifier: Initialization completion
(Fig. 7.1 A)
Transfer the servo parameter
: The data stored (backed
up) in the flash ROM.
7 - 18
MELSEC-Q
(b) When the servo parameter " Pr.104 motor capacity"="0" is stored flash
ROM.
Communication start timing to the servo amplifier: The data written from
PLC program before the
ON (Fig. 7.1 B).
: The data written from
ON (Fig. 7.1 C).
(2) Servo parameter transfers when servo amplifier had started after the PLC
READY signal [Y0] is turned OFF to ON (Fig. 7.1 B)
Communication start timing to the servo amplifier: when servo amplifier had
started
: The data written from
ON (Fig. 7.1 C).
7 - 19
MELSEC-Q
The data transmission is carried out as shown in the previous pages, but the main
method of using this data process is shown below.
(Ex.) Setting the positioning data

The following methods can be used to set the positioning data.
From peripheral device
Using sequense program
Write positioning data into buffer

memory using TO command.
Set the data according to the
peripheral device menu.
Write the data set with the

peripheral device into the
buffer memory.
Completion
User work
QD75 state
7 - 20
Section 2 Control Details and Setting
Section 2 is configured for the following purposes shown in (1) to (3).

(1) Understanding of the operation and restrictions of each control.
(2) Carrying out the required settings in each control
(3) Dealing with errors
Chapter 8
Chapter 9
Chapter 10
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
Chapter 13
Chapter 14
Chapter 15
OPR Control ..............................................................................................8- 1 to 8- 14

Major Positioning Control......................................................................... 9- 1 to 9-116
High-Level Positioning Control ............................................................. 10- 1 to 10- 26
Manual Control...................................................................................... 11- 1 to 11- 36
Control Sub Functions .......................................................................... 12- 1 to 12- 98
Common Functions............................................................................... 13- 1 to 13- 8
Dedicated instructions........................................................................... 14- 1 to 14- 18
Troubleshooting ................................................................................... 15- 1 to 15-106
Section 2
The required settings in each control include parameter setting, positioning data setting,
control data setting by a PLC program, etc.
Carry out these settings while referring to "Chapter 5 Data used for positioning".
Also refer to "Chapter 6 PLC programs used in positioning control" when creating
the PLC programs required in each control, and consider the entire control program
configuration when creating each program.
MEMO
Chapter 8 OPR Control
The details and usage of "OPR control" are explained in this chapter.
OPR control includes "machine OPR" that establish a machine OP without using address
data, and "fast OPR" that store the coordinates established by the machine OPR, and
carry out positioning to that position.
OPR carried out by PLC programs from the PLC CPU are explained in this chapter.
Refer to GX Configurator-QP Operating Manual for details on OPR using the
peripheral device.
8.1 Outline of OPR control ................................................................................................8- 2

8.1.1 Two types of OPR control..............................................................................8- 2
8.2 Machine OPR ..............................................................................................................8- 4
8.2.1 Outline of the machine OPR operation .........................................................8- 4
8.2.2 Machine OPR method ...................................................................................8- 5
8.2.3 OPR method (1): Near-point dog method.....................................................8- 6
8.2.4 OPR method (2): Count method 1) ...............................................................8- 8
8.2.5 OPR method (3): Count method 2) .............................................................. 8- 10
8.2.6 OPR method (4): Data set method .............................................................. 8- 12
8.3 Fast OPR .................................................................................................................... 8- 13
8.3.1 Outline of the fast OPR operation ................................................................ 8- 13
8-1
8 OPR CONTROL
MELSEC-Q
8.1 Outline of OPR control

8.1.1 Two types of OPR control
In "OPR control" a position is established as the starting point (or "OP") when carrying out
positioning control, and positioning is carried out toward that starting point.
It is used to return a machine system at any position other than the OP to the OP when the
QD75 issues a "OPR request" with the power turned ON or others, or after a positioning
stop.
In the QD75, the two types of controls shown below are defined as "OPR control", following
the flow of the OPR work.
These two types of OPR control can be executed by setting the "OPR parameters" ,setting
"Positioning start No. 9001" and "positioning start No. 9002" prepared beforehand in the
QD75 to " Cd.3 Positioning start No.", and turning ON the positioning start signal.
The PSTRT start numbers of the dedicated instruction can also be set to 9001 or 9002 to
execute the OPR control. (For details, refer to Chapter 14 "Dedicated instructions".)
(1) Establish a positioning control OP
"Machine OPR" (positioning start No. 9001)
(2) Carry out positioning toward the OP
"Fast OPR" (positioning start No. 9002).
The "machine OPR" in (1) above must always be carried out before executing the "fast
OPR" in (2).
CAUTION
In the case of the absolute position system, use the PLC program to check the OPR request
before performing the positioning operation.
Failure to observe this could lead to an accident such as a collision.
REMARK
OPR request
The "OPR request flag" ( Md.31 Status: b3) must be turned ON in the QD75, and a
machine OPR must be executed in the following cases.
When the power is turned ON (in the case of the absolute position system, however,
the "OPR request flag" is not established.)
When the absolute position system is not set
When the OPR is not performed in the absolute position system
When the OPR starts
The address information stored in the QD75 cannot be guaranteed while the "OPR
request flag" is ON.
The "OPR request flag" turns OFF and the "OPR complete flag" ( Md.31 Status: b4)
turns ON if the machine OPR is executed and is completed normally.
8-2
8 OPR CONTROL
MELSEC-Q
OPR sub functions
Refer to Section 3.2.4 "Combination of QD75 main functions and sub functions" for
details on "sub functions" that can be combined with OPR control. Also refer to Chapter
12 "Control sub functions" for details on each sub function.
[Remarks]
The following two sub functions are only related to machine OPR.
Sub function name
Machine OPR
Fast OPR
Reference
OPR retry function
Section 12.2.1
OP shift function
Section 12.2.2
: Combination possible,
: Restricted,
: Combination not possible
When an OPR is not required

Control can be carried out ignoring the "OPR request flag" ( Md.31 Status: b3) in
systems that do not require an OPR.
In this case, the "OPR parameters ( Pr.43 to Pr.57 )" must all be set to their initial
values or a value at which an error does not occur.
OPR from peripheral devices

"Machine OPR" and "fast OPR" can be executed from the test mode of the peripheral
device.
Refer to GX Configurator-QP Operating Manual for details on OPR from the peripheral
device.
8-3
8 OPR CONTROL
MELSEC-Q
8.2 Machine OPR

8.2.1 Outline of the machine OPR operation
Important
Use the OPR retry function when the OP position is not always in the same
direction from the workpiece operation area (when the OP is not set near the upper
or lower limit of the machine).
The machine OPR may not complete unless the OPR retry function is used.
Machine OPR operation

In a machine OPR, OP is established.
None of the address information stored in the QD75, PLC CPU, or servo is used at this
time. The position mechanically established after the machine OPR is regarded as the
"OP" to be the starting point for positioning control.
The method for establishing an "OP" by a machine OPR differs according to the method
set in " Pr.43 OPR method".
The following shows the operation when starting a machine OPR.
1)
The "machine OPR" is started.
2)
The operation starts according to the speed and direction set in the OPR parameters
( Pr.43 to Pr.57 ).
3)
The "OP" is established by the method set in " Pr.43
OPR method", and the
machine stops. (Refer to sections 8.2.2 to 8.2.8)

If "a" is set as " Pr.45
OP address", "a" will be stored as the current position in the
4)
" Md.20 Current feed value" and " Md.21 Machine feed value" which are
monitoring the position.
5)
The machine OPR is completed.
The " Pr.45
OP address" is a fixed value set by the user.
M
OP
Machine OPR
Near-point dog
Fig. 8.1 Example of a machine OPR
8-4
8 OPR CONTROL
MELSEC-Q
8.2.2 Machine OPR method

The method by which the machine OP is established (method for judging the OP position and
machine OPR completion) is designated in the machine OPR according to the configuration
and application of the positioning method.
The following table shows the methods that can be used for this OPR method.
(The OPR method is one of the items set in the OPR parameters. It is set in " Pr.43 OPR
method" of the basic parameters for OPR.)
Pr.43
Operation details
OPR method
Deceleration starts by the OFF
Near-point dog method
" Pr.47
ON of the near-point dog. (Speed is reduced to
Creep speed".)
The operation stops once after the near-point dog turns ON and then OFF. Later the
operation restarts and then stops at the first zero signal to complete the OPR.
The deceleration starts by the OFF
at the " Pr.47
Count method 1)
ON of the near-point dog, and the machine moves
Creep speed".
The machine stops once after moving the distance set in the " Pr.50
Setting for the
movement amount after near-point dog ON" from the OFF

ON position. Later the
operation restarts and then stops at the first zero signal to complete the machine OPR.
The deceleration starts by the OFF
at the " Pr.47
Count method 2)
ON of the near-point dog, and the machine moves
Creep speed.
The machine moves the distance set in the " Pr.50
Setting for the movement amount
ON position, and stops at that

after near-point dog ON" from the near-point dog OFF
position. The machine OPR is then regarded as completed.
Data set method
The position where the machine OPR has been performed becomes an OP.
The current feed value and feed machine value are overwritten to the OP address.
REMARK
Creep speed
The stopping accuracy is poor when the machine suddenly stops from fast speeds. To
improve the machine's stopping accuracy, its must change over to a slow speed before
stopping. This speed is set in the " Pr.47 Creep speed".
8-5
8 OPR CONTROL
MELSEC-Q
8.2.3 OPR method (1): Near-point dog method

The following shows an operation outline of the "near-point dog method" OPR method.
Operation chart
The machine OPR is started.
(The machine begins the acceleration designated in " Pr.51
1)
2)
designated in " Pr.44
OPR acceleration time selection", in the direction
OPR direction". It then moves at the " Pr.46
OPR speed" when the acceleration is
completed.)
The machine begins decelerating when the near-point dog ON is detected.
The machine decelerates to the " Pr.47
Creep speed", and subsequently moves at that speed.
3)
(At this time, the near-point dog must be ON. The workpiece will continue decelerating and stop if the near-point dog is
OFF.)
4)
After the near-point dog turns OFF, the machine stops. It then restarts and stops at the first zero point.
After a "deviation counter clear signal" is output to the drive unit, the OPR complete flag ( Md.31 Status: b4) turns
5)
from OFF to ON and the OPR request flag ( Md.31 status: b3) turns from ON to OFF.
V
Pr.46 OPR speed
Deceleration at the near-point dog ON

Pr.47
POINT
After the near-point dog turns OFF,
the machine stops, It then restarts
and at the first zero point.
1)
2)
Creep speed
3) A 4) 5)
t
1
Md.34 Movement amount after near-point dog ON

ON
Near-point dog
OFF
Zero signal
Adjust so the near-point dog OFF position is

as close as possible to the center of the zero
signal HIGH level.
If the near-point dog OFF position overlaps
with the zero signal, the machine OPR stop
position may deviate by one servomotor
rotation.
One servo motor rotation
ON
Machine OPR start
(Positioning start signal)
OFF
OPR request flag
OFF
ON
Md.31 Status: b3
ON
OPR complete flag
OFF
Md.31 Status: b4
Md.26 Axis operation status Standing by
In OPR
Standing by
Md.34 Movement amount after Inconsistent 0

near-point dog ON
Inconsistent
Value of
Value of the machine moved is stored.
OP address
Fig. 8.2 Near-point dog method machine OPR
8-6
8 OPR CONTROL
MELSEC-Q
Precautions during operation
(1) An error "Start at home position (OP) fault (error code: 201)" will occur if another
machine OPR is attempted after a machine OPR completion when the OPR retry
function is not set ("0" is set in " Pr.48 OPR retry").
(2) Machine OPR carried out from the near-point dog ON position will start at the
" Pr.47
Creep speed".
(3) The near-point dog must be ON during deceleration from the OPR speed " Pr.47
Creep speed".
(4) When the stop signal stops the machine OPR, carry out the machine OPR again.
When restart command is turned ON after the stop signal stops the OPR, the error
"OPR restart impossible (error code: 209)" will occur.
The workpiece will continue decelerating and stop if the near-point dog is turned OFF
before it has decelerated to the creep speed, thus causing an error "Dog detection
timing fault (error code: 203)".
V
Pr. 46 OPR speed

Pr. 47 Creep speed
t
ON
Near-point dog OFF
ON
Machine OPR start
OFF
ON
OPR request flag

[ Md.31 Status : b3]
OFF
OPR complete flag

OFF
Md.26 Axis operation status Standing by In OPR
Md.34 Movement amount

after near-point dog ON
Inconsistent 0

Inconsistent Value the machine moved is stored
In error
Address at stop
Fig. 8.3 Operation when the near-point dog is turned OFF before the creep speed is reached
8-7
8 OPR CONTROL
MELSEC-Q
8.2.4 OPR method (2): Count method 1)

The following shows an operation outline of the "count method 1)" OPR method.
In the "count method 1)" OPR, the following can be performed:
Machine OPR on near-point dog
Second machine OPR after completion of first machine OPR
Operation chart
1)
designated in " Pr.44
OPR acceleration time selection", in the direction
OPR speed" when the acceleration is
2)
completed.)
3)
4)
The machine stops after the workpiece has been moved the amount set in the " Pr.50 Setting for the movement
amount after near-point dog ON" after the near-point dog turned ON. It then restarts and stops at the first zero point.
After a "deviation counter clear output" is output to the drive unit, the OPR complete flag Md.31 Status: b4) turns from
5)
OFF to ON, and the OPR request flag ( Md.31 Status: b3) turns from ON to OFF.
Pr. 46 OPR speed
Pr. 50 Setting for the movement amount

Pr. 47 Creep speed
POINT
After the near-point dog turns OFF,
the machine stops, It then restarts
and at the first zero point.
Leave sufficient distance from the zero point

position to the near-point dog OFF
ON
Near-point dog OFF
Adjust the setting for the movement amount after
near-point dog ON to be as near as possible to
the center of the zero signal HIGH.
If the setting for the movement amount after
Zero signal
near-point dog ON falls within the zero signal,
there may be produced an error of one servo
motor rotation in the machine OPR stop position. ON
Machine OPR start
OFF
OPR request flag

OFF(0)
OPR complete flag

OFF(0)
First zero signal after moving a set to " Pr. 50

Setting for the movement amount after nearpoint dog ON.
One servo motor rotation
ON(1)
ON(1)
Standing by
In OPR
Standing by

Inconsistent
Value of

Inconsistent
Value the machine moved is stored
OP address
1.
Fig. 8.12 Count method1) machine OPR
8-8
8 OPR CONTROL
MELSEC-Q
(1) An error "Count method movement amount fault (error code: 206)" will occur
and the operation will not start if the " Pr.50 Setting for the movement
amount after near-point dog ON" is smaller than the deceleration distance
from the " Pr.46 OPR speed" to " Pr.47 Creep speed".
A deceleration stop will be carried out if the speed is changed during the
operation and an error occurs.
(2) The following shows the operation when a machine OPR is started while the
near-point dog is ON.
(3) When the stop signal stops the machine OPR, carry out the machine OPR
again. When restart command is turned ON after the stop signal stops the
OPR, the error "OPR restart impossible (error code: 209)" will occur.
Pr. 50 Setting for the movement
amount after near-point dog ON
4)
1)
3)
5)
[Operation when a machine OPR is started at

the near-point dog ON position]
1) A machine OPR is started.
2) The machine moves at the OPR speed in the
opposite direction of an OPR.
3) Deceleration processing is carried out by
" Pr.39 Stop group 3 sudden stop
selection" when the near-point dog OFF is
detected.
4) After the machine stops, a machine OPR
2)
is carried out in the OPR direction.
ON
Near-point dog OFF
5) The machine OPR is completed after the

deviation counter clear output is provided on
detection of the first zero signal after the
travel of the movement amount set to
Zero signal
" Pr.50
after near-point dog ON" on detection of the

near-point dog signal ON.
Fig. 8.13 Count method 1) machine OPR on the near-point dog ON position
8-9
8 OPR CONTROL
MELSEC-Q
8.2.5 OPR method (3): Count method 2)

The following shows an operation outline of the "method 2)" OPR method.
The "count method 2)" method is effective when a "zero signal" cannot be received.
(Note that compared to the "count method 1)" method, using this method will result in
more deviation in the stop position during machine OPR.)
Operation chart
1)

direction designated in " Pr.44
OPR acceleration time selection", in the
OPR speed" when the
acceleration is completed.)
2)
3)
4)
The command from the QD75 will stop and the machine OPR will be completed when the machine moves
the movement amount set in " Pr.50 Setting for the movement amount after near-point dog ON " from the
near-point dog ON position.
Pr. 46 OPR speed

V
Pr.50 Setting for the movement amount

Pr. 47 Creep speed
t
Leave sufficient distance from the OP
position to the near-point dog OFF
ON
Near-point dog OFF
ON
Machine OPR start
OFF
OPR request flag

OFF(0)
OPR complete flag

OFF(0)
ON(1)
ON(1)
In OPR
Standing by

Inconsistent
Value of
Inconsistent
Value the machine moved is stored
OP address
1.
Fig. 8.14 Count method 2) machine OPR
8 - 10
8 OPR CONTROL
MELSEC-Q
Restrictions
When this method is used, a deviation will occur in the stop position (OP)
compared to other OPR methods because an error of about 1 ms occurs in taking
in the near-point dog ON.

(1) An error "Count method movement amount fault (error code: 206)" will occur
and the operation will not start if the " Pr.50 Setting for the movement
amount after near-point dog ON" is smaller than the deceleration distance
from the " Pr.46 OPR speed" to " Pr.47 Creep speed".
A deceleration stop will be carried out if the speed is changed during the
operation and an error occurs.
(2) The following shows the operation when a machine OPR is started while the
near-point dog is ON.
(3) When the stop signal stops the machine OPR, carry out the machine OPR
again. When restart command is turned ON after the stop signal stops the
OPR, the error "OPR restart impossible (error code: 209)" will occur.
Pr.50 Setting for the movement amount after
near-point dog ON
4)
1)
3)
5)
[Operation when an OPR is started at the

near-point dog ON position]
1) A machine OPR is started.
2) The machine moves at the OPR speed in the
opposite direction of an OPR.
3) Deceleration processing is carried out by
" Pr.39 Stop group 3 sudden stop
2)
selection" when the near-point dog OFF is

detected.
4) After the machine stops, a machine OPR is
carried out in the OPR direction.
ON
Near-point dog OFF
5) The machine OPR is completed after

moving the movement amount set in the
" Pr.50
after near-point dog ON".
Fig. 8.15 Count method 2) machine OPR on the near-point dog ON position
8 - 11
8 OPR CONTROL
MELSEC-Q
8.2.6 OPR method (4): Data set method

The following shows an operation outline of the "Data set method" OPR method.
The " Data set method" method is effective when a "Near-point dog" does not used.
It can be used with absolute position system.
With the data set method OPR, the position where the machine OPR has been carried
out, is registered into the QD75 as the OP, and the current feed value and feed
machine value is overwritten to an OP address.
Use the JOG or manual pulse generator operation to move the OP.
Operation chart
The address upon execution
of the OPR is registered as
an OP address.
t
OPR start
Fig. 8.16 Data set method OPR

(1) The zero point must have been passed before the OPR is carried out after the
power supply is turned ON. If the OPR is carried out without passing the zero
point even once, the "OPR restart zero point not passed error" will occur.
When the "Home positioning return (OPR) restart zero point not passed error"
occurs, perform the JOG or similar operation so that the servomotor makes
more than one revolution after an error reset, before carrying out the machine
OPR again.
(2) When it is not the case of the absolute position system, starting the data set
method OPR will be identical to the function of the current value change.
(3) The OPR data used for the data set method is the "OPR method" and "OP
address".
The OPR data other than that for the OPR method and OP address is not
used for the data set method OPR method, but if a value is set the outside the
setting rage, an error will occur when the PLC READY signal (Y0) is turned
ON so that the preparation complete (X0) is not turned OFF.
With the OPR data other than that for the OPR method and OP address, set
an arbitrary value (default value can be allowed) within each data setting
range so that an error will not occur upon receiving the PLC READY signal
ON.
8 - 12
8 OPR CONTROL
MELSEC-Q
8.3 Fast OPR

8.3.1 Outline of the fast OPR operation
Fast OPR operation
In a fast OPR, positioning is carried out by a machine OPR to the " Md.21
Machine feed value" stored in the QD75.
The following shows the operation during a basic fast OPR start.
1) The fast OPR is started.
2) Positioning control begins to the " Md.21 Machine feed value", begins at
speed set in the OPR parameters ( Pr.43 to Pr.57 ).
3) The fast OPR is completed.
Pr. 46 OPR speed
Machine OP
(OP position)
Fast OPR start

Standing by
In OPR
Standing by
M
OP
Positioning to the OP
Fig. 8.17 Fast OPR
8 - 13
8 OPR CONTROL
MELSEC-Q
Operation timing and processing time of fast OPR
The following shows details about the operation timing and time during fast OPR.
Positioning start
signal [Y10,Y11,Y12,Y13]
BUSY signal [XC,XD,XE,XF]
t1
[X10,X11,X12,X13]
t3
Standing by
In position control
t2
Fig. 8.18 Operation timing and processing time of fast OPR
Normal timing time
Unit: ms
t1
t2
t3
1.0 to 1.3
2.7 to 4.4
0 to 3.5
The
t1 timing time could be delayed by the operation state of other axes.
Operating restrictions
When the OPR complete flag ( Md.31 Status: b3) is ON, executing a fast OPR start
will result in an "Home positioning return (OPR) request flag ON" error (error code:
207)".
8 - 14
Chapter 9 Major Positioning Control

The details and usage of the major positioning controls (control functions using the
"positioning data") are explained in this chapter.
The major positioning controls include such controls as "positioning control" in which
positioning is carried out to a designated position using the address information,
"speed control" in which a rotating object is controlled at a constant speed,
"speed-position switching control" in which the operation is shifted from "speed control"
to "position control" and "position-speed switching control" in which the operation is
shifted from "position control" to "speed control".
Carry out the required settings to match each control.
9.1 Outline of major positioning controls...........................................................................9- 2

9.1.1 Data required for major positioning control...................................................9- 4
9.1.2 Operation patterns of major positioning controls ..........................................9- 5
9.1.3 Designating the positioning address ............................................................ 9- 15
9.1.4 Confirming the current value ........................................................................ 9- 16
9.1.5 Control unit "degree" handling...................................................................... 9- 18
9.1.6 Interpolation control ...................................................................................... 9- 21
9.2 Setting the positioning data ....................................................................................... 9- 25
9.2.1 Relation between each control and positioning data................................... 9- 25
9.2.2 1-axis linear control....................................................................................... 9- 27
9.2.3 2-axis linear interpolation control.................................................................. 9- 29
9.2.4 3-axis linear interpolation control.................................................................. 9- 33
9.2.5 4-axis linear interpolation control.................................................................. 9 -39
9.2.6 1-axis fixed-feed control................................................................................ 9- 44
9.2.7 2-axis fixed-feed control (interpolation) ........................................................ 9- 46
9.2.8 3-axis fixed-feed control (interpolation) ........................................................ 9- 48
9.2.9 4-axis fixed-feed control (interpolation) ....................................................... 9- 52
9.2.10 2-axis circular interpolation control with sub point designation ................... 9- 54
9.2.11 2-axis circular interpolation control with center point designation............... 9- 60
9.2.12 1-axis speed control...................................................................................... 9- 68
9.2.16 Speed-position switching control (INC mode) ............................................. 9- 83
9.2.17 Speed-position switching control (ABS mode) ............................................ 9- 91
9.2.18 Position-speed switching control.................................................................. 9- 99
9.2.19 Current value changing ................................................................................ 9-106
9.2.20 NOP instruction............................................................................................. 9-111
9.2.21 JUMP instruction........................................................................................... 9-112
9.2.22 LOOP ............................................................................................................ 9-114
9.2.23 LEND............................................................................................................. 9-115
9-1
9 MAJOR POSITIONING CONTROL
MELSEC-Q
9.1 Outline of major positioning controls

"Major positioning controls" are carried out using the "positioning data" stored in the
QD75.
The basic controls such as position control and speed control are executed by setting
the required items in this "positioning data", and then starting that positioning data.
The control system for the "major positioning controls" is set in setting item " Da.2
Control system" of the positioning data.
Control defined as a "major positioning control" carries out the following types of
control according to the " Da.2 Control system" setting.
1-axis linear
control
Position control
2-axis linear
interpolation
control
Linear control
3-axis linear
interpolation
control
4-axis linear
interpolation
control
1-axis fixedfeed control
ABS Linear 1
INC Linear 1
ABS Linear 2
INC Linear 2
ABS Linear 3
INC Linear 3
ABS Linear 4
INC Linear 4
Fixed-feed 1
Fixed-feed 2
Fixed-feed 3
Fixed-feed
control

Sub point
designation
2-axis circular
interpolation
Center point
control
designation
Speed control
1-axis speed
control
2-axis speed
control
3-axis speed
control
4-axis speed
control
Details
Da.2 Control system
Positioning of a designated 1 axis is carried out from the

start address (current stop position) to the designated
position.
Using a designated 2 axes, linear interpolation control is
carried out from the start address (current stop position) to
the designated position.
Positioning of a designated 1 axis is carried out from the
start address (current stop position).
(The " Md.20 Current feed value" is set to "0" at the start.)
carried out from the start address (current stop position).
Fixed-feed 4

ABS Circular sub

INC Circular sub
ABS Circular right
ABS Circular left
INC Circular right
INC Circular left
Forward run speed 1
Reverse run speed 1
Forward run speed 2
Reverse run speed 2
Forward run speed 3
Reverse run speed 3
Forward run speed 4
Reverse run speed 4
The axis in which the interpolation control system is set is

regarded as the reference axis. Positioning is carried out in
an arc path to a designated position, while controlling the
other axis (interpolation axis) to match the positioning data
set in the reference axis.
The speed control of the designated 1 axis is carried out.
The speed control of the designated 2 axes is carried out.
The speed control of the designated 3 axes is carried out.
The speed control of the 4 axes is carried out.
9-2
NOP
instruction
MELSEC-Q
Details
Da.2 Control system

Forward run
speed/position
Reverse run
speed/position
Forward run
position/speed
Reverse run
position/speed
The control is continued as position control (positioning for

the designated address or movement amount) by turning
ON the "speed-position switching signal" after first carrying
out speed control.
The control is continued as speed control by turning ON
the "position-speed switching signal" after first carrying out
position control.
A nonexecutable control system. When this instruction is
set, the operation is transferred to the next data operation,
and the instruction is not executed.
NOP instruction
The current feed value ( Md.20 ) is changed to an address
Current value
changing
Other control
JUMP
instruction
LOOP
LOOP
LEND
LEND
JUMP instruction
set in the positioning data.

This can be carried out by either of the following 2
methods.
(The machine feed value cannot be changed.)
Current value changing using the control system
Current value changing using the current value
changing start No. (No. 9003).
An unconditional or conditional JUMP is carried out to a
designated positioning data No.
A repeat control is carried out by repeat LOOP to LEND.
Control is returned to the top of the repeat control by
repeat LOOP to LEND. After the repeat operation is
completed specified times, the next positioning data is run.
In "2-axis linear interpolation control", "3-axis linear interpolation control", "4-axis linear interpolation control", "2-axis
fixed-feed control", "3-axis fixed-feed control", "4-axis fixed-feed control", "2-axis circular interpolation control", "2-axis
speed control", "3-axis speed control" and "4-axis speed control", control is carried out so that linear and arc paths are
drawn using a motor set in two or more axes directions. This kind of control is called "interpolation control". (Refer to
Section 9.1.6 "Interpolation control" for details.)
9-3
MELSEC-Q
9.1.1 Data required for major positioning control

The following table shows an outline of the "positioning data" configuration and setting
details required to carry out the "major positioning controls".
Setting item
Setting details
Set the method by which the continuous positioning data (Ex: positioning data No. 1,
No. 2, No. 3) will be controlled. (Refer to Section "9.1.2".)
Da.2 Control system
Set the control system defined as a "major positioning control". (Refer to Section "9.1".)
Acceleration time
No.
Select and set the acceleration time at control start. (Select one of the four values set
Da.3
Deceleration time
No.
Select and set the deceleration time at control stop. (Select one of the four values set
Da.4
Da.5
Axis to be
interpolated
Set an axis to be interpolated (partner axis) during the 2-axis interpolation operation
(Refer to Section 9.1.6).
Da.6
Set the target value during position control. (Refer to Section "9.1.3".)
movement amount
in Pr.9 , Pr.25 , Pr.26 , and Pr.27
for the acceleration time.)
in Pr.10 , Pr.28 , Pr.29 , and Pr.30
for the deceleration time.)
Da.7 Arc address
Set the sub point or center point address during circular interpolation control.
Da.8 Command speed
Set the speed during the control execution.
Da.9 Dwell time
Set the time the machine waits from the completion of the executed positioning control
and the stopping of the workpiece until the judgment of the QD75 positioning
completion.
Da.10 M code
Set this item when carrying out sub work (clamp and drill stops, tool replacement, etc.)
corresponding to the code No. related to the positioning data execution.
The settings and setting requirement for the setting details of Da.1 to Da.10 differ according to the
" Da.2 Control system". (Refer to Section 9.2 "Setting the positioning data".)
Major positioning control sub functions

Refer to Section 3.2.4 "Combination of QD75 major functions and sub functions"
for details on "sub functions" that can be combined with the major positioning
control.
Also refer to Chapter 12 "Control sub Functions" for details on each sub function.
Major positioning control from peripheral devices

"Major positioning control" can be executed from the peripheral device test mode.
Refer to GX Configurator-QP Operating Manual for details on carrying out major
positioning control from the peripheral device.
REMARK
600 positioning data (positioning data No. 1 to 600) items can be set per axis.
9-4
MELSEC-Q
9.1.2 Operation patterns of major positioning controls

In "major positioning control" (high-level positioning control), " Da.1 Operation
pattern" can be set to designate whether to continue executing positioning data after
the started positioning data. The "operation pattern" includes the following 3 types.
Positioning continue
(1) Independent positioning control

(operation pattern: 00)
(2) Continuous positioning control
(3) Continuous path control
The following shows examples of operation patterns when "1-axis linear control (ABS
linear 1)" is set in positioning data No. 1 to No. 6 of axis 1. Details of each operation
pattern are shown on the following pages.
< Operation example when "1-axis linear positioning" is set in the positioning data of axis 1 >
(Setting details)
Positioning data No.1
Positioning to address [A] at command speed [a]
No.1 Start
Operation pattern = 11: Continuous path control
No.2 Positioning to address [B] at command speed [b]
Operation pattern = 11: Continuous path control
No.3 Positioning to address [C] at command speed [a]
Operation pattern = 01: Continuous positioning control
No.4 Positioning to address [D] at command speed [b]
Operation pattern = 01: Continuous positioning control
No.5
Positioning to address [E] at command speed [a]
Operation pattern = 00: Independent positioning control
No.6
Control stop
Positioning to address [F] at command speed [a] Operation pattern = 11: Continuous path control
V
Da. 1 Operation pattern
01
11
11
01
00
The machine stops, and
then continues the next
positioning.
Speed is changed
without stopping
Positioning is terminated
No.2
NO.1
A
(Positioning data)
No.3
No.4
C
No.5
Address
E
F
(Direction in which axis 1 addresses increase)
For 1-axis linear control

(One motor is driven, and positioning is carried out to an addresses designated in one direction.)
9-5
MELSEC-Q
POINT
The BUSY signal [XC, XD, XE, XF] turns ON even when position control of
movement amount 0 is executed. However, since the ON time is short, the ON
status may not be detected in the PLC program.
[1] Independent positioning control (Positioning complete)

This control is set when executing only one designated data item of positioning. If
a dwell time is designated, the positioning will complete after the designated time
elapses.
This data (operation pattern [00] data) becomes the end of block data when
carrying out block positioning. (The positioning stops after this data is executed.)
V

Dwell time

OFF
[Y10, Y11, Y12, Y13]
[X10, X11, X12, X13] OFF
ON
ON
ON
[XC, XD, XE, XF]
OFF

[X14, X15, X16, X17]
OFF
BUSY signal
ON
Fig. 9.1 Operation during independent positioning control
9-6
MELSEC-Q
[2] Continuous positioning control

(1) The machine always automatically decelerates each time the positioning is
completed. Acceleration is then carried out after the QD75 command speed
reaches 0 to carry out the next positioning data operation. If a dwell time is
designated, the acceleration is carried out after the designated time elapses.
(2) In operation by continuous positioning control (operation pattern "01"), the
next positioning No. is automatically executed. Always set operation pattern
"00" in the last positioning data to complete the positioning.
If the operation pattern is set to positioning continue ("01" or "11"), the
operation will continue until operation pattern "00" is found.
If the operation pattern "00" cannot be found, the operation may be carried
out until the positioning data No. 600. If the operation pattern of the
positioning data No. 600 is not completed, the operation will be started again
from the positioning data No. 1.
Dwell
time
V
Address (+) direction

t
Dwell time
not designated
Address (-) direction
Positioning
complete (00)

OFF
[Y10, Y11, Y12, Y13]
[X10, X11, X12, X13] OFF
ON
ON
ON
BUSY signal
[XC, XD, XE, XF] OFF

ON

OFF
[X14, X15, X16, X17]
Fig. 9.2 Operation during continuous positioning control
9-7
MELSEC-Q
[3] Continuous path control

(1) Continuous path control
(a) The speed is changed without deceleration stop between the
command speed of the positioning data currently being run and the
speed of the positioning data that will be run next.
The speed is not changed if the current speed and the next speed are
equal.
(b) The speed will become the speed used in the previous positioning
operation if the command speed is set to "-1".
(c) Dwell time will be ignored, even if set.
(d) The next positioning No. is executed automatically in operations by
continuous path control (operation pattern "11"). Always complete the
positioning by setting operation pattern "00" in the last positioning data.
If the operation pattern is set to positioning continue ("01" or "11"), the
operation will continue until operation pattern "00" is found.
If the operation pattern "00" cannot be found, the operation may be
carried out until the positioning data No. 600. If the operation pattern of
the positioning data No. 600 is not complete, the operation will be
started again from the positioning data No. 1.
(e) The speed switching patterns include the "front-loading speed
switching pattern" in which the speed is changed at the end of the
current positioning side, and the "standard speed switching pattern" in
which the speed is at the start of the next positioning side. (Refer to
" Pr.19 Speed switching mode".)
Standard speed switching mode

Front-loading speed switching mode
(f)
In the continuous path control, the positioning may be completed

before the set address/movement amount and the current data may be
switched to the "positioning data that will be run next".
This is because a preference is given to the positioning at a command
speed. In actuality, the positioning is completed before the set
address/movement amount by an amount of remaining distance at
)
speeds less than the command speed. The remaining distance (
at speeds less than the command speed is 0
(distance
moved in 3.5ms at a speed at the time of completion of the
positioning).
9-8
MELSEC-Q
V
Dwell time
Positioning
complete (00)
Address (+) direction
Address (-) direction
ON
[Y10, Y11, Y12, Y13]
OFF

[X10, X11, X12, X13]
OFF
[XC, XD, XE, XF]
OFF
ON
ON
BUSY signal
ON
OFF
[X14, X15, X16, X17]
Fig. 9.3 Operation during continuous path control (Standard speed switching mode)
POINT
In the continuous path control, a speed variation will not occur using the near-pass
function when the positioning data No. is switched (Refer to Section 12.3.3 "Nearpass function").
(2) Deceleration stop conditions during continuous path control

Deceleration stops are not carried out in continuous path control, but the
machine will carry out a deceleration stop to speed "0" in the following
cases (a) to (d).
(a) When the operation pattern of the positioning data currently being
executed is "continuous path control: 11", and the movement direction
of the positioning data currently being executed differs from that of the
next positioning data. (Only for 1-axis positioning control (Refer to the
"Point" in the next page.))
V
Operation pattern : 11
Speed becomes 0

Operation pattern : 00
9-9
MELSEC-Q
(b) When the operation pattern of the positioning data currently being
executed is "continuous path control: 11", and the movement amount
of the next positioning data is "0".
(c) During operation by step operation. (Refer to Section 12.7.1 "Step
function".)
(d) When there is an error in the positioning data to carry out the next
operation.
POINTS
(1) The movement direction is not checked during interpolation operations. Thus, automatic deceleration to a stop will
not be carried out even if the movement direction is changed (See the figures below).
Because of this, the interpolation axis may suddenly reverse direction.
To avoid this sudden direction reversal in the interpolation axis, set the pass point to continuous positioning control
"01" instead of setting it to continuous path control "11".
[Positioning by interpolation]
[Reference axis operation]
[Interpolation axis operation]
V
Positioning data
Positioning data
No.1
No.2
Interpolation axis
t
Reference axis
Positioning data No.1 Continuous path control
t
Positioning data Positioning data
No.1
No.2
Positioning data Positioning data

No.1
No.2
(2) When a "0" is set in the " Da.6 Positioning address/movement amount" of the continuous path control positioning
data, the command speed of about 2 ms is reduced to 0.
When a "0" is set in the " Da.6 Positioning address/movement amount" to increase the number of speed change
points in the future, change the " Da.2 Control system" to the "NOP instruction" to make the control
nonexecutable.
(Refer to Section 9.2.20 "NOP instruction".)
(3) In the continuous path control positioning data, assure a movement distance so that the execution time with that
data is 100 ms or longer, or lower the command speed.
9 - 10
MELSEC-Q
(3) Speed handling

(a) Continuous path control command speeds are set with each
positioning data.
The QD75 then carries out the positioning at the speed designated
with each positioning data.
(b) The command speed can be set to "1" in continuous path control.
The control will be carried out at the speed used in the previous
positioning data No. if the command speed is set to "1".
(The "current speed" will be displayed in the command speed when
the positioning data is set with a peripheral device. The current speed
is the speed of the positioning control being executed currently.)
1)
2)
3)
The speed does not need to be set in each positioning data when
carrying out uniform speed control if "1" is set beforehand in the
command speed.
If the speed is changed in the previous positioning data when "1"
is set in the command speed, the operation can be continued at
the new speed.
An error "no command speed error (error code: 503)" occurs and
positioning cannot be started if "1" is set in the command speed
of the first positioning data at start.
[Relation between the command speed and current speed]

V
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
3000
2000
1000
t
Da. 8 Command speed 1000 3000 -1
Md. 27 Current speed 1000 3000 3000
-1
-1
3000 3000
The current speed is

changed even if the new
speed is not reached in P2.
POINTS
(1) In the continuous path control, a speed variation will not occur using the near-pass function when the
positioning data is switched (Refer to Section 12.3.3 "Near-pass function").
(2) The QD75 holds the command speed set with the positioning data, and the latest value of the speed
set with the speed change request as the " Md.27 Current speed". It controls the operation at the
"current speed" when "-1" is set in the command speed.
(Depending on the relation between the movement amount and the changed speed, the feedrate may
not reach the new speed value, but even then the current speed will be updated.)
(3) When the address for speed change is identified beforehand, generate and execute the positioning
data for speed change by the continuous path control to carry out the speed change without requesting
the speed change with a PLC program.
9 - 11
MELSEC-Q
(4) Speed switching

(Refer to " Pr.19 Speed switching mode".)
(a) Standard speed switching mode
1)
If the respective command speeds differ in the "positioning data

currently being executed" and the "positioning data to carry out
the next operation", the machine will accelerate or decelerate
after reaching the positioning point set in the "positioning data
currently being executed" and the speed will change over to the
speed set in the "positioning data to carry out the next operation".
The parameters used in acceleration/deceleration to the
command speed set in the "positioning data to carry out the next
operation" are those of the positioning data to carry out
acceleration/deceleration.
Speed switching will not be carried out if the command speeds
are the same.
2)
Speed
switching
Dwell time
Dwell time
Positioning
11
11
11
01
00
ON
OFF
[Y10, Y11, Y12, Y13]
[X10, X11, X12, X13] OFF
ON
ON
BUSY signal

ON
[X14, X15, X16, X17]
OFF
Fig. 9.4 Operation for the standard speed switching mode

3)
Speed switching condition

If the movement amount is small in regard to the target speed, the
current speed may not reach the target speed even if
acceleration/deceleration is carried out. In this case, the machine
is accelerated/decelerated so that it nears the target speed.
If the movement amount will be exceeded when automatic
deceleration is required (Ex. Operation patterns "00", "01", etc.),
the machine will immediately stop at the designated positioning
address, and a "insufficient movement distance warning (warning
code: 513)" will occur.
9 - 12
MELSEC-Q
[When the movement amount is small during
automatic deceleration]
The movement amount required to carry out the
automatic deceleration cannot be secured, so the
machine immediately stops in a speed 0 status.
[When the speed cannot change over in P2]

When the relation of the speeds is P1 =
P4, P2 = P3, P1 < P2.
P1
P2
P3
P4
Positioning address.
(b) Front-loading speed switching mode

1)
If the respective command speeds differ in the "positioning data

currently being executed" and the "positioning data to carry out
the next operation", the speed will change over to the speed set in
the "positioning data to carry out the next operation" at the end of
the "positioning data currently being executed".
2)
The parameters used in acceleration/deceleration to the

command speed set in the "positioning data to carry out the next
operation" are those of the positioning data to carry out
acceleration/deceleration.
Speed switching will not be carried out if the command speeds
are the same.
Dwell time
Dwell time
Positioning
11
11
11
01
ON
OFF
[Y10, Y11, Y12, Y13]
[X10, X11, X12, X13] OFF
ON
ON
BUSY signal

ON
OFF
[X14, X15, X16, X17]
Fig. 9.5 Operation for the front-loading speed switching mode
9 - 13
00
3)
Speed switching condition

If the movement amount is small in regard to the target speed, the
current speed may not reach the target speed even if
acceleration/deceleration is carried out. In this case, the machine
is accelerated/decelerated so that it nears the target speed.
If the movement amount will be exceeded when automatic
deceleration is required (Ex. Operation patterns "00", "01", etc.),
the machine will immediately stop at the designated positioning
address, and a "insufficient movement distance warning (warning
code: 513)" will occur.
[When the speed cannot change over to the

P2 speed in P1]
When the relation of the speeds is P1 =
P4, P2 = P3, P1 < P2.
P1
P2
P3
MELSEC-Q
[When the movement amount is small during

automatic deceleration]
The movement amount required to carry out the
automatic deceleration cannot be secured, so the
machine immediately stops in a speed 0 status.
P4
Positioning address
9 - 14
MELSEC-Q
9.1.3 Designating the positioning address

The following shows the two methods for commanding the position in control using
positioning data.
Absolute system
Positioning is carried out to a designated position (absolute address) having the
OP as a reference. This address is regarded as the positioning address. (The
start point can be anywhere.)
Address
100
Address
100
Address
150
Start point
End point
Address
300
Address 150
Address 100
Address 150
100
OP
(Reference point)
A point
150
300
B point
C point
Within the stroke limit range
Fig. 9.6 Absolute system positioning
Incremental system
The position where the machine is currently stopped is regarded as the start point,
and positioning is carried out for a designated movement amount in a designated
movement direction.
Movement amount
+100
Movement amount +100
Movement
amount -150
Movement amount
+100
Movement amount-100
100
A point
Start point
End point
Movement amount
-100
Movement amount+50
150
B point
300
C point
Within the stroke limit range
Fig. 9.7 Incremental system positioning
9 - 15
MELSEC-Q
9.1.4 Confirming the current value

Values showing the current value
The following two types of addresses are used as values to show the position in
the QD75.
These addresses ("current feed value" and "machine feed value") are stored in the
monitor data area, and used in monitoring the current value display, etc.
This is the value stored in " Md.20
Current feed value
This value has an address established with a "machine OPR" as a
reference, but the address can be changed by changing the current

value to a new value.
This value is updated every 3.5ms.
This is the value stored in " Md.21
Machine feed value
Current feed value".
Machine feed value".
This value always has an address established with a "machine OPR"
as a reference. The address cannot be changed, even if the current

value is changed to a new value.
This value is updated every 56.8ms.
The "current feed value" and "machine feed value" are used in monitoring the
current value display, etc.
V
Current value changed to

20000 with current value
OP
changing instruction
t
Address after the current
value is changed is stored
Md. 20 Current feed value
1 to
10000
Md. 21 Machine feed value
1 to
10000
20000
Address does not change even

after the current value is changed
Fig. 9.8 Current feed value and machine feed value
9 - 16
MELSEC-Q
Restrictions
(1) A 3.5ms error will occur in the current value update timing when the stored
"current feed value" is used in the control.
A 56.8ms error will occur in the current value update timing when the stored
"machine feed value" is used in the control.
(2) The "current feed value" and "machine feed value" may differ from the values
set in " Da.6 Positioning address/movement amount" of the positioning data if
the movement amount per pulse is not set to "1".
Monitoring the current value

The "current feed value" and "machine feed value" are stored in the following
buffer memory addresses, and can be read using a "DFRO (P) command" from
the PLC CPU.
Buffer memory addresses
Axis 1
Axis 2
Axis 3
Axis 4
800, 801
900, 900
1000, 1001
1100, 1101
802, 803
902, 903
1002, 1003
1102, 1103
Example
Program in which the axis 1 current feed value is read to D104 and D105
<Read current feed value to D104 and D105>
9 - 17
MELSEC-Q
9.1.5 Control unit "degree" handling

When the control unit is set to "degree", the following items differ from when other
control units are set.
[1] Current feed value and machine feed value addresses

The address of " Md.20 Current feed value" becomes a ring address from 0 to
359.99999.
But the address of " Md.21 Machine feed value" doesn't become a ring address.
359.99999
359.99999
[2] Software stroke limit valid/invalid setting

With the control unit set to "degree", the software stroke limit upper and lower
limit values are 0 to 359.99999.
(a) Setting to validate software stroke limit

To validate the software stroke limit, set the software stroke limit lower limit
value and the upper limit value in a clockwise direction.
0
Clockwise direction
315.00000
Section A
90.00000
Section B
1) To set the movement range A, set as follows.

Software stroke limit lower limit value..................................315.00000
Software stroke limit upper limit value ...................................90.00000
2) To set the movement range B, set as follows.

Software stroke limit lower limit value....................................90.00000
Software stroke limit upper limit value .................................315.00000
(b) Setting to invalidate software stroke limit

To invalidate the software stroke limit, set the software stroke limit lower
limit value equal to the software stroke limit upper limit value.
The control can be carried out irrespective of the setting of the software
stroke limit.
9 - 18
MELSEC-Q
[3] Positioning control method when the control unit is set to "degree"
1) Absolute system
(a) When the software stroke limit is invalid
Positioning is carried out in the nearest direction to the designated
address, using the current value as a reference.
(This is called "shortcut control".)
Example
1) Positioning is carried out in a clockwise direction when the current value is moved from 315 to 45.
2) Positioning is carried out in a counterclockwise direction when the current value is moved from 45 to 315.
Moved from 315 to 45

315
45
Moved from 45 to 315

315
45
The shortcut control is invalidated and positioning in a designated direction is carried

out by the " Cd.40 ABS direction in degrees".
This function can perform only when the software stroke limit is invalid. When the
software stroke limit is valid, an error "ABS direction in degrees illegal" (error code:
546) occurs and positioning is not started.
To designate the movement direction in the ABS control, a "1" or "2" is written to the
" Cd.40 ABS direction setting in the unit of degree" of the buffer memory
(initial value: 0).
The value written to the " Cd.40 ABS direction in degrees" becomes valid only when
the positioning control is started.
In the continuous positioning control and continuous path control, the operation is
continued with the setting set at the time of start even if the setting is changed during
the operation.
Name
Function
The ABS movement direction in the

unit of degree is designated.
0: Shortcut (direction setting
invalid)
1: ABS clockwise
2: ABS counterclockwise
9 - 19

1550
1650
1750
1850
Initial
value
MELSEC-Q
(b) When the software stroke limit is valid

The positioning is carried out in a clockwise/counterclockwise direction
depending on the software stroke limit range setting method.
Because of this, positioning with "shortcut control" may not be
possible.
Example
When the current value is moved from 0 to 315, positioning is carried out in the clockwise direction
if the software stroke limit lower limit value is 0 and the upper limit value is 345.
345.00000 0
315.00000
Positioning carried out in the clockwise direction.
POINT
Positioning addresses are within a range of 0 to 359.99999.
Use the incremental system to carry out positioning of one rotation or more.
2) Incremental system
Positioning is carried out for a designated movement amount in a
designated movement direction when in the incremental system of
positioning.
The movement direction is determined by the sign (+, ) of the movement
amount.
For a positive (+) movement direction ......Clockwise
For a negative () movement direction .....Counterclockwise
POINT
Positioning of 360 or more can be carried out with the incremental system.
At this time, set as shown below to invalidate the software stroke limit.
[Software stroke limit upper limit value = Software stroke limit lower limit value]
9 - 20
MELSEC-Q
9.1.6 Interpolation control

Meaning of interpolation control
In "2-axis linear interpolation control", "3-axis linear interpolation control", "4-axis
linear interpolation control", "2-axis fixed-feed control", "3-axis fixed-feed control",
"4-axis fixed-feed control", "2-axis speed control", "3-axis speed control", "4-axis
speed control", and "2-axis circular interpolation control", control is carried out so
that linear and arc paths are drawn using a motor set in two to four axis directions.
This kind of control is called "interpolation control".
In interpolation control, the axis in which the control system is set is defined as the
"reference axis", and the other axis is defined as the "interpolation axis".
The QD75 controls the "reference axis" following the positioning data set in the
"reference axis", and controls the "interpolation axis" corresponding to the
reference axis control so that a linear or arc path is drawn.
The following table shows the reference axis and interpolation axis combinations.
Axis definition
Axis set to interpolation
control in " Da.2 Control method"
2-axis linear interpolation control, 2-axis fixed-feed
control, 2-axis circular interpolation control, 2-axis
speed control
control, 3-axis speed control

control, 4-axis speed control
9 - 21
Reference axis
Interpolation axis
Any of axes 1, 2,
3, and 4
"Axes to be
interpolated" set in
reference axis
Axis 1
Axis 2, Axis 3
Axis 2
Axis 3, Axis 4
Axis 3
Axis 4, Axis 1
Axis 4
Axis 1, Axis 2
Axis 1
Axis 2, Axis 3, Axis 4
Axis 2
Axis 3
Axis 4
MELSEC-Q
Setting the positioning data during interpolation control

When carrying out interpolation control, the same positioning data Nos. are set for
the "reference axis" and the "interpolation axis".
The following table shows the "positioning data" setting items for the reference
axis and interpolation axis.
Axis
Setting item
Reference axis setting item
Same positioning data Nos
Da.2 Control system
Linear 2, 3, 4, Fixed-feed 2, 3, 4,
Circular sub, Circular right,
Circular left
Forward run speed 2, 3, 4
Reverse run speed 2, 3, 4
Da.3
Acceleration time
No.
Da.4
Deceleration time
No.
Da.5
Axis to be
interpolated.
Da.6
Positioning address/ Forward run speed 2, 3, and 4.

Forward run speed 2, 3, and 4.
movement amount Reverse run speed 2, 3, and 4 not Reverse run speed 2, 3, and 4 not
required.
required.
Da.7 Arc address
(Only during circular sub, circular

right, and circular left).
Da.8 Command speed
Interpolation axis setting item
(Only during circular sub, circular

right, and circular left).
Only during forward run speed 2,
3, 4 and reverse run speed 2, 3, 4.
Da.9 Dwell time
Da.10 M code
:
:
:
:
Setting always required

Set according to requirements (Set to "" when not used.)
Setting restrictions exist
Setting not required (Unrelated setting item, so any setting value will be ignored. Use the initial
value or a value within the setting range.)
: For 2-axis interpolation, the partner axis is set. If the self-axis is set, an error "Illegal interpolation
description command (error code: 521)" will occur. For 3- and 4-axis interpolation, the axis setting
is not required.
: Refer to Section 5.3 "List of positioning data" for information on the setting details.
9 - 22
MELSEC-Q
Starting the interpolation control

The positioning data Nos. of the reference axis (axis in which interpolation control
was set in " Da.2 Control system") are started when starting the interpolation
control. (Starting of the interpolation axis is not required.)
The following errors or warnings will occur and the positioning will not start if both
reference axis and the interpolation axis are started.
Reference axis
: Interpolation while interpolation axis BUSY (error code:

519)
Interpolation axis : Control system setting error (error code: 524), start during
operation (warning code: 100).
Interpolation control continuous positioning

When carrying out interpolation control in which "continuous positioning control"
and "continuous path control" are designated in the operation pattern, the
positioning method for all positioning data from the started positioning data to the
positioning data in which "positioning complete" is set must be set to interpolation
control.
The QD75 may malfunction if a control system other than interpolation control is
set.
Speed during interpolation control

Either the "composite speed" or "reference axis speed" can be designated as the
speed during interpolation control.
( Pr.20 Interpolation speed designation method.)
Only the "Reference axis speed" can be designated in the following interpolation
control.
When a "composite speed" is set and positioning is started, the "Interpolation
mode error (error code: 523)" occurs, and the system will not start.
Cautions in interpolation control

(1) If either of the axes exceeds the " Pr.8 Speed limit value" in the 2- to 4-axes
speed control, the axis which exceeded the speed limit value is controlled by
the speed limit value.
For the other axes which perform interpolation, the speed can be suppressed
by the ratio of a command speed.
If the reference axis exceeds " Pr.8 Speed limit value" during 2- to 4-axis
linear interpolation control, 2- to 4-axis fixed-feed control or 2-axis circular
interpolation control, the reference axis is controlled at the speed limit value.
(The speed limit does not function on the interpolation axis side.)
(2) In 2-axis interpolation, you cannot change the combination of interpolated axes
midway through operation.
9 - 23
MELSEC-Q
POINT
When the "reference axis speed" is set during interpolation control, set so the
major axis side becomes the reference axis. If the minor axis side is set as the
reference axis, the major axis side speed may exceed the " Pr.8 Speed limit
value".
Limits to interpolation control

There are limits to the interpolation control that can be executed and speed
( Pr.20 Interpolation speed designation method) that can be set, depending on
the " Pr.1 Unit setting" of the reference axis and interpolation axis. (For example,
circular interpolation control cannot be executed if the reference axis and
interpolation axis units differ.)
The following table shows the interpolation control and speed designation limits.
Pr.1 Unit setting
" Da.2 Control system"

Linear 3 (ABS, INC)

Fixed-feed 3
Linear 4 (ABS, INC)
Fixed-feed 4
Pr.20 Interpolation speed Reference axis and interpolation
Reference axis and

designation method axis units are the same, or a
combination of "mm" and "inch". interpolation axis units
differ 3
3
Composite speed
Linear 2 (ABS, INC)

Fixed-feed 2
Circular sub
Circular right
Circular left
Reference axis speed

(ABS, INC)
(ABS, INC)
(ABS, INC)
Composite speed

Composite speed
Composite speed
: Setting possible,
: Setting not possible.
1 "mm" and "inch" unit mix possible.
2 "degree" setting not possible. A "Circular interpolation not possible (error code: 535)" will occur and the position
cannot start if circular interpolation control is set when the unit is "degree". The machine will immediately stop if
"degree" is set during positioning control.
3 The unit set in the reference axis will be used for the speed unit during control if the units differ or if "mm" and "inch"
are combined.
Axis operation status during interpolation control

"In interpolation" will be stored in the " Md.26 Axis operation status" during
interpolation control. "Standing by" will be stored when the interpolation operation
is terminated. Both the reference axis and interpolation axis will carry out a
deceleration stop if an error occurs during control, and "error occurring" will be
stored in the operation status.
9 - 24
MELSEC-Q
9.2 Setting the positioning data

9.2.1 Relation between each control and positioning data
The setting requirements and details for the setting items of the positioning data to be
set differ according to the " Da.2 Control system".
The following table shows the positioning data setting items corresponding to the
different types of control. Details and settings for the operation of each control are
shown in Section 9.2.2 and subsequent sections.
(In this section, it is assumed that the positioning data setting is carried out using GX
Configurator-QP.)
Positioning data setting items
Position control
1-axis linear
control
2-axis linear
interpolation
control
3-axis linear
interpolation
control
4-axis linear
interpolation
control
Speed control
1-axis fixed-feed
control
2-axis fixed-feed
2-axis circular 1-axis, 2-axis,
control
3-axis, 4-axis
3-axis fixed-feed interpolation
control
Speed control
control
4-axis fixed-feed
control
Speedposition
switching
control
Positionspeed
switching
control
Independent
positioning control
Operation (Positioning complete)
Da.1
pattern Continuous positioning

control
Continuous path
control
Da.2 Control system
Linear 1
Linear 2
Linear 3
Linear 4
Fixed-feed 1
Fixed-feed 2
Fixed-feed 3
Fixed-feed 4
Circular sub
Circular right
Circular left
Forward run
speed 1
Reverse run
speed 1
Forward run
speed 2
Reverse run
speed 2
Forward run
speed 3
Reverse run
speed 3
Forward run
speed 4
Reverse run
speed 4
Forward run
speed/position
Reverse run
speed/position
Forward run
position/speed
Reverse run
position/speed

Da.6
: 2 - a xi s : 1, 3, 4-axis
Positioning address/movement
amount
Da.7 Arc address
Da.8 Command speed

Da.9 Dwell time
Da.10 M code
:
:
:
:
Always set
Setting not possible (If setting is made, an error (error code: 516) will occur at a start.)
Setting not required (Setting value is invalid. Use the initial values or setting values within a range where no error occurs.)
The "ABS (absolute) system" or "INC (incremental) system" can be used for the control system.
9 - 25
MELSEC-Q
REMARK
It is recommended that the "positioning data" be set whenever possible with GX Configurator-QP.
Execution by PLC program uses many PLC programs and devices. The execution becomes complicated,
and the scan times will increase.
Other control
NOP instruction
Current value
changing
JUMP instruction LOOP instruction LEND instruction
Positioning data setting items

Independent
positioning control
Operation
Da.1 pattern
Continuous positioning
control
Continuous path
control
NOP instruction
Current value
changing
Change
destination
address
Da.7 Arc address
Da.8 Command speed
JUMP
destinationpositioning data
No.
Condition data
No. at JUMP
No. of repetition
Da.2 Control system
Da.6
amount
Da.9 Dwell time
Da.10 M code
JUMP instruction LOOP instruction LEND instruction
: Always set
: Setting not possible (If setting is made, an error (error code: 515) will occur.)
: Setting not required (Setting value is invalid. Use the initial values or setting values within a range where no error occurs.)
9 - 26
MELSEC-Q
9.2.2 1-axis linear control

In "1-axis linear control" (" Da.2 Control system" = ABS linear 1, INC linear 1), one
motor is used to carry out position control in a set axis direction.
[1] 1-axis linear control (ABS linear 1)

Operation chart
In absolute system 1-axis linear control, addresses established by a machine OPR
are used. Positioning is carried out from the current stop position (start point
address) to the address (end point address) set in " Da.6 Positioning
Example
When the start point address (current stop position) is 1000, and the end point address (positioning address) is 8000,
positioning is carried out in the positive direction for a movement amount of 7000 (8000-1000)
Start point address

(current stop position)
0
End point address

(positioning address)
1000
8000
Positioning control (movement amount 7000)
Positioning data setting example

The following table shows setting examples when "1-axis linear control (ABS linear
1)" is set in positioning data No. 1 of axis 1.
Setting item
Axis 1 Positioning data No. 1
Da.2 Control system
Setting example
Setting details
Positioning
complete
Set "Positioning complete" assuming the next positioning data will not
be executed.
ABS linear 1
Da.3
Acceleration time
No.
Da.4
Deceleration time
No.
Axis to be
Da.5
interpolated
Da.6
movement amount
Da.7 Arc address

Da.8 Command speed
Da.9 Dwell time
Da.10 M code
Set absolute system 1-axis linear control.

Designate the value set in " Pr.25
acceleration time at start.
Acceleration time 1" as the
Designate the value set in " Pr.10 Deceleration time 0" as the
deceleration time at deceleration.
8 0 0 0 . 0 m
Setting not required (setting value will be ignored).

Set the positioning address. (Assuming "mm" is set in " Pr.1 Unit
setting".)
6000.00mm/min Set the speed during movement to the positioning address.

500ms
10
Set the time the machine dwells after the positioning stop (pulse
output stop) to the output of the positioning complete signal.
Set this when other sub operation commands are issued in
combination with the No. 1 positioning data.
Refer to Section 5.3 "List of positioning data" for information on the setting details.
9 - 27
MELSEC-Q
[2] 1-axis linear control (INC linear 1)

Operation chart
In incremental system 1-axis linear control, addresses established by a machine
OPR are used. Positioning is carried out from the current stop position (start point
address) to a position at the end of the movement amount set in " Da.6
Positioning address/movement amount". The movement direction is determined by
the sign of the movement amount.
Start point address
Reverese direction
Forward direction
Example
When the start point address is 5000, and the movement amount is -7000, positioning is carried out to
the -2000 position.
Start point address
Address after positioning control
-3000 -2000 -1000
1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000
Positioning control in the reverse direction (movement amount -7000)

The following table shows setting examples when "1-axis linear control (INC linear
1)" is set in positioning data No. 1 of axis 1.
Setting item
Setting example
Setting details
Positioning
complete
be executed.
Da.2 Control system
INC linear 1
Set incremental system 1-axis linear control.
Da.3
Acceleration time
No.

Da.4
Deceleration time
No.

Deceleration time 0" as the
Da.5
Axis to be
interpolated
Da.6
movement amount
Da.7 Arc address

Da.8 Command speed
Da.9 Dwell time
Da.10 M code
- 7 0 0 0 . 0 m
Set the movement amount. (Assuming "mm" is set in " Pr.1 Unit
setting".)
6000.00mm/min Set the speed during movement.

500ms
10
output stop) to the output of the positioning complete signal.
9 - 28
MELSEC-Q
9.2.3 2-axis linear interpolation control

In "2-axis linear interpolation control" (" Da.2 Control system" = ABS linear 2, INC
linear 2), two motors are used to carry out position control in a linear path while
carrying out interpolation for the axis directions set in each axis.
(Refer to Section 9.1.6 "Interpolation control" for details on interpolation control.)
[1] 2-axis linear interpolation control (ABS linear 2)

Operation chart
In absolute system 2-axis linear control, addresses established by a machine OPR
on a 2-axis coordinate plane are used. Linear interpolation positioning is carried
out from the current stop position (start point address) to the address (end point
address) set in " Da.6 Positioning address/movement amount".
Forward direction (Y axis)
Start point address (X1,Y1)

End point address (X2,Y2)
Y2
Y axis movement
amount
Movement by linear interpolation of the X axis and Y axis

Y1
Reverse direction
Forward direction (X axis)

X1
X2
X axis movement amount
Reverse direction
Example
When the start point address (current stop position) is (1000, 1000) and the end point address
(positioning address) is (10000, 4000), positioning is carried out as follows.
Axis 2 Start point address

End point address
4000
Axis 2 movement amount
(4000-1000=3000)
1000
Axis 1
0
1000
5000
10000
Axis 1 movement amount (10000-1000=9000)
9 - 29
MELSEC-Q
Restrictions
An error will occur and the positioning will not start in the following cases. The
machine will immediately stop if the error is detected during a positioning control.
If the movement amount of each axis exceeds "1073741824 (=230)" when "0:
Composite speed" is set in " Pr.20 Interpolation speed designation method"
The "Outside linear movement amount range error (error code: 504)" occurs
at a positioning start.
(The maximum movement amount that can be set in " Da.6 Positioning
30
address/movement amount" is "1073741824 (=2 )".)

[Reference axis and interpolation axis are designated as axis 1 and axis 2,
respectively.]
The following table shows setting examples when "2-axis linear interpolation
control (ABS linear 2)" is set in positioning data No. 1 of axis 1. (The required
values are also set in positioning data No. 1 of axis 2.)
Axis
Setting item
Setting details
Positioning
complete
Set "Positioning complete" assuming the next positioning

data will not be executed.
ABS linear 2
Set absolute system 2-axis linear interpolation control.
Acceleration time
No.
Deceleration time
No.
Da.5
Axis to be
interpolated
Da.6
Set the end point address. (Assuming "mm" is set in

m 4000.0 m
10000.0
" Pr.1 Unit setting".)
movement amount

Da.2 Control system
Da.3
Axis 1
Axis 2
(reference (interpolation
axis) setting axis) setting
example
example
Da.4
Da.9 Dwell time

Da.10 M code
Acceleration time 1" as
the acceleration time at start.
Deceleration time 0"
as the deceleration time at deceleration.
Da.7 Arc address

Da.8 Command speed
Set the axis to be interpolated (partner axis).

If the self-axis is set, an error will occur.
6000.00
mm/min
Set the speed during movement to the end point address.
500ms
Set the time the machine dwells after the positioning stop
(pulse output stop) to the output of the positioning complete
signal.
10

POINT
When the "reference axis speed" is set during 2-axis linear interpolation control,
set so the major axis side becomes the reference axis. If the minor axis side is set
as the reference axis, the major axis side speed may exceed the " Pr.8 Speed
limit value".
9 - 30
MELSEC-Q
[2] 2-axis linear interpolation control (INC linear 2)

Operation chart
In incremental system 2-axis linear interpolation control, addresses established by
a machine OPR on a 2-axis coordinate plane are used. Linear interpolation
positioning is carried out from the current stop position (start point address) to a
position at the end of the movement amount set in " Da.6 Positioning
address/movement amount". The movement direction is determined by the sign of
the movement amount.
Forward direction (Y axis)
Start point address (X1,Y1)

Y2
Y axis movement
amount
Movement by linear interpolation

positioning of the X axis and Y axis
Y1
Reverse direction

X1
X2
Reverse direction
Example
When the axis 1 movement amount is 9000 and the axis 2 movement amount is -3000, positioning
is carried out as follows.
Axis 2
Start point address

4000

(-3000)
Stop address after the

positioning control
1000
Axis 1
0
1000
5000
Axis 1 movement amount (9000)
9 - 31
10000
MELSEC-Q
Restrictions
machine will immediately stop if the error is detected during a positioning
operation.
30

respectively.]
control (INC linear 2)" is set in positioning data No. 1 of axis 1. (The required
Axis
Setting item
Axis 1
Axis 2
example
example
Setting details
Positioning
complete

Da.2 Control system
INC linear 2
Set incremental system 2-axis linear interpolation control.
Da.3
Acceleration time
No.

Da.4
Deceleration time
No.
Designate the value set in " Pr.10 Deceleration time 0"

Da.5
Axis to be
interpolated

Da.6
Set the movement amount. (Assuming "mm" is set in

9000.0 m -3000.0 m
movement amount
Da.7 Arc address

Da.8 Command speed
Da.9 Dwell time
Da.10 M code
6000.00
mm/min
Set the speed during movement.
500ms
signal.
10

POINT
limit value".
9 - 32
MELSEC-Q

linear 3), three motors are used to carry out position control in a linear path while

Operation chart
In the absolute system 3-axis linear control, using an address established by a
machine OPR in the 3-axis coordinate space, a linear interpolation positioning is
carried out from the current stop position (start point address) to the address (end
point address) set in the " Da.6 Positioning address/movement amount".
Forward direction
End point address (X2,Y2,Z2)
(Y axis)
(Positioning address)
of the X axis, Y axis and Z axis
Y axis movement amount
Forward direction (Z axis)
Za
xi s
mo
vem
en
ta
mo
un
t
Start point address (X1,Y1,Z1)

(Current stop position)
Reverse direction
Reverse direction Reverse direction
Example
When the start point address (current stop positon) is (1000, 2000, 1000) and the end point address
(positioning address) is (4000, 8000, 4000), positioning is carried out as follows.
End point address
Axis 2
8000
Axis 2 movement amount (8000-2000=6000)
Start point address

Axis 3

(4000-1000=3000)
4000
2000
1000
0
1000
4000
Axis 1
(4000-1000=3000)
9 - 33
MELSEC-Q
Restrictions
30

[Reference axis is designated as axis 1.]
values are also set in positioning data No. 1 of axis 2 and axis 3.)
Axis
Setting item
Da.2 Control system
Axis 1
Axis 2
Axis 3
(reference (interpolation (interpolation
axis) setting axis) setting axis) setting
example
example
example
Setting details
Positioning
complete
Set "Positioning complete" assuming the next

positioning data will not be executed.
ABS linear 3
Set absolute system 3-axis linear

Da.3
Acceleration time
No.

Acceleration time 1" as the acceleration time
at start.
Da.4
Deceleration time
No.

Deceleration time 0" as the deceleration time
at deceleration.
Setting not required (setting value will be
ignored).
When axis 1 is used as a reference axis, the
interpolation axes are axes 2 and 3.
Axis to be
Da.5
interpolated
Da.6
movement amount
Da.7 Arc address

Da.8 Command speed
Da.9 Dwell time
Da.10 M code
4000.0 m
8000.0 m
4000.0 m

ignored).
6000.00
mm/min
Set the speed during movement to the end

point address.
500ms
Set the time the machine dwells after the

positioning stop (pulse output stop) to the
output of the positioning complete signal.
10
Set this when other sub operation commands

are issued in combination with the No. 1
positioning data.
Set the end point address. (Assuming "mm" is

set in " Pr.1 Unit setting".)
9 - 34
MELSEC-Q
POINTS
limit value".
Refer to Section 9.1.6 "Interpolation control" for the reference axis and
interpolation axis combinations.
9 - 35
MELSEC-Q

Operation chart
In the incremental system 3-axis linear interpolation control, using an address
established by a machine OPR in the 3-axis coordinate space, a linear
interpolation positioning is carried out from the current stop position (start point
address) to a position at the end of the movement amount set in the " Da.6
Positioning address/movement amount". The movement direction depends on the
sign (+ or -) of the movement amount.
Forward direction

positioning of the X axis, Y axis and Z axis
Y2
Forward direction
Y axis movement amount
Z2
Z axis
movement amount
X2
Forward direction
Start point address (X1, Y1, Z1)
Reverse direction
X axis movement
amount
Reverse direction
Reverse direction
Example
When the axis 1 movement amount is 10000, the axis 2 movement amount is 5000 and the axis
3 movement amount is 6000, positioning is carried out as follows.
Stop address after the positioning control
Axis 2
Axis 3
5000
Axis 3 movement
amount (6000)

(5000)
6000
Start point address
5000
10000
Axis 1 movement amount (10000)
9 - 36
Axis 1
MELSEC-Q
Restrictions
operation.
30

values are also set in positioning data No. 1 of axis 2 and axis 3.)
Axis
Setting item
Axis 1
Axis 2
Axis 3
example
example
example
Setting details
Positioning
complete

Da.2 Control system
INC linear 3
Set incremental system 3-axis linear

Da.3
Acceleration time
No.

at start.
Da.4
Deceleration time
No.

at deceleration.
Axis to be
Da.5
interpolated
Da.6
movement amount
Da.7 Arc address

Da.8 Command speed
Da.9 Dwell time
Da.10 M code

ignored).
10000.0
m
5000.0 m
6000.0 m
Set the movement amount. (Assuming "mm"

is set in " Pr.1 Unit setting".)

ignored).
6000.00
mm/min
500ms

10

positioning data.
9 - 37
MELSEC-Q
POINTS
limit value".
9 - 38
MELSEC-Q

linear 4), four motors are used to carry out position control in a linear path while

In the absolute system 4-axis linear control, using an address established by a
machine OPR in the 4-axis coordinate space, a linear interpolation positioning is
carried out from the current stop position (start point address) to the address (end
point address) set in the " Da.6 Positioning address/movement amount".
Restrictions
When the movement amount for each axis exceeds "1073741824 (=230)"
An "outside linear movement amount range error (error code: 504)" will occur at
the positioning start.
30
9 - 39
MELSEC-Q

values are also set in positioning data No. 1 of axis 2, axis 3 and axis 4.)
Axis
Setting item
Da.2 Control system
Axis 1
Axis 2
Axis 3
Axis 4
(reference (interpolation (interpolation (interpolation
axis) setting axis) setting axis) setting axis) setting
example
example
example
example
Setting details
Positioning
complete
Set "Positioning complete"

assuming the next positioning
ABS linear 4
Set absolute system 4-axis

linear interpolation control.
Designate the value set in

" Pr.25 Acceleration time 1"
as the acceleration time at
start.

" Pr.10 Deceleration time 0"
as the deceleration time at
deceleration.
Da.5
Axis to be
interpolated
Da.6
movement amount
Da.7 Arc address

Da.8 Command speed
Da.9 Dwell time
Da.10 M code
4000.0 m
8000.0 m
4000.0 m
Setting not required (setting

value will be ignored).
6000.00
mm/min
Set the speed during

movement to the end point
address.
Set the time the machine

dwells after the positioning stop
(pulse output stop) to the
output of the positioning
complete signal.
Set this when other sub

operation commands are
issued in combination with the
No. 1 positioning data.
500ms
10

When axis 1 is used as a
reference axis, the interpolation
axes are axes 2, 3 and 4.
Set the end point address.

(Assuming "mm" is set in
3000.0 m
Refer to Section "5.3 List of positioning data" for information on the setting details.
9 - 40
MELSEC-Q
POINTS
limit value".
9 - 41
MELSEC-Q

Operation chart
In the incremental system 4-axis linear interpolation control, using an address
established by a machine OPR in the 4-axis coordinate plane, a linear interpolation
positioning is carried out from the current stop position (start point address) to a
position at the end of the movement amount set in the " Da.6 Positioning
address/movement amount". The movement direction depends on the sign (+ or -)
of the movement amount.
Restrictions
operation.
When the movement amount for each axis exceeds "1073741824 (=230)"
An "outside linear movement amount range error (error code: 504)" will occur at
the positioning start.
30
9 - 42
MELSEC-Q

values are also set in positioning data No. 1 of axis 2, axis 3 and axis 4.)
Axis
Setting item
Axis 1
Axis 2
Axis 3
Axis 4
example
example
example
example
Setting details
Positioning
complete

Da.2 Control system
INC linear 4
Set incremental system 4-axis

linear interpolation control.

start.
Da.4
Da.5
Deceleration time
No.
Da.9 Dwell time

Set the movement amount.

3000.0 m (Assuming "mm" is set in
8000.0 m
4000.0 m

6000.00
mm/min

movement.

complete signal.

500ms
Da.10 M code
4000.0 m
Da.7 Arc address

Da.8 Command speed

deceleration.
Axis to be
interpolated
Da.6
movement amount

10
POINTS
limit value".
9 - 43
MELSEC-Q
9.2.6 1-axis fixed-feed control

In "1-axis fixed-feed control" (" Da.2 Control system" = fixed-feed 1), one motor is
used to carry out fixed-feed control in a set axis direction.
In fixed-feed control, any remainder of the movement amount designated in the
positioning data is rounded down if less than that required for control accuracy to
output the same amount of pulses. (The remainder of the movement amount with an
accuracy below the control accuracy does not affect the regular controls.)
Operation chart
In 1-axis fixed-feed control, the address ( Md.20 Current feed value) of the current
stop position (start point address) is set to "0". Positioning is then carried out to a
The movement direction is determined by the movement amount sign.
" Md. 20 Current feed
value" is set to "0" at
the positioning start
0
Positioning
start
Designated movement
amount
Stop position
Forward direction
Reverse direction
Restrictions
(1) An axis error "Continuous path control invalid (error code: 516)" will occur and
the operation cannot start if "continuous path control" is set in " Da.1
Operation pattern". ("Continuous path control" cannot be set in fixed-feed
control.)
(2) "Fixed-feed" cannot be set in " Da.2 Control system" in the positioning data
when "continuous path control" has been set in " Da.1 Operation pattern" of
the immediately prior positioning data. (For example, if the operation pattern of
positioning data No. 1 is "continuous path control", fixed-feed control cannot
be set in positioning data No. 2.) An axis error "Continuous path control invalid
(error code: 516)" will occur and the machine will carry out a deceleration stop
if this type of setting is carried out.
9 - 44
MELSEC-Q

The following table shows setting examples when "1-axis fixed-feed control (fixedfeed 1)" is set in positioning data No. 1 of axis 1.
Setting item
Da.2 Control system
Setting
example
Positioning
complete
Setting details
be executed.
Fixed-feed 1 Set 1-axis fixed-feed control.

1

Da.4
Deceleration time
No.
Axis to be
Da.5
interpolated
Da.6
movement amount
Da.7 Arc address

Da.8 Command speed
Da.9 Dwell time
Da.10 M code
8 0 0 0 . 0 m

Set the positioning address. (Assuming "mm" is set in " Pr.1
Unit
setting".)
6000.00mm/
Set the speed during movement to the positioning address.
min
500ms
Set the time the machine dwells after the positioning stop (pulse output
stop) to the output of the positioning complete signal.
10
Set this when other sub operation commands are issued in combination
with the No. 1 positioning data.
* Refer to Section 5.3 "List of positioning data" for information on the setting details.
9 - 45
MELSEC-Q
9.2.7 2-axis fixed-feed control (interpolation)

In "2-axis fixed-feed control" (" Da.2 Control system" = fixed-feed 2), two motors are
used to carry out fixed-feed control in a linear path while carrying out interpolation for
the axis directions set in each axis.
Operation chart
In incremental system 2-axis fixed-feed control, the addresses ( Md.20 Current
feed value) of the current stop position (start addresses) of both axes are set to
"0". Linear interpolation positioning is then carried out from that position to a
Y axis
" Md. 20 Current feed value" of each axis
is set to "0" at the positioning start
(0,0)
(0,0)
Designated movement
amount
(0,0)
X axis
Designated movement
amount
Restrictions
(1) An axis error "Continuous path control not possible (error code: 516)" will
occur and the operation cannot start if "continuous path control" is set in
" Da.1 Operation pattern". ("Continuous path control" cannot be set in fixedfeed control.)
be set in positioning data No. 2.) An axis error "Continuous path control not
possible (error code: 516)" will occur and the machine will carry out a
deceleration stop if this type of setting is carried out.
9 - 46
MELSEC-Q

respectively.]
The following table shows setting examples when "2-axis fixed-dimension feed
control (fixed-feed 2)" is set in positioning data No. 1 of axis 1. (The required
Axis
Setting item
Da.2 Control method
Axis 1
Axis 2
example
example
Setting details
Positioning
complete

Fixed-feed 2
Set 2-axis fixed-feed control.
Acceleration time 1"
as the acceleration time at start.

Deceleration time
No.
Da.5
Axis to be
interpolated
Da.6
movement amount
8000.0 m
6000.0 m
Set the speed during movement. (Designate the composite

speed of reference axis speed in " Pr.20 Interpolation
Da.4
Da.7 Arc address
Da.8 Command speed
6000.00
mm/min

Set the positioning address. (Assuming "mm" is set in
speed designation method".)

Da.9 Dwell time
Da.10 M code
500ms
signal.
10

* Refer to Section 5.3 "List of positioning data" for information on the setting details.
POINTS
When the "reference axis speed" is set during 2-axis fixed-feed control, set so the
value".
9 - 47
MELSEC-Q

In "3-axis fixed-feed control" (" Da.2 Control system" = fixed-feed 3), three motors are
9 - 48
MELSEC-Q
Operation chart
feed value) of the current stop position (start addresses) of every axes are set to
Y axis
(0,0,0)
(0,0,0)
Z axis
Designated movement amount
Designated movement
amount
(0,0,0)
X axis
" Md.20 Current feed value" of each axis
is set to "0" at the positioning start.
Designated movement
amount
9 - 49
MELSEC-Q
Restrictions

The following table shows setting examples when "3-axis fixed-feed control (fixedfeed 3)" is set in positioning data No. 1 of axis 1. (The required values are also set
in positioning data No. 1 of axis 2 and axis 3.)
9 - 50
Axis
Setting item
Da.2 Control method
MELSEC-Q
Axis 2
Axis 1
Axis 3
(interpolatio
(reference
(interpolation
n axis)
axis) setting
axis) setting
setting
example
example
example
Setting details
Positioning
complete

Fixed-feed 3
Da.4
Deceleration time
No.
Axis to be
Da.5
interpolated
Da.6
Da.10 M code
6000.0 m
Set the positioning address. (Assuming "mm"

is set in " Pr.1 Unit setting".)

ignored).
6000.00
mm/min
500ms

10

positioning data.
Da.7 Arc address
Da.9 Dwell time

at deceleration.
ignored).
10000.0 m 5000.0 m
movement amount
Da.8 Command speed

at start.
POINTS
value".
9 - 51
MELSEC-Q

In "4-axis fixed-feed control" (" Da.2 Control system" = fixed-feed 4), four motors are
Operation chart
feed value) of the current stop position (start addresses) of every axes are set to
Restrictions
9 - 52
MELSEC-Q

The following table shows setting examples when "4-axis fixed-feed control (fixedfeed 4)" is set in positioning data No. 1 of axis 1. (The required values are also set
in positioning data No. 1 of axis 2, axis 3 and axis 4.)
Axis
Setting item
Da.2 Control method
Axis 1
Axis 2
Axis 3
Axis 4
example
example
example
example
Setting details
Positioning
complete

Fixed-feed 4

start.
Da.4
Da.5
Deceleration time
No.
Da.9 Dwell time

Set the positioning address.

3000.0 m (Assuming "mm" is set in
8000.0 m
4000.0 m

6000.00
mm/min

movement.

complete signal.

500ms
Da.10 M code
4000.0 m
Da.7 Arc address

Da.8 Command speed

deceleration.
Axis to be
interpolated
Da.6
movement amount

10
POINTS
value".
9 - 53
MELSEC-Q
9.2.10 2-axis circular interpolation control with sub point designation

In "2-axis circular interpolation control" (" Da.2 Control system" = ABS circular sub,
INC circular sub), two motors are used to carry out position control in an arc path
passing through designated sub points, while carrying out interpolation for the axis
directions set in each axis.
(Refer to Section 9.1.6 "Interpolation control" for details on
interpolation control.)
[1]
2-axis circular interpolation control with sub point designation (ABS

circular sub)
Operation chart
In the absolute system, 2-axis circular interpolation control with sub point
designation, addresses established by a machine OPR on a 2-axis coordinate
plane are used. Positioning is carried out from the current stop position (start point
address/movement amount", in an arc path that passes through the sub point
address set in " Da.7 Arc address".
The resulting control path is an arc having as its center the intersection point of
perpendicular bisectors of a straight line between the start point address (current
stop position) and sub point address (arc address), and a straight line between the
sub point address (arc address) and end point address (positioning address).
Forward direction
Movement by circular interpolation
Sub point address
(arc address)
End point address

Start point address
Arc center point
Reverse direction
Forward direction
OP
Reverse direction
9 - 54
MELSEC-Q
Restrictions
(1) 2-axis circular interpolation control cannot be set in the following cases.
When "degree" is set in " Pr.1 Unit setting"
When the units set in " Pr.1 Unit setting" are different for the reference axis
and interpolation axis. ("mm" and "inch" combinations are possible.)

When "reference axis speed" is set in " Pr.20 Interpolation speed
designation method"
(2) An error will occur and the positioning start will not be possible in the following
cases. The machine will immediately stop if the error is detected during
29
When the radius exceeds "536870912 (=2 )". (The maximum radius for
29
which circular interpolation control is possible is "536870912 (=2 )"
... An error "Outside radius range (error code: 544)" will occur at positioning
start.
31
When the center point address is outside the range of "2147483648 (2 ) to
31
2147483647 (2 1)"
... A "Sub point setting error" (error code: 525) will occur at positioning start.
When the start point address is the same as the end point address
... An "End point setting error" (error code: 526) will occur.
When the start point address is the same as the sub point address
... A "Sub point setting error" (error code: 525) will occur.
When the end point address is the same as the sub point address
When the start point address, sub point address, and end point address are in
a straight line
9 - 55
MELSEC-Q

respectively.]
The following table shows setting examples when "2-axis circular interpolation
control with sub point designation (ABS circular sub)" is set in positioning data No.
1 of axis 1. (The required values are also set in positioning data No. 1 of axis 2.)
Axis
Setting item
Setting details
Positioning
complete

ABS circular
sub
Set absolute system, 2-axis circular interpolation control

with sub point designation.
Acceleration time
No.
Deceleration time
No.
Da.5
Axis to be
interpolated
Da.6
8000.0 m
movement amount
6000.0 m
4000.0 m
3000.0 m

Da.2 Control system
Da.3
Axis 1
Axis 2
example
example
Da.4
Da.7 Arc address

Deceleration time 0" as
the deceleration time at deceleration.


Set the sub point address. (Assuming that the " Pr.1
Unit
setting" is set to "mm".)

Da.8 Command speed
6000.00
mm/min
Set the speed when moving to the end point address.

(Designate the composite speed in " Pr.20 Interpolation
Da.9 Dwell time

Da.10 M code
500ms
signal.
10

POINT
Set a value in " Da.8 Command speed" so that the speed of each axis does not
exceed the " Pr.8 Speed limit value". (The speed limit does not function for the
speed calculated by the QD75 during interpolation control.)
9 - 56
MELSEC-Q
[2] 2-axis circular interpolation control with sub point designation (INC
circular sub)
Operation chart
In the incremental system, 2-axis circular interpolation control with sub point
designation, positioning is carried out from the current stop position (start point
Positioning address/movement amount" in an arc path that passes through the sub
point address set in " Da.7 Arc address". The movement direction depends on
the sign (+ or -) of the movement amount.
The resulting control path is an arc having as its center the intersection point of
perpendicular bisectors of the straight line between the start point address (current
stop position) and sub point address (arc address) calculated from the movement
amount to the sub point, and a straight line between the sub point address (arc
address) and end point address (positioning address) calculated from the
movement amount to the end point.
Forward direction
Sub point address
(arc address)
Start point
Movement amount
Movement amount
address
to sub point
to the end point
Arc center
Reverse direction
Movement
amount to the
sub point
Movement amount to the end point
Reverse direction
9 - 57
Forward direction
MELSEC-Q
Restrictions

designation method"
29
29
... An error "Outside radius range (error code: 544)" will occur at positioning
start.
31
When the center point address is outside the range of "2147483648 (2 ) to
31
2147483647 (2 1)"
... A "Sub point setting error" (error code: 525) will occur at positioning start.
When the start point address is the same as the end point address
... An "End point setting error" (error code: 526) will occur.
When the start point address is the same as the sub point address
When the end point address is the same as the sub point address
When the start point address, sub point address, and end point address are in
a straight line
9 - 58
MELSEC-Q

respectively.]
control with sub point designation (INC circular sub)" is set in positioning data No.
1 of axis 1. (The required values are also set in positioning data No. 1 of axis 2.)
Axis
Setting item
Setting details
Positioning
complete

Da.2 Control system
INC circular
sub
Set incremental system, 2-axis circular interpolation control

with sub point designation.
Acceleration time
No.
Deceleration time
No.
Da.5
Axis to be
interpolated
Da.6
movement amount
8000.0 m
6000.0 m
Da.3
Axis 1
Axis 2
example
example
Da.4



Set the movement amount. (Assuming that the " Pr.1
Unit setting" is set to "mm".)
4000.0 m
Da.7 Arc address
3000.0 m
Set the sub point address. (Assuming that the " Pr.1
Unit

Da.8 Command speed
6000.00
mm/min
Set the speed during movement. (Designate the composite

speed in " Pr.20 Interpolation speed designation
method".)
Da.9 Dwell time
500ms
signal.
10

Da.10 M code
POINT
9 - 59
MELSEC-Q
9.2.11 2-axis circular interpolation control with center point designation

In "2-axis circular interpolation control" (" Da.2 Control system" = ABS circular right,
INC circular right, ABS circular left, INC circular left), two motors are used to carry out
position control in an arc path having a designated center point, while carrying out
interpolation for the axis directions set in each axis.
The following table shows the rotation directions, arc center angles that can be
controlled, and positioning paths for the different control systems.
Control system
Rotation direction
Arc center angle that

can be controlled
Positioning path
Positioning path
ABS circular right

Clockwise
Start point
(current stop
position)
0 <
< 360
End point
INC circular right

Center point
0 < 360
Center point
ABS circular left

0<
Counterclockwise
< 360
Start point
(current stop
position)
INC circular left
End point
Positioning path
9 - 60
MELSEC-Q
Circular interpolation error compensation

In circular interpolation control with center point designation, the arc path
calculated from the start point address and arc address may deviate from the
position of the end point address set in " Da.6 Positioning address/movement
amount".
(Refer to " Pr.41
Allowable circular interpolation error width".)
(1) Calculated error < " Pr.41
Allowable circular interpolation error width"
Circular interpolation control to the set end point address is carried out while
the error compensation is carried out. (This is called "spiral interpolation".)
Path using spiral interpolation
Error
Calculated end point

address
End point address
Start point address
In circular interpolation control with center point designation, an angular

velocity is calculated on the assumption that operation is carried out at a
command speed on the arc using the radius calculated from the start point
address and center point address, and the radius is compensated in proportion
to the angular velocity deviated from that at the start point.
Thus, when there is a difference (error) between a radius calculated from the
start point address and center point address (start point radius) and a radius
calculated from the end point address and center point address (end point
radius), the composite speed differs from the command speed as follows.
Start point radius > End point radius: As compared with the speed without
error, the speed becomes slower as
end point address is reached.
Start point radius < End point radius: As compared with the speed without
error, the speed becomes faster as
end point address is reached.
(2) Calculated error > " Pr.41
Allowable circular interpolation error width"
At the positioning start, an error "Outside circular interpolation error allowable

limit" (error code: 506) will occur and the control will not start. The machine will
immediately stop if the error is detected during positioning control.
9 - 61
MELSEC-Q
[1] 2-axis circular interpolation control with center point designation

(ABS circular right, ABS circular left)
Operation chart
In the absolute system, 2-axis circular interpolation control with center point
address/movement amount", in an arc path having as its center the address (arc
address) of the center point set in " Da.7 Arc address".
Forward direction
Start point address

End point address
Radius
Reverse direction
Forward direction
Arc address
Reverse direction
Positioning of a complete round with a radius from the start point address to the
arc center point can be carried out by setting the end point address (positioning
address) to the same address as the start point address.
Forward direction
Arc center point (Arc address)

Start point address
Forward direction
Reverese direction
Reverese direction
9 - 62
End point address

MELSEC-Q
In circular interpolation control with center point designation, an angular velocity is

calculated on the assumption that operation is carried out at a command speed on
the arc using the radius calculated from the start point address and center point
address, and the radius is compensated in proportion to the angular velocity
deviated from that at the start point.
Thus, when there is a difference (error) between a radius calculated from the start
point address and center point address (start point radius) and a radius calculated
from the end point address and center point address (end point radius), the
composite speed differs from the command speed as follows.
Start point radius > End point radius: As compared with the speed without error,
the speed becomes slower as end point
address is reached.
Start point radius < End point radius: As compared with the speed without error,
the speed becomes faster as end point
address is reached.
Restrictions

designation method"
29
29
... An error "Outside radius range" (error code: 544)" will occur at
positioning start.
When the end point address is outside the range of -231 to 231-1
... An "End point setting error" (error code: 526)
When the start point address is the same as the center point address
... A "Center point setting error" (error code: 527) will occur.
When the end point address is the same as the center point address
When the center point address is outside the range of -231 to 231-1
9 - 63
MELSEC-Q
Positioning data setting examples

respectively.]
control with center point designation (ABS right arc, ABS left arc)" is set in
positioning data No. 1 of axis 1. (The required values are also set in positioning
data No. 1 of axis 2.)
Axis
Setting item
Setting details
Positioning
complete

ABS circular
right
ABS circular
left
Set absolute system, 2-axis circular interpolation control

with center point designation. (Select clockwise or
counterclockwise according to the control.)
Acceleration time
No.
Deceleration time
No.
Da.5
Axis to be
interpolated
Da.6
movement amount
8000.0 m
6000.0 m
4000.0 m
3000.0 m
Da.2 Control system
Da.3
Axis 1
Axis 2
example
example
Da.4
Da.7 Arc address



Set the arc address. (Assuming that the " Pr.1
Unit

Da.8 Command speed
6000.00
mm/min

Da.9 Dwell time
500ms
signal.
10

Da.10 M code
POINT
9 - 64
MELSEC-Q
[2] 2-axis circular interpolation control with center point designation

(INC circular right, INC circular left)
Operation chart
In the incremental system, 2-axis circular interpolation control with center point
Positioning address/movement amount", in an arc path having as its center the
address (arc address) of the center point set in " Da.7 Arc address".
Forward direction
Start point address
(Current stop position)
Movement amount
to the end point
Radius
Reverse
direction
Forward direction
Arc center point
Reverse
direction
(Arc address)
Movement amount to the end point
Positioning of a complete round with a radius of the distance from the start point
address to the arc center point can be carried out by setting the movement amount
to "0".
Forward direction
Arc center point (Arc address)
Movement amount = 0
Forward direction
Reverese direction
Reverese direction
9 - 65
MELSEC-Q
In circular interpolation control with center point designation, an angular velocity is

calculated on the assumption that operation is carried out at a command speed on
the arc using the radius calculated from the start point address and center point
address, and the radius is compensated in proportion to the angular velocity
deviated from that at the start point.
Thus, when there is a difference (error) between a radius calculated from the start
point address and center point address (start point radius) and a radius calculated
from the end point address and center point address (end point radius), the
composite speed differs from the command speed as follows.
Start point radius > End point radius: As compared with the speed without error,
the speed becomes slower as end point
address is reached.
Start point radius < End point radius: As compared with the speed without error,
the speed becomes faster as end point
address is reached.
Restrictions

designation method"
29
29
... An "Outside radius range error (error code: 544)" will occur at positioning
start.
When the start point address is the same as the center point address
When the end point address is the same as the center point address
When the center point address is outside the range of -231 to 231-1
9 - 66
MELSEC-Q

respectively.]
control with center point designation (INC circular right, INC circular left)" is set in
positioning data No. 1 of axis 1. (The required values are also set in positioning
data No. 1 of axis 2.)
Axis
Setting item
Axis 1
Axis 2
example
example
Setting details
Positioning
complete

Da.2 Control system
INC circular
right
INC circular
left
Set incremental system, 2-axis circular interpolation control

with center point designation. (Select clockwise or
counterclockwise according to the control.)

Deceleration time
No.
Da.5
Axis to be
interpolated
Da.6
movement amount
8000.0 m
6000.0 m
Da.4
Da.8 Command speed

Set the movement amount. (Assuming that the " Pr.1
4000.0 m
Da.7 Arc address
6000.00
mm/min
3000.0 m
Set the center point address. (Assuming that the " Pr.1
Da.9 Dwell time
500ms
signal.
10

Da.10 M code
POINT
9 - 67
MELSEC-Q
9.2.12 1-axis speed control

In "1-axis speed control" (" Da.2 Control system" = Forward run: speed 1, Reverse
run: speed 1), control is carried out in the axis direction in which the positioning data
has been set by continuously outputting pulses for the speed set in " Da.8 Command
speed" until the input of a stop command.
The two types of 1-axis speed control are "Forward run: speed 1" in which the control
starts in the forward run direction, and "Reverse run: speed 1" in which control starts in
the reverse run direction.
Operation chart
The following chart shows the operation timing for 1-axis speed control with axis 1
as the reference axis.
The "in speed control" flag ( Md.31 Status: b0) is turned ON during speed control.
The "Positioning complete signal" is not turned ON.
V
Da. 8 Command speed
ON
OFF

[Y10]
ON
OFF
BUSY signal
[XC]

[X14]
Does not turn ON even

when control is stopped
by stop command.
OFF
ON
Axis stop signal
(stop command) [Y4]
OFF
ON
Md.31 Status:b0
OFF
Fig.9.9 1-axis speed control operation timing
9 - 68
MELSEC-Q
Current feed value during 1-axis speed control

The following table shows the " Md.20 Current feed value" during 1-axis speed
control corresponding to the " Pr.21 Current feed value during speed control"
settings.
Pr.21 Current feed value during speed
control" setting
0: Do not update current feed value
The current feed value at speed control start

is maintained.
1: Update current feed value
The current feed value is updated.
2: Zero clear current feed value
The current feed value is fixed at 0.
In speed control
t
Current feed value during speed control start is maintained
(a) Current feed value not updated
In speed control
In speed control
t
Current feed value is updated
(b) Current feed value updated
t
0
(c) Current feed value zero cleared
Restrictions
(1) Set "Positioning complete" in " Da.1 Operation pattern". An axis error
"Continuous path control not possible (error code: 516)" will occur and the
operation cannot start if "continuous positioning control" or "continuous path
control" is set in " Da.1 Operation pattern".
("Continuous positioning control" and "continuous path control" cannot be set
in speed control.)
(2) Set the WITH mode in " Pr.18 M code ON signal output timing" when using
an M code. The M code will not be output, and the M code ON signal will not
turn ON if the AFTER mode is set.
(3) An error "No command speed (error code: 503)" will occur if the current speed
(-1) is set in " Da.8 command speed".
(4) The software stroke limit check will not carried out if the control unit is set to
"degree".
9 - 69
MELSEC-Q

The following table shows the setting examples when "1-axis speed control
(forward run: speed 1)" is set in the positioning data No. 1 of axis 1.
Setting item
Setting details
Positioning
Setting other than "Positioning complete" is not possible in speed control.
complete
Da.2 Control system
Forward run
Set 1-axis speed control.
speed 1
Setting
example

Da.4
Deceleration time
No.

Da.5
Axis to be
interpolated
Da.6
movement amount
Da.7 Arc address

Da.8 Command speed
Da.9 Dwell time
Da.10 M code
6000.00mm/
Set the speed to be commanded.
min
10
Set this when other sub operation commands are issued in combination
with the No. 1 positioning data. (" Pr.18 M code ON signal output
timing" setting only possible in the WITH mode.)
9 - 70
MELSEC-Q

run: speed 2), control is carried out in the 2-axis direction in which the positioning data
(Refer to Section 9.1.6 "Interpolation control" for the combination of the reference axis
with the interpolation axis.)
Operation chart
The following chart shows the operation timing for 2-axis (axes 1 and 2) speed
control with axis 1 as the reference axis. The "in speed control" flag
( Md.31 Status: b0) is turned ON during speed control.
The "positioning complete signal" is not turned ON.
V
Interpolation axis (axis 2)
Da. 8 Command speed
t
V
Referense axis (axis1)
Da. 8 Command speed
ON
OFF

[Y10]
ON
OFF
BUSY signal
[XC,XD]


[X14,X15]
by stop command.
OFF
ON
Axis stop signal (stop command)
(Either Y4 or Y5)
OFF
ON
Md.31 Status: b0
OFF
Fig. 9.10 2-axis speed control operation timing
9 - 71
MELSEC-Q

settings. (Note that the reference axis setting values are used for parameters.)
" Pr.21 Current feed value during speed
control" setting

is maintained.
In speed control
In speed control
In speed control
t
t
0
Restrictions
control" is set. ("Continuous positioning control" and "continuous path control"
cannot be set in speed control.)
(3) Set the "reference axis speed" in " Pr.20 Interpolation speed designation
method". An "Interpolation mode error (error code: 523)" will occur and the
operation cannot start if a composite speed is set.
(4) When either of two axes exceeds the speed limit, that axis is controlled with
the speed limit value. The speeds of the other axes are limited at the ratios of
" Da.8 Command speed".
(Examples)
Axis
Axis 1 setting
Axis 2 setting
Setting item
Pr.8
Speed limit
value
4000.00mm/min
5000.00mm/min
Da.8
Command
speed
8000.00mm/min
6000.00mm/min
With the settings shown above, the operation speed in speed control is as
follows.
Axis 1: 4000.00 mm/min (Speed is limited by Pr.8 ).
Axis 2: 3000.00 mm/min (Speed is limited at an ratio of an axis 1 command
speed to an axis 2 command speed).
9 - 72
MELSEC-Q
(5) An error "No command speed (error code: 503)" occurs if a current speed (-1)
is set in " Da.8 Command speed".
(6) The software stroke limit check is not carried out when the control unit is set to
"degree".

[Setting examples when the reference axis and interpolation axis are designated
as axes 1 and 2, respectively.]
(forward run: speed 2)" is set in the positioning data No. 1 of axis 1 (reference
axis).
Axis
Setting item
Setting details
Positioning
complete
Setting other than "Positioning complete" is not possible in

speed control.
Da.2 Control system
Forward run
speed 2

Axis 1
Axis 2
example
example
Da.4
Deceleration time
No.
Designate the value set in " Pr.10 Deceleration time 0"

Da.5
Axis to be
interpolated

Da.6
movement amount
6000.00
mm/min
3000.00
mm/min
Da.7 Arc address

Da.8 Command speed
Da.9 Dwell time
Da.10 M code
10

combination with the No. 1 positioning data. (" Pr.18 M
code ON signal output timing" setting only possible in the
WITH mode.)
9 - 73
MELSEC-Q

with the interpolation axes.)
Operation chart
The following chart shows the operation timing for 3-axis (axes 1, 2, and 3) speed
control with axis 1 as the reference axis.
V
Da. 8 Command speed
t
V
Da. 8 Command speed
t
V
Referense axis (axis 1)
Da. 8 Command speed
t
ON
OFF

[Y10]
ON
OFF
BUSY signal
[XC,XD,XE]

by stop command.

[X14,X15,X16]
OFF
ON
Axis stop signal
(stop command)
(Either Y4,Y5 or Y6)
OFF
ON
Md.31 Status: b0
OFF
9 - 74
MELSEC-Q

control" setting

is maintained.
In speed control
t
In speed control
In speed control
t
t
0
Restrictions
9 - 75
MELSEC-Q
(4) When either of three axes exceeds the speed limit, that axis is controlled with
(Examples)
Axis
Axis 1 setting
Axis 2 setting
Axis 3 setting
Setting item
Pr.8
Speed limit
value
4000.00mm/min
5000.00mm/min
6000.00mm/min
Da.8
Command
speed
8000.00mm/min
6000.00mm/min
4000.00mm/min
follows.
Axis 2: 3000.00 mm/min (Speed is limited at ratios in axes 1, 2, and 3
command speeds).
Axis 3: 2000.00 mm/min (Speed is limited at ratios in axes 1, 2, and 3
command speeds).
(5) An error "No command speed (error code: 503)" will occur if a current speed
(-1) is set in " Da.8 Command speed".
"degree".
9 - 76
MELSEC-Q

axis).
Axis
Setting item
Setting details
Positioning
complete
Setting other than "Positioning complete" is

not possible in speed control.
Da.2 Control system
Forward run
speed 3

at start.

at deceleration.
Axis 1
Axis 2
Axis 3
example
example
example
Da.4
Deceleration time
No.
Axis to be
Da.5
interpolated
Da.6
movement amount
Da.7 Arc address

Da.8 Command speed
Da.9 Dwell time
Da.10 M code

ignored).

ignored).

ignored).
6000.00
mm/min
3000.00
mm/min
2000.00
mm/min
10

ignored).
positioning data. (" Pr.18 M code ON signal
output timing" setting only possible in the
WITH mode.)
9 - 77
MELSEC-Q

with the interpolation axes.)
9 - 78
MELSEC-Q
Operation chart
The following chart shows the operation timing for 4-axis speed control with axis 1
as the reference axis.
V
Da. 8 Command speed
t
V
Da. 8 Command speed
t
V
Da. 8 Command speed
t
V
Referense axis (axis 1)
Da. 8 Command speed
t
ON
OFF

[Y10]
ON
OFF
BUSY signal
[XC,XD,XE,XF]


[X14,X15,X16,X17]
by stop command.
OFF
ON
Axis stop signal (stop command)
(Either Y4,Y5,Y6 or Y7)
OFF
ON
Md.31 Status: b0
OFF
9 - 79
MELSEC-Q

control" setting

is maintained.
In speed control
t
In speed control
In speed control
t
t
0
Restrictions
9 - 80
MELSEC-Q
(4) When either of four axes exceeds the speed limit, that axis is controlled with
(Examples)
Axis
Setting item
Axis 1
setting
Axis 2
setting
Axis 3
setting
Axis 4
setting
Pr.8
Speed limit
value
4000.00mm/ 5000.00mm/ 6000.00mm/ 8000.00mm/

min
min
min
min
Da.8
Command
speed
8000.00mm/ 6000.00mm/ 4000.00mm/ 1500.00mm/

min
min
min
min
follows.
Axis 2: 3000.00 mm/min (Speed is limited at ratios in axes 1, 2, 3 and 4
command speeds).
command speeds).
command speeds).
(5) An error "No command speed (error code: 503)" will occur if a current speed
(-1) is set in " Da.8 Command speed".
"degree".
9 - 81
MELSEC-Q

axis).
Axis
Setting item
Setting details
Positioning
complete
Setting other than "Positioning

complete" is not possible in
speed control.
Da.2 Control system
Forward run
speed 4

Acceleration time
Da.3
No.
Axis 1
Axis 2
Axis 3
Axis 4
example
example
example
example
Da.4
Deceleration time
No.

start.

deceleration.
Da.5
Axis to be
interpolated

Da.6
movement amount


6000.00
mm/min
3000.00
mm/min
2000.00
mm/min
1000.00
mm/min
Da.7 Arc address

Da.8 Command speed
Da.9 Dwell time
Da.10 M code
10
Set the speed to be

commanded.
(" Pr.18 M code ON signal
output timing" setting only
possible in the WITH mode.)
9 - 82
MELSEC-Q
9.2.16 Speed-position switching control (INC mode)

In "speed-position switching control (INC mode)" (" Da.2 Control system = Forward
run: speed/position, Reverse run: speed/position), the pulses of the speed set in
" Da.8 Command speed" are kept output on the axial direction set to the positioning
data. When the "speed-position switching signal" is input, position control of the
movement amount set in " Da.6 Positioning address/movement amount" is exercised.
"Speed-position switching control (INC mode)" is available in two different types:
"forward run: speed/position" which starts the axis in the forward run direction and
"reverse run: speed/position" which starts the axis in the reverse run direction.
Use the detailed parameter 1 "Pr.200 Speed-position function selection" with regard to
the choice for "speed-position switching control (INC mode)".
Setting item
Pr.200
Speedposition
function
selection
Setting
value
0
Setting details


(INC mode)
34
184
334
484
If the set value is other than 0 and 2, it is regarded as 0 and operation is performed in the
INC mode.
For details of the setting, refer to Sections 5.2 "List of parameters".
Switching over from speed control to position control

(1) The control is switched over from speed control to position control by the
external signal "speed-position switching signal".
(2) Besides setting the positioning data, the " Cd.24 Speed-position switching
enable flag" must also be turned ON to switch over from speed control to
position control. (If the " Cd.24 Speed-position switching enable flag" turns
ON after the speed-position switching signal turns ON, the control will continue
as speed control without switching over to position control. Only position
control will be carried out when the " Cd.24 Speed-position switching enable
flag" and speed-position switching signal are ON at the operation start.)
9 - 83
MELSEC-Q
Operation chart
The following chart (Fig.9.13) shows the operation timing for speed-position
switching control (INC mode). The "in speed control flag" ( Md.31 Status: b0) is
turned ON during speed control of speed-position switching control (INC mode).
V
Da. 8 Command speed

Movement amount set in " Da. 6
amount"
t
Dwell time
ON
OFF
[Y10,Y11,Y12,Y13]
ON
OFF
BUSY signal
[XC,XD,XE,XF]
ON
OFF

[X14,X15,X16,X17]
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Md. 31 Status: b0
OFF
Fig. 9.13 Speed-position switching control (INC mode) operation timing
9 - 84
MELSEC-Q
[Operation example]
The following operation assumes that the speed-position switching signal is input at the position of the
current feed value of 90.00000 [degree] during execution of " Da.2 Control system" "Forward run:
speed/position" at " Pr.1 Unit setting" of "2: degree" and " Pr.21 Current feed value during speed
control" setting of "1: Update current feed value".
(The value set in " Da.6 Positioning address/movement amount" is 270.00000 [degree])
0.00000
Speed-position
switching signal ON
0.00000
90.00000
90.00000
90.00000+270.00000
=360.00000
=Stop at 0.00000 [degree]
9 - 85
MELSEC-Q
Operation timing and processing time during speed-position switching

control (INC mode)
Positioning start
BUSY signal
[XC,XD,XE,XF]
t1
M code ON signal
[X4,X5,X6,X7](WITH mode)
t2

[X10,X11,X12,X13]
Standing by
In speed control
Speed
control
In position control
t3
Standing by
Position
control
t4
Speed control carried out until speed-position switching
signal turns ON
External speed-position
switching command
t6
Position control movement amount is from the input position of

the external speed-position switching signal
Cd. 23 Speed-position switching

change register
t5

[X14,X15,X16,X17]
t7
M code ON signal (AFTER mode)

[X4,X5,X6,X7]
t2
OPR complete flag

Md.31 Status: b4
Fig. 9.14 Operation timing and processing time during speed-position switching control (INC mode)
Normal timing time
Unit: ms
t1
t2
t3
t4
t5
t6
t7
1.1
0 to 3.5
0 to 3.5
5.5 to 7.9
0 to 3.5
1.0
Follows parameters
The t1 timing time could be delayed by the operation state of other axes.
9 - 86
MELSEC-Q
Current feed value during speed-position switching control (INC mode)

The following table shows the " Md.20 Current feed value" during speed-position
switching control (INC mode) corresponding to the " Pr.21
Current feed value
during speed control" settings.

Pr.21
speed control" setting

The current feed value at control start is maintained during
0: Do not update current feed value speed control, and updated from the switching to position
control.
Speed control
The current feed value is updated during speed control

and position control.
The current feed value is cleared (set to "0") at control

start, and updated from the switching to position control.
Position control
Speed control
Position control
Maintained
Position control
Updated
Updated
Speed control
Updated from 0
Switching time from speed control to position control

There is 1ms from the time the speed-position switching signal is turned ON to the
time the speed-position switching latch flag ( Md.31 Status: b1) turns ON.
ON
OFF
Speed-position switching latch flag
OFF
ON
1ms
9 - 87
MELSEC-Q
Speed-position switching signal setting

The following table shows the items that must be set to use the external command
signals (CHG) as speed-position switching signals.
Setting
value
Setting item
Pr.42
Cd.8
External
command
function
selection
External
command
valid
Setting details
Set the "2: speed-position and

position-speed switching
requests".
Set "1: Validate external

command".

62
212
362
512
1505
1605
1705
1805
Refer to Sections 5.2 "List of parameters" and Section 5.7 "List of control data" for information on the
setting details.
Changing the position control movement amount

In "speed-position switching control (INC mode)", the position control movement
amount can be changed during the speed control section.
(1) The position control movement amount can be changed during the speed
control section of speed-position switching control (INC mode).
A movement amount change request will be ignored unless issued during the
speed control section of the speed-position switching control (INC mode).
(2) The "new movement amount" is stored in " Cd.23 Speed-position switching
control movement amount change register" by the PLC program during speed
control.
When the speed-position switching signal is turned ON, the movement amount
for position control is stored in " Cd.23 Speed-position switching control
movement amount change register".
(3) The movement amount is stored in the " Md.29 Speed-position switching
control positioning amount" of the axis monitor area from the point where the
control changes to position control by the input of a speed-position switching
signal from an external source.
Speed control
Position control
Speed-position switching control (INC mode) start
t
Movement amount
change possible
ON
OFF
Setting after the speed-position
switching signal ON is ignored
0
Cd.23 Speed-position switching control,

P2
P3
P2 becomes the position control movement amount

Md.31 Status : b1
ON
OFF
Fig. 9.15 Position control movement amount change timing

9 - 88
MELSEC-Q
POINT
The machine recognizes the presence of a movement amount change request when the data is
written to " Cd.23 Speed-position switching control movement amount change register" with the
PLC program.
The new movement amount is validated after execution of the speed-position switching control (INC
mode), before the input of the speed-position switching signal.
The movement amount change can be enable/disable with the interlock function in position control
using the speed-position switching latch flag ( Md.31 Status : b1) of the axis monitor area.
Restrictions
(1) An axis error (error code: 516) will occur and the operation cannot start if
"continuous positioning control" or "continuous path control" is set in " Da.1
Operation pattern".
(2) "Speed-position switching control" cannot be set in " Da.2 Control system" of
the positioning data when "continuous path control" has been set in " Da.1
Operation pattern" of the immediately prior positioning data. (For example, if
the operation pattern of positioning data No. 1 is "continuous path control",
"speed-position switching control" cannot be set in positioning data No. 2.) An
axis error (error code: 516) will occur and the machine will carry out a
(3) An error (error code: 503) will occur if "current speed (-1)" is set in " Da.8
command speed".
(4) The software stroke limit range check during speed control is made only when
the following (a) and (b) are satisfied:
(a) " Pr.21 Current feed value during speed control" is "1: Update current feed
value".
If the movement amount exceeds the software stroke limit range during
speed control in case of the setting of other than "1: Update current feed
value", an error (error code: 507 or 508) will occur as soon as speed control
is changed to position control and the axis will decelerate to a stop.
(b) When " Pr.1 Unit setting" is other than "2: degree"
If the unit is "degree", the software stroke limit range check is not performed.
(5) If the value set in " Da.6 Positioning address/movement amount" is negative,
an error (error code: 530) will occur.
(6) Deceleration processing is carried out from the point where the speed-position
switching signal is input if the position control movement amount set in
" Da.6 Positioning address/movement amount" is smaller than the
deceleration distance from the " Da.8 Command speed".
(7) Turn ON the speed-position switching signal in the speed stabilization region
(constant speed status). A warning (warning code: 508) will occur because of
large deviation in the droop pulse amount if the signal is turned ON during
acceleration.
During use of the servo motor, the actual movement amount after switching of
speed control to position control is the "preset movement amount + droop
pulse amount". If the signal is turned ON during acceleration/deceleration, the
stop position will vary due to large variation of the droop pulse amount. Even
though " Md.29 Speed-position switching control positioning amount" is the
same, the stop position will change due to a change in droop pulse amount
when " Da.8 Command speed" is different.
9 - 89
MELSEC-Q

The following table shows setting examples when "speed-position switching
control (INC mode) by forward run" is set in positioning data No. 1 of axis 1.
Setting item
Setting example
Positioning
complete
Da.2 Control system
Forward run:
speed/position
1
Setting details
Set "Positioning complete" assuming the next positioning data will
not be executed. ("Continuous path control" cannot be set in
"speed-position switching control (INC mode)".)
Set speed-position switching control by forward run.


Da.5
Axis to be
interpolated
Da.6
movement amount
Da.7 Arc address
Da.8 Command speed
Da.9 Dwell time
Da.10 M code
10000.0m
Setting not required. (Setting value is ignored.)

INC mode ( Pr.200 = 0)
Set the movement amount after the switching to position control.
(Assuming that the " Pr.1 Unit setting" is set to "mm".)
6000.00mm/min Set the speed to be controlled.

500ms
10
Set a time from the positioning stop (pulse output stop) by position
control until the positioning complete signal is output. When the
system is stopped by speed control, ignore the setting value.
9 - 90
MELSEC-Q
9.2.17 Speed-position switching control (ABS mode)

In case of "speed-position switching control (ABS mode)" (" Da.2 Control system =
Forward run: speed/position, Reverse run: speed/position), the pulses of the speed set
in " Da.8 Command speed" are kept output in the axial direction set to the positioning
data. When the "speed-position switching signal" is input, position control to the
address set in " Da.6 Positioning address/movement amount" is exercised.
"Speed-position switching control (ABS mode)" is available in two different types:
"forward run: speed/position" which starts the axis in the forward run direction and
"reverse run: speed/position" which starts the axis in the reverse run direction.
"Speed-position switching control (ABS mode)" is valid only when " Pr.1 Unit setting"
is "2: degree".
Pr.1 Unit setting
mm
Speed-position
function selection
inch
degree
PLS
INC mode
ABS mode
: Setting allowed,
: Setting disallowed (If setting is made, an error (error code: 935) will occur when the PLC
READY signal (Y0) turns ON.)
Use the detailed parameter 1 "Pr.200 Speed-position function selection" to choose

"speed-position switching control (ABS mode)".
Setting item
Pr.200
Speedposition
function
selection
Setting
value
2
Setting details

(ABS mode)

34
184
334
484
If the set value is other than 0 and 2, it is regarded as 0 and operation is performed in the INC
mode.
For details of the setting, refer to Sections 5.2 "List of parameters".
Switching over from speed control to position control

(1) The control is switched over from speed control to position control by the
external signal "speed-position switching signal".
(2) Besides setting the positioning data, the " Cd.24 Speed-position switching
enable flag" must also be turned ON to switch over from speed control to
position control. (If the " Cd.24 Speed-position switching enable flag" turns
ON after the speed-position switching signal turns ON, the control will continue
as speed control without switching over to position control. Only position
control will be carried out when the " Cd.24 Speed-position switching enable
flag" and speed-position switching signal are ON at the operation start.)
9 - 91
MELSEC-Q
Operation chart
The following chart (Fig.9.16) shows the operation timing for speed-position
switching control (ABS mode). The "in speed control flag" ( Md.31 Status: b0) is
turned ON during speed control of speed-position switching control (ABS mode).
V
Da. 8 Command speed

Address set in " Da. 6
amount"
t
Dwell time
ON
OFF
[Y10,Y11,Y12,Y13]
ON
OFF
BUSY signal
[XC,XD,XE,XF]
ON
OFF

[X14,X15,X16,X17]
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Md. 31 Status: b0
OFF
Fig. 9.16 Speed-position switching control (ABS mode) operation timing
9 - 92
MELSEC-Q
[Operation example]
The following operation assumes that the speed-position switching signal is input at the position of the
current feed value of 90.00000 [degree] during execution of " Da.2 Control system" "Forward run:
speed/position" at " Pr.1 Unit setting" of "2: degree" and " Pr.21 Current feed value during speed
control" setting of "1: Update current feed value".
(The value set in " Da.6 Positioning address/movement amount" is 270.00000 [degree])
0.00000
Speed-position
switching signal ON
90.00000
0.00000
270.00000
90.00000
Stop at 270.00000 [degree]
9 - 93
MELSEC-Q
Operation timing and processing time during speed-position switching

control (ABS mode)
Positioning start
BUSY signal
[XC,XD,XE,XF]
t1
M code ON signal
t2

[X10,X11,X12,X13]
Standing by
In speed control
Speed
control
In position control
t3
Standing by
Position
control
t4
Speed control carried out until speed-position switching
External speed-position
switching command
signal turns ON
t6
t5

[X14,X15,X16,X17]
t7
M code ON signal (AFTER mode)

[X4,X5,X6,X7]
t2
OPR complete flag

Md.31 Status: b4
Fig. 9.17 Operation timing and processing time during speed-position switching control (ABS mode)
Normal timing time
Unit: ms
t1
t2
t3
t4
t5
t6
t7
1.1
0 to 3.5
0 to 3.5
5.5 to 7.9
0 to 3.5
1.0
Follows parameters
9 - 94
MELSEC-Q
Current feed value during speed-position switching control (ABS mode)

The following table shows the " Md.20 Current feed value" during speed-position
switching control (ABS mode) corresponding to the " Pr.21
Current feed value
during speed control" settings.

" Pr.21

The current feed value is updated during speed control
and position control.
Only "1: Update current value" is valid for the setting of " Pr.21 Current feed value
during speed control" in speed-position switching control (ABS mode).
An error (error code: 935) will occur if the " Pr.21 Current feed value during
speed control" setting is other than 1.
Speed
Speed control
Position control
Updated
Current feed value updated
Switching time from speed control to position control

There is 1ms from the time the speed-position switching signal is turned ON to the
time the speed-position switching latch flag ( Md.31 Status: b1) turns ON.
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
1ms
9 - 95
MELSEC-Q
Speed-position switching signal setting

signals (CHG) as speed-position switching signals.
Setting item
Pr.42
Cd.8
External
command
function
selection
External
command
valid
Setting
value
Setting details

requests".

command".

62
212
362
512
1505
1605
1705
1805
setting details.
9 - 96
MELSEC-Q
Restrictions
"continuous positioning control" or "continuous path control" is set in " Da.1
Operation pattern".
(2) "Speed-position switching control" cannot be set in " Da.2 Control system" of
the positioning data when "continuous path control" has been set in " Da.1
"speed-position switching control" cannot be set in positioning data No. 2.) An
axis error (error code: 516) will occur and the machine will carry out a
(3) An error (error code: 503) will occur if "current speed (-1)" is set in " Da.8
command speed".
(5) Even though the axis control data " Cd.23 Speed-position switching control
movement amount change register" was set in speed-position switching
control (ABS mode), it would not function. The set value is ignored.
(6) To exercise speed-position switching control (ABS mode), the following
conditions must be satisfied:
(a) " Pr.1 Unit setting" is "2: degree"
(b) The software stroke limit function is invalid (upper limit value = lower limit
value)
(c) " Pr.21 Current feed value during speed control" is "1: Update current
feed value"
(d) The " Da.6 Positioning address/movement amount" setting range is 0 to
359.99999 (degree)
If the value is outside of the range 0 to 359.99999 (degree), an error (error
code: 530) will occur at a start.
(e) The "Pr.200 Speed-position function selection" setting is "2: Speedposition switching control (ABS mode)".
(7) If any of the conditions in (6)(a) to (6)(c) is not satisfied in the case of (6)(e), an
error (error code: 935) will occur when the PLC READY signal [Y0] turns from
OFF to ON.
(8) If the axis reaches the positioning address midway through deceleration after
automatic deceleration started at the input of the speed-position switching
signal, the axis will not stop immediately at the positioning address. The axis
will stop at the positioning address after N revolutions so that automatic
deceleration can always be made. (N: Natural number)
In this case, make the movement amount after speed-position switching signal
input within 21474.83647 (degree). If the movement amount exceeds
21474.83647 (degree), make the movement amount smaller by reducing the
command speed or shortening the deceleration time, for example.
In the following example, since making deceleration in the path of dotted line
will cause the axis to exceed the positioning addresses twice, the axis will
decelerate to a stop at the third positioning address.
9 - 97
MELSEC-Q
360 added
360 added
positioning address
positioning address
positioning address

The following table shows setting examples when "speed-position switching
control (ABS mode) by forward run" is set in positioning data No. 1 of axis 1.
Setting item
Da.2 Control system
Setting example
Setting details
Positioning
complete
Set "Positioning complete" assuming the next positioning data will

not be executed. ("Continuous path control" cannot be set in "speedposition switching control (ABS mode)".)
Forward run:
Set speed-position switching control by forward run.
speed/position
1

Da.4
Da.5
Deceleration time
No.
Axis to be
interpolated
Da.6
movement amount
Da.7 Arc address
Da.8 Command speed
Da.9 Dwell time
Da.10 M code
270.00000
degree

ABS mode ( Pr.200 = 2)
Set the address after the switching to position control. (Assuming
that the " Pr.1 Unit setting" is set to "mm".)

500ms
10
Set a time from the positioning stop (pulse output stop) by position
control until the positioning complete signal is output. When the
system is stopped by speed control, ignore the setting value.
9 - 98
MELSEC-Q
9.2.18 Position-speed switching control

In "position-speed switching control" (" Da.2 Control system" = Forward run:
position/speed, Reverse run: position/speed), before the position-speed switching
signal is input, position control is carried out for the movement amount set in
" Da.6 Positioning address/movement amount" in the axis direction in which the
positioning data has been set. When the position-speed switching signal is input, the
position control is carried out by continuously outputting the pulses for the speed set in
" Da.8 command speed" until the input of a stop command.
The two types of position-speed switching control are "Forward run: position/speed" in
which the control starts in the forward run direction, and "Reverse run: position/speed"
in which control starts in the reverse run direction.
Switching over from position control to speed control

(1) The control is switched over from position control to speed control by the
external signal "position-speed switching signal".
(2) Besides setting the positioning data, the " Cd.26 Position-speed switching
enable flag" must also be turned ON to switch over from position control to
speed control. (If the " Cd.26 Position-speed switching enable flag" turns ON
after the position-speed switching signal turns ON, the control will continue as
position control without switching over to speed control. Only speed control will
be carried out when the " Cd.26 Position-speed switching enable flag" and
position-speed switching signal are ON at the operation start.)
9 - 99
MELSEC-Q
Operation chart
The following chart shows the operation timing for position-speed switching
control.
The "in speed control" flag ( Md.31 Status: b0) is turned ON during speed control
of position-speed switching control.
V
Da. 8 Command speed
t
Position
control
Speed control
ON
[Y10,Y11,Y12,Y13]
OFF
ON
BUSY signal
[XC,XD,XE,XF]

[X14,X15,X16,X17]
OFF
by stop command.
OFF
ON
Position-speed
switching signal
OFF
ON

enable flag
Stop command
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Md.31 Status: b0
Fig. 9.18 Position-speed switching control operation timing
9 - 100
MELSEC-Q
Operation timing and processing time during position-speed switching

control

[Y10,Y11,Y12,Y13]
BUSY signal [XC,XD,XE,XF]
t1
M code ON signal
t2
Start complete signal [X10,X11,X12,X13]

t3
Md.26
Standing by
In position control
In speed control
Position
Speed
control
control
Standing by
t4
Position control carried out until position-speed switching

signal turns ON.
External position-speed switching

command
t6
Speed control command speed is from the input position of

the external position-speed switching signal.

control speed change register

[X14,X15,X16,X17]
M code ON signal [X4,X5,X6,X7]
(AFTER mode)
t2
OPR complete flag

Md.31 Status: b4
Stop signal
[STOP]
Fig. 9.19 Operation timing and processing time during position-speed switching control
Normal timing time
Unit: ms
t1
t2
t3
t4
t5
t6
1.0 to 1.4
0 to 3.5
0 to 3.5
5.5 to 7.9
1.0
9 - 101
MELSEC-Q
Current feed value during position-speed switching control

The following table shows the " Md.20 Current feed value" during position-speed
switching control corresponding to the " Pr.21
Current feed value during speed
control" settings.
" Pr.21

The current feed value is updated during position control,
and the current feed value at the time of switching is
maintained as soon as position control is switched to
speed control.
The current feed value is updated during position control

and speed control.
The current feed value is updated from 0 at a control start,

and the current feed value is cleared (to "0") as soon as
position control is switched to speed control.
Position control
Speed control
Position control
Updated
Position control
Speed control
Maintained
Speed control
Updated
Updated from 0
Switching time from position control to speed control

There is 1ms from the time the position-speed switching signal is turned ON to the
time the position-speed switching latch flag ( Md.31 Status: b5) turns ON.
ON
Position-speed switching signal
OFF
ON
Position-speed switching latch flag
OFF
1ms
9 - 102
MELSEC-Q
Position-speed switching signal setting

signals (CHG) as position-speed switching signals.
Setting
value
Setting item
Pr.42
Cd.8
External
command
function
selection
External
command
valid
Setting details

requests".

command".

62
212
362
512
1505
1605
1705
1805
setting details.
Changing the speed control command speed

In "position-speed switching control", the speed control command speed can be
changed during the position control.
(1) The speed control command speed can be changed during the position control
of position-speed switching control.
A command speed change request will be ignored unless issued during the
position control of the position-speed switching control.
(2) The "new command speed" is stored in " Cd.25 Position-speed switching
control speed change register" by the PLC program during position control.
This value then becomes the speed control command speed when the
position-speed switching signal turns ON.
Position
control
Speed
control
Position-speed switching control start
t
Speed change
enable
ON
signal
OFF
Setting after the position-speed

switching signal ON is ignored.
Cd.25 Position-speed
switching control
speed change register
V2
V3
V2 becomes the speed control command speed.

ON
OFF
latch flag
Md.31 Status: b5
Stop signal
ON
OFF
Fig. 9.20 Speed control speed change timing
9 - 103
MELSEC-Q
POINTS
The machine recognizes the presence of a command speed change request when the data is
written to " Cd.25 Position-speed switching control speed change register" with the PLC program.
The new command speed is validated after execution of the position-speed switching control before
the input of the position-speed switching signal.
The command speed change can be enabled/disabled with the interlock function in speed control
using the "position-speed switching latch flag" ( Md.31 Status: b5) of the axis monitor area.
Restrictions
"continuous positioning control" or "continuous path control" is set in
" Da.1 Operation pattern".
(2) "Position-speed switching control" cannot be set in " Da.2 Control system" of
the positioning data when "continuous path control" has been set in
" Da.1 Operation pattern" of the immediately prior positioning data. (For
example, if the operation pattern of positioning data No. 1 is "continuous path
control", "position-speed switching control" cannot be set in positioning data
No. 2.) An axis error (error code: 516) will occur and the machine will carry
out a deceleration stop if this type of setting is carried out.
(3) The software stroke limit range is only checked during speed control if the "1:
Update current feed value" is set in " Pr.21 Current feed value during speed
control".
The software stroke limit range is not checked when the control unit is set to
"degree".
(4) An error (error code: 507 or 508) will occur and the operation cannot start if
the start point address or end point address for position control exceeds the
software stroke limit range.
(5) Deceleration stop will be carried out if the position-speed switching signal is
not input before the machine is moved by a specified movement amount.
When the position-speed switching signal is input during automatic
deceleration by positioning control, acceleration is carried out again to the
command speed to continue speed control.
When the position-speed switching signal is input during deceleration to a stop
with the stop signal, the control is switched to the speed control to stop the
machine.
Restart is carried out by speed control using the restart command.
(6) A warning (warning code: 501) will occur and control is continued by
" Pr.8 Speed limit value" if a new speed exceeds " Pr.8 Speed limit value" at
the time of change of the command speed.
9 - 104
MELSEC-Q

The following table shows setting examples when "position-speed switching
control (forward run: position/speed)" is set in positioning data No. 1 of axis 1.
Setting item
Setting example
Setting details
Positioning
complete
be executed. ("Continuous positioning control" and "Continuous path
control" cannot be set in "position/speed changeover control".)
Da.2 Control system

Forward run:
Set position-speed switching control.
position/speed
1


Da.5
Axis to be
interpolated
Da.6
movement amount
10000.0m

Set the movement amount at the time of position control before the
switching to speed control. (Assuming that the " Pr.1 Unit setting" is
set to "mm".)
Da.7 Arc address

Da.8 Command speed
Da.9 Dwell time
Da.10 M code
500ms
10
output stop) by position control to the output of the positioning
complete signal. If the machine is stopped by speed control, the
setting value will be ignored.
9 - 105
MELSEC-Q
9.2.19 Current value changing

When the current value is changed to a new value, control is carried out in which the
" Md.20 Current feed value" of the stopped axis is changed to a random address set
by the user. (The " Md.21 Machine feed value" is not changed when the current value
is changed.)
The two methods for changing the current value are shown below.
[1] Changing to a new current value using the positioning data
[2] Changing to a new current value using the start No. (No. 9003) for a current
value changing
The current value changing using method [1] is used during continuous positioning of
multiple blocks, etc.
[1] Changing to a new current value using the positioning data

Operation chart
The following chart shows the operation timing for a current value changing. The
" Md.20 Current feed value" is changed to the value set in " Da.6 Positioning
address/movement amount" when the positioning start signal turns ON.
ON
[Y10,Y11,Y12,Y13]
OFF
50000
Current feed value changes to the

positioning address designated by the
positioning data of the current value changing.
The above chart shows an example
when the positioning address is "0".
Restrictions
(1) An axis error "New current value not possible (error code: 515)" will occur and
the operation cannot start if "continuous path control" is set in " Da.1
Operation pattern". ("Continuous path control" cannot be set in current value
changing.)
(2) "Current value changing" cannot be set in " Da.2 Control system" of the
positioning data when "continuous path control" has been set in " Da.1
"current value changing" cannot be set in positioning data No. 2.) An axis error
"New current value invalid (error code: 515)" will occur and the machine will
carry out a deceleration stop if this type of setting is carried out.
(3) An axis error "Outside new current value range (error code: 514)" will occur
and the operation cannot start if "degree" is set in " Pr.1 Unit setting" and the
value set in " Da.6 Positioning address/movement amount (0 to 359.99999
[degree])" is outside the setting range.
9 - 106
MELSEC-Q
(4) If the value set in " Da.6 Positioning address/movement amount" is outside
the software stroke limit ( Pr.12 , Pr.13 ) setting range, an error "Software
stroke limit +, - (error code: 507 or 508)" will occur at the positioning start, and
the operation will not start.
(5) An error (error code: 507 or 508) will occur if the new current value is outside
the software stroke limit range.

The following table shows the setting examples when " current value changing" is
set in the positioning data No. 1 of axis 1.
Setting item
Axis 1
positioning
data No. 1
Setting example
Setting details
Set "Positioning complete" assuming that

the next positioning data will be executed.
("Continuous path control" cannot be set by
current value change.)
Da.1
Operation
pattern
Da.2
Control
system
Da.3
Acceleration
time No.
Setting not required (Setting value is

ignored.)
Da.4
Deceleration
time No.

ignored.)
Da.5
Axis to be
interpolated

ignored.)
Da.6
Positioning
address/
movement
amount
10000.0
Set the current value changing.
Set the address to which address change is

desired. (Assuming that the " Pr.1 Unit
Da.7
Arc address

ignored.)
Da.8
Command
speed

ignored.)
Da.9
Dwell time

ignored.)
Da.10
M code
10
Set this when other sub operation

commands are issued in combination with
the No. 1 positioning data.
9 - 107
MELSEC-Q
[2] Changing to a new current value using the start No. (No. 9003) for
a current value changing
Operation chart
The current value is changed by setting the new current value in the current value
changing buffer memory " Cd.9 Current value changing", setting "9003" in the
" Cd.3 Positioning start No.", and turning ON the positioning start signal.
ON
OFF
[Y10,Y11,Y12,Y13]
50000
0
Current value changes to the
positioning address designated by
the current value changing buffer memory.
The above chart shows an example
when the positioning address is "0".
Restrictions
(1) An axis error "Outside new current value range (error code: 514)" will occur if
the designated value is outside the setting range when "degree" is set in "Unit
setting".
(2) An error "Software stroke limit +, (error code: 507 or 508)" will occur if the
designated value is outside the software stroke limit range.
(3) The current value cannot be changed during stop commands and while the M
code ON signal is ON.
(4) The M code output function is made invalid.
Current value changing procedure

The following shows the procedure for changing the current value to a new value.
1) Write the current value to " Cd. 9 Current value changing"
2)
3)
Write "9003" in " Cd. 3 Positioning start No."
Turn ON the positioning start signal.
9 - 108
MELSEC-Q
Setting method for the current value changing function

The following shows an example of a PLC program and data setting to change the
current value to a new value with the positioning start signal. (The " Md.20
Current feed value is changed to "5000.0m" in the example shown.)
(1) Set the following data.
(Set with the PLC program shown in (3), while referring to the start time chart
shown in (2).)
Setting item
Setting
value
Setting details
Set the start No. "9003" for the new current value.
Cd.3
9003
Cd .9
50000
Set the new " Md.20
Current feed value".

1500
1600
1700
1800
1506
1507
1606
1607
1706
1707
1806
1807
(2) The following shows a start time chart.

V
Start of data No. 9003
t
[Y10]
PLC READY signal
[Y0]
QD75 READY signal
[X0]
[X10]
BUSY signal
[XC]
Positioning complete signal [X14]

[X8]
Cd.9 Current value changing
Address during positioning execution
50000
Data No. during positioning execution
9003
50000
Fig. 9.21 Changing to a new current value using the start No. (No. 9003) for a current value changing
9 - 109
MELSEC-Q
(3) Add the following PLC program to the control program, and write it to the PLC
CPU.
Example
Store new current feed value in D106 and D107
<Pulsate current value changing command>

<Write current value changing to the QD75>
<Write the current value changing (9003)>
<Execute current value changing>
<Turn OFF positioning start signal>
9 - 110
MELSEC-Q
9.2.20 NOP instruction

The NOP instruction is used for the nonexecutable control system.
Operation
The positioning data No. to which the NOP instruction is set transfers, without any
processing, to the operation for the next positioning data No.

The following table shows the setting examples when "NOP instruction" is set in
positioning data No. 1 of axis 1.
Setting item
Setting example
Setting details
Setting not required (Setting
value is ignored.)
Da.1
Operation
pattern
Da.2
Control
system
Da.3
Acceleration
time No.

value is ignored.)
Da.4
Deceleration
time No.

value is ignored.)
Da.5
Axis to be
interpolated

value is ignored.)
Positioning
address/
movement
amount

value is ignored.)

value is ignored.)
Command
speed

value is ignored.)
Da.9 Dwell time

value is ignored.)
Da.10 M code

value is ignored.)
Axis 1
positioning
data No. 1 Da.6
NOP instruction
Da.7 Arc address

Da.8
Set the NOP instruction
Restrictions
An error "Control system setting error (error code: 524)" will occur if the "NOP
instruction" is set for the control system of the positioning data No. 600.
POINT
<Use example of NOP instruction>
If there is a possibility of speed switching or temporary stop (automatic deceleration) at a point
between two points during positioning, that data can be reserved with the NOP instruction to change
the data merely by the replacement of the identifier.
9 - 111
MELSEC-Q
9.2.21 JUMP instruction

The JUMP instruction is used to control the operation so it jumps to a positioning data
No. set in the positioning data during "continuous positioning control" or "continuous
path control".
JUMP instruction include the following two types of JUMP.
(1) Unconditional JUMP
When no execution conditions are set for the JUMP instruction
(When "0" is set as the condition data No.)
(2) Conditional JUMP
When execution conditions are set for the JUMP instruction
(The conditions are set in the "condition data" used with "high-level positioning
control".)
Using the JUMP instruction enables repeating of the same positioning control, or
selection of positioning data by the execution conditions during "continuous positioning
control" or "continuous path control".
Operation
(1) Unconditional JUMP
The JUMP instruction is unconditionally executed. The operation jumps to the
positioning data No. set in " Da.9 Dwell time".
(2) Conditional JUMP
The block start condition data is used as the JUMP instruction execution
conditions.
When block positioning data No. 7000 to 7004 is started:
Each block condition data is used.
When positioning data No. 1 to 600 is started:
Start block 0 condition data is used.
When the execution conditions set in " Da.10 M code" of the JUMP
instruction have been established:
the JUMP instruction is executed to jump the operation to the positioning
data No. set in " Da.9 Dwell time".
When
the execution conditions set in " Da.10 M code" of the JUMP
instruction have not been established:

the JUMP instruction is ignored, and the next positioning data No. is
executed.
Restrictions
(1) When using a conditional JUMP instruction, establish the JUMP instruction
execution conditions by the 4th positioning data No. before the JUMP
instruction positioning data No..
If the JUMP instruction execution conditions are not established by the time
the 4th positioning control is carried out before the JUMP instruction
positioning data No., the operation will be processed as an operation without
established JUMP instruction execution conditions.
(During execution of continuous path control/continuous positioning control,
the QD75 calculates the positioning data of the positioning data No. four items
ahead of the current positioning data.)
9 - 112
MELSEC-Q
(2) The operation pattern, if set, is ignored in the JUMP instruction.

(3) Use unconditional JUMP instructions when setting JUMP instructions at the
end of continuous path control/continuous positioning control.
When conditional JUMP instructions are set at the end of continuous path
control/continuous positioning control, the positioning data of the next
positioning data No. will be executed if the execution conditions have not been
established.
(4) Positioning control such as loops cannot be executed by conditional JUMP
instructions alone until the conditions have been established.

The following table shows setting examples when "JUMP instruction" is set in
positioning data No. 1 of axis 1.
Setting item
Setting example
Da.2 Control system
Setting details
JUMP instruction Set the JUMP instruction.
Da.5
Axis to be
interpolated
Da.6
movement amount
Da.7 Arc address
Da.8 Command speed
Da.9 Dwell time
Da.10 M code
500
Set the positioning data No. 1 to 600 for the JUMP destination. (The
positioning data No. of the JUMP instruction cannot be set. Setting
its own positioning data No. will result in an error "Illegal data No."
(error code: 502).)
Set the JUMP instruction execution conditions with the condition
data No.
0
: Unconditional JUMP
1 to 10 : Condition data No.
("Simultaneous start" condition data cannot be set.)
9 - 113
MELSEC-Q
9.2.22 LOOP
The LOOP is used for loop control by the repetition of LOOP to LEND.
Operation
The LOOP to LEND loop is repeated by set repeat cycles.

The following table shows the setting examples when "LOOP" is set in positioning
data No. 1 of axis 1.
Setting item
Setting example
Da.2 Control system
LOOP
Setting details
Set the LOOP.
Da.7 Arc address
Da.8 Command speed
Da.9 Dwell time
Da.10 M code
Set the LOOP to LEND repeat cycles.
Da.6
movement amount
Restrictions
(1) An error "Control system LOOP setting error (error code: 545)" will occur if a
"0" is set for the repeat cycles.
(2) Even if LEND is absent after LOOP, no error will occur, but repeat processing
will not be carried out.
(3) Nesting is not allowed between LOOP-LEND's. If such setting is made, only the
inner LOOP-LEND is processed repeatedly.
POINT
The setting by this control system is easier than that by the special start "FOR loop" of "High-level
Positioning Control" (refer to Chapter 10).
<Setting data>
For special start: Positioning start data, special start data, condition data, and positioning data
For control system : Positioning data
For the special start FOR to NEXT, the positioning data is required for each of FOR and NEXT
points. For the control system, loop can be executed even only by one data.
Also, nesting is enabled by using the control system LOOP to LEND in combination with the special
start FOR to NEXT.
However LOOP to LEND cannot be set across block. Always set LOOP to LEND so that the
processing ends within one block.
(For details of the "block", refer to Section 10.1 "Outline of high-level positioning control".)
9 - 114
MELSEC-Q
9.2.23 LEND
The LEND is used to return the operation to the top of the repeat (LOOP to LEND)
loop.
Operation
When the repeat cycle designated by the LOOP becomes 0, the loop is
terminated, and the next positioning data No. processing is started. (The operation
pattern, if set to "Positioning complete", will be ignored.)
When the operation is stopped after the repeat operation is executed by
designated cycles, the dummy positioning data (for example, incremental
positioning without movement amount) is set next to LEND.
Positioning data
No.
Operation pattern
Control system
Continuous control
ABS2
Positioning
complete
LOOP
Continuous path
control
ABS2
Continuous control
ABS2
Positioning
complete
LEND
Positioning
complete
ABS2
Conditions
Number of loop
cycles: 2
Operation
Executed in the
order of the
positioning data
No. 1
2
3
4
5
2
3
4
5
6.
(The operation
patterns of the
positioning data
Nos. 2 and 5 are
ignored.)

The following table shows the setting examples when "LEND" is set in positioning
data No. 8 of axis 1.
Setting item
Setting example
Da.2 Control system
LEND
Setting details
Set the LEND.
Da.5
Axis to be
interpolated
Da.6
movement amount
Da.7 Arc address
Da.8 Command speed
Da.9 Dwell time
Da.10 M code
Restrictions
(1) Ignore the "LEND" before the "LOOP" is executed.
9 - 115
MELSEC-Q
MEMO
9 - 116
Chapter 10 High-Level Positioning Control
The details and usage of high-level positioning control (control functions using the
"block start data") are explained in this chapter.
High-level positioning control is used to carry out applied control using the "positioning
data". Examples of applied control are using conditional judgment to control
"positioning data" set with the major positioning control, or simultaneously starting
"positioning data" for several different axes.
Read the execution procedures and settings for each control, and set as required.
10
10.1 Outline of high-level positioning control ..................................................................10- 2
10.1.1 Data required for high-level positioning control.........................................10- 3
10.1.2 "Block start data" and "condition data" configuration................................10- 4
10.2 High-level positioning control execution procedure ...............................................10- 6
10.3 Setting the block start data ......................................................................................10- 7
10.3.1 Relation between various controls and block start data ...........................10- 7
10.3.2 Block start (normal start) ...........................................................................10- 8
10.3.3 Condition start ...........................................................................................10- 10
10.3.4 Wait start ...................................................................................................10- 11
10.3.5 Simultaneous start ...................................................................................10- 12
10.3.6 Repeated start (FOR loop) ......................................................................10- 13
10.3.7 Repeated start (FOR condition) ...............................................................10- 14
10.3.8 Restrictions when using the NEXT start...................................................10- 15
10.4 Setting the condition data .......................................................................................10- 16
10.4.1 Relation between various controls and the condition data ......................10- 16
10.4.2 Condition data setting examples ..............................................................10- 19
10.5 Multiple axes simultaneous start control................................................................10- 20
10.6 Start program for high-level positioning control .....................................................10- 23
10.6.1 Starting high-level positioning control.......................................................10- 23
10.6.2 Example of a start program for high-level positioning control .................10- 24
10 - 1
10 HIGH-LEVEL POSITIONING CONTROL
MELSEC-Q
10.1 Outline of high-level positioning control

In "high-level positioning control" the execution order and execution conditions of the
"positioning data" are set to carry out more applied positioning. (The execution order
and execution conditions are set in the "block start data" and "condition data".)
The following applied positioning controls can be carried out with "high-level positioning
control".
control
Details
Block 1 start
(Normal start)
With one start, executes the positioning data in a random block with the set order.
Condition start
Carries out condition judgment set in the "condition data" for the designated
positioning data, and then executes the "block start data".
When the condition is established, the " block start data" is executed.
When not established, that " block start data" is ignored, and the next point's " block
start data" is executed.
Wait start
Carries out condition judgment set in the "condition data" for the designated
positioning data, and then executes the " block start data".
When the condition is established, the " block start data" is executed.
When not established, stops the control until the condition is established. (Waits.)
Simultaneous start
2
Simultaneously executes the positioning data having the No. for the axis designated
with the "condition data". (Outputs pulses at the same timing.)
Repeated start (FOR Repeats the program from the " block start data" set with the "FOR loop" to the "
loop)
block start data" set in "NEXT" for the designated No. of times.
Repeats the program from the " block start data" set with the "FOR condition" to the "
Repeated start (FOR
block start data" set in "NEXT" until the conditions set in the "condition data" are
condition)
established.
High-level positioning control sub functions

"High-level positioning control" uses the "positioning data" set with the "major
positioning control". Refer to Section 3.2.4 "Combination of QD75 main functions
and sub functions" for details on sub functions that can be combined with the
major positioning control.
Note that the sub function Section 12.7.8 "Pre-reading start function" cannot be
used together with "high-level positioning control".
High-level positioning control from peripheral devices

"High-level positioning control" (start of the "block start data") can be executed
from GX Configurator-QP test mode.
Refer to GX Configurator-QP Operating Manual for details on starting of the "block
start data" from GX Configurator-QP.
REMARK
Block 1:
"1 block" is defined as all the data continuing from the positioning data in which
"continuous positioning control" or "continuous path control" is set in the
operation pattern ( Da.1 ) to the positioning data in which "independent
positioning control (Positioning complete)" is set.
Simultaneous start 2:
Besides the simultaneous start of "block start data" system, the "simultaneous
starts" include the "multiple axes simultaneous start control" of control system.
Refer to Section 10.5 "Multiple axis simultaneous start control" for details.
10 - 2
MELSEC-Q
10.1.1 Data required for high-level positioning control

"High-level positioning control" is executed by setting the required items in the "block
start data" and "condition data", then starting that "block start data". Judgment about
whether execution is possible, etc., is carried out at execution using the "condition
data" designated in the "block start data".
"Block start data" can be set for each No. from 7000 to 7004 (called "block Nos."), and
up to 50 points can be set for each axis. (This data is controlled with Nos. called
"points" to distinguish it from the positioning data. For example, the 1st block start data
item is called the "1st point block start data" or "point No. 1 block start data".)
"Condition data" can be set for each No. from 7000 to 7004 (called "block Nos."), and
up to 10 data items can be set for each axis.
The " block start data" and "condition data" are set as 1 set for each block No.
The following table shows an outline of the " block start data" and "condition data"
stored in the QD75.
Block start data
Setting item
Setting details
Da.11
Shape
Set whether to end the control after executing only the "block
start data" of the shape itself, or continue executing the "block
start data" set in the next point.
Da.12
Start data No.
Set the "positioning data No." to be executed.
Da.13
Special start
instruction
Set the method by which the positioning data set in Da.12

will be started.
Da.14
Parameter
Set the conditions by which the start will be executed

according to the commands set in Da.13 . (Designate the
"condition data No." and "No. of repetitions".)
Condition data
Setting item
Setting details
Da.15
Designate the "device", "buffer memory storage details", and

Condition target "positioning data No." elements for which the conditions are
set.
Da.16
Condition
operator
Set the judgment method carried out for the target set
in Da.15 .
Da.17
Address
Set the buffer memory address in which condition judgment is

carried out (only when the details set in Da.15 are "buffer
memory storage details").
Da.18
Parameter 1
Set the required conditions according to the details set in

Da.15 and Da.16 .
Da.19
Parameter 2
Set the required conditions according to the details set in

Da.15 and Da.16 .
10 - 3
MELSEC-Q
10.1.2 "Block start data" and "condition data" configuration

The "block start data" and "condition data" corresponding to "block No. 7000" can be
stored in the buffer memory. (The following drawing shows an example for axis 1.)
50th point
Buffer memory
address
Setting item
2nd point
1st point
Setting item
Setting item
unf [^
Axis 1 block start data
b15
Buffer memory
Buffer memoryaddress
address
26001
b0
b8 b7
26049
26000
Da.12 Positioning data No.
26099
Da.11 Shape
b15
b8 b7
26051
b0
26050
Da.13 Special start Da.14 Parameter

instruction
No.10
Buffer memory
address
Setting item
No.2
No.1
Setting item
Setting item
Axis 1 condition data
b15 b12b11 b8 b7
Buffer memory
address
Buffer memory
address
26110
b0
26100
Da.16 Condition
operator
26101
26102
26103
26104
26105
26106
26107
26108
26109
Blank
Da.17 Address
Da.18 Parameter 1
Da.19 Parameter 2
Blank
26111
26112
26113
26114
26115
26116
26117
26118
26119
26190
26191
26192
26193
26194
26195
26196
26197
26198
26199
Low-order buffer memory

High-order buffer memory
(Same for axis 2, axis 3 and axis 4.)
7000
Block No.
10 - 4
Set in the QD75 with a PLC program

or GX Configurator-QP.
MELSEC-Q
Set in QD75 the " block start data" and "condition data" corresponding to the following
"block Nos. 7001 to 7004" using GX Configurator-QP or the PLC program. (The
following drawing shows an example for axis 1.)
50th point
50th point
Buffer memory
address
Setting item
2nd point
2nd point
Setting item
Setting item
unf [^
b15
b8 b7
Buffer memory
address
Buffer memory
address
1st point
26201
b0
26200
Da12 Positioning data No.
26299
Da11 Shape
b15
b8 b7
26251
b0
26250
Da13 Special start
instruction
Setting item
Setting item
unf [^
26249
1st point
b15
b8 b7
26899
b15
b8 b7
Buffer memory
address
Buffer memory
address
Buffer memory
address
26300
Da15 Condition target
Open
Da17 Address
Da18 Parameter 1
Da19 Parameter 2
Open
26301
26302
26303
26304
26305
26306
26307
26308
26309
No.1
Setting item
26390
Buffer memory
address
Setting item
26310
b0
26311
26312
26313
26314
26315
26316
26317
26318
26319
Buffer memory
address
Setting item
No.2
Setting item
Setting item
Condition
Da16 operater
Da14 Parameter
No.10
b8 b7
26851
b0
26850
b12 b11
26849
26801
b0
Da11 Shape
Da13 Special start

instruction
Setting item
No.1
Buffer memory
address
26800
Da14 Parameter
No.2
Buffer memory
address
Da12 Positioning data No.
No.10
b15
Buffer memory
address
Setting item
26391
26392
26393
26394
26395
26396
26397
26398
26399
b15
b12 b11
b8 b7
26900
Condition
Da16 operater
Da15 Condition target
Open
Da17 Address
Da18 Parameter 1
Da19 Parameter 2
7004
10 - 5
26910
b0
Open
7001
Buffer memory
address
26901
26902
26903
26904
26905
26906
26907
26908
26909
26911
26912
26913
26914
26915
26916
26917
26918
26919
26990
26991
26992
26993
26994
26995
26996
26997
26998
26999
MELSEC-Q
10.2 High-level positioning control execution procedure

High-level positioning control is carried out using the following procedure.
Preparation
STEP 1
Refer to Chapter 9
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
Carry out the "major positioning control" setting.
Set the block start data corresponding to each control.

( Da. 11 to Da. 14 ) required data amount.
"High-level positioning control" executes each control

("major positioning control") set in the positioning data
with the designated conditions,so first carry out
preparations so that "major positioning control" can be
executed.
The 50 "block start data" points from 1 to 50 points
can be set.
Set the "condition data"

( Da. 15 to Da. 19 ) required data amount .
Set the "condition data" for designation with the

"block start data". Up to 10 condition data items
can be set.
Create a PLC program in which "7000"*is set in
The QD75 recognizes that the control is high-level
the" Cd. 3 Positioning start No." (Control data setting)
positioning control using " block start data" by the

"7000" designation.
Create a PLC program in which the "block start
Use GX Developer to create a PLC program
data point No. to be started" (1 to 50) is set in the "
to execute the "high-level positioning control".
Cd. 4 Positioning start point No." (Control data setting)
(Set the control data in the QD75 buffer memory using

a TO command.)
Create a PLC program in which the "positioning

start signal" is turned ON by a positioning start command.
Write the PLC programs to the PLC CPU.
Write the PLC program created in STEP 4 to the

PLC CPU using GX Developer.
Turn ON the "positioning start command" of

the axis to be started.
Same procedure as for the "major positioning control"

start.
STEP 5
Refer to Chapter 6
Starting the control
STEP 6
Monitoring the control
STEP 7
Monitor the high-level positioning control.
Use one of the following two methods.

Method (1): Monitor using GX Configurator-QP.
Method (2): Monitor using GX Developer.
Stopping the control
STEP 8
Stop when control is completed
Same procedure as for the "major positioning control" stop.
Control termination
REMARK
(1) Five sets of "block start data (50 points)" and "condition data (10 items)
corresponding to "7000" to "7004" are set with a PLC program.
(2) Five sets of data from "7000" to "7004" can be set when GX Configurator-QP
is used. If GX Configurator-QP is used to set the "block start data" and
"condition data" corresponding to "7001" to "7004" and write the data to the
QD75, "7001" to "7004" can be set in " Cd.3 Positioning start No." in STEP
4.
10 - 6
MELSEC-Q
10.3 Setting the block start data

10.3.1 Relation between various controls and block start data
The " block start data" must be set to carry out "high-level positioning control". The
setting requirements and details of each " block start data" item to be set differ
according to the " Da.13 Special start instruction" setting.
The following shows the " block start data" setting items corresponding to various
control systems. The operation details of each control type are explained starting in
section 10.3.2. Also refer to section "10.4 Setting the condition data" for details on
"condition data" with which control execution is judged.
(The " block start data" settings in this chapter are assumed to be carried out using GX
Configurator-QP.)
Block start
control
(Normal
Block start data
start)
setting items
Da.11
Shap 0 : End
e
1 : Continue
Da.12
Start data No.
Da.13
Special start
instruction
Da.14
Parameter
Condition
start
SimultaWait start
neous start
Repeated
start
(FOR loop)
Repeated
NEXT start
start
(FOR
condition)
1 to 600
1
2
Condition data No.
No. of
repetitions
Condition
data No.
: One of the two setting items must be set.

: Set when required (Set to " " when not used.)
: Setting not required (Setting value will be ignored. Use the initial value or a value within the setting range.)
The "NEXT start" instruction is used in combination with "repeated start (FOR loop)" and "repeated start (FOR
condition)". Control using only the "NEXT start" will not be carried out.
REMARK
It is recommended that the "block start data" be set whenever possible with GX
Configurator-QP. Execution by PLC program uses many PLC programs and
devices. The execution becomes complicated, and the scan times will increase.
10 - 7
MELSEC-Q
10.3.2 Block start (normal start)

In a "block start (normal start)", the positioning data groups of a block are continuously
executed in a set PLC starting from the positioning data set in " Da.12 Start data No."
by one start.
Section [2] shows a control example where the " block start data" and "positioning
data" are set as shown in section [1].
[1] Setting examples

(1) Block start data setting example
Axis 1 block
start data
1st point
2nd point
3rd point
4th point
5th point
Da.11
Shape
1: Continue
1: Continue
1: Continue
1: Continue
0: End
Da.12
Start data No.
1
2
5
10
15
Da.13
Special start
instruction
0: Block start
0: Block start
0: Block start
0: Block start
0: Block start
Da.14
Parameter
(2) Positioning data setting example

Axis 1 positioning data No.
Da.1
Operation pattern
1
2
3
4
5
6

1 block
1 block
10
15
REMARK
Block :
"1 block" is defined as all the data continuing from the positioning data in which
"continuous positioning control" or "continuous path control" is set in the operation
pattern ( Da.1 ) to the positioning data in which "independent positioning control
(Positioning complete)" is set.
10 - 8
MELSEC-Q
[2] Control examples

The following shows the control executed when the "block start data" of the 1st
point of axis 1 is set as shown in section [1] and started.
<1> The positioning data is executed in the following order before stopping.
Axis 1 positioning data No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 10 15.
Positioning
according to the 1st
point settings
Positioning
according to the 3rd
point settings
Positioning
according to the 2nd
point settings
Positioning
Positioning
according to the according to the 5th
4th point settings point settings
Operation pattern
3(01)
1(00)
Address(+)
4(00)
2(11)
10(00)
t
Address(-)
5(11)
6(00)
1
15(00)
ON
OFF
[Y10,Y11,Y12,Y13]
OFF
[X10,X11,X12,X13]
BUSY signal
[XC,XD,XE,XF] OFF

[X14,X15,X16,X17]
ON
ON
ON
OFF
1 Dwell
Fig. 10.1 Block start control example
10 - 9
time of corresponding positioning data
MELSEC-Q
10.3.3 Condition start

In a "condition start", the "condition data" conditional judgment designated in " Da.14
Parameter" is carried out for the positioning data set in " Da.12 Start data No.". If the
conditions have been established, the " block start data" set in "1: condition start" is
executed. If the conditions have not been established, that " block start data" will be
ignored, and the "block start data" of the next point will be executed.

Axis 1 block
start data
1st point
2nd point
3rd point
Da.11
Shape
1: Continue
1: Continue
0: End
Da.12
Start data No.
1
10
50
Da.13
Special start
instruction
1: Condition start
1: Condition start
0: Block start
Da.14
Parameter
1
2
The "condition data Nos." have been set in " Da.14 Parameter".

1
2
3
Da.1
Operation pattern
10
11
12

50

The following shows the control executed when the " block start data" of the 1st
<1> The conditional judgment set in "condition data No. 1" is carried out before
execution of the axis 1 "positioning data No. 1".
Conditions established Execute positioning data No. 1, 2, and 3
Go to <2>.
Conditions not established Go to <2>.
Go to <3>.
<3> Execute axis 1 "positioning data No. 50" and stop the control.
10 - 10
MELSEC-Q
10.3.4 Wait start

In a "wait start", the "condition data" conditional judgment designated in " Da.14
Parameter" is carried out for the positioning data set in " Da.12 Start data No.". If the
conditions have been established, the " block start data" is executed. If the conditions
have not been established, the control stops (waits) until the conditions are
established.

Axis 1 block
start data
1st point
2nd point
3rd point
Da.11
Shape
1: Continue
1: Continue
0: End
Da.12
Start data No.
1
10
50
Da.13
Special start
instruction
2: Wait start
0: Block start
0: Block start
Da.14
Parameter
3

1
2
3
Da.1
Operation pattern
10
11
12

50

Go to <2>.
Conditions not established Control stops (waits) until conditions are
established Go to <1>.
<2> Execute the axis 1 "positioning data No. 10, 11, 12, and 50" and stop the
control.
10 - 11
MELSEC-Q
10.3.5 Simultaneous start

In a "simultaneous start", the positioning data set in the " Da.12 Start data No." and
positioning data of other axes set in the "condition data" are simultaneously executed
(pulses are output with the same timing).
(The "condition data" is designated with " Da.14 Parameter".)

Axis 1 block
start data
1st point
2nd point
3rd point
Da.11
Shape
1: Continue
1: Continue
0: End
Da.12
Start data No.
1
10
50
Da.13
Special start
instruction
Da.14
Parameter
4
5
6
It is assumed that the "axis 2 positioning data" for simultaneous starting is set in the
"condition data" designated with " Da.14 Parameter".

1
2
3
Da.1
Operation pattern
10
11
12

50

<1> Simultaneously start the axis 1 "positioning data No. 1" and axis 2
positioning data set in "condition data No. 4". After the execution of axis 1
"positioning data No. 1, 2, and 3" is completed, go to <2>.
<2> Simultaneously start the axis 1 "positioning data No. 10" and axis 2
positioning data set in "condition data No. 5".
Standing by after completion of axis 2 positioning data simultaneously
started in <1>. Go to <3>.
Executing axis 2 positioning data simultaneously started in <1>.
"Error".
<3> Simultaneously start the axis 1 "positioning data No. 50" and the axis 2
positioning data set in "condition data No. 6" after the completion of the
execution of axis 1 "positioning data No. 10, 11, and 12".
Standing by after completion of axis 2 positioning data simultaneously
started in <2>. Go to <4>.
Executing axis 2 positioning data simultaneously started in <2>.
"Error".
<4> After the execution of the axis 1 "positioning data No. 50" is completed, stop
the control.
10 - 12
MELSEC-Q
10.3.6 Repeated start (FOR loop)

In a "repeated start (FOR loop)", the data between the " block start data" in which "4:
FOR loop" is set in " Da.13 Special start instruction" and the "block start data" in which
"6: NEXT start" is set in " Da.13 Special start instruction " is repeatedly executed for
the No. of times set in " Da.14 Parameter". An endless loop will result if the No. of
repetitions is set to "0".
(The No. of repetitions is set in " Da.14 Parameter" of the " block start data" in which
"4: FOR loop" is set in " Da.13 Special start instruction".)

Axis 1 block
start data
1st point
2nd point
3rd point
Da.11
Shape
1: Continue
1: Continue
0: End
Da.12
Start data No.
1
10
50
Da.13
Special start
instruction
4: FOR loop
0: Block start
6: NEXT start
Da.14
Parameter
2

1
2
3
Da.1
Operation pattern
10
11

50
51


<1> Execute the axis 1 "positioning data No. 1, 2, 3, 10, 11, 50, and 51".
<2> Return to the axis 1 "1st point block start data". Again execute the axis 1
"positioning data No. 1, 2, 3, 10, 11, 50 and 51", and then stop the control.
(Repeat for the No. of times (2 times) set in Da.14 .)
10 - 13
MELSEC-Q
10.3.7 Repeated start (FOR condition)

In a "repeated start (FOR condition)", the data between the " block start data" in which
"5: FOR condition" is set in " Da.13 Special start instruction" and the " block start data"
in which "6: NEXT start" is set in " Da.13 Special start instruction" is repeatedly
executed until the establishment of the conditions set in the "condition data".
(The "condition data" designation is set in " Da.14 Parameter" of the " block start data"
in which "5: FOR condition" is set in " Da.13 Special start instruction".)

Axis 1 block
start data
1st point
2nd point
3rd point
Da.11
Shape
1: Continue
1: Continue
0: End
Da.12
Start data No.
1
10
50
Da.13
Special start
instruction
5: FOR condition
0: Block start
6: NEXT start
Da.14
Parameter
5

1
2
3
Da.1
Operation pattern
10
11

50
51


<1> Carry out the conditional judgment set in "condition data No. 5" for the axis 1
"positioning data No. 1".
Conditions established Go to <3>.
<2> Execute axis 1 "positioning data No. 1, 2, 3, 10, 11, 50, and 51", then go to
<1>.
<3> Execute axis 1 "positioning data No. 1, 2, 3, 10, 11, 50, and 51", then stop
the control.
10 - 14
MELSEC-Q
10.3.8 Restrictions when using the NEXT start

The "NEXT start" is a instruction indicating the end of the repetitions when executing
Section 10.3.6 "Repeated start (FOR loop)" and Section 10.3.7 "Repeated start (FOR
condition)".
The following shows the restrictions when setting "6: NEXT start" in the " block start
data".
(1) The processing when "6: NEXT start" is set before execution of "4: FOR loop" or
"5: FOR condition" is the same as that for a "0: block start".
(2) Repeated processing will not be carried out if there is no "6: NEXT start"
instruction after the "4: FOR loop" or "5: FOR condition" instruction. (Note that an
"error" will not occur.)
(3) Nesting is not possible between "4: FOR loop" and "6: NEXT start", or between
"5: FOR condition" and "6: NEXT start". A warning "FOR to NEXT nest
construction (warning code: 506)" will occur if nesting is attempted.
Block start data
Da.13
Special start instruction
1st point
Block start
2nd point
FOR
3rd point
Block start
4th point
FOR
5th point
Block start
6th point
Block start
7th point
NEXT
8th point
Block start
9th point
NEXT
10 - 15
The JUMP destination of the

NEXT designated with points
7 and 9 is the FOR of point 4.
A warning will occur if the NEXT
designated with point 9 is
executed.
MELSEC-Q
10.4 Setting the condition data

10.4.1 Relation between various controls and the condition data
"Condition data" is set in the following cases.
(1) When setting conditions during execution of Section 9.2.21 "JUMP instruction"
(major positioning control)
(2) When setting conditions during execution of "high-level positioning control"
The "condition data" to be set includes the 5 setting items from Da.15 to Da.19 , but
the setting requirements and details differ according to the control system and setting
conditions.
The following shows the "condition data Da.15 Condition target" corresponding to the
different types of control.
(The "condition data" settings in this chapter are assumed to be carried out using GX
Configurator-QP.)
Control type
Da.15
Setting item

Block
start
Wait
start
Simultaneous Repeated start

start
(For condition)
Major positioning
control
JUMP instruction
01: Device X
02: Device Y
03: Buffer memory
(1 word)
04: Buffer memory
(2 words)
05: Positioning data
No.
: One of the setting items must be set.
REMARK
It is recommended that the "condition data" be set whenever possible with GX
10 - 16
MELSEC-Q
The setting requirements and details of the following "condition data" " Da.16 " to
" Da.19 " setting items differ according to the " Da.15 Condition target" setting.
The following shows the " Da.16 " to " Da.19 " setting items corresponding to the
" Da.15 Condition target".
Other setting
item
Da.15
Da.16
Condition operator
Da.17
Address
Da.18
Parameter 1
Da.19
Parameter 2
Setting item
01H: Device X
02H: Device Y
03H: Buffer memory
(1 word)
04H: Buffer memory
(2 words)
05H: Positioning data

No.
07H : DEV=ON
08H : DEV=OFF
=P1
01H :
P1
02H :
P1
03H :
P1
04H :
P 2
05H : P1
P 1 , P 2
06H :
10H : Axis 1 designation
30H : Axis 1 and axis 2
designation
designation
designation
70H : Axis 1, axis 2 and
axis 3 designation
designation
A0H : Axis 2 and axis 4
designation
B0H : Axis 1, axis 2 and
axis 4 designation
C0H : Axis 3 and axis 4
designation
D0H : Axis 1, axis 3 and
axis 4 designation
E0H : Axis 2, axis 3 and
axis 4 designation
0 to 1FH (bit No.)
0 to 1FH (bit No.)
P2 (numeric value)
Buffer
memory
address
P1 (numeric value)
(Set only when " Da.16 " is

[05H] or [06H].)
Axis 1
Low-order 16
positioning
bits
data No.
Axis 3
Low-order 16
positioning
bits
data No.
Axis 2
High-order 16
positioning
bits
data No.
Axis 4
High-order 16
positioning
bits
data No.
: Setting not required (Setting value will be ignored. Use the initial value or a value within the setting range.)
: Value stored in buffer memory designated in Da.17 .
: Refer to Section 5.5 "List of condition data" for the setting contents.
Judgment whether the condition operator is "=" or "= at the start of wait.
Judgment on data is carried out for each control cycle of the QD75. Thus, in the
judgment on the data such as current feed value which varies continuously, the
operator "=" may not be detected. If this occurs, use a range operator.
10 - 17
MELSEC-Q
REMARK
The "PLC CPU memo area" can be designated as the buffer memory address to be
designated in Da.17 . (Refer to Section 7.1.1 "Configuration and roles of QD75
memory".)
QD75 buffer memory
Address
30000
30001
30099
10 - 18
MELSEC-Q
10.4.2 Condition data setting examples

The following shows setting examples for "condition data".
(1) Setting the device ON/OFF as a condition

[Condition] Device "X0" (=QD75 READY) is OFF
Da.15
Condition target
Da.16
Condition
operator
Da.17
Address
Da.18
Parameter 1
Da.19
Parameter 2
01H: Device X
08H: DEV=OFF
(2) Setting the numeric value stored in the "buffer memory" as a

condition
[Condition]
The value stored in buffer memory addresses "800, 801" (= " Md.20 Current
feed value") is "1000" or larger.
Da.15
Condition target
Da.16
Condition
operator
04H: Buffer memory

04H:
(2 words)
P1
Da.17
Address
Da.18
Parameter 1
Da.19
Parameter 2
800
1000
(3) Designating the axis and positioning data No. to be simultaneously

started in "simultaneous start"
[Condition]
Simultaneously starting "axis 2 positioning data No.3".
Da.15
Condition target
Da.16
Condition
operator
05H: Positioning 20H: Axis 2

data No.
designation
10 - 19
Da.17
Address
Da.18
Parameter 1
Da.19
Parameter 2
High-order 16
bits "0003H"
MELSEC-Q
10.5 Multiple axes simultaneous start control

The "multiple axes simultaneous start control" starts and controls the multiple axes
simultaneously by outputting pulses to the axis to be started at the same timing as the
start axis.
The maximum of four axes can be started simultaneously.
[1] Control details

The multiple axes simultaneous start control is carried out by setting the
simultaneous start an object axis start data No. (positioning data No. to start
simultaneously for each axis) to the multiple axes simultaneous start control
buffer memory " Cd.30 to Cd.33 Simultaneous starting axis start data No. (1 to 4
axis start data No.)" of the axis control data, and the "9004" to " Cd.3 positioning
start No." of the start axis, and then turning ON the positioning start signal.
[2] Restrictions
(1) An error will occur and all simultaneously started axes will not start (error
code: 501) if the simultaneously started axis start data No. is not set to the
axis control data on the start axis or set outside the setting range.
code: 501) if either of the simultaneously started axes is BUSY.
code: 501) if an error occurs during the analysis of the positioning data on the
simultaneously started axes.
(4) No error or warning will occur if only the start axis is the simultaneously
started axis.
(5) This function cannot be used with the sub function Section 12.7.8 "Prereading start function".
[3] Multiple axes simultaneous start control procedure

The procedure for multiple axes simultaneous start control is as follows.
1)
Set " Cd. 30 to Cd. 33 Simultaneously

started data No.".
2)
Write [9004] to " Cd. 3 Positioning start No.".
3)
Turn ON the positioning start signal to be

started.
10 - 20
MELSEC-Q
[4] Multiple axes simultaneous start control function setting method

The following shows the setting of the data used to execute the multiple axes
simultaneous start control with positioning start signals (The axis control data on
the start axis is set).
Setting item
Cd.3
Setting
value
Positioning start
No.
9004
Setting details
Set the multiple axes simultaneous start control

1500 1600 1700 1800
start No. "9004".
Simultaneous
starting axis start
Cd.30
data No. (Axis 1
start data No.)
Simultaneous
starting axis start
Cd.31
data No. (Axis 2
start data No.)
Simultaneous
starting axis start
Cd.32
data No. (Axis 3
start data No.)
Axis Axis Axis Axis

1
2
4
3
1540 1640 1740 1840
1541 1641 1741 1841

Set the simultaneously started axis start data No.
Set a "0" for the axis other than the simultaneously started
axes.
1542 1642 1742 1842
Simultaneous
starting axis start
Cd.33
data No. (Axis 4
start data No.)
1543 1643 1743 1843
Refer to Section 5.7 "List of control data" for information on setting details.

The following shows the setting examples in which the axis 1 is used as the start
axis and the simultaneously started axes are used as the axes 2 and 4.
Setting
value
Setting details

(Axis 1)
9004
Set the multiple axes simultaneous start control

start No. "9004".
1500
Simultaneous
starting axis start
Cd.30
data No. (Axis 1
start data No.)
100
The axis 1 starts the positioning data No.

100.
1540
Simultaneous
starting axis start
data No. (Axis 2
start data No.)
200
Immediately after the start of the axis 1,

the axis 2 starts the axis 2 positioning data
No. 200.
1541
Will not start simultaneously.
1542
Immediately after the start of the axis 1,

the axis 4 starts the axis 4 positioning data
No. 300.
1543
Setting item
Cd.3
Cd.31
Positioning start
No.
Simultaneous
starting axis start
Cd.32
data No. (Axis 3
start data No.)
Simultaneous
starting axis start
Cd.33
data No. (Axis 4
start data No.)
300
10 - 21
MELSEC-Q
POINTS
(1) The "multiple axes simultaneous start control" carries out an operation equivalent to the
"simultaneous start" using the "block start data".
(2) The setting of the "multiple axes simultaneous start control" is easier than that of the
"simultaneous start" using the "block start data".
Setting items for "simultaneous start" using "block start data"
Positioning start data, block start data, condition data, and positioning data
Setting items for "multiple axes simultaneous start control"
Positioning data and axis control data
10 - 22
MELSEC-Q
10.6 Start program for high-level positioning control

10.6.1 Starting high-level positioning control
To execute high-level positioning control, a PLC program must be created to start the
control in the same method as for major positioning control.
The following shows the procedure for starting the "1st point block start data"
(regarded as block No. 7000) set in axis 1.
QD75
Buffer memory
Servo amplifier
4)
Control by designated
positioning data
1)
7000
2)
PLC CPU
1
3)
1500
1501
ON
Input/output signal
When carrying out a positioning start with the
next scan after a positioning operation is
completed, input signal X10 as an interlock so
that the start is carried out once the X10 signal
turns OFF after the Y10 signal turns OFF.
Y10
1) Set "7000" in " Cd. 3 Positioning start No.".

(This establishes that the control as "high-level positioning control" using block start data.)
2) Set the point No. of the "block start data" to be started. (In this case "1".)
3) Turn ON the start signal.
4) The positioning data set in the "1st point block start data" is started.
Fig. 10.2 High-level positioning control start procedure
10 - 23
MELSEC-Q
10.6.2 Example of a start program for high-level positioning control

The following shows an example of a start program for high-level positioning control in
which the 1st point " block start data" of axis 1 is started. (The block No. is regarded as
"7000".)
Control data that require setting

The following control data must be set to execute high-level positioning control.
The setting is carried out using a PLC program.
Setting
value
Setting item
Cd.3
Positioning start
No.
Cd.4
Positioning starting
point No.
Setting details
Axis Axis Axis Axis

1
2
3
4
7000
Set "7000" to indicate control using " block start

1500 1600 1700 1800
data".
Set the point No. of the " block start data" to be

1501 1601 1701 1801
started.
Start conditions
The following conditions must be fulfilled when starting the control. The required
conditions must also be integrated into the PLC program, and configured so the
control does not start unless the conditions are fulfilled.
Device
Signal name
PLC READY signal
Signal state
Axis Axis Axis Axis

1
2
3
4
Y0
QD75 READY signal
X0
All axis servo ON
Y1
ON
Interface
signal
Axis stop signal
QD75 buffer memory

The access is possible.
X1
Y4
X10 X11 X12 X13
BUSY signal
OFF BUSY signal is OFF
XC
XD
XE
XF
OFF There is no error
X8
X9
XA
XB
M code ON signal
X4
X5
X6
X7
Stop signal
External
Upper limit (FLS)
signal
Lower limit (RLS)
Y5
Y6
10 - 24
Y7
MELSEC-Q
Start time chart

The following chart shows a time chart in which the positioning data No. 1, 2, 10,
11, and 12 of axis 1 are continuously executed as an example.
Axis 1 block
start data
Da.11
Shape
Da.12
Start data No.
Da.13
Special start
instruction
Da.14
Parameter
1st point
1: Continue
0: Block start
2nd point
0: End
10
0: Block start

Da.1
Operation pattern

1
10
11
12
(3) Start time chart

V
Operation pattern
1(11)
10(11)
11(11)
12(00)
2(00)
Dwell time
[Y10]
[Y0]
PLC READY signal

All axis servo ON
[Y1]
QD75 READY signal
[X0]
[X10]
[XC]
BUSY signal
[X14]
[X8]
Cd.4 Positioning start point No.
1st point [buffer memory address 26000]

2nd point [buffer memory address 26001]
7000
1
-32767 (8001H)
10 (000AH)
Fig. 10.3 Start time chart for high-level positioning control (block start)
10 - 25
t
Dwell time
MELSEC-Q
Creating the program

Example
Set the block start data beforehand.
Positioning
start
command
PLS
M104
Y10
M104
X10
TO
H0
K1500 K7000 K1
<Pulse the positioning start command.>
<Write the positioning data No. 7000

for block positioning.>
TO
H0
K1501 K1
K1
SET Y10
Y10: Positioning start signal

X10: Start complete signal
M104: Positioning start command pulse
10 - 26
<Write the positioning start point No.>
<Turn ON the positioning start signal.>
Chapter 11 Manual Control
The details and usage of manual control are explained in this chapter.
In manual control, pulse output commands are issued during a JOG operation and an
inching operation executed by the turning ON of the JOG START signal, or from a manual
pulse generator connected to the QD75.
Manual control using a PLC program from the PLC CPU is explained in this chapter.
Refer to GX Configurator-QP Operating Manual for an explanation of manual
control (JOG operation, inching operation and manual pulse generator operation) using the
peripheral devices.
11.1 Outline of manual control ........................................................................................11- 2

11.1.1 Three manual control methods..................................................................11- 2
11.2 JOG operation..........................................................................................................11- 4
11.2.1 Outline of JOG operation ...........................................................................11- 4
11.2.2 JOG operation execution procedure .........................................................11- 7
11.2.3 Setting the required parameters for JOG operation .................................11- 8
11.2.4 Creating start programs for JOG operation..............................................11- 10
11.2.5 JOG operation example............................................................................11- 13
11.3 Inching operation ....................................................................................................11- 17
11.3.1 Outline of inching operation ......................................................................11- 17
11.3.2 Inching operation execution procedure ....................................................11- 20
11.3.3 Setting the required parameters for inching operation ............................11- 21
11.3.4 Creating a program to enable/disable the inching operation...................11- 22
11.3.5 Inching operation example........................................................................11- 25
11.4 Manual pulse generator operation .........................................................................11- 27
11.4.1 Outline of manual pulse generator operation...........................................11- 27
11.4.2 Manual pulse generator operation execution procedure .........................11- 31
11.4.3 Setting the required parameters for manual pulse generator operation .11- 32
11.4.4 Creating a program to enable/disable the manual pulse generator
operation ...................................................................................................11- 33
11 - 1
11
11 MANUAL CONTROL
MELSEC-Q
11.1 Outline of manual control

11.1.1 Three manual control methods
"Manual control" refers to control in which positioning data is not used, and a
positioning operation is carried out in response to signal input from an external source.
The three types of this "manual control" are explained below.
[1] JOG operation

"JOG operation" is a control method in which the machine is moved by only a
movement amount (pulses are continuously transmitted while the JOG START
signal is ON). This operation is used to move the workpiece in the direction in
which the limit signal is ON, when the operation is stopped by turning the limit
signal OFF to confirm the positioning system connection and obtain the
positioning data address (refer to Section 12.7.4 "Teaching function").
Movement continues while
the JOG START signal is ON.
M
ON
JOG START signal OFF
Fig. 11.1 JOG operation
[2] Inching operation

"Inching operation" is a control method in which a minute movement amount of
pulses is output manually in one control cycle.
When the "inching movement amount" of the axis control data is set by JOG
operation, the workpiece is moved by a set movement amount. (When the
"inching movement amount" is set to "0", the machine functions as JOG
operation.)
JOG start signal is turned
ON to move the workpiece
by the movement amount
of pulses which is output in
one control cycle.
M
ON
JOG start signal OFF
Fig. 11.2 Inching operation
11 - 2
11 MANUAL CONTROL
MELSEC-Q
[3] Manual pulse generator operation

"Manual pulse generator operation" is a control method in which positioning is
carried out in response to the No. of pulses input from a manual pulse generator
(the No. of input pulses is output). This operation is used for manual fine
adjustment, etc., when carrying out accurate positioning to obtain the positioning
address.
Movement in response
to the command pulses
Output pulses
QD75
Pulse input
Fig. 11.3 Manual pulse generator control
Manual control sub functions

Refer to Section 3.2.4 "Combination of QD75 major functions and sub functions"
for details on "sub functions" that can be combined with manual control. Also refer
to Chapter 12 "Control sub functions" for details on each sub function.
Carrying out manual control from peripheral devices

"JOG operation", "Inching operation" and enabling/disabling of the "manual pulse
generator operation" can be executed from GX Configurator-QP test mode.
Refer to GX Configurator-QP Operating Manual for details on manual control from
GX Configurator-QP.
Monitoring manual control

Refer to Section 5.6 "List of monitor data" when directly monitoring the buffer
memory using GX Developer.
Also refer to GX Configurator-QP Operating Manual when monitoring with the
monitor functions of GX Configurator-QP.
11 - 3
11 MANUAL CONTROL
MELSEC-Q
11.2 JOG operation

11.2.1 Outline of JOG operation
Important
Use the hardware stroke limit function when carrying out JOG operation near the
upper or lower limits. (Refer to Section "12.4.4").
* If the hardware stroke limit function is not used, the workpiece may exceed the
moving range, causing an accident.
JOG operation
In JOG operation, the FORWARD run JOG start signal (Y8, YA, YC, YE) or
REVERSE run JOG start signal (Y9, YB, YD, YF) turns ON, causing pulses to be
output to the servo amplifier from the QD75 while the signal is ON. The workpiece
is then moved in the designated direction.
The following shows examples of JOG operation.
1)
When the START signal turns ON, acceleration begins in the direction designated by the
START signal, and continues for the acceleration time designated in " Pr.32 JOG
operation acceleration time selection". At this time, the BUSY signal changes from OFF to
ON.
When the workpiece being accelerated reaches the speed set in " Cd.17 JOG speed",
2) the movement continues at this speed. The constant speed movement takes place at 2)
and 3).
When the START signal is turned OFF, deceleration begins from the speed set in
3) " Cd.17 JOG speed", and continues for the deceleration time designated in " Pr.33
JOG operation deceleration time selection".
4)
The operation stops when the speed becomes "0". At this time, the BUSY signal changes
from ON to OFF.
Cd. 17 JOG speed

Acceleration for the acceleration
time selected in Pr. 32
Deceleration for the deceleration

time selected in Pr. 33
Forward JOG run

1)
2)
3)
4)
Reverse JOG run
ON
PLC READY signal
[Y0]
OFF
All axis servo ON
[Y1]
OFF
QD75 READY signal
[X0]
OFF

[Y8, YA, YC, YE]
OFF

[Y9, YB, YD, YF]
OFF
BUSY signal[XC, XD, XE, XF]
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Fig. 11.4 JOG operation

11 - 4
11 MANUAL CONTROL
MELSEC-Q

The following details must be understood before carrying out JOG operation.
(1) For safety, first set " Cd.17 JOG speed" to a smaller value and check the
movement. Then gradually increase the value.
(2) An axis error will occur and the operation will not start (error code: 300) if the
"JOG speed" is outside the setting range at the JOG start.
(3) An axis error will occur and the operation will not start (error code: 956) if
" Pr.31 JOG speed limit value" is set to a value larger than " Pr.8 speed limit
value".
(4) If " Cd.17 JOG speed" exceeds the speed set in " Pr.31 JOG speed limit
value", the workpiece will move at the " Pr.31 JOG speed limit value" and an
"Axis warning" will occur in the QD75 (warning code: 301).
(5) The JOG operation can be continued even if an "Axis warning" has occurred.
(6) A JOG start signal OFF ON immediately after the stop signal ON OFF
(within 100ms) will be ignored. (The operation will not start.)
(7) Set a "0" in " Cd.16 inching movement amount". If a value other than "0" is
set, the operation will become an inching operation (Refer to section 11.3
"Inching operation").
Errors during operation

If the operation is stopped by the stroke limit (limit signal OFF), JOG operation can
be performed out in the direction in which the limit signal turns ON after an error
reset. (An error will occur again if the JOG start signals in the direction in which the
limit signal turns OFF is turned ON.)
V
JOG operation
JOG operation possible
Upper/lower
limit signal
JOG operation not possible
ON
OFF
11 - 5
11 MANUAL CONTROL
MELSEC-Q
JOG operation timing and processing time

The following drawing shows details of the JOG operation timing and processing
time.
ON
Forward run JOG start signal OFF
[Y8, YA, YC, YE]
t2
Reverse run JOG start signal OFF

[Y9, YB, YD, YF]
ON
BUSY signal [XC, XD, XE, XF] OFF
t1
t4
Standing by
In JOG operation
Standing by
t3
Positioning complete signal OFF
[X14, X15, X16, X17]
Fig. 11.5 JOG operation timing and processing times

Normal timing times
Unit: ms
t1
t2
t3
t4
1.0 to 4.0
0 to 3.5
5.5 to 7.9
0 to 3.5
Delays may occur in the t1 timing time due to the operation status of other axes.
11 - 6
11 MANUAL CONTROL
MELSEC-Q
11.2.2 JOG operation execution procedure

The JOG operation is carried out by the following procedure.
STEP 1
Set the positioning parameters

)
Preparation
Refer to Chapter 5
and Section 11.2.3.
Pr.1 to Pr.39 )
One of the following two methods can be used.

<Method 1>
Directly set (write) the parameters in the QD75 using GX
Configurator-QP.
<Method 2>
Set (write) the parameters from the PLC CPU to the QD75 using
the PLC program (TO command).
STEP 2
Refer to Section
11.2.4.
Set a "0" in " Cd. 16 Inching movement

amount".
Set the" Cd. 17 JOG speed".
(Control data setting)
Using GX Developer, set the control data and create a

PLC program for executing the JOG operation.
(Set the control data in the QD75 buffer memory using the TO
command.)
Create a PLC program in which the "JOG start

signal" is turned ON by a JOG operation start command.
STEP 3
Write the PLC program to the PLC CPU.
Write the PLC program created in STEP 1 and

STEP 2 to the PLC CPU using GX Developer.
Refer to Chapter 6.
JOG operation
start
Monitoring of the
JOG operation
Turn ON the JOG start signal.
STEP 4
Turn ON the JOG start signal of the axis to be started.
STEP 5

Y8
YA
YC
YE
Y9
YB
YD
YF
Monitor the JOG operation status.
<Method 1>
Monitor using GX Configurator-QP.
<Method 2>
Monitor using GX Developer.
JOG operation
stop
STEP 6
Turn OFF the JOG operation start signal that is ON.
Stop the JOG operation when the JOG start signal is turned
OFF using the PLC program in STEP 2.
End of control
REMARK
Mechanical elements such as limit switches are considered as already installed.

Positioning parameter settings work in common for all control using the QD75.
11 - 7
11 MANUAL CONTROL
MELSEC-Q
11.2.3 Setting the required parameters for JOG operation

The "Positioning parameters" must be set to carry out JOG operation.
The following table shows the setting items of the required parameters for carrying out
JOG operation. When only JOG operation will be carried out, no parameters other than
those shown below need to be set. (Use the initial values or setting values within a
range where no error occurs for trouble-free operation.)
Positioning parameters
Setting item
Setting requirement
Factory-set initial value

(setting details)
Pr.1
Unit setting
3 (PLS)
Pr.2
No. of pulses per rotation (Ap) (Unit: PLS)
20000
Pr.3
Movement amount per rotation (Al) (Unit: PLS)
20000
Pr.4
Unit magnification (Am)
Pr.7
Bias speed at start (Unit: PLS/s)
Pr.8
Speed limit value (Unit: PLS/s)
20000
Pr.9
Acceleration time 0 (Unit: PLS/s)
1000
Pr.10
Deceleration time 0 (Unit: PLS/s)
1000
Pr.11
Backlash compensation amount (Unit: PLS)
Pr.12
Software stroke limit upper limit value (Unit: PLS)
2147483647
Pr.13
Software stroke limit lower limit value (Unit: PLS)
2147483648
Pr.14
Pr.15
Software stroke limit valid/invalid setting
Pr.17
Torque limit setting value (Unit: %)
1 (1 times)
0
0 (current feed value)

0 (valid)
300
: Setting always required.

: Set according to requirements (Leave set to the initial value when not used.)
REMARK
When carrying out other control ("major positioning control", "high-level positioning
control", "OPR positioning control"), the respective setting items must also be
matched and set.
Parameters are set for each axis.
Refer to Chapter 5 "Data Used for Positioning Control" for setting details.
11 - 8
11 MANUAL CONTROL
MELSEC-Q
Setting item
Setting requirement

(setting details)
Pr.25
Acceleration time 1 (Unit: ms)
1000
Pr.26
1000
Pr.27
1000
Pr.28
Deceleration time 1 (Unit: ms)
1000
Pr.29
1000
Pr.30
1000
Pr.31
JOG speed limit value (Unit: PLS/s)
20000
Pr.32
JOG operation acceleration time selection
0 (acceleration time 0)
Pr.33
JOG operation deceleration time selection
0 (deceleration time 0)
Pr.34
Acceleration/deceleration process selection
Pr.35
S-pattern proportion (Unit: %)
100
Pr.36
Sudden stop deceleration time (Unit: ms)
1000
Pr.37
0 (deceleration stop)
Pr.38
Pr.39

11 - 9
0 (trapezoidal acceleration/
deceleration processing)
11 MANUAL CONTROL
MELSEC-Q
11.2.4 Creating start programs for JOG operation

A PLC program must be created to execute a JOG operation. Consider the "required
control data setting", "start conditions" and "start time chart" when creating the
program.
The following shows an example when a JOG operation is started for axis 1.
(" Cd.17 JOG speed" is set to "100.00mm/min" in the example shown.)
Required control data setting

The control data shown below must be set to execute a JOG operation. The
setting is carried out with the PLC program.
Cd.16
Setting
value
Setting item
Inching movement
amount
Cd.17 JOG speed
0
10000
Setting details
Axis Axis Axis Axis

1
2
3
4
Set 0.
1517 1617 1717 1817
Set a value equal to or below the " Pr.31

JOG speed limit value".
1518 1618 1718 1818

1519 1619 1719 1819
Start conditions
The following conditions must be fulfilled when starting. The required conditions
must also be assembled in the PLC program, and the PLC program must be
configured so the operation will not start if the conditions are not fulfilled.
Device
Signal name
Signal state
Axis Axis Axis Axis

1
2
3
4
PLC READY signal
Y0
QD75 READY signal
X0
All axis servo ON
Y1
QD75 buffer memory

ON
X1
Interface
signal
Axis stop signal
Y4
Y5
Y6
Y7
X10 X11 X12 X13
BUSY signal
OFF QD75 is not operating
XC
XD
XE
XF
X8
X9
XA
XB
M code ON signal
X4
X5
X6
X7
Stop signal
External
Upper limit (FLS)
signal
Lower limit (RLS)
If the PLC CPU is set to the asynchronous mode in the synchronization setting, this must be
inserted in the program for interlocking. If it is set to the synchronous mode, it must not be
inserted in the program for interlocking because it is turned ON when the PLC CPU executes
calculation.
11 - 10
11 MANUAL CONTROL
MELSEC-Q
Start time chart
Forward
JOG run
t
Reverse JOG run
ON
Forward run JOG start signal [Y8]
OFF
ON
Reverse run JOG start signal [Y9]
OFF
PLC READY signal
[Y0]
OFF
All axis servo ON
[Y1]
OFF
QD75 READY signal
[X0]
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
BUSY signal
[XC]
[X8]
OFF
OFF
Fig. 11.6 JOG operation start time chart
11 - 11
11 MANUAL CONTROL
MELSEC-Q

Example
No. 10 JOG operation setting program
<Set JOG operation speed (100.00mm/min)>

<Set a "0" for inching movement amount>
<Write JOG operation speed>
No.12 JOG operation/inching operation execution program
<JOG/inching operation flag ON>
<JOG/inching operation termination>
<Execute forward JOG/inching operation>
<Execute reverse JOG operation>
11 - 12
11 MANUAL CONTROL
MELSEC-Q
11.2.5 JOG operation example

When the "stop signal" is turned ON during JOG operation
When the "stop signal" is turned ON during JOG operation, the JOG operation will
stop by the "deceleration stop" method.
JOG start signals will be ignored while the stop signal is ON.
The operation can be started by turning the stop signal OFF, and turning the JOG
start signal from OFF to ON again.
A JOG start signal OFF
ON
while the stop signal is ON will be ignored.
ON
PLC READY signal
[Y0] OFF
All axis servo ON
[Y1] OFF
QD75 READY signal
[X0] OFF
ON
ON
ON
[Y8, YA, YC, YE]
ON
Axis stop signal
OFF
[Y4, Y5, Y6, Y7]
ON
BUSY signal[XC, XD, XE, XF] OFF
Fig. 11.7 Operation when the stop signal is turned ON during JOG operation
POINT
The QD75 will not receive a "JOG start signal" while the "stop signal" is ON.
11 - 13
11 MANUAL CONTROL
MELSEC-Q
When both the "forward run JOG start signal" and "reverse run JOG start
signal" are turned ON simultaneously for one axis
When both the "forward run JOG start signal" and "reverse run JOG start signal"
are turned ON simultaneously for one axis, the "forward run JOG start signal" is
given priority. In this case, the "reverse run JOG start signal" is validated when the
QD75 BUSY signal is turned OFF.
If the forward run JOG operation is stopped due to stop or axis error by a stop
signal, the reverse run JOG operation will not be executed even if the "reverse run
JOG start signal" turns ON.
Forward run JOG operation
Reverse run JOG operation

ON
[Y8, YA, YC, YE]
ON
[Y9, YB, YD, YF]
OFF
The reverse run JOG

start signal is ignored.
ON
BUSY signal[XC, XD, XE, XF]
OFF
Fig. 11.8 Operation when both the forward run JOG start signal and reverse run JOG start signal are
turned ON simultaneously
11 - 14
11 MANUAL CONTROL
MELSEC-Q
When the "JOG start signal" is turned ON again during deceleration caused
by the ON OFF of the "JOG start signal"
When the "JOG start signal" is turned ON again during deceleration caused by the
ON OFF of the "JOG start signal", the JOG operation will be carried out from the
time the "JOG start signal" is turned ON.
ON
signal [Y8, YA, YC, YE]
OFF
BUSY signal
[XC, XD, XE, XF]
OFF
ON
Fig. 11.9 Operation when the JOG start signal is turned ON during deceleration
When the "JOG start signal" is turned ON during a peripheral device test
mode
When the "JOG start signal" is turned ON during a peripheral device test mode, it
will be ignored and the JOG operation will not be carried out.
JOG operation not

possible because
the operation is
in the test mode
JOG operation not possible

because this is not the
rising edge of the JOG
start signal
Forward run JOG

operation execution
ON
OFF
In test mode
ON
[Y8, YA, YC, YE]
Fig. 11.10 Operation when the JOG start signal is turned ON during a test mode
11 - 15
11 MANUAL CONTROL
MELSEC-Q
When the "JOG start signal" is turned ON immediately after the stop signal
OFF (within 100ms)
When the "JOG start signal" is turned ON immediately after the stop signal OFF
(within 100ms), it will be ignored and the JOG operation will not be carried out.
ON
OFF

[Y8, YA, YC, YE]
ON
Axis stop signal
[Y4, Y5, Y6, Y7]
OFF
100ms
ON while the stop signal is
ON will be ignored.
Fig. 11.11 Operation when the JOG start signal is turned ON immediately after the stop signal OFF
11 - 16
11 MANUAL CONTROL
MELSEC-Q
11.3 Inching operation

11.3.1 Outline of inching operation
Important
When the inching operation is carried out near the upper or lower limit, use the
hardware stroke limit function (Refer to Section 12.4.4).
If the hardware stroke limit function is not used, the workpiece may exceed the
movement range, and an accident may result.
Inching operation
In inching operation, pulses are input to the servo amplifier at the first control cycle
(3.5 ms) to move the workpiece by a designated movement amount after the
forward run JOG start signal [Y8, YA, YC, YE] or reverse JOG start signal [Y9, YB,
YD, YF] is turned ON.
The following shows the example of inching operation.
1)
2)
When the start signal is turned ON, inching operation is carried out in the direction
designated by the start signal. In this case, BUSY signal is turned from OFF to ON.
The workpiece is moved by a movement amount set in " Cd.16 Inching movement
amount".
3)
The workpiece movement stops when the speed becomes "0". In this case, BUSY signal
is turned from ON to OFF. The positioning complete signal is turned from OFF to ON.
The positioning complete signal is turned from ON to OFF after a time set in
4) " Pr.40 Positioning complete signal output time" has been elapsed.
2)
Forward run inching operation

1)
3)
ON

OFF
All axis servo ON
[Y1]
OFF
QD75 READY signal

[X0]
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
[Y8,YA,YC,YE]
ON
BUSY signal
[XC,XD,XE,XF]
OFF
signal
[X14,X15,X16,X17]
OFF
ON
Pr.40 Positioning complete signal
output time
Fig. 11.12 Inching operation

11 - 17
4)
11 MANUAL CONTROL
MELSEC-Q

The following details must be understood before inching operation is carried out.
(1) Acceleration/deceleration processing is not carried out during inching
operation.
(Pulses corresponding to the designated inching movement amount are output
at the first control cycle of the QD75 (3.5 ms). The movement direction of
inching operation is reversed and, when a backlash compensation is carried
out, first pulses corresponding to the backlash amount are output in the first
control cycle of the QD75 and then pulses corresponding to the designated
inching movement amount are output in the subsequent control cycles.)
The " Cd.17 JOG speed" is ignored even if it is set. An error will occur in the
following cases (error code: 301).
( Cd.16 Inching movement amount) x (A) > ( Pr.31 JOG speed limit value)
Where (A) is as follows.
When the unit is PLS: 562.5
When the unit is other than PLS: 337.5
(2) JOG start signal OFF ON immediately after stop signal ON
100 ms) is ignored.
(Operation will not start.)
OFF (within
(3) Set a value other than a "0" in " Cd.16 Inching movement amount".
If a "0" is set, the operation will become JOG operation (Refer to Section 11.2
"JOG operation").
When the operation is stopped by the stroke limit (limit signal OFF), inching
operation can be performed out in the direction in which the limit signal turns ON
after an error reset.
(JOG start signals in the direction in which the limit signal turns OFF will be
ignored.)
V
Inching operation
Inching operation possible
Upper/lower
limit signal
Inching operation not possible
ON
OFF
11 - 18
11 MANUAL CONTROL
MELSEC-Q
Inching operation timing and processing times

The following drawing shows the details of the inching operation timing and
processing time.
ON
OFF
[Y8,YA,YC,YE]
OFF
[Y9,YB,YD,YF]
ON
BUSY signal
[XC,XD,XE,XF]
Md.26 Axis operation

status
OFF
t1
Standing by
t3
Inching operation
Standing by
t2
signal
[X14,X15,X16,X17]
ON
OFF
t4
Fig. 11.13 Inching operation timing and processing times

Normal timing times
Unit : ms
t1
t2
t3
t4
1.0 to 4.0
5.5 to 7.9
0 to 3.5
Depending on
parameters
Depending on the operating statuses of the other axes, delay may occur in the
t1 timing time.
11 - 19
11 MANUAL CONTROL
MELSEC-Q
11.3.2 Inching operation execution procedure

The inching operation is carried out by the following procedure.
STEP 1
Set the positioning parameters.

)
Preparation
Refer to Chapter 5
and Section 11.3.3.

<Method 1>
Pr.1 to Pr.31 )
Directly set (write) the parameters in the QD75 using GX

Configurator-QP.
<Method 2>
Set (write) the parameters from the PLC CPU to the QD75 using
the PLC program (TO command).
STEP 2
Set the" Cd.16 inching movement amount".
(Control data setting)
Refer to Section
11.3.4.
Create a PLC program in which the "JOG start

signal" is turned ON by an inching operation start
command.
STEP 3

PLC program for executing the inching
operation.
(Set the control data in the QD75 buffer memory using the TO
command.)

Refer to Chapter 6.
Inching operation
start
Monitoring of the
inching operation
Turn ON the JOG start signal.
STEP 4
Turn ON the JOG start signal of the axis to be started.

Y8
YA
YC
YE
Y9
YB
YD
YF
STEP 5
Monitor the inching operation status.
<Method 1>
<Method 2>
Inching operation
stop
STEP 6
Turn OFF the JOG operation start signal that is ON.
End the inching operation after moving a workpiece

by an inching movement amount with the PLC
program created in STEP 2.
End of control
REMARK

11 - 20
11 MANUAL CONTROL
MELSEC-Q
11.3.3 Setting the required parameters for inching operation

The "Positioning parameters" must be set to carry out inching operation.
inching operation. When only inching operation will be carried out, no parameters
other than those shown below need to be set. (Use the initial values or setting values
within a range where no error occurs for trouble-free operation.)
Setting item
Setting requirement

(setting details)
Pr.1
Unit setting
3 (PLS)
Pr.2
No. of pulses per rotation (AP) (Unit: PLS)
20000
Pr.3
Movement amount per rotation (AL) (Unit: PLS)
20000
Pr.4
Pr.11
Pr.12
2147483647
Pr.13
2147483648
Pr.14
Pr.15
Pr.17
300
Pr.31
JOG speed limit value (Unit: PLS/s)
20000
1 (1 times)
0

0 (valid)

REMARK
When carrying out other controls ("major positioning control", "high-level
positioning control", and "OPR positioning control"), the respective setting items
must also be set.
11 - 21
11 MANUAL CONTROL
MELSEC-Q
11.3.4 Creating a program to enable/disable the inching operation

A PLC program must be created to execute an inching operation. Consider the
"required control data setting", "start conditions", and "start time chart" when creating
the program.
The following shows an example when an inching operation is started for axis 1. (The
example shows the inching operation when a "10.0 m" is set in " Cd.16 Inching
movement amount".)

The control data shown below must be set to execute an inching operation. The
setting is carried out with the PLC program.
Cd.16
Setting
value
Setting item
Inching movement
amount
100
Setting details
Set the setting value so that the JOG speed
limit value is not increased larger than the
maximum output pulse
Axis Axis Axis Axis

1
2
3
4
1517 1617 1717 1817
Refer to Section 5.7 "List of control data" for information on setting details.
Start conditions
Device
Signal name
PLC READY signal
Signal state
Axis Axis Axis Axis

1
2
3
4
Y0
QD75 READY signal
X0
All axis servo ON
Y1
ON
Interface Axis stop signal

signal
Accessible to QD75 buffer

memory
X1
Y4
X10 X11 X12 X13
BUSY signal
XC
signal
Positioning complete signal is

OFF
OFF
X14 X15 X16 X17
X8
X9
M code ON signal
X4
X5
Stop signal
External
Upper limit (FLS)
signal
Lower limit (RLS)
Y5
Y6
XD
XE
Y7
XF
XA
XB
X6
X7
calculation.
11 - 22
11 MANUAL CONTROL
MELSEC-Q
Start time chart

t
Reverse run inching operation
ON
Forward run JOG start signal [Y8]

OFF
ON
Reverse run JOG start signal [Y9]

OFF
ON
OFF
All axis servo ON [Y1]
OFF
QD75 READY signal [X0]
OFF
BUSY signal [XC]
OFF
ON
ON
Error detection signal [X8]
OFF
ON

OFF
Fig. 11.14 Inching operation start time chart
11 - 23
11 MANUAL CONTROL
MELSEC-Q

Example
No.11 Inching operation setting program
<Set inching movement amount>
<Write inching movement amount>
No.12 JOG operation/inching operation execution program
<JOG/inching operation flag ON>
<JOG/inching operation termination>
<Execute forward JOG/inching operation>
<Execute reverse JOG operation>
11 - 24
11 MANUAL CONTROL
MELSEC-Q
11.3.5 Inching operation example

When "stop signal" is turned ON during inching operation:
If "stop signal" is turned ON during inching operation, the inching operation will be
stopped.
While the stop signal is turned ON, the JOG start signal is ignored.
The inching operation can be re-started when the stop signal is turned OFF and
then re-turned ON.
ON
while the stop signal is ON will be ignored.
ON
PLC READY
signal [Y0]
OFF
All axis servo ON

[Y1]
OFF
QD75 READY
signal
[X0]
OFF
ON
ON
ON
Forward run JOG

start signal
[Y8,YA,YC,YE]
OFF
Axis stop signal

[Y4,Y5,Y6,Y7]
OFF
BUSY signal
[XC,XD,XE,XF]
OFF
ON
ON
Fig. 11.15 Operation when stop signal is turned ON during inching operation
POINT
The QD75 will not accept "JOG start signal" while "stop signal" is turned ON.
11 - 25
11 MANUAL CONTROL
MELSEC-Q
When "JOG start signal" is turned ON when peripheral devices are in the
test mode:
If "JOG star signal" is turned ON when peripheral devices are in the test mode, the
"JOG start signal" will be ignored and inching operation will not be carried out.
Inching operation not
possible because JOG
Inching operation not possible start signal does not rise
because the operation is in the
test mode.
Forward run inching

operation executed
ON
OFF
In test mode
[Y8,YA,YC,YE]
OFF
ON
Fig. 11.16 Operation when JOG start signal is turned ON in test mode
When "JOG start signal" is turned ON immediately after stop signal OFF
(within 100 ms):
If "JOG start signal" is turned ON immediately after the stop signal is turned OFF
(within 100 ms), the "JOG start signal" will be ignored and inching operation will
not be carried out.
ON
OFF

[Y8,YA,YC,YE]
ON
Axis stop signal
[Y4,Y5,Y6,Y7]
OFF
100ms
A rise of JOG start signal
is ignored.
Fig. 11.17 Operation when JOG start signal is turned ON immediately after stop signal is turned OFF
11 - 26
11 MANUAL CONTROL
MELSEC-Q
11.4 Manual pulse generator operation

11.4.1 Outline of manual pulse generator operation
Important
Create the PLC program so that " Cd.21 Manual pulse generator enable flag" is
always set to "0" (disabled) when a manual pulse generator operation is not carried
out.
Mistakenly touching the manual pulse generator when the manual pulse
generator enable flag is set to "1" (enable) can cause accidents or incorrect
positioning.

In manual pulse generator operations, pulses are input to the QD75 from the
manual pulse generator. This causes the same No. of input pulses to be output
from the QD75 to the servo amplifier, and the workpiece is moved in the
designated direction.
The following shows and example of manual pulse generator operation.
1)
When the " Cd.21 Manual pulse generator enable flag" is set to "1", the BUSY signal
turns ON and the manual pulse generator operation is enabled.
2)
The workpiece is moved corresponding to the No. of pulses input from the manual pulse
generator.
3)
The workpiece movement stops when no more pulses are input from the manual pulse
generator.
4)
When the " Cd.21 Manual pulse generator enable flag" is set to "0", the BUSY signal
turns OFF and the manual pulse generator operation is disabled.
Manual pulse
generator
operation stops
1) 2)
Cd. 21 Manual pulse
generator enable flag
3)
ON
1
4)
ON
BUSY signal [XC, XD, YE, XF]
OFF
Manual pulse
generator input

[X10, X11, X12, X13]
OFF
Manual pulse generator operation enabled
[Precautions]
1 If the input from the manual pulse generator stops, the machine will decelerate to a stop within
60 ms.
2 The start complete signal does not turn ON in manual pulse generator operation.
Fig. 11.18 Manual pulse generator operation
11 - 27
11 MANUAL CONTROL
MELSEC-Q
Restricted items
A manual pulse generator is required to carry out manual pulse generator
operation.

The following details must be understood before carrying out manual pulse
generator operation.
(1) The speed during manual pulse generator operation is not limited by the
" Pr.8 Speed limit value".
(2) If the " Cd.21 Manual pulse generator enable flag" is turned ON while the
QD75 is BUSY (BUSY signal ON), a warning will occur (warning code 100:
start during operation).
(3) If a stop factor occurs during manual pulse generator operation, the operation
will stop, and the BUSY signal will turn OFF.
At this time, the " Cd.21 Manual pulse generator enable flag" will be left ON,
but manual pulse generator operation will not be possible. To carry out manual
pulse generator operation again, measures must be carried out to eliminate
the stop factor. Once eliminated, the operation can be carried out again by
turning the " Cd.21 Manual pulse generator enable flag" ON OFF ON.
(4) Pulses will not be output if an error occurs when the manual pulse generator
operation starts.
Important
When the speed command beyond the following calculated value is input into the
positioning module using the manual pulse generator, the servo error "2035: data
error (detection of the alarm "35: command frequency error at the servo amplifier)
may occur.
The following calculation formula is used to judge whether or not an error will occur.
Output pulse of manual pulse generator Magnification Electronic gear
(number of pulses per revolution/movement amount per revolution) Number of
revolutions of manual pulse generator for one second = Speed command pps
When the speed command is larger than 2500000pps (2.5Mpps), an error may
occur.
[Calculation example for setting]
100pls 50 131072 / 500 2
=2621440pps
(Speed of two revolutions for one second) =2.6Mpps
Occurrence of data error
With detection of an alarm at the servo amplifier, "2035: data error" will be given
when the command from the positioning module is larger than 2.5Mpps.
Because the command is issued according to the pulse input irrelevant of the
speed limit setting when the manual pulse generator is used for entry, "2035: data
error" will occur if a speed command, which the servo amplifier cannot follow up, is
input.
In the case of a high setting magnification, there is a high possibility of error
occurrence. Therefore, perform the setting so that the setting magnification of the
manual pulse generator decreases to the level where "2035: data error" will not
occur.
11 - 28
11 MANUAL CONTROL
MELSEC-Q
REMARK
One QD75 module can be connected to one manual pulse generator.

The QD75 module can simultaneously command to the axis 1 to axis 4 servo
amplifier by one manual pulse generator.
(axis 1 to axis 4 simultaneous operation is possible.)

When the operation is stopped by the stroke limit (limit signal OFF), manual pulse
generator operation can be performed in the direction in which the limit signal turns
ON after an error reset. (An error will occur again if pulse input is provided in the
direction in which the limit signal turns OFF is turned ON.)
V
Manual pulse
generator operation

operation possible

operation not possible
ON
Upper/lower
limit signal
OFF
Manual pulse generator operation timing and processing time

The following drawing shows details of the manual pulse generator operation
timing and processing time.
Cd. 21 Manual pulse generator
enable flag
0
t3
Manual pulse generator input

pulses
BUSY signal
t4
t1
[XC,XD,XE,XF]
Positioning start complete

signal
[X10, X11, X12, X13]
The start complete signal does not turn ON in manual pulse generator operation.
Standing by
In manual pulse generator operation
Standing by
t2
Fig. 11.19 Manual pulse generator operation timing and processing times
Normal timing times
Unit : ms
t1
t2
t3
t4
113.6
4.34
4.34
113.6
Delays may occur in the t1 timing time due to the operation status of other axes.
11 - 29
11 MANUAL CONTROL
MELSEC-Q
Position control by manual pulse generator operation

In manual pulse generator operation, the position is moved by a "manual pulse
generator 1 pulse movement amount" per pulse.
The current feed value in the positioning control by manual pulse generator
operation can be calculated using the expression shown below.
Current feed value = Number of input pulses Cd.20 Manual pulse generator 1
pulse input magnification Manual pulse generator 1 pulse
movement amount
Pr.1 Unit setting
Manual pulse
generator 1 pulse
movement amount
mm
inch
degree
PLS
0.1m
0.00001inch
0.00001degree
1PLS
For example, when " Pr.1 Unit setting" is mm and " Cd.20 Manual pulse
generator 1 pulse input magnification" is 2, and 100 pulses are input from the
manual pulse generator, the current feed value is as follows.
100 2 0.1 = 20 [m]
Speed control by manual pulse generation operation

The speed during positioning control by manual pulse generator operation is a
speed corresponding to the No. of input pulses per unit time, and can be obtained
using the following equation.
Output command frequency = Input frequency Cd.20 Manual pulse generator
1 pulse input magnification
11 - 30
11 MANUAL CONTROL
MELSEC-Q
11.4.2 Manual pulse generator operation execution procedure

The manual pulse generator operation is carried out by the following procedure.
STEP 1
Set the positioning parameters

)
Preparation
Refer to Chapter 5
and Section 11.4.3.
Pr.1 to Pr.24 )

<Method 1>
Directly set (write) the parameters in the QD75 using
GX Configurator-QP.
<Method 2>
Set (write) the parameters from the PLC CPU to the QD75
using the PLC program (TO command).

STEP 2
Refer to Section
11.4.4.
Set " Cd. 20 Manual pulse generator 1 pulse input
PLC program to enable/disable the manual pulse
magnification". (control data setting)
generator operation. (Set the control data in the QD75

buffer memory using the TO command.)
Create a PLC program in which the enable/disable is

set for the manual pulse generator operation.
(" Cd. 21 Manual pulse generator enable flag" setting.)
STEP 3
Manual pulse
generator operation
start
STEP 4
Monitoring of the
manual pulse
generator operation
STEP 5

Issue a command to enable the manual pulse generator

operation, and input the signals from the manual pulse
generator.
Write "1" in " Cd.21 Manual pulse generator enable

flag", and operate the manual pulse generator.

Monitor the manual pulse generator operation.
<Method 1>
<Method 2>
STEP 6
Manual pulse
generator operation
stop
End the input from the manual pulse generator,

and issue a command to disable the manual pulse
Stop operating the manual pulse generator, and write "0"

in " Cd. 21 Manual pulse generator enable flag".
End of control
REMARK

11 - 31
11 MANUAL CONTROL
MELSEC-Q
11.4.3 Setting the required parameters for manual pulse generator operation
The "Positioning parameters" must be set to carry out manual pulse generator
operation.
manual pulse generator operation. When only manual pulse generator operation will
be carried out, no parameters other than those shown below need to be set. (Use the
initial values or setting values within a range where no error occurs for trouble-free
operation.)
Setting item
Setting requirement

(setting details)
Pr.1
Unit setting
3 (PLS)
Pr.2
No. of pulses per rotation (AP) (Unit: PLS)
20000
Pr.3
Movement amount per rotation (AL) (Unit: PLS)
20000
Pr.4
Pr.8
Speed limit value (Unit: PLS/s)
Pr.11
Pr.12
2147483647
Pr.13
2147483648
Pr.14
Pr.15
Pr.17
Pr.22
Pr.24
Manual pulse generator input selection
1 (1 times)
20000
0

0 (valid)
300
0 (Manual pulse generator
input is negative logic.)
0 (4 times multiplication of A
phase/B phase)

REMARK
When carrying out other control ("major positioning control", "high-level positioning
control", "OPR positioning control"), the respective setting items must also be
matched and set.
Parameters are set for each axis. But Pr.22 Manual pulse generator input logic
(b8), Pr.24 is set only for axis 1. (The setting for axes 2,3, and 4 is ignored.)
11 - 32
11 MANUAL CONTROL
MELSEC-Q
11.4.4 Creating a program to enable/disable the manual pulse generator operation

A PLC program must be created to execute a manual pulse generator operation.
Consider the "required control data setting", "start conditions" and "start time chart"
when creating the program.
The following shows an example when a manual pulse generator operation is started
for axis 1.

The control data shown below must be set to execute a manual pulse generator
operation. The setting is carried out with the PLC program.
Setting
value
Setting item
Manual pulse
Cd.20 generator 1 pulse
input magnification
Manual pulse
Cd.21 generator enable
flag
1 (0)
Setting details
Axis Axis Axis Axis

1
2
3
4
Set the manual pulse generator 1 pulse input

magnification.
1522 1622 1722 1822

1523 1623 1723 1823
Set "1: Enable manual pulse generator

operation". (Set "0: Disable manual pulse
generator operation" when finished with the
manual pulse generator operation.)
1524 1624 1724 1824
Start conditions
Device
Signal name
Signal state
Axis Axis Axis Axis

1
2
3
4
PLC READY signal
Y0
QD75 READY signal
X0
All axis servo ON
Y1
QD75 buffer memory

ON
X1
Interface
signal
Axis stop signal
Y4
X10 X11 X12 X13
Y5
Y6
Y7
BUSY signal
XC
XD
XE
XF
X8
X9
XA
XB
M code ON signal
X4
X5
X6
X7
Stop signal
External
Upper limit (FLS)
signal
Lower limit (RLS)
calculation.
11 - 33
11 MANUAL CONTROL
MELSEC-Q
Start time chart
Forward run
t
Reverse run
Pulse input A phase

Pulse input B phase
ON
[Y0]
PLC READY signal
OFF
ON
OFF
All axis servo ON
[Y1]
QD75 READY signal
[X0]
[X10] OFF
BUSY signal
[XC] OFF
[X8] OFF
ON
OFF
ON

enable flag
1 pulse input magnification
Fig. 11.20 Manual pulse generator operation start time chart
11 - 34
11 MANUAL CONTROL
MELSEC-Q

Example
No.13 Manual pulse generator operation program
<Pulsate manual pulse generator operation command>

<Set manual pulse generator input scale per pulse>
<Write manual pulse generator operation enable>
<Write data for manual pulse generator>
<Turn ON manual pulse generator operating flag>
<Pulsate manual pulse generator operation disble
command>
<Write manual pulse generator operation disble>
<Turn OFF manual pulse generator operating flag>
11 - 35
11 MANUAL CONTROL
MELSEC-Q
MEMO
11 - 36
Chapter 12 Control Sub Functions
The details and usage of the "sub functions" added and used in combination with
the main functions are explained in this chapter.
A variety of sub functions are available, including functions specifically for machine
OPR and generally related functions such as control compensation, etc.
More appropriate, finer control can be carried out by using these sub functions.
Each sub function is used together with a main function by creating matching
parameter settings and PLC programs. Read the execution procedures and
settings for each sub function, and set as required.
12.1 Outline of sub functions ...........................................................................................12- 2
12.1.1 Outline of sub functions .............................................................................12- 2
12.2 Sub functions specifically for machine OPR...........................................................12- 4
12.2.1 OPR retry function......................................................................................12- 4
12.2.2 OP shift function ........................................................................................12- 8
12.3 Functions for compensating the control.................................................................12- 11
12.3.1 Backlash compensation function..............................................................12- 11
12.3.2 Electronic gear function ............................................................................12- 13
12.3.3 Near pass function ....................................................................................12- 20
12.4 Functions to limit the control...................................................................................12- 23
12.4.1 Speed limit function...................................................................................12- 23
12.4.2 Torque limit function..................................................................................12- 25
12.4.3 Software stroke limit function....................................................................12- 29
12.4.4 Hardware stroke limit function ..................................................................12- 35
12.5 Functions to change the control details .................................................................12- 37
12.5.1 Speed change function .............................................................................12- 37
12.5.2 Override function.......................................................................................12- 44
12.5.3 Acceleration/deceleration time change function ......................................12- 47
12.5.4 Torque change function ............................................................................12- 51
12.6 Absolute position system........................................................................................12- 54
12.7 Other functions........................................................................................................12- 56
12.7.1 Step function .............................................................................................12- 56
12.7.2 Skip function..............................................................................................12- 61
12.7.3 M code output function..............................................................................12- 64
12.7.4 Teaching function......................................................................................12- 68
12.7.5 Target position change function ...............................................................12- 74
12.7.6 Command in-position function ..................................................................12- 78
12.7.7 Acceleration/deceleration processing function.........................................12- 81
12.7.8 Pre-reading start function..........................................................................12- 84
12.7.9 Deceleration start flag function .................................................................12- 89
12.7.10 Stop command processing for deceleration stop function.......................12- 93
12.8 Other functions........................................................................................................12- 96
12.8.1 Servo ON/OFF ..........................................................................................12- 96
12.8.2 Follow up function .....................................................................................12- 97
12.9 Precautions for MR-J2M-B connection ..................................................................12- 98
12 - 1
12
12 CONTROL SUB FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
12.1 Outline of sub functions

"Sub functions" are functions that compensate, limit, add functions, etc., to the control
when the main functions are executed. These sub functions are executed by
parameter settings, commands from GX Configurator-QP, sub function PLC programs,
etc.
12.1.1 Outline of sub functions

The following table shows the types of sub functions available.
Sub function
Functions
characteristic
to machine
OPR
OPR retry function
OP shift function
function
Functions that
compensate
control
Near pass function
Details
This function retries the OPR with the upper/lower limit switches during
machine OPR. This allows machine OPR to be carried out even if the axis is
not returned to before the near-point dog with JOG operation, etc.
After returning to the machine OP, this function offsets the position by the
designated distance from the machine OP position and sets that position as
the OP address.
This function compensates the mechanical backlash. Feed pulses equivalent
to the set backlash amount are output each time the movement direction
changes.
By setting the movement amount per pulse, this function can freely change
the machine movement amount per commanded pulse.
When the movement amount per pulse is set, a flexible positioning system
that matches the machine system can be structured.
This function suppresses the machine vibration when the speed changes
during continuous path control in the interpolation control.
If the command speed exceeds " Pr.8 Speed limit value" during control,
this function limits the commanded speed to within the " Pr.8 Speed limit
value" setting range.
If the torque generated by the servomotor exceeds " Pr.17
Functions that Torque limit function

limit control
function
function

Functions that
change control
details
Override function
Torque limit
setting value" during control, this function limits the generated torque to
within the " Pr.17 Torque limit setting value" setting range.
If a command outside of the upper/lower limit stroke limit setting range, set in
the parameters, is issued, this function will not execute positioning for that
command.
This function carries out deceleration stop with the limit switch connected to
the QD75 external device connector.
This function changes the speed during positioning.
Set the changed speed in the speed change buffer memory ( Cd.14 New
speed value), and change the speed with the speed change request
( Cd.15 Speed change request).
This function changes the speed within a percentage of 1 to 300% during
positioning. This is executed using " Cd.13 Positioning operation speed
override".
This function changes the acceleration/deceleration time during speed
change.
This function changes the "torque limit value" during control.
1 The near pass function is validated only when the machine of the standard specification carries out the position control
with the continuous path control mode.
It cannot be invalidated with parameters.
12 - 2
MELSEC-Q
Sub function
Absolute position system function
Details
This function holds the current value.
This function sets the absolute position coordinate in relation to the OP in the
machine movement range, and prevent the OP from being lost even if the
power supply is turned OFF to ON.
Step function
This function temporarily stops the operation to confirm the positioning

operation during debugging, etc.
The operation can be stopped at each "automatic deceleration" or
"positioning data".
Skip function
This function stops the positioning being executed (decelerates to a stop)

when the skip signal is input, and carries out the next positioning.
This function issues a sub work (clamp or drill stop, tool change, etc.)
according to the code No. (0 to 65535) set for each positioning data.
Teaching function
This function stores the address positioned with manual control into the
positioning address ( Da.6 Positioning address/movement amount) having
the designated positioning data No.

function
This function changes the target position during the execution of positioning.
At the same time, this also can change the speed.
Command in-position
function
At each automatic deceleration, this function calculates the remaining

distance for the QD75 to reach the positioning stop position, and when the
value is less than the set value, sets the "command in-position flag".
When using another sub work before ending the control, use this function as
a trigger for the sub work.
process function
This function adjusts the control acceleration/deceleration.
This function shortens the virtual start time.

function
Function that turns ON the flag when the constant speed status or
acceleration status switches to the deceleration status during position
control, whose operation pattern is "Positioning complete", to make the
stop timing known.
Other functions

Function that selects a deceleration curve when a stop cause occurs
during deceleration stop processing to speed 0.
function
12 - 3
MELSEC-Q
12.2 Sub functions specifically for machine OPR

The sub functions specifically for machine OPR include the "OPR retry function" and
"OP shift function". Each function is executed by parameter setting.
12.2.1 OPR retry function

When the workpiece goes past the OP without stopping during positioning control, it
may not move back in the direction of the OP although a machine OPR is commanded,
depending on the workpiece position. This normally means the workpiece has to be
moved to a position before the near-point dog by a JOG operation, etc., to start the
machine OPR again. However, by using the OPR retry function, a machine OPR can
be carried out regardless of the workpiece position.
The details shown below explain about the "OPR retry function".
[1] Control details
[2] Precautions during control
[3] Setting the OPR retry function
[1] Control details

The following drawing shows the operation of the OPR retry function.
(1) OPR retry point return retry operation when the workpiece is within the range
between the upper and lower limits.
1) The movement starts in the " Pr.44
OPR direction" by a machine OPR start.
2) The operation decelerates when the limit signal OFF is detected.

3) After stopping due to the limit signal OFF detection, the operation moves at the " Pr.46
the opposite direction of the " Pr.44
OPR speed" in
OPR direction".
4) The operation decelerates when the near-point dog turns OFF.

5) After stopping due to the near-point dog OFF, a machine OPR is carried out in the " Pr.44
direction".
6) Machine OPR completion
2)
1)
5)
6)
3)
4)
Limit signal OFF
ON
Near-point dog
Hardware limit switch

Zero signal
Fig. 12.1 OPR retry operation by limit signal detection
12 - 4
OPR
MELSEC-Q
(2) OPR retry operation when the workpiece is outside the range between the
upper and lower limits.
1) When the direction from the workpiece to the OP is the same as the " Pr.44 OPR direction", a
normal machine OPR is carried out.
Machine OPR start
OP
Pr. 44 OPR direction

Hardware upper limit switch
Hardware lower limit switch

Near-point dog
Zero signal
Movement range
2) When the direction from the workpiece to the OP is the opposite direction from the " Pr.44 OPR
direction", the operation carries out a deceleration stop when the near-point dog turns OFF, and
then carries out a machine OPR in the direction set in " Pr.44 OPR direction".
Machine OPR start
OP
Hardware upper limit switch
Hardware lower limit switch

Near-point dog
Zero signal
Movement range
Fig. 12.2 OPR retry operation from on limit (limit signal OFF)
12 - 5
MELSEC-Q
(3) Setting the dwell time during an OPR retry

The OPR retry function can perform such function as the dwell time using
" Pr.57 Dwell time at OPR retry" when the reverse run operation is carried
out due to detection by the limit signal for upper and lower limits and when
the machine OPR is executed after the near point dog is turned OFF to stop
the operation.
" Pr.57 Dwell time during OPR" is validated when the operation stops at
the "A" and "B" positions in the following drawing. (The dwell time is the
same value at both positions "A" and "B".)
Stop by limit
signal detection
Machine OPR
executed again
OP
A
Machine OPR start
Stop by near-point
dog OFF
Reverse run operation

after limit signal detection
Near-point dog
Limit signal OFF

Hardware limit switch
Zero signal
Fig. 12.3 Setting the dwell time during an OPR retry
12 - 6
MELSEC-Q
[2] Precaution during control

(1) The following table shows whether the OPR retry function may be executed
by the " Pr.43 OPR method".
Pr.43 OPR method
Execution status of OPR retry function
Near-point dog method
: Execution possible
Count method 1)
Count method 2)
Data set method
(2) Always establish upper/lower limit switches at the upper/lower limit positions
of the machine, and connect an QD75 module. If the OPR retry function is
used without hardware stroke limit switches, the motor will continue rotation
until a hardware stroke limit signal is detected.
(3) Always wire QD75 upper/lower limit switches even when the OPR function
is invalidated. Control cannot be carried out with the QD75 unless the wiring
is carried out.
(4) Do not carry out settings so that the servo amplifier power turns OFF by the
upper/lower limit switches connected to the QD75. If the servo amplifier
power is turned OFF, the OPR retry cannot be carried out.
(5) The operation decelerates upon detection of the hardware limit signal, and
the movement starts in the opposite direction. In this case, however, an
error (104, 105) is not produced.
[3] Setting the OPR retry function

To use the "OPR retry function", set the required details in the parameters shown
in the following table, and write them to the QD75.
When the parameters are set, the OPR retry function will be added to the
machine OPR control. The set details are validated at the rising edge (OFF
ON) of the PLC READY signal (Y0). Set " Pr.57 Dwell time during OPR retry"
according to the user's requirements.
Setting item
Setting
value
Pr.48
OPR retry
Pr.57
Dwell time during

OPR retry
Setting details
Factory-set
initial value
Set "1: Carry out OPR retry by limit switch".
Set the deceleration stop time during OPR retry.

(Random value between 0 and 65535 (ms))
Refer to Section 5.2 "List of parameters" for setting details.
REMARK

It is recommended that the parameters be set whenever possible with GX
12 - 7
MELSEC-Q
12.2.2 OP shift function

When a machine OPR is carried out, the OP is normally established using the nearpoint dog, stopper, and zero signal. However, by using the OP shift function, the
machine can be moved a designated movement amount from the position where the
zero signal was detected. A mechanically established OP can then be interpreted at
that point.
The OP shift function can be used without relation to " Pr.43 OPR method".
The details shown below explain about the "OP shift function".
[1] Control details
[2] Setting range for the OP shift amount
[3] Movement speed during OP shift
[5] Setting the OP shift function
[1] Control details

The following drawing shows the operation of the OP shift function.
Pr. 46 OPR speed
Speed selected by the" Pr. 56

Speed designation during
OP shift"
Machine OPR start
Pr.47 Creep speed

Shift operation carried out after
the deviation counter clear and reset.
Near-point dog
Zero signal
Fig. 12.4 OP shift operation
12 - 8
MELSEC-Q
[2] Setting range for the OP shift amount

Set the OP shift amount within the range from the detected zero signal to the
upper/lower limit switches.
Setting range of the
negative OP
shift amount
Setting range of the positive OP shift amount
Address decrease
direction
Address increase
direction
Near-point dog
Upper limit switch
Lower limit switch

Zero signal
Fig. 12.5 Setting range for the OP shift amount
[3] Movement speed during OP shift

When using the OP shift function, the movement speed during the OP shift is set
in " Pr.56 Speed designation during OP shift". The movement speed during the
OP shift is selected from either the " Pr.46 OPR speed" or the " Pr.47 Creep
speed".
The following drawings show the movement speed during the OP shift when a
mechanical OPR is carried out by the near-point dog method.
(1) OP shift operation at the " Pr.46 OPR speed"
(When " Pr.56 speed designation during OP shift" is 0)
Pr. 44 OPR
direction
Pr. 46 OPR
speed
When the " Pr. 53 OP
OP
Machine OPR start
Near-point dog
Zero signal
Fig. 12.6 OP shift operation at the OPR speed
12 - 9
MELSEC-Q
(2) OP shift operation at the " Pr.47 Creep speed"

(When " Pr.56 Speed designation during OP shift" is 1)
Pr. 44 OPR
direction
Pr. 47 Creep
speed

Zero point
OP
Machine OPR start

Near-point dog
Zero signal
Fig. 12.7 OP shift operation at the creep speed

The following data are set after the OP shift amount is complete.
OPR complete flag ( Md.31 Status: b4)
Md.34 Movement amount after near-point dog ON (" Pr.53 OP shift
amount" is not added.)

OPR request flag ( Md.31 Status: b3) is reset after completion of the OP
shift.
[5] Setting the OP shift function

To use the "OP shift function", set the required details in the parameters shown in
the following table, and write them to the QD75.
When the parameters are set, the OP shift function will be added to the machine
OPR control. The set details are validated at the rising edge (OFF ON) of the
PLC READY signal (Y0).
Setting
value
Setting item
Pr.53
OP shift amount
Pr.56
Speed
designation
during OP shift
Setting details
Factory-set
initial value
Set the shift amount during the OP shift.
Select the speed during the OP shift

0: Pr.46 OPR speed
1: Pr.47 Creep speed
REMARK

12 - 10
MELSEC-Q
12.3 Functions for compensating the control

The sub functions for compensating the control include the "backlash compensation
function", "electronic gear function", and "near pass function". Each function is
executed by parameter setting or PLC program creation and writing.
12.3.1 Backlash compensation function

The "backlash compensation function" compensates the backlash amount in the
mechanical system. When the backlash compensation amount is set, an extra amount
of command equivalent to the set backlash amount is output every time the movement
direction changes.
The details shown below explain about the "backlash compensation function".
[1] Control details
[3] Setting the backlash compensation function
[1] Control details

The following drawing shows the operation of the backlash compensation
function.
Worm gear
Workpiece
Fig. 12.8 Backlash compensation amount
12 - 11
MELSEC-Q

(1) The feed command of the backlash compensation amount are not added to
the " Md.20 Current feed value" or " Md.21 Machine feed value".
(2) Always carry out a machine OPR before starting the control when using the
backlash compensation function (when " Pr.11 Backlash compensation
amount" is set). The backlash in the mechanical system cannot be correctly
compensated if a machine OPR is not carried out.
(3) Backlash compensation, which includes the movement amount and
" Pr.11 Backlash compensation amount", is output the moment at the
moving direction changes.
[3] Setting the backlash compensation function

To use the "backlash compensation function", set the "backlash compensation
amount" in the parameter shown in the following table, and write it to the QD75.
The set details are validated at the rising edge (OFF ON) of the PLC READY
signal (Y0).
Setting item
Pr.11
Setting
value
Backlash
compensation
amount
Setting details
Set the backlash compensation amount.
Factory-set
initial value
0
REMARK

12 - 12
MELSEC-Q
12.3.2 Electronic gear function

The "electronic gear function" adjusts the pulses calculated and output according to the
parameters set in the QD75 with the actual machine movement amount.
The "electronic gear function" has the following three functions ( [A] to [C] ).
[A] During machine movement, the function increments in the QD75 values less
than one pulse that could not be pulse output, and outputs the incremented
amount of pulses when the total incremented value reached one pulse or
more.
[B] When machine OPR is completed, current value changing is completed,
speed control is started (except when current feed value change is present), or
fixed-feed control is started, the function clears to "0" the cumulative values of
less than one pulse which could not be output. (If the cumulative value is
cleared, an error will occur by a cleared amount in the feed machine value.
Control can be constantly carried out at the same machine movement amount,
even when the fixed-feed control is continued.)
[C] The function compensates the mechanical system error of the command
movement amount and actual movement amount by adjusting the "electronic
gear".
(The "movement amount per pulse" value is defined by " Pr.2 No. of pulses
per rotation (AP)", " Pr.3 Movement amount per rotation (AL)" and " Pr.4
Unit magnification (AM)".)
The QD75 automatically carries out the processing for [A] and [B].
The details shown below explain about the "electronic gear function", including the
method for compensating the error in [C] above, etc.
[1] Basic concept of the electronic gear
[2] The method for compensating the error
12 - 13
MELSEC-Q
[1] Basic concept of the electronic gear

The electronic gear is an item which determines how many rotations (rotations by
how many pulses) the motor must make in order to move the machine according
to the programmed movement amount.
QD75
Control
value
Control
unit
Reduction retio
PLS
AP
AL AM
PLS
Servo
amplifier
Machine
M
ENC
PLS
Feedback pulse
The basic concept of the electronic gear is represented by the following

expression.
Pr.2
(No. of pulses per rotation)
Pr.3
(Movement amount per rotation) = AL
Pr.4
(Unit magnification)
= AM
Electronic gear =
AP
= AP
=
AP
AL AM
(1)
Set values for AP, AL and AM so that this related equation is established.
However, because values to be set for AP, AL and AM have the settable range,
values calculated (reduced) from the above related equation must be contained
in the setting range for AP, AL and AM.
12 - 14
MELSEC-Q
(1) For "Ball screw" + "Reduction gear"

When the ball screw pitch is 10mm, the motor is the HC-MF (8192
PLS/rev) and the reduction ratio of the reduction gear is 9/44.
Machine
M
Reduction ratio 9/44
First, find how many millimeters the load (machine) will travel ( S) when
the motor turns one revolution (AP).
AP(No. of pulses per rotation) = 8192

S(Machine travel value per motor revolution)
= Ball screw pitch Reduction ratio
= 10 [mm] 9/44
= 10000.0 [m] 9/44
Substitute this for the above expression (1).

At this time, make calculation with the reduction ratio 9/44 remaining as a
fraction.
AP
=
=
=
=
=
8192
10000.0 [m] 9/44
8192 44
10000.0 9
360448
90000.0
45056
11250.0
45056 (AP)
11250.0 (AL) 1 (AM)
45056 (AP)
1125.0 (AL) 10 (AM)
Thus, AP, AL and AM to be set are as follows.

AP = 45056 ... Pr.2
AL = 11250.0 Pr.3
AM = 1 Pr.4
AP = 45056 . Pr.2
or
AL
= 1125.0 Pr.3
AM = 10 Pr.4
Note): These two examples of settings are only examples. There are
settings other than these examples.)
12 - 15
MELSEC-Q
(2) When "PLS (pulse)" is set as the control unit

When using PLS (pulse) as the control unit, set the electronic gear as
follows.
AP = "No. of pulses per rotation"
AL = "Movement amount per rotation"
AM = 1
Example) When the motor is the HC-MF (8192PLS/rev)
AP = 8192 ... Pr.2
AL = 8192 ... Pr.3
AM = 1 .. Pr.4
(3) When "degree" is set as the control unit for a rotary axis
When the rotary axis is used, the motor is HC-SF (16384PLS/rev) and the
reduction ratio of the reduction gear is 3/11
Reduction
ratio 3/11
First, find how many degrees the load (machine) will travel ( S) when the
motor turns one revolution (AP).

S(Machine travel value per motor revolution)
= 360.00000 [degree] Reduction ratio
= 360.00000 3/11
AP
=
=
=
=
=
16384 [PLS]
360.00000 [degree] 3/11
16384 [PLS] 11
10000.0 3
180224
1080.00000
11264
67.50000
11264 (AP)
0.06750 (AL) 1000 (AM)
12 - 16
11264 (AP)
67.50000(AL) 1 (AM)
MELSEC-Q

AP = 11264 . Pr.2
AP = 11264 ... Pr.2
AL = 67.50000 Pr.3
or
AM = 1 .. Pr.4
AL
= 0.06750 Pr.3
AM = 1000 . Pr.4
Note): These two examples of settings are only examples. There are
settings other than these examples.)
(4) When "mm" is set as the control unit for conveyor drive
(calculation including )
When the belt conveyor drive is used, the conveyor diameter is 135mm,
the pulley ratio is 1/3, the motor is HC-SF (16384PLS/rev) and the
reduction ratio of the reduction gear is 7/53.
135mm
Belt conver
Reduction ratio 7/53
Pulley ratio 1/3
As the travel value of the conveyor is used to exercise control, set "mm"
as the control unit.
First, find how many millimeters the load (machine) will travel ( S) when
the motor turns one revolution (AP).

S (Machine travel value per motor revolution)
= 135000.0 [m] Reduction ratio
= 135000.0 [m] 7/53 1/3
At this time, make calculation with the reduction ratio 7/53 1/3 remaining
as a fraction.
AP
AP
AL AM
=
=
16384 [PLS]
135000.0 [m]
135000.0
Here, make calculation on the assumption that

3.141592654.
AP
AP
AL AM
12 - 17
7/53 1/3
16384 53 3
2605056
2968805.058
is equal to
MELSEC-Q
AL has a significant number to first decimal place, round down numbers to

two decimal places.
Reduce a fraction in the above result.
AP
AP
AL AM
2605056
2968805.0
2605056 (AP)
2968805.0 (AL) 1(AM)

AP = 2605056 . Pr.2
AL = 2968805.0 .. Pr.3
AM = 1 .. Pr.4
This setting will produce an error for the true machine value, but it cannot
be helped. This error is as follows.
29688050/2605056
9450000
2605056
- 1 100 = -1.94 10
[%]
It is equivalent to an about 19.4[m] error in continuous 1km feed.
12 - 18
MELSEC-Q
[2] The method for compensating the error

When the position control is carried out using the "Electronic gear" set in a
parameter, this may produce an error between the command movement amount
(L) and the actual movement amount (L'). With QD75, this error is compensated
by adjusting the electronic gear. The "Error compensation amount", which is
used for error compensation, is defined as follows:
Error compensation amount =
Command movement amount (L)
(2)
Actual movement amount (L')
The electronic gear including an error compensation amount is shown

below.
AP
AL AM
AP'
L'
AL' AM'
QD75
AP
AL AM
Command Control
unit
value
L
L'
PLS
Servo
amplifier
1 if there is no error (in regular case)

Electronic gear taking an error
into consideration
QD75
AP'
AL' AM'
Command Control
value
unit
PLS
Servo
amplifier
Calculation example
(Conditions)
: 131072 [PLS]
: 5000.0 [m]
Unit magnification
:1
(Positioning results)
Command movement amount (L) : 100 [mm]
Actual movement amount (L')
: 101 [mm]
(Compensation
AP
AL AM
L'
131072
5000.0 1
100
101
131072 (AP')
5050(AL') 1(AM')
: 131072 Pr.2
: 5050.0 . Pr.3
Unit magnification
: 1 ... Pr.4
Set the post-compensation " Pr.2 No. of pulses per rotation (AP')",
" Pr.3 Movement amount per rotation (AL')", and " Pr.4 Unit
magnification (AM')" in the parameters, and write them to the QD75.
The set details are validated at the rising edge (OFF ON) of the PLC
READY signal (Y0).
12 - 19
MELSEC-Q
12.3.3 Near pass function

When continuous pass control is carried out using interpolation control, the near pass
function is carried out.
The "near pass function" is a function to suppress the mechanical vibration occurring at
the time of switching the positioning data when continuous pass control is carried out
using interpolation control.
[Near pass function]
The extra movement amount occurring at the end of each positioning data unit being
continuously executed is carried over to the next positioning data unit. Alignment is not
carried out, and thus the output speed drops are eliminated, and the mechanical
vibration occurring during speed changes can be suppressed. Because alignment is
not carried out, the operation is controlled on a path that passes near the position set
in " Da.6 Positioning address/movement amount".
The details shown below explain about the "near pass function".
[1] Control details
[1] Control details

The following drawing shows the path of the continuous path control.
[The path of the near pass]
Da. 6 Positioning address
Path of positioning data No.3
Path of positioning data No. 4
Speed dropping does not occur.
t
Positioning data No. 3 Positioning data No. 4
Fig. 12.9 The path of the continuous path control
12 - 20
[2]
MELSEC-Q
Precautions during control

(1) If the movement amount designated by the positioning data is small when
the continuous path control is executed, the output speed may not reach the
designated speed.
(2) If continuous path control is carried out, the output will suddenly reverse
when the reference axis movement direction changes from the positioning
data No. currently being executed to the next positioning data No.
If the sudden output reversal affects the mechanical system, carry out
control with continuous positioning control.
[Path during continuous path control]

Axis 2
Axis 1 (reference axis)
[Axis 1 output speed]

V
Output suddenly reverses.
Positioning data
No. 1
t
[Axis 2 output speed]

V
Positioning data
No. 1

t
Fig. 12.10 Path and output speed of various axes when movement direction varies during continuous
path control
12 - 21
MELSEC-Q
(3) When continuous path control of a circular interpolation is being carried out in
the near pass, an address in which the extra movement amount is subtracted
from the positioning address of the positioning data currently being executed is
replaced by the starting point address of the next positioning data No.
Because the starting point address will be replaced, a large arc error deviation
(error code: 506) may occur.
In this case, adjust the " Pr.41 Allowable circular interpolation error width".
starting point address
during the near pass
Address designated by positioning data No.1
Path of positioning
address pass
Path of near pass
Fig. 12.11 Arc error during the near pass

(4) When a circle center is designated to continuously designate the circular
interpolation control by a continuous path designation in the near pass, and
the positioning address and starting point address of that arc are the same
address, the path will make one circle using the two data items. This is
because the 2nd data starting point address is shifted by the extra amount of
the movement amount occurring from the 1st data.
Example
[Near pass]
Starting point address of positioning data No.1

Starting point address of
positioning data No.2
12 - 22
MELSEC-Q
12.4 Functions to limit the control

Functions to limit the control include the "speed limit function", "torque limit function",
"software stroke limit", and "hardware stroke limit". Each function is executed by
parameter setting or PLC program creation and writing.
12.4.1 Speed limit function

The speed limit function limits the command speed to a value within the "speed limit
value" setting range when the command speed during control exceeds the "speed limit
value".
The details shown below explain about the "speed limit function".
[1] Relation between the speed limit function and various controls
[3] Setting the speed limit function
[1] Relation between the speed limit function and various controls
The following table shows the relation of the "speed limit function" and various
controls.
Control type
OPR
control
Speed limit value
Machine OPR control

Fast OPR control
2 to 4-axes linear
Position 1-axis fixed-feed control
control 2 to 4-axes fixed-feed
control (interpolation)
Pr.8 Speed limit
value

Major
control
positioning
control
1 to 4-axes Speed control
Speed-position switching control,
Other
control
Manual
control
JUMP instruction, NOP

instruction, LOOP to
LEND
Setting value invalid
Pr.31 JOG speed
limit value
Setting is invalid
: Always set
: Setting not required (Setting value is invalid. Use the initial values or setting values
within a range where no error occurs.)
12 - 23
MELSEC-Q

If any axis exceeds " Pr.8 Speed limit value" during 2- to 4-axis speed control,
the axis in excess of the speed limit value is controlled at the speed limit value.
The speeds of the other axes interpolated are suppressed depending on their
command speed ratios.
If the reference axis exceeds " Pr.8 Speed limit value" during 2- to 4-axis linear
interpolation control, 2- to 4-axis fixed-feed control or 2-axis circular interpolation
control, the reference axis is controlled at the speed limit value (The speed limit
does not function on the interpolation axis side.)
[3] Setting the speed limit function

To use the "speed limit function", set the "speed limit value" in the parameters
shown in the following table, and write them to the QD75.
The set details are validated after they are written to the QD75.
Setting
value
Setting item
Pr.8
Pr.31
Speed limit value
JOG speed limit

value
Setting details
Set the speed limit value (max. speed during control).
Factory-set
initial value
200000
Set the speed limit value during JOG operation (max.

speed during control). (Note that Pr.31 JOG speed
limit value shall be less than or equal to Pr.8 Speed
20000
limit value.)
REMARK

12 - 24
MELSEC-Q
12.4.2 Torque limit function

The "torque limit function" limits the generated torque to a value within the "torque limit
value" setting range when the torque generated in the servomotor exceeds the "torque
limit value".
The "torque limit function" protects the deceleration function, limits the power of the
operation pressing against the stopper, etc. It controls the operation so that
unnecessary force is not applied to the load and machine.
The details shown below explain about the "torque limit function".
[1] Relation between the torque limit function and various controls
[2] Control details
[4] Setting the torque limit function
[1] Relation between the torque limit function and various controls
The following table shows the relation of the "torque limit function" and various
controls.
Torque limit
function
Control type
Torque limit value

" Pr.17 Torque limit setting
value" or " Cd.101 Torque
output setting value".
OPR
control
Machine OPR control
After the " Pr.47
Creep
speed" is reached, this value

becomes the " Pr.54 OPR
torque limit value".
Fast OPR control
2 to 4-axes linear
control 2 to 4-axes fixed-feed
control (interpolation)


Major
control
positioning
control
1 to 4-axes Speed control
Other
control
Manual
control

instruction, LOOP to
LEND
Setting value is invalid.

: Set when required (Set to " " when not used.)

: Setting not required (Setting value is invalid. Use the initial values or setting values
within a range where no error occurs.)
: Shows the torque limit value when " Cd.22 New torque value" is set to "0".
12 - 25
MELSEC-Q
[2] Control details

The following drawing shows the operation of the torque limit function.
Each operations
PLC READY signal (Y0)
All axis servo ON (Y1)
Start signal (Y10)
1
1
Pr.17
Torque limit setting

value (26)
300
250
2
Cd.101

value (1552)
Cd.22
New toruque value

(1525)
Md.35
Torque limit stored

value (826)
100
3
300
150
3
3
0
300
100
150
150
1: The torque limit setting value or torque output setting value becomes effective at the PLC READY signal (Y0) rising edge
(however, after the servo turned ON.)
If the torque output setting value is "0" or larger than the torque limit setting value, the torque limit setting value will be its value.:
2: The torque limit setting value or torque output setting value becomes effective at the start signal (Y10)rising edge.
If the torque output setting value is "0" or larger than the torque limit setting value, the torque limit setting value, the torque limit setting
value will be its value.
3: The torque change value is cleared to "0" at the start signal (Y10) rising edge.
Fig. 12.12 Torque limit function operation

(1) When limiting the torque at the " Pr.17 Torque limit setting value", confirm
that " Cd.22 New torque value" is set to "0". If this parameter is set to a
value besides "0", the " Cd.22 New torque value" will be validated, and the
torque will be limited at that value. (Refer to Section 12.5.4 "Torque change
function" for details about the "new torque value".)
(2) When the Pr.54 OPR torque limit value exceeds the Pr.17 Torque
limit setting value, an error occurs. (Error code: 995)
(3) When the operation is stopped by torque limiting, the droop pulse will remain
in the deviation counter. If the load torque is eliminated, operation for the
amount of droop pulses will be carried out.
12 - 26
MELSEC-Q
[4] Setting the torque limit function

(1) To use the "torque limit function", set the "torque limit value" in the
parameters shown in the following table, and write them to the QD75.
a) The set details are validated at the rising edge (OFF ON) of the PLC
READY signal (Y0).
Setting
value
Setting item
Pr.17
Torque limit
setting value
Pr.54
OPR torque limit

value
Factory-set
initial value
Setting details
Set the torque limit value as a percentage.
Set the torque limit value after the " Pr.47
300
Creep
b) The set details are validated at the rising edge (OFF

positioning start signal (Y10).
Setting
value
Setting item
Cd.101
300
speed" is reached. Set as a percentage.
Torque output
setting value
ON) of the
Factory-set
initial value
Setting details
Set the torque output setting value as a percentage.
Torque limit value: Will be an upper limit value of the torque change value. Even if a larger value
has been mistakenly input for the torque change value, it is restricted within the torque limit setting
values to prevent an erroneous entry. (Even if a value larger than the torque limit setting value has
been input to the torque change value, the torque value is not changed.)
Torque output setting value: to be taken at the start of positioning, and used as a torque limit value.
If the value is "0" or larger than the torque limit setting value, the parameter "torque limit setting
value" is taken at the start.
(2) The "torque limit value" set in the QD75 is set in the " Md.35 Torque limit
stored value".
QD75
PLC CPU
Baffer memory
26
86
1525
1552
826
Torque limit strored value
Servo amplifier
Positioning control

New torque value
Torque limit value
Torque output setting value
Fig. 12.13 Limiting the torque to the servo amplifier (Axis 1)
12 - 27
MELSEC-Q
The following table shows the " Md.35 Torque limit stored value" of the
buffer memory address.
Monitor item
Md.35
Monitor
value
Torque limit stored

value
Storage details

Axis Axis Axis Axis
1
2
3
4
The "torque limit value" valid at that time is

826
stored. ( Pr.17 , Pr.54 , Cd.22 , or Cd.101 )
926 1026 1126
Refer to Section 5.6 "List of monitor data" for information on the setting details.
REMARK

12 - 28
MELSEC-Q
12.4.3 Software stroke limit function

In the "software stroke limit function" the address established by a machine OPR is
used to set the upper and lower limits of the moveable range of the workpiece.
Movement commands issued to addresses outside that setting range will not be
executed.
In the QD75, the "current feed value" and "machine feed value" are used as the
addresses indicating the current position. However, in the "software stroke limit
function", the address used to carry out the limit check is designated in the " Pr.14
Software stroke limit selection". (Refer to Section 9.1.4 "Confirming the current value"
or details on the "current feed value" and "machine feed value".)
The upper and lower limits of the moveable range of the workpiece are set in " Pr.12
Software stroke limit upper limit value"/ " Pr.13 Software stroke limit lower limit
value".
The details shown below explain about the "software stroke limit function".
[1] Differences in the moveable range when "current feed value" and "machine feed
value" are selected.
[2] Software stroke limit check details
[3] Relation between the software stroke limit function and various controls
[4] Precautions during software stroke limit check
[5] Setting the software stroke limit function
[6] Invalidating the software stroke limit
[7] Setting when the control unit is "degree"
[1] Differences in the moveable range when "current feed value" and
"machine feed value" are selected.
The following drawing shows the moveable range of the workpiece when the
software stroke limit function is used.
RLS
Workpiece moveable range
FLS
Software stroke limit (upper limit)
Software stroke limit (lower limit)
Fig. 12.14 Workpiece moveable range
12 - 29
MELSEC-Q
The following drawing shows the differences in the operation when " Md.20
Current feed value" and " Md.21 Machine feed value" are used in the moveable
range limit check.
[Conditions]
Assume the current stop position is 2000, and the upper stroke limit is set to 5000.
Moveable range

2000
2000
Stop position
5000
5000
Upper stroke limit
[Current value changing]

When the current value is changed by a new current value command from 2000 to 1000, the
current value will change to 1000, but the machine feed value will stay the same at 2000.
1) When the machine feed value is set at the limit
The machine feed value of 5000 (current feed value: 4000) becomes the upper stroke limit.
Moveable range

1000
2000
4000
5000
5000
6000
Upper stroke limit
2) When the current feed value is set at the limit

The current feed value of 5000 (machine feed value: 6000) becomes the upper stroke limit.
Moveable range

1000
2000
4000
5000
5000
6000
Upper stroke limit
Fig. 12.15 Software stroke limits of the current feed value and machine feed value
POINT
When "machine feed value" is set in " Pr.14 Software stroke limit selection", the
moveable range becomes an absolute range referenced on the OP. When "current
feed value" is set, the moveable range is the relative range from the "current feed
value".
12 - 30
MELSEC-Q
[2] Software stroke limit check details

Processing when
an error occurs
Check details
An error shall occur if the current value 1 is outside the software

stroke
limit range 2.
1)
(Check " Md.20 Current feed value" or " Md.21 Machine feed value".) An "axis error" will
occur (error code:
An error shall occur if the command address is outside the software
507, 508)
2) stroke limit range.
(Check " Da.6 Positioning address/movement amount".)
1: Check whether the " Md.20 Current feed value" or " Md.21 Machine feed value" is set
in " Pr.14
Software stroke limit selection".
2: Moveable range from the " Pr.12
Software stroke limit upper limit value" to the " Pr.13
Software stroke limit lower limit value".
[3] Relation between the software stroke limit function and various
controls
Control type
Data set method
Machine OPR control Other than "Data
OPR control
set method"
Fast OPR control
2 to 4-axes axis linear
control
2 to 4-axes fixed-feed control
(interpolation)
Major
control
positioning
control
1 to 4-axes speed control
Other
control
Processing at check
Check not carried out.
Checks 1) and 2) in the previous section [2] are carried

out.
For speed control: The axis decelerates to a stop when
it exceeds the software stroke limit
range.
For position control: The axis comes to an immediate
stop when it exceeds the software
stroke limit range.
3, 4
3, 4
The current value will not be changed if the new current
value is outside the software stroke limit range.

instruction, LOOP to LEND
Manual
control
Limit
check
Check not carried out.

5 Check 1) in the previous section [2] is carried out.
The machine will carry out a deceleration stop when the
software stroke limit range is exceeded. If the address is
5
outside the software stroke limit range, the operation can
only be started toward the moveable range.
: Check valid
: Check is not made when the current feed value is not updated (Refer to Pr.21 ) at the setting of " current feed
value" in " Pr.14
Software stroke limit selection" during speed control.
: Check not carried out (check invalid).

: Valid only when "1:valid" is set in the " Pr.15
Software stroke limit valid/invalid setting".
3 : The value in " Md.20 Current feed value" will differ according to the " Pr.21
control" setting.
4: When the unit is "degree", check is not made during speed control.
5: When the unit is "degree", check is not carried out.
12 - 31
Current feed value during speed
MELSEC-Q
[4] Precautions during software stroke limit check

(1) A machine OPR must be executed beforehand for the "software stroke limit
function" to function properly.
(2) During interpolation control, a stroke limit check is carried out for the every
current value of both the reference axis and the interpolation axis. Every
axis will not start if an error occurs, even if it only occurs in one axis.
(3) During circular interpolation control, the " Pr.12 Software stroke limit upper
limit value"/" Pr.13 Software stroke limit lower limit value" may be
exceeded.
In this case, a deceleration stop will not be carried out even if the stroke limit
is exceeded. Always install an external limit switch if there is a possibility the
stroke limit will be exceeded.
Example
Axis 1
Deceleration stop not carried out
Axis 1 stroke limit
Arc address ( Da. 7 )
Starting address
End point address ( Da. 6 )

Axis 2
The software stroke limit check is carried out for the following addresses
during circular interpolation control. (Note that " Da. 7 Arc address" is carried
out only for circular interpolation control with sub point designation.
Current value/end point address ( Da. 6 )/arc address ( Da. 7 )
(4) If an error is detected during continuous path control, the axis stops
immediately on completion of execution of the positioning data located right
before the positioning data in error.
Example
If the positioning address of positioning data No. 13 is outside the software stroke limit range,
the operation immediately stops after positioning data No. 12 has been executed.
Positioning data
Immediate stop at
error detection
No.10
No.11
No.12
No.13
No.10
P11
No.11
P11
No.12
P11
Md. 26
No.13
P11
Controlling position
12 - 32
Error occurring
No.14
P01
MELSEC-Q
(5) During simultaneous start, a stroke limit check is carried out for the current
values of every axis to be started. Every axis will not start if an error occurs,
even if it only occurs in one axis.
[5] Setting the software stroke limit function

To use the "software stroke limit function", set the required values in the
parameters shown in the following table, and write them to the QD75.
signal (Y0).
Setting
value
Setting item
Factory-set
initial value
Setting details
Pr.12
Software stroke
limit upper limit
value
Set the upper limit value of the moveable range.
2147483647
Pr.13
Software stroke
limit lower limit
value
Set the lower limit value of the moveable range.
2147483648
Pr.14
Software stroke
limit selection
Set whether to use the " Md.20 Current feed value" or 0: Current feed
value
" Md.21 Machine feed value" as the "current value".
Pr.15
Software stroke
limit valid/invalid
setting
Set whether the software stroke limit is validated or

0 : V a l i d invalidated during manual control (JOG operation,
Inching operation, manual pulse generator operation).
0: valid
[6] Invalidating the software stroke limit

To invalidate the software stroke limit, set the following parameters as shown,
and write them to the QD75.
Pr.12

upper limit value
Pr.13

lower limit value
(For manual operation, set "0: software stroke limit invalid" in the " Pr.15
Software stroke limit valid/invalid setting".)
signal (Y0).
When the unit is "degree", the software stroke limit check is not performed during
speed control (including speed control in speed-position switching control or
position-speed switching control) or during manual control, independently of the
values set in Pr.12 , Pr.13 and Pr.15 .
REMARK

12 - 33
MELSEC-Q
[7] Setting when the control unit is "degree"

Current value address
The " Md.20 Current feed value" address is a ring address between 0 and
359.99999 .
359.99999
359.99999
Fig. 12.16 Current value address when the control unit is "degree".
Setting the software stroke limit

The upper limit value/lower limit value of the software stroke limit is a value
between 0 and 359.99999 .
(1) Setting when the software stroke limit is to be validated.
When the software stroke limit is to be validated, set the upper limit value in a
clockwise direction from the lower limit value.
Lower limit
Set in a clockwise direction
315
Section A
Upper limit
90
Section B
(a) Set the movement range of section A as follows.

Software stroke limit lower limit value ................ 315.00000
Software stroke limit upper limit value................ 90.00000
(b) Set the movement range of section B as follows.
Software stroke limit lower limit value ................ 90.00000
Software stroke limit upper limit value................ 315.00000
Fig. 12.17 Software stroke limit when the control unit is "degree"
12 - 34
MELSEC-Q
12.4.4 Hardware stroke limit function

!
DANGER
When the hardware stroke limit is required to be wired, ensure to wire it in the negative logic using b-contact.
If it is set in positive logic using a-contact, a serious accident may occur.
In the "hardware stroke limit function", limit switches are set at the upper/lower limit of
the physical moveable range, and the control is stopped (by deceleration stop) by the
input of a signal from the limit switch. Damage to the machine can be prevented by
stopping the control before the upper/lower limit of the physical moveable range is
reached.
The details shown below explain about the "hardware stroke limit function".
[1] Control details
[2] Wiring the hardware stroke limit
[4] When the hardware stroke limit is not used
[1] Control details

The following drawing shows the operation of the hardware stroke limit function.
Lower limit
Upper limit
QD75 control moveable range
Mechanical stopper
Movement direction
Start
Start
Deceleration stop at
lower limit switch detection
Mechanical stopper
Movement direction
Deceleration stop at
upper limit switch detection
Lower limit switch
Upper limit switch
QD75
Servo amplifier
None-stroke limit is input for B type servo amplifier.
Fig. 12.18 Hardware stroke limit function operation
12 - 35
MELSEC-Q
[2] Wiring the hardware stroke limit

When using the hardware stroke limit function, wire the terminals of the QD75
upper/lower limit stroke limit as shown in the following drawing.
(When " Pr.22 Input signal logic selection" is set to the initial value)
QD75
FLS
RLS
COM
24VDC
Fig. 12.19 Wiring when using the hardware stroke limit

(1) If the machine is stopped outside the QD75 control range (outside the
upper/lower limit switches), or if stopped by hardware stroke limit detection,
the "OPR control", "major positioning control", and "high-level positioning
control" cannot start. To carry out these types of control again, return the
workpiece to the QD75 control range by a "JOG operation", "inching
operation" or "manual pulse generator operation".
(2) When " Pr.22 Input signal logic selection" is set to the initial value, the
QD75 cannot carry out the positioning control if FLS (limit switch for upper
limit) is separated from COM or RLS (limit switch for lower limit) is separated
from COM (including when wiring is not carried out).
[4] When the hardware stroke limit function is not used

When not using the hardware stroke limit function, wire the terminals of the QD75
upper/lower limit stroke limit as shown in the following drawing.
When the logic of FLS and RLS is set to "positive logic" using " Pr.22 Input
signal logic selection", positioning control can be carried out even if FLS and RLS
are not wired. (For details, refer to Section 13.4 "External I/O signal logic
switching function".)
QD75
FLS
RLS
COM
24VDC
Fig. 12.20 Wiring when not using the hardware stroke limit function
(When " Pr.20 Input signal logic selection" is the initial value)
12 - 36
MELSEC-Q
12.5 Functions to change the control details

Functions to change the control details include the "speed change function", "override
function", "acceleration/deceleration time change function" and "torque change
function". Each function is executed by parameter setting or PLC program creation and
writing.
Both the "speed change function" or "override function" change the speed, but the
differences between the functions are shown below. Use the function that corresponds
to the application.
"Speed change function"
The speed is changed at any time, only in the control being executed.
The new speed is directly set.
POINT
The speed change function is available even during JOG operation.
"Override function"
The speed is changed for all control to be executed. (Note that this excludes
manual pulse generator operation.)
The new speed is set as a percent (%) of the command speed.
POINT
The override function is available even during JOG operation.
12.5.1 Speed change function

The speed control function is used to change the speed during control to a newly
designated speed at any time.
The new speed is directly set in the buffer memory, and the speed is changed by a
speed change command ( Cd.15 Speed change request) or external command signal.
During the machine OPR, a speed change to the creep speed cannot be carried out
after deceleration start because the near point dog ON is detected.
The details shown below explain about the "speed change function".
[1] Control details
[3] Setting the speed change function from the PLC CPU
[4] Setting the speed change function using an external command signal
12 - 37
MELSEC-Q
[1] Control details

The following drawing shows the operation during a speed change.
V
Speed changes to V2.

Speed changes to V3.
V1
Operation during
positioning by V1.
V2
V3
t
Md. 40 In speed change processing flag
Fig. 12.21 Speed change operation

(1) Control is carried out as follows at the speed change during continuous path
control.
a) When no speed designation (current speed) is provided in the next
positioning data:
The next positioning data is controlled at the " Cd.14 New speed
value".
b) When a speed designation is provided in the next positioning data:
The next positioning data is controlled at its command speed
( Da.8 ).
Positioning control
P1
Next control
P2
[a] When no speed designation
(current speed) is provided.
[b] When a speed designation
is provided.
Cd. 14 New speed value

Designated speed in P2
Designated speed in P1
Speed change
command
Fig. 12.22 Speed change during continuous path control

(2) When changing the speed during continuous path control, the speed change
will be ignored if there is not enough distance remaining to carry out the
change.
12 - 38
MELSEC-Q
(3) When the stop command was given to make a stop after a speed change
that had been made during position control, the restarting speed depends
on the " Cd.14 New speed value".
V
Da. 8 Command speed
Speed change
command
Restarting
Stop command command
Fig. 12.23 Restarting speed after speed change made during position control
(4) When the speed is changed by setting " Cd.14 New speed value" to "0",
the operation is carried out as follows.
A deceleration stop is carried out, and the speed change 0 flag
( Md.31 Status: b10) turns ON.
(During interpolation control, the speed change 0 flag on the reference axis
side turns ON.)
The axis stops, but " Md.26 Axis operation status" does not change, and
the BUSY signal remains ON. (If a stop signal is input, the BUSY signal
will turn OFF, and " Md.26 Axis operation status" will change to
"stopped".)
In this case, setting the " Cd.14 New speed value" to a value besides "0"
will turn OFF the speed change 0 flag ( Md.31 Status: b10), and enable
continued operation.
ON
[Y10, Y11, Y12, Y13] OFF

ON
BUSY signal [XC,XD,XE,XF] OFF
0
1000
ON
Cd. 15 Speed change request
OFF
ON
Speed change 0 flag
Md. 31 status: b10
OFF
Fig. 12.24 Speed change at new speed value "0"
12 - 39
MELSEC-Q
(5) A warning "Deceleration/stop speed change (warning code: 500)" occurs

and the speed cannot be changed in the following cases.
During deceleration by a stop command
During automatic deceleration during positioning control
(6) A warning "Speed limit value over (warning code: 501)" occurs and the
speed is controlled at the " Pr.8 Speed limit value" when the value set in
" Cd.14 New speed value" is equal to or larger than the " Pr.8 Speed limit
value".
(7) When the speed is changed during interpolation control, the required speed
is set in the reference axis.
(8) When carrying out consecutive speed changes, be sure there is an interval
between the speed changes of 100ms or more.
(If the interval between speed changes is short, the QD75 will not be able to
track, and it may become impossible to carry out commands correctly.)
(9) When a speed change is requested simultaneously for multiple axes, change
the speed in the ascending axis number order.
(10) Speed change cannot be carried out during the machine OPR. A request for
speed change is ignored.
(11) When deceleration is started by the speed change function, the deceleration
start flag does not turn ON.
[3] Setting the speed change function from the PLC CPU
The following shows the data settings and PLC program example for changing
the control speed of axis 1 from the PLC CPU. (In this example, the control
speed is changed to "20.00mm/min".)
(Use the start time chart shown in section (2) below as a reference, and set
using the PLC program shown in section (3).)
Setting item
Cd.14
New speed value
Cd .15
Speed change
request
Setting
value
2000
1
Setting details
Axis Axis Axis Axis

1
2
3
4
Set the new speed.
1514 1614 1714 1814

1515 1615 1715 1815
Set "1: Change the speed".
1516 1616 1716 1816
12 - 40
MELSEC-Q
(2) The following shows the speed change time chart.

V
Dwell time
t
[Y10]
PLC READY signal
[Y0]
All axis servo ON
[Y1]
QD75 READY signal
[X0]
[X10]
[XC]
BUSY signal
[X14]
[X8]
Md. 40 In speed change

processing flag
0
2000
Cd. 15 Speed change request
Fig. 12.25 Time chart for changing the speed from the PLC CPU
(3) Add the following PLC program to the control program, and write it to the
PLC CPU.
Example
No.14 Speed change program
<Pulsate speed change command>

<Hold speed change command>
<Set speed change value
(20.00mm/min)>
<Set speed change request>
<Write speed change>
<Turn OFF speed change request
memory>
12 - 41
MELSEC-Q
[4] Setting the speed change function using an external command

signal
The speed can also be changed using an "external command signal".
The following shows the data settings and PLC program example for changing
the control speed of axis 1 using an "external command signal". (In this example,
the control speed is changed to "10000.00mm/min".)
(1) Set the following data to change the speed using an external command
signal.
(Use the start time chart shown in section (2) below as a reference, and set
using the PLC program shown in section (3).)
Setting
value
Setting item
Setting details
Axis Axis Axis Axis

1
2
3
4
Pr.42
External command
function selection
Set "1: External speed change request".
Cd.8
External command
valid
Set "1: Validate the external command".
62
212
362
512
1505 1605 1705 1805

1514 1614 1714 1814
1515 1615 1715 1815
1000000 Set the new speed.
Refer to section "5.7 List of control data" for details on the setting details.
(2) The following shows the speed change time chart.

V
Dwell time
t
[Y10]
PLC READY signal
[Y0]
All axis servo ON
[Y1]
QD75 READY signal
[X0]
[X10]
[XC]
BUSY signal
[X14]
[X8]
External command signal

1
Pr. 42 External command function selection

Md.40 In speed change processing flag
Cd. 8 External command valid
0
0
1000000
Fig. 12.26 Time chart for changing the speed using an external command signal
12 - 42
MELSEC-Q
PLC CPU.
Example
Write 1000000 to D108 and D109.
External command
valid signal
DTOP H0 K1514 D108 K1
[Speed change processing]

<Write the new speed. >
<Set the external command function
TOP H0 K62
K1
K1
selection to external speed change

request. >
TOP H0 K1505 K1
Input the external command signal.
12 - 43
K1
<Set the external command signal input

to valid.>
(QD75 starts speed change processing.)
MELSEC-Q
12.5.2 Override function

The override function changes the command speed by a designated percentage (1 to
300%) for all control to be executed.
The speed can be changed by setting the percentage (%) by which the speed is
changed in " Cd.13 Positioning operation speed override".
However, when a machine OPR is performed, an override cannot be made after a
deceleration start to the creep speed following the detection of near-point dog ON.
[1] Control details
[3] Setting the override function
[1] Control details

The following shows that operation of the override function.
1) A value changed by the override function is monitored by " Md.22
Feedrate".
2) If " Cd.13 Positioning operation speed override" is set to 100%, the speed
will not change.
3) If " Cd.13 Positioning operation speed override" is set a value less than
100%, control will be carried out at speed unit "1" at the time " Md.22
Feedrate" becomes a value of "1" or less. (When Md.22 becomes "0", the
warning "Less than minimum speed (warning code: 110)" is generated and
the axis is controlled in the then speed unit of "1".)
4) If there is not enough remaining distance to change the speed when the
speed is changed during the position control of speed-position switching
control or position-speed switching control, the operation will be carried out
at the speed that could be changed.
5) If the speed changed by the "override function" is greater than the " Pr.8
Speed limit value", a warning "Speed limit value over (warning code: 501)"
will occur and the speed will be controlled at the " Pr.8 Speed limit value".
The " Md.39 Speed limit flag" will turn ON.
Da. 8 Command speed
50
Cd. 13 Positioning operation

speed override
100
50
150
100
200
Md. 22 Feedrate
50
25
75
50
75
V
Not affected by the override value
during deceleration
Not enough remaining

distance could be secured,
so operation is carried out
at an increased speed.
Fig. 12.27 Override function operation
12 - 44
MELSEC-Q
[2] Precaution during control

(1) When changing the speed during continuous path control, the speed change
will be ignored if there is not enough distance remaining to carry out the
change.
(2) A warning "Deceleration/stop speed change (warning code: 500)" occurs
and the speed cannot be changed in the following cases.
(The value set in " Cd.13 Positioning operation speed override" is validated
after a deceleration stop.)
During deceleration by a stop command
During automatic deceleration during positioning control
(3) When the speed is changed during interpolation control, the required speed
is set in the reference axis.
(4) When deceleration is started by the override function, the deceleration start
flag does not turn ON.
(5) When carrying out continuously override, be sure there is an interval
between the override execution of 100ms or more.
(If the interval between override is short, the QD75 will not be able to track,
and it may become impossible to carry out commands correctly.)
[3] Setting the override function

The following shows the data settings and PLC program example for setting the
override value of axis 1 to "200%".
(1) Set the following data. (Use the start time chart shown in section (2) below
as a reference, and set using the PLC program shown in section (3).)
Setting item
Setting
value
Positioning
Cd.13 operation speed
override
200

Setting details
Set the new speed as a percentage (%).
12 - 45
Axis Axis Axis Axis

1
2
3
4
1513 1613 1713 1813
MELSEC-Q
(2) The following shows a time chart for changing the speed using the override
function.
V
Dwell time
t
[Y10]
PLC READY signal
[Y0]
All axis servo ON
[Y1]
QD75 READY signal
[X0]
[X10]
[XC]
BUSY signal

[X8]
Cd. 13 Positioning operation
speed override
200
Fig. 12.28 Time chart for changing the speed using the override function
PLC CPU.
Example
No.15 Override program
<Pulsate override command>

<Set override value (200%)>
<Write override value>
12 - 46
MELSEC-Q
12.5.3 Acceleration/deceleration time change function

The "acceleration/deceleration time change function" is used to change the
acceleration/deceleration time during a speed change to a random value when
carrying out the speed change indicated in Section 12.5.1 "Speed change function".
In a normal speed change (when the acceleration/deceleration time is not changed),
the acceleration/deceleration time previously set in the parameters ( Pr.9 , Pr.10 ,
and Pr.25 to Pr.30 values) is set in the positioning parameter data items Da.3
and Da.4 , and control is carried out with that acceleration/deceleration time.
However, by setting the new acceleration/deceleration time ( Cd.10 , Cd.11 ) in the
control data, and issuing an acceleration/deceleration time change enable command
( Cd.12 Acceleration/deceleration time change during speed change, enable/disable
selection) to change the speed when the acceleration/deceleration time change is
enabled, the speed will be changed with the new acceleration/deceleration time
( Cd.10 , Cd.11 ).
The details shown below explain about the "acceleration/deceleration time change
function".
[1] Control details
[3] Setting the acceleration/deceleration time change function
[1] Control details

The following drawing shows the operation during an acceleration/deceleration
time change.
[For an acceleration/deceleration time change disable setting]
V
Operation with the acceleration/deceleration
time set in Da. 3 and Da. 4 .
Cd.15 Speed
change request
Cd.12 Acceleration/deceleration
time change during
speed change, enable/
disable selection
Disabled
[For an acceleration/deceleration time change enable setting]

V
Operation with the acceleration/deceleration
time ( Cd. 10 and Cd. 11 ) set in the buffer memory.
Cd.15 Speed
change request
t
Cd.12 Acceleration/deceleration
time change during
speed change, enable/
disable selection
Disabled
Enabled
Fig. 12.29 Operation during an acceleration/deceleration time change

12 - 47
MELSEC-Q

(1) When "0" is set in " Cd.10 New acceleration time value" and " Cd.11 New
deceleration time value", the acceleration/deceleration time will not be
changed even if the speed is changed. In this case, the operation will be
controlled at the acceleration/deceleration time previously set in the
parameters.
(2) The "new acceleration/deceleration time" is valid during execution of the
positioning data for which the speed was changed. In continuous positioning
control and continuous path control, the speed is changed and control is
carried out with the previously set acceleration/deceleration time at the
changeover to the next positioning data, even if the
acceleration/deceleration time is changed to the "new
acceleration/deceleration time ( Cd.10 , Cd.11 )".
(3) Even if the acceleration/deceleration time change is set to disable after the
"new acceleration/deceleration time" is validated, the positioning data for
which the "new acceleration/deceleration time" was validated will continue to
be controlled with that value. (The next positioning data will be controlled
with the previously set acceleration/deceleration time.)
Example
Speed change
V
Speed change
Positioning start
New acceleration/deceleration
time ( Cd. 10 , Cd. 11 )

Disabled
Enabled
12 - 48
Disabled
MELSEC-Q
(4) If the "new acceleration/deceleration time" is set to "0" and the speed is
changed after the "new acceleration/deceleration time" is validated, the
operation will be controlled with the previous "new acceleration/deceleration
time".
Example
New acceleration/deceleration
time ( Cd. 10 , Cd. 11 )
Speed change
V
Speed change
Speed change
Controlled with the acceleration/

deceleration time in the parameter.

Disabled
Enabled
1000
(5) The acceleration/deceleration time change function is disabled for JOG

operation and inching operation.
POINT
If the speed is changed when an acceleration/deceleration change is enabled, the
"new acceleration/deceleration time" will become the acceleration/deceleration time
of the positioning data being executed. The "new acceleration/deceleration time"
remains valid until the changeover to the next positioning data. (The automatic
deceleration processing at the completion of the positioning will also be controlled
by the "new acceleration/deceleration time".)
[3] Setting the acceleration/deceleration time change function

To use the "acceleration/deceleration time change function", write the data
shown in the following table to the QD75 using the PLC program.
The set details are validated when a speed change is executed after the details
are written to the QD75.
Setting item
Cd.10
Cd.11
Cd.12
New acceleration
time value
New deceleration
time value
Acceleration/
deceleration time
change during
speed change,
enable/disable
selection
Setting
value
Setting details
Set the new acceleration time.
Set the new deceleration time.
Set "1: Acceleration/deceleration time change

enable".
12 - 49

Axis Axis Axis Axis
1
2
3
4
1508 1608 1708 1808
1509 1609 1709 1809
1510 1610 1710 1810
1511 1611 1711 1811
1512 1612 1712 1812
MELSEC-Q
Example
No.16 Acceleration/deceleration time change program
<Pulsate acceleration/deceleration time change

command>
<Set 2000ms for acceleration time>
<Set 0 (not change) for deceleration time>
<Write acceleration/deceleration time>
<Write acceleration/deceleration time change
enable>
<Write acceleration/deceleration time change
disable>
12 - 50
MELSEC-Q
12.5.4 Torque change function

The "torque change function" is used to change the torque limit value during torque
limiting.
The torque limit value during torque limiting is normally the value set in the " Pr.17
Torque limit setting value" or " Cd.101 Torque output setting value" that was
previously set in the parameters. However, by setting the new torque limit value in the
axis control data " Cd.22 New torque value", and writing it to the QD75, the torque
generated by the servomotor during control can be limited with the new torque value.
(The " Cd.22 New torque value" is validated when written to the QD75.)
The details shown below explain about the "torque change function".
[1] Control details
[3] Setting the torque change function start signal
12 - 51
MELSEC-Q
[1] Control details

The torque value of the axis control data can be changed at all times. The torque
can be limited with a new torque value from the time the new torque value has
been written to the QD75. (a torque change is made only during operation.)
(Note that the delay time until a torque control is executed is max. 7.1ms after
torque change value was written.)
The toque limiting is not carried out from the time the power supply is turned ON
to the time the PLC READY signal (Y0) is turned ON.
The torque setting range is from 0 to " Pr.17 Torque limit setting value".
When the new torque value is 0, a torque change is considered not to be carried
out.
The torque change range is 1 to " Pr.17 Torque limit setting value".
The following drawing shows the torque change operation.
Each operations
PLC READY signal (Y0)
Start signal (Y10)
1
Pr.17
Torque limit setting

value (26)
1
250
300
2
Cd.101

value (1552)
100
3
Cd.22
New toruque value

(1525)
Md.35
Torque limit stored

value (826)
300
4
200
300
4
5
0
200
4
6
350
150
3
0
4
75
100
75
4
230
230
150
1: The torque limit setting value or torque output setting value becomes effective at the PLC READY signal (Y0) rising edge
(however, after the servo turned ON.)
If the torque output setting value is "0" or larger than the torque limit setting value, the torque limit setting value will be its value.:
2: The torque limit setting value or torque output setting value becomes effective at the start signal (Y10) rising edge.
If the torque output setting value is "0" or larger than the torque limit setting value, the torque limit setting value, the torque limit setting
value will be its value.
3: The torque change value is cleared to "0" at the start signal (Y10) rising edge.
4: The torque limit value is changed by the torque changed value.
5: When the new torque value is 0, a torque change is considered not to be carried out.
6: When the change value is exceeds the torque limit value, a torque chang is considered not to be carried out.
Fig. 12.30 Torque change operation
12 - 52
150
MELSEC-Q

(1) If a value besides "0" is set in the " Cd.22 New torque value", the torque
generated by the servomotor will be limited by that value. To limit the torque
with the value set in " Pr.17 Torque limit setting value" or " Cd.101 Torque
output setting value", set the " Cd.22 New torque value" to "0".
(2) The " Cd.22 New torque value" is validated when written to the QD75.
(Note that it is not validated from the time the power supply is turned ON to
the time the PLC READY signal (Y0) is turned ON.)
(3) If the setting value is outside the setting range, an axis warning "Outside
new torque value range" (warning code: 113) will occur and the torque will
not be changed.
(4) If the time to hold the new torque value is not more than 100ms, a torque
change may not be executed.
[3] Setting the torque change function start signal

To use the "torque change function", write the data shown in the following table
to the QD75 using the PLC program.
The set details are validated when written to the QD75.
Setting item
Cd.22
New torque value
Setting
value
Setting details
Set the new torque limit value.
12 - 53
Axis Axis Axis Axis

1
2
3
4
1525 1625 1725 1825
MELSEC-Q
12.6 Absolute position system

The QD75 can construct an absolute position system by installing the absolute position
system and connecting it through SSCNET.
The following describes precautions when constructing the absolute position system.
Battery
Servomotor
M
PLC
CPU
Position command
Control command
Servo parameter
Monitor data
QD75
OPR
address
Position command
Control command
Servo parameter
Servo amplifier
Back-up
PLG
Monitor data
Absolute position detector
Return of the present value
Fig. 12.31 Configuration of absolute position system
[1] Setting for absolute positions

When constructing an absolute position system, use a servomotor with absolute
position detector.
It is also necessary to install a battery for retaining the location of the OPR in the
servo amplifier. When an absolute position detector is installed, select "absolute
value detector available" in the amplifier setting for the servo basic parameters.
Axis No.
Axis 1
Axis 2
Axis 3
Axis 4
Buffer memory
30101
30201
30301
30401
12 - 54
MELSEC-Q
[2] OPR
The absolute position system can establish the location of the OPR, using "Data
set method", "Near-point dog" and "Count method" OPR method.
In the "Data set method" OPR method, the location to which the location of the
OPR position is moved by manual operation (JOG operation/manual pulse
generator operation) is treated as the OPR position.
Movement range for the machine
Moved to this position by
manual operation.
The stop position during
OPR execution is stored as the OPR position.
Cd.3 Positioning
start No.
9001 (OPR destignation)
Positioning start
(Y10 to Y13)
Fig. 12.32 Operation of the OPR execution
POINT
The OPR must be made after the servomotor has been rotated more than one
revolution using JOG or positioning operation. If OPR is not rotated more than one
revolution, error [210] (Home position return (OPR) restart zero point not passed)
occurs.
When " Pr.133 OPR set condition selection" of the MR-J2S-B or MR-J2M-B is set
"1", OPR can be carried out even if the servomotor are not routed more than one
revolution. (The "OP address" is the current value at the power supply is turned
ON.)
12 - 55
MELSEC-Q
12.7 Other functions

Other functions include the "step function", "skip function", "M code output function",
"teaching function", "target position change function", "command in-position function",
"acceleration/deceleration processing function", "pre-reading start function", "
deceleration start flag function" and "stop command processing for deceleration stop
function" and "follow up processing function". Each function is executed by parameter
setting or PLC program creation and writing.
12.7.1 Step function

The "step function" is used to confirm each operation of the positioning control one by
one.
It is used in debugging work for major positioning control, etc.
A positioning operation in which a "step function" is used is called a "step operation".
In step operations, the timing for stopping the control can be set. (This is called the
"step mode".) Control stopped by a step operation can be continued by setting "step
continue" (to continue the control)" or restarted by setting "restart" in the "step start
information".
The details shown below explain about the "step function".
[1] Relation between the step function and various controls
[2] Step mode
[3] Step start information
[4] Using the step operation
[5] Control details
[7] Step function settings
[1] Relation between the step function and various controls

The following table shows the relation between the "step function" and various
controls.
OPR control
Major
positioning
control
Manual
control
Control type
Machine OPR control
Fast OPR control
2 to 4-axes linear interpolation control
control 2 to 4- axes fixed-feed control
(interpolation)
1 to 4- axes Speed control
Other
control JUMP instruction, NOP instruction,
LOOP to LEND
: Set when required.
12 - 56
Step function
Step applicability
Step operation not possible
Step operation possible

Step operation possible
MELSEC-Q
[2] Step mode

In step operations, the timing for stopping the control can be set. This is called
the "step mode". (The "step mode" is set in the control data " Cd.34 Step
mode".)
The following shows the two types of "step mode" functions.
(1) Deceleration unit step

The operation stops at positioning data requiring automatic deceleration. (A
normal operation will be carried out until the positioning data requiring
automatic deceleration is found. Once found, that positioning data will be
executed, and the operation will then automatically decelerate and stop.)
(2) Data No. unit step

The operation automatically decelerates and stops for each positioning
data. (Even in continuous path control, an automatic deceleration and stop
will be forcibly carried out.)
[3] Step start information

Control stopped by a step operation can be continued by setting "step continue"
(to continue the control) in the "step start information". (The "step start
information" is set in the control data " Cd.36 Step start information".)
The following table shows the results of starts using the "step start information"
during step operation.
Stop status in the step
operation
1 step of positioning
stopped normally
Md.26 Axis operation
Cd.36 Step start
status
Step standing by
Step start results
information
1: Step continue
The next positioning data is executed.
The warnings "Step not possible (warning code: 511)" will occur if the " Md.26
Axis operation status" is as shown below or the step valid flag is OFF when step
start information is set.
Standing by
Stopped
In interpolation
In JOG operation
In manual pulse generator operation
Analyzing
Waiting for special start
In OPR
In position control
In speed control
In speed control of speed-position switching control
In position control of speed-position switching control
In speed control of position-speed switching control
In position control of position-speed switching control
12 - 57
Step start results
Step not continued by warning
MELSEC-Q
[4] Using the step operation

The following shows the procedure for checking positioning data using the step
operation.
(1) Turn ON the step valid flag before starting the positioning data.
(Write "1" (carry out step operation) in " Cd.35 Step valid flag".)
(2) Set the step mode before starting the positioning data.
(Set in " Cd.34 Step mode".)
(3) Turn ON the positioning start signal, and check that the
positioning control starts normally.
(4) The control will stop for the following reasons.
a) One step of positioning stopped normally. Go to step (6).
b) Control stopped by a stop signal.
Take appropriate measures, go to
step (5).
c) An error occurred and the control stopped.
Take appropriate
measures, go to step (3).
(5) Write "1" (restart) to " Cd.6 Restart command", and check that
the positioning data where the control stopped operates
normally. Go to step (4).
(6) Write "1" (step continue) to " Cd.36 Step start information", and
check that the next positioning data operates normally.
a) One step of positioning stopped normally. Go to step (6).
b) Control stopped by a stop signal. Take appropriate measures, go to
step (5).
c) An error occurred and the control stopped. Take appropriate
measures, go to step (3).
d) All positioning data operated normally. Go to step (7).
(7) Turn OFF the step valid flag, and quit the "step function".
(Write "0" (do not carry out step operation) in " Cd.35 Step valid flag".)
12 - 58
MELSEC-Q
[5] Control details

(1) The following drawing shows a step operation during a "deceleration unit
step".
ON
Cd. 35 Step valid flag
OFF
ON

OFF
[Y10, Y11, Y12, Y13]
ON
OFF
BUSY signal
[XC, XD, XE, XF]
ON

[X14, X15, X16, X17] V
Positioning
t
No.10
No.11
11
01
No positioning data No. unit, so operation pattern

becomes one step of unit for carrying out automatic
deceleration.
Fig. 12.33 Operation during step execution by deceleration unit step

(2) The following drawing shows a step operation during a "data No. unit step".
Cd. 35 Step valid flag
ON
OFF
ON

OFF
[Y10, Y11, Y12, Y13]
BUSY signal
OFF
[XC, XD, XE, XF]
[X14, X15, X16, X17]
ON
ON
OFF
V
Positioning
t
Cd. 36 Step start information
00H
00H
01H
No.10
No.11
11
01
Operation pattern becomes one step of positioning data No. unit,

regardless of continuous path control (11).
Fig. 12.34 Operation during step execution positioning data No. unit step
12 - 59
MELSEC-Q

(1) When step operation is carried out using interpolation control positioning
data, the step function settings are carried out for the reference axis.
(2) When the step valid flag is ON, the step operation will start from the
beginning if the positioning start signal is turned ON while " Md.26 Axis
operation status" is "step standing by". (The step operation will be carried
out from the positioning data set in " Cd.3 Positioning start No.".)
[7] Step function settings

To use the "step function", write the data shown in the following table to the
QD75 using the PLC program. Refer to section [4] "Using the step operation" for
the timing of the settings.
Setting item
Cd.34
Step mode
Cd.35
Step valid flag
Cd.36
Step start
information
Setting
value
Setting details
Axis Axis Axis Axis

1
2
3
4
Set "0: Deceleration unit step" or "1: Data No.

unit step".
1544 1644 1744 1844
Set "1: Carry out step operation".
1545 1645 1745 1845
Set "1: Step continue", depending on the stop

status.
1546 1646 1746 1846
12 - 60
MELSEC-Q
12.7.2 Skip function

The "skip function" is used to stop (deceleration stop) the control of the positioning
data being executed at the time of the skip signal input, and execute the next
positioning data.
A skip is executed by a skip command ( Cd.37 Skip command) or external command
signal.
The "skip function" can be used during control in which positioning data is used.
The details shown below explain about the "skip function".
[1] Control details
[3] Setting the skip function from the PLC CPU
[4] Setting the skip function using an external command signal
[1] Control details

The following drawing shows the skip function operation.
ON
OFF
[Y10, Y11, Y12, Y13]
BUSYsignal
OFF
[XC, XD, XE, XF]
ON
ON

[X14, X15, X16, X17] V
Positioning
t
Deceleration by
skip signal
Skip signal
ON
Start of the
next positioning
OFF
Fig. 12.35 Operation when a skip signal is input during positioning control

(1) If the skip signal is turned ON at the last of an operation, a deceleration stop
will occur and the operation will be terminated.
(2) When a control is skipped (when the skip signal is turned ON during a
control), the positioning complete signals (X14, X15, X16, X17) will not turn
ON.
(3) When the skip signal is turned ON during the dwell time, the remaining dwell
time will be ignored, and the next positioning data will be executed.
(4) When a control is skipped during interpolation control, the reference axis
skip signal is turned ON. When the reference axis skip signal is turned ON,
a deceleration stop will be carried out for every axis, and the next reference
axis positioning data will be executed.
(5) The M code ON signals (X4, X5, X6, X7) will not turn ON when the M code
output is set to the AFTER mode (when "1: AFTER mode" is set in " Pr.18
M code ON signal output timing").
(In this case, the M code will not be stored in " Md.25 Valid M code".)
(6) The skip cannot be carried out by the speed-position and position-speed
switching control. It is processed in the same manner as in the speed
control.
12 - 61
MELSEC-Q
[3] Setting the skip function from the PLC CPU

The following shows the settings and PLC program example for skipping the
control being executed in axis 1 with a command from the PLC CPU.
(The setting is carried out using the PLC program shown below in section
(2)).
Cd.37
Setting
value
Setting item
Skip command
Setting details
Set "1: Skip request".
Axis Axis Axis Axis

1
2
3
4
1547 1647 1747 1847
Refer to Section "5.7 List of control data" for details on the setting details.
PLC CPU.
1) When the "skip command" is input, the value "1" (skip request) set in
" Cd.37 Skip command" is written to the QD75 buffer memory (1547).
Example
No.19 Skip program
<Pulsate skip command>

<Save skip command ON>
<Write skip command>
<Turn OFF skip command
memory>
12 - 62
MELSEC-Q
[4] Setting the skip function using an external command signal

The skip function can also be executed using an "external command signal".
The following shows the settings and PLC program example for skipping the
control being executed in axis 1 using an "external command signal".
(1) Set the following data to execute the skip function using an external
command signal.
(The setting is carried out using the PLC program shown below in section
(2)).
Setting
value
Setting item
Setting details
Axis Axis Axis Axis

1
2
3
4
Pr.42
External
command function
selection
Set "3: Skip request".
Cd.8
External
command valid
Set "1: Validate external command".
62
212
362
512
1505 1605 1705 1805
PLC CPU.
Example
Skip function
selection command
TOP H0
K62
K3
K1
<Select skip request>
K1
<Set external command valid>
Skip request
TOP H0
K1505 K1
Input external command signal
12 - 63
MELSEC-Q
12.7.3 M code output function

The "M code output function" is used to command sub work (clamping, drill rotation,
tool replacement, etc.) related to the positioning data being executed.
When the M code ON signal (X4, X5, X6, X7) is turned ON during positioning
execution, a No. called the M code is stored in " Md.25 Valid M code".
These " Md.25 Valid M code" are read from the PLC CPU, and used to command
auxiliary work. M codes can be set for each positioning data. (Set in setting item
" Da.10 M code" of the positioning data.)
The timing for outputting (storing) the M codes can also be set in the "M code output
function".
The details shown below explain about the "M code output function".
[1] M code ON signal output timing
[2] M code OFF request
[4] Setting the M code output function
[5] Reading M codes
[1] M code ON signal output timing

The timing for outputting (storing) the M codes can be set in the "M code output
function". (The M code is stored in " Md.25 Valid M code" when the M code ON
signal is turned ON.)
The following shows the two types of timing for outputting M codes: the "WITH
mode" and the "AFTER mode".
(1) WITH mode

The M code ON signal (X4, X5, X6, X7) is turned ON at the positioning
start, and the M code is stored in " Md.25 Valid M code".
ON
OFF
[Y10, Y11, Y12, Y13]
ON

ON
M code ON signal
OFF
[X4, X5, X6, X7]
Md. 25 Valid M code
0 1 0
1 0
m2
m1
V
Dwell time
Positioning
t
01
00
m1 and m2 indicate set M codes.
Fig. 12.36 M code ON/OFF timing (WITH mode)
12 - 64
MELSEC-Q
(2) AFTER mode

The M code ON signal (X4, X5, X6, X7) is turned ON at the positioning
completion, and the M code is stored in " Md.25 Valid M code".
ON

OFF
[Y10, Y11, Y12, Y13]
ON
ON
M code ON signal
OFF
[X4, X5, X6, X7]
1 0
Md. 25 Valid M code
m2
m1
Positioning
t
01
00
Fig. 12.37 M code ON/OFF timing (AFTER mode)
[2] M code OFF request

When the M code ON signal (X4, X5, X6, X7) is ON, it must be turned OFF by
the PLC program.
To turn OFF the M code ON signal, set "1" (turn OFF the M code signal) in
" Cd.7 M code OFF request".
Setting item
Cd.7
Setting
value
M code OFF
request
Setting details
Axis Axis Axis Axis

1
2
3
4
Set "1: Turn OFF the M code ON signal".
1504 1604 1704 1804
The next positioning data will be processed as follows if the M code ON signal is
not turned OFF. (The processing differs according to the Da.1 Operation
pattern.)
00
Independent positioning control

(Positioning control)
01
Continuous positioning control
11
Processing
The next positioning data will not be executed until the M code ON
signal is turned OFF.
The next positioning data will be executed, but a warning "M code
ON signal ON start" (warning code: 503) will occur.
12 - 65
MELSEC-Q
ON
OFF
[Y10, Y11, Y12, Y13]
BUSY signal
ON
M code ON signal
OFF
[X4, X5, X6, X7]
ON
0 1 0
Md. 25 Valid M code
1 0
m2
m1
m3
Positioning
t
11
11
00
Warning occurs at this timing.
Fig. 12.38 Warning due to an M code ON signal during continuous path control
POINT
If the M code output function is not required, set a "0" in setting item " Da.10 M
code" of the positioning data.

(1) During interpolation control, the reference axis M code ON signal is turned
ON.
(2) The M code ON signal will not turn ON if "0" is set in " Da.10 M code". (The
M code will not be output, and the previously output value will be held in
" Md.25 Valid M code".)
(3) If the M code ON signal is ON at the positioning start, an error "M code
signal ON at positioning start (error code: 536)" will occur, and the
positioning will not start.
(4) If the PLC READY signal (Y0) is turned OFF, the M code ON signal will turn
OFF and "0" will be stored in " Md.25 Valid M code".
(5) If the positioning operation time is short during continuous path control, there
will not be enough time to turn OFF the M code ON signal, and a warning "M
code signal ON (error code: 503)" may occur. In this case, set a "0" in the
" Da.10 M code" of that section's positioning data.
(6) In the AFTER mode during speed control, the M code is not output and the
M code ON signal does not turn ON.
(7) If current value changing where "9003" has been set to " Cd.3 Positioning
start No." is performed, the M code output function is made invalid.
12 - 66
MELSEC-Q
[4] Setting the M code output function

The following shows the settings to use the "M code output function".
(1) Set the M code No. in the positioning data " Da.10 M code".
(2) Set the timing to output the M code ON signal (X4, X5, X6, X7).
Set the required value in the following parameter, and write it to the QD75.
signal (Y0).
Pr.18
Setting
value
Setting item
Setting details
Axis Axis Axis Axis

1
2
3
4
Set the timing to output the M code ON signal.

0: WITH mode
1: AFTER mode
M code ON signal
output timing
27
177
327
477
[5] Reading M codes

"M codes" are stored in the following buffer memory when the M code ON signal
turns ON.
Md.25
Monitor
value
Monitor item
Valid M code
Storage details
Axis Axis Axis Axis

1
2
3
4
The M code No. ( Da.10 M code) set in the

positioning data is stored.
808
908 1008 1108
Refer to Section 5.6 "List of monitor data" for information on the storage details.
The following shows a PLC program example for reading the " Md.25 Valid M
code" to the PLC CPU data register (D110). (The read value is used to command
the sub work.)
Read M codes not as "rising edge commands", but as "ON execution
commands".
Example
M code ON signal
FROM
H0
K808
D110
ON execution command
D110: valid M codes
12 - 67
K1
MELSEC-Q
12.7.4 Teaching function

The "teaching function" is used to set addresses aligned using the manual control
(JOG operation, inching operation manual pulse generator operation) in the positioning
data addresses (" Da.6 Positioning address/movement amount", " Da.7 Arc
address").
The details shown below explain about the "teaching function".
[1] Control details
[3] Data used in teaching
[4] Teaching procedure
[5] Teaching program example
[1] Control details

(1) Teaching timing
Teaching is executed using the PLC program when the BUSY signal (XC,
XD, XE, XF) is OFF. (During manual control, teaching can be carried out as
long as the axis is not BUSY, even when an error or warning has occurred.)
(2) Addresses for which teaching is possible

The addresses for which teaching is possible are "current feed values"
( Md.20 Current feed value) having the OP as a reference. The settings of
the "movement amount" used in incremental system positioning cannot be
used. In the teaching function, these "current feed values" are set in the
" Da.6 Positioning address/movement amount" or " Da.7 Arc address".
Positioning data
Positions aligned by manual
control
"Current feed value" A
Da.6 Positioning address/movement

amount
"Current feed value" B
Da.7 Arc address
(3) Dedicated instructions "TEACH 1, TEACH 2, TEACH 3,

TEACH 4, PFWRT"
When the dedicated instructions "TEACH 1, TEACH 2, TEACH 3, TEACH
4, PFWRT" are used to execute the teaching function, the programming
becomes easier. Refer to Chapter 14 "Dedicated instructions" for details.
12 - 68
MELSEC-Q

(1) Before teaching, a "machine OPR" must be carried out to establish the OP.
(When a current value changing, etc., is carried out, " Md.20 Current feed
value" may not show absolute addresses having the OP as a reference.)
(2) Teaching cannot be carried out for positions to which movement cannot be
executed by manual control (positions to which the workpiece cannot
physically move). (During center point designation circular interpolation
control, etc., teaching of " Da.7 Arc address" cannot be carried out if the
center point of the arc is not within the moveable range of the workpiece.)
(3) Writing to the flash ROM can be executed up to 100,000 times.
If writing to the flash ROM exceeds 100,000 times, the writing may become
impossible (assured value is up to 100,000 times).
If an error (error code: 805) occurs when writing to the flash ROM has been
completed, check whether or not the program is created so as to write
continuously to the flash ROM.
[3] Data used in teaching

The following control data is used in teaching.
Setting item
Cd.1
Cd.38
Flash ROM write

request
Teaching data
selection
Setting
value
1
Setting details
Write the set details to the flash ROM (backup
the changed data).
Axis Axis Axis Axis

1
2
3
4
1900
Sets to which "current feed value" is written.

0: Written to " Da.6 Positioning address/
movement amount".
1548 1648 1748 1848
1: Written to " Da.7 Arc address".
Cd.39
Teaching
positioning data
No.
Designates the data to be taught.

(Teaching is carried out when the setting value
1549 1649 1749 1849
is 1 to 600.)
When teaching has been completed, the QD75
is zero cleared in the initial stage.
12 - 69
MELSEC-Q
[4] Teaching procedure

The following shows the procedure for a teaching operation.
(Interpolation operation with axis 1 as a reference)
(1) When teaching to the " Da.6 Positioning address/movement amount"
Start
Carry out a machine OPR.
Move the workpiece to the target position
Using a JOG operation, inching operation, or manual pulse generator.
using a manual operation.
Set the positioning data No. for

which the teaching will be carried out.
Set the current feed value in

the positioning address by teaching
data selection.
NO
Set the positioning data No. in the buffer memory address [1549].
Set 0 in the buffer memory address [1548].
End teaching?
YES
Turn OFF the PLC READY

signal [Y0].
Carry out a writing request to

the flash ROM.
Confirm the completion of the writing.
Confirm that the buffer memory address [1900] has become 0.
End
12 - 70
MELSEC-Q
(2) When teaching to the " Da.7 Arc address", then teaching to the " Da.6
Positioning address/movement amount"
Start
Carry out a machine OPR.
Move the workpiece to the circular

interpolation sub point using a
manual operation.
Set the positioning data No. for

which the teaching will be carried out.
Set the positioning data No. in the buffer memory address [1549].
Set the current feed value in the

arc sub point by teaching
data selection.
Move the workpiece to the circular

interpolation end point position
using a manual operation.
Set the current feed value in the

positioning address by teaching
data selection.
NO
End teaching?
YES
Turn OFF the PLC READY
signal [Y0].
Carry out a writing request to

the flash ROM.
Confirm the completion of the writing.
Confirm that the buffer memory address [1900] has become 0.
End
12 - 71
MELSEC-Q
[5] Teaching program example

The following shows a PLC program example for setting (writing) the positioning
data obtained with the teaching function to the QD75.
(1) Setting conditions
When setting the current feed value as the positioning address, write it
when the BUSY signal is OFF.
(2) Program example
The following example shows a program to carry out the teaching of axis
1 by the dedicated instruction "TEACH 1".
1) Move the workpiece to the target position using a JOG operation (or
an inching operation, a manual pulse generator operation).
Example
V
Target position
t
[Y8]
PLC READY signal
[Y0]
All axis servo ON
[Y1]
QD75 READY signal
[X0]
BUSY signal
[XC]
[X8]
n1
nx
12 - 72
n2
2)
MELSEC-Q
Carry out the teaching operation with the following program.
Example
No.20 Teaching program
Position to the target position with manual operation.
<Pulsate teaching command>

<Hold teaching command>
<Set teaching data>
<Set positioning data No.>
<Execute teaching>
<Turn OFF teaching command
memory>
POINT
(1) Confirm the teaching function and teaching procedure before setting the positioning data.
(2) The positioning addresses that are written are absolute address (ABS) values.
(3) If the positioning operation is correctly completed with the written positioning data, it is
recommended that the positioning data be registered in the QD75 flash ROM.
12 - 73
MELSEC-Q
12.7.5 Target position change function

The "target position change function" is a function to change a target position to a
newly designated target position at any timing during the position control (1-axis linear
control). A command speed can also be changed simultaneously.
The target position and command speed changed are set directly in the buffer
memory, and the target position change is executed by " Cd.29 Target position
change request flag".
The following shows the details of the "target position change function".
[1] Details of control
[2] Precaution during operation
[3] Method of setting target position change function from PLC CPU
[1] Details of control

The following charts show the details of control of the target position change
function.
(a) When the address after change is positioned away from the start point more than the positioning address:
V
t
Positioning address
Address after change
(b) When the speed is changed simultaneously with changing the address:
Speed after
change
V
Speed before
change
t
Positiioning address
Address after change
(c) When the direction of the operation is changed:

V
Address after
change
t
Positioning address

request
Fig. 12.39 Target position change operation

12 - 74
MELSEC-Q
[2] Precautions during operation

(1) If the positioning movement direction from the stop position to a new target
position is reversed, stop the operation once and then position to the new
target position. (Refer to Fig. 12.39 (c).)
(2) If a command speed exceeding the speed limit value is set to change the
command speed, a warning will be given, and the new command speed will
be the speed limit value (warning code: 501).
Also, if the command speed change disables the remaining distance to the
target value from being assured, a warning will be given (warning code: 509).
(3) During interpolation control, a target position change request given is ignored
and a warning (warning code: 518) occurs if a new target position value
(address) is outside the software stroke limit range, if the axis is decelerating
to a stop, or if the operation pattern is continuous path control.
(4) When a command speed is changed, the current speed is also changed.
When the next positioning speed uses the current speed in the continuous
positioning, the next positioning operation is carried out at the new speed
value. When the speed is set with the next positioning data, that speed
becomes the current speed and the operation is carried out at the current
speed.
(5) When a target position change request is given during automatic deceleration
in position control, positioning control to a new position is exercised after the
axis has stopped once if the moving direction is reversed. If the moving
direction is not reversed, the axis is accelerated to the command speed again
and positioned to the new position.
(6) If the constant speed status is regained or the output is reversed by a target
position change made while " Md.48 Deceleration start flag" is ON, the
deceleration start flag remains ON. (For details, refer to Section 12.7.9.)
POINT
When carrying out the target position change continuously, take an interval of 100 ms or longer between the
times of the target position changes. Also, take an interval of 100 ms or longer when the speed change is
carried out after changing the target position or the target position change is carried out after the speed
change.
12 - 75
MELSEC-Q
[3] Method of setting target position change function from PLC CPU
The following table and chart show the example of a data setting and PLC
program used to change the target position of the axis 1 by the command from
the PLC CPU, respectively. (example in which the target position value and
command speed are changed to a new target position of "300.0 m" and a new
command speed of "10000.00 mm/min".)
(1) The following data is set.
(Referring to the starting time chart shown in item (2) below, carry out the
setting with the PLC program shown in item (3).)
Setting
value
Setting item
Setting details
Axis Axis Axis Axis

1
2
3
4
Cd.27
Target position
Value (new address)
Cd.28
Target position
1000000 Set the new speed.
value (new speed)
1536 1636 1736 1836

1537 1637 1737 1837
Cd.29
Target position
change request
flag
1538 1638 1738 1838
3000
1534 1634 1734 1834

1535 1635 1735 1835
Set the new address.
Set "1: Carry out speed change".
(2) The following shows the time chart for target position change.
V
Dwell time
Positioning start signal [Y10]

QD75 READY signal [X0]
Start complete signal [X10]
BUSY signal [XC]
Error detection signal [X8]
Cd.27 Target position value (new address)
3000
1000000
Cd.28 Target position value (new speed)

Cd.29 Target position change request flag
Fig. 12.40 Time chart for target position change from PLC CPU
12 - 76
MELSEC-Q
(3) The following PLC program is added to the control program, and written to the
PLC CPU.
Example
No.22 Target position change program
<Pulsate target position change command>

<Hold target position change command>
<Set target position change value 300.0 m
(address)>
<Set target position change request>

<Write speed change>
<Turn OFF speed change request memory>
12 - 77
MELSEC-Q
12.7.6 Command in-position function

The "command in-position function" checks the remaining distance to the stop position
during the automatic deceleration of positioning control, and sets "1". This flag is called
the "command in-position flag". The command in-position flag is used as a frontloading signal indicating beforehand the completion of the position control.
The details shown below explain about the "command in-position function".
[1] Control details
[3] Setting the command in-position function
[4] Confirming the command in-position flag
[1] Control details

The following shows control details of the command in-position function.
(1) When the remaining distance to the stop position during the automatic
deceleration of positioning control becomes equal to or less than the value
set in " Pr.16 Command in-position width", "1" is stored in the command
in-position flag ( Md.31 Status: b2).
(Command in-position width check)
Remaining distance " Pr.16
Command in-position width" setting value
Positioning
ON
Command in-position flag
OFF
Command in-position
width setting value
Fig. 12.41 Command in-position operation

(2) A command in-position width check is carried out every 3.5ms.
12 - 78
MELSEC-Q

(1) A command in-position width check will not be carried out in the following
cases.
During deceleration by a stop command or sudden stop command.
During position control, the operation pattern is "continuous path control"
During speed control, or during the speed control of speed-position
switching or position-speed switching control.
V
Positioning
control start
Command in-position
width setting value
Speed to position switching
Speed-position
Command in-position
switching
width setting value
control start
t
ON
Command in-position flag

[ Md. 31 Status: b2] OFF
Execution of the command in-position width check
Execution of the command in-position

width check
Fig. 12.42 Command in-position width check

(2) The command in-position flag will be turned OFF in the following cases.
("0" will be stored in " Md.31 Status: b2".)
At the positioning control start
At the speed control start
At the speed-position switching control, position-speed switching control
start
At the OPR control start
At the JOG operation start
At the inching operation start
When the manual pulse generator operation is enabled.
(3) The " Pr.16 Command in-position width" and command in-position flag
( Md.31 Status: b2) of the reference axis are used during interpolation
control.
12 - 79
MELSEC-Q
[3] Setting the command in-position function

To use the "command in-position function", set the required value in the
parameter shown in the following table, and write it to the QD75.
signal (Y0).
Setting
value
Setting item
Pr.16
Factory-set
initial value
Setting details
Turn ON the command in-position flag, and set the
remaining distance to the stop position of the position
control.
Command inposition width
100
[4] Confirming the command in-position flag

The "command in-position flag" is stored in the following buffer memory.
Monitor item
Md.31
Monitor
value
Storage details
The command in-position flag is stored in the
"b2" position.
Status
Axis Axis Axis Axis

1
2
3
4
817
917 1017 1117
REMARK

12 - 80
MELSEC-Q
12.7.7 Acceleration/deceleration processing function

The "acceleration/deceleration processing function" adjusts the
acceleration/deceleration when each control is executed.
Adjusting the acceleration/deceleration processing to match the control enables more
precise control to be carried out.
There are two acceleration/deceleration adjustment items that can be set:
"Acceleration/deceleration time 0 to 3", and "acceleration/deceleration method setting".
The details shown below explain about the "acceleration/deceleration processing
function".
[1] "Acceleration/deceleration time 0 to 3" control details and setting
[2] "Acceleration/deceleration method setting" control details and setting
[1] "Acceleration/deceleration time 0 to 3" control details and setting

In the QD75, four types each of acceleration time and deceleration time can be
set. By using separate acceleration/deceleration times, control can be carried out
with different acceleration/deceleration times for positioning control, JOG
operation, OPR, etc.
Set the required values for the acceleration/deceleration time in the parameters
shown in the following table, and write them to the QD75.
Setting item
Pr.9
Setting
value
Setting details
Acceleration time 0

Factory-set
initial value
1000
Set the acceleration time at a value within the range

of 1 to 8388608 ms.
1000
1000
1000
1000

Set the deceleration time at a value within the range

of 1 to 8388608 ms.
1000
1000
1000
12 - 81
MELSEC-Q
[2] "Acceleration/deceleration method setting" control details and

setting
In the "acceleration/deceleration method setting", the acceleration/deceleration
processing method is selected and set. The set acceleration/deceleration
processing is applied to all acceleration/deceleration.
The two types of "acceleration/deceleration method setting" are shown below.
(1) Automatic trapezoidal acceleration/deceleration processing

method
This is a method in which linear acceleration/deceleration is carried out
based on the acceleration time, deceleration time, and speed limit value set
by the user.
V
Fig. 12.43 Automatic trapezoidal acceleration/deceleration processing method
(2) S-pattern acceleration/deceleration processing method

In this method, the motor burden is reduced during starting and stopping.
This is a method in which acceleration/deceleration is carried out gradually,
based on the acceleration time, deceleration time, speed limit value, and
" Pr.35 S-pattern proportion" (1 to 100%) set by the user.
Fig. 12.44 S-pattern acceleration/deceleration processing method
12 - 82
MELSEC-Q
When a speed change request is given during S-pattern acceleration/

deceleration processing, S-pattern acceleration/deceleration processing
begins at a speed change request start.
When speed change

request is not given
Speed change (acceleration)
Command speed before speed change
Speed change (deceleration)
Fig. 12.45 Speed change during S-pattern acceleration/deceleration processing

Set the required values for the "acceleration/deceleration method setting" in
the parameters shown in the following table, and write them to the QD75.
Setting
value
Setting item
Acceleration/
Pr.34 deceleration
process selection
Pr.35
Setting details
Set the acceleration/deceleration method.
0: Automatic trapezoidal acceleration/deceleration
processing
1: S-pattern acceleration/deceleration processing
Set the acceleration/deceleration curve when "1" is set
in " Pr.34 Acceleration/deceleration processing
S-pattern
proportion
Factory-set
initial value
100
selection".
REMARK

12 - 83
MELSEC-Q
12.7.8 Pre-reading start function

The "pre-reading start function" does not output pulses while the execution prohibition
flag is ON if a positioning start request is given with the execution prohibition flag ON,
and starts servo within 3ms after OFF of the execution prohibition flag is detected. The
positioning start request is given when the axis is in a standby status, and the
execution prohibition flag is turned OFF at the axis operating timing. This shortens the
virtual start time. The QD75 normally takes 6 to 7ms from when it receives a
positioning start request until it starts servo (start time). Some systems often need the
start time to be shortened. This "pre-reading start function" can improve the tact time of
the system.
The "pre-reading start function" will be explained below.
[1] Controls
[3] Program examples
[1] Controls
The pre-reading start function is performed by turning ON the positioning start
signal [Y10, Y11, Y12, Y13] with the execution prohibition flag [Y14, Y15, Y16,
Y17] ON, or by executing the dedicated instruction (PSTRT1, PSTRT2, PSTRT3,
PSTRT4). However, if positioning is started with the execution prohibition flag
ON, the positioning data is analyzed but servo start is not provided. While the
execution prohibition flag is ON, " Md.26 Axis operation status" remains
unchanged from "5: Analyzing". Pulse output starts within 3ms after the execution
prohibition flag [Y14, Y15, Y16, Y17] has turned OFF, and " Md.26 Axis
operation status" changes to the status (e.g. during position control, during speed
control) that matches the control system. (Refer to Fig. 12.46)
V
t
Start time
[Y10,Y11,Y12,Y13]
ON
OFF
Positioning start timing
Execution prohibition flag OFF

[Y14,Y15,Y16,Y17]
ON
BUSY signal
[XC,XD,XE,XF]
ON
OFF
Positioning data
analysis
Md. 26 Axis operation

status
3ms or less
Ta
During position
control
Standby
Execution prohibition flag OFF waiting

Analyzing
Fig. 12.46 Operations of pre-reading start function
12 - 84
During position
control
MELSEC-Q
The pre-reading start function is effective for the system as shown below.
Cutter
Cutter shaft
Feed shaft
Stock
Fig. 12.47 System example using pre-reading start function

Fig. 12.47 shows a system example which repeats:
1) Feeding a stock with a feed shaft; and
2) Cutting it with a cutter
to cut the stock to fixed size. The operations of the feed shaft and cutter shaft are
represented as shown in Fig. 12.48.
12 - 85
MELSEC-Q
Feed shaft
t
Start
time
Ts
Stop time
Tw
Start
time
Ts
Cutter shaft
t
Start
time
Ts
Feed shaft
start request
Cutter shaft
start request
2
Fig. 12.48 Operation timings of system example

The cutter shaft starts from the moment the feed shaft has completed feeding the
stock " 1 ", and the feed shaft starts from the moment the cutter shaft has
returned to the standby position " 2 ". Actually, however, there is a delay of start
time Ts (6 to 7ms) from when the QD75 receives a start request until it servo
start. The system's tact time can be reduced by the shortening of this delay with
the Pre-reading start function.
In Fig. 12.48, the feed shaft stands by during the stop time Tw.
Hence, pre-reading of the next data starts during the stop time Tw. If Tw is a
certain period of time, the analysis of the next data is completed during that
period, and the system is placed in an execution prohibition flag OFF waiting
status. Therefore, replacing the positioning start timing at 2 with the execution
prohibition flag OFF allows the time from when the axis operation request turns
ON until pulse output starts to be reduced to within 3ms in the PLC program.
(Refer to Fig. 12.46)
12 - 86
MELSEC-Q

(1) The time required to analyze the positioning data is up to 7ms.
(2) After positioning data analysis, the system is put in an execution prohibition
flag OFF waiting status. Any change made to the positioning data in the
execution prohibition flag OFF waiting status is not reflected on the
positioning data. Change the positioning data before turning ON the
positioning start signal.
(3) The pre-reading start function is invalid if the execution prohibition flag is
turned OFF between when the positioning start signal has turned ON and
when positioning data analysis is completed (Ta<start time, Ta: Refer to Fig.
12.46).
(4) The data No. which can be executed positioning start using " Cd.3 Positioning
start No." with the pre-reading start function are No. 1 to 600 only. Performing
the pre-reading start function at the setting of No. 7000 to 7004 or 9001 to
9004 will result in an outside start No. range error (Error code: 543).
(5) Always turn ON the execution prohibition flag at the same time or before
turning ON the positioning start signal. Pre-reading may not be started if the
execution prohibition flag is turned ON during Ta after the positioning start
signal is turned ON. The pre-reading start function is invalid if the execution
prohibition flag is turned ON after positioning start (pulse output) with the
execution prohibition flag OFF. (It is made valid at the next positioning start.)
[3] Program examples

Pre-reading start function (when positioning start signal Y10 is used)
<Pre-reading start command pulse>

<Sets 1 to positioning start No.>
<Turns ON execution prohibition flag>
<Turns ON positioning start signal>
<Turns OFF execution prohibition flag>
<Turns OFF positioning start signal>
12 - 87
MELSEC-Q
Pre-reading start function (when dedicated instruction PSTRT1 is used)
<Turns ON execution prohibition flag>

<Sets 1 to positioning start No.>
<Executes positioning start>
<Turns OFF execution prohibition flag>
<Normal termination of positioning>
<Sets error code>
<Abnormal termination of positioning>
12 - 88
MELSEC-Q
12.7.9 Deceleration start flag function

The "deceleration start flag function" turns ON the flag when the constant speed status
or acceleration status switches to the deceleration status during position control whose
operation pattern is "Positioning complete". This function can be used as a signal to
start the operation to be performed by other equipment at each end of position control
or to perform preparatory operation, etc. for the next position control.
For the "deceleration start flag function", the following will be explained.
[1] Control details
[3] Deceleration start flag function setting method
[4] Checking of deceleration start flag
: Usable with the module whose first six digits of SERIAL No. are "050224" or later.
[1] Control details

When deceleration for a stop is started in the position control whose operation
pattern is "Positioning complete", "1" is stored into " Md.48 Deceleration start
flag". When the next operation start is made or the manual pulse generator
operation enable status is gained, "0" is stored. (Refer to Fig. 12.49.)
(1) Start made with positioning data No. specified
V Operation pattern: Positioning complete (00)
Time
Md.48 Deceleration start flag 0
Fig. 12.49 Operation of deceleration start flag
12 - 89
MELSEC-Q
(2) Block start

At a block start, this function is valid for only the position control whose
operation pattern is "Positioning complete" at the point whose shape has
been set to "End". (Refer to Fig. 12.50.)
The following table indicates the operation of the deceleration start flag in the
case of the following block start data and positioning data.
Da.11
Shape
Block start
data
1st point
2nd point
3rd point
Da.13
Special start
instruction
Da.12
Start data No.
1: Continue
1: Continue
0: End
1
3
4
0: Block start
0: Block start
0: Block start
Positioning
Data No.
Da.1
Operation pattern
1
2
3
4
5

1st point: Continue (1)

Operation
pattern
2nd point: Continue (1)

Continuous
positioning
control (01)
Positioning
data No. 1
Positioning
data No. 2
Positioning
data No. 3
3rd point: End (0)

Continuous path
control (11)
Positioning
data No. 4
Positioning
data No. 5
t
Fig. 12.50 Operation of deceleration start flag at block start
12 - 90
MELSEC-Q

(1) The deceleration start flag function is valid for the control system of "1-axis
linear control", "2-axis linear interpolation control", "3-axis linear interpolation
control", "4-axis linear interpolation control", "speed-position switching control"
or "position-speed switching control". (In the case of linear interpolation
control, the function is valid for only the reference axis.) Refer to Section 3.2.4
"Combination of QD75 main functions and sub functions".
(2) The deceleration start flag does not turn ON when the operation pattern is
"continuous positioning control" or "continuous path control".
(3) The deceleration start flag function is invalid for an OPR, JOG operation,
inching operation, manual pulse generator operation, and deceleration made
with a stop signal.
(4) The deceleration start flag does not turn ON when a speed change or
override is used to make deceleration.
(5) If a target position change is made while the deceleration start flag is ON, the
deceleration start flag remains ON.
Deceleration start point
Operation pattern: Positioning complet (00)
Execution of target position change request

Time
(6) When the movement direction is reversed by a target position change, the
deceleration start flag turns ON.
Operation pattern: Positioning complete (00)
Execution of target position change request

Time
(7) During position control of position-speed switching control, the deceleration

start flag is turned ON by automatic deceleration.
The deceleration start flag remains ON if position control is switched to speed
control by the position-speed switching signal after the deceleration start flag
has turned ON.
(8) During skip operation, the deceleration start flag is valid for only the
positioning data whose operation pattern is "Positioning complete".
(9) If the condition start of a block start is not made since the condition is not
satisfied, the deceleration start flag turns ON when the shape is "End".
(10) When an interrupt request during continuous operation is issued, the
deceleration start flag turns ON at a start of deceleration in the positioning
data being executed.
12 - 91
MELSEC-Q
[3] Deceleration start flag function setting method

To use the "deceleration start flag function", set "1" to the following control data
using a PLC program.
The set data is made valid on the rising edge (OFF to ON) of the PLC READY
signal [Y0].
Setting
value
Setting item
Cd.41
Deceleration start
flag valid
Setting details
Set whether the deceleration start flag function

is made valid or invalid.
0: Deceleration start flag invalid
1: Deceleration start flag valid
1905
[4] Checking of deceleration start flag

The "deceleration start flag" is stored into the following buffer memory addresses.
Monitor item
Deceleration start
Md.48
flag
Monitor
value
Storage details
0: Status other than below

1: Status from deceleration start to next
operation start or manual pulse generator
operation enable
12 - 92
Axis Axis Axis Axis

1
2
3
4
899
999 1099 1199
MELSEC-Q
12.7.10 Stop command processing for deceleration stop function

The "stop command processing for deceleration stop function" is provided to set the
deceleration curve if a stop cause occurs during deceleration stop processing
(including automatic deceleration).
This function is valid for both automatic trapezoidal and S-pattern
acceleration/deceleration processing methods.
(For the stop cause, refer to Section 1.2.3 Outline of stopping.)
The "stop command processing for deceleration stop function"
performs the following two operations:
(1) Deceleration curve re-processing

Re-processes a deceleration curve starting from the speed at stop cause
occurrence to stop, according to the preset deceleration time.
(2) Deceleration curve continuation

Continues the current deceleration curve after a stop cause has occurred.
This section explains the "stop command processing for deceleration stop function" as
follows:
[1] Control
[2] Precautions for control
[3] Setting method
[1] Control
The operation of "stop command processing for deceleration stop function" is
explained below.
(1) Deceleration curve re-processing

A deceleration curve is re-processed starting from the speed at stop cause
occurrence to stop, according to the preset deceleration time.
If a stop cause occurs during automatic deceleration of position control, the
deceleration stop processing stops as soon as the target has reached the
positioning address specified in the positioning data that is currently
executed.
Stop cause
occurrence
Deceleration curve according

to preset deceleration time
Immediate stop at the specified
positioning address
Deceleration stop
processing (automatic
deceleration) start
Deceleration curve when stop

cause does not occur
Fig. 12.51 Deceleration curve re-processing operation (for position control or S-pattern
acceleration/deceleration processing)
12 - 93
MELSEC-Q
(2) Deceleration curve continuation

The current deceleration curve is continued after a stop cause has
occurred.
If a stop cause occurs during automatic deceleration of position control, the
deceleration stop processing may be complete before the target has
reached the positioning address specified in the positioning data that is
currently executed.
Stop cause occurrence
Deceleration stop
deceleration) start
Fig. 12.52 Deceleration curve continuation operation (for position control or S-pattern
acceleration/deceleration processing)
[2] Precautions for control

(1) In manual control (JOG operation, inching operation, manual pulse generator
operation), the stop command processing for deceleration stop function is
invalid.
(2) The stop command processing for deceleration stop function is valid when "0:
Normal deceleration stop" is set in " Pr.37 Stop group 1 sudden stop
selection" to " Pr.39 Stop group 3 sudden stop selection" as the stopping
method for stop cause occurrence.
(3) The stop command processing for deceleration stop function is invalid when
"1: Sudden stop" is set in " Pr.37 Stop group 1 sudden stop selection" to
" Pr.39 Stop group 3 sudden stop selection". (A deceleration curve is reprocessed, according to the " Pr.36 Sudden stop deceleration time" (starting
from the speed at stop cause occurrence to a stop))
In the position control (including position control of speed/position changeover
control or position/speed changeover control) mode, positioning may stop
immediately depending on the stop cause occurrence timing and
" Pr.36 Sudden stop deceleration time" setting.
V

(Sudden stop cause)

(Sudden stop cause)
Deceleration curve according

to sudden stop deceleration time
Deceleration stop
deceleration) start
Deceleration curve when

stop cause does not occur
Deceleration stop
deceleration) start
Deceleration curve
according to sudden
stop deceleration time
Deceleration curve
when stop cause
does not occur
(Sudden stop in front of the specified positioning address)
(Immediate stop at the specified positioning address)
Fig. 12.53 Sudden stop operation (for position control or S-pattern acceleration/deceleration processing)
12 - 94
MELSEC-Q
[3] Setting method

To use the "stop command processing for deceleration stop function", set the
following control data in a PLC program.
The set data are made valid as soon as they are written to the buffer memory.
The PLC ready signal [Y0] is irrelevant.
Setting item
Stop command
processing for
Cd.42
deceleration stop
selection
Setting
value
Setting details
Set the stop command processing for
deceleration stop function.
0: Deceleration curve re-processing
1: Deceleration curve continuation
For details of the setting details, refer to Section 5.7 "Control data list".
12 - 95
1907
MELSEC-Q
12.8 Servo ON/OFF

12.8.1 Servo ON/OFF
The servo amplifiers connected to the QD75 is executed servo ON or OFF.
By establishing the servo ON status with the servo ON command, servo motor
operation is enabled.
The following two types of servo ON or OFF can be used.
Cd.100 Each axis servo OFF (Buffer memory addresses: 1551, 1651, 1751, 1851)
A list of the "All axis servo ON [Y1]" and " Cd.100 Each axis servo OFF" is given below.
Cd.100 Each axis servo OFF
Setting value "0"
All axis servo ON: Y1
Setting value "1"
OFF
ON
: Servo ON (Servo operation enabled) ,
: Servo OFF (Servo operation disabled)
[1] Servo ON (Servo operation enabled)

The following shows the procedure for servo ON.
(1) Make sure that the servo LED indicates "b".
(The initial value for "All axis servo ON [Y1]" is "OFF".)
(2) Set "0" for " Cd.100 Each axis servo OFF" (Buffer memory: 1551, 1651, 1751,
1851).
(3) Turn ON "All axis servo ON [Y1]".
Now the servo amplifier turns ON the servo (servo operation enabled state).
(The servo LED indicates "d".)
[2] Servo OFF (Servo operation disabled)

The following shows the procedure for servo OFF.
(1) Set "1" for " Cd.100 Each axis servo OFF" (Buffer memory: 1551, 1651, 1751,
1851). (The servo LED indicates "c".)
(If the " Cd.100 Each axis servo OFF" set "0" again, after the servo operation
enabled.)
(2) Turn OFF "All axis servo ON [Y1]".
(The servo LED indicates "b".)
POINT
If the servomotor is rotated by external force during the servo OFF status, follow
up processing is performed.
Change between servo ON or OFF status while operation is stopped.
The servo OFF command of during operation will be ignored.
When the servo OFF is given to all axes, "All axis servo ON [Y1]" is applied even
if all axis servo ON command is turned ON to OFF with " Cd.100 Each axis servo
OFF" set "0".
12 - 96
MELSEC-Q
12.8.2 Follow up function

(1) Follow up function
The follow up function monitors the number of motor rotations (actual present
value) with the servo OFF and reflects the value in the present feed value.
Therefore, even if the servomotor rotates while the servo OFF, the servomotor
will not just rotate for the quantify of droop pulses the next time the servo turns
ON but positioning can be performed from the stop position.
(2) Execution follow up

Follow up function is executed continually during the servo OFF status.
ON

Each axis servo OFF
command
OFF
0
Servo error detected
ON
Servo ON or OFF status OFF
Follow up function executed
Fig. 12.54 Operation timings of follow up function
POINT
The follow-up function performs the process if the QD75 and the servo is turned
ON (servo LED indicates "b", "c", or "d".) regardless of the presence of the
absolute position system.
12 - 97
MELSEC-Q
12.9 Precautions for MR-J2M-B connection

[1] Servo parameters
(1) " Pr.100 Servo series" is to choose "3: MR-J2S-B/MR-J2M-B".
(2) Write the setting value "012"of the " Pr.102 Regenerative brake resistor"
inside buffer memory with PLC program when you use "MR-RB14".
(3) There are two kinds of parameters of DRU (drive unit) and IFU (interface
unit) in MR-J2M-B. The servo parameters set the only DRU parameters.
Don't set (change) IFU parameters from QD75.
The IFU parameters set (change) "the unit operation section pushbutton
switches of the MR-J2M-B interface unit" or "setup software".
(4) Don't change setting value " Pr.122 Analog monitor output: 0001 (initial
value)", " Pr.127 Monitor output 1 offset: 0000 (initial value)" and " Pr.128
Monitor output 2 offset: 0000 (initial value)".
Set up IFU parameters " Pr.3 to Pr.8 " when you use analog monitor.
(5) You cannot change parameter "serial communication response delay time
setting" and "serial communication baud rate setting" of " Pr.133 Optional
function 6".
12 - 98
Chapter 13 Common Functions
The details and usage of the "common functions" executed according to the user's
requirements are explained in this chapter.
Common functions include functions required when using the QD75, such as parameter
initialization and execution data backup.
Read the setting and execution procedures for each common function indicated in this
chapter thoroughly, and execute the appropriate function where required.
13.1
13.2
13.3
13.4
13.5
Outline of common functions...................................................................................13Parameter initialization function ..............................................................................13Execution data backup function ..............................................................................13External I/O signal logic switching function.............................................................13External I/O signal monitor function ........................................................................13-
2
3
5
7
8
13
13 - 1
13 COMMON FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
13.1 Outline of common functions

"Common functions" are executed according to the user's requirements, regardless of
the control system, etc. These common functions are executed by peripheral devices
or using PLC programs.
The following table shows the functions included in the "common functions".
Means
Common function
Details
Parameter initialization
This function returns the

parameter stored in the QD75
buffer memory and flash ROM to
the factory-set initial value.
Execution data backup
This function writes the

"execution data", currently being
used for control, to the flash
ROM.
External I/O signal logic

switching
This function switches I/O signal

logic according to the equipment
connected to the QD75.
For the system in which with bcontact, upper limit switch, and
lower limit switch are not used,
the parameter logic setting can
be controlled without wiring if it is
changed to a "positive logic".
External I/O signal

monitor
This function monitors the

external I/O signal monitor
information in the module's
detailed information which can be
displayed on the system monitor
of GX Developer .
Usable on GX Developer (SW6D5C-GPPW-E or later).
13 - 2
PLC
program
Peripheral
devices
13 COMMON FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
13.2 Parameter initialization function

"The parameter initialization function" is used to return the setting data set in the QD75
buffer memory and flash ROM to their factory-set initial values.
The details shown below explain about the "parameter initialization function".
[1] Parameter initialization means
[2] Control details
[4] Parameter initialization method
[1] Parameter initialization means

Initialization is executed with a PLC program.
Initialization is executed by peripheral device.
Refer to GX Configurator-QP Operating Manual for the execution method by
peripheral device.
[2] Control details

The following table shows the setting data initialized by the "parameter
initialization function".
(The data initialized are "buffer memory" and " flash ROM " setting data.)
Setting data
Basic parameters ( Pr.1 to Pr.10 )
Detailed parameters ( Pr.11 to Pr.42 , Pr.200 , Pr.201)
OPR basic parameters ( Pr.43 to Pr.48 )
OPR detailed parameters ( Pr.49 to Pr.57 )
Servo parameters ( Pr.100 to Pr.161 )
Positioning data (No.1 to 600)
Block start data (No.7000 to 7004)

(1) Parameter initialization is only executed when the positioning control is not
carried out (when the PLC READY signal (Y0) is OFF).
A warning "In PLC READY (warning code: 111)" will occur if executed when
the PLC READY signal (Y0) is ON.
(2) A writing to the flash ROM is up to 100,000 times. If writing to the flash ROM
exceeds 100,000 times, the writing may become impossible, and a flash
ROM writing error (error code: 801) will occur.
(3) A "PLC CPU reset" or "PLC power restart" must be carried out after the
parameters are initialized.
(4) If an error occurs on the parameter set in the QD75 when the PLC READY
signal [Y0] is turned ON, the QD75 READY signal [X0] will not be turned ON
and the control cannot be carried out.
Important
Parameter initialization takes about 10 seconds. (Up to 30 seconds are sometimes
required.)
Do not turn the power ON/OFF; reset the PLC CPU, etc., during parameter
initialization. The flash ROM data may be corrupted.
13 - 3
13 COMMON FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
[4] Parameter initialization method

(1) Parameter initialization is carried out using the dedicated instruction "PINIT".
(Refer to Chapter 14 "Dedicated instructions" for details.)
(2) Parameter initialization can also be carried out by the writing of the data
shown in the table below to the buffer memory using the TO
command/intelligent function device.
The initialization of the parameter is executed at the time point the data is
written to the QD75 buffer memory.
Setting item
Cd.2
Parameter
initialization
request
Setting
value
Setting details
Set "1" (parameter initialization request).
Axis Axis Axis Axis

1
2
3
4
1901
When the initialization is complete, "0" will be set in " Cd.2 Parameter
initialization request" by the QD75 automatically.
13 - 4
13 COMMON FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
13.3 Execution data backup function

When the QD75 buffer memory data is rewritten from the PLC CPU, "the data backed
up in the QD75 flash ROM" may differ from "the data (buffer memory data) for which
control is being executed".
In cases like these, the data being executed will be lost when the PLC power is turned
OFF. (Refer to Chapter 7.)
In cases like these, the "execution data backup function" backs up the data being
executed by writing it to the flash ROM. The data that was backed up is then written to
the buffer memory when the power is turned ON next.
The details shown below explain about the "execution data backup function".
[1] Execution data backup means
[2] Control details
[4] Execution data backup method
[1] Execution data backup (written to flash ROM) means

The backup is executed with a PLC program.
The backup is executed by peripheral device.
Refer to GX Configurator-QP Operating Manual for execution data backup
method by peripheral device.
[2] Control details

The following shows the data that can be written to the flash ROM using the
"execution data backup function".
Buffer memory
Flash ROM
Parameters ( Pr.1 to Pr.57 , Pr.200 , Pr.201 )

Servo parameters ( Pr.100 , to Pr.161 )
Parameters ( Pr.1 to Pr.57 , Pr.200 , Pr.201 )

Servo parameters ( Pr.100 , to Pr.161 )

(1) Data can only be written to the flash ROM when the positioning control is not
carried out (when the PLC READY signal (Y0) is OFF).
(2) Writing to the flash ROM can be executed up to 100,000 times.
If writing to the flash ROM exceeds 100,000 times, the writing may become
impossible, and a "flash ROM writing error (error code: 801)" will occur.
(3) After one power ON/PLC CPU reset operation, writing to the flash ROM
using a PLC program is limited to up to 25 times.
If the 26th writing is executed, a "flash ROM write number error (error code:
805)" will occur. If this error occurs, carry out the power OFF ON/PLC
CPU reset operation again.
Refer to Md.19 of Section 5.1.7 "Types and roles of monitor data" for
details.
Important
Do not turn the power ON/OFF, reset the PLC CPU, during writing to the flash
ROM. The flash ROM data may be corrupted.
13 - 5
13 COMMON FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
[4] Execution data backup method

(1) Execution data backup (writing to the flash ROM) is carried out using the
dedicated instruction "PFWRT". (Refer to "Chapter 14 Dedicated instructions"
for details.)
(2) Refer to Section 7.2 "Data transmission process" for the data transmission
processing at the backup of the execution data.
(3) Execution data backup can also be carried out by the writing of the data
shown in the table below to the QD75 buffer memory using the TO
command/intelligent function device.
The writing to the flash ROM is executed at the time point the data is written
to the QD75 buffer memory.
Cd.1
Setting
value
Setting item
Flash ROM write
request
Setting details
Set "1" (flash ROM write request).
Axis Axis Axis Axis

1
2
3
4
1900
When the writing to the flash ROM is complete, "0" will be set in " Cd.1 Flash
ROM write request" by the QD75 automatically.
13 - 6
13 COMMON FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
13.4 External I/O signal logic switching function

This function switches the signal logic according to the external equipment connected
to the QD75.
For the system in which b-contact, upper limit switch, and lower limit switch are not
used, the parameter logic setting can be controlled without wiring if it is changed to a
"positive logic".
When the upper limit switch, and lower limit switch are used, ensure to use them with
b-contact.
The details shown below explain about the "External I/O signal logic switching
function".
[1] Parameter setting details
[2] Precautions on parameter setting
[1] Parameter setting details

To use the "External I/O signal logic switching function", set the parameters
shown in the following table.
Setting item
Factory-set
initial value Axis 1 Axis 2 Axis 3 Axis 4
Setting details
Selection of logic of signals input from external source to
QD75
Pr.22
Input signal logic

selection
b0
Lower limit
b1
Upper limit
0: Negative logic,
1: Positive logic
b2
Not used
Set "0".
b3
Stop signal
b4
External
command
b5
Not used
Set "0".
b6
Near-point signal
0: Negative logic,
1: Positive logic
0: Negative logic,
1: Positive logic
b7
Not used
Set "0".
b8
Manual pulse
generator input
0: Negative logic,
1: Positive logic
b9 to b15
Not used
Set "0".
31
181
331
481
Refer to Section 5.2 "List of parameters" for the information on detail settings.
[2] Precautions on parameter setting

(1) The external I/O signal logic switching parameters are validated when the
PLC READY signal [Y0] is turned OFF to ON. (The logic is negative right after
power-on.)
(2) If each signal logic is set erroneously, the operation may not be carried out
correctly.
Before setting, check the specifications of the equipment to be used.
13 - 7
13 COMMON FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
13.5 External I/O signal monitor function

The "External I/O signal monitor function" monitors the module's information and
external I/O signal monitor information in the module's detailed information which
can be displayed on the system monitor of GX Developer .
The information that can be monitored are the module's information (same as the
QD75 front "RUN", "ERR" LED indicators) and the following external I/O signals.
(Set the logic of the external I/O signals in " Pr.22 Input signal logic selection"
and " Pr.23 Output signal logic selection".)
0:OFF, 1:ON
Axis-by-axis external I/O
signals and module RUN,
ERR LEDs
Indicates that RLS signal of axis 1 is ON.
: Use GX Developer of version 6.05F or later. Refer to GX Developer Operating

Manual for the system monitor of GX Developer.
13 - 8
Chapter 14 Dedicated Instructions
The QD75 dedicated instructions are explained in this chapter.

These instructions are used to facilitate the programming for the use of the functions
of the intelligent function module.
Using the dedicated instructions, the programming can be carried out without being
aware of the QD75 buffer memory address and interlock signal.
14.1
14.2
14.3
14.4
14.5
14.6
List of dedicated instructions ..................................................................................14- 2

Interlock during dedicated instruction is executed.................................................14- 2
PSTRT1, PSTRT2, PSTRT3, PSTRT4 .................................................................14- 3
TEACH1, TEACH2, TEACH3, TEACH4................................................................14- 7
PFWRT ...................................................................................................................14- 11
PINIT .......................................................................................................................14- 15
14
14 - 1
14 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
14.1 List of dedicated instructions

The dedicated instructions explained in this Chapter are listed in Table 14.1.
Table 14.1 List of dedicated instructions
Application
Dedicated
instruction
Outline of functions
Reference
PSTRT1
Positioning start
PSTRT2
PSTRT3
This function starts the positioning control of the designated

axis of the QD75.
Section 14.4
This function carries out teaching the designated axis of the

QD75.
Section 14.5
This function writes the buffer memory parameters,

positioning data and block start data to the flash ROM.
Section 14.6
This function initializes the buffer memory and flash ROM

setting data to the factory-set data (initial values).
Section 14.7
PSTRT4
TEACH1
Teaching
TEACH2
TEACH3
TEACH4
Writing to flash ROM

PFWRT
PINIT
14.2 Interlock during dedicated instruction is executed

The positioning start instruction (PSTRT ) and teaching instruction (TEACH )
cannot be executed simultaneously in each axis. If they are executed at the same time,
the second and later instructions are ignored by an internal interlock (no error will
occur).
The timing of the positioning start dedicated instruction (PSTRT ) is as shown below.
ON
PSTRT
OFF
instruction ON
ON
Interlock provided by PLC CPU
OFF
ON
OFF
BUSY (XC to XF)
ON
Positioning completed (X14 to X17)
14 - 2
OFF
MELSEC-Q
14.3 PSTRT1, PSTRT2, PSTRT3, PSTRT4

These dedicated instructions are used to start the positioning of the designated axis.
Setting
data
Internal device
Bit
(S)
(D)
Word
Usable device
Special
MELSECNET/10
module
direct J \
U \G
Bit
Word
File
register
Constant
Others
K, H, $
[Instruction symbol]
Index
register
Zn
[Execution condition]
PSTRT1
PSTRT2
PSTRT3
PSTRT4
ZP.PSTRT1
"Un"
(S)
(D)
ZP.PSTRT2
"Un"
(S)
(D)
ZP.PSTRT3
"Un"
(S)
(D)
ZP.PSTRT4
"Un"
(S)
(D)
When PSTRT1, PSTRT2, PSTRT3, and PSTRT4 are common to each other, they are designated as "PSTRT ".
[Setting data]
Setting data
"Un"
(S)
(D)
Setting details
QD75 head I/O number
(00 to FE: High-order two digits of I/O number expressed in three digits)
Head number of a device in which control data is stored
Head number of a bit device which turns ON the operation by one scan at the
time of completion of the instruction.
If the instruction is completed abnormally, ((D) + 1) will also be turned ON.
Setting side
( 1)
Data type
User
BIN 16 bits
Device
System
Bit
Note) The file register of each of the local device and the program cannot be used as a device for setting data.
14 - 3
MELSEC-Q
[Control data]
Device
Item
(S)+0
System area
Setting data
Setting range
The state at the time of completion is stored.

(S)+1
Complete status
0
: Normal completion
Other than 0: Abnormal completion (error code)( 2)
The following data Nos. to be started by the PSTRT
instruction are designated.
: 1 to 600
1 to 600
: 7000 to 7004
Block start
7000 to 7004
(S)+2
Start No.
Machine
OPR
:
9001
9000 to 9004
: 9002
Fast OPR
: 9003
Multiple axes simultaneous start : 9004
1: The data on the setting side is as follows.
User : Data before the execution of dedicated instructions is stored by user.
System: Data after the execution of dedicated instruction is stored by PLC CPU.
2: Refer to Section 15.2 for error codes at abnormal completion.
Setting side
( 1)
System
User
[Functions]
(1) The positioning start of the axes to be processed (See below) is carried out.
PSTRT1: Axis 1
PSTRT2: Axis 2
PSTRT3: Axis 3
PSTRT4: Axis 4
(2) The block start, OPR start, current value changing, and multiple axes
simultaneous start can be carried out by the setting of "start number" 7000 to
7004/9001 to 9004 in ((S)+2).
(3) The PSTRT instruction completion can be confirmed using the complete devices
((D)+0) and ((D)+1).
(a) Complete device ((D)+0)
This device is turned ON by the END processing of the scan for which
PSTRT instruction is completed, and turned OFF by the next END
processing.
(b) Complete state display device ((D)+1)
This device is turned ON and OFF according to the state in which PSTRT
instruction is completed.
When completed normally : Kept unchanged at OFF.
When completed abnormally: This device is turned ON by the END
processing of the scan for which PSTRT
instruction is completed, and turned OFF by
the next END processing. (same ON/OFF
operation as complete device).
14 - 4
END
processing
PLC program
ON
PSTRT
instruction
Complete device
Complete state display
device
MELSEC-Q
END
processing
END
processing
END
processing
PSTRT instruction
execution completion
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
When
completed
abnormally
When
completed normally
OFF
1 scan
[Errors]
(1) When an PSTRT instruction is completed abnormally, the error complete signal
((D)+1) is turned ON, and the error code is stored in the complete status ((S)+1).
Check and take a measure against the error referring to Section 15.2 "List of error
codes".
[Precautions]
(1) If the positioning is started by the PSTRT instruction, the positioning start signals
(Y10 to Y13) will not turn ON.
Confirm the operation during the positioning control using the PSTRT start
instruction and start complete signals (X10 to X13).
(2) If the stop instruction is input before completion of the positioning which has been
started by the PSTRT instruction, the completion device (D) turns the 1-scan ON
to complete execution of the PSTRT instruction.
(3) The following dedicated instructions cannot be executed simultaneously for the
same axis.
(Can be executed simultaneously for different axes.)
Positioning start instructions (PSTRT1 to PSTRT4)
Teaching instructions (TEACH1 to TEACH4)
(4) The PSTRT instruction can only be executed when the QD75 READY signal
(X0) is turned ON.
Even if the PSTRT instruction execution request is given when the QD75
READY signal is turned OFF, the PSTRT instruction will not be executed. (not
processed.)
Before executing the PSTRT instruction, turn ON the PLC READY signal (Y0),
and turn ON the QD75 READY signal (X0).
(5) When the remote I/O station (Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H network remote
I/O module) is used, the dedicated instruction (PSTRT ) is unusable.
: For details of the remote I/O station, refer to Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H
Network System Reference Manual (Remote I/O Network).
14 - 5
MELSEC-Q
(6) If the PSTRT instruction is executed in either of the following cases, an error
"Dedicated instruction error" (error code: 804) will occur and positioning cannot
be started.
Any value other than 1 to 600, 7000 to 7004, and 9001 to 9004 is set to
"Starting number" (device: (S)+2) of the control data.
The instruction for a non-existent axis is specified.
(Example: The PSTRT2 instruction is specified when the QD75M1 is used.)
[Program examples]
The following program executes the positioning start of positioning data No. 1 when
X100 turns ON.
Use D30 to D32 as the control data devices of positioning data No. 1, and M32 and
M33 as the completion devices.
Positioning start program
<Positioning start command pulse>
<Positioning start No. 1 setting>
<Positioning start command hold>
<Positioning start execution>
<Positioning start command storage OFF>
[Program example for use when dedicated instruction is not used]

Positioning start program (when dedicated instruction is not used)
<Positioning start command pulse>
<Positioning start No. 1 setting>
<Positioning start execution>
<Positioning start signal OFF>
14 - 6
MELSEC-Q
14.4 TEACH1, TEACH2, TEACH3, TEACH4

These dedicated instructions are used to teach the designated axis.
Setting
data
Internal device
Bit
(S)
(D)
Word
Usable device
Special
MELSECNET/10
module
direct J \
U \G
Bit
Word
File
register
Constant
Others
K, H, $
Index
register
Zn
TEACH1
TEACH2
TEACH3
TEACH4
ZP.TEACH1
"Un"
(S)
(D)
ZP.TEACH2
"Un"
(S)
(D)
ZP.TEACH3
"Un"
(S)
(D)
ZP.TEACH4
"Un"
(S)
(D)
When TEACH1, TEACH2, TEACH3, and TEACH4 are common to each other, they are designated as "TEACH ".
[Setting data]
Setting data
"Un"
(S)
(D)
Setting details
Setting side
( 1)
Data type
User
BIN 16 bits
Device
System
Bit
14 - 7
MELSEC-Q
[Control data]
Device
Item
(S)+0
System area
(S)+1
(S)+2
(S)+3
Setting data

Complete status
0
: Normal completion
Other than 0 : Abnormal completion (error code)( 2)
The address (positioning address/arc address) to which
the current feed value is written is set.
Teaching data
selection
0: Current feed value is written to positioning address.
1: Current feed value is written to arc address.
The positioning data No. for which teaching is carried out
is set.
Setting side
( 1)
System
0, 1
User
1 to 600
User
Setting range

[Functions]
(1) The "current feed value" of the axes to be set (See below) is set in the positioning
address or arc address.
The positioning data other than the positioning addresses and arc addresses are
set by peripheral device or using a PLC program.
TEACH1: Axis 1
TEACH2: Axis 2
TEACH3: Axis 3
TEACH4: Axis 4
(2) Teaching can be carried out for the positioning data No. 1 to 600.
(3) The movement of the machine to the address (position) set in the positioning
address/arc address of the positioning data is carried out by the JOG operation,
inching operation, or manual pulse generator operation.
(4) The TEACH instruction completion can be confirmed using the complete devices
((D)+0) and ((D)+1).
This device is turned ON by the END processing of the scan for which
TEACH instruction is completed, and turned OFF by the next END
processing.
This device is turned ON and OFF according to the state in which TEACH
When completed abnormally: This device is turned ON by the END
processing of the scan for which TEACH
14 - 8
END
processing
PLC program
ON
TEACH
instruction
Complete device
device
MELSEC-Q
END
processing
END
processing
END
processing
TEACH instruction
OFF
ON
OFF
When
completed
abnormally
When
completed normally
ON
OFF
1 scan
[Errors]
(1) When a TEACH instruction is completed abnormally, the error complete signal
((D)+1) is turned ON, and the error code is stored in the complete status (S)+1.
Check and take a measure against the error referring to section 15.2 "List of error
codes".
[Precautions]
(1) The following dedicated instructions cannot be executed simultaneously for the
same axis.
(Can be executed simultaneously for different axes.)
Positioning start instructions (PSTRT1 to PSTRT4)
Teaching instructions (TEACH1 to TEACH4)
(2) The TEACH instruction can only be executed when the BUSY signal (XC, XD,
XE, XF) is turned OFF.
When the BUSY signal is turned ON, the TEACH instruction will not be
executed. (not processed.)
Before executing the PFWRT instruction, make sure that the BUSY signal for the
axis to be processed is turned OFF.
(3) When the remote I/O station* (Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H network remote
I/O module) is used, the dedicated instruction (TEACH ) is unusable.
(4) If the TEACH instruction is executed in any of the following cases, an error
"Dedicated instruction error" (error code: 804) will occur and teaching cannot be
performed.
Any value other than 0 and 1 is set to "Teaching selection" (device: (S)+2) of
the control data.
Any value other than 1 to 600 is set to "Positioning No." (device: (S)+3) of the
control data.
The instruction for a non-existent axis is specified.
(Example: The TEACH2 instruction is specified when the QD75M1 is used.)
14 - 9
MELSEC-Q
[Program example]
Program to execute the teaching of the positioning data No. 3 of the axis 1 when
X39 is turned ON.
No. 20 Teaching program
Positioned manually to target position.
<Teaching command pulse>
<Teaching command hold>
<Teaching data setting>
<Positioning data No. setting>
<Teaching execution>
<Teaching command storage OFF>

Teaching program (when dedicated instruction is not used)
Positioned manually to target position.
<Teaching command pulse>
<Teaching command hold>
<Teaching positioning address>
<Sets teaching positioning data No. to 1>
<Turns OFF teaching command storage>
14 - 10
MELSEC-Q
14.5 PFWRT
These dedicated instructions are used to write the QD75 parameters, positioning data
and block start data to the flash ROM.
Setting
data
Internal device
Bit
(S)
(D)
Word
Usable device
Special
MELSECNET/10
module
direct J \
U \G
Bit
Word
File
register
Constant
Others
K, H, $
Index
register
Zn
PFWRT
ZP.PFWRT
"Un"
(S)
(D)
[Setting data]
Setting data
"Un"
(S)
(D)
Setting details
Setting side
( 1)
Data type
User
BIN 16 bits
Device
System
Bit
[Control data]
Device
Item
(S)+0
System area
(S)+1
Complete status
Setting data

0
: Normal completion
Other than 0 : Abnormal completion (error code)( 2)

14 - 11
Setting
Range
Setting side
( 1)
System
MELSEC-Q
[Functions]
(1) The PFWRT instruction completion can be confirmed using the complete devices
((D)+0) and ((D)+1).
This device is turned ON by the END processing of the scan for which PFWRT
instruction is completed, and turned OFF by the next END processing.
This device is turned ON and OFF according to the state in which PFWRT
When completed abnormally : This device is turned ON by the END
processing of the scan for which PFWRT
PFWRT
ZP.PFWRT
END
processing
PLC program
ON
PFWRT instruction
Complete device
device
END
processing
"Un"
(S)
(D)
END
processing
END
processing
PFWRT instruction
OFF
ON
OFF
When
completed
ON abnormally
When
completed normally
OFF
1 scan
[Errors]
(1) When a dedicated instruction is completed abnormally, the error complete signal
Check and take measures against the error referring to Section 15.2 List of error
codes.
14 - 12
MELSEC-Q
[Precautions]
(1) Do not turn ON the power and reset the PLC CPU while parameters, positioning
data and block start data are written to the flash ROM using the PFWRT
instruction.
A parameter error will occur or normal positioning start will become impossible
because the parameters, positioning data and block start data are not written
normally to the flash ROM.
If this occurs, restart the operation by the method shown below.
For GX Configurator-QP, write the parameters, positioning data and block start
data again to the flash ROM.
For a PLC program, write the parameters, positioning data and block start data
to the QD75 after initializing the parameters (PINIT instruction execution and
others).
Then execute the PFWRT instruction again.
(2) A writing to the flash ROM is up to 100,000 times.
If writing to the flash ROM exceeds 100,000 times, the writing to the flash ROM will
become impossible.
(3) After the power ON and PLC CPU reset operation, writing to the flash ROM using
a PLC program is limited to up to 25 times. (Not limited to up to 25 times when
writing to the flash ROM is carried out by peripheral device.)
If the 26th or more writing is requested after the power ON/PLC CPU reset
operation, a flash ROM exceed writing error (error code: 805) will occur, and the
writing will be disabled. If a flash ROM write error occurs by one writing to the
flash ROM, check and correct the flash ROM writing program. Then reset the
error or turn ON the power and reset the PLC CPU again.
(4) The PFWRT instruction can only be executed when the QD75 READY signal (X0)
is turned OFF.
When the QD75 READY signal is turned ON, the PFWRT instruction cannot be
executed.
Before executing the PFWRT instruction, turn OFF the PLC READY signal (Y0)
and then turn OFF the QD75 READY signal.
I/O module) is used, the dedicated instruction (PFWRT) is unusable.
(6) When the PLC READY signal (Y0) is turned ON, an error (error code : 1204)
occurs in the case shown below. Execute the axis error reset after the error
occurrence.
(a) The motor capacity ( Pr.104 ) of flash ROM is set in the value except for 0.
(b) LED of the amplifier is indicated b.
(c) A set up of rotation direction was changed to 0 1 or 1 0 by PLC program
or GX-configrator-QP.
14 - 13
MELSEC-Q
[Program example]
Program used to write the parameters and positioning data stored in the buffer
memory to the flash ROM when X3D is turned ON.
No. 26 Flash ROM write program
<Flash ROM write command pulse>
<Flash ROM write command hold>
<PLC READY output to QD75 standby>
<Flash ROM write execution>
<Flash ROM write command storage OFF>

Flash ROM write program (when dedicated instruction is not used)
<Flash ROM write command pulse>
<Flash ROM write command hold>
<Flash ROM write execution>
<Flash ROM write command storage OFF>
14 - 14
MELSEC-Q
14.6 PINIT
This dedicated instruction is used to initialize the setting data of the QD75.
Setting
data
Internal device
Bit
(S)
(D)
Word
Usable device
Special
MELSECNET/10
module
direct J \
U \G
Bit
Word
File
register
Constant
Others
K, H, $
Index
register
Zn
PINIT
Z.PINIT
"Un"
(S)
(D)
[Setting data]
Setting data
"Un"
(S)
(D)
Setting details
Setting side
( 1)
Data type
User
BIN 16 bits
Device
System
Bit
[Control data]
Device
Item
(S)+0
System area
Setting data

(S)+1
Complete status
0
: Normal completion
Other than 0: Abnormal completion (error code)( 2)
14 - 15
Setting side
( 1)
System
Setting range
MELSEC-Q
[Functions]
(1) This dedicated instruction is used to return the setting data set in the QD75 buffer
memory and flash ROM to their factory-set data (initial values).
Setting data
Basic parameters ( Pr.1 to Pr.10 )
Detailed parameters ( Pr.11 to Pr.42 , Pr.200 , Pr.201)
OPR basic parameters ( Pr.43 to Pr.48 )
OPR detailed parameters ( Pr.49 to Pr.57 )
Servo parameters ( Pr.100 to Pr.161 )
Positioning data (No.1 to 600)
Block start data (No.7000 to 7004)
(2) The PINIT instruction completion can be confirmed using the complete devices
((D)+0) and ((D)+1).
This device is turned ON by the END processing of the scan for which PINIT
instruction is completed, and turned OFF by the next END processing.
This device is turned ON and OFF according to the state in which PINIT
When completed abnormally : This device is turned ON by the END
processing of the scan for which PINIT
END
processing
PLC program
ON
PINIT instruction
Complete device
device
END
processing
END
processing
END
processing
PINIT instruction
OFF
ON
OFF
When
completed
abnormally
When
completed normally
ON
OFF
1 scan
[Errors]
(1) When a dedicated instruction is completed abnormally, the error complete signal
Check and take measures against the error referring to section 15.2 List of error
codes.
14 - 16
MELSEC-Q
[Precautions]
(1) The PINIT instruction can only be executed when the QD75 READY signal (X0) is
turned OFF.
When the QD75 READY signal is turned ON, the PINIT instruction cannot be
executed.
Before executing the PINIT instruction, turn OFF the PLC READY signal (Y0) and
then turn OFF the QD75 READY signal.
I/O module) is used, the dedicated instruction (PINIT) is unusable.
[Program example]
The following program initializes the parameters in buffer memory and flash ROM
when X3C turns ON.
No. 25 Parameter initialization program
<Parameter initialization command pulse>
<Parameter initialization command hold>

<Parameter initialization execution>
<Parameter initialization command storage OFF>

Parameter initialization program (when dedicated instruction is not used)
<Parameter initialization command pulse>
<Parameter initialization command hold>
<Parameter initialization execution>
<Parameter initialization
command storagee OFF>
14 - 17
MELSEC-Q
MEMO
14 - 18
Chapter 15 Troubleshooting
The "errors" and "warnings" detected by the QD75 are explained in this chapter.
Errors can be confirmed with the QD75 LED display and peripheral devices.
When an error or warning is detected, confirm the detection details and carry out the
required measures.
15.1 Error and warning details.......................................................................................15- 2

15.2 List of errors ...........................................................................................................15- 6
15.2.1 QD75 detection error ...............................................................................15- 6
15.2.2 MR-H-BN detection error .........................................................................15- 34
15.2.3 MR-J2-B detection error...........................................................................15- 46
15.2.4 MR-J2S-B detection error ........................................................................15- 56
15.2.5 MR-J2-Jr detection error ..........................................................................15- 66
15.2.6 MR-J2M-B detection error .......................................................................15- 76
15.3 List of warnings ......................................................................................................15- 90
15.3.1 QD75 detection warning ..........................................................................15- 90
15.3.2 MR-H-BN detection warning....................................................................15- 96
15.3.3 MR-J2-B detection warning .....................................................................15- 98
15.3.4 MR-J2S-B detection warning...................................................................15-100
15.3.5 MR-J2-Jr detection warning.....................................................................15-102
15.3.6 MR-J2M-B detection warning ..................................................................15-104
15.4 LED display functions ............................................................................................15-106
15 - 1
15
15 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q
15.1 Error and warning details

[1] Errors
Types of errors
Errors detected by the QD75 include parameter setting range errors, errors at the
operation start or during operation and errors detected by servo amplifier.
(1) Errors detected by the QD75 include parameter setting range errors
The parameters are checked when the power is turned ON and at the rising
edge (OFF ON) of the PLC READY signal [Y0]. An error will occur if there is
a mistake in the parameter setting details at that time.
When this kind of error occurs, the QD75 READY signal does not turn ON.
To cancel this kind of error, set the correct value in the parameter for which
the error occurred, and then turn ON the PLC READY signal [Y0].
POINT
Execute the re-setup of the parameter after you execute the initialization (refer to
the Section 13.2) of the parameter when the error (error code: 900 to 997) occurs in
many and QD75 doesn't start.
(2) Errors at the operation start or during operation (QD75 detection errors)
These are errors that occur at the operation start or during operation when the
positioning control, JOG operation, or inching operation is used. If an axis
error occurs during interpolation operation, the error No. will be stored in both
the reference axis and the interpolation axis.
Note that, in the following cases (a) and (b), the axis error No. will be stored
only in the reference axis during analysis of the positioning data set in each
point of the positioning start data table.
(a) When the interpolation axis is BUSY.
(b) When the error occurred in positioning data or parameters unrelated to
If the error occurred at the simultaneous start of a positioning operation, the
axis error storage details will differ depending on whether the error occurred
before or after the simultaneous start.
If the error occurred before the simultaneous start (illegal axis No., other axis
BUSY, etc.), an "error before simultaneous start" will occur.
If the error occurred after the simultaneous start (positioning data error,
software stroke limit error, etc.), an error code corresponding to the axis in
which the error occurred will be stored. Because a simultaneous start
cannot be carried out due to this, a "simultaneous start not possible error"
error code will be stored in all axes in which an error has not occurred.
The axis operation status will be displayed as "error occurring" for axes in
which an error occurred.
If an error occurs during operation, any moving axes will deceleration stop,
and their operation status will be displayed as "error occurring".
All axes will decelerate to a stop during interpolation operations, even if the
error occurs in only one axis.
(3) Servo amplifier detection errors
These are errors that occur at the hardware error such as servo amplifier and
servomotor or the servo parameter error.
Servo is turned off at the error occurrence, and axis stop. If you remove an
error factor, reset the servo amplifier.
15 - 2
15 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q
(4) Types of error codes

Error code
001 to 009
100 to 199
200 to 299
300 to 399
500 to 599
800 to 899
900 to 999
1201 to 1209
2000 to 2099
Classification of errors
Fatal errors
Common errors
OPR or absolute position restoration errors
JOG operation or inching operation errors
Positioning operation errors
I/F (Interface) errors
Parameter setting range errors
Encoder errors
Servo amplifier errors
Error storage
When an error occurs, the error detection signal turns ON, and the error code
corresponding to the error details is stored in the following buffer memory address
( Md.23 Axis error No.) for axis error No. storage. Note that there is a delay of up
to 3.5 ms after the error detection signal turns ON until the error code is stored.
Axis No.
X8
806
X9
906
XA
1006
XB
1106
A new error code is stored in the buffer memory address ( Md.23 Axis error No.)
for axis error storage every time an error occurs.
[2] Warnings
Types of warnings
Warnings detected by the QD75 include system warnings, axis warnings and
warnings detected by servo amplifier.
(1) Warnings include system warnings.
The types of system warnings are shown below.
System control data setting warnings

An axis warning for axis 1 will occur.
Positioning data setting warnings

An axis warning for each axis will occur.
Note that a warning will occur for the reference axis when an interpolation
designation or axis setting warning occurs.
(2) Warnings include axis warnings.
Axis warnings occur due to setting warnings from operations such as

positioning operations, JOG operations or manual pulse generator operations.
Axis warnings occur due to system warnings.

The axis operation status does not change even if an axis warning occurs.
15 - 3
15 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q
(3) Servo amplifier detection warnings

These are warning that occur at the hardware error such as servo amplifier
and servomotor or the inapplicable servo parameters.
Error or normality operation can't be executed by waning when warning is left
as it is though servo off isn't executed.
If you remove a warning factor, reset the servo amplifier.
(4) Types of warning codes
Warning code
Classification of warnings
100 to 199
Common warnings
300 to 399
JOG operation warnings
400 to 499
Manual pulse generator operation warnings
500 to 599
Positioning operation warnings
900 to 999
System control data setting range check warnings

Servo amplifier warnings
(The contents of a vary in the model of servo amplifier.)
2090 to 2999
Warning storage
(1) When an axis warning occurs, the warning code corresponding to the warning
details is stored in the following buffer memory ( Md.24 Axis warning No.) for
axis warning No. storage.
Axis No.
807
907
1007
1107
(2) When an axis warning occurs in a positioning operation, etc., "1" is set in bit 9
(b9) of the following buffer memory ( Md.31 Status) for axis status storage.
Axis No.
817
917
1017
1117
[3] Resetting errors and warnings

An error or warning state is canceled after the following processing has been
carried out by setting a "1" in the address [1502 (for axis 1)], [1602 (for axis 2)],
[1702 (for axis 3)], and [1802 (for axis 4)] of the buffer memory for axis error
resetting ( Cd.5 Axis error reset).
Axis error detection signal turned OFF

" Md.23 Axis error No." cleared
" Md.24 Axis warning No." cleared
Changing of " Md.26 operation status" from "Error" to "Standby".
" Md.31 Axis warning detection (b9)" turned OFF
15 - 4
15 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q
[4] Invalid operations

For the following operations, the setting details will be invalidated, and an error or
warning will not occur.
Speed change during machine OPR

Speed change before operation
(Speed override change, skip command, continuous operation interruption
request, target position change request)
Axis stop during axis stop
Axis sudden stop during axis stop
Axis stop before axis operation
Axis sudden stop before axis operation
Writing to the buffer memory monitoring area
[5] Confirming the error and warning definitions

The error and warning definitions can be confirmed with the error and warning
codes. Confirming them requires GX Developer or GX Configurator-QP. For
details, refer to GX Developer Operating Manual or GX Configurator-QP
Operating Manual. (Refer to Section 15.2 and Section 15.3 for details of the error
and warning codes.)
15 - 5
15 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q
15.2 List of errors

The following table shows the error details and remedies to be taken when an error
occurs.
15.2.1 QD75 detection error

Classification
of errors
Fatal errors
Common
errors
Error
code
Error name
000
(Normal status)
001
Fault
002
Internal circuit fault
Error
Operation status at error occurrence
Hardware fault.
The system stops.
The PLC READY signal (Y0) is

turned OFF during operation.
The system stops with the setting

(deceleration stop/sudden stop) of the
detailed parameter 2 Sudden stop
selection (stop group 2).
(Note that the deceleration stop only
occurs during the manual pulse
generator operation.)
101
PLC READY signal

OFF during
operation
102
Servo READY signal

The Servo READY signal is turned
OFF during
OFF during operation.
operation
The system stops immediately.
103
Test mode faults

during operation
The personal computer cannot

communicate with the CPU unit.

104
Hardware stroke
limit (+)
105
Hardware stroke
limit ()
The hardware stroke limit (upper limit The system stops with the setting
signal FLS) is input turned OFF.
The hardware stroke limit (lower limit occurs during the manual pulse
signal RLS) is input turned OFF.
106
Stop signal ON at
start
Start is requested when a stop signal

The system does not start positioning.
is turned ON.
107
The PLC READY signal is turned

READY OFF ON
from OFF to ON when BUSY signal
during BUSY signal
is turned ON.
The QD75 READY signal (X0) is not

turned ON.
108
Impossible to start
Start is requested when start is not

possible in the axis operation state.
The system does not start positioning.
15 - 6
15 TROUBLESHOOTING
Related buffer memory

address
MELSEC-Q
Set range
(Setting with PLC program)
Remedy
Check that there is no influence from noise.

Check hardware for possibility of fault.
Review the PLC program which turns ON/OFF PLC

READY signal (Y0).
Cancel the error with an axis error reset.
(Refer to Section 15.1[3])
Check the servo amplifier power, wiring with the servo

amplifier, and connection of connectors, and cancel the
error with an axis error reset. (Refer to Section 15.1[3])
Check that there is no error on the personal computer

side I/F to which a cable is connected.
Change the transmission speed (serial communication
baud rate selection) between the personal computer
and the QD75. (Refer to Section 5.2.9 Pr.133 )
After making an axis error reset (refer to [3] in Section

15.1), perform manual control operation (refer to
Chapter 11) to move the axis to the other position in
order that the upper limit signal (FLS) will turn ON.
After making an axis error reset (refer to [3] in Section

15.1), perform manual control operation (refer to
Chapter 11) to move the axis to the other position in
order that the lower limit signal (RLS) will turn ON.
Check whether the stop commands (output

signals/external inputs to QD75) are turned ON or OFF.
Turn OFF the ON commands.
Output signals to QD75
Axis 1: Y4, Axis 2: Y5, Axis 3: Y6, Axis 4: Y7
External input
Connectors for external device connection:
Stop signals (STOP)
After confirming the stop command status, cancel the
error with an axis error reset. Then turn ON a start
signal. (Refer to Section 15.1[3])
The PLC READY signal (Y0) is turned from OFF to ON

when all BUSY signal is turned OFF.
Do not request the start when the axis operation state is

other than "standby", "stop", and "step standby".
15 - 7
15 TROUBLESHOOTING
Classification
of errors
Error
code
201
203
204
205
Home
position
return (OPR)
or
absolute
position
restoration
errors
Error name
Start at home
position (OP) fault
MELSEC-Q
Error
When the machine home position

return (OPR) retry invalid is set, the
near-point dog home position return The machine home position return
(OPR) is started with the home
(OPR) is not started.
position return (OPR) complete flag
turned ON.
The near-point dog signal is turned

OFF during the deceleration from a
Dog detection timing
home position return (OPR) speed to
fault
a creep speed by the near-point dog
home position return (OPR).
The zero signal is turned OFF during (deceleration stop/sudden stop) of the
the deceleration from a home
Home position (OP)
position return (OPR) speed to a
detection timing fault
creep speed by the stopper method (Note that the deceleration stop only
2) - home position return (OPR).
A dwell time is passed during the
Dwell time fault
deceleration from a creep speed to a

home position return (OPR) speed
by the stopper method 1) - home
position return (OPR).
In the count method 1) and 2)
machine home position return
(OPR), a parameter "Setting of
The machine home position return
movement amount after near-point
(OPR) is not started.
dog ON" is smaller than a distance
necessary for deceleration stop from
a home position return (OPR) speed.
206
Count method
movement amount
fault
207
The OPR request flag is turned ON

Home position return
when a fast - home position return
(OPR) request flag
(OPR) is started (positioning start
ON
No. 9002).
209
The restart command is turned ON

after the machine home position
(OPR) restart not
The restart is not carried out.
return (OPR) is stopped using a stop
possible
signal.
210
The zero point is not passed when

Home position return the dog or count method home
(OPR) restart zero position return (OPR) is re-started, or
point not passed
data set method home position
return (OPR) is made.
The data is not loaded from the
servo amplifier properly upon the
211
ZCT read error
212
The data is not loaded from the

ABS reference point
servo amplifier properly upon the
read error
213
ABS transmission
time
214
ABS transmission
SUM
The fast - home position return (OPR)

is not started.
The home position return (OPR) is not

completed.
Communication cannot be carried

out with the servo-amplifier using an The absolute position restoration is
absolute position restoration
not carried out.
instruction.
15 - 8
15 TROUBLESHOOTING

address
78
228
378
528
74
75
224
225
374
375
524
525
MELSEC-Q
Set range
Remedy
<OPR retry>
0, 1
Validate the home position return (OPR) retry function

(set value: 1). (Refer to Section 12.2.1)
Move the workpiece from the current position (on
home position (OP) ) using the manual control
operation (refer to chapter 11), then carry out an
original position return again.
Lower the home position return (OPR) speed.
Increase the dog signal input time.
(Refer to Section 8.2.3)
<OPR speed>
1 to 10000000 [PLS/s]
1 to 2000000000 [mm/min or others] Input external zero signals during the movement at a
creep speed.
74
75
224
225
374
375
524
525
74
75
224
225
374
375
524
525
79
229
379
529
<OPR dwell time>

0 to 65535
80
81
230
231
380
381
530
531
<Movement amount setting after

near-point dog ON>
0 to 2147483647
74
75
224
225
374
375
524
525
<OPR speed>
1 to 10000000 [PLS/s]
1 to 2000000000 [mm/min]

Increase the OPR dwell time.
Calculate the movement distance using a speed limit,
home position return (OPR) speed, and deceleration
time, and set the movement amount after near-point
dog ON so that the distance becomes a deceleration
distance or longer.
Adjust the near-point dog position so that the
movement amount after near-point dog ON becomes
longer. (Refer to Section 8.2.7, 8.2.8)
1500 1600 1700 1800
<Positioning start No.>

1 to 600
7000 to 7004
9001 to 9004
Execute the machine home position return (OPR)

(positioning No. 9001). (Refer to Section 8.2)
1500 1600 1700 1800

1 to 600
7000 to 7004
9001 to 9004
Start the machine home position return (OPR)

(positioning start No. 9001) again. (Refer to Section
8.2)
Turn the motor more than one revolution using JOG or

positioning operation.
Execute the home position return (OPR) again.
Execute the home position return (OPR) again.
Review the wiring. (Refer to Section 12.6)

Review the PLC program.
Review the wiring. (Refer to Section 12.6)

Review the dedicated instruction parameters.
(Refer to Section 14.3)
15 - 9
15 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q
Classification
of errors
Error
code
JOG
operation
or
inching
operation
errors
300
At the time of JOG starting, the JOG The JOG operation is not carried out
Outside JOG speed
speed comes out of a specified
when the JOG speed is outside the
range
range.
setting range at the time of JOG start.
301
Inching movement
amount error
500
The condition data No. is outside the

setting range when a block using the
Illegal condition data condition data is started by a special
The operation is terminated.
No.
starting (conditional start, wait start,
simultaneous start, FOR (condition)).
(1 Condition data No. 10)
Error name
Error
The inching movement amount

exceeds the JOG speed limit.
The inching operation is not carried

out when the inching movement
amount exceeds a JOG speed limit at
the time of inching start.
<When blocks are started

simultaneously>
The partner axis for simultaneous
start is BUSY.
501
Error before
simultaneous start
Positioning
operation
errors
<When multiple axes are started and

At start: The system will not operate.
controlled simultaneously>
The partner axis for simultaneous During operation:
The system stops
start is BUSY.
immediately.
The Simultaneous start axis start
data No. of the start axis is 0 or is
outside the setting range.
The Simultaneous start axis start
data No." of those axes other than
the start axis is outside the setting
range.
The positioning data No. tried to be
executed is outside the ranges of 1
to 600, 7000 to 7004, and 9001 to
9004.
The designation of a JUMP
The positioning data is not executed.
destination is executed currently.
The designation of a JUMP
destination is outside the ranges of
1 to 600.
502
Illegal data No.
503
At the start of positioning, a current

speed (1) is set for the command
speed of the positioning data to be
initially executed.
Command speed is
At the start of positioning, operation
The current speed is set by speed does not start.
not set
control.
The current speed is set for speedposition switching control.
15 - 10
15 TROUBLESHOOTING

address
1518 1618 1718 1818
1519 1619 1719 1819
MELSEC-Q
Set range
<JOG speed>
Bring JOG speed into the setting range.
1 to 10000000 [PLS/s]
1 to 2000000000 [mm/min or others]
1517 1617 1717 1817
<Inching movement amount>

0 to 65535

"List of block start data"
<Condition data No.>

1 to 10

"List of condition data"
Remedy
<Condition operators>
Axis designation:
10H, 20H, 30H, 40H, 50H,
60H, 70H, 80H, 90H, A0H,
B0H, C0H, D0H, E0H
Reduce the inching movement amount.

Review the condition data No.

(Refer to Section 5.4 Da.14 )
Review the simultaneous start axis start data No. .

1540 1640 1740 1840 Axis 1 start data No.

Simultaneous
start axis start Review the simultaneous start axis start data No. to
data No.
correct value.
0 to 600
1500 1600 1700 1800

1 to 600,
7000 to 7004,
9001 to 9004
<JUMP destination>
1 to 600
Review the positioning start No., positioning start data

(in block start), and positioning data (in JUMP
instruction) to correct value.

"List of positioning data"
<Command speed>
1 to 10000000 [PLS/s]
Review the positioning data to correct value.
15 - 11
15 TROUBLESHOOTING
Classification
of errors
Error
code
504
Error name
Error
Outside linear
movement amount
range
When the parameter "interpolation

speed designation method"
performs a linear interpolation in
setting a "composite speed", the
axis movement amount for each
positioning data exceeds
1073741824(230).
During operation:
The system stops
The positioning address is
immediately.
360.00000 or less or 360.00000
or more using INC instruction,
where the control unit is set to
"degree" and software stroke limit
upper limit is not equal to the
software stroke limit lower limit.
Outside circular
interpolation error
allowable limit
When an arc is interpolated by the

designation of the center point, a
difference between a radius of start
point-center point and a radius of
end point-center point exceeds the
parameter "Circular interpolation
error allowable limit".
Positioning
operation
errors
506
MELSEC-Q
15 - 12
At start: The circular interpolation

control by center point
designation is not executed.
During operation :
The system will stop
immediately.
15 TROUBLESHOOTING

address

60
61
210
211
360
361
510
511
MELSEC-Q
Set range
<Positioning address/movement
amount>
ABS
unit [mm] [PLS] [inch]
2147483648 to 2147483647
Unit [degree] 0 to 35999999
INC
(When software stroke limits are
valid)
Unit [degree]:
35999999 to 35999999
Unit [mm], [PLS], [inch]:
2147483648 to 2147483647
(When software stroke limits are
invalid)
2147483648 to 2147483647
INC mode: 0 to 2147483647
ABS mode: 0 to 35999999
0 to 2147483647
<Arc address>
2147483648 to 2147483647
<Circular interpolation error
allowable limit>
0 to 1000000
15 - 13
Remedy
Review the positioning address.
Center point address (positioning address)

End address (arc address)
Correct.
Correct the circular interpolation error allowable limit

value.
15 TROUBLESHOOTING
Classification
of errors
Error
code
Error name
MELSEC-Q
Error

In the analysis of new current value:
Positioning is carried out at a
Current value is not
position beyond the software stroke
changed.
limit upper limit.
During operation:
The positioning address and new
The system stops
current value exceed the software
immediately when the
stroke limit upper limit.
positioning address during
In the circular interpolation by the
position control (including
designation of the sub points, the
position control in speedsub points exceed the software
position switching control or
stroke limit upper limit.
control) is switched to the
data outside the software
stroke limit range.
The system makes a stop at
the setting (normal
deceleration stop only) of
Positioning is carried out at a
sudden stop selection (stop
position beyond the software stroke
group 3) in the detailed
limit lower limit.
parameter 2 when the
The positioning address and new
current feed value or
current value exceed the software
machine feed value during
stroke limit lower limit.
speed control (including
In the circular interpolation by the
speed control in speeddesignation of the sub points, the
position switching control or
sub points exceed the software
stroke limit lower limit.
control) or during manual
control falls outside the
software stroke limit range.
507
Software stroke
limit+
508
Software stroke
limit
514
The new current address is outside

Outside new current
the ranges of 0 to 359.99999, where
value range
the control unit is set to "degree".
Positioning
operation
errors
515
516
New current value

invalid
The control system sets an

operation pattern (continuous path
control) using new current
The current value is not changed.
positioning data.
The operation pattern sets a "new
current value" in the control system
using the data following the
"continuous path control"
positioning data.
Continuous path
control invalid
The continuous path control is

designated using a control system
which is not allowed to use for
continuous path control such as
speed control, speed-position
switching control, position-speed
switching control, and fixed-feed.
The previous data such as those
At start, the system will not operate.
on speed control, speed-position
switching control, position-speed
switching control, and fixed-feed
shows a continuous path control.
The continuous positioning control
is designated for speed control or
position-speed switching control.
15 - 14
15 TROUBLESHOOTING

address
MELSEC-Q
Set range
Remedy
New current value
1506 1606 1706 1806

1507 1607 1707 1807
<New current value>

<Software stroke upper and lower
limits>
[mm] [inch] [PLS]
2147483648 to 2147483647
468
[degree]
469
0 to 35999999

upper limit
18
19
168
169
318
319

lower limit
20
21
170
171
320
321
At start: Bring the current feed value into the software

stroke limit using the manual control
operation.
(Refer to Chapter 11)
Correct the positioning address (Also check
the arc address in circular interpolation with
sub points designated).
New current value:
Bring the new current value into the software
stroke limit. (Refer to Section 9.2.19)
During operation:
Correct the positioning address.
(For the positioning and arc addresses, refer
to Da.6 and Da.7 in Section 5.3.)
470
471
1506 1606 1706 1806

1507 1607 1707 1807

<New current value>

[degree] 0 to 35999999
<Control system>
01H to 1EH, 80H to 84H
03H, 0CH, 17H, 1CH:
1 to 4 axis fixed-feed control
04H, 05H, 13H, 14H, 18H, 19H, 1DH,
1EH:
81H: current value changing
Speed-position switching control:
06H, 07H
Position-speed switching control:
08H, 09H
<Operation pattern> 00, 01, 11
15 - 15
Bring the new current value into the setting range.

Do not designate a current value changing using the

positioning data following the continuous path control.
Do not designate a "current value changing" using the
positioning data following the continuous path control.
Do not designate a speed control, fixed-feed, speedposition switching control, and position-speed
switching control using the positioning data following
the continuous path control data.
Do not carry out the fixed-feed, speed control, speedposition switching control, and position-speed
switching control using the continuous path control
operation pattern.
Do not carry out the speed control and position-speed
switching control using the continuous path control
operation pattern.
(Refer to Chapter 9)
15 TROUBLESHOOTING
Classification
of errors
Positioning
operation
errors
Error
code
Error name
MELSEC-Q
Error
518
Outside operation
pattern range
The operation pattern set value is 2.

A target position change is
requested on those control
systems other than ABS1 and
INC1.
A target position change is carried
out in continuous path control.
A changed address is outside the
software stroke limit.
A target position change is carried
out during deceleration stop.
519
Interpolation while
interpolation axis
BUSY
Interpolation is started during the

operation of the interpolation axis.
520
Unit group
unmatched
521
Illegal interpolation
description
command
522
Command speed
setting error
523
Interpolation mode
error
The reference and interpolation axis

units are different at the parameter
"interpolation speed designation
method" setting of "composite
speed".
During operation:
The number of axes necessary for
The system stops with the
interpolation operation is not
setting (deceleration
present in the unit.
stop/sudden stop) of the
In 2-axis interpolation, the axis to
detailed parameter 2
be interpolated is the self axis or an
Sudden stop selection
axis not present.
(stop group 3).
The command speed is outside the (Note that the deceleration stop only
setting range.
Linear interpolation, circular
interpolation:
Reference axis is outside the
setting range.
Speed control interpolation:
Either of reference axis and
interpolation axis is outside the
speed range.
For starting, a composite speed is
designated in the reference axis
parameter "Interpolation speed
designation method" using the
speed interpolation control or
4-axis linear interpolation control.
For starting, a reference axis speed
is designated in the reference axis
parameter "Interpolation speed
designation method" using the
circular interpolation control.
15 - 16
15 TROUBLESHOOTING

address
MELSEC-Q
Set range
Remedy
Correct the operation pattern.

Same as error codes 515 to 516
Correct the control system.

150
300
450
Correct the positioning data or change the parameter

"Unit setting" of the axis to be interpolated.
<Unit setting>
0, 1, 2, 3

Command speed storage

addresses of positioning
data No. 1 to 600
29
179
329
479
Correct the axis to be interpolated.

<Command speed>
Correct the command speed.
1 to 10000000 [PLS/s]
1 to 2000000000 [mm/min or others] (Refer to Section 5.3 Da.8 )
<Interpolation speed designation

method>
0: Composite speed
1: Reference axis speed
15 - 17
Set the "Interpolation speed designation method"

correctly.
15 TROUBLESHOOTING
Classification
of errors
Error
code
Error
Control system
setting error
The control system setting value is

outside the specified limit.
The number of control axes differs
from the previous data when
continuous positioning control or
continuous path control is to be
exercised for continuously.
Machine OPR, fast OPR, or speedposition or position-speed switching
control was performed in the
wiring-less mode.
The NOP instruction was set to the
control system of positioning data
No. 600.
Any value other than 0 was set at
buffer memory address 1906 (use
prohibited area).

During operation:
detail parameter 2 Sudden
stop selection
(stop group 3).
Sub point setting

error
Either of the following applies in the

circular interpolation with sub points
designated.
Start point = sub point
End point = sub point
Start point, end point, and sub point
are in line with each other.
During operation:
Sub point and center point are
The system stops
outside the range of
immediately.
2147483648 to 2147483647.
526
End point setting

error
Start point is equal to end point in

the circular interpolation with sub
points designated.
End point address is outside the
range of 2147483648 to
2147483647.
527
In an arc with designated center

point, either of the following applies.
Start point = Center point
Center point setting
During operation:
End point = Center point
error
The system stops
Center point address is outside the
immediately.
range of 2147483648 to
2147483647.
524
525
Error name
MELSEC-Q
Positioning
operation
errors
530
Outside address
range
532
Simultaneous start
not possible
In the speed-position switching

control and the position-speed
switching control, the setting value During operation:
of a positioning address is
The system stops
negative.
immediately with the setting
In ABS1, ABS2, ABS3 and ABS4,
(deceleration stop/sudden
the setting value of a positioning
stop) of the detailed
address is outside the range of 0 to
parameter 2 sudden stop
359.99999 degrees.
selection
(stop group 3).
(Note
that
the deceleration stop only
Among the axes to be started
simultaneously, there is an axis on occurs during the manual pulse
which an error other than this error generator operation.)
occurs.
15 - 18
15 TROUBLESHOOTING

address
MELSEC-Q
Set range
Remedy
Correct the control system or parameter.

(Refer to section 9.1.6, 9.2.20)
Do not make setting at buffer memory address 1906
(use prohibited area).

<Positioning address/movement
amount>
unit [mm] [PLS] [inch]
2147483648 to 2147483647
(Unit [degree]) cannot be set.
<Arc address>
2147483648 to 2147483647
Correct the sub address (arc address).

Correct the end address (positioning address).

Correct the center point address (arc address).

Same as in error codes 525 to 526.
Correct the positioning address.

(Refer to Section 9.2.16, 9.2.17, 9.2.18)
Same as in error codes 504, 506.

and Section 5.4 "Block start
data"
In the error history, check the axis where the error

other than this error occurred, and remove the error
factor. Correct the block start data and positioning data.
15 - 19
15 TROUBLESHOOTING
Classification
of errors
Error
code
533
Positioning
operation
errors
Error name
MELSEC-Q
Error
The condition setting values are not

set or outside the setting range.
The condition operator setting
values are not set or outside the
setting range.
The condition operator is a bit
Condition data error operator, and the parameter 1 is 32
or more.
An unusable condition operator is
set for the set condition.
The conditional operator is the
range operator and parameter 1 is
greater than parameter 2.
The partner axis designation for
simultaneous start includes the
self-axis.
No applicable special start
instruction is present.
534
Special start
instruction error
535
Circular interpolation Circular interpolation is carried out

not possible
on an axis in the unit of degree.
536
The positioning start is carried out

M code signal ON at
when an M code ON signal (X4 to
positioning start
X7) is turned ON.
537
PLC READY signal

OFF at positioning
start

when the PLC READY signal (Y0) is
turned OFF.
538
READY signal OFF

at positioning start

when the QD75 READY signal (X0)
is turned OFF.
543
Outside start No.

range
At the start of positioning, the

setting value of the "positioning
start No." of the axis control data is
outside the ranges of 1 to 600,
7000 to 7004, and 9000 to 9004.
At a Pre-reading start, the
"positioning start No." setting of the
axis control data is other than 1 to
600.
544

During operation:
Outside radius range The arc radius exceeds 536870912.
The system stops
immediately.
545
Control system
LOOP setting error
A "0" is set in the control system

"LOOP".
15 - 20
At start, the system will not operate.
15 TROUBLESHOOTING

address
MELSEC-Q
Set range
Remedy
Normalize the block start data.

"Block start data"
<Special start instruction>

00H to 06H

1504 1604 1704 1804
Correct the instruction code of the special start data.

<M code OFF request>

After turning OFF the M code ON signal, start the
1: M code ON signal is turned OFF system. (Refer to Section 12.7.3)
Check the PLC program which turns ON/OFF the PLC

READY signal (Y0), and turn ON the PLC READY
signal. Then start the system.
Check the QD75 READY ON signal, and then start the

system. (Refer to Section 3.3.2)
1500 1600 1700 1800


1 to 600,
7000 to 7004,
9001 to 9004
Review the positioning start No. to correct value.

<Maximum radius>
536870912
Correct the positioning data.

(Refer to Section 9.2.10, 9.2.11)
<LOOP to LEND>
1 to 65535
Set 1 to 65535 in LOOP. (Refer to Section 9.2.22)
15 - 21
15 TROUBLESHOOTING
Classification
of errors
Positioning
operation
errors
Error
code
Error name
MELSEC-Q
Error
546

During operation:
The system decelerates to a
The setting value of ABS direction in
stop.
the
unit
of
degree
is
as
follows.
Illegal setting of ABS
(Note that, in the continuous
direction in unit of
Set outside the setting range.
positioning control and continuous
degree
A figure other than "0" is set when
path control, the system continues
the software stroke limit is valid.
operating with the setting set at the
time of start even if the setting is
changed during the operation.)
800
Hold error

During operation:
In the PLC CPU unit parameter
"Output at error stop", the setting for
detailed parameter 2 sudden
QD75 is "Hold".
stop selection
(stop group 3).
801
Flash ROM writing

error
Data is not written to the flash ROM.

802
Flash ROM sum

check error
While data is written to the flash

ROM, the power is turned OFF.
803
PLC CPU error
The PLC CPU has an error.
804
The ABRST instruction is

executed with the status set to
other than 0.
The PSTRT instruction is
executed with the start No. set to
other than 1 to 600, 7000 to 7004
and 9001 to 9004.
Dedicated instruction The TEACH instruction is
error
executed with the teaching data
selection set to other than 0 and 1.
The TEACH instruction is
executed with the positioning data
No. set to other than 1 to 600.
The instruction of a non-existent
axis is specified by the ABRST ,
PSTRT or TEACH instruction.
805
Flash ROM exceed

writing error
I/F
errors
Data is written to the flash ROM

continuously 25 times or more from
the PLC program.
15 - 22

During operation:
detailed parameter 2 sudden
stop selection
(stop group 3).
15 TROUBLESHOOTING

address
ABS setting direction in the
unit of degree
1550 1650 1750 1850
MELSEC-Q
Set range
0: Shortcut
1: Clockwise
2: Counterclockwise
Remedy
Set the ABS setting direction in the unit of degree
within the setting range.
Set "0" when the software stroke limits are valid.

upper limit
468 [mm] [inch] [PLS]
469
2147483648 to 2147483647
[degree]
0 to 35999999
lower limit
18
19
168
169
318
319
20
21
170
171
320
321
470
471
Clear the setting of the PLC CPU module parameter

"Output at error stop".
(Refer to "QCPU Users Manual")
Replace the flash ROM with a new one.
<Parameter initialization request>

1: Parameter initialization is
requested
1901
Invalidate the software stroke limit.

(To invalidate, set the software stroke limit upper limit
value to the software stroke limit lower limit value.)
Return the parameter to that set at the time of delivery

from the plant. (Refer to Section 13.2)
<ABRST status>
0: Communication complete
(received from the servo amplifier)
<PSTRT start No.>
1 to 600, 7000 to 7004, 9001 to 9004
<TEACH teaching data selection>
0: The current feed value is written to
the positioning address.
1: The current feed value is written to
the arc address.
<TEACH positioning data No.>
1 to 600
When executing the ABRST instruction, set the

status to 0 (refer to Section 14.3).
When executing the PSTRT instruction, set the start
No. to within the setting range (refer to Section 14.4).
When executing the TEACH instruction, set the
teaching data selection and positioning data No. to
within the setting range (refer to Section 14.5).
Do not specify the instruction of a non-existent axis by
the ABRST , PSTRT and TEACH instructions
(refer to Section 14.3 to Section 14.5).
Review the PLC program so that data is not written

continuously to the flash ROM. (Using " Md.19 " in
Section 5.6.1, the number of flash ROM write times can
be monitored.)
(If this error has occurred in a proper using method,
writing is enabled by resetting the error, switching
power OFF, then ON, or resetting the PLC CPU.)
(Refer to "QCPU Users Manual")
15 - 23
15 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q
Classification
of errors
Error
code
I/F
errors
806
Dedicated instruction Mismatching occurs between the

I/F error
PLC CPU and QD75.
900
Outside unit setting

range
901
Outside pulse
The set range of the basic parameter
number per rotation 1 "No. of pulses per rotation" is
range
902
905
906
910
Parameter
setting range
errors
911
912
920
Error name
Error

1 "Unit setting" is outside the setting
range.
Outside movement The set range of the basic parameter

amount per rotation 1 "Movement amount per rotation" is
range
turned ON.
Rotation direction
1 "Rotation direction setting" is
setting error
Outside bias speed

range
The set range of the basic

parameter 1 "Bias speed at start" is
The bias speed exceeds the speed
limit.
The set range of the basic

parameter 2 "Speed limit value" is
The value obtained by the
Outside speed limit
conversion of the speed limit value
value range
with respect to the frequency
When the power is turned ON or PLC
exceeds the maximum output
READY signal (Y0) is turned from
frequency of the unit.
OFF to ON:
The speed limit value is smaller
QD75 READY signal (X0) is
than the OPR speed.
not turned ON.
The set range of the basic parameter At start: The system will not operate.
Outside acceleration
2 "Acceleration time 0" is outside the
time 0 range
setting range.
Outside deceleration
2 "Deceleration time 0" is outside the
time 0 range
setting range.
Backlash
compensation
amount error
The calculation result of the following

equation is smaller than 0 or larger
than 65536.
Pr.11
Pr.2
65535
Pr.3
921

In the unit of degree, the set value turned ON.
of the detailed parameter 1
"Software stroke limit upper limit
Software stroke limit value" is outside the setting range.
upper limit
In a unit other than degree, the
software stroke limit upper limit
value is smaller than the software
stroke limit lower limit value.
15 - 24
15 TROUBLESHOOTING

address
MELSEC-Q
Set range
150
300
450
0, 1, 2, 3
2
3
152
153
302
303
452
453
1 to 20000000
4
5
154
155
304
305
454
455
1 to 20000000
151
301
451
1,10,100,1000
6
7
156
157
306
307
456
457
0 [PLS/s]
0 [mm/min or others]
10
11
160
161
310
311
460
461
12
13
162
163
312
313
462
463
1 to 8388608
14
15
164
165
314
315
464
465
1 to 8388608
167
317
467
A trouble occurs. Repair.
After setting the value inside the setting range, turn the
PLC READY signal [Y0] from OFF to ON.
Set the bias speed to not more than "0".

After setting the value inside the setting range, turn
the PLC READY signal [Y0] from OFF to ON.
Set a value which is not less than the home position

return (OPR) speed.
1 to 10000000 [PLS/s]
1 to 2000000000 [mm/min or others] After setting the value inside the setting range, turn
Pr.11
17
Remedy
Pr.2
65535
Pr.3
Correct the parameters.

" Pr.2 No. of pulses per rotation",
" Pr.3 Movement amount per pulse" and
" Pr.11 Backlash compensation amount"
18
19
168
169
318
319
468
469
[mm] [inch] [PLS]

2147483648 to 2147483647
[degree] 0 to 35999999
15 - 25
Set the value inside the setting range.

In a unit other than degree, set the setting so that the
lower limit value is smaller than the upper limit value.
15 TROUBLESHOOTING
Classification
of errors
Parameter
setting range
errors
Error
code
Error name
MELSEC-Q
Error
Operation status at error

occurrence
922
In case unit is "degree", the set range

of the detailed parameter 1 "Software
stroke limit lower limit value" is outside
Software stroke limit the setting range.
under lower limit
In case unit is different than "degree",
the software stroke limit upper limit
value is smaller than the software
stroke limit lower limit value.
923
The set range of the detailed parameter

1 "Software stroke limit selection" is
selection error
924
Software stroke limit The set range of the detailed parameter

valid/invalid setting 1 "Software stroke limit valid/invalid
error
setting" is outside the setting range.
925
Command
in-position width
error

1 "Command in-position width" is
926
Illegal torque limit

setting value error

1 "Torque limit setting value" is outside
the setting range.
927
M code ON timing
error
The set range of the detailed parameter 1 The QD75 READY signal (X0) is
not turned ON.
"M code ON signal output timing" is
928
Speed switching
mode error

1 "Speed switching mode" is outside
the setting range.
929
Interpolation speed The set range of the detailed parameter

designation method 1 "Interpolation speed designation
error
method" is outside the setting range.
930

Current value update
1 "Current feed value during speed
request error
control" is outside the setting range.
932
Manual pulse
generator input
mode error

1 "Manual pulse generator input
selection" is outside the setting range.
935
Speed-position
function selection
error
The detailed parameter 1 "speedposition function selection" is preset to

2 and the following three conditions are
not satisfied:
1) Unit is "degree".
2) Software stroke limits are invalid.
3) Update current feed value.
950
Acceleration time 1
setting error
951
Acceleration time 2
setting error
952
Acceleration time 3
setting error
953
Deceleration time 1
setting error
The set range of the detailed parameter At start: The system will not
operate.
setting range.
During operation:
setting range.
sudden stop selection
(stop group 3).
setting range.
The set range of the detailed parameter (Note that the deceleration stop
only occurs during the manual
2 "Deceleration time 1" is outside the
pulse generator operation.)
setting range.
15 - 26
15 TROUBLESHOOTING

address
MELSEC-Q
Set range
[mm] [inch] [PLS]

2147483648 to 2147483647
[degree] 0 to 35999999
20
21
170
171
320
321
470
471
22
172
322
472
0, 1
23
173
323
473
0, 1
24
25
174
175
324
325
474
475
1 to 2147483647
26
176
326
476
1 to 500
27
177
327
477
0, 1
28
178
328
478
0, 1
29
179
329
479
0, 1
30
180
330
480
0, 1, 2
33
Remedy
In case unit is "degree" set the value inside the setting

range.
In case unit is different than "degree", set so that the
lower limit value is smaller than the upper limit value.
0, 1, 2, 3
34
184
334
484
0, 2
36
37
186
187
336
337
486
487
1 to 8388608
38
39
188
189
338
339
488
489
1 to 8388608
40
41
190
191
340
341
490
491
1 to 8388608
42
43
192
193
342
343
492
493
1 to 8388608
Speed-position switching control (ABS mode) should

satisfy the conditions 1) to 3) given on the left. When
speed-position switching control (ABS mode) is not
used, set 0 to speed-position function selection and
turn the PLC READY signal (Y0) from OFF to ON.
15 - 27
15 TROUBLESHOOTING
Classification
of errors
Error
code
Error
954
Deceleration time 2
setting error
The set range of the detailed

parameter 2 "Deceleration time 2" is
955
Deceleration time 3
setting error

parameter 2 "Deceleration time 3" is
956
JOG speed limit

value error

parameter 2 "JOG speed limit value"
is outside the setting range.
parameter 2 "JOG speed limit value"
exceeds the speed limit.
957
JOG acceleration
time selection setting 2 "JOG acceleration time selection
error
958
JOG deceleration
time selection setting 2 "JOG deceleration time selection
error
959
Acceleration/
deceleration process
selection setting
error
960
Parameter
setting range
errors
Error name
MELSEC-Q
961
962
At start: The system will not

operate.
parameter 2 "Acceleration/deceleration
process selection setting" is outside
During operation:
the setting range.
S-pattern ratio
parameter 2 "S-pattern ratio" is outside
setting error
the setting range.
Sudden stop selection
(stop group 3).
Illegal sudden stop
parameter 2 "Sudden stop deceleration
deceleration time
(Note
that
the deceleration stop only
time" is outside the setting range.
Stop group 1 sudden parameter 2 "Stop group 1 sudden
stop selection error stop selection" is outside the setting
range.
963

range.
964

range.
966

Outside allowance
parameter 2 "Allowance circular
circular interpolation
interpolation error width" is outside the
error width
setting range.
967
External command
function selection
error

parameter 2 "External command
function selection" is outside the
setting range.
970
Restart allowable
range error

parameter 2 " Restart allowable value The QD75 READY complete flag is
setting range of the servo ON to OFF" not turned ON.
15 - 28
15 TROUBLESHOOTING

address
MELSEC-Q
Set range
44
45
194
195
344
345
494
495
1 to 8388608
46
47
196
197
346
347
496
497
1 to 8388608
48
49
198
199
348
349
498
499
50
200
350
500
0, 1, 2, 3
51
201
351
501
0, 1, 2, 3
52
202
352
502
0, 1
53
203
353
503
1 to 100
54
55
204
205
354
355
504
505
1 to 8388608
56
206
356
506
0, 1
Remedy
After setting the value inside the setting range, turn

1 to 10000000 [PLS/s]
1 to 2000000000 [mm/min or others] Change the setting into the speed limit value or
below.
57
207
357
507
0, 1
58
208
358
508
0, 1
60
61
210
211
360
361
510
511
0 to 10000
62
212
362
512
0, 1, 2, 3
64
65
214
215
364
365
514
515
0 to 163840
15 - 29
15 TROUBLESHOOTING
Classification
of errors
Parameter
setting range
errors
Error
code
Error name
MELSEC-Q
Error
980
The set range of the home position

Home position return return (OPR) basic parameter "
(OPR) method error Home position return (OPR) method"
981

return (OPR) basic parameter "
Home position return (OPR)
(OPR) direction error
direction" is outside the setting
range.
982

Home position (OP) return (OPR) basic parameter
address setting error "Home position (OP) address" is
983

return (OPR) basic parameter
"Home position return (OPR)
speed" is outside the setting range.
The
set range of the home position
(OPR) speed error
return (OPR) basic parameter "
Home position return (OPR) speed"
is smaller than the bias speed at
start.

"Creep speed" is outside the
setting range.
"Creep speed" is larger than the
turned ON.
home position return (OPR) speed.
"Creep speed" is smaller than the
bias speed at start.
984
Creep speed error
985

Home position return return (OPR) basic parameter "
(OPR) retry error
Home position return (OPR) retry" is
990

Home position return return (OPR) detailed parameter "
(OPR) error
Home position return (OPR)" is
991

Setting for the
return (OPR) detailed parameter
movement amount
"Setting for the movement amount
after near-point dog
after near-point dog ON" is outside
ON error
the setting range.
992

Home position return return (OPR) detailed parameter
(OPR) acceleration "Home position return (OPR)
time selection error acceleration time selection" is
993

Home position return return (OPR) detailed parameter "
(OPR) deceleration Home position return (OPR)
time selection error deceleration time selection" is
15 - 30
15 TROUBLESHOOTING

address
MELSEC-Q
Set range
Remedy
70
220
370
520
0, 1, 4, 5, 6
71
221
371
521
0, 1
72
73
222
223
372
373
522
523
[mm] [inch] [PLS]

2147483648 to 2147483647
[degree] 0 to 35999999
74
75
224
225
374
375
524
525

1 to 10000000 [PLS/s]
1 to 2000000000 [mm/min or others] Set the speed to the bias speed at start or higher.

Set the speed to that below the home position return
1 to 10000000 [PLS/s]
(OPR) speed.
Set the value to the bias speed at start or higher.
76
77
226
227
376
377
526
527
78
228
378
528
0, 1
79
229
379
529
0 to 65535
80
81
230
231
380
381
530
531
0 to 2147483647
82
232
382
532
0, 1, 2, 3
83
233
383
533
0, 1, 2, 3
Home position return (OPR), turn the PLC READY

signal [Y0] from OFF to ON.
15 - 31
15 TROUBLESHOOTING
Classification
of errors
Encoder
errors
Error
code
Error name
MELSEC-Q
Error
995

return (OPR) detailed parameter "
Home position return (OPR) torque
limit value" is outside the setting
Home position return range.
(OPR) torque limit
The home position return (OPR)
value error
detailed parameter "Home position
return (OPR) torque limit value" has
exceeded the detailed parameter 1
"Torque limit setting value".
997

Speed designation return (OPR) detailed parameter
during home position "Speed designation during home
(OP) shift error
position (OP) shift" is outside the
setting range.
1201
Home position return The backup data for absolute position

(OPR) data incorrect restoration is illegal.
1203 Encoder error 1
The change amount of the encoder

current value during operation is
shown below.
"Change amount of the encoder
current value/ 3.5 [ms] > Motor 180 "
Check any time (both servo ON/OFF)
after the servo amplifier is turned ON.
1204 Encoder error 2
The following equation is established

during operation.
Encoder current value (encoder raw
data) [PLS] Feedback current value
(data inside servo amplifier) [PLS]
(number of encoder significant bits)
Check any time (both servo ON/OFF)
after the servo amplifier is turned ON.
15 - 32

turned ON.
Continue the operation.
15 TROUBLESHOOTING

address
86
236
386
536
MELSEC-Q
Set range
Remedy
1 to 300
Home position return (OPR), turn the PLC READY
signal [Y0] from OFF to ON.
88
238
388
538
0, 1
Execute the home position return (OPR).
Check the servomotor and encoder cable.

Take measures against noise.
Check the servomotor and encoder cable.

Check whether the rotation direction ( Pr.107 Rotation

direction selection ) is set "0 1" or "1 0" by PLC
program or GX-configurator-QP. (Refer to Section
14.5 "PFWRT" precaution (6). )
15 - 33
15 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q
15.2.2 MR-H-BN detection error

Classification of
errors
LED
Error indicator
code of servo
amplifier
Error name
Description
Cause
The power supply voltage is low.
2010
10
Under voltage
The power supply voltage to drop.
For MR-H700BN or less:

There was an instantaneous
control power failure of 15ms or
longer.
For MR-H11KBN or less:
There was an instantaneous
control power failure of 10ms or
longer.
Shortage of power supply capacity
caused the power supply voltage to
drop at start, etc. .
Power was restored after the bus
voltage had dropped to 200VDC.
(Main circuit power switched on
within 5s after it had switched off.)
Faulty parts in the servo amplifier.
2012
12
Memory error 1
ROM or RAM memory error.

Printed circuit board fault.
2013
13
Clock error
2014
14
Watchdog error CPU parts of the circuit fault.
2015
15
Memory error 2
Servo
amplifier
errors
EEP-ROM error.
The encoder connecter is
disconnected.
2016
16
Encoder error 1
Fault in the encoder.

Communication error occurred
between encoder and servo amplifier. Encoder cable fault. (Wire breakage
or shot)
Improper motor was connected with
servo amplifier.
2017
17
Board error 2
CPU or parts of the circuit fault.
2019
19
Memory error 3
Flash memory error.
2020
1A
Servomotor
combination
error
Servomotor and servo amplifier

combination

When using servomotor, improper
motor was connected with servo
amplifier.
disconnected.
2020
20
Encoder error 2

between encoder and servo amplifier.
Encoder cable fault. (Wire breakage
or shot)
2024
24
Motor output
Servomotor output (U, V, W phase)
side ground fault ground fault.
15 - 34
Power input cable and servomotor

output cable are making contact at
the main circuit terminal block(TE1).
Servomotor power cable insulation
deteriorated.
15 TROUBLESHOOTING

address
MELSEC-Q
Check point
Corrective action
Reconsider the power supply voltage.
Alarm (A.10) occurs if interface unit is

Change the servo amplifier.
changed.
Alarm (any of A.12 to 15) occurs if

power is switched on after
disconnection of all cables but the
control circuit power supply cables.
Connect correctly.
Change the servomotor.
Repair or change the cable.

Use correct combination.
Alarm (A.17, A.19) occurs if interface

unit is changed.
Connect correctly.

Connect correctly.
Change the cable.
15 - 35
15 TROUBLESHOOTING
Classification of
errors
LED
Error indicator
code of servo
amplifier
Error name
MELSEC-Q
Description
Cause
Voltage low in the super capacitor in

the encoder.
Absolute position data in error.
2025
25
Battery voltage low.
Absolute position
lost
Battery cable or battery fault.

Power was switched on for the first
Super capacitor of the absolute
time in the absolute position detection
position encoder is not charged.
system.
Parameter " Pr.102 Regenerative
brake resistor" setting value error.
Built-in regenerative brake resistor
or regenerative brake option is not
connected.
Permissible regenerative power of the

built-in regenerative brake resistor or High-duty operation or continuous
regenerative operation caused the
regenerative brake option is
permissible regenerative power of
exceeded.
the regenerative brake option to be
exceeded.
2030
30
Power supply voltage is abnormal.

(260VAC or more)
Regenerative
error
Regenerative brake option faulty.
Servo
amplifier
errors
Regenerative transistor faulty.

Regenerative transistor fault
or regenerative brake option faulty.
Cooling fan stopped.
Unusual overheat due to cooling fan

stop.
Small acceleration/deceleration
time constant caused overshoot to
be large.
2031
31
Overspeed
Speed has exceeded the

instantaneous permissible speed.
Servo system is instable to cause
overshoot.
15 - 36
15 TROUBLESHOOTING
Related buffer memory address

Axis 1
Axis 2
Axis 3
MELSEC-Q
Check point
Corrective action
Axis 4
After alarm has occurred, hold power on for a few
minutes, and switch it off once, then on again.
Make OPR again.
Change the battery. Make OPR again.

Make OPR again.
Regenerative resistor brake option

30102
30202
30203
30204
Set correctly.
Connect correctly
Call the status display and check Reduce the frequency of positioning.
the regenerative load ratio.
Use the regenerative brake option of larger
capacity.
Reduce the load.
Review power supply.
Change the regenerative brake option.
The regenerative brake option

has overheated abnormally.
The alarm occurs even after
removal of the built-in
regenerative brake resistor or
regenerative brake option.
Change the servo amplifier or regenerative brake

option.
Change the servo amplifier or cooling fan.

Reduce ambient temperature.
Load inertia ratio
Increase acceleration/deceleration time constant.

30112
30212
30312
30412
Acceleration time
12, 13
162, 163 312, 313 462, 463
36, 37
186, 187 336, 337 486, 487
38, 39
188, 189 338, 389 488, 489
40, 41
190, 191 340, 341 490, 491
14, 15
164, 165 314, 315 464, 465
42, 43
192, 193 342, 343 492, 493
44, 45
194, 195 344, 345 494, 495
46, 47
196, 197 346, 347 496, 497
Reset servo gain to proper value.

If servo gain cannot be set to proper value:
(1) Reduce " Pr.112 Load inertia moment ratio";
or
(2) Reexamine acceleration/deceleration time
constant.
Deceleration time
15 - 37
15 TROUBLESHOOTING
Classification of
errors
LED
Error indicator
code of servo
amplifier
Error name
MELSEC-Q
Description
Cause
Parameter Pr.103 to Pr.105

setting error.
2031
31
Overspeed


Output U, V, W phases of the servo
amplifier were connected with each
other.
2032
32
Overcurrent
Current that flew is higher than the

permissible current of the servo
amplifier.
Transistor of the servo amplifier

damaged.
Short circuit in the servo amplifier
output U, V, W phases.
Noise entered the overcurrent
detection circuit.
Lead of built-in regenerative brake
resistor or regenerative brake option
is open or disconnected.
Though the regenerative brake
option is used, the DRU parameter
" Pr.102 Regenerative brake
resistor" setting value is "000 (not
used)".
Servo
amplifier
errors
2033
33
Overvoltage
Converter bus voltage exceeded

400VDC.
Regenerative brake option is open

or disconnected.

Wire breakage of built-in
Capacity of built-in regenerative
brake resistor or regenerative brake
option is insufficient.
Power supply voltage high.
The SSCNET cable is
disconnected.
Bus cable fault.
2034
34
CRC error
SSCNET cable communication fault
Noise has entered the bus cable.

The terminal connector is
disconnected.
The same No. exists in the servo
amplifier side axis setting.
15 - 38
15 TROUBLESHOOTING

Axis 1
Axis 2
Axis 3
MELSEC-Q
Check point
Corrective action
Axis 4
Motor type
30102
30202
30103
30203
30302
30402
Motor capacity
30303
Set correctly ( Pr.103 to Pr.105 ).
30403
Motor rotation speed

30104
30204
30304
30404
Change servomotor.
Correct the U, V, W phase wiring of the servo

amplifier.
Alarm (A.32) occurs if power is

switched on after disconnection
of the U, V, W phase power
cables.

amplifier.
Take noise suppression measures.
Change lead.
Connect correctly.
Regenerative brake option

Set correctly.
30102
30202
30302
30402
Change lead.
Connect correctly.
For wire breakage of built-in regenerative brake

resistor, change the servo amplifier.
For wire breakage of regenerative brake option,
change regenerative brake option.
Add regenerative brake option or increase

capacity.
Review the power supply.
Connect correctly.
Change the SSCNET cable.
Connect terminal connector.

Set correctly.
15 - 39
15 TROUBLESHOOTING
Classifcation of
errors
LED
Error indicator
code of servo
amplifier
Error name
MELSEC-Q
Description
Cause
Command given is greater than the

maximum speed of the servomotor.
2035
35
Command pulse
Input frequency of too high.
frequency error
Noise has entered the SSCNET

cable.
Fault in the QD75M.
The SSCNET cable is
disconnected.
2036
36
Transfer error
SSCNET cable or printed board is

faulty.
The SSCNET cable fault.

Printed circuit board (H-C10) fault.
disconnected.
Servo amplifier fault caused the
parameter setting to be rewritten.
2037
37
Parameter error Parameter setting is wrong.

Parameter data mis-setting by
QD75M.
2042
42
Feedback error
The motor encoder signal is

abnormal.
The motor encoder fault.

Air cooling fan of servo amplifier
stops.
Servo
amplifier
errors
2045
45
Main circuit
device over
heated
Main circuit device overheat
The power supply was turned on

and off continuously by overloaded
status.
Servo amplifier abnormal.
Servo motor ambient temperature
exceeded the operating value of
40C.
2046
46
Servomotor
heated
Servo motor temperature rise

actuated the thermal protector.
Servomotor overloaded.
Thermal protector in encoder is
faulty.
The current exceeded the
continuous output current of the
servo amplifier.
2050
50
Overload 1
Load exceeded overload protection

characteristic of servo amplifier.
Load ratio 300%: 2.5s or more
Load ratio 200%: 100s or more
The servo system is unstable,

causing hunting.
Collision with the machine.

Servo motor miswiring servo
amplifier terminals U, V, W phase
do not mach motor terminals U, V,
W phase.
15 - 40
15 TROUBLESHOOTING

Axis 1
Axis 2
Axis 3
MELSEC-Q
Check point
Corrective action
Axis 4
Review operation program.

Change QD75M.
Connect the connector of the SSCNET cable.

Change the parameter value to within the setting

range.

Review operation method.

Review environment so that ambient temperature
is 0 to 40C.
Reduce load.
Review operation pattern.
Use servomotor that provides larger output.
Reduce load.
Auto tuning
30108
30208
30308
30408
Repeat acceleration/deceleration to execute

" Pr.108 Auto tuning".
30409
Change " Pr.109 Servo response" setting.

Set " Pr.108 Auto tuning" to OFF and make gain
adjustment manually.
Servo response
30109
30209
30309
31
181
331
481

Install limit switches.
Connect correctly.
15 - 41
15 TROUBLESHOOTING
Classification of
errors
LED
Error indicator
code of servo
amplifier
2050
50
Error name
Overload 1
MELSEC-Q
Description

Cause

W phase.
2051
51
Overload 2
Machine collision or the like caused The servo system is unstable,

causing hunting.
max. output current to flow
successively for several seconds.
Servomotor locked: 1s or more
The bus voltage of the unit has
decreased.
Encoder faulty.
Servo
amplifier
errors
constant too small.
2052
52
Error excessive
Droop pulse of the deviation counter

reached or exceeded setting
value(Initial value: 80kPLS) of the
parameter Pr.131 .
Torque limit value too small.
Start disabled due to insufficient

torque caused drop in power supply
voltage.
The setting value for " Pr.113
Position control gain 1" too small.
15 - 42
15 TROUBLESHOOTING

Axis 1
Axis 2
Axis 3
MELSEC-Q
Check point
Corrective action
Axis 4
When the servomotor shaft is

rotated with the servo off,
the cumulative feedback pulses
Change servomotor.
should vary in proportion to the
rotary angle. If the indication skips
or returns midway the encoder if
faulty.

31
181
331
481

Connect correctly.
Auto tuning
30108
30208
30308
30408
Servo response
30109
30209
30309
30409

faulty.
Acceleration time
12, 13
162, 163 312, 313 462, 463
36, 37
186, 187 336, 337 486, 487
38, 39
188, 189 338, 339 488, 489
40, 41
190, 191 340, 341 490, 491
14, 15
164, 165 314, 315 464, 465
42, 43
192, 193 342, 343 492, 493
44, 45
194, 195 344, 345 494, 495
46, 47
196, 197 346, 347 496, 497
Increase the acceleration/deceleration time

constant.
Deceleration time
Torque limit value

26
176
326
476

86
236
386
Increase the torque limit value.
536

1552
1652
1752
1852
Review the power supply capacity.

Use servomotor which provides larger output.
Positioning gain 1
30113
30213
30313
Increase set value and adjust to ensure proper

operation.
30413
15 - 43
15 TROUBLESHOOTING
Classification of
errors
LED
Error indicator
code of servo
amplifier
Error name
MELSEC-Q
Description
Cause
Servo motor shaft was rotated by

external force.
2052
52
Error excessive
Servo
amplifier
errors

reached or exceeded setting value
(Initial value: 8 rotation) of the
parameter Pr.131 .
Collision with the machine

dont mach motor terminals U, V, W
phase.
The bus voltage of the unit due to
the breakdown.
2086
8E
Serial
communication
error
The fault has occurred in

communication between the servo
amplifier and communication devices
(e.g. personal computer).
15 - 44
The communication cable fault.

(Wire breakage or shot)
The communication devices
(e.g. personal computer) fault.
15 TROUBLESHOOTING

Axis 1
Axis 2
Axis 3
MELSEC-Q
Check point
Corrective action
Axis 4
Torque limit value

26
176
326
476
When torque is limited, increase the limit value.

Reduce load.

86
236
386
536

1552
1652
1752
1852

31
181
331
481

Connect correctly.
Change the communication devices (e.g. personal

computer).
15 - 45
15 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q
15.2.3 MR-J2-B detection error

Classification of
errors
LED
Error indicator
code of servo
amplifier
Error name
Description
Cause

There was an instantaneous control
power failure of 15ms or longer.
2010
10
Under voltage
For MR-J2-B:
The power supply voltage dropped
to 160VAC or less.
For MR-J2-B1:
to 83VAC or less.

2011
11
Board error 1
2012
12
Memory error 1
RAM memory error.
2013
13
Clock error
2015
15
Memory error 2
EEP-ROM error
The encoder connecter (CN2) is

disconnected.
Servo
amplifier
errors
2016
16
Encoder error 1

between encoder and servo amplifier. Encoder cable fault. (Wire breakage
or shot)
Improper motor was connected with
servo amplifier.
2017
17
Board error 2
2018
18
Board error 3
ROM memory error.

disconnected.
or shot)
2020
20
Encoder error 2
2024
24
Motor output
side ground fault of the servo amplifier ground fault.
Servo amplifier output (U, V, W

phase) ground fault.
the encoder.

2025
25
Absolute position
lost

system.
15 - 46
15 TROUBLESHOOTING

address
MELSEC-Q
Check point
Corrective action

switched on after disconnection of
the CN1A, CN1B and CN3
connector.
Alarm (any of A.12 to 13, 15) occurs if

disconnection of CN1A, CN1B and
CN3 connector.
Connect correctly.

Alarm (A.17, A.18) occurs if power is

connector.
Connect correctly.

Change the cable.
After leaving the alarm occurring for few minutes,

switch power off, then on again.
Always make OPR setting again.
Change the battery unit.


15 - 47
15 TROUBLESHOOTING
Classification of
errors
LED
Error indicator
code of servo
amplifier
Error name
MELSEC-Q
Description
Cause

connected.
built-in regenerative brake resistor or
exceeded.
2030
30
High-duty operation or continuous

exceeded.
MR-J2-B: 260VAC or more
MR-J2-B1: 135VAC or more
Regenerative
error

be large.
Servo
amplifier
errors
2031
31
Overspeed


overshoot.

Output phases U, V, W phase of the
servo amplifier were connected with
each other.
2032
32
Overcurrent

amplifier.

damaged.
out put phase U, V, W phase.
detection circuit.
15 - 48
15 TROUBLESHOOTING

Axis 1
Axis 2
Axis 3
MELSEC-Q
Check point
Corrective action
Axis 4

30102
30202
30203
30204
Set correctly.
Connect correctly.
capacity.
Reduce the load.


option.
Load inertia ratio
30112
30212
30312

30412
Acceleration time
12, 13
162, 163 312, 313 462, 463
36, 37
186, 187 336, 337 486, 487
38, 39
188, 189 338, 339 488, 489
40, 41
190, 191 340, 341 490, 491
14, 15
164, 165 314, 315 464, 465
42, 43
192, 193 342, 343 492, 493
44, 45
194, 195 344, 345 494, 495
46, 47
196, 197 346, 347 496, 497

or
(2) Reexamine acceleration/ deceleration time
constant.
Deceleration time
Change servomotor.

amplifier.

cables.

amplifier.
15 - 49
15 TROUBLESHOOTING
LED
Classifica
Error indicator
tion of
code of servo
errors
amplifier
Error name
MELSEC-Q
Description
Cause

resistor "setting value is "000 (not
used)".
2033
33
Overvoltage

400VDC.

or disconnected.
regenerative brake option
The SSCNET cable is
disconnected.
SSCNET cable fault.
2034
34
CRC error

cable.
disconnected.
Servo
amplifier
errors

2035
35
Command pulse
frequency error

cable.
Fault in the QD75M.
The SSCNET cable is
disconnected.
2036
36
Transfer error

faulty.

disconnected.
2037
37

QD75M.
40C.
2046
46
Servomotor
heated

faulty.
15 - 50
15 TROUBLESHOOTING

Axis 1
Axis 2
Axis 3
Axis 4
MELSEC-Q
Check point
Corrective action
Change lead.
Connect correctly.

Connect correctly.
30102
30202
30302
30402
Change lead.
Connect correctly.


capacity.
Connect correctly.

Set correctly.

Change QD75M.


range.
is 0 to 40C.
Reduce load.
15 - 51
15 TROUBLESHOOTING
LED
Classifica
Error indicator
tion of
code of servo
errors
amplifier
Error name
MELSEC-Q
Description
Cause

servo amplifier.

causing hunting.
2050
50
Overload 1


W phase.

don't mach motor terminals U, V, W
phase.
Servo
amplifier
errors
2051
51
Overload 2
Machine collision or the like caused

causing hunting.
Servomotor locked: 1s or more
2052
52
Error excessive

(Initial value: 80kPLS) of the
parameter Pr.131 .
15 - 52
constant too small.
15 TROUBLESHOOTING

Axis 1
Axis 2
Axis 3
Axis 4
30108
30208
MELSEC-Q
Check point
Reduce load.
Auto tuning
30308
30408

30409

Servo response
30109
30209
30309
Corrective action
31
181
331
481

Connect correctly.

Change servomotor.
faulty.

31
181
331
481

Connect correctly.
Auto tuning
30108
30208
30308

30408
Servo response
30109
30209
30309
30409

faulty.
Acceleration time
12, 13
162, 163 312, 313 462, 463
36, 37
186, 187 336, 337 486, 487
38, 39
188, 189 338, 339 488, 489
40, 41
190, 191 340, 341 490, 491

constant.
Deceleration time
14, 15
164, 165 314, 315 464, 465
42, 43
192, 193 342, 343 492, 493
44, 45
194, 195 344, 345 494, 495
46, 47
196, 197 346, 347 496, 497
15 - 53
15 TROUBLESHOOTING
LED
Classifica
Error indicator
tion of
code of servo
errors
amplifier
Error name
MELSEC-Q
Description
Cause

voltage.
2052
52
Error excessive
Servo
amplifier
errors

reached or exceeded setting value of
the parameter Pr.131 .


external force.

amplifier terminals U, V, W do not
mach motor terminals U, V, W.
2086
8E
Serial
communication
error

15 - 54

15 TROUBLESHOOTING

Axis 1
Axis 2
Axis 3
MELSEC-Q
Check point
Corrective action
Axis 4
Torque limit value

26
176
326
476

86
236
386
536

1552
1652
1752
1852

Positioning gain 1
30113
30213
30313

operation.
30413
Torque limit value

26
176
326
476

Reduce load.

86
236
386
536

1552
1652
1752
1852
31
181
331
481

Connect correctly.

computer).
15 - 55
15 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q
15.2.4 MR-J2S-B detection error

LED
Classifica
Error indicator
tion of
code of servo
errors
amplifier
Error name
Description
Cause

2010
10
Under voltage
For MR-J2S-B:
to 160VAC or less.
For MR-J2S-B1:
to 83VAC or less.

2012
12
Memory error 1
RAM memory error.
2013
13
Clock error
2015
15
Memory error 2
EEP-ROM error

disconnected.
Servo
amplifier
errors

or shot)
2016
16
Encoder error 1
2017
17
Board error 2
2019
19
Memory error 3
ROM memory error.
2020
1A
Servomotor
combination
error
Wrong combination of servo

Wrong combination of servo amplifier
amplifier and servomotor
and servomotor.
connected.

disconnected.
2020
2024
20
24
Encoder error 2

or shot)
Motor output
Power input wires and servomotor

output wires are in contact at main
circuit terminal block (TE1).
Sheathes of servomotor power
cables deteriorated, resulting in
ground fault.
the encoder.

2025
25
Absolute position
lost

system.
15 - 56
15 TROUBLESHOOTING

address
MELSEC-Q
Check point
Corrective action

connector.
Alarm (any of A.12 to 13,15) occurs if

disconnection of CN1A, CN1B and
CN3 connector.
Connect correctly.

Alarm (A.17, A.19) occurs if power is

connector.
Connect correctly.

Change the cable.

Change the battery.


15 - 57
15 TROUBLESHOOTING
LED
Classifica
Error indicator
tion of
code of servo
errors
amplifier
Error name
MELSEC-Q
Description
Cause

connected.
built-in regenerative brake resistor or
exceeded.
2030
30
High-duty operation or continuous

exceeded.
MR-J2S-B: 260VAC or more
MR-J2S-B1: 135VAC or more
Regenerative
error

be large.
Servo
amplifier
errors
2031
31
Overspeed


overshoot.

each other.
2032
32
Overcurrent

amplifier.

damaged.
detection circuit.
15 - 58
15 TROUBLESHOOTING

Axis 1
Axis 2
Axis 3
MELSEC-Q
Check point
Corrective action
Axis 4

30102
30202
30302
30402
Set correctly.
Connect correctly
Reduce the frequency of positioning.
Call the status display and check Use the regenerative brake option of larger
capacity.
Reduce the load.


option.
Load inertia ratio
30112
30212
30312

30412
Acceleration time
12, 13
162, 163 312, 313 462, 463
36, 37
186, 187 336, 337 486, 487
38, 39
188, 189 338, 339 488, 489
40, 41
190, 191 340, 341 490, 491
14, 15
164, 165 314, 315 464, 465
42, 43
192, 193 342, 343 492, 493
44, 45
194, 195 344, 345 494, 495
46, 47
196, 197 346, 347 496, 497

(1) Reduce " Pr.112 load inertia moment ratio";
or
constant.
Deceleration time
Change servomotor.

amplifier.

cables.

amplifier.
15 - 59
15 TROUBLESHOOTING
LED
Classifica
Error indicator
tion of
code of servo
errors
amplifier
Error name
MELSEC-Q
Description
Cause

resistor" setting value is "000 (not
used)".
2033
33
Overvoltage

400VDC.

or disconnected.

The SSCNET cable is
disconnected.
Servo
amplifier
errors
SSCNET cable fault.

2034
34
CRC error

cable.
disconnected.
2035
35
Command pulse
frequency error

cable.
Fault in the QD75M.
The SSCNET cable is
disconnected.
2036
36
Transfer error

faulty.
SSCNET cable fault.

disconnected.
2037
37

QD75M.
The number of write times to EEPROM exceeded 100,000 due to
parameter write, etc.
15 - 60
15 TROUBLESHOOTING

Axis 1
Axis 2
Axis 3
Axis 4
MELSEC-Q
Check point
Corrective action
Change lead.
Connect correctly.

Connect correctly.
30102
30202
30302
30402
Change lead.
Connect correctly.


capacity.
Connect correctly.

Set correctly.

Change QD75M.


range.
15 - 61
15 TROUBLESHOOTING
LED
Classifica
Error indicator
tion of
code of servo
errors
amplifier
2045
45
Error name
Main circuit
device over
heated
MELSEC-Q
Description
Cause
Air cooling fan of servo amplifier

stops.
Main circuit device overheat
Power on/off repeated in overload

state.
Servo amplifier abnormal
40C.
2046
46
Servomotor
heated

faulty.
servo amplifier.

causing hunting.
2050
50
Overload 1
Servo
amplifier
errors


W phase.

don't mach motor terminals U, V, W
phase.
2051
51
Overload 2

Servomotor locked:
1s or more causing hunting.
During rotation:
2.5s or more
15 - 62
15 TROUBLESHOOTING

Axis 1
Axis 2
Axis 3
MELSEC-Q
Check point
Corrective action
Axis 4
The drive method is reviewed.

is 0 to 40C.
Reduce load.
Reduce load.
Auto tuning
30108
30208
30308
30408

30409

Servo response
30109
30209
30309
31
181
331
481

Connect correctly.

rotated with the servo off, the
cumulative feedback pulses should
Change servomotor.
vary in proportion to the rotary
angle. If the indication skips or
returns midway the encoder if faulty.

31
181
331
481

Connect correctly.
Auto tuning
30108
30208
30308

30408
Servo response
30109
30209
30309
30409

faulty.
15 - 63
15 TROUBLESHOOTING
LED
Classifica
Error indicator
tion of
code of servo
errors
amplifier
Error name
MELSEC-Q
Description
Cause
constant too small.
2052
52
Error excessive
Servo
amplifier
errors

(Initial value: 8 rotation) of the
parameter Pr.131 .

voltage.

external force.

phase.
2086
8E
Serial
communication
error

15 - 64

15 TROUBLESHOOTING

Axis 1
Axis 2
Axis 3
MELSEC-Q
Check point
Corrective action
Axis 4
Acceleration time
12, 13
162, 163 312, 313 462, 463
36, 37
186, 187 336, 337 486, 487
38, 39
188, 189 338, 339 488, 489
40, 41
190, 191 340, 341 490, 491
14, 15
164, 165 314, 315 464, 465
42, 43
192, 193 342, 343 492, 493
44, 45
194, 195 344, 345 494, 495
46, 47
196, 197 346, 347 496, 497

constant.
Deceleration time
Torque limit value

26
176
326
476

86
236
386
536

1552
1652
1752
1852

Positioning gain 1
30113
30213
30313

operation.
30413
Torque limit value

26
176
326
476

Reduce load.

86
236
386
536

1552
1652
1752
1852

31
181
331
481

Connect correctly.

computer).
15 - 65
15 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q
15.2.5 MR-J2-Jr detection error

LED
Classifica
Error indicator
tion of
code of servo
errors
amplifier
Error name
Description
Cause

2010
10
Under voltage
The power supply voltage dropped to Power was restored after the bus
20VDC or less.
Servo
amplifier
errors
2011
11
Board error 1
2012
12
Memory error 1
ROM or RAM memory error.
2013
13
Clock error
2015
15
Memory error 2
EEP-ROM error
The encoder connecter (CNP2) is

disconnected.
2016
16
Encoder error 1
2017
17
Board error 2

or shot)

The encoder connecter (CNP2) is
disconnected.
2020
2024
20
24
Encoder error 2

or shot)
Motor output
15 - 66
Contact of power supply input

cables and servomotor outputs in
main circuit terminal block.
Sheathes of servomotor power
ground fault.
15 TROUBLESHOOTING

address
MELSEC-Q
Check point
Corrective action

the CN1A, CN1B, CNP2 and CNP3
connector.

disconnection of CN1A, CN1B, CNP2
and CNP3 connector.
Connect correctly.


the CN1A, CN1B, CNP2 and CNP3
connector.
Connect correctly.

Alarm (2024) occurs if power is

the CNP2 connector.
15 - 67
Connect correctly.
Change the cable.
15 TROUBLESHOOTING
LED
Classifica
Error indicator
tion of
code of servo
errors
amplifier
Error name
MELSEC-Q
Description
Cause
be large.
2031
31
Overspeed


overshoot.
Servo
amplifier
errors
each other.
2032
32
Overcurrent

amplifier.

damaged.
detection circuit.
15 - 68
15 TROUBLESHOOTING

Axis 1
Axis 2
Axis 3
MELSEC-Q
Check point
Axis 4
Load inertia ratio

30112
30212
30312
Corrective action
Increase acceleration/ deceleration time constant.

30412
Acceleration time
12, 13
162, 163 312, 313 462, 463
36, 37
186, 187 336, 337 486, 487
38, 39
188, 189 338, 339 488, 489
40, 41
190, 191 340, 341 490, 491
14, 15
164, 165 314, 315 464, 465
42, 43
192, 193 342, 343 492, 493
44, 45
194, 195 344, 345 494, 495
46, 47
196, 197 346, 347 496, 497

or
constant.
Deceleration time
Change servomotor.

amplifier.

of the CNP2 connector.

amplifier.
15 - 69
15 TROUBLESHOOTING
LED
Classifica
Error indicator
tion of
code of servo
errors
amplifier
2033
33
Error name
Overvoltage
MELSEC-Q
Description

35VDC.
Cause

The SSCNET cable is
disconnected.
SSCNET cable fault.
2034
34
CRC error

cable.
disconnected.
2035
35
Command pulse
frequency error
Servo
amplifier
errors

cable.
Fault in the QD75M.
The SSCNET cable is
disconnected.
2036
36
Transfer error
Bus cable or printed board is faulty.

disconnected.
2037
37

QD75M.
15 - 70
15 TROUBLESHOOTING

Axis 1
Axis 2
Axis 3
Axis 4
MELSEC-Q
Check point
Corrective action

Connect correctly.

Set correctly.

Change QD75M.


range.
15 - 71
15 TROUBLESHOOTING
LED
Classifica
Error indicator
tion of
code of servo
errors
amplifier
Error name
MELSEC-Q
Description
Cause

servo amplifier.

causing hunting.
2050
50
Overload 1


W phase.

W phase.
Servo
amplifier
errors
2051
51
Overload 2

causing hunting.
Servomotor locked:
1s or more
During rotation:
2.5s or more The bus voltage of the unit has
decreased.
Encoder faulty.
2052
52
Error excessive

reached or exceeded setting value of
constant too small.
the parameter Pr.131 .
15 - 72
15 TROUBLESHOOTING

Axis 1
Axis 2
Axis 3
Axis 4
MELSEC-Q
Check point
Reduce load.
Auto tuning
30108
30208
30308
30408

30409

Servo response
30109
30209
30309
Corrective action

31
181
331
481

Connect correctly.

cumulative feedback pulses
Change servomotor.
faulty.

31
181
331
481

Connect correctly.
Auto tuning
30108
30208
30308

30408

Servo response
30109
30209
30309
30409

cumulative feedback pulses
faulty.
Acceleration time
12, 13
162, 163 312, 313 462, 463
36, 37
186, 187 336, 337 486, 487
38, 39
188, 189 338, 339 488, 489
40, 41
190, 191 340, 341 490, 491

constant.
Deceleration time
14, 15
164, 165 314, 315 464, 465
42, 43
192, 193 342, 343 492, 493
44, 45
194, 195 344, 345 494, 495
46, 47
196, 197 346, 347 496, 497
15 - 73
15 TROUBLESHOOTING
LED
Classifica
Error indicator
tion of
code of servo
errors
amplifier
Error name
MELSEC-Q
Description
Cause

voltage.
2052
52
Error excessive
Servo
amplifier
errors

(default value: 80kPLS) of the
parameter Pr.131 .

external force.

phase.
The bus voltage of the unit due to
the breakdown.
2086
8E
Serial
communication
error

15 - 74

15 TROUBLESHOOTING

Axis 1
Axis 2
Axis 3
MELSEC-Q
Check point
Corrective action
Axis 4
Torque limit value

26
176
326
476

86
236
386
536

1552
1652
1752
1852

Positioning gain 1
30113
30213
30313

operation.
30413
Torque limit value

26
176
326
476

Reduce load.

86
236
386
536

1552
1652
1752
1852
31
181
331
481

Connect correctly.
Change servomotor.

Change the communication device (e.g. personal
computer).
15 - 75
15 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q
15.2.6 MR-J2M-B detection error

Classifica
Error
tion of
code
errors
LED indicator
of servo
amplifier
IFU
Error name
Description
Cause
DRU
2010
FA. 10
Under voltage
The power supply voltage

dropped to 160VAC or less.

Faulty parts in the base unit.
Faulty parts in interface unit.
CNP3 or CNP1B connector
unplugged.
2012
FA.12
2013
FA.13
2014
FA.14
2015
Servo
amplifier 2012
errors
2013
FA.15
2014
2015
Memory error 1 ROM or RAM memory error.

Clock error
Watchdog error CPU parts of the circuit fault.
Faulty parts in interface unit.
Memory error 2 EEP-ROM error
@A.12# Memory error 1 ROM or RAM memory error.

@A.13# Clock error
@A.14# Watchdog error CPU parts of the circuit fault.
Faulty parts in the drive unit.
@A.15# Memory error 2 EEP-ROM error

disconnected.
2016
@A.16# Encoder error 1
2017
@A.17# Board error 2
2019
@A.1A# combination
error
2021
CPU or parts of the circuit fault. Faulty parts in the drive unit.
FA.19 @A.19# Memory error 3 Flash memory error.
Servomotor
2020

between encoder and drive unit.
or shot)
FA.1B
Axis set error
Faulty parts in the interface unit or

drive unit.
Wrong combination of drive unit Wrong combination of drive unit

and servomotor.
and servomotor connected.
Drive unit installed on the same IFU parameter Pr.111 to Pr.118
base unit have the same axis. setting mistake.
15 - 76
15 TROUBLESHOOTING

address
MELSEC-Q
Check point
Corrective action
Alarm (A.10) occurs if interface unit is

Change the base unit.
changed.
Alarm (A.10) occurs if base unit is

changed.
Change the interface unit.

Connect correctly.


Change the drive unit.
Connect correctly.


switched on after disconnection of all
cables but the control circuit power
supply cables.
switched on after disconnection of all
Change the interface unit or drive unit.
cables but the control circuit power
supply cables.
Connect correctly.
15 - 77
15 TROUBLESHOOTING
Classifica
Error
tion of
code
errors
LED indicator
of servo
amplifier
MELSEC-Q
Error name
Description
Cause
IFU
DRU
2022
FA.1C
Base unit bus

error 1
There is error in communication Interface unit connection fault.

between interface unit and drive Interface unit failure.
unit.
Base unit failure.
2023
FA.1D
Base unit bus

error 2
There is error in communication Drive unit connection fault.

between interface unit and drive Drive unit failure.
unit.
Base unit failure.
Drive unit connection fault.
2024
FA.1E
Servo amplifier Drive unit came off the base unit

mounting error after initialization.
Base unit failure.

Faulty parts in servo amplifier.
disconnected.
2020
Servo
amplifier
errors
@A.20# Encoder error 2

Encoder fault.
between encoder and drive unit.
Encoder cable faulty. (Wire
breakage or shorted)
Power input wires and servo motor
output wires are in contact at CNP2.
2024
Motor output
@A.24# side ground
fault
Servomotor output (U, V, W

phase) ground fault.
Sheathes of servo motor power

ground fault.
Main circuit of drive unit failed.
Battery unit voltage low.

2025
@A.25#
Absolute
position lost
Power was switched on for the

first time in the absolute position
detection system.
15 - 78
15 TROUBLESHOOTING

address
MELSEC-Q
Check point
Corrective action

Connect the interface unit to the base unit properly.

Connect the drive unit to the base unit properly.

Connect the drive unit to the base unit properly.

Alarm (A.1E) occurs if power is
the U, V, W phase power cables.

Connect correctly.

Repair or change cable.
Connect correctly.
Change the cable.

the U, V, W phase power cables.
Change battery unit.

Always make home position setting again.
After leaving the alarm occurring for a few minutes,

Always make home position setting again
15 - 79
15 TROUBLESHOOTING
Classifica
Error
tion of
code
errors
LED indicator
of servo
amplifier
IFU
MELSEC-Q
Error name
Description
Cause
DRU
connected.
2030
FA.30
Regenerative
error
Permissible regenerative power

of the built-in regenerative brake High-duty operation or continuous
resistor or regenerative brake
option is exceeded.
exceeded.
(260VAC or more)
be large.
Servo
amplifier
errors
2031
@A.31# Overspeed

instantaneous permissible
speed.

overshoot.

Output phases U, V, W phases of
the drive unit were connected with
each other.
2032
@A.32# Overcurrent
Current that flew is higher than

the permissible current of the
drive unit.
Transistor of the drive unit

damaged.
Short circuit in the drive unit out put
phase U, V, W phases.
detection circuit.
15 - 80
15 TROUBLESHOOTING

Axis 1
Axis 2
Axis 3
MELSEC-Q
Check point
Corrective action
Axis 4

30102
30202
30302
30402
Set correctly.
Connect correctly
capacity.
Reduce the load.

Load inertia ratio

30112
30212
30312

30412
Acceleration time
12, 13
162, 163 312, 313 462, 463
36, 37
186, 187 336, 337 486, 487
38, 39
188, 189 338, 339 488, 489
40, 41
190, 191 340, 341 490, 491
14, 15
164, 165 314, 315 464, 465
42, 43
192, 193 342, 343 492, 493
44, 45
194, 195 344, 345 494, 495
46, 47
196, 197 346, 347 496, 497

or
constant.
Deceleration time
Change servomotor.

amplifier.

cables.

amplifier.
15 - 81
15 TROUBLESHOOTING
Classifica
Error
tion of
code
errors
LED indicator
of servo
amplifier
IFU
MELSEC-Q
Error name
Description
Cause
DRU
Don't using the regenerative brake
option.
resistor "setting value is "000 (not
used)".
2033
FA.33
Overvoltage
Converter bus voltage

exceeded 400VDC.

or disconnected.

The SSCNET cable is
disconnected.
Servo
amplifier
errors
The SSCNE cable fault.

2034
FA.34
CRC error
SSCNET cable communication

fault
Noise has entered the SSCNE

cable.
disconnected.
The same No. exists in the interface
unit side axis setting.
2035
Command
@A.35# pulse
frequency error

cable.
Fault in the QD75M.
The SSCNET cable is
disconnected.
2036
FA.36
Transfer error
SSCNET cable or printed board The SSCNET cable fault.

is faulty.
disconnected.
Interface unit fault caused the IFU
2037
FA.37
IFU parameter
IFU parameter setting is wrong. There is a IFU parameter whose
error
value was set to outside the setting
range by QD75M.
15 - 82
15 TROUBLESHOOTING

Axis 1
Axis 2
Axis 3
Axis 4
MELSEC-Q
Check point
Corrective action
Use the regenerative brake option.

Set correctly.
30102
30202
30302
30402
Change lead.
Connect correctly.
Change base unit.

Connect correctly.

Set correctly.

Change the QD75M.

Change the IFU parameter value to within the

setting range.
15 - 83
15 TROUBLESHOOTING
Classifica
Error
tion of
code
errors
LED indicator
of servo
amplifier
IFU
MELSEC-Q
Error name
Description
Cause
DRU
Drive unit fault caused the DRU
DRU
2037
@A.37# parameter
error
There is a DRU parameter whose

DRU parameter setting is wrong. value was set to outside the setting
range by QD75M.
2038
FA.38
DRU
adjustment
error
In some drive unit, the

parameter which requires all
axes to be set for the same
value differs from those of the
other axes.
There is a drive unit whose DRU

parameter Pr.102 or Pr.123
setting is different from others.
Air cooling fan of the drive unit
stops
Main circuit
2045
@A.45# device
Main circuit device overheat.
overheat
The power supply was turned on

and off continuously by overloaded
status.
Drive unit faulty.
40C.
Servo
amplifier
errors
2046
@A.46#
Servomotor
heated

actuated the thermal protector. Servomotor overloaded.
faulty.
drive unit.

causing hunting.
2050
@A.50# Overload 1
Load exceeded overload

protection characteristic of drive Collision with the machine.
unit.
Servomotor miswiring drive unit
Load ratio 200%: 10s or more terminals U, V, W phase do not
mach motor terminals U, V, W
phase.
15 - 84
15 TROUBLESHOOTING

Axis 1
Axis 2
Axis 3
MELSEC-Q
Check point
Corrective action
Axis 4
Change the DRU parameter value to within the

setting range.

30102
30202
30302
30402
Set correctly.
Optional function 1
30123
30223
30323
30423
Change the drive unit or cooling fan.

The drive method is reviewed.

Change the drive unit or cooling fan.
is 0 to 40C.
Reduce load.
Reduce load.
Auto tuning
30108
30208
30308

30408
Servo response
30109
30209
30309
30409
31
181
331
481

Connect correctly.

Change servomotor.
faulty.
15 - 85
15 TROUBLESHOOTING
Classifica
Error
tion of
code
errors
LED indicator
of servo
amplifier
IFU
MELSEC-Q
Error name
Description
Cause
DRU
terminals U, V, W phase don't mach
motor terminals U, V, W phase.
2051
@A.51# Overload 2
Machine collision or the like

caused max. output current to
flow successively for several
seconds.
Servomotor locked:
0.3s or more
During rotation:
2.5s or more
Wrong connection of servomotor.

Drive unit's output U, V, W do not
match servo motor's input U, V, W.

causing hunting.
Servo
amplifier
errors
constant too small.
2052
Droop pulse of the deviation

counter reached or exceeded
@A.52# Error excessive setting value (Initial value: 2
rotation) of the parameter
" Pr.131 ".

voltage.
Servomotor shaft was rotated by

external force.
15 - 86
15 TROUBLESHOOTING

Axis 1
Axis 2
Axis 3
MELSEC-Q
Check point
Corrective action
Axis 4

31
181
331
481

Connect correctly.
Connect correctly.
Auto tuning
30108
30208
30308
30408
Servo response
30109
30209
30309
30409

Change servomotor.
faulty.
Acceleration time
12, 13
162, 163 312, 313 462, 463
36, 37
186, 187 336, 337 486, 487
38, 39
188, 189 338, 339 488, 489
40, 41
190, 191 340, 341 490, 491

constant.
Deceleration time
14, 15
164, 165 314, 315 464, 465
42, 43
192, 193 342, 343 492, 493
44, 45
194, 195 344, 345 494, 495
46, 47
196, 197 346, 347 496, 497

Torque limit value
26
176
326
476

86
236
386
536

1552
1652
1752
1852

Positioning gain 1
30113
30213
30313

operation.
30413
Torque limit value

26
176
326
476

Reduce load.

86
236
386
536

1552
1652
1752
1852
15 - 87
15 TROUBLESHOOTING
Classifica
Error
tion of
code
errors
2052
LED indicator
of servo
amplifier
IFU
MELSEC-Q
Error name
Description
Cause
DRU
Droop pulse of the deviation
counter reached or exceeded
@A.52# Error excessive setting value (Initial value: 2
rotation) of the parameter
Pr.131 .

terminals U, V, W phase do not
mach motor terminals U, V, W
phase.
Drive unit having large load is

adjacent.
2053
FA.53
Multiple axis
overload
Drive unit whose effective load

factor is 85% or more is
Servo system is instable and
adjacent.
hunting.
Servo
amplifier
errors
Encoder cable and power cable

(U, V, W phase) coming out of one
drive unit are connected to the
incorrect servomotor.
2054
2090
FA.54
FA.8A
Drive unit
alarm
Alarm occurred in one or more

axes of drive units installed to
the base unit.
Serial communication stopped

Serial
communication for longer than the time set in
IFU parameter Pr.1 .
time-out
Remove the alarm causes of all

drive units where alarm has
occurred.
Communication cable fault. (Wire
break or short circuit)
Communication cycle is longer than
the IFU parameter Pr.1
setting.
Protocol is incorrect.
2086
FA.8E

Serial
communication between the
communication interface unit and
error
communication devices
15 - 88

15 TROUBLESHOOTING

Axis 1
Axis 2
Axis 3
MELSEC-Q
Check point
Axis 4

31
181
331
Corrective action
481
Connect correctly.
Change the slot of the drive unit whose load is
large.
Reduce the load.
Reexamine the operation pattern.
Use a servomotor whose output is large.

Auto tuning
30108
30208
30308
30408

Servo response
30109
30209
30309
30409
Connect correctly.
Remove the alarm causes of all drive units where

alarm has occurred.
Set the IFU parameter value correctly.
IFU parameter Pr.1 .

Correct the protocol.
Change the communication device (e.g. personal

computer).
15 - 89
15 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q
15.3 List of warnings

The following table shows the warning details and remedies to be taken when a
warning occurs.
15.3.1 QD75 detection warning

Classification Warning
of warnings
code
Common
warnings
JOG
operation
warnings
Warning name
Warning
Operation status at warning

occurrence
000
(Normal status)
100
Start during
operation
104
The restart command is issued when

Restart not possible the axis operation status is not
"Stopped".
109
Teaching in BUSY
110
Less than minimum

The system is controlled with the
The overridden speed becomes 0.
speed
currently executing unit of 1.
The start request is issued while the

axis is BUSY.
The warning is issued for the axis

The teaching request is issued while
designated at the time of the teaching
the axis is BUSY.
request.
111
In PLC READY
The request for writing to the flash

ROM is issued when the PLC
READY is turned ON (at the time of
teaching request).
112
Illegal override
value
Controlled at a setting value of

A value other than 1 to 300 is set for 0 : 100.
the override value.
Controlled at a setting value of
301 or over : 300.
113
Outside new torque A value other than 1 to 500 is set for

The torque change is not carried out.
value range
the new torque value.
The warning for axis 1 is issued.
The command speed is below the

bias speed at start.
Operate by the bias speed at start.
Programming error between QD75P
and QD75M.
114
Below bias speed
300
The speed change request is issued

Speed change
during deceleration stop with JOG
The speed change is not carried out.
during deceleration
start signal OFF.
301
When the speed exceeds the JOG

speed limit, the JOG operation is
carried out with the JOG speed limit
value.
While the speed is limited by the
JOG speed limit value, the "Speed
limiting flag" is turned ON.
JOG speed limit

value
The new speed value exceeds the

JOG speed limit value when the
speed is changed during operation.
15 - 90
15 TROUBLESHOOTING

address
MELSEC-Q
Set range
Remedy
Normalize the start request ON timing.
1503 1603 1703 1803
<Restart command>
1: Restart
1548 1648 1748 1848

1549 1649 1749 1849
<Teaching data selection>

0, 1
<Teaching positioning data No.>
1 to 600
1513 1613 1713 1813
<Positioning operation speed

override>
1 to 300
1513 1613 1713 1813
<Positioning operation speed

override>
1 to 300
1525 1625 1725 1825
<New torque value>

1 to [Torque limit set value]
176
326
476
Carry out the teaching request when the axis is not

BUSY. (Refer to Section 12.7.4)
Prevent the overridden speed from being reduced to 0.
None (If the PLC READY signal (Y0) is turned OFF,
respond to the teaching write request).
Same as warning code 109
26
Normalize the start request ON timing.

(Do not issue the restart command when the axis
operation is not stopped.)
Set a value within the setting range.
<Torque limit set value>

1 to 500

for command speed
<Command speed>
1 to 10000000 [PLS/s]
Re-set the command speed/bias speed at start so that
1 to 2000000000 [mm/min or another] the command speed is equal to or larger than the bias
speed at start.
Bias speed at start
<Bias speed at start>
Set 0 for the bias speed.
0
[PLS/s]
6
156 306
456
0
[mm/min
or
another]
7
157 307
457
1516 1616 1716 1816
<Speed change request>

1: Speed change is requested
Do not carry out the JOG speed change during

deceleration with the JOG start signal OFF.
New speed value
0 to 10000000 [PLS/s]
1514 1614 1714 1814 0 to 2000000000 [mm/min or another]
1515 1615 1715 1815
48
49
198
199
348
349
498
499
1 to 10000000 [PLS/s]
1 to 2000000000 [mm/min or
another]
15 - 91
Bring the set value into the setting range.
15 TROUBLESHOOTING
of warnings
code
Manual pulse
generator
operation
warnings
Positioning
operation
warnings
Warning name
MELSEC-Q
Warning

occurrence
401
When input magnification is set at

Outside manual
The manual pulse generator 1 pulse 101 or higher: Re-set to 100.
pulse generator
input magnification is set at 0 or 101
input magnification
When input magnification is set at 0:
or higher.
range
Re-set to 1.
500
Deceleration/stop
speed change
The speed change request is issued

The speed change is not carried out.
during deceleration stop.
501
Speed limit value

over
The new value exceeds the speed

limit value when the speed is
changed during operation.
503
M code ON signal
ON start
The M code ON signal is turned ON

Continue executing the positioning
when the positioning data is
data.
executed.
505
No operation
termination setting
In the positioning by block starting,

the 50th point of the positioning start The operation is terminated.
data is set to CONTINUE.
506
FOR to NEXT nest

construction
FOR to NEXT is nested.
508
Speed-position
switching (during
acceleration) signal
ON
The switching signal for speedposition switching control (INC

mode) is turned ON during
acceleration.
509
When a command speed is

changed:
Change to a value as near a new
At a continuous operation interrupt
speed value as possible.
request, the distance required
deceleration stop is not long
When a target position is changed:
enough.
Insufficient
Adjust the speed to a value as
remaining distance At a speed change request, the
near the command speed as
possible, and then change to a
remaining distance is shorter than
target position.
the distance required for speed
change.
(When the operation pattern is a
continuous path control, ignore the
operations stated above.)
511
Step not possible
Code 1 is set for the step start

information when the step is outside The step will not start.
standby.
512
Illegal external
command function
The detailed parameter 2 "External Even if the external command signal

command function selection" setting is turned ON, the system will not
range is exceeded.
perform anything.
513
Insufficient
The movement amount is not large
movement amount enough for automatic deceleration.
15 - 92
The speed is controlled with the

speed limit value.
The "speed limiting flag" is turned
ON.
The operation is continued.
The system stops immediately after it

reaches the positioning address.
15 TROUBLESHOOTING

address
MELSEC-Q
Set range
1522 1622 1722 1822

1523 1623 1723 1823
<Manual pulse generator 1 pulse

input magnification>
1 to 100
1516 1616 1716 1816
<Speed change request>

1: Speed change is requested
Remedy
Set the manual pulse generator 1 pulse input

magnification to within the setting range.
Do not carry out the speed change during deceleration
with a stop command, during stoppage, or during
automatic deceleration with position control.
New speed value

0 to 10000000 [PLS/s]
1514 1614 1714 1814 0 to 2000000000 [mm/min or another]
1515 1615 1715 1815
Speed limit value
10
11
160
161
310
311
460
461
1504 1604 1704 1804

Set the new speed value to a range of 0 to "speed limit

value".
1 to 10000000 [PLS/s]
1 to 2000000000 [mm/min or
another]
<M code OFF request>

Normalize the ON and OFF timings of the "M code
1: M code ON signal is turned OFF OFF request". (Refer to Section 12.7.3)
<Operation pattern>
Set the operation termination to the 50th point.
00: Positioning end
01: Continuous positioning control (Refer to Chapter 10)
Make 1 nest construction for FOR to NEXT.

Do not turn ON the speed-position switching signal

during acceleration.
Give a request at the position where there is an

enough remaining distance.
1546 1646 1746 1846
62
212
362
512

<Step start information>

1: Step is continued
2: Re-start is carried out
<External command function
selection>
0, 1, 2, 3
Do not set a "1" to the step start information when the

step is not in standby state. (Refer to Section 12.7.1)
Set the detailed parameter 2 "External command
function selection" to within the setting range.
Set a decelerating address or a movement amount to
the positioning data.
15 - 93
15 TROUBLESHOOTING
of warnings
code
514
Positioning
operation
warnings
Warning name
Outside command
speed range
MELSEC-Q
Warning
The command speed exceeds the

speed limit.

occurrence
The command speed is controlled at

the "speed limit value".
The "speed limiting flag" turns ON.
516
Illegal teaching data The positioning data No. is set

No.
Teaching is not carried out when the

set value is 0 or 601 or more.
(A "0" is canceled by the QD75M
automatically even when a "0" or
"601" or more is set.)
517
Illegal teaching data The teaching data selection set

selection
value is outside the setting range.
Teaching is not carried out.
518
A target position change request

was given for the control system
other than ABS1 and INC1.
The target position change request
is turned ON during continuous
path control.
Target position
The target position change is not
change not possible A new target position address is
carried out.
outside the software stroke limit
range.
A target position change request
was given during deceleration to a
stop.
15 - 94
15 TROUBLESHOOTING

address
For command speed,
refer to Section 5.3
MELSEC-Q
Set range
Remedy
1 to 1000000 [PLS/s]
1 to 2000000000 [mm/min or another]
Speed limit value
10
11
160
161
310
311
460
461
1 to 10000000 [PLS/s]
1 to 2000000000 [mm/min or
another]
1549 1649 1749 1849
<Teaching positioning data No.>

1 to 600
1548 1648 1748 1848
<Teaching data selection>

0, 1
1538 1638 1738 1838
<Target position change request

flag>
1: Target position change request
15 - 95
Set the command speed to within the setting range.
Set the positioning data No. to within the setting range.
Set the teaching data selection set value to within the

setting range.
Do not turn ON the target position change request in

the following cases.
A control system other than ABS1, and INC1 is used.
During deceleration stop. An operating pattern
"continuous path control" is used.
When the target position change address is outside
the stroke limit, correct the target position change
address. (Refer to Section 12.7.5)
15 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q
15.3.2 MR-H-BN detection warning

LED
Classifica
Warning display of
tion of
code the servo
warnings
amplifier
Warning name
Warning
Cause
Battery cable is open.

2092
92
Open battery
cable warning
Absolute position detection

system battery voltage is low.
Battery voltage dropped to 2.8VDC or

less
Droop pulses remaining are greater
than the in-position range setting.
2096
96
OPR setting error OPR was not performed

warning
successfully.
OPR was executed during operation

command.
Creep speed high.
2102
Voltage of battery for absolute

position detection system
reduced.
9F
Battery warning
E0
There is a possibility that

regenerative power may
Excessive
exceed permissible
regenerative load
regenerative power of built-in
warning
Regenerative power increased to 85%

or more of permissible regenerative
power of built-in regenerative brake
resistor or regenerative brake option.
2141
E1

overload alarm 1 (error code:
Over load warning
2050) or 2 (error code: 2051)
may occur.
Load increased to 85% or more of

over load alarm 1 (error code: 2050)
or 2 (error code: 2051) occurrence
level.
2144
E4
Parameter alarm
warning
Parameter has been set to a value

that is out of setting range from
QD75M.
2146
E6
Servo emergency
EMG1-SG is open.
stop warning
2140
Servo
amplifier
warnigs
Parameter is out of setting

range.
Battery voltage fell to 3.2VDC or less.
Emergency stop was made valid.

(EMG1-SG was opened.)
EMG (6 pin) or EMG* (16 pin) in the
SSCNET cable is open.
2147
E7
Controller
emergency stop
warning
An emergency stop signal is

input to the QD75M.
Fault of connector in the servo

amplifier.
Fault of connector in the QD75.
A "watchdog error" will be occurred in
the QD75.
2149
E9
Main circuit of
warning
Servo ON signal is turned ON

while the main circuit power is
off.
15 - 96
Servo ON signal is turned ON while

the main circuit power is off.
15 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q

address
Servo
amplifier
status of
Axis 1 Axis 2 Axis 3 Axis 4 the warning
occurrence.
Check point
Corrective action
Repair cable or battery changed.
Change battery.
In-position range
Remove the cause of droop pulse occurrence.
30120 30220 30320 30420
OPR wasn't executed during operation command.
Creep speed
76, 77
226,
227
376,
377
526,
527
Reduce creep speed.
Servo ON
continued
Change battery.
Reduce frequency of positioning.
Call the status display Change regenerative brake option for the one with
and check regenerative larger capacity.
load ratio.
Reduce load.
Refer to error code
(2050, 2051) (Refer to
Section 15.2.3)
Refer to Section
5.2.7 to 5.2.10
Refer to error code (2050, 2051)

Set the parameter properly.
Servo emergency stop

selection
Check for safety and release the emergency stop.
30123 30223 30323 30423
Check continuity status

of the SSCNET cable
Change servo amplifier.
Servo OFF
Change QD75.
Switch on main circuit power.
15 - 97
15 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q
15.3.3 MR-J2-B detection warning

LED
Classifica
Warning display of
tion of
code the servo
warnings
amplifier
Warning name
Warning
Cause

2092
92
Open battery
cable warning


less
2096
96

warning
successfully.

command.
Creep speed high.
E0

Excessive
exceed permissible
regenerative load
warning

2141
E1

Over load warning
2050)or 2 (error code: 2051)
may occur.

level.
2143
E3
Absolute position Absolute position encoder

counter warning pulses faulty.
Noise entered the encoder.
2144
E4
Parameter
warning
Parameter value set from QD75

controller is outside setting range.
2146
E6
Servo emergency
EMG1-SG is open.
stop warning
2140
Servo
amplifier
warnings
Parameter outside setting

range.
Fault of the encoder.

2147
E7
Controller
emergency stop
warning

input to the QD75.

amplifier.
the QD75.
2149
E9
Main circuit of
warning

off.
15 - 98

15 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q

address
Servo
amplifier
status of
occurrence.
Check point
Corrective action
Change battery.
In-position range
30120 30220 30320 30420
Creep speed
76, 77
226,
227
376,
377
Reduce creep speed.
526,
527
Servo ON
continued

Call the status display
Change regenerative brake option for the one with
and check regenerative
larger capacity.
load ratio.
Reduce load.
Refer to error code

(2050, 2051) (Refer to
Section 15.2.3)
Change servomotor.
Refer to Section
5.2.7 to 5.2.10
Refer to error code (2050, 2051) (Refer to Section

15.2.3)

selection
30123 30223 30323 30423

of the SSCNET cable
Servo OFF
Change QD75.
15 - 99
15 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q
15.3.4 MR-J2S-B detection warning

LED
Classifica
Warning display of
tion of
code the servo
warnings
amplifier
Warning name
Warning
Cause

2092
92
Open battery
cable warning


less
2096
96

warning
successfully.

command.
Creep speed high.
2102
Battery warning
E0

Excessive
exceed permissible
regenerative load
warning

2141
E1

Over load warning
2050) or 2 (error code: 2051)
may occur.

level.
2143
E3
Absolute position Absolute position encoder

counter warning pulses faulty.
2144
E4
Parameter
warning

2146
E6
Servo emergency
EMG1-SG is open.
stop warning
2140
Servo
amplifier
warnings
Voltage of battery for absolute

position detection system
reduced.
9F

range.

2147
E7
Controller
emergency stop
warning

input to the QD75.

amplifier.
the QD75.
2149
E9
Main circuit of
warning

off.
15 - 100

15 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q

address
Servo
amplifier
status of
occurrence.
Check point
Corrective action
Change battery.
In-position range
30120 30220 30320 30420
Creep speed
76, 77
226,
227
376,
377
526,
527
Reduce creep speed.
Change battery.
Servo ON
continued

Call the status display
Change regenerative brake option for the one with
and check regenerative
larger capacity.
load ratio.
Reduce load.
Refer to error code

(2050, 2051) (Refer to
Section 15.2.3)
Change servomotor.
Refer to Section
5.2.7 to 5.2.10

15.2.3)

selection
30123 30223 30323 30423

of the SSCNET cable
Servo OFF
Change QD75.
15 - 101
15 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q
15.3.5 MR-J2-Jr detection warning

LED
Classifica
Warning display of
tion of
code the servo
warnings
amplifier
Warning name
Warning
2141
E1

Over load warning
2050)or 2 (error code: 2051)
may occur.
2144
E4
Parameter
warning
2146
E6
Servo emergency
EMG1-SG is open.
stop warning
Servo
amplifier
warnings

range.
Cause

level.
Parameter value set from QD75M
2147
E7
Controller
emergency stop
warning

input to the QD75.

amplifier.
the QD75.
2149
E9
Main circuit of
warning

off.
15 - 102

15 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q

address
Servo
amplifier
status of
occurrence.
Check point
Refer to error code

(2050, 2051) (Refer to
Servo ON Section 15.2.3)
continued
Refer to Section
5.2.7 to 5.2.10
Corrective action

15.2.3)

selection
30123 30223 30323 30423

of the SSCNET cable
Servo OFF
Change QD75.
15 - 103
15 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q
15.3.6 MR-J2M-B detection warning

@ in the indication field denotes the slot number of the base unit and # the axis
number of the servo amplifier.
Classifica
Warning
tion of
code
warnings
LED display of
the servo
Warning name
amplifier
IFU
2092
Warning
Cause
DRU
Open battery
@A.92#
system battery voltage is
cable warning
low.

less
Encoder cable is open.
2096
@A.96#
OPR setting
error warning
OPR was not performed

successfully.

command.
Creep speed high.
2102
Servo
amplifier
warnings
FA.9F
Battery
warning
Voltage of battery for

absolute position detection
system reduced.
Excessive
regenerative
load warning

exceed permissible
regenerative brake resistor
or regenerative brake option.

Over load
warning

2050) or 2 (error code: 2051)
may occur.

level.
2140
FA.E0
2141
@A.E1#
Absolute
position
@A.E3#
counter
warning
2143
2144
@A.E4#
2146
FA.E6
Absolute position encoder

pulses faulty.

Parameter
warning

range.

Servo
emergency
stop warning
EMG1-SG is open.

2147
FA.E7
Controller
emergency
stop warning

amplifier.
input to the QD75.
the QD75.
2149
FA.E9
Servo ON signal is turned

Main circuit of
ON while the main circuit
warning
power is off.
15 - 104

15 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q

address
Servo
amplifier
status of
occurrence.
Check point
Corrective action
Change battery.
Change encoder cable.
In-position range
30120 30220 30320 30420
Creep speed
76, 77
226,
227
376,
377
526,
527
Reduce creep speed.
Change battery unit.

Servo ON
continued

Call the status display Change regenerative brake option for the one with
and check regenerative larger capacity.
load ratio.
Reduce load.
Refer to error code
(2050, 2051) (Refer to
Section 15.2.3)

15.2.3)
Change servomotor.
Refer to Section
5.2.7 to 5.2.10

selection
30123 30223 30323 30423

of the SSCNET cable
Servo OFF
Change QD75.
15 - 105
15 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q
15.4 LED display functions

The states of QD75 and each axis control can be confirmed by the LEDs located on
the front panel of the QD75 main unit.
QD75M4
RUN
AX1
AX2
AX3
AX4
ERR
Each axis can be monitored by the states of the LEDs.

The operation and indications of the LEDs are as shown below.
Details of indication
Goes OFF
Goes ON
Flashes
RUN
ERR
RUN
ERR
RUN
ERR
RUN
ERR
RUN
ERR
RUN
ERR
RUN
ERR
Points to be
confirmed
AX1
AX2 Extinguishment of
AX3 RUN LED
AX4
Error
Remedy
The hardware is
If the RUN LED does not light up even when the
faulty or watch dog power is turned ON, the module may be out of order.
timer error occurs. Replace the module with a new one.
AX1
AX2 Lighting of RUN LED, The module is
normal.
ERR LED
AX4
AX1
AX2
AX3 Lighting of ERR LED System error
AX4
An operation condition setting error or installation PLC

CPU type error occurs.
(The setting and PLC CPU type are outside the
specification range.) Set the PLC CPU type to a one
contained in the specification.
AX1
AX3 AX1 to AX4 LEDs
AX4
During axis stop,

during axis standby
AX1
AX2 Lighting of AX1
AX3 (Same even if the
other axis is lit)
AX4
During axis
operation
AX1
AX2
AX3
AX4
Flashing of ERR LED

Flashing of AX1 LED
Axis error
(Same even if the
other axis flashes)
AX1
AX2
AX3 Lighting of all LEDs
AX4
This lights up from the positioning start until the

positioning is completed, stopped temporarily, or
stopped by error (corresponding at a ratio of 1 : 1 to
BUSY signals).
Check the error observed on the buffer memory batch
processing monitor of a peripheral device and correct
the applicable parameters and positioning data.
The hardware is
faulty
15 - 106
The module comes out of order. Replace the module

with a new one.
Appendices
Appendix 1 Functions .........................................................................................................Appendix- 3
Appendix 1.1 Multiple CPU correspond function..........................................................Appendix- 3
Appendix 1.2 The combination of software package for QD75 and QCPU ................Appendix- 3
Appendix 2 Positioning data (No.1 to 600) List of buffer memory addresses .....................Appendix- 4
Appendix 3 Connection with servo amplifiers.......................................................................Appendix- 28
Appendix 3.1 Connection of SSCNET cables ..............................................................Appendix- 28
Appendix 3.2 Wiring of SSCNET cables ......................................................................Appendix- 30
Appendix 4 Connection with external device connector ......................................................Appendix- 34
Appendix 4.1 Connector................................................................................................Appendix- 34
Appendix 4.2 Wiring of manual pulse generator ..........................................................Appendix- 36
Appendix 5 Comparisons with conventional positioning modules .......................................Appendix- 37
Appendix 5.1 Comparisons with QD75P model...........................................................Appendix- 37
Appendix 5.2 Comparisons with A1SD75M1/A1SD75M2/ A1SD75M3 models .........Appendix- 38
Appendix 6 Positioning control troubleshooting ...................................................................Appendix- 57
Appendix 7 List of buffer memory addresses .......................................................................Appendix- 63
Appendix 8 External dimension drawing ..............................................................................Appendix- 75
Appendix
Appendix - 1
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
MEMO
Appendix - 2
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
Appendix 1 Functions
Appendix 1.1 Multiple CPU correspond function
Refer to the QCPU (Q Mode) User's Manual (Function Explanation/Program
Fundamentals). (SH-080038)
Appendix 1.2 The combination of software package for QD75 and QCPU
Refer to the GX Configurator-QP Operating Manual. (SH-080172)
Appendix - 3
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
Appendix 2 Positioning data (No.1 to 600)

List of buffer memory addresses
(1) For axis 1
PosiData tioning M
No. identi- code
fier
Dwell
time
Command
speed
Low- Highorder order
Positioning
address
Loworder
Highorder
Arc data
PosiData tioning M
No. identi- code
fier
Dwell
time
Command
speed
Positioning
address
Loworder
Highorder
Arc data
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
2000
2010
2020
2030
2040
2050
2060
2070
2080
2090
2001
2011
2021
2031
2041
2051
2061
2071
2081
2091
2002
2012
2022
2032
2042
2052
2062
2072
2082
2092
2004
2014
2024
2034
2044
2054
2064
2074
2084
2094
2005
2015
2025
2035
2045
2055
2065
2075
2085
2095
2006
2016
2026
2036
2046
2056
2066
2076
2086
2096
2007
2017
2027
2037
2047
2057
2067
2077
2087
2097
2008
2018
2028
2038
2048
2058
2068
2078
2088
2098
2009
2019
2029
2039
2049
2059
2069
2079
2089
2099
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
2500
2510
2520
2530
2540
2550
2560
2570
2580
2590
2501
2511
2521
2531
2541
2551
2561
2571
2581
2591
2502
2512
2522
2532
2542
2552
2562
2572
2582
2592
2504
2514
2524
2534
2544
2554
2564
2574
2584
2594
2505
2515
2525
2535
2545
2555
2565
2575
2585
2595
2506
2516
2526
2536
2546
2556
2566
2576
2586
2596
2507
2517
2527
2537
2547
2557
2567
2577
2587
2597
2508
2518
2528
2538
2548
2558
2568
2578
2588
2598
2509
2519
2529
539
2549
2559
2569
2579
2589
2599
11
12
13
14
15
2100
2110
2120
2130
2140
2101
2111
2121
2131
2141
2102
2112
2122
2132
2142
2104
2114
2124
2134
2144
2105
2115
2125
2135
2145
2106
2116
2126
2136
2146
2107
2117
2127
2137
2147
2108
2118
2128
2138
2148
2109
2119
2129
2139
2149
61
62
63
64
65
2600
2610
2620
2630
2640
2601
2611
2621
2631
2641
2602
2612
2622
2632
2642
2604
2614
2624
2634
2644
2605
2615
2625
2635
2645
2606
2616
2626
2636
2646
2607
2617
2627
2637
2647
2608
2618
2628
2638
2648
2609
2619
2629
2639
2649
16
17
18
19
20
2150
2160
2170
2180
2190
2151
2161
2171
2181
2191
2152
2162
2172
2182
2192
2154
2164
2174
2184
2194
2155
2165
2175
2185
2195
2156
2166
2176
2186
2196
2157
2167
2177
2187
2197
2158
2168
2178
2188
2198
2159
2169
2179
2189
2199
66
67
68
69
70
2650
2660
2670
2680
2690
2651
2661
2671
2681
2691
2652
2662
2672
2682
2692
2654
2664
2674
2684
2694
2655
2665
2675
2685
2695
2656
2666
2676
2686
2696
2657
2667
2677
2687
2697
2658
2668
2678
2688
2698
2659
2669
2679
2689
2699
21
22
23
24
25
2200
2210
2220
2230
2240
2201
2211
2221
2231
2241
2202
2212
2222
2232
2242
2204
2214
2224
2234
2244
2205
2215
2225
2235
2245
2206
2216
2226
2236
2246
2207
2217
2227
2237
2247
2208
2218
2228
2238
2248
2209
2219
2229
2239
2249
71
72
73
74
75
2700
2710
2720
2730
2740
2701
2711
2721
2731
2741
2702
2712
2722
2732
2742
2704
2714
2724
2734
2744
2705
2715
2725
2735
2745
2706
2716
2726
2736
2746
2707
2717
2727
2737
2747
2708
2718
2728
2738
2748
2709
2719
2729
2739
2749
26
27
28
29
30
2250
2260
2270
2280
2290
2251
2261
2271
2281
2291
2252
2262
2272
2282
2292
2254
2264
2274
2284
2294
2255
2265
2275
2285
2295
2256
2266
2276
2286
2296
2257
2267
2277
2287
2297
2258
2268
2278
2288
2298
2259
2269
2279
2289
2299
76
77
78
79
80
2750
2760
2770
2780
2790
2751
2761
2771
2781
2791
2752
2762
2772
2782
2792
2754
2764
2774
2784
2794
2755
2765
2775
2785
2795
2756
2766
2776
2786
2796
2757
2767
2777
2787
2797
2758
2768
2778
2788
2798
2759
2769
2779
2789
2799
31
32
33
34
35
2300
2310
2320
2330
2340
2301
2311
2321
2331
2341
2302
2312
2322
2332
2342
2304
2314
2324
2334
2344
2305
2315
2325
2335
2345
2306
2316
2326
2336
2346
2307
2317
2327
2337
2347
2308
2318
2328
2338
2348
2309
2319
2329
2339
2349
81
82
83
84
85
2800
2810
2820
2830
2840
2801
2811
2821
2831
2841
2802
2812
2822
2832
2842
2804
2814
2824
2834
2844
2805
2815
2825
2835
2845
2806
2816
2826
2836
2846
2807
2817
2827
2837
2847
2808
2818
2828
2838
2848
2809
2819
2829
2839
2849
36
37
38
39
40
2350
2360
2370
2380
2390
2351
2361
2371
2381
2391
2352
2362
2372
2382
2392
2354
2364
2374
2384
2394
2355
2365
2375
2385
2395
2356
2366
2376
2386
2396
2357
2367
2377
2387
2397
2358
2368
2378
2388
2398
2359
2369
2379
2389
2399
86
87
88
89
90
2850
2860
2870
2880
2890
2851
2861
2871
2881
2891
2852
2862
2872
2882
2892
2854
2864
2874
2884
2894
2855
2865
2875
2885
2895
2856
2866
2876
2886
2896
2857
2867
2877
2887
2897
2858
2868
2878
2888
2898
2859
2869
2879
2889
2899
41
42
43
44
45
2400
2410
2420
2430
2440
2401
2411
2421
2431
2441
2402
2412
2422
2432
2442
2404
2414
2424
2434
2444
2405
2415
2425
2435
2445
2406
2416
2426
2436
2446
2407
2417
2427
2437
2447
2408
2418
2428
2438
2448
2409
2419
2429
2439
2449
91
92
93
94
95
2900
2910
2920
2930
2940
2901
2911
2921
2931
2941
2902
2912
2922
2932
2942
2904
2914
2924
2934
2944
2905
2915
2925
2935
2945
2906
2916
2926
2936
2946
2907
2917
2927
2937
2947
2908
2918
2928
2938
2948
2909
2919
2929
2939
2949
46
47
48
49
50
2450
2460
2470
2480
2490
2451
2461
2471
2481
2491
2452
2462
2472
2482
2492
2454
2464
2474
2484
2494
2455
2465
2475
2485
2495
2456
2466
2476
2486
2496
2457
2467
2477
2487
2497
2458
2468
2478
2488
2498
2459
2469
2479
2489
2499
96
97
98
99
100
2950
2960
2970
2980
2990
2951
2961
2971
2981
2991
2952
2962
2972
2982
2992
2954
2964
2974
2984
2994
2955
2965
2975
2985
2995
2956
2966
2976
2986
2996
2957
2967
2977
2987
2997
2958
2968
2978
2988
2998
2959
2969
2979
2989
2999
Appendix - 4
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
(1) For axis 1
PosiData tioning M
No. identi- code
fier
Command
Positioning
Arc data
Dwell
speed
address
time Low- High- Low- High- Low- Highorder order order order order order
PosiData tioning M
No. identi- code
fier
Command
Positioning
Arc data
Dwell
speed
address
101
102
103
104
105
3000
3010
3020
3030
3040
3001
3011
3021
3031
3041
3002
3012
3022
3032
3042
3004
3014
3024
3034
3044
3005
3015
3025
3035
3045
3006
3016
3026
3036
3046
3007
3017
3027
3037
3047
3008
3018
3028
3038
3048
3009
3019
3029
3039
3049
151
152
153
154
155
3500
3510
3520
3530
3540
3501
3511
3521
3531
3541
3502
3512
3522
3532
3542
3504
3514
3524
3534
3544
3505
3515
3525
3535
3545
3506
3516
3526
3536
3546
3507
3517
3527
3537
3547
3508
3518
3528
3538
3548
3509
3519
3529
3539
3549
106
107
108
109
110
3050
3060
3070
3080
3090
3051
3061
3071
3081
3091
3052
3062
3072
3082
3092
3054
3064
3074
3084
3094
3055
3065
3075
3085
3095
3056
3066
3076
3086
3096
3057
3067
3077
3087
3097
3058
3068
3078
3088
3098
3059
3069
3079
3089
3099
156
157
158
159
160
3550
3560
3570
3580
3590
3551
3561
3571
3581
3591
3552
3562
3572
3582
3592
3554
3564
3574
3584
3594
3555
3565
3575
3585
3595
3556
3566
3576
3586
3596
3557
3567
3577
3587
3597
3558
3568
3578
3588
3598
3559
3569
3579
3589
3599
111
112
113
114
115
3100
3110
3120
3130
3140
3101
3111
3121
3131
3141
3102
3112
3122
3132
3142
3104
3114
3124
3134
3144
3105
3115
3125
3135
3145
3106
3116
3126
3136
3146
3107
3117
3127
3137
3147
3108
3118
3128
3138
3148
3109
3119
3129
3139
3149
161
162
163
164
165
3600
3610
3620
3630
3640
3601
3611
3621
3631
3641
3602
3612
3622
3632
3642
3604
3614
3624
3634
3644
3605
3615
3625
3635
3645
3606
3616
3626
3636
3646
3607
3617
3627
3637
3647
3608
3618
3628
3638
3648
3609
3619
3629
3639
3649
116
117
118
119
120
3150
3160
3170
3180
3190
3151
3161
3171
3181
3191
3152
3162
3172
3182
3192
3154
3164
3174
3184
3194
3155
3165
3175
3185
3195
3156
3166
3176
3186
3196
3157
3167
3177
3187
3197
3158
3168
3178
3188
3198
3159
3169
3179
3189
3199
166
167
168
169
170
3650
3660
3670
3680
3690
3651
3661
3671
3681
3691
3652
3662
3672
3682
3692
3654
3664
3674
3684
3694
3655
3665
3675
3685
3695
3656
3666
3676
3686
3696
3657
3667
3677
3687
3697
3658
3668
3678
3688
3698
3659
3669
3679
3689
3699
121
122
123
124
125
3200
3210
3220
3230
3240
3201
3211
3221
3231
3241
3202
3212
3222
3232
3242
3204
3214
3224
3234
3244
3205
3215
3225
3235
3245
3206
3216
3226
3236
3246
3207
3217
3227
3237
3247
3208
3218
3228
3238
3248
3209
3219
3229
3239
3249
171
172
173
174
175
3700
3710
3720
3730
3740
3701
3711
3721
3731
3741
3702
3712
3722
3732
3742
3704
3714
3724
3734
3744
3705
3715
3725
3735
3745
3706
3716
3726
3736
3746
3707
3717
3727
3737
3747
3708
3718
3728
3738
3748
3709
3719
3729
3739
3749
126
127
128
129
130
3250
3260
3270
3280
3290
3251
3261
3271
3281
3291
3252
3262
3272
3282
3292
3254
3264
3274
3284
3294
3255
3265
3275
3285
3295
3256
3266
3276
3286
3296
3257
3267
3277
3287
3297
3258
3268
3278
3288
3298
3259
3269
3279
3289
3299
176
177
178
179
180
3750
3760
3770
3780
3790
3751
3761
3771
3781
3791
3752
3762
3772
3782
3792
3754
3764
3774
3784
3794
3755
3765
3775
3785
3795
3756
3766
3776
3786
3796
3757
3767
3777
3787
3797
3758
3768
3778
3788
3798
3759
3769
3779
3789
3799
131
132
133
134
135
3300
3310
3320
3330
3340
3301
3311
3321
3331
3341
3302
3312
3322
3332
3342
3304
3314
3324
3334
3344
3305
3315
3325
3335
3345
3306
3316
3326
3336
3346
3307
3317
3327
3337
3347
3308
3318
3328
3338
3348
3309
3319
3329
3339
3349
181
182
183
184
185
3800
3810
3820
3830
3840
3801
3811
3821
3831
3841
3802
3812
3822
3832
3842
3804
3814
3824
3834
3844
3805
3815
3825
3835
3845
3806
3816
3826
3836
3846
3807
3817
3827
3837
3847
3808
3818
3828
3838
3848
3809
3819
3829
3839
3849
136
137
138
139
140
3350
3360
3370
3380
3390
3351
3361
3371
3381
3391
3352
3362
3372
3382
3392
3354
3364
3374
3384
3394
3355
3365
3375
3385
3395
3356
3366
3376
3386
3396
3357
3367
3377
3387
3397
3358
3368
3378
3388
3398
3359
3369
3379
3389
3399
186
187
188
189
190
3850
3860
3870
3880
3890
3851
3861
3871
3881
3891
3852
3862
3872
3882
3892
3854
3864
3874
3884
3894
3855
3865
3875
3885
3895
3856
3866
3876
3886
3896
3857
3867
3877
3887
3897
3858
3868
3878
3888
3898
3859
3869
3879
3889
3899
141
142
143
144
145
3400
3410
3420
3430
3440
3401
3411
3421
3431
3441
3402
3412
3422
3432
3442
3404
3414
3424
3434
3444
3405
3415
3425
3435
3445
3406
3416
3426
3436
3446
3407
3417
3427
3437
3447
3408
3418
3428
3438
3448
3409
3419
3429
3439
3449
191
192
193
194
195
3900
3910
3920
3930
3940
3901
3911
3921
3931
3941
3902
3912
3922
3932
3942
3904
3914
3924
3934
3944
3905
3915
3925
3935
3945
3906
3916
3926
3936
3946
3907
3917
3927
3937
3947
3908
3918
3928
3938
3948
3909
3919
3929
3939
3949
146
147
148
149
150
3450
3460
3470
3480
3490
3451
3461
3471
3481
3491
3452
3462
3472
3482
3492
3454
3464
3474
3484
3494
3455
3465
3475
3485
3495
3456
3466
3476
3486
3496
3457
3467
3477
3487
3497
3458
3468
3478
3488
3498
3459
3469
3479
3489
3499
196
197
198
199
200
3950
3960
3970
3980
3990
3951
3961
3971
3981
3991
3952
3962
3972
3982
3992
3954
3964
3974
3984
3994
3955
3965
3975
3985
3995
3956
3966
3976
3986
3996
3957
3967
3977
3987
3997
3958
3968
3978
3988
3998
3959
3969
3979
3989
3999
Appendix - 5
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
(1) For axis 1
PosiData tioning M
No. identi- code
fier
Command
Positioning
Arc data
Dwell
speed
address
PosiData tioning M
No. identi- code
fier
Command
Positioning
Arc data
Dwell
speed
address
201
202
203
204
205
4000
4010
4020
4030
4040
4001
4011
4021
4031
4041
4002
4012
4022
4032
4042
4004
4014
4024
4034
4044
4005
4015
4025
4035
4045
4006
4016
4026
4036
4046
4007
4017
4027
4037
4047
4008
4018
4028
4038
4048
4009
4019
4029
4039
4049
251
252
253
254
255
4500
4510
4520
4530
4540
4501
4511
4521
4531
4541
4502
4512
4522
4532
4542
4504
4514
4524
4534
4544
4505
4515
4525
4535
4545
4506
4516
4526
4536
4546
4507
4517
4527
4537
4547
4508
4518
4528
4538
4548
4509
4519
4529
4539
4549
206
207
208
209
210
4050
4060
4070
4080
4090
4051
4061
4071
4081
4091
4052
4062
4072
4082
4092
4054
4064
4074
4084
4094
4055
4065
4075
4085
4095
4056
4066
4076
4086
4096
4057
4067
4077
4087
4097
4058
4068
4078
4088
4098
4059
4069
4079
4089
4099
256
257
258
259
260
4550
4560
4570
4580
4590
4551
4561
4571
4581
4591
4552
4562
4572
4582
4592
4554
4564
4574
4584
4594
4555
4565
4575
4585
4595
4556
4566
4576
4586
4596
4557
4567
4577
4587
4597
4558
4568
4578
4588
4598
4559
4569
4579
4589
4599
211
212
213
214
215
4100
4110
4120
4130
4140
4101
4111
4121
4131
4141
4102
4112
4122
4132
4142
4104
4114
4124
4134
4144
4105
4115
4125
4135
4145
4106
4116
4126
4136
4146
4107
4117
4127
4137
4147
4108
4118
4128
4138
4148
4109
4119
4129
4139
4149
261
262
263
264
265
4600
4610
4620
4630
4640
4601
4611
4621
4631
4641
4602
4612
4622
4632
4642
4604
4614
4624
4634
4644
4605
4615
4625
4635
4645
4606
4616
4626
4636
4646
4607
4617
4627
4637
4647
4608
4618
4628
4638
4648
4609
4619
4629
4639
4649
216
217
218
219
220
4150
4160
4170
4180
4190
4151
4161
4171
4181
4191
4152
4162
4172
4182
4192
4154
4164
4174
4184
4194
4155
4165
4175
4185
4195
4156
4166
4176
4186
4196
4157
4167
4177
4187
4197
4158
4168
4178
4188
4198
4159
4169
4179
4189
4199
266
267
268
269
270
4650
4660
4670
4680
4690
4651
4661
4671
4681
4691
4652
4662
4672
4682
4692
4654
4664
4674
4684
4694
4655
4665
4675
4685
4695
4656
4666
4676
4686
4696
4657
4667
4677
4687
4697
4658
4668
4678
4688
4698
4659
4669
4679
4689
4699
221
222
223
224
225
4200
4210
4220
4230
4240
4201
4211
4221
4231
4241
4202
4212
4222
4232
4242
4204
4214
4224
4234
4244
4205
4215
4225
4235
4245
4206
4216
4226
4236
4246
4207
4217
4227
4237
4247
4208
4218
4228
4238
4248
4209
4219
4229
4239
4249
271
272
273
274
275
4700
4710
4720
4730
4740
4701
4711
4721
4731
4741
4702
4712
4722
4732
4742
4704
4714
4724
4734
4744
4705
4715
4725
4735
4745
4706
4716
4726
4736
4746
4707
4717
4727
4737
4747
4708
4718
4728
4738
4748
4709
4719
4729
4739
4749
226
227
228
229
230
4250
4260
4270
4280
4290
4251
4261
4271
4281
4291
4252
4262
4272
4282
4292
4254
4264
4274
4284
4294
4255
4265
4275
4285
4295
4256
4266
4276
4286
4296
4257
4267
4277
4287
4297
4258
4268
4278
4288
4298
4259
4269
4279
4289
4299
276
277
278
279
280
4750
4760
4770
4780
4790
4751
4761
4771
4781
4791
4752
4762
4772
4782
4792
4754
4764
4774
4784
4794
4755
4765
4775
4785
4795
4756
4766
4776
4786
4796
4757
4767
4777
4787
4797
4758
4768
4778
4788
4798
4759
4769
4779
4789
4799
231
232
233
234
235
4300
4310
4320
4330
4340
4301
4311
4321
4331
4341
4302
4312
4322
4332
4342
4304
4314
4324
4334
4344
4305
4315
4325
4335
4345
4306
4316
4326
4336
4346
4307
4317
4327
4337
4347
4308
4318
4328
4338
4348
4309
4319
4329
4339
4349
281
282
283
284
285
4800
4810
4820
4830
4840
4801
4811
4821
4831
4841
4802
4812
4822
4832
4842
4804
4814
4824
4834
4844
4805
4815
4825
4835
4845
4806
4816
4826
4836
4846
4807
4817
4827
4837
4847
4808
4818
4828
4838
4848
4809
4819
4829
4839
4849
236
237
238
239
240
4350
4360
4370
4380
4390
4351
4361
4371
4381
4391
4352
4362
4372
4382
4392
4354
4364
4374
4384
4394
4355
4365
4375
4385
4395
4356
4366
4376
4386
4396
4357
4367
4377
4387
4397
4358
4368
4378
4388
4398
3459
4369
4379
4389
4399
286
287
288
289
290
4850
4860
4870
4880
4890
4851
4861
4871
4881
4891
4852
4862
4872
4882
4892
4854
4864
4874
4884
4894
4855
4865
4875
4885
4895
4856
4866
4876
4886
4896
4857
4867
4877
4887
4897
4858
4868
4878
4888
4898
4859
4869
4879
4889
4899
241
242
243
244
245
4400
4410
4420
4430
4440
4401
4411
4421
4431
4441
4402
4412
4422
4432
4442
4404
4414
4424
4434
4444
4405
4415
4425
4435
4445
4406
4416
4426
4436
4446
4407
4417
4427
4437
4447
4408
4418
4428
4438
4448
4409
4419
4429
4439
4449
291
292
293
294
295
4900
4910
4920
4930
4940
4901
4911
4921
4931
4941
4902
4912
4922
4932
4942
4904
4914
4924
4934
4944
4905
4915
4925
4935
4945
4906
4916
4926
4936
4946
4907
4917
4927
4937
4947
4208
4218
4228
4238
4248
4209
4219
4229
4239
4249
246
247
248
249
250
4450
4460
4470
4480
4490
4451
4461
4471
4481
4491
4452
4462
4472
4482
4492
4454
4464
4474
4484
4494
4455
4465
4475
4485
4495
4456
4466
4476
4486
4496
4457
4467
4477
4487
4497
4458
4468
4478
4488
4498
4459
4469
4479
4489
4499
296
297
298
299
300
4950
4960
4970
4980
4990
4951
4961
4971
4981
4991
4952
4962
4972
4982
4992
4954
4964
4974
4984
4994
4955
4965
4975
4985
4995
4956
4966
4976
4986
4996
4957
4967
4977
4987
4997
4958
4968
4978
4988
4998
4959
4969
4979
4989
4999
Appendix - 6
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
(1) For axis 1
PosiData tioning M
No. identi- code
fier
Command
Positioning
Arc data
Dwell
speed
address
PosiData tioning M
No. identi- code
fier
Command
Positioning
Arc data
Dwell
speed
address
301
302
303
304
305
5000
5010
5020
5030
5040
5001
5011
5021
5031
5041
5002
5012
5022
5032
5042
5004
5014
5024
5034
5044
5005
5015
5025
5035
5045
5006
5016
5026
5036
5046
5007
5017
5027
5037
5047
5008
5018
5028
5038
5048
5009
5019
5029
5039
5049
351
352
353
354
355
5500
5510
5520
5530
5540
5501
5511
5521
5531
5541
5502
5512
5522
5532
5542
5504
5514
5524
5534
5544
5505
5515
5525
5535
5545
5506
5516
5526
5536
5546
5507
5517
5527
5537
5547
5508
5518
5528
5538
5548
5509
5519
5529
5539
5549
306
307
308
309
310
5050
5060
5070
5080
5090
5051
5061
5071
5081
5091
5052
5062
5072
5082
5092
5054
5064
5074
5084
5094
5055
5065
5075
5085
5095
5056
5066
5076
5086
5096
5057
5067
5077
5087
5097
5058
5068
5078
5088
5098
5059
5069
5079
5089
5099
356
357
358
359
360
5550
5560
5570
5580
5590
5551
5561
5571
5581
5591
5552
5562
5572
5582
5592
5554
5564
5574
5584
5594
5555
5565
5575
5585
5595
5556
5566
5576
5586
5596
5557
5567
5577
5587
5597
5558
5568
5578
5588
5598
5559
5569
5579
5589
5599
311
312
313
314
315
5100
5110
5120
5130
5140
5101
5111
5121
5131
5141
5102
5112
5122
5132
5142
5104
5114
5124
5134
5144
5105
5115
5125
5135
5145
5106
5116
5126
5136
5146
5107
5117
5127
5137
5147
5108
5118
5128
5138
5148
5109
5119
5129
5139
5149
361
362
363
364
365
5600
5610
5620
5630
5640
5601
5611
5621
5631
5641
5602
5612
5622
5632
5642
5604
5614
5624
5634
5644
5605
5615
5625
5635
5645
5606
5616
5626
5636
5646
5607
5617
5627
5637
5647
5608
5618
5628
5638
5648
5609
5619
5629
5639
5649
316
317
318
319
320
5150
5160
5170
5180
5190
5151
5161
5171
5181
5191
5152
5162
5172
5182
5192
5154
5164
5174
5184
5194
5155
5165
5175
5185
5195
5156
5166
5176
5186
5196
5157
5167
5177
5187
5197
5158
5168
5178
5188
5198
5159
5169
5179
5189
5199
366
367
368
369
370
5650
5660
5670
5680
5690
5651
5661
5671
5681
5691
5652
5662
5672
5682
5692
5654
5664
5674
5684
5694
5655
5665
5675
5685
5695
5656
5666
5676
5686
5696
5657
5667
5677
5687
5697
5658
5668
5678
5688
5698
5659
5669
5679
5689
5699
321
322
323
324
325
5200
5210
5220
5230
5240
5201
5211
5221
5231
5241
5202
5212
5222
5232
5242
5204
5214
5224
5234
5244
5205
5215
5225
5235
5245
5206
5216
5226
5236
5246
5207
5217
5227
5237
5247
5208
5218
5228
5238
5248
5209
5219
5229
5239
5249
371
372
373
374
375
5700
5710
5720
5730
5740
5701
5711
5721
5731
5741
5702
5712
5722
5732
5742
5704
5714
5724
5734
5744
5705
5715
5725
5735
5745
5706
5716
5726
5736
5746
5707
5717
5727
5737
5747
5708
5718
5728
5738
5748
5709
5719
5729
5739
5749
326
327
328
329
330
5250
5260
5270
5280
5290
5251
5261
5271
5281
5291
5252
5262
5272
5282
5292
5254
5264
5274
5284
5294
5255
5265
5275
5285
5295
5256
5266
5276
5286
5296
5257
5267
5277
5287
5297
5258
5268
5278
5288
5298
5259
5269
5279
5289
5299
376
377
378
379
380
5750
5760
5770
5780
5790
5751
5761
5771
5781
5791
5752
5762
5772
5782
5792
5754
5764
5774
5784
5794
5755
5765
5775
5785
5795
5756
5766
5776
5786
5796
5757
5767
5777
5787
5797
5758
5768
5778
5788
5798
5759
5769
5779
5789
5799
331
332
333
334
335
5300
5310
5320
5330
5340
5301
5311
5321
5331
5341
5302
5312
5322
5332
5342
5304
5314
5324
5334
5344
5305
5315
5325
5335
5345
5306
5316
5326
5336
5346
5307
5317
5327
5337
5347
5308
5318
5328
5338
5348
5309
5319
5329
5339
5349
381
382
383
384
385
5800
5810
5820
5830
5840
5801
5811
5821
5831
5841
5802
5812
5822
5832
5842
5804
5814
5824
5834
5844
5805
5815
5825
5835
5845
5806
5816
5826
5836
5846
5807
5817
5827
5837
5847
5808
5818
5828
5838
5848
5809
5819
5829
5839
5849
336
337
338
339
340
5350
5360
5370
5380
5390
5351
5361
5371
5381
5391
5352
5362
5372
5382
5392
5354
5364
5374
5384
5394
5355
5365
5375
5385
5395
5356
5366
5376
5386
5396
5357
5367
5377
5387
5397
5358
5368
5378
5388
5398
5359
5369
5379
5389
5399
386
387
388
389
390
5850
5860
5870
5880
5890
5851
5861
5871
5881
5891
5852
5862
5872
5882
5892
5854
5864
5874
5884
5894
5855
5865
5875
5885
5895
5856
5866
5876
5886
5896
5857
5867
5877
5887
5897
5858
5868
5878
5888
5898
5859
5869
5879
5889
5899
341
342
343
344
345
5400
5410
5420
5430
5440
5401
5411
5421
5431
5441
5402
5412
5422
5432
5442
5404
5414
5424
5434
5444
5405
5415
5425
5435
5445
5406
5416
5426
5436
5446
5407
5417
5427
5437
5447
5408
5418
5428
5438
5448
5409
5419
5429
5439
5449
391
392
393
394
395
5900
5910
5920
5930
5940
5901
5911
5921
5931
5941
5902
5912
5922
5932
5942
5904
5914
5924
5934
5944
5905
5915
5925
5935
5945
5906
5916
5926
5936
5946
5907
5917
5927
5937
5947
5908
5918
5928
5938
5948
5909
5919
5929
5939
5949
346
347
348
349
350
5450
5460
5470
5480
5490
5451
5461
5471
5481
5491
5452
5462
5472
5482
5492
5454
5464
5474
5484
5494
5455
5465
5475
5485
5495
5456
5466
5476
5486
5496
5457
5467
5477
5487
5497
5458
5468
5478
5488
5498
5459
5469
5479
5489
5499
396
397
398
399
400
5950
5960
5970
5980
5990
5951
5961
5971
5981
5991
5952
5962
5972
5982
5992
5954
5964
5974
5984
5994
5955
5965
5975
5985
5995
5956
5966
5976
5986
5996
5957
5967
5977
5987
5997
5958
5968
5978
5988
5998
5959
5969
5979
5989
5999
Appendix - 7
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
(1) For axis 1
PosiData tioning M
No. identi- code
fier
Command
Positioning
Arc data
Dwell
speed
address
PosiData tioning M
No. identi- code
fier
Command
Positioning
Arc data
Dwell
speed
address
401
402
403
404
405
6000
6010
6020
6030
6040
6001
6011
6021
6031
6041
6002
6012
6022
6032
6042
6004
6014
6024
6034
6044
6005
6015
6025
6035
6045
6006
6016
6026
6036
6046
6007
6017
6027
6037
6047
6008
6018
6028
6038
6048
6009
6019
6029
6039
6049
451
452
453
454
455
6500
6510
6520
6530
6540
6501
6511
6521
6531
6541
6502
6512
6522
6532
6542
6504
6514
6524
6534
6544
6505
6515
6525
6535
6545
6506
6516
6526
6536
6546
6507
6517
6527
6537
6547
6508
6518
6528
6538
6548
6509
6519
6529
6539
6549
406
407
408
409
410
6050
6060
6070
6080
6090
6051
6061
6071
6081
6091
6052
6062
6072
6082
6092
6054
6064
6074
6084
6094
6055
6065
6075
6085
6095
6056
6066
6076
6086
6096
6057
6067
6077
6087
6097
6058
6068
6078
6088
6098
6059
6069
6079
6089
6099
456
457
458
459
460
6550
6560
6570
6580
6590
6551
6561
6571
6581
6591
6552
6562
6572
6582
6592
6554
6564
6574
6584
6594
6555
6565
6575
6585
6595
6556
6566
6576
6586
6596
6557
6567
6577
6587
6597
6558
6568
6578
6588
6598
6559
6569
6579
6589
6599
411
412
413
414
415
6100
6110
6120
6130
6140
6101
6111
6121
6131
6141
6102
6112
6122
6132
6142
6104
6114
6124
6134
6144
6105
6115
6125
6135
6145
6106
6116
6126
6136
6146
6107
6117
6127
6137
6147
6108
6118
6128
6138
6148
6109
6119
6129
6139
6149
461
462
463
464
465
6600
6610
6620
6630
6640
6601
6611
6621
6631
6641
6602
6612
6622
6632
6642
6604
6614
6624
6634
6644
6605
6615
6625
6635
6645
6606
6616
6626
6636
6646
6607
6617
6627
6637
6647
6608
6618
6628
6638
6648
6609
6619
6629
6639
6649
416
417
418
419
420
6150
6160
6170
6180
6190
6151
6161
6171
6181
6191
6152
6162
6172
6182
6192
6154
6164
6174
6184
6194
6155
6165
6175
6185
6195
6156
6166
6176
6186
6196
6157
6167
6177
6187
6197
6158
6168
6178
6188
6198
6159
6169
6179
6189
6199
466
467
468
469
470
6650
6660
6670
6680
6690
6651
6661
6671
6681
6691
6652
6662
6672
6682
6692
6654
6664
6674
6684
6694
6655
6665
6675
6685
6695
6656
6666
6676
6686
6696
6657
6667
6677
6687
6697
6658
6668
6678
6688
6698
6659
6669
6679
6689
6699
421
422
423
424
425
6200
6210
6220
6230
6240
6201
6211
6221
6231
6241
6202
6212
6222
6232
6242
6204
6214
6224
6234
6244
6205
6215
6225
6235
6245
6206
6216
6226
6236
6246
6207
6217
6227
6237
6247
6208
6218
6228
6238
6248
6209
6219
6229
6239
6249
471
472
473
474
475
6700
6710
6720
6730
6740
6701
6711
6721
6731
6741
6702
6712
6722
6732
6742
6704
6714
6724
6734
6744
6705
6715
6725
6735
6745
6706
6716
6726
6736
6746
6707
6717
6727
6737
6747
6708
6718
6728
6738
6748
6709
6719
6729
6739
6749
426
427
428
429
430
6250
6260
6270
6280
6290
6251
6261
6271
6281
6291
6252
6262
6272
6282
6292
6254
6264
6274
6284
6294
6255
6265
6275
6285
6295
6256
6266
6276
6286
6296
6257
6267
6277
6287
6297
6258
6268
6278
6288
6298
6259
6269
6279
6289
6299
476
477
478
479
480
6750
6760
6770
6780
6790
6751
6761
6771
6781
6791
6752
6762
6772
6782
6792
6754
6764
6774
6784
6794
6755
6765
6775
6785
6795
6756
6766
6776
6786
6796
6757
6767
6777
6787
6797
6758
6768
6778
6788
6798
6759
6769
6779
6789
6799
431
432
433
434
435
6300
6310
6320
6330
6340
6301
6311
6321
6331
6341
6302
6312
6322
6332
6342
6304
6314
6324
6334
6344
6305
6315
6325
6335
6345
6306
6316
6326
6336
6346
6307
6317
6327
6337
6347
6308
6318
6328
6338
6348
6309
6319
6329
6339
6349
481
482
483
484
485
6800
6810
6820
6830
6840
6801
6811
6821
6831
6841
6802
6812
6822
6832
6842
6804
6814
6824
6834
6844
6805
6815
6825
6835
6845
6806
6816
6826
6836
6846
6807
6817
6827
6837
6847
6808
6818
6828
6838
6848
6809
6819
6829
6839
6849
436
437
438
439
440
6350
6360
6370
6380
6390
6351
6361
6371
6381
6391
6352
6362
6372
6382
6392
6354
6364
6374
6384
6394
6355
6365
6375
6385
6395
6356
6366
6376
6386
6396
6357
6367
6377
6387
6397
6358
6368
6378
6388
6398
6359
6369
6379
6389
6399
486
487
488
489
490
6850
6860
6870
6880
6890
6851
6861
6871
6881
6891
6852
6862
6872
6882
6892
6854
6864
6874
6884
6894
6855
6865
6875
6885
6895
6856
6866
6876
6886
6896
6857
6867
6877
6887
6897
6858
6868
6878
6888
6898
6859
6869
6879
6889
6899
441
442
443
444
445
6400
6410
6420
6430
6440
6401
6411
6421
6431
6441
6402
6412
6422
6432
6442
6404
6414
6424
6434
6444
6405
6415
6425
6435
6445
6406
6416
6426
6436
6446
6407
6417
6427
6437
6447
6408
6418
6428
6438
6448
6409
6419
6429
6439
6449
491
492
493
494
495
6900
6910
6920
6930
6940
6901
6911
6921
6931
6941
6902
6912
6922
6932
6942
6904
6914
6924
6934
6944
6905
6915
6925
6935
6945
6906
6916
6926
6936
6946
6907
6917
6927
6937
6947
6908
6918
6928
6938
6948
6909
6919
6929
6939
6949
446
447
448
449
450
6450
6460
6470
6480
6490
6451
6461
6471
6481
6491
6452
6462
6472
6482
6492
6454
6464
6474
6484
6494
6455
6465
6475
6485
6495
6456
6466
6476
6486
6496
6457
6467
6477
6487
6497
6458
6468
6478
6488
6498
6459
6469
6479
6489
6499
496
497
498
499
500
6950
6960
6970
6980
6990
6951
6961
6971
6981
6991
6952
6962
6972
6982
6992
6954
6964
6974
6984
6994
6955
6965
6975
6985
6995
6956
6966
6976
6986
6996
6957
6967
6977
6987
6997
6958
6968
6978
6988
6998
6959
6969
6979
6989
6999
Appendix - 8
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
(1) For axis 1
PosiData tioning M
No. identi- code
fier
Command
Positioning
Arc data
Dwell
speed
address
PosiData tioning M
No. identi- code
fier
Command
Positioning
Arc data
Dwell
speed
address
501
502
503
504
505
7000
7010
7020
7030
7040
7001
7011
7021
7031
7041
7002
7012
7022
7032
7042
7004
7014
7024
7034
7044
7005
7015
7025
7035
7045
7006
7016
7026
7036
7046
7007
7017
7027
7037
7047
7008
7018
7028
7038
7048
7009
7019
7029
7039
7049
551
552
553
554
555
7500
7510
7520
7530
7540
7501
7511
7521
7531
7541
7502
7512
7522
7532
7542
7504
7514
7524
7534
7544
7505
7515
7525
7535
7545
7506
7516
7526
7536
7546
7507
7517
7527
7537
7547
7508
7518
7528
7538
7548
7509
7519
7529
7539
7549
506
507
508
509
510
7050
7060
7070
7080
7090
7051
7061
7071
7081
7091
7052
7062
7072
7082
7092
7054
7064
7074
7084
7094
7055
7065
7075
7085
7095
7056
7066
7076
7086
7096
7057
7067
7077
7087
7097
7058
7068
7078
7088
7098
7059
7069
7079
7089
7099
556
557
558
559
560
7550
7560
7570
7580
7590
7551
7561
7571
7581
7591
7552
7562
7572
7582
7592
7554
7564
7574
7584
7594
7555
7565
7575
7585
7595
7556
7566
7576
7586
7596
7557
7567
7577
7587
7597
7558
7568
7578
7588
7598
7559
7569
7579
7589
7599
511
512
513
514
515
7100
7110
7120
7130
7140
7101
7111
7121
7131
7141
7102
7112
7122
7132
7142
7104
7114
7124
7134
7144
7105
7115
7125
7135
7145
7106
7116
7126
7136
7146
7107
7117
7127
7137
7147
7108
7118
7128
7138
7148
7109
7119
7129
7139
7149
561
562
563
564
565
7600
7610
7620
7630
7640
7601
7611
7621
7631
7641
7602
7612
7622
7632
7642
7604
7614
7624
7634
7644
7605
7615
7625
7635
7645
7606
7616
7626
7636
7646
7607
7617
7627
7637
7647
7608
7618
7628
7638
7648
7609
7619
7629
7639
7649
516
517
518
519
520
7150
7160
7170
7180
7190
7151
7161
7171
7181
7191
7152
7162
7172
7182
7192
7154
7164
7174
7184
7194
7155
7165
7175
7185
7195
7156
7166
7176
7186
7196
7157
7167
7177
7187
7197
7158
7168
7178
7188
7198
7159
7169
7179
7189
7199
566
567
568
569
570
7650
7660
7670
7680
7690
7651
7661
7671
7681
7691
7652
7662
7672
7682
7692
7654
7664
7674
7684
7694
7655
7665
7675
7685
7695
7656
7666
7676
7686
7696
7657
7667
7677
7687
7697
7658
7668
7678
7688
7698
7659
7669
7679
7689
7699
521
522
523
524
525
7200
7210
7220
7230
7240
7201
7211
7221
7231
7241
7202
7212
7222
7232
7242
7204
7214
7224
7234
7244
7205
7215
7225
7235
7245
7206
7216
7226
7236
7246
7207
7217
7227
7237
7247
7208
7218
7228
7238
7248
7209
7219
7229
7239
7249
571
572
573
574
575
7700
7710
7720
7730
7740
7701
7711
7721
7731
7741
7702
7712
7722
7732
7742
7704
7714
7724
7734
7744
7705
7715
7725
7735
7745
7706
7716
7726
7736
7746
7707
7717
7727
7737
7747
7708
7718
7728
7738
7748
7709
7719
7729
7739
7749
526
527
528
529
530
7250
7260
7270
7280
7290
7251
7261
7271
7281
7291
7252
7262
7272
7282
7292
7254
7264
7274
7284
7294
7255
7265
7275
7285
7295
7256
7266
7276
7286
7296
7257
7267
7277
7287
7297
7258
7268
7278
7288
7298
7259
7269
7279
7289
7299
576
577
578
579
580
7750
7760
7770
7780
7790
7751
7761
7771
7781
7791
7752
7762
7772
7782
7792
7754
7764
7774
7784
7794
7755
7765
7775
7785
7795
7756
7766
7776
7786
7796
7757
7767
7777
7787
7797
7758
7768
7778
7788
7798
7759
7769
7779
7789
7799
531
532
533
534
535
7300
7310
7320
7330
7340
7301
7311
7321
7331
7341
7302
7312
7322
7332
7342
7304
7314
7324
7334
7344
7305
7315
7325
7335
7345
7306
7316
7326
7336
7346
7307
7317
7327
7337
7347
7308
7318
7328
7338
7348
7309
7319
7329
7339
7349
581
582
583
584
585
7800
7810
7820
7830
7840
7801
7811
7821
7831
7841
7802
7812
7822
7832
7842
7804
7814
7824
7834
7844
7805
7815
7825
7835
7845
7806
7816
7826
7836
7846
7807
7817
7827
7837
7847
7808
7818
7828
7838
7848
7809
7819
7829
7839
7849
536
537
538
539
540
7350
7360
7370
7380
7390
7351
7361
7371
7381
7391
7352
7362
7372
7382
7392
7354
7364
7374
7384
7394
7355
7365
7375
7385
7395
7356
7366
7376
7386
7396
7357
7367
7377
7387
7397
7358
7368
7378
7388
7398
7359
7369
7379
7389
7399
586
587
588
589
590
7850
7860
7870
7880
7890
7851
7861
7871
7881
7891
7852
7862
7872
7882
7892
7854
7864
7874
7884
7894
7855
7865
7875
7885
7895
7856
7866
7876
7886
7896
7857
7867
7877
7887
7897
7858
7868
7878
7888
7898
7859
7869
7879
7889
7899
541
542
543
544
545
7400
7410
7420
7430
7440
7401
7411
7421
7431
7441
7402
7412
7422
7432
7442
7404
7414
7424
7434
7444
7405
7415
7425
7435
7445
7406
7416
7426
7436
7446
7407
7417
7427
7437
7447
7408
7418
7428
7438
7448
7409
7419
7429
7439
7449
591
592
593
594
595
7900
7910
7920
7930
7940
7901
7911
7921
7931
7941
7902
7912
7922
7932
7942
7904
7914
7924
7934
7944
7905
7915
7925
7935
7945
7906
7916
7926
7936
7946
7907
7917
7927
7937
7947
7908
7918
7928
7938
7948
7909
7919
7929
7939
7949
546
547
548
549
550
7450
7460
7470
7480
7490
7451
7461
7471
7481
7491
7452
7462
7472
7482
7492
7454
7464
7474
7484
7494
7455
7465
7475
7485
7495
7456
7466
7476
7486
7496
7457
7467
7477
7487
7497
7458
7468
7478
7488
7498
7459
7469
7479
7489
7499
596
597
598
599
600
7950
7960
7970
7980
7990
7951
7961
7971
7981
7991
7952
7962
7972
7982
7992
7954
7964
7974
7984
7994
7955
7965
7975
7985
7995
7956
7966
7976
7986
7996
7957
7967
7977
7987
7997
7958
7968
7978
7988
7998
7959
7969
7979
7989
7999
Appendix - 9
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
(2) For axis 2
PosiData tioning M
No. identi- code
fier
Command
Positioning
Arc data
Dwell
speed
address
PosiData tioning M
No. identi- code
fier
Command
Positioning
Arc data
Dwell
speed
address
1
2
3
4
5
8000
8010
8020
8030
8040
8001
8011
8021
8031
8041
8002
8012
8022
8032
8042
8004
8014
8024
8034
8044
8005
8015
8025
8035
8045
8006
8016
8026
8036
8046
8007
8017
8027
8037
8047
8008
8018
8028
8038
8048
8009
8019
8029
8039
8049
51
52
53
54
55
8500
8510
8520
8530
8540
8501
8511
8521
8531
8541
8502
8512
8522
8532
8542
8504
8514
8524
8534
8544
8505
8515
8525
8535
8545
8506
8516
8526
8536
8546
8507
8517
8527
8537
8547
8508
8518
8528
8538
8548
8509
8519
8529
8539
8549
6
7
8
9
10
8050
8060
8070
8080
8090
8051
8061
8071
8081
8091
8052
8062
8072
8082
8092
8054
8064
8074
8084
8094
8055
8065
8075
8085
8095
8056
8066
8076
8086
8096
8057
8067
8077
8087
8097
8058
8068
8078
8088
8098
8059
8069
8079
8089
8099
56
57
58
59
60
8550
8560
8570
8580
8590
8551
8561
8571
8581
8591
8552
8562
8572
8582
8592
8554
8564
8574
8584
8594
8555
8565
8575
8585
8595
8556
8566
8576
8586
8596
8557
8567
8577
8587
8597
8558
8568
8578
8588
8598
8559
8569
8579
8589
8599
11
12
13
14
15
8100
8110
8120
8130
8140
8101
8111
8121
8131
8141
8102
8112
8122
8132
8142
8104
8114
8124
8134
8144
8105
8115
8125
8135
8145
8106
8116
8126
8136
8146
8107
8117
8127
8137
8147
8108
8118
8128
8138
8148
8109
8119
8129
8139
8149
61
62
63
64
65
8600
8610
8620
8630
8640
8601
8611
8621
8631
8641
8602
8612
8622
8632
8642
8604
8614
8624
8634
8644
8605
8615
8625
8635
8645
8606
8616
8626
8636
8646
8607
8617
8627
8637
8647
8608
8618
8628
8638
8648
8609
8619
8629
8639
8649
16
17
18
19
20
8150
8160
8170
8180
8190
8151
8161
8171
8181
8191
8152
8162
8172
8182
8192
8154
8164
8174
8184
8194
8155
8165
8175
8185
8195
8156
8166
8176
8186
8196
8157
8167
8177
8187
8197
8158
8168
8178
8188
8198
8159
8169
8179
8189
8199
66
67
68
69
70
8650
8660
8670
8680
8690
8651
8661
8671
8681
8691
8652
8662
8672
8682
8692
8654
8664
8674
8684
8694
8655
8665
8675
8685
8695
8656
8666
8676
8686
8696
8657
8667
8677
8687
8697
8658
8668
8678
8688
8698
8659
8669
8679
8689
8699
21
22
23
24
25
8200
8210
8220
8230
8240
8201
8211
8221
8231
8241
8202
8212
8222
8232
8242
8204
8214
8224
8234
8244
8205
8215
8225
8235
8245
8206
8216
8226
8236
8246
8207
8217
8227
8237
8247
8208
8218
8228
8238
8248
8209
8219
8229
8239
8249
71
72
73
74
75
8700
8710
8720
8730
8740
8701
8711
8721
8731
8741
8702
8712
8722
8732
8742
8704
8714
8724
8734
8744
8705
8715
8725
8735
8745
8706
8716
8726
8736
8746
8707
8717
8727
8737
8747
8708
8718
8728
8738
8748
8709
8719
8729
8739
8749
26
27
28
29
30
8250
8260
8270
8280
8290
8251
8261
8271
8281
8291
8252
8262
8272
8282
8292
8254
8264
8274
8284
8294
8255
8265
8275
8285
8295
8256
8266
8276
8286
8296
8257
8267
8277
8287
8297
8258
8268
8278
8288
8298
8259
8269
8279
8289
8299
76
77
78
79
80
8750
8760
8770
8780
8790
8751
8761
8771
8781
8791
8752
8762
8772
8782
8792
8754
8764
8774
8784
8794
8755
8765
8775
8785
8795
8756
8766
8776
8786
8796
8757
8767
8777
8787
8797
8758
8768
8778
8788
8798
8759
8769
8779
8789
8799
31
32
33
34
35
8300
8310
8320
8330
8340
8301
8311
8321
8331
8341
8302
8312
8322
8332
8342
8304
8314
8324
8334
8344
8305
8315
8325
8335
8345
8306
8316
8326
8336
8346
8307
8317
8327
8337
8347
8308
8318
8328
8338
8348
8309
8319
8329
8339
8349
81
82
83
84
85
8800
8810
8820
8830
8840
8801
8811
8821
8831
8841
8802
8812
8822
8832
8842
8804
8814
8824
8834
8844
8805
8815
8825
8835
8845
8806
8816
8826
8836
8846
8807
8817
8827
8837
8847
8808
8818
8828
8838
8848
8809
8819
8829
8839
8849
36
37
38
39
40
8350
8360
8370
8380
8390
8351
8361
8371
8381
8391
8352
8362
8372
8382
8392
8354
8364
8374
8384
8394
8355
8365
8375
8385
8395
8356
8366
8376
8386
8396
8357
8367
8377
8387
8397
8358
8368
8378
8388
8398
8359
8369
8379
8389
8399
86
87
88
89
90
8850
8860
8870
8880
8890
8851
8861
8871
8881
8891
8852
8862
8872
8882
8892
8854
8864
8874
8884
8894
8855
8865
8875
8885
8895
8856
8866
8876
8886
8896
8857
8867
8877
8887
8897
8858
8868
8878
8888
8898
8859
8869
8879
8889
8899
41
42
43
44
45
8400
8410
8420
8430
8440
8401
8411
8421
8431
8441
8402
8412
8422
8432
8442
8404
8414
8424
8434
8444
8405
8415
8425
8435
8445
8406
8416
8426
8436
8446
8407
8417
8427
8437
8447
8408
8418
8428
8438
8448
8409
8419
8429
8439
8449
91
92
93
94
95
8900
8910
8920
8930
8940
8901
8911
8921
8931
8941
8902
8912
8922
8932
8942
8904
8914
8924
8934
8944
8905
8915
8925
8935
8945
8906
8916
8926
8936
8946
8907
8917
8927
8937
8947
8908
8918
8928
8938
8948
8909
8919
8929
8939
8949
46
47
48
49
50
8450
8460
8470
8480
8490
8451
8461
8471
8481
8491
8452
8462
8472
8482
8492
8454
8464
8474
8484
8494
8455
8465
8475
8485
8495
8456
8466
8476
8486
8496
8457
8467
8477
8487
8497
8458
8468
8478
8488
8498
8459
8469
8479
8489
8499
96
97
98
99
100
8950
8960
8970
8980
8990
8951
8961
8971
8981
8991
8952
8962
8972
8982
8992
8954
8964
8974
8984
8994
8955
8965
8975
8985
8995
8956
8966
8976
8986
8996
8957
8967
8977
8987
8997
8958
8968
8978
8988
8998
8959
8969
8979
8989
8999
Appendix - 10
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
(2) For axis 2
PosiData tioning M
No. identi- code
fier
Command
Positioning
Arc data
Dwell
speed
address
PosiData tioning M
No. identi- code
fier
Command
Positioning
Arc data
Dwell
speed
address
101
102
103
104
105
9000
9010
9020
9030
9040
9001
9011
9021
9031
9041
9002
9012
9022
9032
9042
9004
9014
9024
9034
9044
9005
9015
9025
9035
9045
9006
9016
9026
9036
9046
9007
9017
9027
9037
9047
9008
9018
9028
9038
9048
9009
9019
9029
9039
9049
151
152
153
154
155
9500
9510
9520
9530
9540
9501
9511
9521
9531
9541
9502
9512
9522
9532
9542
9504
9514
9524
9534
9544
9505
9515
9525
9535
9545
9506
9516
9526
9536
9546
9507
9517
9527
9537
9547
9508
9518
9528
9538
9548
9509
9519
9529
9539
9549
106
107
108
109
110
9050
9060
9070
9080
9090
9051
9061
9071
9081
9091
9052
9062
9072
9082
9092
9054
9064
9074
9084
9094
9055
9065
9075
9085
9095
9056
9066
9076
9086
9096
9057
9067
9077
9087
9097
9058
9068
9078
9088
9098
9059
9069
9079
9089
9099
156
157
158
159
160
9550
9560
9570
9580
9590
9551
9561
9571
9581
9591
9552
9562
9572
9582
9592
9554
9564
9574
9584
9594
9555
9565
9575
9585
9595
9556
9566
9576
9586
9596
9557
9567
9577
9587
9597
9558
9568
9578
9588
9598
9559
9569
9579
9589
9599
111
112
113
114
115
9100
9110
9120
9130
9140
9101
9111
9121
9131
9141
9102
9112
9122
9132
9142
9104
9114
9124
9134
9144
9105
9115
9125
9135
9145
9106
9116
9126
9136
9146
9107
9117
9127
9137
9147
9108
9118
9128
9138
9148
9109
9119
9129
9139
9149
161
162
163
164
165
9600
9610
9620
9630
9640
9601
9611
9621
9631
9641
9602
9612
9622
9632
9642
9604
9614
9624
9634
9644
9605
9615
9625
9635
9645
9606
9616
9626
9636
9646
9607
9617
9627
9637
9647
9608
9618
9628
9638
9648
9609
9619
9629
9639
9649
116
117
118
119
120
9150
9160
9170
9180
9190
9151
9161
9171
9181
9191
9152
9162
9172
9182
9192
9154
9164
9174
9184
9194
9155
9165
9175
9185
9195
9156
9166
9176
9186
9196
9157
9167
9177
9187
9197
9158
9168
9178
9188
9198
9159
9169
9179
9189
9199
166
167
168
169
170
9650
9660
9670
9680
9690
9651
9661
9671
9681
9691
9652
9662
9672
9682
9692
9654
9664
9674
9684
9694
9655
9665
9675
9685
9695
9656
9666
9676
9686
9696
9657
9667
9677
9687
9697
9658
9668
9678
9688
9698
9659
9669
9679
9689
9699
126
127
128
129
130
9250
9260
9270
9280
9290
9251
9261
9271
9281
9291
9252
9262
9272
9282
9292
9254
9264
9274
9284
9294
9255
9265
9275
9285
9295
9256
9266
9276
9286
9296
9257
9267
9277
9287
9297
9258
9268
9278
9288
9298
9259
9269
9279
9289
9299
176
177
178
179
180
9750
9760
9770
9780
9790
9751
9761
9771
9781
9791
9752
9762
9772
9782
9792
9754
9764
9774
9784
9794
9755
9765
9775
9785
9795
9756
9766
9776
9786
9796
9757
9767
9777
9787
9797
9758
9768
9778
9788
9798
9759
9769
9779
9789
9799
131
132
133
134
135
9300
9310
9320
9330
9340
9301
9311
9321
9331
9341
9302
9312
9322
9332
9342
9304
9314
9324
9334
9344
9305
9315
9325
9335
9345
9306
9316
9326
9336
9346
9307
9317
9327
9337
9347
9308
9318
9328
9338
9348
9309
9319
9329
9339
9349
181
182
183
184
185
9800
9810
9820
9830
9840
9801
9811
9821
9831
9841
9802
9812
9822
9832
9842
9804
9814
9824
9834
9844
9805
9815
9825
9835
9845
9806
9816
9826
9836
9846
9807
9817
9827
9837
9847
9808
9818
9828
9838
9848
9809
9819
9829
9839
9849
136
137
138
139
140
9350
9360
9370
9380
9390
9351
9361
9371
9381
9391
9352
9362
9372
9382
9392
9354
9364
9374
9384
9394
9355
9365
9375
9385
9395
9356
9366
9376
9386
9396
9357
9367
9377
9387
9397
9358
9368
9378
9388
9398
9359
9369
9379
9389
9399
186
187
188
189
190
9850
9860
9870
9880
9890
9851
9861
9871
9881
9891
9852
9862
9872
9882
9892
9854
9864
9874
9884
9894
9855
9865
9875
9885
9895
9856
9866
9876
9886
9896
9857
9867
9877
9887
9897
9858
9868
9878
9888
9898
9859
9869
9879
9889
9899
141
142
143
144
145
9400
9410
9420
9430
9440
9401
9411
9421
9431
9441
9402
9412
9422
9432
9442
9404
9414
9424
9434
9444
9405
9415
9425
9435
9445
9406
9416
9426
9436
9446
9407
9417
9427
9437
9447
9408
9418
9428
9438
9448
9409
9419
9429
9439
9449
191
192
193
194
195
9900
9910
9920
9930
9940
9901
9911
9921
9931
9941
9902
9912
9922
9932
9942
9904
9914
9924
9934
9944
9905
9915
9925
9935
9945
9906
9916
9926
9936
9946
9907
9917
9927
9937
9947
9908
9918
9928
9938
9948
9909
9919
9929
9939
9949
146
147
148
149
150
9450
9460
9470
9480
9490
9451
9461
9471
9481
9491
9452
9462
9472
9482
9492
9454
9464
9474
9484
9494
9455
9465
9475
9485
9495
9456
9466
9476
9486
9496
9457
9467
9477
9487
9497
9458
9468
9478
9488
9498
9459
9469
9479
9489
9499
196
197
198
199
200
9950
9960
9970
9980
9990
9951
9961
9971
9981
9991
9952
9962
9972
9982
9992
9954
9964
9974
9984
9994
9955
9965
9975
9985
9995
9956
9966
9976
9986
9996
9957
9967
9977
9987
9997
9958
9968
9978
9988
9998
9959
9969
9979
9989
9999
Appendix - 11
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
(2) For axis 2
PosiData tioning M
No. identi- code
fier
Command
Positioning
Arc data
Dwell
speed
address
PosiData tioning M
No. identi- code
fier
Command
Positioning
Arc data
Dwell
speed
address
201
10000 10001 10002 10004 10005 10006 10007 10008 10009
251
10500 10501 10502 10504 10505 10506 10507 10508 10509
202
10010 10011 10012 10014 10015 10016 10017 10018 10019
252
10510 10511 10512 10514 10515 10516 10517 10518 10519
203
10020 10021 10022 10024 10025 10026 10027 10028 10029
253
10520 10521 10522 10524 10525 10526 10527 10528 10529
204
10030 10031 10032 10034 10035 10036 10037 10038 10039
254
10530 10531 10532 10534 10535 10536 10537 10538 10539
205
10040 10041 10042 10044 10045 10046 10047 10048 10049
255
10540 10541 10542 10544 10545 10546 10547 10548 10549
206
10050 10051 10052 10054 10055 10056 10057 10058 10059
256
10550 10551 10552 10554 10555 10556 10557 10558 10559
207
10060 10061 10062 10064 10065 10066 10067 10068 10069
257
10560 10561 10562 10564 10565 10566 10567 10568 10569
208
10070 10071 10072 10074 10075 10076 10077 10078 10079
258
10570 10571 10572 10574 10575 10576 10577 10578 10579
209
10080 10081 10082 10084 10085 10086 10087 10088 10089
259
10580 10581 10582 10584 10585 10586 10587 10588 10589
210
10090 10091 10092 10094 10095 10096 10097 10098 10099
260
10590 10591 10592 10594 10595 10596 10597 10598 10599
211
10100 10101 10102 10104 10105 10106 10107 10108 10109
261
10600 10601 10602 10604 10605 10606 10607 10608 10609
212
10110 10111 10112 10114 10115 10116 10117 10118 10119
262
10610 10611 10612 10614 10615 10616 10617 10618 10619
213
10120 10121 10122 10124 10125 10126 10127 10128 10129
263
10620 10621 10622 10624 10625 10626 10627 10628 10629
214
10130 10131 10132 10134 10135 10136 10137 10138 10139
264
10630 10631 10632 10634 10635 10636 10637 10638 10639
215
10140 10141 10142 10144 10145 10146 10147 10148 10149
265
10640 10641 10642 10644 10645 10646 10647 10648 10649
216
10150 10151 10152 10154 10155 10156 10157 10158 10159
266
10650 10651 10652 10654 10655 10656 10657 10658 10659
217
10160 10161 10162 10164 10165 10166 10167 10168 10169
267
10660 10661 10662 10664 10665 10666 10667 10668 10669
218
10170 10171 10172 10174 10175 10176 10177 10178 10179
268
10670 10671 10672 10674 10675 10676 10677 10678 10679
219
10180 10181 10182 10184 10185 10186 10187 10188 10189
269
10680 10681 10682 10684 10685 10686 10687 10688 10689
220
10190 10191 10192 10194 10195 10196 10197 10198 10199
270
10690 10691 10692 10694 10695 10696 10697 10698 10699
221
10200 10201 10202 10204 10205 10206 10207 10208 10209
271
10700 10701 10702 10704 10705 10706 10707 10708 10709
222
10210 10211 10212 10214 10215 10216 10217 10218 10219
272
10710 10711 10712 10714 10715 10716 10717 10718 10719
223
10220 10221 10222 10224 10225 10226 10227 10228 10229
273
10720 10721 10722 10724 10725 10726 10727 10728 10729
224
10230 10231 10232 10234 10235 10236 10237 10238 10239
274
10730 10731 10732 10734 10735 10736 10737 10738 10739
225
10240 10241 10242 10244 10245 10246 10247 10248 10249
275
10740 10741 10742 10744 10745 10746 10747 10748 10749
226
10250 10251 10252 10254 10255 10256 10257 10258 10259
276
10750 10751 10752 10754 10755 10756 10757 10758 10759
227
10260 10261 10262 10264 10265 10266 10267 10268 10269
277
10760 10761 10762 10764 10765 10766 10767 10768 10769
228
10270 10271 10272 10274 10275 10276 10277 10278 10279
278
10770 10771 10772 10774 10775 10776 10777 10778 10779
229
10280 10281 10282 10284 10285 10286 10287 10288 10289
279
10780 10781 10782 10784 10785 10786 10787 10788 10789
230
10290 10291 10292 10294 10295 10296 10297 10298 10299
280
10790 10791 10792 10794 10795 10796 10797 10798 10799
231
10300 10301 10302 10304 10305 10306 10307 10308 10309
281
10800 10801 10802 10804 10805 10806 10807 10808 10809
232
10310 10311 10312 10314 10315 10316 10317 10318 10319
282
10810 10811 10812 10814 10815 10816 10817 10818 10819
233
10320 10321 10322 10324 10325 10326 10327 10328 10329
283
10820 10821 10822 10824 10825 10826 10827 10828 10829
234
10330 10331 10332 10334 10335 10336 10337 10338 10339
284
10830 10831 10832 10834 10835 10836 10837 10838 10839
235
10340 10341 10342 10344 10345 10346 10347 10348 10349
285
10840 10841 10842 10844 10845 10846 10847 10848 10849
236
10350 10351 10352 10354 10355 10356 10357 10358 10359
286
10850 10851 10852 10854 10855 10856 10857 10858 10859
237
10360 10361 10362 10364 10365 10366 10367 10368 10369
287
10860 10861 10862 10864 10865 10866 10867 10868 10869
238
10370 10371 10372 10374 10375 10376 10377 10378 10379
288
10870 10871 10872 10874 10875 10876 10877 10878 10879
239
10380 10381 10382 10384 10385 10386 10387 10388 10389
289
10880 10881 10882 10884 10885 10886 10887 10888 10889
240
10390 10391 10392 10394 10395 10396 10397 10398 10399
290
10890 10891 10892 10894 10895 10896 10897 10898 10899
241
10400 10401 10402 10404 10405 10406 10407 10408 10409
291
10900 10901 10902 10904 10905 10906 10907 10908 10909
242
10410 10411 10412 10414 10415 10416 10417 10418 10419
292
10910 10911 10912 10914 10915 10916 10917 10918 10919
243
10420 10421 10422 10424 10425 10426 10427 10428 10429
293
10920 10921 10922 10924 10925 10926 10927 10928 10929
244
10430 10431 10432 10434 10435 10436 10437 10438 10439
294
10930 10931 10932 10934 10935 10936 10937 10938 10939
245
10440 10441 10442 10444 10445 10446 10447 10448 10449
295
10940 10941 10942 10944 10945 10946 10947 10948 10949
246
10450 10451 10452 10454 10455 10456 10457 10458 10459
296
10950 10951 10952 10954 10955 10956 10957 10958 10959
247
10460 10461 10462 10464 10465 10466 10467 10468 10469
297
10960 10961 10962 10964 10965 10966 10967 10968 10969
248
10470 10471 10472 10474 10475 10476 10477 10478 10479
298
10970 10971 10972 10974 10975 10976 10977 10978 10979
249
10480 10481 10482 10484 10485 10486 10487 10488 10489
299
10980 10981 10982 10984 10985 10986 10987 10988 10989
250
10490 10491 10492 10494 10495 10496 10497 10498 10499
300
10990 10991 10992 10994 10995 10996 10997 10998 10999
Appendix - 12
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
(2) For axis 2
PosiData tioning M
No. identi- code
fier
Command
Positioning
Arc data
Dwell
speed
address
PosiData tioning M
No. identi- code
fier
Command
Positioning
Arc data
Dwell
speed
address
301
11000 11001 11002 11004 11005 11006 11007 11008 11009
351
11500 11501 11502 11504 11505 11506 11507 11508 11509
302
11010 11011 11012 11014 11015 11016 11017 11018 11019
352
11510 11511 11512 11514 11515 11516 11517 11518 11519
303
11020 11021 11022 11024 11025 11026 11027 11028 11029
353
11520 11521 11522 11524 11525 11526 11527 11528 11529
304
11030 11031 11032 11034 11035 11036 11037 11038 11039
354
11530 11531 11532 11534 11535 11536 11537 11538 11539
305
11040 11041 11042 11044 11045 11046 11047 11048 11049
355
11540 11541 11542 11544 11545 11546 11547 11548 11549
306
11050 11051 11052 11054 11055 11056 11057 11058 11059
356
11550 11551 11552 11554 11555 11556 11557 11558 11559
307
11060 11061 11062 11064 11065 11066 11067 11068 11069
357
11560 11561 11562 11564 11565 11566 11567 11568 11569
308
11070 11071 11072 11074 11075 11076 11077 11078 11079
358
11570 11571 11572 11574 11575 11576 11577 11578 11579
309
11080 11081 11082 11084 11085 11086 11087 11088 11089
359
11580 11581 11582 11584 11585 11586 11587 11588 11589
310
11090 11091 11092 11094 11095 11096 11097 11098 11099
360
11590 11591 11592 11594 11595 11596 11597 11598 11599
311
11100 11101 11102 11104 11105 11106 11107 11108 11109
361
11600 11601 11602 11604 11605 11606 11607 11608 11609
312
11110 11111 11112 11114 11115 11116 11117 11118 11119
362
11610 11611 11612 11614 11615 11616 11617 11618 11619
313
11120 11121 11122 11124 11125 11126 11127 11128 11129
363
11620 11621 11622 11624 11625 11626 11627 11628 11629
314
11130 11131 11132 11134 11135 11136 11137 11138 11139
364
11630 11631 11632 11634 11635 11636 11637 11638 11639
315
11140 11141 11142 11144 11145 11146 11147 11148 11149
365
11640 11641 11642 11644 11645 11646 11647 11648 11649
316
11150 11151 11152 11154 11155 11156 11157 11158 11159
366
11650 11651 11652 11654 11655 11656 11657 11658 11659
317
11160 11161 11162 11164 11165 11166 11167 11168 11169
367
11660 11661 11662 11664 11665 11666 11667 11668 11669
318
11170 11171 11172 11174 11175 11176 11177 11178 11179
368
11670 11671 11672 11674 11675 11676 11677 11678 11679
319
11180 11181 11182 11184 11185 11186 11187 11188 11189
369
11680 11681 11682 11684 11685 11686 11687 11688 11689
320
11190 11191 11192 11194 11195 11196 11197 11198 11199
370
11690 11691 11692 11694 11695 11696 11697 11698 11699
321
11200 11201 11202 11204 11205 11206 11207 11208 11209
371
11700 11701 11702 11704 11705 11706 11707 11708 11709
322
11210 11211 11212 11214 11215 11216 11217 11218 11219
372
11710 11711 11712 11714 11715 11716 11717 11718 11719
323
11220 11221 11222 11224 11225 11226 11227 11228 11229
373
11720 11721 11722 11724 11725 11726 11727 11728 11729
324
11230 11231 11232 11234 11235 11236 11237 11238 11239
374
11730 11731 11732 11734 11735 11736 11737 11738 11739
325
11240 11241 11242 11244 11245 11246 11247 11248 11249
375
11740 11741 11742 11744 11745 11746 11747 11748 11749
326
11250 11251 11252 11254 11255 11256 11257 11258 11259
376
11750 11751 11752 11754 11755 11756 11757 11758 11759
327
11260 11261 11262 11264 11265 11266 11267 11268 11269
377
11760 11761 11762 11764 11765 11766 11767 11768 11769
328
11270 11271 11272 11274 11275 11276 11277 11278 11279
378
11770 11771 11772 11774 11775 11776 11777 11778 11779
329
11280 11281 11282 11284 11285 11286 11287 11288 11289
379
11780 11781 11782 11784 11785 11786 11787 11788 11789
330
11290 11291 11292 11294 11295 11296 11297 11298 11299
380
11790 11791 11792 11794 11795 11796 11797 11798 11799
331
11300 11301 11302 11304 11305 11306 11307 11308 11309
381
11800 11801 11802 11804 11805 11806 11807 11808 11809
332
11310 11311 11312 11314 11315 11316 11317 11318 11319
382
11810 11811 11812 11814 11815 11816 11817 11818 11819
333
11320 11321 11322 11324 11325 11326 11327 11328 11329
383
11820 11821 11822 11824 11825 11826 11827 11828 11829
334
11330 11331 11332 11334 11335 11336 11337 11338 11339
384
11830 11831 11832 11834 11835 11836 11837 11838 11839
335
11340 11341 11342 11344 11345 11346 11347 11348 11349
385
11840 11841 11842 11844 11845 11846 11847 11848 11849
336
11350 11351 11352 11354 11355 11356 11357 11358 11359
386
11850 11851 11852 11854 11855 11856 11857 11858 11859
337
11360 11361 11362 11364 11365 11366 11367 11368 11369
387
11860 11861 11862 11864 11865 11866 11867 11868 11869
338
11370 11371 11372 11374 11375 11376 11377 11378 11379
388
11870 11871 11872 11874 11875 11876 11877 11878 11879
339
11380 11381 11382 11384 11385 11386 11387 11388 11389
389
11880 11881 11882 11884 11885 11886 11887 11888 11889
340
11390 11391 11392 11394 11395 11396 11397 11398 11399
390
11890 11891 11892 11894 11895 11896 11897 11898 11899
341
11400 11401 11402 11404 11405 11406 11407 11408 11409
391
11900 11901 11902 11904 11905 11906 11907 11908 11909
342
11410 11411 11412 11414 11415 11416 11417 11418 11419
392
11910 11911 11912 11914 11915 11916 11917 11918 11919
343
11420 11421 11422 11424 11425 11426 11427 11428 11429
393
11920 11921 11922 11924 11925 11926 11927 11928 11929
344
11430 11431 11432 11434 11435 11436 11437 11438 11439
394
11930 11931 11932 11934 11935 11936 11937 11938 11939
345
11440 11441 11442 11444 11445 11446 11447 11448 11449
395
11940 11941 11942 11944 11945 11946 11947 11948 11949
346
11450 11451 11452 11454 11455 11456 11457 11458 11459
396
11950 11951 11952 11954 11955 11956 11957 11958 11959
347
11460 11461 11462 11464 11465 11466 11467 11468 11469
397
11960 11961 11962 11964 11965 11966 11967 11968 11969
348
11470 11471 11472 11474 11475 11476 11477 11478 11479
398
11970 11971 11972 11974 11975 11976 11977 11978 11979
349
11480 11481 11482 11484 11485 11486 11487 11488 11489
399
11980 11981 11982 11984 11985 11986 11987 11988 11989
350
11490 11491 11492 11494 11495 11496 11497 11498 11499
400
11990 11991 11992 11994 11995 11996 11997 11998 11999
Appendix - 13
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
(2) For axis 2
PosiData tioning M
No. identi- code
fier
Command
Positioning
Arc data
Dwell
speed
address
PosiData tioning M
No. identi- code
fier
Command
Positioning
Arc data
Dwell
speed
address
401
12000 12001 12002 12004 12005 12006 12007 12008 12009
451
12500 12501 12502 12504 12505 12506 12507 12508 12509
402
12010 12011 12012 12014 12015 12016 12017 12018 12019
452
12510 12511 12512 12514 12515 12516 12517 12518 12519
403
12020 12021 12022 12024 12025 12026 12027 12028 12029
453
12520 12521 12522 12524 12525 12526 12527 12528 12529
404
12030 12031 12032 12034 12035 12036 12037 12038 12039
454
12530 12531 12532 12534 12535 12536 12537 12538 12539
405
12040 12041 12042 12044 12045 12046 12047 12048 12049
455
12540 12541 12542 12544 12545 12546 12547 12548 12549

12550 12551 12552 12554 12555 12556 12557 12558 12559
406
12050 12051 12052 12054 12055 12056 12057 12058 12059
456
407
12060 12061 12062 12064 12065 12066 12067 12068 12069
457
12560 12561 12562 12564 12565 12566 12567 12568 12569
408
12070 12071 12072 12074 12075 12076 12077 12078 12079
458
12570 12571 12572 12574 12575 12576 12577 12578 12579
409
12080 12081 12082 12084 12085 12086 12087 12088 12089
459
12580 12581 12582 12584 12585 12586 12587 12588 12589
410
12090 12091 12092 12094 12095 12096 12097 12098 12099
460
12590 12591 12592 12594 12595 12596 12597 12598 12599
411
12100 12101 12102 12104 12105 12106 12107 12108 12109
461
12600 12601 12602 12604 12605 12606 12607 12608 12609
412
12110 12111 12112 12114 12115 12116 12117 12118 12119
462
12610 12611 12612 12614 12615 12616 12617 12618 12619
413
12120 12121 12122 12124 12125 12126 12127 12128 12129
463
12620 12621 12622 12624 12625 12626 12627 12628 12629
414
12130 12131 12132 12134 12135 12136 12137 12138 12139
464
12630 12631 12632 12634 12635 12636 12637 12638 12639
415
12140 12141 12142 12144 12145 12146 12147 12148 12149
465
12640 12641 12642 12644 12645 12646 12647 12648 12649
416
12150 12151 12152 12154 12155 12156 12157 12158 12159
466
12650 12651 12652 12654 12655 12656 12657 12658 12659
417
12160 12161 12162 12164 12165 12166 12167 12168 12169
467
12660 12661 12662 12664 12665 12666 12667 12668 12669
418
12170 12171 12172 12174 12175 12176 12177 12178 12179
468
12670 12671 12672 12674 12675 12676 12677 12678 12679
419
12180 12181 12182 12184 12185 12186 12187 12188 12189
469
12680 12681 12682 12684 12685 12686 12687 12688 12689
420
12190 12191 12192 12194 12195 12196 12197 12198 12199
470
12690 12691 12692 12694 12695 12696 12697 12698 12699
421
12200 12201 12202 12204 12205 12206 12207 12208 12209
471
12700 12701 12702 12704 12705 12706 12707 12708 12709
422
12210 12211 12212 12214 12215 12216 12217 12218 12219
472
12710 12711 12712 12714 12715 12716 12717 12718 12719
423
12220 12221 12222 12224 12225 12226 12227 12228 12229
473
12720 12721 12722 12724 12725 12726 12727 12728 12729
424
12230 12231 12232 12234 12235 12236 12237 12238 12239
474
12730 12731 12732 12734 12735 12736 12737 12738 12739
425
12240 12241 12242 12244 12245 12246 12247 12248 12249
475
12740 12741 12742 12744 12745 12746 12747 12748 12749

12750 12751 12752 12754 12755 12756 12757 12758 12759
426
12250 12251 12252 12254 12255 12256 12257 12258 12259
476
427
12260 12261 12262 12264 12265 12266 12267 12268 12269
477
12760 12761 12762 12764 12765 12766 12767 12768 12769
428
12270 12271 12272 12274 12275 12276 12277 12278 12279
478
12770 12771 12772 12774 12775 12776 12777 12778 12779
429
12280 12281 12282 12284 12285 12286 12287 12288 12289
479
12780 12781 12782 12784 12785 12786 12787 12788 12789
430
12290 12291 12292 12294 12295 12296 12297 12298 12299
480
12790 12791 12792 12794 12795 12796 12797 12798 12799
431
12300 12301 12302 12304 12305 12306 12307 12308 12309
481
12800 12801 12802 12804 12805 12806 12807 12808 12809
432
12310 12311 12312 12314 12315 12316 12317 12318 12319
482
12810 12811 12812 12814 12815 12816 12817 12818 12819
433
12320 12321 12322 12324 12325 12326 12327 12328 12329
483
12820 12821 12822 12824 12825 12826 12827 12828 12829
434
12330 12331 12332 12334 12335 12336 12337 12338 12339
484
12830 12831 12832 12834 12835 12836 12837 12838 12839
435
12340 12341 12342 12344 12345 12346 12347 12348 12349
485
12840 12841 12842 12844 12845 12846 12847 12848 12849
436
12350 12351 12352 12354 12355 12356 12357 12358 12359
486
12850 12851 12852 12854 12855 12856 12857 12858 12859
437
12360 12361 12362 12364 12365 12366 12367 12368 12369
487
12860 12861 12862 12864 12865 12866 12867 12868 12869
438
12370 12371 12372 12374 12375 12376 12377 12378 12379
488
12870 12871 12872 12874 12875 12876 12877 12878 12879
439
12380 12381 12382 12384 12385 12386 12387 12388 12389
489
12880 12881 12882 12884 12885 12886 12887 12888 12889
440
12390 12391 12392 12394 12395 12396 12397 12398 12399
490
12890 12891 12892 12894 12895 12896 12897 12898 12899
441
12400 12401 12402 12404 12405 12406 12407 12408 12409
491
12900 12901 12902 12904 12905 12906 12907 12908 12909
442
12410 12411 12412 12414 12415 12416 12417 12418 12419
492
12910 12911 12912 12914 12915 12916 12917 12918 12919
443
12420 12421 12422 12424 12425 12426 12427 12428 12429
493
12920 12921 12922 12924 12925 12926 12927 12928 12929
444
12430 12431 12432 12434 12435 12436 12437 12438 12439
494
12930 12931 12932 12934 12935 12936 12937 12938 12939
445
12440 12441 12442 12444 12445 12446 12447 12448 12449
495
12940 12941 12942 12944 12945 12946 12947 12948 12949
446
12450 12451 12452 12454 12455 12456 12457 12458 12459
496
12950 12951 12952 12954 12955 12956 12957 12958 12959
447
12460 12461 12462 12464 12465 12466 12467 12468 12469
497
12960 12961 12962 12964 12965 12966 12967 12968 12969
448
12470 12471 12472 12474 12475 12476 12477 12478 12479
498
12970 12971 12972 12974 12975 12976 12977 12978 12979
449
12480 12481 12482 12484 12485 12486 12487 12488 12489
499
12980 12981 12982 12984 12985 12986 12987 12988 12989
450
12490 12491 12492 12494 12495 12496 12497 12498 12499
500
12990 12991 12992 12994 12995 12996 12997 12998 12999
Appendix - 14
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
(2) For axis 2
PosiData tioning M
No. identi- code
fier
Command
Positioning
Arc data
Dwell
speed
address
PosiData tioning M
No. identi- code
fier
Command
Positioning
Arc data
Dwell
speed
address
501
13000 13001 13002 13004 13005 13006 13007 13008 13009
551
13500 13501 13502 13504 13505 13506 13507 13508 13509
502
13010 13011 13012 13014 13015 13016 13017 13018 13019
552
13510 13511 13512 13514 13515 13516 13517 13518 13519
503
13020 13021 13022 13024 13025 13026 13027 13028 13029
553
13520 13521 13522 13524 13525 13526 13527 13528 13529
504
13030 13031 13032 13034 13035 13036 13037 13038 13039
554
13530 13531 13532 13534 13535 13536 13537 13538 13539
505
13040 13041 13042 13044 13045 13046 13047 13048 13049
555
13540 13541 13542 13544 13545 13546 13547 13548 13549

13550 13551 13552 13554 13555 13556 13557 13558 13559
506
13050 13051 13052 13054 13055 13056 13057 13058 13059
556
507
13060 13061 13062 13064 13065 13066 13067 13068 13069
557
13560 13561 13562 13564 13565 13566 13567 13568 13569
508
13070 13071 13072 13074 13075 13076 13077 13078 13079
558
13570 13571 13572 13574 13575 13576 13577 13578 13579
509
13080 13081 13082 13084 13085 13086 13087 13088 13089
559
13580 13581 13582 13584 13585 13586 13587 13588 13589
510
13090 13091 13092 13094 13095 13096 13097 13098 13099
560
13590 13591 13592 13594 13595 13596 13597 13598 13599
511
13100 13101 13102 13104 13105 13106 13107 13108 13109
561
13600 13601 13602 13604 13605 13606 13607 13608 13609
512
13110 13111 13112 13114 13115 13116 13117 13118 13119
562
13610 13611 13612 13614 13615 13616 13617 13618 13619
513
13120 13121 13122 13124 13125 13126 13127 13128 13129
563
13620 13621 13622 13624 13625 13626 13627 13628 13629
514
13130 13131 13132 13134 13135 13136 13137 13138 13139
564
13630 13631 13632 13634 13635 13636 13637 13638 13639
515
13140 13141 13142 13144 13145 13146 13147 13148 13149
565
13640 13641 13642 13644 13645 13646 13647 13648 13649
516
13150 13151 13152 13154 13155 13156 13157 13158 13159
566
13650 13651 13652 13654 13655 13656 13657 13658 13659
517
13160 13161 13162 13164 13165 13166 13167 13168 13169
567
13660 13661 13662 13664 13665 13666 13667 13668 13669
518
13170 13171 13172 13174 13175 13176 13177 13178 13179
568
13670 13671 13672 13674 13675 13676 13677 13678 13679
519
13180 13181 13182 13184 13185 13186 13187 13188 13189
569
13680 13681 13682 13684 13685 13686 13687 13688 13689
520
13190 13191 13192 13194 13195 13196 13197 13198 13199
570
13690 13691 13692 13694 13695 13696 13697 13698 13699
521
13200 13201 13202 13204 13205 13206 13207 13208 13209
571
13700 13701 13702 13704 13705 13706 13707 13708 13709
522
13210 13211 13212 13214 13215 13216 13217 13218 13219
572
13710 13711 13712 13714 13715 13716 13717 13718 13719
523
13220 13221 13222 13224 13225 13226 13227 13228 13229
573
13720 13721 13722 13724 13725 13726 13727 13728 13729
524
13230 13231 13232 13234 13235 13236 13237 13238 13239
574
13730 13731 13732 13734 13735 13736 13737 13738 13739
525
13240 13241 13242 13244 13245 13246 13247 13248 13249
575
13740 13741 13742 13744 13745 13746 13747 13748 13749

13750 13751 13752 13754 13755 13756 13757 13758 13759
526
13250 13251 13252 13254 13255 13256 13257 13258 13259
576
527
13260 13261 13262 13264 13265 13266 13267 13268 13269
577
13760 13761 13762 13764 13765 13766 13767 13768 13769
528
13270 13271 13272 13274 13275 13276 13277 13278 13279
578
13770 13771 13772 13774 13775 13776 13777 13778 13779
529
13280 13281 13282 13284 13285 13286 13287 13288 13289
579
13780 13781 13782 13784 13785 13786 13787 13788 13789
530
13290 13291 13292 13294 13295 13296 13297 13298 13299
580
13790 13791 13792 13794 13795 13796 13797 13798 13799
531
13300 13301 13302 13304 13305 13306 13307 13308 13309
581
13800 13801 13802 13804 13805 13806 13807 13808 13809
532
13310 13311 13312 13314 13315 13316 13317 13318 13319
582
13810 13811 13812 13814 13815 13816 13817 13818 13819
533
13320 13321 13322 13324 13325 13326 13327 13328 13329
583
13820 13821 13822 13824 13825 13826 13827 13828 13829
534
13330 13331 13332 13334 13335 13336 13337 13338 13339
584
13830 13831 13832 13834 13835 13836 13837 13838 13839
535
13340 13341 13342 13344 13345 13346 13347 13348 13349
585
13840 13841 13842 13844 13845 13846 13847 13848 13849
536
13350 13351 13352 13354 13355 13356 13357 13358 13359
586
13850 13851 13852 13854 13855 13856 13857 13858 13859
537
13360 13361 13362 13364 13365 13366 13367 13368 13369
587
13860 13861 13862 13864 13865 13866 13867 13868 13869
538
13370 13371 13372 13374 13375 13376 13377 13378 13379
588
13870 13871 13872 13874 13875 13876 13877 13878 13879
539
13380 13381 13382 13384 13385 13386 13387 13388 13389
589
13880 13881 13882 13884 13885 13886 13887 13888 13889
540
13390 13391 13392 13394 13395 13396 13397 13398 13399
590
13890 13891 13892 13894 13895 13896 13897 13898 13899
541
13400 13401 13402 13404 13405 13406 13407 13408 13409
591
13900 13901 13902 13904 13905 13906 13907 13908 13909
542
13410 13411 13412 13414 13415 13416 13417 13418 13419
592
13910 13911 13912 13914 13915 13916 13917 13918 13919
543
13420 13421 13422 13424 13425 13426 13427 13428 13429
593
13920 13921 13922 13924 13925 13926 13927 13928 13929
544
13430 13431 13432 13434 13435 13436 13437 13438 13439
594
13930 13931 13932 13934 13935 13936 13937 13938 13939
545
13440 13441 13442 13444 13445 13446 13447 13448 13449
595
13940 13941 13942 13944 13945 13946 13947 13948 13949
546
13450 13451 13452 13454 13455 13456 13457 13458 13459
596
13950 13951 13952 13954 13955 13956 13957 13958 13959
547
13460 13461 13462 13464 13465 13466 13467 13468 13469
597
13960 13961 13962 13964 13965 13966 13967 13968 13969
548
13470 13471 13472 13474 13475 13476 13477 13478 13479
598
13970 13971 13972 13974 13975 13976 13977 13978 13979
549
13480 13481 13482 13484 13485 13486 13487 13488 13489
599
13980 13981 13982 13984 13985 13986 13987 13988 13989
550
13490 13491 13492 13494 13495 13496 13497 13498 13499
600
13990 13991 13992 13994 13995 13996 13997 13998 13999
Appendix - 15
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
(3) For axis 3
PosiData tioning M
No. identi- code
fier
Command
Positioning
Arc data
Dwell
speed
address
PosiData tioning M
No. identi- code
fier
Command
Positioning
Arc data
Dwell
speed
address
14000 14001 14002 14004 14005 14006 14007 14008 14009
51
14500 14501 14502 14504 14505 14506 14507 14508 14509
14010 14011 14012 14014 14015 14016 14017 14018 14019
52
14510 14511 14512 14514 14515 14516 14517 14518 14519
14020 14021 14022 14024 14025 14026 14027 14028 14029
53
14520 14521 14522 14524 14525 14526 14527 14528 14529
14030 14031 14032 14034 14035 14036 14037 14038 14039
54
14530 14531 14532 14534 14535 14536 14537 14538 14539
14040 14041 14042 14044 14045 14046 14047 14048 14049
55
14540 14541 14542 14544 14545 14546 14547 14548 14549
14050 14051 14052 14054 14055 14056 14057 14058 14059
56
14550 14551 14552 14554 14555 14556 14557 14558 14559
14060 14061 14062 14064 14065 14066 14067 14068 14069
57
14560 14561 14562 14564 14565 14566 14567 14568 14569
14070 14071 14072 14074 14075 14076 14077 14078 14079
58
14570 14571 14572 14574 14575 14576 14577 14578 14579
14080 14081 14082 14084 14085 14086 14087 14088 14089
59
14580 14581 14582 14584 14585 14586 14587 14588 14589
10
14090 14091 14092 14094 14095 14096 14097 14098 14099
60
14590 14591 14592 14594 14595 14596 14597 14598 14599
11
14100 14101 14102 14104 14105 14106 14107 14108 14109
61
14600 14601 14602 14604 14605 14606 14607 14608 14609
12
14110 14111 14112 14114 14115 14116 14117 14118 14119
62
14610 14611 14612 14614 14615 14616 14617 14618 14619
13
14120 14121 14122 14124 14125 14126 14127 14128 14129
63
14620 14621 14622 14624 14625 14626 14627 14628 14629
14
14140 14131 14132 14134 14135 14136 14137 14138 14139
64
14630 14631 14632 14634 14635 14636 14637 14638 14639
15
14140 14141 14142 14144 14145 14146 14147 14148 14149
65
14640 14641 14642 14644 14645 14646 14647 14648 14649

14650 14651 14652 14654 14655 14656 14657 14658 14659
16
14150 14151 14152 14154 14155 14156 14157 14158 14159
66
17
14160 14161 14162 14164 14165 14166 14167 14168 14169
67
14660 14661 14662 14664 14665 14666 14667 14668 14669
18
14170 14171 14172 14174 14175 14176 14177 14178 14179
68
14670 14671 14672 14674 14675 14676 14677 14678 14679
19
14180 14181 14182 14184 14185 14186 14187 14188 14189
69
14680 14681 14682 14684 14685 14686 14687 14688 14689
20
14190 14191 14192 14194 14195 14196 14197 14198 14199
70
14690 14691 14692 14694 14695 14696 14697 14698 14699
21
14200 14201 14202 14204 14205 14206 14207 14208 14209
71
14700 14701 14702 14704 14705 14706 14707 14708 14709
22
14210 14211 14212 14214 14215 14216 14217 14218 14219
72
14710 14711 14712 14714 14715 14716 14717 14718 14719
23
14220 14221 14222 14224 14225 14226 14227 14228 14229
73
14720 14721 14722 14724 14725 14726 14727 14728 14729
24
14230 14231 14232 14234 14235 14236 14237 14238 14239
74
14730 14731 14732 14734 14735 14736 14737 14738 14739
25
14240 14241 14242 14244 14245 14246 14247 14248 14249
75
14740 14741 14742 14744 14745 14746 14747 14748 14749
26
14250 14251 14252 14254 14255 14256 14257 14258 14259
76
14750 14751 14752 14754 14755 14756 14757 14758 14759
27
14260 14261 14262 14264 14265 14266 14267 14268 14269
77
14760 14761 14762 14764 14765 14766 14767 14768 14769
28
14270 14271 14272 14274 14275 14276 14277 14278 14279
78
14770 14771 14772 14774 14775 14776 14777 14778 14779
29
14280 14281 14282 14284 14285 14286 14287 14288 14289
79
14780 14781 14782 14784 14785 14786 14787 14788 14789
30
14290 14291 14292 14294 14295 14296 14297 14298 14299
80
14790 14791 14792 14794 14795 14796 14797 14798 14799
31
14300 14301 14302 14304 14305 14306 14307 14308 14309
81
14800 14801 14802 14804 14805 14806 14807 14808 14809
32
14310 14311 14312 14314 14315 14316 14317 14318 14319
82
14810 14811 14812 14814 14815 14816 14817 14818 14819
33
14320 14321 14322 14324 14325 14326 14327 14328 14329
83
14820 14821 14822 14824 14825 14826 14827 14828 14829
34
14330 14331 14332 14334 14335 14336 14337 14338 14339
84
14830 14831 14832 14834 14835 14836 14837 14838 14839
35
14340 14341 14342 14344 14345 14346 14347 14348 14349
85
14840 14841 14842 14844 14845 14846 14847 14848 14849

14850 14851 14852 14854 14855 14856 14857 14858 14859
36
14350 14351 14352 14354 14355 14356 14357 14358 14359
86
37
14360 14361 14362 14364 14365 14366 14367 14368 14369
87
14860 14861 14862 14864 14865 14866 14867 14868 14869
38
14370 14371 14372 14374 14375 14376 14377 14378 14379
88
14870 14871 14872 14874 14875 14876 14877 14878 14879
39
14380 14381 14382 14384 14385 14386 14387 14388 14389
89
14880 14881 14882 14884 14885 14886 14887 14888 14889
40
14390 14391 14392 14394 14395 14396 14397 14398 14399
90
14890 14891 14892 14894 14895 14896 14897 14898 14899
41
14400 14401 14402 14404 14405 14406 14407 14408 14409
91
14900 14901 14902 14904 14905 14906 14907 14908 14909
42
14410 14411 14412 14414 14415 14416 14417 14418 14419
92
14910 14911 14912 14914 14915 14916 14917 14918 14919
43
14420 14421 14422 14424 14425 14426 14427 14428 14429
93
14920 14921 14922 14924 14925 14926 14927 14928 14929
44
14430 14431 14432 14434 14435 14436 14437 14438 14439
94
14930 14931 14932 14934 14935 14936 14937 14938 14939
45
14440 14441 14442 14444 14445 14446 14447 14448 14449
95
14940 14941 14942 14944 14945 14946 14947 14948 14949
46
14450 14451 14452 14454 14455 14456 14457 14458 14459
96
14950 14951 14952 14954 14955 14956 14957 14958 14959
47
14460 14461 14462 14464 14465 14466 14467 14468 14469
97
14960 14961 14962 14964 14965 14966 14967 14968 14969
48
14470 14471 14472 14474 14475 14476 14477 14478 14479
98
14970 14971 14972 14974 14975 14976 14977 14978 14979
49
14480 14481 14482 14484 14485 14486 14487 14488 14489
99
14980 14981 14982 14984 14985 14986 14987 14988 14989
50
14490 14491 14492 14494 14495 14496 14497 14498 14499
100
14990 14991 14992 14994 14995 14996 14997 14998 14999
Appendix - 16
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
(3) For axis 3
PosiData tioning M
No. identi- code
fier
Command
Positioning
Arc data
Dwell
speed
address
PosiData tioning M
No. identi- code
fier
Command
Positioning
Arc data
Dwell
speed
address
101
15000 15001 15002 15004 15005 15006 15007 15008 15009
151
15500 15501 15502 15504 15505 15506 15507 15508 15509
102
15010 15011 15012 15014 15015 15016 15017 15018 15019
152
15510 15511 15512 15514 15515 15516 15517 15518 15519
103
15020 15021 15022 15024 15025 15026 15027 15028 15029
153
15520 15521 15522 15524 15525 15526 15527 15528 15529
104
15030 15031 15032 15034 15035 15036 15037 15038 15039
154
15530 15531 15532 15534 15535 15536 15537 15538 15539
105
15040 15041 15042 15044 15045 15046 15047 15048 15049
155
15540 15541 15542 15544 15545 15546 15547 15548 15549
106
15050 15051 15052 15054 15055 15056 15057 15058 15059
156
15550 15551 15552 15554 15555 15556 15557 15558 15559
107
15060 15061 15062 15064 15065 15066 15067 15068 15069
157
15560 15561 15562 15564 15565 15566 15567 15568 15569
108
15070 15071 15072 15074 15075 15076 15077 15078 15079
158
15570 15571 15572 15574 15575 15576 15577 15578 15579
109
15080 15081 15082 15084 15085 15086 15087 15088 15089
159
15580 15581 15582 15584 15585 15586 15587 15588 15589
110
15090 15091 15092 15094 15095 15096 15097 15098 15099
160
15590 15591 15592 15594 15595 15596 15597 15598 15599
111
15100 15101 15102 15104 15105 15106 15107 15108 15109
161
15600 15601 15602 15604 15605 15606 15607 15608 15609
112
15110 15111 15112 15114 15115 15116 15117 15118 15119
162
15610 15611 15612 15614 15615 15616 15617 15618 15619
113
15120 15121 15122 15124 15125 15126 15127 15128 15129
163
15620 15621 15622 15624 15625 15626 15627 15628 15629
114
15130 15131 15132 15134 15135 15136 15137 15138 15139
164
15630 15631 15632 15634 15635 15636 15637 15638 15639
115
15140 15141 15142 15144 15145 15146 15147 15148 15149
165
15640 15641 15642 15644 15645 15646 15647 15648 15649
116
15150 15151 15152 15154 15155 15156 15157 15158 15159
166
15650 15651 15652 15654 15655 15656 15657 15658 15659
117
15160 15161 15162 15164 15165 15166 15167 15168 15169
167
15660 15661 15662 15664 15665 15666 15667 15668 15669
118
15170 15171 15172 15174 15175 15176 15177 15178 15179
168
15670 15671 15672 15674 15675 15676 15677 15678 15679
119
15180 15181 15182 15184 15185 15186 15187 15188 15189
169
15680 15681 15682 15684 15685 15686 15687 15688 15689
120
15190 15191 15192 15194 15195 15196 15197 15198 15199
170
15690 15691 15692 15694 15695 15696 15697 15698 15699
121
15200 15201 15202 15204 15205 15206 15207 15208 15209
171
15700 15701 15702 15704 15705 15706 15707 15708 15709
122
15210 15211 15212 15214 15215 15216 15217 15218 15219
172
15710 15711 15712 15714 15715 15716 15717 15718 15719
123
15220 15221 15222 15224 15225 15226 15227 15228 15229
173
15720 15721 15722 15724 15725 15726 15727 15728 15729
124
15230 15231 15232 15234 15235 15236 15237 15238 15239
174
15730 15731 15732 15734 15735 15736 15737 15738 15739
125
15240 15241 15242 15244 15245 15246 15247 15248 15249
175
15740 15741 15742 15744 15745 15746 15747 15748 15749
126
15250 15251 15252 15254 15255 15256 15257 15258 15259
176
15750 15751 15752 15754 15755 15756 15757 15758 15759
127
15260 15261 15262 15264 15265 15266 15267 15268 15269
177
15760 15761 15762 15764 15765 15766 15767 15768 15769
128
15270 15271 15272 15274 15275 15276 15277 15278 15279
178
15770 15771 15772 15774 15775 15776 15777 15778 15779
129
15280 15281 15282 15284 15285 15286 15287 15288 15289
179
15780 15781 15782 15784 15785 15786 15787 15788 15789
130
15290 15291 15292 15294 15295 15296 15297 15298 15299
180
15790 15791 15792 15794 15795 15796 15797 15798 15799
131
15300 15301 15302 15304 15305 15306 15307 15308 15309
181
15800 15801 15802 15804 15805 15806 15807 15808 15809
132
15310 15311 15312 15314 15315 15316 15317 15318 15319
182
15810 15811 15812 15814 15815 15816 15817 15818 15819
133
15320 15321 15322 15324 15325 15326 15327 15328 15329
183
15820 15821 15822 15824 15825 15826 15827 15828 15829
134
15330 15331 15332 15334 15335 15336 15337 15338 15339
184
15830 15831 15832 15834 15835 15836 15837 15838 15839
135
15340 15341 15342 15344 15345 15346 15347 15348 15349
185
15840 15841 15842 15844 15845 15846 15847 15848 15849
136
15350 15351 15352 15354 15355 15356 15357 15358 15359
186
15850 15851 15852 15854 15855 15856 15857 15858 15859
137
15360 15361 15362 15364 15365 15366 15367 15368 15369
187
15860 15861 15862 15864 15865 15866 15867 15868 15869
138
15370 15371 15372 15374 15375 15376 15377 15378 15379
188
15870 15871 15872 15874 15875 15876 15877 15878 15879
139
15380 15381 15382 15384 15385 15386 15387 15388 15389
189
15880 15881 15882 15884 15885 15886 15887 15888 15889
140
15390 15391 15392 15394 15395 15396 15397 15398 15399
190
15890 15891 15892 15894 15895 15896 15897 15898 15899
141
15400 15401 15402 15404 15405 15406 15407 15408 15409
191
15900 15901 15902 15904 15905 15906 15907 15908 15909
142
15410 15411 15412 15414 15415 15416 15417 15418 15419
192
15910 15911 15912 15914 15915 15916 15917 15918 15919
143
15420 15421 15422 15424 15425 15426 15427 15428 15429
193
15920 15921 15922 15924 15925 15926 15927 15928 15929
144
15430 15431 15432 15434 15435 15436 15437 15438 15439
194
15930 15931 15932 15934 15935 15936 15937 15938 15939
145
15440 15441 15442 15444 15445 15446 15447 15448 15449
195
15940 15941 15942 15944 15945 15946 15947 15948 15949

15950 15951 15952 15954 15955 15956 15957 15958 15959
146
15450 15451 15452 15454 15455 15456 15457 15458 15459
196
147
15460 15461 15462 15464 15465 15466 15467 15468 15469
197
15960 15961 15962 15964 15965 15966 15967 15968 15969
148
15470 15471 15472 15474 15475 15476 15477 15478 15479
198
15970 15971 15972 15974 15975 15976 15977 15978 15979
149
15480 15481 15482 15484 15485 15486 15487 15488 15489
199
15980 15981 15982 15984 15985 15986 15987 15988 15989
150
15490 15491 15492 15494 15495 15496 15497 15498 15499
200
15990 15991 15992 15994 15995 15996 15997 15998 15999
Appendix - 17
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
(3) For axis 3
PosiData tioning M
No. identi- code
fier
Command
Positioning
Arc data
Dwell
speed
address
PosiData tioning M
No. identi- code
fier
Command
Positioning
Arc data
Dwell
speed
address
201
16000 16001 16002 16004 16005 16006 16007 16008 16009
251
16500 16501 16502 16504 16505 16506 16507 16508 16509
202
16010 16011 16012 16014 16015 16016 16017 16018 16019
252
16510 16511 16512 16514 16515 16516 16517 16518 16519
203
16020 16021 16022 16024 16025 16026 16027 16028 16029
253
16520 16521 16522 16524 16525 16526 16527 16528 16529
204
16030 16031 16032 16034 16035 16036 16037 16038 16039
254
16530 16531 16532 16534 16535 16536 16537 16538 16539
205
16040 16041 16042 16044 16045 16046 16047 16048 16049
255
16540 16541 16542 16544 16545 16546 16547 16548 16549
206
16050 16051 16052 16054 16055 16056 16057 16058 16059
256
16550 16551 16552 16554 16555 16556 16557 16558 16559
207
16060 16061 16062 16064 16065 16066 16067 16068 16069
257
16560 16561 16562 16564 16565 16566 16567 16568 16569
208
16070 16071 16072 16074 16075 16076 16077 16078 16079
258
16570 16571 16572 16574 16575 16576 16577 16578 16579
209
16080 16081 16082 16084 16085 16086 16087 16088 16089
259
16580 16581 16582 16584 16585 16586 16587 16588 16589
210
16090 16091 16092 16094 16095 16096 16097 16098 16099
260
16590 16591 16592 16594 16595 16596 16597 16598 16599
211
16100 16101 16102 16104 16105 16106 16107 16108 16109
261
16600 16601 16602 16604 16605 16606 16607 16608 16609
212
16110 16111 16112 16114 16115 16116 16117 16118 16119
262
16610 16611 16612 16614 16615 16616 16617 16618 16619
213
16120 16121 16122 16124 16125 16126 16127 16128 16129
263
16620 16621 16622 16624 16625 16626 16627 16628 16629
214
16130 16131 16132 16134 16135 16136 16137 16138 16139
264
16630 16631 16632 16634 16635 16636 16637 16638 16639
215
16140 16141 16142 16144 16145 16146 16147 16148 16149
265
16640 16641 16642 16644 16645 16646 16647 16648 16649
216
16150 16151 16152 16154 16155 16156 16157 16158 16159
266
16650 16651 16652 16654 16655 16656 16657 16658 16659
217
16160 16161 16162 16164 16165 16166 16167 16168 16169
267
16660 16661 16662 16664 16665 16666 16667 16668 16669
218
16170 16171 16172 16174 16175 16176 16177 16178 16179
268
16670 16671 16672 16674 16675 16676 16677 16678 16679
219
16180 16181 16182 16184 16185 16186 16187 16188 16189
269
16680 16681 16682 16684 16685 16686 16687 16688 16689
220
16190 16191 16192 16194 16195 16196 16197 16198 16199
270
16690 16691 16692 16694 16695 16696 16697 16698 16699
221
16200 16201 16202 16204 16205 16206 16207 16208 16209
271
16700 16701 16702 16704 16705 16706 16707 16708 16709
222
16210 16211 16212 16214 16215 16216 16217 16218 16219
272
16710 16711 16712 16714 16715 16716 16717 16718 16719
223
16220 16221 16222 16224 16225 16226 16227 16228 16229
273
16720 16721 16722 16724 16725 16726 16727 16728 16729
224
16230 16231 16232 16234 16235 16236 16237 16238 16239
274
16730 16731 16732 16734 16735 16736 16737 16738 16739
225
16240 16241 16242 16244 16245 16246 16247 16248 16249
275
16740 16741 16742 16744 16745 16746 16747 16748 16749
226
16250 16251 16252 16254 16255 16256 16257 16258 16259
276
16750 16751 16752 16754 16755 16756 16757 16758 16759
227
16260 16261 16262 16264 16265 16266 16267 16268 16269
277
16760 16761 16762 16764 16765 16766 16767 16768 16769
228
16270 16271 16272 16274 16275 16276 16277 16278 16279
278
16770 16771 16772 16774 16775 16776 16777 16778 16779
229
16280 16281 16282 16284 16285 16286 16287 16288 16289
279
16780 16781 16782 16784 16785 16786 16787 16788 16789
230
16290 16291 16292 16294 16295 16296 16297 16298 16299
280
16790 16791 16792 16794 16795 16796 16797 16798 16799
231
16300 16301 16302 16304 16305 16306 16307 16308 16309
281
16800 16801 16802 16804 16805 16806 16807 16808 16809
232
16310 16311 16312 16314 16315 16316 16317 16318 16319
282
16810 16811 16812 16814 16815 16816 16817 16818 16819
233
16320 16321 16322 16324 16325 16326 16327 16328 16329
283
16820 16821 16822 16824 16825 16826 16827 16828 16829
234
16330 16331 16332 16334 16335 16336 16337 16338 16339
284
16830 16831 16832 16834 16835 16836 16837 16838 16839
235
16340 16341 16342 16344 16345 16346 16347 16348 16349
285
16840 16841 16842 16844 16845 16846 16847 16848 16849
236
16350 16351 16352 16354 16355 16356 16357 16358 16359
286
16850 16851 16852 16854 16855 16856 16857 16858 16859
237
16360 16361 16362 16364 16365 16366 16367 16368 16369
287
16860 16861 16862 16864 16865 16866 16867 16868 16869
238
16370 16371 16372 16374 16375 16376 16377 16378 16379
288
16870 16871 16872 16874 16875 16876 16877 16878 16879
239
16380 16381 16382 16384 16385 16386 16387 16388 16389
289
16880 16881 16882 16884 16885 16886 16887 16888 16889
240
16390 16391 16392 16394 16395 16396 16397 16398 16399
290
16890 16891 16892 16894 16895 16896 16897 16898 16899
241
16400 16401 16402 16404 16405 16406 16407 16408 16409
291
16900 16901 16902 16904 16905 16906 16907 16908 16909
242
16410 16411 16412 16414 16415 16416 16417 16418 16419
292
16910 16911 16912 16914 16915 16916 16917 16918 16919
243
16420 16421 16422 16424 16425 16426 16427 16428 16429
293
16920 16921 16922 16924 16925 16926 16927 16928 16929
244
16430 16431 16432 16434 16435 16436 16437 16438 16439
294
16930 16931 16932 16934 16935 16936 16937 16938 16939
245
16440 16441 16442 16444 16445 16446 16447 16448 16449
295
16940 16941 16942 16944 16945 16946 16947 16948 16949
246
16450 16451 16452 16454 16455 16456 16457 16458 16459
296
16950 16951 16952 16954 16955 16956 16957 16958 16959
247
16460 16461 16462 16464 16465 16466 16467 16468 16469
297
16960 16961 16962 16964 16965 16966 16967 16968 16969
248
16470 16471 16472 16474 16475 16476 16477 16478 16479
298
16970 16971 16972 16974 16975 16976 16977 16978 16979
249
16480 16481 16482 16484 16485 16486 16487 16488 16489
299
16980 16981 16982 16984 16985 16986 16987 16988 16989
250
16490 16491 16492 16494 16495 16496 16497 16498 16499
300
16990 16991 16992 16994 16995 16996 16997 16998 16999
Appendix - 18
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
(3) For axis 3
PosiData tioning M
No. identi- code
fier
Command
Positioning
Arc data
Dwell
speed
address
PosiData tioning M
No. identi- code
fier
Command
Positioning
Arc data
Dwell
speed
address
301
17000 17001 17002 17004 17005 17006 17007 17008 17009
351
17500 17501 17502 17504 17505 17506 17507 17508 17509
302
17010 17011 17012 17014 17015 17016 17017 17018 17019
352
17510 17511 17512 17514 17515 17516 17517 17518 17519
303
17020 17021 17022 17024 17025 17026 17027 17028 17029
353
17520 17521 17522 17524 17525 17526 17527 17528 17529
304
17030 17031 17032 17034 17035 17036 17037 17038 17039
354
17530 17531 17532 17534 17535 17536 17537 17538 17539
305
17040 17041 17042 17044 17045 17046 17047 17048 17049
355
17540 17541 17542 17544 17545 17546 17547 17548 17549
306
17050 17051 17052 17054 17055 17056 17057 17058 17059
356
17550 17551 17552 17554 17555 17556 17557 17558 17559
307
17060 17061 17062 17064 17065 17066 17067 17068 17069
357
17560 17561 17562 17564 17565 17566 17567 17568 17569
308
17070 17071 17072 17074 17075 17076 17077 17078 17079
358
17570 17571 17572 17574 17575 17576 17577 17578 17579
309
17080 17081 17082 17084 17085 17086 17087 17088 17089
359
17580 17581 17582 17584 17585 17586 17587 17588 17589
310
17090 17091 17092 17094 17095 17096 17097 17098 17099
360
17590 17591 17592 17594 17595 17596 17597 17598 17599
311
17100 17101 17102 17104 17105 17106 17107 17108 17109
361
17600 17601 17602 17604 17605 17606 17607 17608 17609
312
17110 17111 17112 17114 17115 17116 17117 17118 17119
362
17610 17611 17612 17614 17615 17616 17617 17618 17619
313
17120 17121 17122 17124 17125 17126 17127 17128 17129
363
17620 17621 17622 17624 17625 17626 17627 17628 17629
314
17130 17131 17132 17134 17135 17136 17137 17138 17139
364
17630 17631 17632 17634 17635 17636 17637 17638 17639
315
17140 17141 17142 17144 17145 17146 17147 17148 17149
365
17640 17641 17642 17644 17645 17646 17647 17648 17649
316
17150 17151 17152 17154 17155 17156 17157 17158 17159
366
17650 17651 17652 17654 17655 17656 17657 17658 17659
317
17160 17161 17162 17164 17165 17166 17167 17168 17169
367
17660 17661 17662 17664 17665 17666 17667 17668 17669
318
17170 17171 17172 17174 17175 17176 17177 17178 17179
368
17670 17671 17672 17674 17675 17676 17677 17678 17679
319
17180 17181 17182 17184 17185 17186 17187 17188 17189
369
17680 17681 17682 17684 17685 17686 17687 17688 17689
320
17190 17191 17192 17194 17195 17196 17197 17198 17199
370
17690 17691 17692 17694 17695 17696 17697 17698 17699
321
17200 17201 17202 17204 17205 17206 17207 17208 17209
371
17700 17701 17702 17704 17705 17706 17707 17708 17709
322
17210 17211 17212 17214 17215 17216 17217 17218 17219
372
17710 17711 17712 17714 17715 17716 17717 17718 17719
323
17220 17221 17222 17224 17225 17226 17227 17228 17229
373
17720 17721 17722 17724 17725 17726 17727 17728 17729
324
17230 17231 17232 17234 17235 17236 17237 17238 17239
374
17730 17731 17732 17734 17735 17736 17737 17738 17739
325
17240 17241 17242 17244 17245 17246 17247 17248 17249
375
17740 17741 17742 17744 17745 17746 17747 17748 17749
326
17250 17251 17252 17254 17255 17256 17257 17258 17259
376
17750 17751 17752 17754 17755 17756 17757 17758 17759
327
17260 17261 17262 17264 17265 17266 17267 17268 17269
377
17760 17761 17762 17764 17765 17766 17767 17768 17769
328
17270 17271 17272 17274 17275 17276 17277 17278 17279
378
17770 17771 17772 17774 17775 17776 17777 17778 17779
329
17280 17281 17282 17284 17285 17286 17287 17288 17289
379
17780 17781 17782 17784 17785 17786 17787 17788 17789
330
17290 17291 17292 17294 17295 17296 17297 17298 17299
380
17790 17791 17792 17794 17795 17796 17797 17798 17799
331
17300 17301 17302 17304 17305 17306 17307 17308 17309
381
17800 17801 17802 17804 17805 17806 17807 17808 17809
332
17310 17311 17312 17314 17315 17316 17317 17318 17319
382
17810 17811 17812 17814 17815 17816 17817 17818 17819
333
17320 17321 17322 17324 17325 17326 17327 17328 17329
383
17820 17821 17822 17824 17825 17826 17827 17828 17829
334
17330 17331 17332 17334 17335 17336 17337 17338 17339
384
17830 17831 17832 17834 17835 17836 17837 17838 17839
335
17340 17341 17342 17344 17345 17346 17347 17348 17349
385
17840 17841 17842 17844 17845 17846 17847 17848 17849
336
17350 17351 17352 17354 17355 17356 17357 17358 17359
386
17850 17851 17852 17854 17855 17856 17857 17858 17859
337
17360 17361 17362 17364 17365 17366 17367 17368 17369
387
17860 17861 17862 17864 17865 17866 17867 17868 17869
338
17370 17371 17372 17374 17375 17376 17377 17378 17379
388
17870 17871 17872 17874 17875 17876 17877 17878 17879
339
17380 17381 17382 17384 17385 17386 17387 17388 17389
389
17880 17881 17882 17884 17885 17886 17887 17888 17889
340
17390 17391 17392 17394 17395 17396 17397 17398 17399
390
17890 17891 17892 17894 17895 17896 17897 17898 17899
341
17400 17401 17402 17404 17405 17406 17407 17408 17409
391
17900 17901 17902 17904 17905 17906 17907 17908 17909
342
17410 17411 17412 17414 17415 17416 17417 17418 17419
392
17910 17911 17912 17914 17915 17916 17917 17918 17919
343
17420 17421 17422 17424 17425 17426 17427 17428 17429
393
17920 17921 17922 17924 17925 17926 17927 17928 17929
344
17430 17431 17432 17434 17435 17436 17437 17438 17439
394
17930 17931 17932 17934 17935 17936 17937 17938 17939
345
17440 17441 17442 17444 17445 17446 17447 17448 17449
395
17940 17941 17942 17944 17945 17946 17947 17948 17949

17950 17951 17952 17954 17955 17956 17957 17958 17959
346
17450 17451 17452 17454 17455 17456 17457 17458 17459
396
347
17460 17461 17462 17464 17465 17466 17467 17468 17469
397
17960 17961 17962 17964 17965 17966 17967 17968 17969
348
17470 17471 17472 17474 17475 17476 17477 17478 17479
398
17970 17971 17972 17974 17975 17976 17977 17978 17979
349
17480 17481 17482 17484 17485 17486 17487 17488 17489
399
17980 17981 17982 17984 17985 17986 17987 17988 17989
350
17490 17491 17492 17494 17495 17496 17497 17498 17499
400
17990 17991 17992 17994 17995 17996 17997 17998 17999
Appendix - 19
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
(3) For axis 3
PosiData tioning M
No. identi- code
fier
Command
Positioning
Arc data
Dwell
speed
address
PosiData tioning M
No. identi- code
fier
Command
Positioning
Arc data
Dwell
speed
address
401
18000 18001 18002 18004 18005 18006 18007 18008 18009
451
18500 18501 18502 18504 18505 18506 18507 18508 18509
402
18010 18011 18012 18014 18015 18016 18017 18018 18019
452
18510 18511 18512 18514 18515 18516 18517 18518 18519
403
18020 18021 18022 18024 18025 18026 18027 18028 18029
453
18520 18521 18522 18524 18525 18526 18527 18528 18529
404
18030 18031 18032 18034 18035 18036 18037 18038 18039
454
18530 18531 18532 18534 18535 18536 18537 18538 18539
405
18040 18041 18042 18044 18045 18046 18047 18048 18049
455
18540 18541 18542 18544 18545 18546 18547 18548 18549

18550 18551 18552 18554 18555 18556 18557 18558 18559
406
18050 18051 18052 18054 18055 18056 18057 18058 18059
456
407
18060 18061 18062 18064 18065 18066 18067 18068 18069
457
18560 18561 18562 18564 18565 18566 18567 18568 18569
408
18070 18071 18072 18074 18075 18076 18077 18078 18079
458
18570 18571 18572 18574 18575 18576 18577 18578 18579
409
18080 18081 18082 18084 18085 18086 18087 18088 18089
459
18580 18581 18582 18584 18585 18586 18587 18588 18589
410
18090 18091 18092 18094 18095 18096 18097 18098 18099
460
18590 18591 18592 18594 18595 18596 18597 18598 18599
411
18100 18101 18102 18104 18105 18106 18107 18108 18109
461
18600 18601 18602 18604 18605 18606 18607 18608 18609
412
18110 18111 18112 18114 18115 18116 18117 18118 18119
462
18610 18611 18612 18614 18615 18616 18617 18618 18619
413
18120 18121 18122 18124 18125 18126 18127 18128 18129
463
18620 18621 18622 18624 18625 18626 18627 18628 18629
414
18130 18131 18132 18134 18135 18136 18137 18138 18139
464
18630 18631 18632 18634 18635 18636 18637 18638 18639
415
18140 18141 18142 18144 18145 18146 18147 18148 18149
465
18640 18641 18642 18644 18645 18646 18647 18648 18649
416
18150 18151 18152 18154 18155 18156 18157 18158 18159
466
18650 18651 18652 18654 18655 18656 18657 18658 18659
417
18160 18161 18162 18164 18165 18166 18167 18168 18169
467
18660 18661 18662 18664 18665 18666 18667 18668 18669
418
18170 18171 18172 18174 18175 18176 18177 18178 18179
468
18670 18671 18672 18674 18675 18676 18677 18678 18679
419
18180 18181 18182 18184 18185 18186 18187 18188 18189
469
18680 18681 18682 18684 18685 18686 18687 18688 18689
420
18190 18191 18192 18194 18195 18196 18197 18198 18199
470
18690 18691 18692 18694 18695 18696 18697 18698 18699
421
18200 18201 18202 18204 18205 18206 18207 18208 18209
471
18700 18701 18702 18704 18705 18706 18707 18708 18709
422
18210 18211 18212 18214 18215 18216 18217 18218 18219
472
18710 18711 18712 18714 18715 18716 18717 18718 18719
423
18220 18221 18222 18224 18225 18226 18227 18228 18229
473
18720 18721 18722 18724 18725 18726 18727 18728 18729
424
18230 18231 18232 18234 18235 18236 18237 18238 18239
474
18730 18731 18732 18734 18735 18736 18737 18738 18739
425
18240 18241 18242 18244 18245 18246 18247 18248 18249
475
18740 18741 18742 18744 18745 18746 18747 18748 18749

18750 18751 18752 18754 18755 18756 18757 18758 18759
426
18250 18251 18252 18254 18255 18256 18257 18258 18259
476
427
18260 18261 18262 18264 18265 18266 18267 18268 18269
477
18760 18761 18762 18764 18765 18766 18767 18768 18769
428
18270 18271 18272 18274 18275 18276 18277 18278 18279
478
18770 18771 18772 18774 18775 18776 18777 18778 18779
429
18280 18281 18282 18284 18285 18286 18287 18288 18289
479
18780 18781 18782 18784 18785 18786 18787 18788 18789
430
18290 18291 18292 18294 18295 18296 18297 18298 18299
480
18790 18791 18792 18794 18795 18796 18797 18798 18799
431
18300 18301 18302 18304 18305 18306 18307 18308 18309
481
18800 18801 18802 18804 18805 18806 18807 18808 18809
432
18310 18311 18312 18314 18315 18316 18317 18318 18319
482
18810 18811 18812 18814 18815 18816 18817 18818 18819
433
18320 18321 18322 18324 18325 18326 18327 18328 18329
483
18820 18821 18822 18824 18825 18826 18827 18828 18829
434
18330 18331 18332 18334 18335 18336 18337 18338 18339
484
18830 18831 18832 18834 18835 18836 18837 18838 18839
435
18340 18341 18342 18344 18345 18346 18347 18348 18349
485
18840 18841 18842 18844 18845 18846 18847 18848 18849
436
18350 18351 18352 18354 18355 18356 18357 18358 18359
486
18850 18851 18852 18854 18855 18856 18857 18858 18859
437
18360 18361 18362 18364 18365 18366 18367 18368 18369
487
18860 18861 18862 18864 18865 18866 18867 18868 18869
438
18370 18371 18372 18374 18375 18376 18377 18378 18379
488
18870 18871 18872 18874 18875 18876 18877 18878 18879
439
18380 18381 18382 18384 18385 18386 18387 18388 18389
489
18880 18881 18882 18884 18885 18886 18887 18888 18889
440
18390 18391 18392 18394 18395 18396 18397 18398 18399
490
18890 18891 18892 18894 18895 18896 18897 18898 18899
441
18400 18401 18402 18404 18405 18406 18407 18408 18409
491
18900 18901 18902 18904 18905 18906 18907 18908 18909
442
18410 18411 18412 18414 18415 18416 18417 18418 18419
492
18910 18911 18912 18914 18915 18916 18917 18918 18919
443
18420 18421 18422 18424 18425 18426 18427 18428 18429
493
18920 18921 18922 18924 18925 18926 18927 18928 18929
444
18430 18431 18432 18434 18435 18436 18437 18438 18439
494
18930 18931 18932 18934 18935 18936 18937 18938 18939
445
18440 18441 18442 18444 18445 18446 18447 18448 18449
495
18940 18941 18942 18944 18945 18946 18947 18948 18949
446
18450 18451 18452 18454 18455 18456 18457 18458 18459
496
18950 18951 18952 18954 18955 18956 18957 18958 18959
447
18460 18461 18462 18464 18465 18466 18467 18468 18469
497
18960 18961 18962 18964 18965 18966 18967 18968 18969
448
18470 18471 18472 18474 18475 18476 18477 18478 18479
498
18970 18971 18972 18974 18975 18976 18977 18978 18979
449
18480 18481 18482 18484 18485 18486 18487 18488 18489
499
18980 18981 18982 18984 18985 18986 18987 18988 18989
450
18490 18491 18492 18494 18495 18496 18497 18498 18499
500
18990 18991 18992 18994 18995 18996 18997 18998 18999
Appendix - 20
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
(3) For axis 3
PosiData tioning M
No. identi- code
fier
Command
Positioning
Arc data
Dwell
speed
address
PosiData tioning M
No. identi- code
fier
Command
Positioning
Arc data
Dwell
speed
address
501
19000 19001 19002 19004 19005 19006 19007 19008 19009
551
19500 19501 19502 19504 19505 19506 19507 19508 19509
502
19010 19011 19012 19014 19015 19016 19017 19018 19019
552
19510 19511 19512 19514 19515 19516 19517 19518 19519
503
19020 19021 19022 19024 19025 19026 19027 19028 19029
553
19520 19521 19522 19524 19525 19526 19527 19528 19529
504
19030 19031 19032 19034 19035 19036 19037 19038 19039
554
19530 19531 19532 19534 19535 19536 19537 19538 19539
505
19040 19041 19042 19044 19045 19046 19047 19048 19049
555
19540 19541 19542 19544 19545 19546 19547 19548 19549

19550 19551 19552 19554 19555 19556 19557 19558 19559
506
19050 19051 19052 19054 19055 19056 19057 19058 19059
556
507
19060 19061 19062 19064 19065 19066 19067 19068 19069
557
19560 19561 19562 19564 19565 19566 19567 19568 19569
508
19070 19071 19072 19074 19075 19076 19077 19078 19079
558
19570 19571 19572 19574 19575 19576 19577 19578 19579
509
19080 19081 19082 19084 19085 19086 19087 19088 19089
559
19580 19581 19582 19584 19585 19586 19587 19588 19589
510
19090 19091 19092 19094 19095 19096 19097 19098 19099
560
19590 19591 19592 19594 19595 19596 19597 19598 19599
511
19100 19101 19102 19104 19105 19106 19107 19108 19109
561
19600 19601 19602 19604 19605 19606 19607 19608 19609
512
19110 19111 19112 19114 19115 19116 19117 19118 19119
562
19610 19611 19612 19614 19615 19616 19617 19618 19619
513
19120 19121 19122 19124 19125 19126 19127 19128 19129
563
19620 19621 19622 19624 19625 19626 19627 19628 19629
514
19130 19131 19132 19134 19135 19136 19137 19138 19139
564
19630 19631 19632 19634 19635 19636 19637 19638 19639
515
19140 19141 19142 19144 19145 19146 19147 19148 19149
565
19640 19641 19642 19644 19645 19646 19647 19648 19649
516
19150 19151 19152 19154 19155 19156 19157 19158 19159
566
19650 19651 19652 19654 19655 19656 19657 19658 19659
517
19160 19161 19162 19164 19165 19166 19167 19168 19169
567
19660 19661 19662 19664 19665 19666 19667 19668 19669
518
19170 19171 19172 19174 19175 19176 19177 19178 19179
568
19670 19671 19672 19674 19675 19676 19677 19678 19679
519
19180 19181 19182 19184 19185 19186 19187 19188 19189
569
19680 19681 19682 19684 19685 19686 19687 19688 19689
520
19190 19191 19192 19194 19195 19196 19197 19198 19199
570
19690 19691 19692 19694 19695 19696 19697 19698 19699
521
19200 19201 19202 19204 19205 19206 19207 19208 19209
571
19700 19701 19702 19704 19705 19706 19707 19708 19709
522
19210 19211 19212 19214 19215 19216 19217 19218 19219
572
19710 19711 19712 19714 19715 19716 19717 19718 19719
523
19220 19221 19222 19224 19225 19226 19227 19228 19229
573
19720 19721 19722 19724 19725 19726 19727 19728 19729
524
19230 19231 19232 19234 19235 19236 19237 19238 19239
574
19730 19731 19732 19734 19735 19736 19737 19738 19739
525
19240 19241 19242 19244 19245 19246 19247 19248 19249
575
19740 19741 19742 19744 19745 19746 19747 19748 19749

19750 19751 19752 19754 19755 19756 19757 19758 19759
526
19250 19251 19252 19254 19255 19256 19257 19258 19259
576
527
19260 19261 19262 19264 19265 19266 19267 19268 19269
577
19760 19761 19762 19764 19765 19766 19767 19768 19769
528
19270 19271 19272 19274 19275 19276 19277 19278 19279
578
19770 19771 19772 19774 19775 19776 19777 19778 19779
529
19280 19281 19282 19284 19285 19286 19287 19288 19289
579
19780 19781 19782 19784 19785 19786 19787 19788 19789
530
19290 19291 19292 19294 19295 19296 19297 19298 19299
580
19790 19791 19792 19794 19795 19796 19797 19798 19799
531
19300 19301 19302 19304 19305 19306 19307 19308 19309
581
19800 19801 19802 19804 19805 19806 19807 19808 19809
532
19310 19311 19312 19314 19315 19316 19317 19318 19319
582
19810 19811 19812 19814 19815 19816 19817 19818 19819
533
19320 19321 19322 19324 19325 19326 19327 19328 19329
583
19820 19821 19822 19824 19825 19826 19827 19828 19829
534
19330 19331 19332 19334 19335 19336 19337 19338 19339
584
19830 19831 19832 19834 19835 19836 19837 19838 19839
535
19340 19341 19342 19344 19345 19346 19347 19348 19349
585
19840 19841 19842 19844 19845 19846 19847 19848 19849
536
19350 19351 19352 19354 19355 19356 19357 19358 19359
586
19850 19851 19852 19854 19855 19856 19857 19858 19859
537
19360 19361 19362 19364 19365 19366 19367 19368 19369
587
19860 19861 19862 19864 19865 19866 19867 19868 19869
538
19370 19371 19372 19374 19375 19376 19377 19378 19379
588
19870 19871 19872 19874 19875 19876 19877 19878 19879
539
19380 19381 19382 19384 19385 19386 19387 19388 19389
589
19880 19881 19882 19884 19885 19886 19887 19888 19889
540
19390 19391 19392 19394 19395 19396 19397 19398 19399
590
19890 19891 19892 19894 19895 19896 19897 19898 19899
541
19400 19401 19402 19404 19405 19406 19407 19408 19409
591
19900 19901 19902 19904 19905 19906 19907 19908 19909
542
19410 19411 19412 19414 19415 19416 19417 19418 19419
592
19910 19911 19912 19914 19915 19916 19917 19918 19919
543
19420 19421 19422 19424 19425 19426 19427 19428 19429
593
19920 19921 19922 19924 19925 19926 19927 19928 19929
544
19430 19431 19432 19434 19435 19436 19437 19438 19439
594
19930 19931 19932 19934 19935 19936 19937 19938 19939
545
19440 19441 19442 19444 19445 19446 19447 19448 19449
595
19940 19941 19942 19944 19945 19946 19947 19948 19949
546
19450 19451 19452 19454 19455 19456 19457 19458 19459
596
19950 19951 19952 19954 19955 19956 19957 19958 19959
547
19460 19461 19462 19464 19465 19466 19467 19468 19469
597
19960 19961 19962 19964 19965 19966 19967 19968 19969
548
19470 19471 19472 19474 19475 19476 19477 19478 19479
598
19970 19971 19972 19974 19975 19976 19977 19978 19979
549
19480 19481 19482 19484 19485 19486 19487 19488 19489
599
19980 19981 19982 19984 19985 19986 19987 19988 19989
550
19490 19491 19492 19494 19495 19496 19497 19498 19499
600
19990 19991 19992 19994 19995 19996 19997 19998 19999
Appendix - 21
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
(4) For axis 4
PosiData tioning M
No. identi- code
fier
Command
Positioning
Arc data
Dwell
speed
address
PosiData tioning M
No. identi- code
fier
Command
Positioning
Arc data
Dwell
speed
address
20000 20001 20002 20004 20005 20006 20007 20008 20009
51
20500 20501 20502 20504 20505 20506 20507 20508 20509
20010 20011 20012 20014 20015 20016 20017 20018 20019
52
20510 20511 20512 20514 20515 20516 20517 20518 20519
20020 20021 20022 20024 20025 20026 20027 20028 20029
53
20520 20521 20522 20524 20525 20526 20527 20528 20529
20030 20031 20032 20034 20035 20036 20037 20038 20039
54
20530 20531 20532 20534 20535 20536 20537 20538 20539
20040 20041 20042 20044 20045 20046 20047 20048 20049
55
20540 20541 20542 20544 20545 20546 20547 20548 20549
20050 20051 20052 20054 20055 20056 20057 20058 20059
56
20550 20551 20552 20554 20555 20556 20557 20558 20559
20060 20061 20062 20064 20065 20066 20067 20068 20069
57
20560 20561 20562 20564 20565 20566 20567 20568 20569
20070 20071 20072 20074 20075 20076 20077 20078 20079
58
20570 20571 20572 20574 20575 20576 20577 20578 20579
20080 20081 20082 20084 20085 20086 20087 20088 20089
59
20580 20581 20582 20584 20585 20586 20587 20588 20589
10
20090 20091 20092 20094 20095 20096 20097 20098 20099
60
20590 20591 20592 20594 20595 20596 20597 20598 20599
11
20100 20101 20102 20104 20105 20106 20107 20108 20109
61
20600 20601 20602 20604 20605 20606 20607 20608 20609
12
20110 20111 20112 20114 20115 20116 20117 20118 20119
62
20610 20611 20612 20614 20615 20616 20617 20618 20619
13
20120 20121 20122 20124 20125 20126 20127 20128 20129
63
20620 20621 20622 20624 20625 20626 20627 20628 20629
14
20140 20131 20132 20134 20135 20136 20137 20138 20139
64
20630 20631 20632 20634 20635 20636 20637 20638 20639
15
20140 20141 20142 20144 20145 20146 20147 20148 20149
65
20640 20641 20642 20644 20645 20646 20647 20648 20649
16
20150 20151 20152 20154 20155 20156 20157 20158 20159
66
20650 20651 20652 20654 20655 20656 20657 20658 20659
17
20160 20161 20162 20164 20165 20166 20167 20168 20169
67
20660 20661 20662 20664 20665 20666 20667 20668 20669
18
20170 20171 20172 20174 20175 20176 20177 20178 20179
68
20670 20671 20672 20674 20675 20676 20677 20678 20679
19
20180 20181 20182 20184 20185 20186 20187 20188 20189
69
20680 20681 20682 20684 20685 20686 20687 20688 20689
20
20190 20191 20192 20194 20195 20196 20197 20198 20199
70
20690 20691 20692 20694 20695 20696 20697 20698 20699
21
20200 20201 20202 20204 20205 20206 20207 20208 20209
71
20700 20701 20702 20704 20705 20706 20707 20708 20709
22
20210 20211 20212 20214 20215 20216 20217 20218 20219
72
20710 20711 20712 20714 20715 20716 20717 20718 20719
23
20220 20221 20222 20224 20225 20226 20227 20228 20229
73
20720 20721 20722 20724 20725 20726 20727 20728 20729
24
20230 20231 20232 20234 20235 20236 20237 20238 20239
74
20730 20731 20732 20734 20735 20736 20737 20738 20739
25
20240 20241 20242 20244 20245 20246 20247 20248 20249
75
20740 20741 20742 20744 20745 20746 20747 20748 20749

20750 20751 20752 20754 20755 20756 20757 20758 20759
26
20250 20251 20252 20254 20255 20256 20257 20258 20259
76
27
20260 20261 20262 20264 20265 20266 20267 20268 20269
77
20760 20761 20762 20764 20765 20766 20767 20768 20769
28
20270 20271 20272 20274 20275 20276 20277 20278 20279
78
20770 20771 20772 20774 20775 20776 20777 20778 20779
29
20280 20281 20282 20284 20285 20286 20287 20288 20289
79
20780 20781 20782 20784 20785 20786 20787 20788 20789
30
20290 20291 20292 20294 20295 20296 20297 20298 20299
80
20790 20791 20792 20794 20795 20796 20797 20798 20799
31
20300 20301 20302 20304 20305 20306 20307 20308 20309
81
20800 20801 20802 20804 20805 20806 20807 20808 20809
32
20310 20311 20312 20314 20315 20316 20317 20318 20319
82
20810 20811 20812 20814 20815 20816 20817 20818 20819
33
20320 20321 20322 20324 20325 20326 20327 20328 20329
83
20820 20821 20822 20824 20825 20826 20827 20828 20829
34
20330 20331 20332 20334 20335 20336 20337 20338 20339
84
20830 20831 20832 20834 20835 20836 20837 20838 20839
35
20340 20341 20342 20344 20345 20346 20347 20348 20349
85
20840 20841 20842 20844 20845 20846 20847 20848 20849
36
20350 20351 20352 20354 20355 20356 20357 20358 20359
86
20850 20851 20852 20854 20855 20856 20857 20858 20859
37
20360 20361 20362 20364 20365 20366 20367 20368 20369
87
20860 20861 20862 20864 20865 20866 20867 20868 20869
38
20370 20371 20372 20374 20375 20376 20377 20378 20379
88
20870 20871 20872 20874 20875 20876 20877 20878 20879
39
20380 20381 20382 20384 20385 20386 20387 20388 20389
89
20880 20881 20882 20884 20885 20886 20887 20888 20889
40
20390 20391 20392 20394 20395 20396 20397 20398 20399
90
20890 20891 20892 20894 20895 20896 20897 20898 20899
41
20400 20401 20402 20404 20405 20406 20407 20408 20409
91
20900 20901 20902 20904 20905 20906 20907 20908 20909
42
20410 20411 20412 20414 20415 20416 20417 20418 20419
92
20910 20911 20912 20914 20915 20916 20917 20918 20919
43
20420 20421 20422 20424 20425 20426 20427 20428 20429
93
20920 20921 20922 20924 20925 20926 20927 20928 20929
44
20430 20431 20432 20434 20435 20436 20437 20438 20439
94
20930 20931 20932 20934 20935 20936 20937 20938 20939
45
20440 20441 20442 20444 20445 20446 20447 20448 20449
95
20940 20941 20942 20944 20945 20946 20947 20948 20949
46
20450 20451 20452 20454 20455 20456 20457 20458 20459
96
20950 20951 20952 20954 20955 20956 20957 20958 20959
47
20460 20461 20462 20464 20465 20466 20467 20468 20469
97
20960 20961 20962 20964 20965 20966 20967 20968 20969
48
20470 20471 20472 20474 20475 20476 20477 20478 20479
98
20970 20971 20972 20974 20975 20976 20977 20978 20979
49
20480 20481 20482 20484 20485 20486 20487 20488 20489
99
20980 20981 20982 20984 20985 20986 20987 20988 20989
50
20490 20491 20492 20494 20495 20496 20497 20498 20499
100
20990 20991 20992 20994 20995 20996 20997 20998 20999
Appendix - 22
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
(4) For axis 4
PosiData tioning M
No. identi- code
fier
Command
Positioning
Arc data
Dwell
speed
address
PosiData tioning M
No. identi- code
fier
Command
Positioning
Arc data
Dwell
speed
address
101
21000 21001 21002 21004 21005 21006 21007 21008 21009
151
21500 21501 21502 21504 21505 21506 21507 21508 21509
102
21010 21011 21012 21014 21015 21016 21017 21018 21019
152
21510 21511 21512 21514 21515 21516 21517 21518 21519
103
21020 21021 21022 21024 21025 21026 21027 21028 21029
153
21520 21521 21522 21524 21525 21526 21527 21528 21529
104
21030 21031 21032 21034 21035 21036 21037 21038 21039
154
21530 21531 21532 21534 21535 21536 21537 21538 21539
105
21040 21041 21042 21044 21045 21046 21047 21048 21049
155
21540 21541 21542 21544 21545 21546 21547 21548 21549
106
21050 21051 21052 21054 21055 21056 21057 21058 21059
156
21550 21551 21552 21554 21555 21556 21557 21558 21559
107
21060 21061 21062 21064 21065 21066 21067 21068 21069
157
21560 21561 21562 21564 21565 21566 21567 21568 21569
108
21070 21071 21072 21074 21075 21076 21077 21078 21079
158
21570 21571 21572 21574 21575 21576 21577 21578 21579
109
21080 21081 21082 21084 21085 21086 21087 21088 21089
159
21580 21581 21582 21584 21585 21586 21587 21588 21589
110
21090 21091 21092 21094 21095 21096 21097 21098 21099
160
21590 21591 21592 21594 21595 21596 21597 21598 21599
111
21100 21101 21102 21104 21105 21106 21107 21108 21109
161
21600 21601 21602 21604 21605 21606 21607 21608 21609
112
21110 21111 21112 21114 21115 21116 21117 21118 21119
162
21610 21611 21612 21614 21615 21616 21617 21618 21619
113
21120 21121 21122 21124 21125 21126 21127 21128 21129
163
21620 21621 21622 21624 21625 21626 21627 21628 21629
114
21130 21131 21132 21134 21135 21136 21137 21138 21139
164
21630 21631 21632 21634 21635 21636 21637 21638 21639
115
21140 21141 21142 21144 21145 21146 21147 21148 21149
165
21640 21641 21642 21644 21645 21646 21647 21648 21649
116
21150 21151 21152 21154 21155 21156 21157 21158 21159
166
21650 21651 21652 21654 21655 21656 21657 21658 21659
117
21160 21161 21162 21164 21165 21166 21167 21168 21169
167
21660 21661 21662 21664 21665 21666 21667 21668 21669
118
21170 21171 21172 21174 21175 21176 21177 21178 21179
168
21670 21671 21672 21674 21675 21676 21677 21678 21679
119
21180 21181 21182 21184 21185 21186 21187 21188 21189
169
21680 21681 21682 21684 21685 21686 21687 21688 21689
120
21190 21191 21192 21194 21195 21196 21197 21198 21199
170
21690 21691 21692 21694 21695 21696 21697 21698 21699
121
21200 21201 21202 21204 21205 21206 21207 21208 21209
171
21700 21701 21702 21704 21705 21706 21707 21708 21709
122
21210 21211 21212 21214 21215 21216 21217 21218 21219
172
21710 21711 21712 21714 21715 21716 21717 21718 21719
123
21220 21221 21222 21224 21225 21226 21227 21228 21229
173
21720 21721 21722 21724 21725 21726 21727 21728 21729
124
21230 21231 21232 21234 21235 21236 21237 21238 21239
174
21730 21731 21732 21734 21735 21736 21737 21738 21739
125
21240 21241 21242 21244 21245 21246 21247 21248 21249
175
21740 21741 21742 21744 21745 21746 21747 21748 21749
126
21250 21251 21252 21254 21255 21256 21257 21258 21259
176
21750 21751 21752 21754 21755 21756 21757 21758 21759
127
21260 21261 21262 21264 21265 21266 21267 21268 21269
177
21760 21761 21762 21764 21765 21766 21767 21768 21769
128
21270 21271 21272 21274 21275 21276 21277 21278 21279
178
21770 21771 21772 21774 21775 21776 21777 21778 21779
129
21280 21281 21282 21284 21285 21286 21287 21288 21289
179
21780 21781 21782 21784 21785 21786 21787 21788 21789
130
21290 21291 21292 21294 21295 21296 21297 21298 21299
180
21790 21791 21792 21794 21795 21796 21797 21798 21799
131
21300 21301 21302 21304 21305 21306 21307 21308 21309
181
21800 21801 21802 21804 21805 21806 21807 21808 21809
132
21310 21311 21312 21314 21315 21316 21317 21318 21319
182
21810 21811 21812 21814 21815 21816 21817 21818 21819
133
21320 21321 21322 21324 21325 21326 21327 21328 21329
183
21820 21821 21822 21824 21825 21826 21827 21828 21829
134
21330 21331 21332 21334 21335 21336 21337 21338 21339
184
21830 21831 21832 21834 21835 21836 21837 21838 21839
135
21340 21341 21342 21344 21345 21346 21347 21348 21349
185
21840 21841 21842 21844 21845 21846 21847 21848 21849
136
21350 21351 21352 21354 21355 21356 21357 21358 21359
186
21850 21851 21852 21854 21855 21856 21857 21858 21859
137
21360 21361 21362 21364 21365 21366 21367 21368 21369
187
21860 21861 21862 21864 21865 21866 21867 21868 21869
138
21370 21371 21372 21374 21375 21376 21377 21378 21379
188
21870 21871 21872 21874 21875 21876 21877 21878 21879
139
21380 21381 21382 21384 21385 21386 21387 21388 21389
189
21880 21881 21882 21884 21885 21886 21887 21888 21889
140
21390 21391 21392 21394 21395 21396 21397 21398 21399
190
21890 21891 21892 21894 21895 21896 21897 21898 21899
141
21400 21401 21402 21404 21405 21406 21407 21408 21409
191
21900 21901 21902 21904 21905 21906 21907 21908 21909
142
21410 21411 21412 21414 21415 21416 21417 21418 21419
192
21910 21911 21912 21914 21915 21916 21917 21918 21919
143
21420 21421 21422 21424 21425 21426 21427 21428 21429
193
21920 21921 21922 21924 21925 21926 21927 21928 21929
144
21430 21431 21432 21434 21435 21436 21437 21438 21439
194
21930 21931 21932 21934 21935 21936 21937 21938 21939
145
21440 21441 21442 21444 21445 21446 21447 21448 21449
195
21940 21941 21942 21944 21945 21946 21947 21948 21949
146
21450 21451 21452 21454 21455 21456 21457 21458 21459
196
21950 21951 21952 21954 21955 21956 21957 21958 21959
147
21460 21461 21462 21464 21465 21466 21467 21468 21469
197
21960 21961 21962 21964 21965 21966 21967 21968 21969
148
21470 21471 21472 21474 21475 21476 21477 21478 21479
198
21970 21971 21972 21974 21975 21976 21977 21978 21979
149
21480 21481 21482 21484 21485 21486 21487 21488 21489
199
21980 21981 21982 21984 21985 21986 21987 21988 21989
150
21490 21491 21492 21494 21495 21496 21497 21498 21499
200
21990 21991 21992 21994 21995 21996 21997 21998 21999
Appendix - 23
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
(4) For axis 4
PosiData tioning M
No. identi- code
fier
Command
Positioning
Arc data
Dwell
speed
address
PosiData tioning M
No. identi- code
fier
Command
Positioning
Arc data
Dwell
speed
address
201
22000 22001 22002 22004 22005 22006 22007 22008 22009
251
22500 22501 22502 22504 22505 22506 22507 22508 22509
202
22010 22011 22012 22014 22015 22016 22017 22018 22019
252
22510 22511 22512 22514 22515 22516 22517 22518 22519
203
22020 22021 22022 22024 22025 22026 22027 22028 22029
253
22520 22521 22522 22524 22525 22526 22527 22528 22529
204
22030 22031 22032 22034 22035 22036 22037 22038 22039
254
22530 22531 22532 22534 22535 22536 22537 22538 22539
205
22040 22041 22042 22044 22045 22046 22047 22048 22049
255
22540 22541 22542 22544 22545 22546 22547 22548 22549
206
22050 22051 22052 22054 22055 22056 22057 22058 22059
256
22550 22551 22552 22554 22555 22556 22557 22558 22559
207
22060 22061 22062 22064 22065 22066 22067 22068 22069
257
22560 22561 22562 22564 22565 22566 22567 22568 22569
208
22070 22071 22072 22074 22075 22076 22077 22078 22079
258
22570 22571 22572 22574 22575 22576 22577 22578 22579
209
22080 22081 22082 22084 22085 22086 22087 22088 22089
259
22580 22581 22582 22584 22585 22586 22587 22588 22589
210
22090 22091 22092 22094 22095 22096 22097 22098 22099
260
22590 22591 22592 22594 22595 22596 22597 22598 22599
211
22100 22101 22102 22104 22105 22106 22107 22108 22109
261
22600 22601 22602 22604 22605 22606 22607 22608 22609
212
22110 22111 22112 22114 22115 22116 22117 22118 22119
262
22610 22611 22612 22614 22615 22616 22617 22618 22619
213
22120 22121 22122 22124 22125 22126 22127 22128 22129
263
22620 22621 22622 22624 22625 22626 22627 22628 22629
214
22130 22131 22132 22134 22135 22136 22137 22138 22139
264
22630 22631 22632 22634 22635 22636 22637 22638 22639
215
22140 22141 22142 22144 22145 22146 22147 22148 22149
265
22640 22641 22642 22644 22645 22646 22647 22648 22649
216
22150 22151 22152 22154 22155 22156 22157 22158 22159
266
22650 22651 22652 22654 22655 22656 22657 22658 22659
217
22160 22161 22162 22164 22165 22166 22167 22168 22169
267
22660 22661 22662 22664 22665 22666 22667 22668 22669
218
22170 22171 22172 22174 22175 22176 22177 22178 22179
268
22670 22671 22672 22674 22675 22676 22677 22678 22679
219
22180 22181 22182 22184 22185 22186 22187 22188 22189
269
22680 22681 22682 22684 22685 22686 22687 22688 22689
220
22190 22191 22192 22194 22195 22196 22197 22198 22199
270
22690 22691 22692 22694 22695 22696 22697 22698 22699
221
22200 22201 22202 22204 22205 22206 22207 22208 22209
271
22700 22701 22702 22704 22705 22706 22707 22708 22709
222
22210 22211 22212 22214 22215 22216 22217 22218 22219
272
22710 22711 22712 22714 22715 22716 22717 22718 22719
223
22220 22221 22222 22224 22225 22226 22227 22228 22229
273
22720 22721 22722 22724 22725 22726 22727 22728 22729
224
22230 22231 22232 22234 22235 22236 22237 22238 22239
274
22730 22731 22732 22734 22735 22736 22737 22738 22739
225
22240 22241 22242 22244 22245 22246 22247 22248 22249
275
22740 22741 22742 22744 22745 22746 22747 22748 22749
226
22250 22251 22252 22254 22255 22256 22257 22258 22259
276
22750 22751 22752 22754 22755 22756 22757 22758 22759
227
22260 22261 22262 22264 22265 22266 22267 22268 22269
277
22760 22761 22762 22764 22765 22766 22767 22768 22769
228
22270 22271 22272 22274 22275 22276 22277 22278 22279
278
22770 22771 22772 22774 22775 22776 22777 22778 22779
229
22280 22281 22282 22284 22285 22286 22287 22288 22289
279
22780 22781 22782 22784 22785 22786 22787 22788 22789
230
22290 22291 22292 22294 22295 22296 22297 22298 22299
280
22790 22791 22792 22794 22795 22796 22797 22798 22799
231
22300 22301 22302 22304 22305 22306 22307 22308 22309
281
22800 22801 22802 22804 22805 22806 22807 22808 22809
232
22310 22311 22312 22314 22315 22316 22317 22318 22319
282
22810 22811 22812 22814 22815 22816 22817 22818 22819
233
22320 22321 22322 22324 22325 22326 22327 22328 22329
283
22820 22821 22822 22824 22825 22826 22827 22828 22829
234
22330 22331 22332 22334 22335 22336 22337 22338 22339
284
22830 22831 22832 22834 22835 22836 22837 22838 22839
235
22340 22341 22342 22344 22345 22346 22347 22348 22349
285
22840 22841 22842 22844 22845 22846 22847 22848 22849
236
22350 22351 22352 22354 22355 22356 22357 22358 22359
286
22850 22851 22852 22854 22855 22856 22857 22858 22859
237
22360 22361 22362 22364 22365 22366 22367 22368 22369
287
22860 22861 22862 22864 22865 22866 22867 22868 22869
238
22370 22371 22372 22374 22375 22376 22377 22378 22379
288
22870 22871 22872 22874 22875 22876 22877 22878 22879
239
22380 22381 22382 22384 22385 22386 22387 22388 22389
289
22880 22881 22882 22884 22885 22886 22887 22888 22889
240
22390 22391 22392 22394 22395 22396 22397 22398 22399
290
22890 22891 22892 22894 22895 22896 22897 22898 22899
241
22400 22401 22402 22404 22405 22406 22407 22408 22409
291
22900 22901 22902 22904 22905 22906 22907 22908 22909
242
22410 22411 22412 22414 22415 22416 22417 22418 22419
292
22910 22911 22912 22914 22915 22916 22917 22918 22919
243
22420 22421 22422 22424 22425 22426 22427 22428 22429
293
22920 22921 22922 22924 22925 22926 22927 22928 22929
244
22430 22431 22432 22434 22435 22436 22437 22438 22439
294
22930 22931 22932 22934 22935 22936 22937 22938 22939
245
22440 22441 22442 22444 22445 22446 22447 22448 22449
295
22940 22941 22942 22944 22945 22946 22947 22948 22949
246
22450 22451 22452 22454 22455 22456 22457 22458 22459
296
22950 22951 22952 22954 22955 22956 22957 22958 22959
247
22460 22461 22462 22464 22465 22466 22467 22468 22469
297
22960 22961 22962 22964 22965 22966 22967 22968 22969
248
22470 22471 22472 22474 22475 22476 22477 22478 22479
298
22970 22971 22972 22974 22975 22976 22977 22978 22979
249
22480 22481 22482 22484 22485 22486 22487 22488 22489
299
22980 22981 22982 22984 22985 22986 22987 22988 22989
250
22490 22491 22492 22494 22495 22496 22497 22498 22499
300
22990 22991 22992 22994 22995 22996 22997 22998 22999
Appendix - 24
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
(4) For axis 4
PosiData tioning M
No. identi- code
fier
Command
Positioning
Arc data
Dwell
speed
address
PosiData tioning M
No. identi- code
fier
Command
Positioning
Arc data
Dwell
speed
address
301
23000 23001 23002 23004 23005 23006 23007 23008 23009
351
23500 23501 23502 23504 23505 23506 23507 23508 23509
302
23010 23011 23012 23014 23015 23016 23017 23018 23019
352
23510 23511 23512 23514 23515 23516 23517 23518 23519
303
23020 23021 23022 23024 23025 23026 23027 23028 23029
353
23520 23521 23522 23524 23525 23526 23527 23528 23529
304
23030 23031 23032 23034 23035 23036 23037 23038 23039
354
23530 23531 23532 23534 23535 23536 23537 23538 23539
305
23040 23041 23042 23044 23045 23046 23047 23048 23049
355
23540 23541 23542 23544 23545 23546 23547 23548 23549
306
23050 23051 23052 23054 23055 23056 23057 23058 23059
356
23550 23551 23552 23554 23555 23556 23557 23558 23559
307
23060 23061 23062 23064 23065 23066 23067 23068 23069
357
23560 23561 23562 23564 23565 23566 23567 23568 23569
308
23070 23071 23072 23074 23075 23076 23077 23078 23079
358
23570 23571 23572 23574 23575 23576 23577 23578 23579
309
23080 23081 23082 23084 23085 23086 23087 23088 23089
359
23580 23581 23582 23584 23585 23586 23587 23588 23589
310
23090 23091 23092 23094 23095 23096 23097 23098 23099
360
23590 23591 23592 23594 23595 23596 23597 23598 23599
311
23100 23101 23102 23104 23105 23106 23107 23108 23109
361
23600 23601 23602 23604 23605 23606 23607 23608 23609
312
23110 23111 23112 23114 23115 23116 23117 23118 23119
362
23610 23611 23612 23614 23615 23616 23617 23618 23619
313
23120 23121 23122 23124 23125 23126 23127 23128 23129
363
23620 23621 23622 23624 23625 23626 23627 23628 23629
314
23130 23131 23132 23134 23135 23136 23137 23138 23139
364
23630 23631 23632 23634 23635 23636 23637 23638 23639
315
23140 23141 23142 23144 23145 23146 23147 23148 23149
365
23640 23641 23642 23644 23645 23646 23647 23648 23649
316
23150 23151 23152 23154 23155 23156 23157 23158 23159
366
23650 23651 23652 23654 23655 23656 23657 23658 23659
317
23160 23161 23162 23164 23165 23166 23167 23168 23169
367
23660 23661 23662 23664 23665 23666 23667 23668 23669
318
23170 23171 23172 23174 23175 23176 23177 23178 23179
368
23670 23671 23672 23674 23675 23676 23677 23678 23679
319
23180 23181 23182 23184 23185 23186 23187 23188 23189
369
23680 23681 23682 23684 23685 23686 23687 23688 23689
320
23190 23191 23192 23194 23195 23196 23197 23198 23199
370
23690 23691 23692 23694 23695 23696 23697 23698 23699
321
23200 23201 23202 23204 23205 23206 23207 23208 23209
371
23700 23701 23702 23704 23705 23706 23707 23708 23709
322
23210 23211 23212 23214 23215 23216 23217 23218 23219
372
23710 23711 23712 23714 23715 23716 23717 23718 23719
323
23220 23221 23222 23224 23225 23226 23227 23228 23229
373
23720 23721 23722 23724 23725 23726 23727 23728 23729
324
23230 23231 23232 23234 23235 23236 23237 23238 23239
374
23730 23731 23732 23734 23735 23736 23737 23738 23739
325
23240 23241 23242 23244 23245 23246 23247 23248 23249
375
23740 23741 23742 23744 23745 23746 23747 23748 23749
326
23250 23251 23252 23254 23255 23256 23257 23258 23259
376
23750 23751 23752 23754 23755 23756 23757 23758 23759
327
23260 23261 23262 23264 23265 23266 23267 23268 23269
377
23760 23761 23762 23764 23765 23766 23767 23768 23769
328
23270 23271 23272 23274 23275 23276 23277 23278 23279
378
23770 23771 23772 23774 23775 23776 23777 23778 23779
329
23280 23281 23282 23284 23285 23286 23287 23288 23289
379
23780 23781 23782 23784 23785 23786 23787 23788 23789
330
23290 23291 23292 23294 23295 23296 23297 23298 23299
380
23790 23791 23792 23794 23795 23796 23797 23798 23799
331
23300 23301 23302 23304 23305 23306 23307 23308 23309
381
23800 23801 23802 23804 23805 23806 23807 23808 23809
332
23310 23311 23312 23314 23315 23316 23317 23318 23319
382
23810 23811 23812 23814 23815 23816 23817 23818 23819
333
23320 23321 23322 23324 23325 23326 23327 23328 23329
383
23820 23821 23822 23824 23825 23826 23827 23828 23829
334
23330 23331 23332 23334 23335 23336 23337 23338 23339
384
23830 23831 23832 23834 23835 23836 23837 23838 23839
335
23340 23341 23342 23344 23345 23346 23347 23348 23349
385
23840 23841 23842 23844 23845 23846 23847 23848 23849
336
23350 23351 23352 23354 23355 23356 23357 23358 23359
386
23850 23851 23852 23854 23855 23856 23857 23858 23859
337
23360 23361 23362 23364 23365 23366 23367 23368 23369
387
23860 23861 23862 23864 23865 23866 23867 23868 23869
338
23370 23371 23372 23374 23375 23376 23377 23378 23379
388
23870 23871 23872 23874 23875 23876 23877 23878 23879
339
23380 23381 23382 23384 23385 23386 23387 23388 23389
389
23880 23881 23882 23884 23885 23886 23887 23888 23889
340
23390 23391 23392 23394 23395 23396 23397 23398 23399
390
23890 23891 23892 23894 23895 23896 23897 23898 23899
341
23400 23401 23402 23404 23405 23406 23407 23408 23409
391
23900 23901 23902 23904 23905 23906 23907 23908 23909
342
23410 23411 23412 23414 23415 23416 23417 23418 23419
392
23910 23911 23912 23914 23915 23916 23917 23918 23919
343
23420 23421 23422 23424 23425 23426 23427 23428 23429
393
23920 23921 23922 23924 23925 23926 23927 23928 23929
344
23430 23431 23432 23434 23435 23436 23437 23438 23439
394
23930 23931 23932 23934 23935 23936 23937 23938 23939
345
23440 23441 23442 23444 23445 23446 23447 23448 23449
395
23940 23941 23942 23944 23945 23946 23947 23948 23949
346
23450 23451 23452 23454 23455 23456 23457 23458 23459
396
23950 23951 23952 23954 23955 23956 23957 23958 23959
347
23460 23461 23462 23464 23465 23466 23467 23468 23469
397
23960 23961 23962 23964 23965 23966 23967 23968 23969
348
23470 23471 23472 23474 23475 23476 23477 23478 23479
398
23970 23971 23972 23974 23975 23976 23977 23978 23979
349
23480 23481 23482 23484 23485 23486 23487 23488 23489
399
23980 23981 23982 23984 23985 23986 23987 23988 23989
350
23490 23491 23492 23494 23495 23496 23497 23498 23499
400
23990 23991 23992 23994 23995 23996 23997 23998 23999
Appendix - 25
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
(4) For axis 4
PosiData tioning M
No. identi- code
fier
Command
Positioning
Arc data
Dwell
speed
address
PosiData tioning M
No. identi- code
fier
Command
Positioning
Arc data
Dwell
speed
address
401
24000 24001 24002 24004 24005 24006 24007 24008 24009
451
24500 24501 24502 24504 24505 24506 24507 24508 24509
402
24010 24011 24012 24014 24015 24016 24017 24018 24019
452
24510 24511 24512 24514 24515 24516 24517 24518 24519
403
24020 24021 24022 24024 24025 24026 24027 24028 24029
453
24520 24521 24522 24524 24525 24526 24527 24528 24529
404
24030 24031 24032 24034 24035 24036 24037 24038 24039
454
24530 24531 24532 24534 24535 24536 24537 24538 24539
405
24040 24041 24042 24044 24045 24046 24047 24048 24049
455
24540 24541 24542 24544 24545 24546 24547 24548 24549
406
24050 24051 24052 24054 24055 24056 24057 24058 24059
456
24550 24551 24552 24554 24555 24556 24557 24558 24559
407
24060 24061 24062 24064 24065 24066 24067 24068 24069
457
24560 24561 24562 24564 24565 24566 24567 24568 24569
408
24070 24071 24072 24074 24075 24076 24077 24078 24079
458
24570 24571 24572 24574 24575 24576 24577 24578 24579
409
24080 24081 24082 24084 24085 24086 24087 24088 24089
459
24580 24581 24582 24584 24585 24586 24587 24588 24589
410
24090 24091 24092 24094 24095 24096 24097 24098 24099
460
24590 24591 24592 24594 24595 24596 24597 24598 24599
411
24100 24101 24102 24104 24105 24106 24107 24108 24109
461
24600 24601 24602 24604 24605 24606 24607 24608 24609
412
24110 24111 24112 24114 24115 24116 24117 24118 24119
462
24610 24611 24612 24614 24615 24616 24617 24618 24619
413
24120 24121 24122 24124 24125 24126 24127 24128 24129
463
24620 24621 24622 24624 24625 24626 24627 24628 24629
414
24130 24131 24132 24134 24135 24136 24137 24138 24139
464
24630 24631 24632 24634 24635 24636 24637 24638 24639
415
24140 24141 24142 24144 24145 24146 24147 24148 24149
465
24640 24641 24642 24644 24645 24646 24647 24648 24649

24650 24651 24652 24654 24655 24656 24657 24658 24659
416
24150 24151 24152 24154 24155 24156 24157 24158 24159
466
417
24160 24161 24162 24164 24165 24166 24167 24168 24169
467
24660 24661 24662 24664 24665 24666 24667 24668 24669
418
24170 24171 24172 24174 24175 24176 24177 24178 24179
468
24670 24671 24672 24674 24675 24676 24677 24678 24679
419
24180 24181 24182 24184 24185 24186 24187 24188 24189
469
24680 24681 24682 24684 24685 24686 24687 24688 24689
420
24190 24191 24192 24194 24195 24196 24197 24198 24199
470
24690 24691 24692 24694 24695 24696 24697 24698 24699
421
24200 24201 24202 24204 24205 24206 24207 24208 24209
471
24700 24701 24702 24704 24705 24706 24707 24708 24709
422
24210 24211 24212 24214 24215 24216 24217 24218 24219
472
24710 24711 24712 24714 24715 24716 24717 24718 24719
423
24220 24221 24222 24224 24225 24226 24227 24228 24229
473
24720 24721 24722 24724 24725 24726 24727 24728 24729
424
24230 24231 24232 24234 24235 24236 24237 24238 24239
474
24730 24731 24732 24734 24735 24736 24737 24738 24739
425
24240 24241 24242 24244 24245 24246 24247 24248 24249
475
24740 24741 24742 24744 24745 24746 24747 24748 24749
426
24250 24251 24252 24254 24255 24256 24257 24258 24259
476
24750 24751 24752 24754 24755 24756 24757 24758 24759
427
24260 24261 24262 24264 24265 24266 24267 24268 24269
477
24760 24761 24762 24764 24765 24766 24767 24768 24769
428
24270 24271 24272 24274 24275 24276 24277 24278 24279
478
24770 24771 24772 24774 24775 24776 24777 24778 24779
429
24280 24281 24282 24284 24285 24286 24287 24288 24289
479
24780 24781 24782 24784 24785 24786 24787 24788 24789
430
24290 24291 24292 24294 24295 24296 24297 24298 24299
480
24790 24791 24792 24794 24795 24796 24797 24798 24799
431
24300 24301 24302 24304 24305 24306 24307 24308 24309
481
24800 24801 24802 24804 24805 24806 24807 24808 24809
432
24310 24311 24312 24314 24315 24316 24317 24318 24319
482
24810 24811 24812 24814 24815 24816 24817 24818 24819
433
24320 24321 24322 24324 24325 24326 24327 24328 24329
483
24820 24821 24822 24824 24825 24826 24827 24828 24829
434
24330 24331 24332 24334 24335 24336 24337 24338 24339
484
24830 24831 24832 24834 24835 24836 24837 24838 24839
435
24340 24341 24342 24344 24345 24346 24347 24348 24349
485
24840 24841 24842 24844 24845 24846 24847 24848 24849

24850 24851 24852 24854 24855 24856 24857 24858 24859
436
24350 24351 24352 24354 24355 24356 24357 24358 24359
486
437
24360 24361 24362 24364 24365 24366 24367 24368 24369
487
24860 24861 24862 24864 24865 24866 24867 24868 24869
438
24370 24371 24372 24374 24375 24376 24377 24378 24379
488
24870 24871 24872 24874 24875 24876 24877 24878 24879
439
24380 24381 24382 24384 24385 24386 24387 24388 24389
489
24880 24881 24882 24884 24885 24886 24887 24888 24889
440
24390 24391 24392 24394 24395 24396 24397 24398 24399
490
24890 24891 24892 24894 24895 24896 24897 24898 24899
441
24400 24401 24402 24404 24405 24406 24407 24408 24409
491
24900 24901 24902 24904 24905 24906 24907 24908 24909
442
24410 24411 24412 24414 24415 24416 24417 24418 24419
492
24910 24911 24912 24914 24915 24916 24917 24918 24919
443
24420 24421 24422 24424 24425 24426 24427 24428 24429
493
24920 24921 24922 24924 24925 24926 24927 24928 24929
444
24430 24431 24432 24434 24435 24436 24437 24438 24439
494
24930 24931 24932 24934 24935 24936 24937 24938 24939
445
24440 24441 24442 24444 24445 24446 24447 24448 24449
495
24940 24941 24942 24944 24945 24946 24947 24948 24949
446
24450 24451 24452 24454 24455 24456 24457 24458 24459
496
24950 24951 24952 24954 24955 24956 24957 24958 24959
447
24460 24461 24462 24464 24465 24466 24467 24468 24469
497
24960 24961 24962 24964 24965 24966 24967 24968 24969
448
24470 24471 24472 24474 24475 24476 24477 24478 24479
498
24970 24971 24972 24974 24975 24976 24977 24978 24979
449
24480 24481 24482 24484 24485 24486 24487 24488 24489
499
24980 24981 24982 24984 24985 24986 24987 24988 24989
450
24490 24491 24492 24494 24495 24496 24497 24498 24499
500
24990 24991 24992 24994 24995 24996 24997 24998 24999
Appendix - 26
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
(4) For axis 4
PosiData tioning M
No. identi- code
fier
Command
Positioning
Arc data
Dwell
speed
address
PosiData tioning M
No. identi- code
fier
Command
Positioning
Arc data
Dwell
speed
address
501
25000 25001 25002 25004 25005 25006 25007 25008 25009
551
25500 25501 25502 25504 25505 25506 25507 25508 25509
502
25010 25011 25012 25014 25015 25016 25017 25018 25019
552
25510 25511 25512 25514 25515 25516 25517 25518 25519
503
25020 25021 25022 25024 25025 25026 25027 25028 25029
553
25520 25521 25522 25524 25525 25526 25527 25528 25529
504
25030 25031 25032 25034 25035 25036 25037 25038 25039
554
25530 25531 25532 25534 25535 25536 25537 25538 25539
505
25040 25041 25042 25044 25045 25046 25047 25048 25049
555
25540 25541 25542 25544 25545 25546 25547 25548 25549
506
25050 25051 25052 25054 25055 25056 25057 25058 25059
556
25550 25551 25552 25554 25555 25556 25557 25558 25559
507
25060 25061 25062 25064 25065 25066 25067 25068 25069
557
25560 25561 25562 25564 25565 25566 25567 25568 25569
508
25070 25071 25072 25074 25075 25076 25077 25078 25079
558
25570 25571 25572 25574 25575 25576 25577 25578 25579
509
25080 25081 25082 25084 25085 25086 25087 25088 25089
559
25580 25581 25582 25584 25585 25586 25587 25588 25589
510
25090 25091 25092 25094 25095 25096 25097 25098 25099
560
25590 25591 25592 25594 25595 25596 25597 25598 25599
511
25100 25101 25102 25104 25105 25106 25107 25108 25109
561
25600 25601 25602 25604 25605 19606 19607 19608 19609
512
25110 25111 25112 25114 25115 25116 25117 25118 25119
562
25610 25611 25612 25614 25615 19616 19617 19618 19619
513
25120 25121 25122 25124 25125 25126 25127 25128 25129
563
25620 25621 25622 25624 25625 19626 19627 19628 25629
514
25130 25131 25132 25134 25135 25136 25137 25138 25139
564
25630 25631 25632 25634 25635 19636 19637 19638 25639
515
25140 25141 25142 25144 25145 25146 25147 25148 25149
565
25640 25641 25642 25644 25645 19646 19647 19648 25649

25650 25651 25652 25654 25655 25656 25657 25658 25659
516
25150 25151 25152 25154 25155 25156 25157 25158 25159
566
517
25160 25161 25162 25164 25165 25166 25167 25168 25169
567
25660 25661 25662 25664 25665 25666 25667 25668 25669
518
25170 25171 25172 25174 25175 25176 25177 25178 25179
568
25670 25671 25672 25674 25675 25676 25677 25678 25679
519
25180 25181 25182 25184 25185 25186 25187 25188 25189
569
25680 25681 25682 25684 25685 25686 25687 25688 25689
520
25190 25191 25192 25194 25195 25196 25197 25198 25199
570
25690 25691 25692 25694 25695 25696 25697 25698 25699
521
25200 25201 25202 25204 25205 25206 25207 25208 25209
571
25700 25701 25702 25704 25705 25706 25707 25708 25709
522
25210 25211 25212 25214 25215 25216 25217 25218 25219
572
25710 25711 25712 25714 25715 25716 25717 25718 25719
523
25220 25221 25222 25224 25225 25226 25227 25228 25229
573
25720 25721 25722 25724 25725 25726 25727 25728 25729
524
25230 25231 25232 25234 25235 25236 25237 25238 25239
574
25730 25731 25732 25734 25735 25736 25737 25738 25739
525
25240 25241 25242 25244 25245 25246 25247 25248 25249
575
25740 25741 25742 25744 25745 25746 25747 25748 25749
526
25250 25251 25252 25254 25255 25256 25257 25258 25259
576
25750 25751 25752 25754 25755 25756 25757 25758 25759
527
25260 25261 25262 25264 25265 25266 25267 25268 25269
577
25760 25761 25762 25764 25765 25766 25767 25768 25769
528
25270 25271 25272 25274 25275 25276 25277 25278 25279
578
25770 25771 25772 25774 25775 25776 25777 25778 25779
529
25280 25281 25282 25284 25285 25286 25287 25288 25289
579
25780 25781 25782 25784 25785 25786 25787 25788 25789
530
25290 25291 25292 25294 25295 25296 25297 25298 25299
580
25790 25791 25792 25794 25795 25796 25797 25798 25799
531
25300 25301 25302 25304 25305 25306 25307 25308 25309
581
25800 25801 25802 25804 25805 25806 25807 25808 25809
532
25310 25311 25312 25314 25315 25316 25317 25318 25319
582
25810 25811 25812 25814 25815 25816 25817 25818 25819
533
25320 25321 25322 25324 25325 25326 25327 25328 25329
583
25820 25821 25822 25824 25825 25826 25827 25828 25829
534
25330 25331 25332 25334 25335 25336 25337 25338 25339
584
25830 25831 25832 25834 25835 25836 25837 25838 25839
535
25340 25341 25342 25344 25345 25346 25347 25348 25349
585
25840 25841 25842 25844 25845 25846 25847 25848 25849

25850 25851 25852 25854 25855 25856 25857 25858 25859
536
25350 25351 25352 25354 25355 25356 25357 25358 25359
586
537
25360 25361 25362 25364 25365 25366 25367 25368 25369
587
25860 25861 25862 25864 25865 25866 25867 25868 25869
538
25370 25371 25372 25374 25375 25376 25377 25378 25379
588
25870 25871 25872 25874 25875 25876 25877 25878 25879
539
25380 25381 25382 25384 25385 25386 25387 25388 25389
589
25880 25881 25882 25884 25885 25886 25887 25888 25889
540
25390 25391 25392 25394 25395 25396 25397 25398 25399
590
25890 25891 25892 25894 25895 25896 25897 25898 25899
541
25400 25401 25402 25404 25405 25406 25407 25408 25409
591
25900 25901 25902 25904 25905 25906 25907 25908 25909
542
25410 25411 25412 25414 25415 25416 25417 25418 25419
592
25910 25911 25912 25914 25915 25916 25917 25918 25919
543
25420 25421 25422 25424 25425 25426 25427 25428 25429
593
25920 25921 25922 25924 25925 25926 25927 25928 25929
544
25430 25431 25432 25434 25435 25436 25437 25438 25439
594
25930 25931 25932 25934 25935 25936 25937 25938 25939
545
25440 25441 25442 25444 25445 25446 25447 25448 25449
595
25940 25941 25942 25944 25945 25946 25947 25948 25949
546
25450 25451 25452 25454 25455 25456 25457 25458 25459
596
25950 25951 25952 25954 25955 25956 25957 25958 25959
547
25460 25461 25462 25464 25465 25466 25467 25468 25469
597
25960 25961 25962 25964 25965 25966 25967 25968 25969
548
25470 25471 25472 25474 25475 25476 25477 25478 25479
598
25970 25971 25972 25974 25975 25976 25977 25978 25979
549
25480 25481 25482 25484 25485 25486 25487 25488 25489
599
25980 25981 25982 25984 25985 25986 25987 25988 25989
550
25490 25491 25492 25494 25495 25496 25497 25498 25499
600
25990 25991 25992 25994 25995 25996 25997 25998 25999
Appendix - 27
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
Appendix 3 Connection with servo amplifiers

Appendix 3.1 Connection of SSCNET cables
As the SSCNET cables or termination connector is different depending on the servo
amplifiers, refer to the following connection example.
The SSCNET cables and termination connector used in the connection example are
any of the models shown in the following table.
When absolute position detection control is executed, installed battery (MR-BAT/
A6BAT) to servo amplifier.
Part name
Model name
Depiction in
connection example
MR-HBUSM
0.5m (1.64ft.), 1m (3.28ft.),
5m (16.4ft.)
SSCNET cable
Description
Connection between (MR-H-BN/MR-H-BN4) and (MR-HBN/ MR-H-BN4).
Connection between QD75M and (MR-J2-B/MR-J2S-B/
MR-J2-Jr/MR-J2M-B).
Connection between (MR-J2-B/MR-J2S-B/ MR-J2-Jr/MRJ2M-B) and (MR-J2-B/MR-J2S-B/ MR-J2-Jr/MR-J2M-B).
MR-J2HBUSM
0.5m (1.64ft.), 1m (3.28ft.),
5m (16.4ft.)
Connection between (QD75M/MR-J2-B/MR-J2S-B/ MRJ2-Jr/MR-J2M-B) and (MR-H-BN/MR-H-BN4).
MR-J2HBUSM-A
0.5m (1.64ft.), 1m (3.28ft.),
5m (16.4ft.)
MR-TM
Connected to the last servo amplifier (MR-H-BN/MR-HBN4) by SSCNET.
MR-A-TM
Connected to the last servo amplifier (MR-J2-B/MR-J2S-B/

MR-J2-Jr/MR-J2M-B) by SSCNET.
Termination connector
Appendix - 28
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
(1) MR-H-BN/MR-H-BN4 configuration
MR-H-BN
MR-H-BN4
QD75
MR-H-BN
MR-H-BN4
MR-H-BN
MR-H-BN4
Termination
connector
Battery
Battery
Battery
MR-BAT,
A6BAT
MR-BAT,
A6BAT
MR-BAT,
A6BAT
(2) MR-J2-B configuration

QD75
MR-J2 -B
MR-J2 -B
MR-J2 -B
Termination
connector
Battery
Battery
Battery
MR-BAT,
A6BAT
MR-BAT,
A6BAT
MR-BAT,
A6BAT
(3) MR-J2-B/MR-H-BN/MR-H-BN4 configuration

QD75
MR-J2 -B
MR-J2 -B
MR-H-BN
MR-H-BN4
Termination
connector
QD75
Battery
Battery
Battery
MR-BAT,
A6BAT
MR-BAT,
A6BAT
MR-BAT,
A6BAT
MR-J2 -B
MR-H-BN
MR-H-BN4
MR-H-BN
MR-H-BN4
Termination
connector
QD75
Battery
Battery
Battery
MR-BAT,
A6BAT
MR-BAT,
A6BAT
MR-BAT,
A6BAT
MR-J2 -B
MR-H-BN
MR-H-BN4
MR-J2 -B
Termination
connector
Battery
Battery
Battery
MR-BAT,
A6BAT
MR-BAT,
A6BAT
MR-BAT,
A6BAT
Appendix - 29
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
Appendix 3.2 Wiring of SSCNET cables

Generally use the SSCNET cables available as our options. If the required length is
not found in our options, fabricate the cable on the customer side.
(1) SSCNET cable

The following table indicates the SSCNET cables used with each motion
controller and the servo amplifiers. Make selection according to your operating
conditions.
Table 1 Table of SSCNET cable

Type
Description
MR-HBUSM

MR-J2HBUSM
Connection between QD75M and (MR-J2-B/MR-J2S-B/MR-J2Jr/MR-J2M-B)

Connection between (MR-J2-B/MR-J2S-B/MR-J2-Jr/MR-J2M-B) and
(MR-J2-B/MR-J2S-B/MR-J2-Jr/MR-J2M-B).
MR-J2HBUSM-A
Connection between QD75M/MR-J2-B/MR-J2S-B/MR-J2-Jr/MRJ2M-B and MR-H-BN/MR-H-BN4.

Use the following or equivalent twisted pair cables as the SSCNET cables.
Table 2 Table of wire model

Type
Length [m(ft.)]
Wire model
MR-HBUSM
A14B2343 6 Pair
0.5(1.64), 1(3.28), 5(16.4)
MR-J2HBUSM
MR-J2HBUSM-A
UL20276
AWG#28 10 pair(CREAM)
Table 3 Table of wire specifications

Characteristics of one core
Core
size
2
[mm ]
Wire model
Number of
cores
Structure
[Number of
wires/mm]
Conductor
resistance
[ /km]
Insulating
sheath OD
d[mm]
Finish OD
[mm]
(Note-2)
(Note-1)
A14B2343 6P
0.2
12(6 pairs)
40/0.08
Max.105
0.88
7.2
UL20276 AWG#28 10 pair(CREAM)
0.08
20(10 pairs)
7/0.127
Max.222
0.38
6.1
(Note-1): d is as shown below.

d
Insulation sheath
Conductor
(Note-2): Standard OD. Max. OD is about 10% larger.
CAUTION
When fabricating the bus cable, do not make incorrect connection. Wrong connection will cause
runaway or explosion.
Appendix - 30
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
(a) MR-HBUSM
1) Model explanation
Type: MR-HBUS
Symbol
Cable length [m(ft.)]
05
1
5
0.5(1.64)
1(3.28)
5(16.4)
Connector: HONDA connectors make

PCR-S20FS, PCR-LS20LA1
2) Connection diagram
When fabricating a cable, use the recommended wire given on
Appendix 3.2, and make the cable as show in the following connection
diagram. The overall distance of the SSCNET cables on the same bus
is 30m(98.4ft.) .
MR-HBUS M
PCR-S20FS (connector)
PCR-LS20LA1 (connector case)
Maker: Honda connectors
PCR-LS20LA1 (connector case)
LG
LG
LG
11
11
LG
RD
RD
12
12
TD*
LG
14
5
14
5
TD*
LG
LG
15
15
LG
RD*
TD
EMG
RD*
TD
EMG
16
16
BT
BT
SD
20
20
SD
EMG*
EMG*
:Twisted pair cable
Appendix - 31
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
(b)
MR-J2HBUSM
Type: MR-J2HBUS M
Symbol
05
1
5

0.5(1.64)
1(3.28)
5(16.4)
Connector: Sumitomo 3M make

Insulation displacement type10120-6000EL, 10320-3210-000
Solder connection type..10120-3000VE, 10320-52F0-008
is 30m(98.4ft.) .
MR-J2HBUS M
10120-6000EL (connector)
10320-3210-000 (shell kit)
Maker: 3M
10320-3210-000 (shell kit)
Maker: 3M
LG
LG
LG
11
11
LG
RD
RD*
2
12
3
13
4
14
RD
RD*
TD
TD*
2
12
3
13
4
14
LG
LG
5
15
5
15
6
16
LG
LG
7
17
8
18
EMG
EMG*
9
19
10
20
BT
shell
SD
6
16
EMG
7
EMG* 17
8
18
BT
9
19
10
20
SD
shell
TD
TD*
:Twisted pair cable
Appendix - 32
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
(c) MR-J2HBUSM-A
Type: MR-J2HBUS
M-A
Symbol
05
1
5
0.5(1.64)
1(3.28)
5(16.4)
Connector: Sumitomo 3M make

Insulation displacement type10120-6000EL, 10320-3210-000
Solder connection type..10120-3000VE, 10320-52F0-008
is 30m(98.4ft.) .
MR-J2HBUS M-A
PCR-LS20LA1 (connector case) 10320-3210-000 (shell kit)
Maker: 3M
1
11
2
12
4
14
5
15
1
11
2
12
4
14
5
15
LG
LG
RD
RD*
TD
TD*
LG
LG
6
EMG
EMG* 16
7
17
EMG
EMG*
20
shell
LG
LG
RD
RD*
TD
TD*
LG
LG
SD
SD
:Twisted pair cable
Appendix - 33
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
Appendix 4 Connection with external device connector

Appendix 4.1 Connector
Mounted onto an external device connector of the QD75 and used for wiring an
external device. The "external device connector" includes the following 4 types.
(1) Appearance
A6CON1
A6CON2
A6CON3
A6CON4
(2) Specifications of the connector

Part name
Applicable connector
Specification
A6CON1, A6CON4
0.3 mm
A6CON2
AWG#24 to 28
A6CON3
AWG#28 (twisted)/
AWG#30 (single wire)
: The external device connector has been prepared.

A6CON2 Crimp-contact tool
Model name: FCN-363T-T005/H
A6CON3 Pressure-displacement tool

Model name: FCN-367T-T012/H (locator plate)
: FCN-707T-T001/H (cable cutter)
: FCN-707T-T101/H (hand press)
Supplier's offices:
FUJITSU TAKAMISAWA AMERICA, INC
250E Caribbean Drive Sunnyvale, CA 94089 U.S.A

Tel: (1-408) 745-4900
FUJITSU TAKAMISAWA EUROPE B.V. Jupiterstaat 13-15, our 2132 Hoofddorp, The Netherland
Tel: (31) 23-5560910
FUJITSU TAKAMISAWA EUROPE B.V. Schatzbogen 86 D-81829 Munchen Germany
Zweiniederlassung Deutschland
Tel: (49) 89-42742320
FUJITSU TAKAMISAWA EUROPE (U K) Network House, Morres Drive, Maidenhead, Berkshire,
SL6 4FJ United Kingdom
Tel: (44) 1628-504600
FUJITSU TAKAMISAWA EUROPE B.V. 127 Chemin Des Bassins, Europarc, Cleteril 94035
Cleterll 94035 France
Tel: (33) 145139940
FUJITSU TAKAMISAWA ASIA PACIFIC 102E Pasir Panjang Road, # 04-01 Citilink
PTE LIMITED
Warehouse Complex, Singapore 118529
Tel: (65) 375-8560
FUJITSU TAKAMISAWA HONG KONG
Suite 913 Ocean Centre, 5 Canton Road. TST,
Co., LTD
Kowloon, Hong Kong
Tel: (852) 2881-8495
Appendix - 34
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
(3) External dimension drawing
A6CON3
69.48(2.74)
Unit: mm (inch)
14(0.55) or less
10
(0.39)
22.5
(0.89)
71.8(2.82)
14(0.55) or less
46(1.81)
72.72(2.87)
A6CON4
8.25
(0.33)
A6CON1/A6CON2
Appendix - 35
47(1.85)
50.8(2.00)
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
Appendix4.2 Wiring of manual pulse generator cable

There are no our option in the manual pulse generator. The manual pulse generator
cable fabricate on the customer side.
(1) Manual pulse generator cable

The following table indicates the manual pulse generator cables used with motion
controller and the manual pulse generator. Make selection according to your
operating conditions.
Table 1 Table of wire specifications

Characteristics of one core
Wire model
17/0.16-6P-SRV-SV(2464)K
2
NFKEV-SB 0.3 mm
4P
Core
size
2
[mm ]
Number of
cores
Structure
[Number of
wires/mm]
Conductor
resistance
[ /km]
Insulating
sheath OD
d[mm]
Finish OD
[mm]
(Note-2)
(Note-1)
0.3
12(6 pairs)
17/0.16
Max. 57.5
1.26
8.4
0.3
8(4 pairs)
7/0.127
Max. 66.3
1.30
7.6
(Note-1): d is as shown below.

d
Insulation sheath
Conductor
(Note-2): Standard OD. Max. OD is about 10% larger.
(a) Connection diagram

When fabricating a cable, use the recommended wire given on (1), and
make the cable as show in the following connection diagram. The overall
distance of the manual pulse generator cable on the same bus is
30m(98.4ft.) .
(Note): Connect the shield to ground only on the manual pulse generator
side. (Only one side is connected.)
Manual pulse
generator
QD75M
Pin No.
A phase
1B19
B phase
1B20
1A19
5V
1A20
0V
5V
Power
supply
5V
Shield
0V
:Twisted pair cable
CAUTION
When fabricating the cable, do not make incorrect connection. Wrong connection will cause runaway or
explosion.
Appendix - 36
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
Appendix 5 Comparisons with conventional positioning modules

Appendix 5.1 Comparisons with QD75P model
Model
Item
No. of control axes
No. of positioning data items
QD75M1
1
QD75M2
QD75M4
QD75P
4
600/axis
600/axis

Interpolation 3-axis linear interpolation
functions
Position control
Speed control
Positioning
systems
control
(INC/ABS mode)
(INC/ABS mode)
control
Machine OPR function (OPR method)
(4 types)
Near-point dog method, Count method 1) 2)
and Data set method
(6 types)
Near-point dog method,
Stopper method 1) to 3) and
Count method 1) 2)
JOG operation
Inching operation
Manual pulse generator function
Automatic trapezoidal
Acceleration/ acceleration/deceleration
deceleration
S-pattern
processing
acceleration/deceleration
Compensation
Acceleration time and deceleration time setting possible (4 patterns each)

Electronic gears, backlash compensation
Error display
History data storage
(Start, error, warning)
Error LED
Provided (3 types, 16 items/axis)
Flash ROM
(battery-less backup)
Data storage destination
Connected to servo amplifier
ABS function
Electronic gears ratio
Absolute positioning system (degree)
with unlimited length feed can be
configured grantee.
Pulse signal
Servo ON signal
Servo READY signal
Zero point signal
SSCNET
Current value return function.
Follow up function
Denominator/numerator
(32 bit)
Denominator/numerator
(16 bit)
Provided
Improvided
No. of input/output points
32
No. of module occupied slots
1
: Possible,
Appendix - 37
: Not possible
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
Appendix 5.2 Comparisons with A1SD75M1/ A1SD75M2/ A1SD75M3 models

(1) Comparisons of performance specifications
Model
Item
No. of control axes
QD75M1
1
No. of positioning data items
QD75M2
QD75M4
A1SD75M1
600/axis
A1SD75M2
A1SD75M3
600/axis
2-axis linear
interpolation
Position control
interpolation
functions
3-axis linear
interpolation
4-axis linear
interpolation
2-axis circular
interpolation
Position control
1-axis
2-axis linear
Speed
control
Positioning systems
interpolation
3-axis linear
interpolation
4-axis linear
interpolation
Speed-position
switching control
Position-speed
switching control
<Absolute system>
-214748364.8 to 214748364.7 ( m)
-21474.83648 to 21474.83647 (inch)
0 to 359.99999 (degree)
-2147483648 to 2147483647 (PLS)
<Incremental system >
-214748364.8 to 214748364.7 ( m)
-21474.83648 to 21474.83647 (inch)
-21474.83648 to 21474.83647 (degree)
-2147483648 to 2147483647 (PLS)
Positioning range
<Speed-position or position-speed switching

controls>
0 to 214748364.7 ( m)
0 to 21474.83647 (inch)
0 to 21474.83647 (degree)/
0 to 359.99999 (degree) 2
0 to 2147483647 (PLS)
<Absolute system >

-214748364.8 to 214748364.7 ( m)
/-13421772.8 to 13421772.7 ( m)
-21474.83648 to 21474.83647 (inch)
/-1342.17728 to 1342.17727 (inch)
0 to 359.99999 (degree)
/0 to 359.99999 (degree)
-2147483648 to 2147483647 (PLS)
/-134217728 to 134217727 (PLS)
<Incremental system >
-214748364.8 to 214748364.7 ( m)
/-13421772.8 to 13421772.7 ( m)
-21474.83648 to 21474.83647 (inch)
/-1342.17728 to 1342.17727 (inch)
-21474.83648 to 21474.83647 (degree)
/-1342.17728 to 1342.17727 (degree)
-2147483648 to 2147483647 (PLS)
/-134217728 to 134217727 (PLS)
<Speed-position switching control>
0 to 214748364.7 ( m)
/0 to 13421772.7 ( m)
0 to 21474.83647 (inch)
/0 to 1342.17727 (inch)
0 to 21474.83647 (degree)
/0 to 1342.17727 (degree)
0 to 2147483647 (PLS)
/0 to 134217727 (PLS)
Appendix - 38
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
Comparisons of performance specifications (Continued)
Model
Item
Speed command range
QD75M1
QD75M2
QD75M4
A1SD75M2
A1SD75M3
0.01 to 6000000.00 (mm/min)

/0.01 to 375000.00 (mm/min)
0.001 to 600000.000 (inch/min)
/0.001 to 37500.000 (inch/min)
0.001 to 600000.000 (degree/min)
/0.001 to 37500.000 (degree/min)
1 to 1000000 (PLS/s)
/1 to 62500 (PLS/s)
0.01 to 20000000.00 (mm/min)

0.001 to 2000000.000 (inch/min)
0.001 to 2000000.000 (degree/min)
1 to 10000000 (PLS/s)
Machine OPR function (OPR method)
A1SD75M1
(4 types)
(4 types)
JOG operation
Inching operation
Manual pulse generator function
Acceleration
/deceleration
processing
Acceleration/deceler
ation time
1 generator/module
1 generator/axis
No. of patterns
Acceleration time and deceleration time can

be set independently. (4 patterns each)
Acceleration time and deceleration time can
Setting range
1 to 8388608ms
1 to 65535ms/1 to 8388608ms selectable
Automatic
trapezoidal
acceleration
/deceleration
S-pattern
acceleration
/deceleration
Compensation
Error display
History data storage (Start, error, warning)
Data storage destination
Connection connector
Electronic gears, backlash compensation,

near pass 3
Error LED
Flash ROM (battery-less backup)
A6CON1, A6CON4 (Soldering type,
optional)
A6CON2 (Crimp contact type, optional)
A6CON3 (Pressure-displacement type,
optional)
be set independently. (4 patterns each)
Electronic gears, backlash compensation,

near pass 3
17-segment LED
Flash ROM (battery-less backup)
10136-3000VE (Soldering type, supplied)
10136-6000EL (Crimp type, optional)
10136-3000VE: AWG#24 to #30

(Approx. 0.05 to 0.2 SQ)
10136-6000EL: AWG#28
(Approx. 0.08 SQ)
A6CON1, A6CON4: 0.3mm2

A6CON2: AWG#24 to 28
A6CON3: AWG#28 (twised),
AWG#30 (single wire)
SSCNET connector type

SSCNET cable maximum connection
distance (m/ft.)
Internal current consumption (A) [5VDC]
Flash ROM write count
No. of occupied I/O points
No. of module occupied slots
Outline dimensions (mm (inch))
Weight (kg (lb))
30 (98.43)
QD75M1:
0.40A
QD75M2:
QD75M4:
0.40A
0.40A
Max. 100000 times
32
1
98(3.86)(H)27.4(1.08)(W)90(3.55)(D)
0.15 (0.33)
0.15 (0.33)
0.16 (0.35)
Appendix - 39
0.7A or less
Max. 100000 times
32
1
130(5.12)(H)34.5(1.36)(W)93.6(3.69)(D)
0.35 (0.77)
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
Comparisons of performance specifications (Continued)
Model
Item
QD75M2
QD75M4
External command signal (External start or

speed-position switching selectable with
parameters)
CHG signal
I/O signal for
external devices
QD75M1
In-position (INP)
(for monitor)
Signal logic switching
A1SD75M1
A1SD75M2
A1SD75M3

(for monitor)
Command pulse output signal only
Connection via PLC CPU,

Connection with peripheral Q Corresponding Serial Communication
devices
Module, Q Corresponding MELSEC/H
Remote I/O Module
Direct connection
AD71TU
Peripheral devices
AD75TU
(data setting, etc.)
A6GPP, A6PHP
A7GPP, A7PHP
PC-9800
series
DOS/V personal computer
: Possible,
: Not possible
1: Up to 100 data items/axis of positioning data (No. 1 to 100) can be set using the buffer memory. The positioning data in the buffer
memory is not backed up.
2: Indicates the INC mode/ABS mode in speed-position switching control.
3: The near pass function is valid only during the continuous path control. (A1SD75: Selected with parameters, QD75: Standard function)
(2) Function comparisons

Functions added to those of A1SD75M1/A1SD75M2/A1SD75M3
Added functions
Inching operation
Target position change function
Multiple axes simultaneous start control
Control systems
NOP instruction
LOOP instruction, LEND instruction
Positioning start
Dedicated
Teaching
instructions
Flash ROM writing
Automatic refresh of intelligent function modules
Output hold/clear parameter setting during PLC CPU error stop
Flash ROM write limit
Speed-position switching control (ABS mode)
Multiple CPU correspond function
Remarks
Refer to Section 13.4.
Refer to Section 12.7.5.
Refer to Chapter 9.
Refer to Chapter 14.

Refer to GX Configurator-QP Operating Manual.
Refer to QCPU (Q mode) User's Manual (Function Explanation,
Program Fundamentals).
Refer to QCPU (Q mode) User's Manual (Function Explanation,
Program Fundamentals).
Absolute positioning system (degree unlimited length feed can be

configured)
Deceleration start flag function
Stop command processing for deceleration stop function
Appendix - 40

APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
Functions deleted from those of A1SD75M1/A1SD75M2/A1SD75M3
Deleted functions
Remarks
OPR operation error (Error code: 208)
Fast machine OPR
Special start (stop)
In the QD75, the start block area on the buffer memory is

expanded to five blocks (0 to 4). Each start block can be directly
designated with positioning start No. (7000 to 7004).
Indirect designation
With the A1SD75, this interface is used to set positioning data

Nos. 101 to 600 that do not exist on the buffer memory.
Since all positioning data can be set in the buffer memory with the
QD75, this function is deleted.
Block transfer
Positioning data I/F
Start history storage during error
The contents are the same as those of the start history. Therefore,
the QD75 stores only the start history.
System monitor data (module type, OS information, OS version)
These data were deleted because they can be displayed in system

monitor "Module's detailed information" of GX Developer.
(Refer to GX Developer Operating Manual.)
Functions changed from those of A1SD75M1/A1SD75M2/A1SD75M3

Changed functions
Descriptions
1. The limit check of arc address is carried out only when a sub
point is designated. It is not carried out when a center point is
designated.
2. The software stroke limit check during speed control is carried
out in the following cases:
When the software stroke limit is applied to the current feed
value with Pr.14 and the current feed value is updated with
Pr.21 .
Software stroke limit function
When the software stroke limit is applied to the machine feed

value.
3. If an attempt is made to change the current value but the
designated address is out of the software stroke limit range, the
attempt is considered as an error and the current value is not
changed.
4. The conventional models feature three types of software stroke
limit error codes for upper limit and lower limit respectively. With
the QD75, errors for the software stroke upper limit are
integrated into error code 507, and errors for the lower limit are
integrated into error code 508. Error codes 509 to 512 are
deleted.

M code function
1. An error occurs when the designated new current value is out of

the software stroke limit range.
2. The M code setting value is valid during the positioning data
current value changing instruction.
Acceleration/deceleration control
Only two-word type (1 to 8388608ms) can be used as the setting

value for the acceleration/deceleration time. (The switch between
1-word type and 2-word type is eliminated.)
Appendix - 41
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
Changed functions
Stop process and restart after stop

Positioning operation stop
Descriptions
1. "Peripheral side (emergency) stop" is deleted from the stop
causes of Stop group 2 sudden stop selection. "Test mode fault"
in the stop causes of Stop group 3 sudden stop selection is
changed to be in the stop causes of Stop group 2 sudden stop
selection.
2. "Stop (QD75 peripheral)" is added to the stop causes of Stop
group 3 sudden stop selection.
3. Error code 100 (Peripheral device stop during operation) is
deleted.
4. "PLC CPU error occurrence" is added to the stop causes of
Stop group 2 sudden stop selection.
READY signal (X0)
A1SD75
QD75
OFF
Normal
(READY)
Not READY/
WDT error
ON
Not READY/
WDT error
Normal
(READY)
The No. of connectable manual pulse generator is changed from 1

generator/1 axis to 1 generator/1 module.
"Step stopped" is changed to "Stopped" and "Step error occurring"

is changed to "Error occurring".
"In position control for position-speed switching control" and "In
speed control for position-speed switching control" are added.
A1SD75: If the reference axis operates in reverse direction, the

control is internally changed into the continuous
positioning control (restart after deceleration stop).
QD75 : Even if the reference axis operates in reverse direction
with interpolation, the control remains as the continuous
path control. (In single-axis operation, the operation is
the same as that of the A1SD75.)
Near pass
For the continuous path control, only the near pass function is
available.
2-axis interpolation
2-axis fixed-feed
Circular interpolation
The interpolation target axis can be randomly set with a positioning

identifier.
Step function
1. "Step stopped" is changed to "Stopped" and "Step error

occurring" is changed to "Error occurring" in the axis operation
status parameters.
2. The restart command for step start information (02H) is deleted.
3. The step operation is restarted with the restart command.
Command in-position function
The command in-position width is expanded.

A1SD75: 1 to 32767000
QD75: 1 to 2147483647
Control unit "degree" handling
The operating direction can be designated even for the ABS

control in the unit of "degree".
Appendix - 42
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
Changed functions
Descriptions
No. 9004 (Multiple axes simultaneous start control) is added.

Nos. 7004 to 7010 (block start designation) and 8000 to 8049 (indirect
designation) are deleted.
Block start data
With the QD75, the number of blocks is changed to 5 (7000 to 7004). (With the
A1SD75, this data is called "positioning start information".)
Special start data "Simultaneous start"
The simultaneous start is possible up to 4 axes.
List of errors/warnings
Refer to the following "Error code comparisons" and "Warning code

comparisons".
Start history
The configuration of "start information" and "start No." is changed so that the start
No. can be directly checked.
Synchronization flag (X1)
When the PLC CPU starting method is set to asynchronous, interlock is

established with the synchronization flag (X1) signal.
Detailed parameters
" Pr.15 Software stroke limit valid/invalid setting"
0 (Factory
setting)
A1SD75
QD75
Software stroke limits invalid for

manual operation
Software stroke limits valid for

manual operation
Software stroke limits valid for

manual operation
Software stroke limits invalid for

manual operation
Error code comparisons

Error name
Error code
A1SD75
QD75
Outside bias speed range
913
906
Illegal sudden stop deceleration time
962
961
Stop group 1 sudden stop selection error
963
962
964
963
965
964
Home position return (OPR) torque limit value error
991
995
Setting for the movement amount after near-point

dog ON error
992
991
Home position return (OPR) acceleration time

selection error
993
992
Home position return (OPR) deceleration time

selection error
994
993
Added
Deleted
Error type
Fatal error
002
51, 52
Common
100, 108
213, 214
208
301
OPR, Absolute position restoration

JOG/Inching operation
I/F
Parameter
523, 535, 545, 546
509 to 512
800 to 806
920, 935, 990, 996
931, 933, 938, 971, 999
Error whose name is changed: Error code 967

A1SD75: External start selection error
QD75: External command function selection error
Appendix - 43
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
Warning code comparisons
Warning type
Added
Fatal warning
Common
Deleted
51, 52
110
101, 105 to 108, 115
OPR, Absolute position restoration
JOG operation/Inching operation
402
516, 517, 518

I/F
Parameter
900
Warning whose name is changed: Warning code 512

A1SD75: Illegal external start function
QD75: Illegal external command function
: Refer to "Section 15.2 List of errors" and "Section 15.3 List of warnings" for details on error codes and warning codes.
(3) Input/output (X/Y) comparisons

Name
(QD75/A1SD75) READY
Axis 1 Start complete
Axis 1 BUSY
Axis 2 BUSY
Axis 3 BUSY
Axis 4 BUSY
Axis 1 Positioning complete
Axis 1 Error detection
Axis 1 M code ON
Input (X)
A1SD75
X00
X01
X02
X03
X04
X05
X06
X07
X08
X09
X0A
X0B
X0C
X0D
QD75
X00
X10
X11
X12
X13
X0C
X0D
X0E
X0F
X14
X15
X16
X17
X08
X09
X0A
X0B
X04
Axis 2 M code ON
X0E
X05
Axis 3 M code ON
X0F
X06
Axis 4 M code ON
X07
X01
X10 to X1F
X02, X03
X18 to X1F
Use prohibited
Output (Y)
Name
A1SD75
Axis 1 Positioning start
Y10
Y11
Y12
Axis 1 Stop
Y13
Axis 2 Stop
Y14
Axis 3 Stop
Y1C
Axis 4 Stop
All axis servo ON

Y15
Axis 1 Forward run JOG start
Y16
Axis 1 Reverse run JOG start
Y17
Y18
Y19
Y1A
Y1B
PLC READY
Y1D
Axis 1 Execution prohibition
flag
flag
flag
flag
Y00 to Y0F
Use prohibited
Y1E to Y1F
: The ON/OFF statuses for READY are different between the QD75 and A1SD75.
Not READY/WDT error
READY
QD75
OFF
ON
A1SD75
ON
OFF
Appendix - 44
QD75
Y10
Y11
Y12
Y13
Y04
Y05
Y06
Y07
Y01
Y08
Y09
Y0A
Y0B
Y0C
Y0D
Y0E
Y0F
Y00
Y14
Y15
Y16
Y17
Y02, Y03
Y18 to Y1F
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
(4) Buffer memory address comparisons
The following table shows the buffer memory addresses of the QD75 (Axes 1 to
3) corresponding to the items of the A1SD75.
The shaded area shows the differences between the A1SD75 and QD75.
Items of A1SD75
Pr.1 Unit setting
AISD75
QD75
Axis 1
Axis 2
Axis 3
Axis 1
Axis 2
Axis 3
150
300
150
300
152
153
302
303
151
301
2
3
Pr.3 Movement amount per rotation (AL)
152
302
4
5
154
155
304
305
Pr.4 Unit magnification (AM)
153
303
151
301
6
7
156
157
306
307
10
11
160
161
310
311
8
9
158
159
308
309
12
13
162
163
312
313
10
11
160
161
310
311
14
15
164
165
314
315
12
13
162
163
312
313
6
7
156
157
306
307
15
165
315
17
167
317
16
17
166
167
316
317
18
19
168
169
318
319
18
19
168
169
318
319
20
21
170
171
320
321
20
170
320
22
172
322
Pr.16 Software stroke limit valid/invalid setting
21
171
321
23
173
323
22
23
172
173
322
323
24
25
174
175
324
325
24
174
324
26
176
326
25
175
325
27
177
327
26
176
326
28
178
328
27
177
327
29
179
329
28
178
328
30
180
330
Pr.23 Manual pulse generator selection
29
179
329
Pr.25 Size selection for acceleration/deceleration time
31
181
331
34
184
334
36
37
186
187
336
337
36
37
186
187
336
337
38
39
188
189
338
339
38
39
188
189
338
339
40
41
190
191
340
341
40
41
190
191
340
341
Appendix - 45
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q

Items of A1SD75
A1SD75
QD75
Axis 1
Axis 2
Axis 3
Axis 1
Axis 2
Axis 3
42
43
192
193
342
343
42
43
192
193
342
343
44
45
194
195
344
345
44
45
194
195
344
345
46
47
196
197
346
347
46
47
196
197
346
347
48
49
198
199
348
349
48
49
198
199
348
349
50
200
350
50
200
350
51
201
351
51
201
351
52
202
352
52
202
352
Pr.36 S-pattern proportion
53
203
353
53
203
353
54
55
204
205
354
355
54
55
204
205
354
355
56
206
356
56
206
356
57
207
357
57
207
357
58
208
358
58
208
358
59
209
359
59
209
359
60
61
210
211
360
361
60
61
210
211
360
361
62
212
362
62
212
362
64
65
214
215
364
365
64
65
214
215
364
365
Pr.44 Near pass mode selection for path control
66
216
366
Pr.45 OPR method
70
220
370
70
220
370
Pr.46 OPR direction
71
221
371
71
221
371
Pr.47 OP address
72
73
222
223
372
373
72
73
222
223
372
373
Pr.48 OPR speed
74
75
224
225
374
375
74
75
224
225
374
375
Pr.49 Creep speed
76
77
226
227
376
377
76
77
226
227
376
377
Pr.50 OPR retry
78
228
378
78
228
378
Pr.51 OPR dwell time
79
229
379
79
229
379
Pr.52 Setting for the movement amount after near-
80
81
230
231
380
381
80
81
230
231
380
381
82
232
382
82
232
382
83
233
383
83
233
383
84
85
234
235
384
385
84
85
234
235
384
385
86
236
386
86
236
386
88
238
388
88
238
388
89
239
389
89
239
389
Pr.43 External start function selection
(QD75: Pr.42 External command function selection)

Pr.201 Restart allowable range when servo OFF to ON
point dog ON
Appendix - 46
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q

Items of A1SD75
Pr.100 Servo series
A1SD75
QD75
Axis 1
Axis 2
Axis 3
Axis 1
Axis 2
Axis 3
100
250
400
30100
30250
30400
101
251
401
30101
30251
30401

Pr.103 Motor type
102
252
402
30102
30252
30402
103
253
403
30103
30253
30403

104
254
404
30104
30254
30404
105
255
405
30105
30255
30405

106
256
406
30106
30256
30406
107
257
407
30107
30257
30407
Pr.108 Auto tuning

108
258
408
30108
30258
30408
109
259
409
30109
30259
30409
Pr.110 Maker setting

110
260
410
30110
30260
30410
111
261
411
30111
30261
30411

112
262
412
30112
30262
30412
113
263
413
30113
30263
30413

114
264
414
30114
30264
30414
115
265
415
30115
30265
30415

116
266
416
30116
30266
30416
117
267
417
30117
30267
30417
Pr.118 Machine resonance suppression filter

118
268
418
30118
30268
30418
119
269
419
30119
30269
30419

Pr.121 Electromagnetic brake sequence output
120
270
420
30120
30270
30420
121
271
421
30121
30271
30421
122
272
422
30122
30272
30422
123
273
423
30123
30273
30423
124
274
424
30124
30274
30424
30125
30275
30425

Pr.125 Adaptive vibration suppression control/ low
pass filter
30126
30276
30426
127
277
427
30127
30277
30427
128
278
428
30128
30278
30428
Appendix - 47
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q

Items of A1SD75
A1SD75
QD75
Axis 1
Axis 2
Axis 3
Axis 1
Axis 2
Axis 3
129
229
429
30129
30229
30329
130
230
430
30130
30230
30330
131
231
431
30131
30231
30331
132
232
432
30132
30232
30332

Pr.134 PI-PID control switch-over position droop
133
233
433
30133
30233
30333
134
234
434
30134
30234
30334

135
235
435
30135
30235
30335
136
236
436
30136
30236
30336
137
237
437
30137
30237
30337

Pr.130 Zero speed

30138
30238
30338

30139
30239
30339
30140
30240
30340

Pr.143 Slight vibration suppression control selection 1
30141
30241
30341
30143
30243
30343
Pr.144 Slight vibration suppression control selection 2

30144
30244
30344
30145
30245
30345

30146
30246
30346
30147
30247
30347

30148
30248
30348
30149
30249
30349

30150
30250
30350
30151
30251
30351
30152
30252
30352
Pr.152 Ratio of load inertia moment to servomotor

inertia moment 2
Pr.153 Position loop gain 2 changing ratio
30153
30253
30353
Pr.154 Speed loop gain 2 changing ratio

Pr.155 Speed integral compensation changing ratio
30154
30254
30354
30155
30255
30355

30156
30256
30356
30157
30257
30357

30158
30258
30358
30159
30259
30359

Pr.161 Machine resonance suppression filter 2
30160
30260
30360
30161
30261
30361

30162
30262
30362
30163
30263
30363

30164
30264
30364
30165
30265
30365
30166
30266
30366
Appendix - 48
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q

Items of A1SD75
Md.2 Module name
A1SD75
QD75
Common for axis 1, 2, 3
Common for axis 1, 2, 3, 4
450
1200
451
452 453
454 455
Md.4 OS version
456
457
Md.5 Clock data (hour: minute)
460
Md.6 Clock data (second: 100 ms)
461
Md.3 OS type
(Pointer number)
(0) to (15)
Md.7 Start axis
462 to 537
1212 to 1287
463 to 538
1213 to 1288
464 to 539
1214 to 1289
465 to 540
1215 to 1290
466 to 541
1216 to 1291
542
1292
(QD75: Md. 3 Start information)

Md.8 Operation type
(QD75: Md. 4 Start No.)

Md.9 Start Hour: minute
(QD75: Md. 5 Start Hour)
Start
history
Md.10 Start Second: 100 ms
(QD75: Md. 6 Start Minute: second)

Md.11 Error judgment
Md.12 Start history pointer
(Pointer number)
Md.13 Start axis
Md.14 Operation type
Md.15 Start Hour: minute
Md.16 Start Second: 100 ms
Start
history
during
errors
Md.17 Error judgment

Md.18
Start history storage during error
(0) to (15)
543 to 618
544 to 619
545 to 620
546 to 621
547 to 622
623
(Pointer number)
(0) to (15)
Md.19 Axis in which the error occurred
624 to 684
1293 to 1353
625 to 685
1294 to 1354
626 to 686
1295 to 1355
627 to 687
1296 to 1356
688
1357
Md.21 Axis error occurrence Hour: minute
(QD75: Md. 11 Axis error occurrence

(Hour) )
Md.22 Axis error occurrence Second:
100 ms
(QD75: Md. 12 Axis error occurrence
Error
history
(Minute: second) )
Md.23 Error history pointer
Appendix - 49
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q

Items of A1SD75
A1SD75
QD75
Common for axis 1, 2, 3

(Pointer number)
Common for axis 1, 2, 3, 4

(0) to (15)
Md.24 Axis in which the warning occurred
689 to 749
1358 to 1418
690 to 750
1359 to 1419
691 to 751
1360 to 1420
692 to 752
1361 to 1421
753
1422
Md.26 Axis warning occurrence Hour:
minute
(QD75: Md. 16 Axis warning occurrence
(Hour) )
Warning
history
Md.27 Axis warning occurrence Second:
100 ms
(QD75: Md. 17 Axis warning occurrence
(Minute: second) )
Md.28 Warning history pointer
Appendix - 50
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q

Items of A1SD75
A1SD75
QD75
Axis 1
Axis 2
Axis 3
Axis 1
Axis 2
Axis 3
800
801
900
901
1000
1001
800
801
900
901
1000
1001
802
803
902
903
1002
1003
802
803
902
903
1002
1003
Md.31 Feedrate
804
805
904
905
1004
1005
804
805
904
905
1004
1005
Md.32 Valid M code
806
906
1006
808
908
1008
807
907
1007
806
906
1006
808
908
1008
807
907
1007
809
909
1009
809
909
1009
Md.36 Current speed
810
910
1010
810
811
910
911
1010
1011
Md.37 Axis feedrate
812
813
912
913
1012
1013
812
813
912
913
1012
1013
814
815
914
915
1014
1015
814
815
914
915
1014
1015
Md.39 External input/output signal
816
916
1016
816
916
1016
Md.40 Status
817
917
1017
817
917
1017
Md.41 Target value
818
819
918
919
1018
1019
818
819
918
919
1018
1019
Md.42 Target speed
820
821
920
921
1020
1021
820
821
920
921
1020
1021
Md.43 OP absolute position
822
823
922
923
1022
1023
824
825
924
925
1024
1025
824
825
924
925
1024
1025
826
926
1026
826
926
1026
Md.46 Special start data instruction code setting value
827
927
1027
827
927
1027
828
928
1028
828
928
1028
Md.48 Start positioning data No. setting value
829
929
1029
829
929
1029
Md.49 In speed control flag
830
930
1030
830
930
1030
831
931
1031
831
931
1031
Md.51 Start data pointer being executed
832
932
1032
834
934
1034
Md.52 Last executed positioning data No.
833
933
1033
837
937
1037
834
934
1034
832
932
1032
835
935
1035
835
935
1035
Md.38 Speed-position switching control positioning
amount
Md.47 Special start data instruction parameter setting
value
Md.53 Repetition counter
(QD75: Md. 41 Special start repetition counter)

Md.54 Positioning data No. being executed
Md.56 Positioning data being executed
836
936
1036
836
936
1036
838 to
847
938 to
947
1038 to
1047
838 to
847
938 to
947
1038 to
1047
Appendix - 51
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q

Items of A1SD75
A1SD75
Axis 1
Axis 2
QD75
Axis 1
Axis 2
Axis 3
848
849
948
949
1048
1049
850
851
950
951
1050
1051
852
853
952
953
1052
1053
854
855
954
955
1054
1055
856
956
1056
Md.105 Auto tuning
857
957
1057
Md.105 Load inertia ratio
858
958
1058
Md.105 Position loop gain 1
859
959
1059
Md.105 Speed loop gain 1
860
960
1060
861
961
1061
862
962
162
Md.105 Speed integral compensation
863
963
1063
Md.106 Servo amplifier software No.
864
865
866
867
868
869
964
965
966
967
968
969
1064
1065
1066
1067
1068
1069
Md.107 Parameter error No. (No.0 to 15)
870
970
1070
871
971
1071
872
972
1072
873
973
1073
874
974
1074
875
975
1075
Maker setting
Axis 3
876
976
1076
Md.108 Servo status
877
977
1077
878
978
1078
Md.110 Effective load torque
879
979
1079
880
980
1080
Md.112 Semi full-closed control status
881
981
1081
899
999
1099
Appendix - 52
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q

Items of A1SD75
A1SD75
Axis 1
Axis 2
QD75
Axis 3
Axis 1
Axis 2
Cd.1 Clock data setting (hour)
1100
Cd.2 Clock data setting (minute, second)
1101
Cd.3 Clock data writing
1102
Cd.4 Target axis
1103
Cd.5 Positioning data No.
1104
Cd.6 Write pattern
1105
Cd.7 Read/write request
1106
1108 to 1137
1138
1900
1139
1901
Cd.8 Read/write positioning data I/F
Axis 3
1150
1200
1250
1500
1600
1700
1151
1201
1251
1502
1602
1702
1152
1202
1252
1503
1603
1703
1153
1203
1253
1504
1604
1704
1154
1155
1204
1205
1254
1255
1506
1507
1606
1607
1706
1707
1156
1157
1206
1207
1256
1257
1514
1515
1614
1615
1714
1715
1158
1208
1258
1516
1616
1716
Cd.18 Positioning operation speed override
1159
1209
1259
1513
1613
1713
Cd.19 JOG speed
1160
1161
1210
1211
1260
1261
1518
1519
1618
1619
1718
1719
Cd.20 Speed-position switching enable flag
1163
1213
1263
1528
1628
1728
Cd.21 Speed-position switching control movement
1164
1165
1214
1215
1264
1265
1526
1527
1626
1627
1726
1727
Cd.22 Manual pulse generator enable flag
1167
1217
1267
1524
1624
1724
Cd.23 Manual pulse generator 1 pulse input
1168
1169
1218
1219
1268
1269
1522
1523
1622
1623
1722
1723
1170
1220
1270
1521
1621
1721
1171
1221
1271
1505
1605
1705
1172
1222
1272
1545
1645
1745
Cd.27 Step mode
1173
1223
1273
1544
1644
1744
1174
1224
1274
1546
1646
1746
Cd.29 Skip command
1175
1225
1275
1547
1647
1747
1176
1226
1276
1525
1625
1725
1178
1228
1278
1501
1601
1701
Cd.32 Interrupt request during continuous operation
1181
1231
1281
1520
1620
1720
1184
1185
1234
1235
1284
1285
1508
1509
1608
1609
1708
1709
amount change register
magnification
Cd.24 OPR return request flag OFF request
Cd.25 External start valid
(QD75: Cd. 8 External command valid)
Appendix - 53
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q

Items of A1SD75
A1SD75

Cd.35 Acceleration/deceleration time change during
QD75
Axis 1
Axis 2
Axis 3
Axis 1
Axis 2
Axis 3
1186
1187
1236
1237
1286
1287
1510
1511
1610
1611
1710
1711
1188
1238
1288
1512
1612
1712
speed change, enable/disable selection

1905
Cd.42 Stop command processing for deceleration stop

selection
1907
1551
1651
1751
1552
1652
1752
1553
1653
1753

Da.2 Control system
1300
2300
3300
2000
8000
14000
1301
2301
3301
2001
8001
14001
1302
2302
3302
2002
8002
14002
1304
1305
2304
2305
3306
3307
2004
2005
8004
8005
14004
14005
1306
1307
2306
2307
3306
3307
2006
2007
8006
8007
14006
14007
1308
1309
2308
2309
3308
3309
2008
2009
8008
8009
14008
14009
No.2
1310 to
1319
2320 to
2329
3310 to
3319
2010 to
2019
8010 to
8019
14010 to
14019
No.3
1320 to
1329
2330 to
2339
3320 to
3329
2020 to
2029
8020 to
8029
14020 to
14029

Da.9 M code/condition data
Positioning data
Da.8 Dwell time/JUMP destination
No.1

Da.7 Command speed
amount
Da.6 Arc address
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
No.100
2290 to
2299
3290 to
3299
4290 to
4299
2990 to
2999
8990 to
8999
14990 to
14999
1: With the QD75, the positioning data buffer memory addresses are Nos. 1 to 600.
Refer to Appendix 8 "List of buffer memory addresses" for details.
Appendix - 54
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q

Items of A1SD75
A1SD75
Axis 1
Axis 2
QD75
Axis 3
Axis 1
Axis 2
Axis 3
4300 4350 4550 4600 4800 4850
26000
26050
27000
27050
28000
28050
2nd point
4301 4351 4551 4601 4801 4851
26001
26051
27001
27051
28001
28051
3rd point
4302 4352 4552 4602 4802 4852
26002
26052
27002
27052
28002
instruction
Da.13 Parameter
to
to
50th point
Positioning start information

Positioning
1st
point
Da.12 Special start
Start block data
Da.10 Shape
to
to
4349 4399 4599 4649 4849 4899
to
26049
to
26099
27049
28052
to
27099
28049
28099
4400
4650
4900
26100
27100
28100
4402
4403
4652
4653
4902
4903
26102
26103
27102
27103
28102
28103
Da.17 Parameter 1
4404
4405
4654
4655
4904
4905
26104
26105
27104
27105
28104
28105
Da.18 Parameter 2
4406
4407
4656
4657
4906
4907
26106
26107
27106
27107
28106
28107
No.2
4410 to
4419
4660 to
4669
4910 to
4919
26110 to
26119
27110 to
27119
28110 to
28119
No.3
4420 to
4429
4670 to
4679
4920 to
4929
26120 to
26129
27120 to
27129
28120 to
28129

Da.16 Address
Condition data
No.1
Indirect
designation
PLC CPU
memo area
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
No.10
4490 to
4499
4740 to
4749
4990 to
4999
26190 to
26199
27190 to
27199
28190 to
28199
Start No. 8001
4500
4750
5000
Start No. 8002
4501
4751
5001
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
Start No. 8050
4549
4799
5049
5050
Condition judgment target data of

the condition data
30000
to
to
5099
30099
Target axis
5100
Head positioning block No.
5101
No. of read/write data items
5102
Read/write request
5103
5110 to 6109
Read/write block
2: With the QD75, it is called "block start data".

3: With the QD75, the "block start data" and "condition data" in the shaded area are called "start block 0". There are five start blocks:
0 to 4.
Refer to Appendix 8 "List of buffer memory addresses" for details.
Appendix - 55
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
(5) Input/output signal comparisons
Input signal comparisons
A1SD75
Name
QD75
Logic (initial status)
Logic switch with

parameters
Logic (initial status)
Logic switch with

parameters
Negative logic
Not possible
Negative logic
(multiple of 4)
Not possible
Negative logic
(multiple of 4)
Possible
Near-point signal
Negative logic
Not possible
Negative logic
Possible
Stop signal
Negative logic
Not possible
Negative logic
Possible
Upper limit
Negative logic
Not possible
Negative logic
Possible
Negative logic
Not possible
Negative logic
Possible
Negative logic
Not possible
Negative logic
Possible
Negative logic
Not possible
Negative logic
Possible
In-position signal
Manual pulse generator A phase
Manual pulse generator B phase
Lower limit
External start
1: Comparisons about manual pulse generator A phase/B phase.

A1SD75
QD75
No. of connectable manual pulse

generators
1 generator/1 axis
1 generator/1 module
Mode selection (with parameter)
Not possible
Possible
Multiple of 1 mode, multiple of 2 mode,
multiple of 4 mode, PLS/SIGN mode
2: With the QD75, the "external start signal" and "speed-position switching signal" are combined into the "external command
signal/switching signal".
Appendix - 56
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
Appendix 6 Positioning control troubleshooting

Trouble type
Questions/Trouble
Remedy
No.
Display reads "FFFFH" when a

parameter is read with GX
Configurator-QP.
The PLC CPU power was turned OFF or the PLC CPU
was reset, etc., during flash ROM writing, which deleted
the data in the flash ROM.
Initialize the parameters, and reset the required
parameters.
(Refer to Section 13.2 "Parameter initialization function"
for details.)
How can the parameters be

returned to their initial values ?
Set the " Cd.2 Parameter initialization request" to "1".

(Refer to Section 13.2 "Parameter initialization function"
for details.)
A parameter error occurred

although the parameter was set
correctly by GX Configurator-QP.
The parameter may have been overwritten in the PLC

program.
Parameter
In the QD75, deceleration stops are executed after the

machine exceeds hardware stroke limit range. Because of
The machine overruns if operating
this, more time is required for the deceleration stop as the
at high speeds when the hardware
speed increases, and the overrun becomes larger.
stroke limit range is exceeded.
(The deceleration time becomes shorter at lower speeds,
so the overrun becomes smaller.)
Use a "JOG operation", " Inching operation" or "Manual

pulse generator operation" to return the machine to inside
When the machine exceeded the the hardware stroke limit range.
hardware stroke limit range,
(When the hardware stroke limit range is exceeded,
positioning toward inside the range positioning will not start toward inside the range even
was started, but the machine did when so commanded. Once the range is exceeded, a
not start.
return to inside the range can only be executed using a
"JOG operation", "Inching operation" or "Manual pulse
generator operation".)
Degree
Exactly one rotation is required,

but the setting range for a "degree"
Designate "360.000" in the INC control.
unit setting is "0 to 359.999...".
The motor will make exactly one rotation.
Won't the rotation deviate by
"0.00...1"?
Movement amount
per pulse
If the "movement amount per

pulse" is calculated as written in
the manual, settings smaller than
the basic parameter setting range
cannot be carried out.
Will an override setting value

written before starting be valid?
Override
Set "movement amount per pulse" in the QD75 using the

three parameter values of Pr.2 to Pr.4 .
Try setting the values following the explanations for each
parameter.
It will be valid.
During path control, will the

override still be valid after the point It will still be valid.
is passed?
How can the override be
canceled?
Set the " Cd.13 Positioning operation speed override" to

"100".
Appendix - 57
8
9
10
APPENDICES
Trouble type
MELSEC-Q
Questions/Trouble
Remedy
No.
Set "1: Sudden stop" in the " Pr.37 Stop group 1 sudden
How can the deceleration stop
time during stopping be shortened stop selection", and reduce the setting value of " Pr.36
11
using the hardware stroke limit?
Sudden stop deceleration time".
The value set for the acceleration/deceleration time is the
time required for the machine to accelerate from speed
The motor does not operate at
"60000ms" although the
acceleration/deceleration time is
set to "60000ms".
Acceleration/decelerat
ion time
"0" to the value set in " Pr.8 Speed limit value". Because
of that, the acceleration/deceleration time will also be
12
shorter than "60000ms" if the command speed value is
smaller than the " Pr.8 Speed limit value". (Refer to the
explanation for Pr.9 and Pr.10
for details.)
Can each acceleration/

deceleration time be individually
set to trapezoidal or S-pattern
acceleration/deceleration?
The trapezoidal and S-pattern acceleration/deceleration

processing is a common setting for all
acceleration/deceleration times, so individual setting is not
13
possible.
(Refer to Section 12.7.7 "Acceleration/deceleration
process function".)
The machine starts and stops

suddenly when carrying out JOG
operations and positioning
operations.
(Using an MR-J2S servo
amplifier.)
Review the parameter settings for acceleration/

deceleration time, speed limit value, JOG speed limit
value, JOG acceleration/deceleration time, etc.
14
Simplified absolute
value
Are simplified absolute values

They are possible if the models are used in combination
possible in the QD75P and QD75D with a Mitsubishi "AC Servo".
Positional deviation models?
(Refer to "AC servo User's Manual" for details.)
15
Positional deviation
The physical position deviates

from the commanded position,
although the positioning is
complete (and the monitored
current position is correct).
If the deviation counter value is not "0", the servo side is

still moving.
Increase the torque.
16
A setting of "1m 1PLS" is

required in the following system.
Ball screw pitch
10mm
No. of feedback pulses
8192PLS
In this case, the following values will result.

No. of pulses per rotation 8192
Movement amount per rotation 10000
Unit magnification 10
Therefore, the "Movement amount per pulse" will become
"1.2207m".
This value is fixed by the machine system, so it cannot be
changed.
Thus, the setting "1m 1PLS" cannot be achieved.
17
Electronic gear
Appendix - 58
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
Trouble type
Error compensation
Questions/Trouble
Remedy
The machine only moves to

"10081230", although positioning
with a command value of
"10081234" carried out.
How can the error be
compensated?
The following values are currently
set.
" Pr.2 No. of pulses per

rotation" 8192PLS
Reset Pr.3
and Pr.2
No.
in the following order.
1) Calculate "8192/8000 10081234/10081230".

2) Obtain the reduced value.
18
3) Set the numerator in " Pr.3 Movement amount per

rotation", and the denominator in " Pr.2 No. of pulses
per rotation".
" Pr.3 Movement amount
per rotation"
8000m
The near-point dog must be set to turn OFF at a position

after the OP is passed.
When carrying out a count-method (When the OPR is started on the near-point dog ON in a
count-method machine OPR, the machine enters a
machine OPR, the message
normal machine OPR operation after returning to the
"Leave Sufficient Distance From
near-point dog OFF region.)
The OP Position To The NearPoint Dog OFF." appears. Is there (If the near-point dog is turned OFF before the OP, and
the machine OPR is started between the near-point dog
a problem
OFF position and the OP, the machine will mistakenly
if the distance is short?
interpret that its current position is before the near-point
dog ON position, and it will pass over the OP and
continue moving.)
19
Carry out the following measures.

1) Separate the near-point dog signal and zero signal
detection positions.
In the near-point dog method
machine OPR, the stop positions
are not uniform.
2) Lower the values in " Pr.46 OPR speed" and
" Pr.47 Creep speed".
20
3) Confirm whether the zero signal and near-point dog

signal turn ON normally.
4) Check that there is no play (backlash) in the machine
system.
OPR
Can the machine OPR be carried

out with the OPR retry function
when it is started with the nearpoint dog ON and the upper/lower
limit OFF?
A "Hardware stroke limit error" will occur and the

operation will not be carried out.
(The machine will interpret any position where the nearpoint dog is ON as being within the working range, and
that the upper/lower limit is ON.)
Are ABS and INC positioning

possible without carrying out an
OPR?
They are possible.

In this case, the position where the power is turned ON is 22
handled as the current feed value "0".
The OPR request flag turns ON in the following cases.
1) When the power is turned ON.
2) When the absolute system has not been set.
3) When the OPR has not been executed at the absolute
23
position system.
4) When an OPR operation starts.
If no problem is found when the above are checked, then
it is possible that the communication is being interrupted
by "a fault in the bus cable", "noise influence", etc.
After an OPR, the OPR request

flag sometimes turns ON for no
apparent reason.
Appendix - 59
21
APPENDICES
Trouble type
Start
MELSEC-Q
Questions/Trouble
Remedy
The positioning start signal [Y10] is

kept ON until the BUSY signal is
OFF, but is there any problem with
turning it OFF before the BUSY
signal turns OFF?
After the BUSY signal turns ON, there is no problem with

turning [Y10] OFF before the BUSY signal turns OFF.
(The QD75 detects the rising edge (OFF ON) of the
positioning start signal [Y10].)
No.
25
Check the " Md.26 Axis operation status" and

The operation will not start even
when the start signal is turned ON. " Md.23 Axis error No.".
26
The signal should be turned ON at 4ms or more.

How many milliseconds should the
(If possible, set the signal so it does not turn ON only
axis stop signal [Y4] be turned ON
momentarily, but instead stays ON until the BUSY signal
for?
turns OFF. This will keep the stop signal from skipping.)
27
Set "1: Sudden stop" in the parameter from Pr.37 to
How can a sudden stop be

selected?
Pr.39 corresponding to the stop group, and reduce the
28
setting value of " Pr.36 Sudden stop deceleration time".

Stop
"Normal deceleration stop" was

selected in " Pr.39 Stop group 3
sudden stop", and Y stop was
Circular interpolation
Speed-position
switching control
JOG operation
The operation will not change.

Even if the same stop factor is input again during the
turned ON. If the " Pr.39 "setting deceleration stop, it will be ignored. The same
29
is changed to "sudden stop" during deceleration stop process used when the stop signal was
first
input
will
be
continued.
a deceleration stop, and the Y stop
signal turns from OFF to ON, will (This also applies for Pr.37 and Pr.38 .)
the operation change to a sudden
stop from that point?
ABS system circular interpolation
The address designation may be incorrect. When carrying
operates normally, but a vertically
out INC system circular interpolation, designate the
30
oblong circle results when INC
relative addresses from the starting point of both the
system circular interpolation is
center point and end point.
carried out.
Can the speed be changed during
speed control and position control No. The speed for the speed control and position control
by speed-position switching
cannot be set differently.
control?
31
Either of the following is possible.

1) The PLC program may be incorrect. Check by
creating a test program in which the JOG start signal
is turned ON only.
Even if the JOG start signal is
2) If the machine is hitting something when the torque
turned ON, the response until it
32
setting is low, it may be trying to move by JOG
turns ON is sometimes slow.
operation in the opposite direction. In this case, the
machine will start moving only after the internal droop
pulses have been reached 0 in the counter, even if the
JOG start signal has been turned ON. This makes it
seem that the response is slow.
Either of the following is possible.
1) The JOG start signal may be chattering. Monitor the
JOG start signal to confirm whether it is chattering.
The operation is not carried out at
(When using the "BUSY signal" in the JOG operation
the set JOG speed, although the
33
start circuit, check the position of the BUSY signal.)
speed limit value has not been
reached.
2) The " Pr.31 JOG speed limit value" may not be
appropriate. Review the setting value and carry out
the JOG operation again.
Appendix - 60
APPENDICES
Trouble type
MELSEC-Q
Questions/Trouble
Remedy
The " Pr.31 JOG speed limit value" may be larger than
When a JOG operation is
Pr.8 Speed limit value".
attempted, an error results and the the "
machine does not move.
Review the parameters and carry out the JOG operation
again.
JOG operation
Manual pulse
generator operation
Current value
changing
If a value other than "0" is set for " Cd.16 Inching

Why does the positioning complete movement amount", the inching operation is carried out
and the positioning complete signal turns ON.
signal turns ON during the JOG
operation?
Confirm that the " Cd.16 Inching movement amount" is
set to "0".
Possible.
Is it possible to count the pulses
Set the " Pr.24 Manual pulse generator input selection"
when the B phase is set to "1", and
to "3: PLS/ SIGN mode". It is possible to count the pulses
only A phase pulses are input?
when only A phase pulses are input.
Can a manual pulse generator
other than the Mitsubishi MRHDP01 be used?
Other manual pulse generators can be used if they

conform to Section 3.4 "Specifications for input/output
interfaces with external devices."
No.
34
35
36
37
Can one manual pulse generator

This is possible if the system conforms to the electrical
be operated connected to several
specifications.
QD75 modules?
38
The BUSY signal is not canceled

by the current value changing.
How can it be canceled?
39
The BUSY signal may remain if the scan time is long.

Use a complete signal to check whether the current value
changing has been executed.
The QD75 READY signal does not "A parameter error" has occurred.
QD75 READY signal turn ON even when the PLC
Confirm the error No. in the error history, and correct the
READY signal [Y0] is turned ON. parameter.
40
M code ON signal
The QD75 checks the M code ON signal OFF request

Is there any problem with setting
every "3.5ms", so there is a possibility that the M code ON
an M code ON signal OFF request
signal OFF may be delayed by a maximum of "3.5ms"
41
in the next scan after the M code
after the M code ON signal ON, even if an M code ON
ON signal ON?
signal OFF request is set.
Servo ON
The servo amplifier LED remains

"Ab" even if all axis servo Y1 is
turned ON.
Set the motor capacity for servo parameter (30104,

30204, 30304, 30404).
42
Error 537 (PLC READY signal

OFF at positioning start) occurs
after the QD75 is replaced. (The
PLC program is the same.)
The internal parameters of the QD75 may be different.

Check if the QD75 READY signal [X0] turns ON when the
PLC READY signal [Y0] turns ON.
When the PLC READY signal is ON but the QD75
READY signal is OFF, the parameter error has occurred.
Check the error code and modify the parameter with the
error.
45
Module
The motor only rotates in one

direction.
Motor
Can the current motor speed be
monitored?
The parameter settings on the QD75 side may not match

those on the servo side.
46
Check the parameter settings.
The speed shown on the QD75 monitor is calculated from
the number of pulses output from the module. Thus, the
actual motor speed cannot be monitored.
47
( " Md.22 Feedrate" monitors the commanded speed. It
does not show the actual motor speed.)
Appendix - 61
APPENDICES
Trouble type
MELSEC-Q
Questions/Trouble
Remedy
Backlash compensation value

Error 920 (backlash compensation
0
65535
amount error) occurs even when
the backlash compensation value
Setting is not possible if the above equation is not
is set to "1".
satisfied.
No.
48
When a JOG operation is

The hardware stroke limit wiring has probably not been
attempted, errors such as error
104 (hardware stroke limit+) or
carried out.
49
error 105 (hardware stroke limit ) Refer to section "12.4.4 Hardware stroke limit function" for
occur and the machine does not
details, and wire accordingly.
move.
Error/warning
Error 997 (Speed selection at OP

shift error) appears when the PLC
READY signal [Y0] turns from OFF
to ON.
A value besides "0" or "1" may be set in the Pr.56 Speed

designation during OP shift.
50
Review the set PLC program, and reset the correct
parameters.
When the start signal was turned

ON immediately after the stop
signal ON, warning 100 (start
during operation) was detected,
and the start was ignored.
The QD75 starts the deceleration stop process when the

stop signal ON is detected. Thus, the machine interprets
that "positioning is still being executed" immediately after
51
the stop signal ON. Even if the start signal is turned ON at
that time, the start request will be ignored and warning
100 will occur.
Does warning 500 (deceleration

and stop speed change) occur
only during "stop deceleration" and
"automatically deceleration"?
Is there any problem if the
operation is continued in that state
without resetting the error?
The warning occurs only at those times mentioned at the

left. Because this is a warning, there is no problem if the
operation can be continued without resetting the error.
(When the speed is changed using the override, the new
value will not be reflected on the data being executed, but
will be reflected from the next start.)
52
The positioning may have not been completed properly

by the occurrence of the stop factor.
Positioning
completion signal
Check the axis monitor " Md.26 axis operation state"

after BUSY signal OFF.
Stopped
: The stop signal is turned ON
during positioning.
Check the condition of the stop
signal (Y stop or external stop)
When the position control is
ON.
carried out, the positioning
completion signal is not turned ON. During error occurrence : An error occurred during
positioning.
Check the cause of error
53
occurrence from " Md.23 axis

error number".
The setting value for detailed parameter 2 "Positioning
completion signal output time" is 0 or shorter than scan
time.
Set the properly detectable time using the PLC program.
Appendix - 62
54
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
Appendix 7 List of buffer memory addresses

The following shows the relation between the buffer memory addresses and the various items.
Do not set other than the default value "0" of the "Maker setting".
Axis 2
Axis 3
Axis 4
150
300
450
2
3
4
5
152
153
154
155
302
303
304
305
452
453
454
455
151
301
451
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
17
167
317
467
18
19
20
21
168
169
170
171
318
319
320
321
468
469
470
471
22
172
322
472
23
173
323
473
Pr.15 Software stroke limit valid/invalid selection
24
25
174
175
324
325
474
475
26
176
326
476
27
177
327
477
28
178
328
478
29
179
329
479
30
180
330
480
31
181
331
481
Pr.22 Input signal logic selection
Pr.1 Unit setting

Pr.3 Movement amount per rotation (AL)
Pr.4 Unit magnification (AM)
Maker setting
Memory area
Basic parameters 1
Item
Axis 1
Basic parameters
2
34
184
334
484
35
185
335
485
Maker setting
36
37
38
39
186
187
188
189
336
337
338
339
486
487
488
489

Appendix - 63
Detailed
parameters 2
Pr.24 Manual pulse generator input selection
33
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
Item
Axis 1
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
Axis 2
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
Axis 3
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
Axis 4
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
50
200
350
500
51
201
351
501
52
202
352
502
53
203
353
503
Pr.35 S-pattern proportion
54
55
204
205
354
355
504
505
56
206
356
506
57
207
357
507
58
208
358
508
59
209
359
509
60
61
210
211
360
361
510
511
62
212
362
512
Pr.42 External command function selection
64
65
214
215
364
365
514
515
Pr.201 Restart allowable range when servo OFF to

ON
70
220
370
520
Pr.43 OPR method
71
221
371
521
Pr.44 OPR direction
72
73
74
75
76
77
222
223
224
225
226
227
372
373
374
375
376
377
522
523
524
525
526
527
78
228
378
528
Pr.48 OPR retry
80
81
230
231
380
381
530
531
Pr.50 Setting for the movement amount after
82
232
382
532
83
233
383
533
84
85
234
235
384
385
534
535
86
236
386
536
88
238
388
538
89
239
389
539
Memory area

near-point dog ON
Appendix - 64
OPR parameters
Pr.47 Creep speed
Pr.46 OPR speed
Pr.45 OP address
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q

Common to axes 1, 2, 3, and 4
1201
1202
1203
1204
1205
1206
1207
1208
1209
1210
1211
Maker setting
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
1212
1217
1222
1227
1232
1237
1242
1247
1252
1257
1262
1267
1272
1277
1282
1287
Md.3 Start information
1213
1218
1223
1228
1233
1238
1243
1248
1256
1258
1263
1268
1273
1278
1283
1288
Md.4 Start No.
1214
1219
1224
1229
1234
1239
1244
1249
1254
1259
1264
1269
1274
1279
1284
1289
Md.5 Start Hour
1215
1220
1225
1230
1235
1240
1245
1250
1255
1260
1265
1270
1275
1280
1285
1290
Md.6 Start Minute: second
1216
1221
1226
1231
1236
1241
1246
1251
1256
1261
1266
1271
1276
1281
1286
1291
Md.7 Error judgment

Md.8 Start history pointer
1292
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15)
1293
1297
1301
1305
1309
1313
1317
1321
1325
1329
1333
1337
1341
1345
1349
1353
1294
1298
1302
1306
1310
1314
1318
1322
1326
1330
1334
1338
1342
1346
1350
1354
1295
1299
1303
1307
1311
1315
1319
1323
1327
1331
1335
1339
1343
1347
1351
1355
(Pointer No.)
Md.9 Axis in which the error
Md.11 Axis error occurrence
(Hour)
1296
1300
1304
1308
1312
1316
1320
1324
1328
1332
1336
1340
1344
1348
1352
1356
Md.12 Axis error occurrence
Error History
occurred
(Minute: second)
Md.13 Error history pointer
1357
(0)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15)
1358
1362
1366
1370
1374
1378
1382
1386
1390
1394
1398
1402
1406
1410
1414
1418
1359
1363
1367
1371
1375
1379
1383
1387
1391
1395
1399
1403
1407
1411
1415
1419
1360
1364
1368
1372
1376
1380
1384
1388
1392
1396
1400
1404
1408
1412
1416
1420
(Pointer No.)
Md.14 Axis in which the
warning occurred
Md.16 Axis warning
occurrence (Hour)
Md.17 Axis warning
1361
1365
1369
1373
1377
1381
1385
1389
1393
1397
1401
1405
1409
1413
1417
1421
occurrence
(Minute: second)
1422
Md.18 Warning history pointer
1424
1425
Md.19 No. of write accesses to
flash ROM
Appendix - 65
Warning history
Monitor data
(2)
System monitor data
(1)
Start History
(10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15)
(Pointer No.)
(0)
(1)
area
1200
(0)
Memory
Item
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
Item
Axis 1
800
801
802
803
804
805
Axis 2
900
901
902
903
904
905
Axis 3
1000
1001
1002
1003
1004
1005
Axis 4
1100
1101
1102
1103
1104
1105
806
906
1006
1106
807
907
1007
1107
808
908
1008
1108
Md.25 Valid M code
809
909
1009
1109
810
811
812
813
910
911
912
913
1010
1011
1012
1013
1110
1111
1112
1113
814
815
914
915
1014
1015
1114
1115
Md.29 Speed-position switching control positioning
816
916
1016
1116
Md.30 External input/output signal
817
917
1017
1117
Md.31 Status
818
819
820
821
824
825
918
919
920
921
924
925
1018
1019
1020
1021
1024
1025
1118
1119
1120
1121
1124
1125
Md.33 Target speed
826
926
1026
1126
827
927
1027
1127

Md.22 Feedrate
Md.27 Current speed

Md.28 Axis feedrate
Md.36 Special start data instruction parameter

Md.37 Special start data instruction No. setting
828
928
1028
1128
829
929
1029
1129
Md.38 Start positioning data No. setting value.
830
930
1030
1130
Md.39 In speed control flag
831
931
1031
1131
832
932
1032
1132
Md.41 Special start repetition counter
833
933
1033
1133
Md.42 Control system repetition counter
834
934
1034
1134
Md.43 Start data pointer being executed
835
935
1035
1135
Md.44 Positioning data No. being executed
836
936
1036
1136
837
937
1037
1137
Md.46 Last executed positioning data No.
1038 to
1047
1138 to
1147
value
Md.47 Positioning data being executed
Appendix - 66
Monitor data
Md.32 Target value
Axis monitor data
amount
setting value
838 to 847 938 to 947
Memory area
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
Axis 2
Axis 3
Axis 4
848
849
948
949
1048
1049
1148
1149
850
851
950
951
1050
1051
1150
1151
852
853
952
953
1052
1053
1152
1153
854
855
954
955
1054
1055
1154
1155
856
956
1056
1156
857
957
1057
1157
Md.105 Auto tuning
858
958
1058
1158
Md.105 Load inertia ratio
859
959
1059
1159
860
960
1060
1160
861
961
1061
1161
862
962
1062
1162
863
963
1063
1163
Md.105 Speed integral compensation
864
865
866
867
868
869
964
965
966
967
968
969
1064
1065
1066
1067
1068
1069
1164
1165
1166
1167
1168
1169
Md.106 Servo amplifier software No.
870
970
1070
1170
871
971
1071
1171
872
972
1072
1172
873
973
1073
1173
874
974
1074
1174
875
975
1075
1175
876
976
1076
1176
877
977
1077
1177
Md.108 Servo status
878
978
1078
1178
879
979
1079
1179
880
980
1080
1180
899
999
1099
1199
Maker setting
Md.110 The continuous effective load torque is
indicated.
Appendix - 67
Memory area
Monitor data
Item
Axis 1
Axis monitor data
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
Item
Axis 1
Axis 2
Axis 3
Axis 4
1500
1600
1700
1800
1501
1601
1701
1801
1502
1602
1702
1802
1503
1603
1703
1803
1504
1604
1704
1804
1505
1605
1705
1805
Cd.8 External command valid
1506
1507
1508
1509
1510
1511
1606
1607
1608
1609
1610
1611
1706
1707
1708
1709
1710
1711
1806
1807
1808
1809
1810
1811
1512
1612
1712
1812
during speed change, enable/disable

selection
1513
1613
1713
1813
Cd.13 Positioning operation speed override
1514
1515
1614
1615
1714
1715
1814
1815
1516
1616
1716
1816
1517
1617
1717
1817
Cd.16 Inching movement amount
1518
1519
1618
1619
1718
1719
1818
1819
Cd.17 JOG speed
1520
1620
1720
1820
Memory area

operation
1521
1621
1721
1821
Cd.19 OPR request flag OFF request
1522
1523
1622
1623
1722
1723
1822
1823
Cd.20 Manual pulse generator 1 pulse input
1524
1624
1724
1824
Cd.21 Manual pulse generator enable flag
1525
1625
1725
1825
1526
1527
1626
1627
1726
1727
1826
1827
Cd.23 Speed-position switching control movement
1528
1628
1728
1828
Cd.24 Speed-position switching enable flag
1529
1629
1729
1829
Maker setting
1530
1531
1630
1631
1730
1731
1830
1831
Cd.25 Position-speed switching control speed
1532
1632
1732
1832
Cd.26 Position-speed switching enable flag
1533
1534
1535
1536
1537
1633
1634
1635
1636
1637
1733
1734
1735
1736
1737
1833
1834
1835
1836
1837
Maker setting
1538
1638
1738
1838
Cd.29 Target position change request flag
1539
1639
1739
1839
Maker setting
1540
1640
1740
1840
magnification
amount change register
change register
Cd.27 Target position change value (new address)

Cd.28 Target position change value (new speed)
Cd.30 Simultaneous starting axis start data No.
Appendix - 68
Control data
Cd.18 Interrupt request during continuous
Axis control data
Cd.12 Acceleration/deceleration time change
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q

Axis 1
Axis 2
Axis 3
Axis 4
1541
1641
1741
1841
Item
Memory area

1542
1642
1742
1842

1543
1643
1743
1843
1544
1644
1744
1844
Cd.34 Step mode
1545
1645
1745
1845
1546
1646
1746
1846
1547
1647
1747
1847
Cd.37 Skip command
1548
1648
1748
1848
Cd.38 Teaching data selection
1549
1649
1749
1849
Cd.39 Teaching positioning data No.
1550
1650
1750
1850
1551
1651
1751
1851
1552
1652
1752
1852
1553
1653
1753
1853

1901
1905
1907
Cd.42 Stop command processing for deceleration
stop selection
Appendix - 69
Control data
System control data
1900
Axis control data
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q

Axis 1
Axis 2
Axis 3
Item
Axis 4
Memory area

Da.2 Control system
2000
8000
14000
20000

8001
14001
20001
Da.10 M code/condition data No. /No. of
LOOP to LEND repetitions

2002
8002
14002
20002
Da.9 Dwell time/JUMP destination
No.1
2001
8003
14003
20003
Maker setting
2004
2005
8004
8005
14004
14005
20004
20005
Da.8 Command speed
2006
2007
8006
8007
14006
14007
20006
20007
2008
2009
2010
to
2019
8008
8009
8010
to
8019
14008
14009
14010
to
14019
20008
20009
20010
to
20019
2020
to
2029
8020
to
8029
14020
to
14029
20020
to
20020
to
7990
to
7999
to
13990
to
13999
to
19990
to
19999
to
25990
to
25999
amount
Da.7 Arc address
No.2
No.3
To
No.600
Appendix - 70
Positioning data
2003
Positioning data
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q

Axis 1
Axis 2
Axis 3
Item
Memory area
Axis 4
29000
29050

Da.14 Parameter
26001
26051
27001
27051
28001
28051
29001
29051
2nd point
26002
26052
27002
27052
28002
28052
29002
29052
3rd point
26049
to
26099
27049
to
27099
28049
to
28099
29049
to
Starting block 0
to
50th point
29099
26100
27100
28100
29100
26102
26103
27102
27103
28102
28103
29102
29103
Da.17 Address
26104
26405
27104
27405
28104
28405
29104
29405
Da.18 Parameter 1
26106
26107
27106
27107
28106
28107
29106
29107
Da.19 Parameter 2
No.1
No.2
No.3
to
No.10
26110 to 26119 27110 to 27119 28110 to 28119 29110 to 29119

26120 to 26129 27120 to 27129 28120 to 28129 29120 to 29129
to
to
to
Condition data
to
26190 to 26199 27190 to 27199 28190 to 28199 29190 to 29199
26200 to 26299 27200 to 27299 28200 to 28299 29200 to 29299
Block start data
26300 to 26399 27300 to 27399 28300 to 28399 29300 to 29399
Condition data
26400 to 26499 27400 to 27499 28400 to 28499 29400 to 29499
Block start data
26500 to 26599 27500 to 27599 28500 to 28599 29500 to 29599
Condition data
26600 to 26699 27600 to 27699 28600 to 28699 29600 to 29699
Block start data
26700 to 26799 27700 to 27799 28700 to 28799 29700 to 29799
Condition data
26800 to 26899 27800 to 27899 28800 to 28899 29800 to 29899
Block start data
26900 to 26999 27900 to 27999 28900 to 28999 29900 to 29999
Condition data
Appendix - 71
Positioning data (Starting block data)
28050
Starting block 1
28000
Starting block 2
27050
Starting block 3
27000
Starting block 4
26050
Block start data

26000
1st point
Da.11 Shape
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q

Axis 3
Item
Memory area
Axis 4
30000
to
Condition judgement target data of the condition

data
30099
Appendix - 72
Positioning data
Axis 2
PLC CPU
memo area
Axis 1
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
Axis 3
Axis 4
30100
30200
30300
30400
Pr.100 Servo series
30101
30201
30301
30401
30102
30202
30302
30402
30103
30203
30303
30403
Pr.103 Motor type
30104
30204
30304
30404
30105
30205
30305
30405
30106
30206
30306
30406
30107
30207
30307
30407
30108
30208
30308
30408
Pr.108 Auto tuning
30109
30209
30309
30409
30110
30210
30310
30410
30111
30211
30311
30411
30112
30212
30312
30412
30113
30213
30313
30413
30114
30214
30314
30414
30115
30215
30315
30415
30116
30216
30316
30416
30117
30217
30317
30417
30118
30218
30318
30418
Pr.118 Machine resonance
suppression filter
30119
30219
30319
30419
30120
30220
30320
30420
30121
30221
30321
30421
30122
30222
30322
30422
30123
30223
30323
30423
30124
30224
30324
30424
30125
30225
30325
30425
30126
30226
30326
30426
30127
30227
30327
30427
30128
30228
30328
30428
30129
30229
30329
30429
30130
30230
30330
30430
Pr.130 Zero speed
30131
30231
30331
30431
30132
30232
30332
30432
30133
30233
30333
30433
30134
30234
30334
30434
30135
30235
30335
30435
30136
30236
30336
30436
30137
30237
30337
30437
30138
30238
30338
30438
30139
30239
30339
30439
Pr.121 Electromagnetic brake sequence
output
Memory area
Pr.125 Adaptive vibration suppression
Pr.134 PI-PID control switch-over
position droop
Appendix - 73
control/ low pass filter
Servo parameters
Axis 2
Item
Axis 1
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
Item
Axis 1
Axis 2
Axis 3
Axis 4
30140
30240
30340
30440
30141
30241
30341
30441
30142
30242
30342
30442
30143
30243
30343
30443
30344
30444
control selection 1
Pr.144 Slight vibration suppression
control selection 2
30145
30245
30345
30445
30146
30246
30346
30446
30147
30247
30347
30447
30148
30248
30348
30448
30149
30249
30349
30449
30150
30250
30350
30450
30151
30251
30351
30451
30152
30252
30352
30452
30153
30253
30353
30453
30154
30254
30354
30454
Pr.152 Ratio of load inertia moment to
servo motor inertia moment 2

Pr.153 Position loop gain 2 changing
ratio
Pr.154 Speed loop gain 2 changing
ratio
30155
30255
30355
30455
30156
30256
30356
30456
30157
30257
30357
30457
30158
30258
30358
30458
30159
30259
30359
30459
30160
30260
30360
30460
30161
30261
30361
30461
30162
30262
30362
30462
30163
30263
30363
30463
30164
30264
30364
30464
30165
30265
30365
30465
30166
30266
30366
30466
changing ratio
Pr.161 Machine resonance
suppression filter 2
Appendix - 74
Servo parameters
30244
Pr.143 Slight vibration suppression
30144
Memory area
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
Appendix 8 External dimension drawing

[1] QD75M1/QD75M2/QD75M4
QD75M1
RUN
QD75M2
AX1
ERR
RUN
QD75M4
AX1
AX2
RUN
ERR
AX1
AX2
AX3
AX4
ERR
QD75M4
AX1
AX2
AX1
QD75M1
AX3
AX4
AX1
AX2
QD75M2
27.4(1.08)
70(2.76)
98(3.86)
Unit: mm (inch)
90(3.54)
46(1.81)
136(5.35)
Appendix - 75
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
MEMO
Appendix - 76
INDEX
Acceleration time 2 ( Pr.26 )........................5-36
[Number]
Acceleration time 3 ( Pr.27 )........................5-36
1-axis fixed-feed control ................................ 9-43

1-axis linear control (ABS linear 1) ............... 9-27
1-axis linear control (INC linear 1) ................ 9-28
1-axis speed control ...................................... 9-68
2-axis circular interpolation control with sub point
designation (ABS circular sub)
....................................................................... 9-54
2-axis circular interpolation control with sub point
designation (INC circular sub)
....................................................................... 9-57
2-axis circular interpolation control with center
point designation (ABS circular right/ABS circular
left) ................................................................. 9-62
2-axis circular interpolation control with center
point designation (INC circular right/INC circular
left) ................................................................. 9-65
2-axis fixed-feed control (interpolation)
....................................................................... 9-46
2-axis linear interpolation control (ABS linear 2)
....................................................................... 9-29
2-axis linear interpolation control (INC linear 2)
....................................................................... 9-31
....................................................................... 9-48
....................................................................... 9-33
....................................................................... 9-36
....................................................................... 9-52
....................................................................... 9-39
....................................................................... 9-42
Acceleration time No. ( Da.3 )......................5-84

Acceleration/deceleration process selection
( Pr.34 ) ........................................................5-38
Acceleration/deceleration processing function
......................................................................12-81
Acceleration/deceleration time change during
speed change, enable/disable selection ( Cd.12 )
......................................................................5-144
Acceleration/deceleration time change function
......................................................................12-47
Acceleration/deceleration time change program
........................................................................6-45
Actual acceleration/deceleration time ...........5-26
Adaptive vibration suppression control/low pass
filter ( Pr.125 ).................................................5-72
Address ( Da.17 ) .......................................5-107
AFTER mode ...............................................12-65
Allowable circular interpolation error width
( Pr.41 ) ........................................................5-42
Amplifier setting ( Pr.101 ) .............................5-58
Analog monitor output ( Pr.122 ) ...................5-68
Applicable system ............................................2-5
Applicable wire size .........................................3-3
Arc address ( Da.7 ) .....................................5-92
Auto tuning ( Pr.108 ).....................................5-62
Automatic trapezoidal acceleration/deceleration
processing method ......................................12-81
Axis display LED ..............................................4-3
Axis error No. ( Md.10 , Md.23 ).........5-116, 120
Axis error occurrence (Hour) ( Md.11 ) ......5-116
Axis error occurrence (Minute: second) ( Md.12 )
......................................................................5-116
Axis error reset ( Cd.5 ) ..............................5-140
Axis feed rate ( Md.28 ) ..............................5-124
Axis in which the error occurred ( Md.9 )
[A]
ABS direction in degrees ( Cd.40 )............ 5-158
......................................................................5-116
Absolute system ............................................ 9-15
Axis in which the warning occurred ( Md.14 )
Acceleration time 0 ( Pr.9 ) ......................... 5-26
......................................................................5-118
Axis monitor data .........................................5-120
Acceleration time 1 ( Pr.25 ) ....................... 5-36

Index - 1
Axis operation status ( Md.26 ) .................. 5-122

Axis stop signal ............................................. 3-17
Axis warning occurrence (Hour) ( Md.16 ). 5-118
Connection confirmation................................4-14
Connector.........................................................4-3
Continuous operation interrupt program .......6-48
Continuous path control...................................9-8
Continuous positioning control ........................9-7
Control data area .............................................7-3
Control functions ..............................................3-4
Axis warning occurrence (Minute: second)
Control system ( Da.2 ) ................................5-84
Axis to be interpolated ( Da.5 ).................... 5-84

Axis warning detection ................................ 5-126
Axis warning No. ( Md.15 , Md.24 )........... 5-118
( Md.17 )...................................................... 5-118
Control system repetition counter ( Md.42 )
Backlash compensation amount ( Pr.11 ). 5-28
......................................................................5-132
Count method 1) ..............................................8-8
Count method 2) ............................................8-10
Backlash compensation function ................ 12-11
Creep speed ( Pr.47 )..................................5-52
[B]
Current feed value .........................................9-16
Basic parameters 1 ....................................... 5-22

Basic parameters 2 ....................................... 5-26
Block .............................................................. 10-2
Current feed value during speed control ( Pr.21 )
Block No. being executed ( Md.45 ) .......... 5-132
........................................................................5-32
Block start (Normal start) .............................. 10-2

Block start data.............................................. 10-7
Block start data area (Nos. 7000 to 7004) ..... 7-3
Buffer memory................................................. 7-2
Buffer memory area configuration .................. 7-5
BUSY signal .................................................. 3-14
Current speed ( Md.27 )..............................5-122
Current feed value ( Md.20 ).......................5-120
[D]
Data set method.............................................8-12
Data transmission process ..............................7-8
Deceleration stop ...........................................6-71
Deceleration curve.......................................12-93
Deceleration curve re-processing ...............12-93
Deceleration curve configuration.................12-94
Deceleration start flag ( Md.48 ) ..................5-134
[C]
Cable clamp................................................... 4-12
Combination of functions .............................. 3-12
Combination of main functions and sub functions
....................................................................... 3-12
Command in-position flag ........................... 5-126
Command in-position function .................... 12-78
Deceleration start flag function....................12-89

Deceleration start flag valid ( Cd.41 )..........5-138
Command in-position width ( Pr.16 ).......... 5-30
Deceleration time 1 ( Pr.28 ) .......................5-36
Command speed ( Da.8 ) ............................ 5-94
Common functions ............................... 3-10, 13-4

Communicating signals between QD75 and each
module ........................................................... 1-19
Composite speed .......................................... 5-32
Condition data ............................................. 10-16
Condition operator....................................... 10-17
Deceleration time No. ( Da.4 ) .....................5-84

Detailed parameters 1 ...................................5-28
Detailed parameters 2 ...................................5-36
Details of input signals (QD75 PLC CPU)
........................................................................3-15
Details of output signals (PLC CPU QD75)
........................................................................3-17
Deviation counter clear ..................................3-19
Deviation counter value ( Md.102 )..............5-134
Disposal instructions......................................4-15
DOS/V personal computer ........................... A-14
Drive unit (Servo amplifier) ........................... A-14
Condition operator ( Da.16 ) ...................... 5-107

Condition start ............................................. 10-10
Condition target ( Da.15 ) .......................... 5-107
Conditional JUMP ....................................... 9-112
Configuration and roles of QD75 memory...... 7-2
Confirming the current value......................... 9-16
Confirming the installation and wiring........... 4-14
Index - 2
For restarting..................................................6-69
For starting "fast OPR" ..................................6-60
For starting "machine OPR" ..........................6-59
For starting "major positioning control" .........6-60
For starting "position-speed switching control"
........................................................................6-61
For starting "speed-position switching control"
........................................................................6-61
For starting with external command signal ...6-64
For wiring..........................................................4-9
Forced stop ....................................................6-70
Front-loading speed switching mode ............9-13
Functions for compensating the control ......12-11
Functions to change the control details ......12-37
Functions to limit the control........................12-23
Functions.............................................Appendix-3
Dwell time (JUMP destination positioning data

No.) ( Da.9 ).................................................. 5-94
Dwell time during OPR retry ( Pr.57 )......... 5-56
[E]
Effective load torque ( Md.110 ) .................. 5-136
Electrical specifications ................................. 3-18
Electrical specifications sequence ( Pr.121 )
....................................................................... 5-68
Electronic gear function............................... 12-13
Emergency stop ............................................ 6-70
Error and warning details .............................. 15-2
Error detection signal .................................... 3-14
Error history ................................................. 5-116
Error history pointer ( Md.13 ) .................... 5-116
Error judgment ( Md.7 ).............................. 5-114
Error reset program....................................... 6-51
Execution data backup function.................... 13-5
Execution prohibition flag.............................. 3-14
External command ........................................ 3-16
[G]
Gain changing selection 2 ( Pr.149 ).............5-78
Gain changing condition ( Pr.150 )................5-78
Gain changing time constant ( Pr.151 ).........5-78
General configuration of program .................6-20
General image of system.................................2-2
GX Configurator-QP .............................. A-14, 2-4
GX Developer ............................................... A-14
External command function selection ( Pr.42 )

....................................................................... 5-42
External command function valid setting program
....................................................................... 6-36
External command valid ( Cd.8 ) ............... 5-142
External device connector............................... 4-3
External dimension drawing............. Appendix-63
[H]
Handling ...........................................................4-5
Hardware stroke limit function .....................12-35
High-level positioning control ........................10-2
External input/output signal ( Md.30 )........ 5-124

External I/O signal logic switching function .. 13-7
External I/O signal monitor function.............. 13-8
[I]
In speed change processing flag ( Md.40 )
[F]
......................................................................5-130
In speed control flag ....................................5-126
Fast OPR....................................................... 8-13

Fatal stop ....................................................... 6-70
Features of QD75............................................ 1-2
Feed forward gain ( Pr.119 ) ......................... 5-66
Feed back pulse ( Pr.106 )............................ 5-60
In speed control flag ( Md.39 )....................5-130

In test mode flag ( Md.1 )............................5-110
Inching movement amount ( Cd.16 ) .........5-148
Feedrate ( Md.22 )...................................... 5-120
Inching operation setting program.................6-41

Inching operation start time chart ................11-23
Inching operation timing and processing times
......................................................................11-19
Inching operation .........................................11-17
Incremental system........................................9-15
Independent positioning control ......................9-6
Initialization program......................................6-53
In-position range ( Pr.120 ) ............................5-68
Flash ROM ...................................................... 7-2

Flash ROM write program............................. 6-50
Flash ROM write request ( Cd.1 ) ............. 5-138
Flow of all processes..................................... 1-22
Flow of system operation .............................. 1-22
Follow up function ......................................... 6-89
For creating program....................................... 6-2
For installation ................................................. 4-7
For maintenance ........................................... 4-15
Index - 3
Input signal logic selection ( Pr.22 ) ........... 5-32

Interface internal circuit ................................. 3-21
Intentional stop .............................................. 6-70
Internal circuit ................................................ 3-19
Internal current consumption .......................... 3-3
Interpolation axis ........................................... 9-21
Interpolation control....................................... 9-21
List of warnings ............................................15-90

Load inertia ( Pr.112 ) ....................................5-64
LOOP ...........................................................9-114
Lower limit ......................................................3-21
[M]
M code (Condition data No., No. of LOOP to
Interpolation speed designation method ( Pr.20 )
LEND repetitions) ( Da.10 )..........................5-94
....................................................................... 5-32
Interruption request during continuous operation
M code OFF request....................................12-65
( Cd.18 )...................................................... 5-148
M code ON signal ..........................................3-15

M code ON signal output timing ..................12-64
M code OFF request ( Cd.7 ) .....................5-140
[J]
M code ON signal output timing ( Pr.18 ) ...5-30
JOG operation ............................................... 11-4

JOG operation acceleration time selection
M code output function ................................12-64

Machine feed value........................................9-16
( Pr.32 )........................................................ 5-36
Machine feed value ( Md.21 ) .....................5-120
JOG operation deceleration time selection
Machine OPR...................................................8-4
Machine response suppression filter ( Pr.118 )
........................................................................5-66
Machine response suppression filter 2 ( Pr.161 )
........................................................................5-80
Main functions ..................................................3-6
Major positioning controls................................9-2
Manual control ...............................................11-2
Manual pulse generator...................................2-4
Manual pulse generator................................ A-14
Manual pulse generator cable ..........Appendix-24
( Pr.33 )........................................................ 5-36

JOG operation setting program .................... 6-41
JOG operation start time chart.................... 11-11
JOG operation timing and processing times
....................................................................... 11-6
JOG speed ( Cd.17 ).................................. 5-148
JOG speed limit value ( Pr.31 ) .................. 5-36
JOG start signal............................................. 3-15
JUMP instruction ......................................... 9-112
[K]
magnification ( Cd.20 ) ...............................5-150

Manual pulse generator enable flag ( Cd.21 )
[L]
Last executed positioning data No. ( Md.46 )
......................................................................5-150
..................................................................... 5-132
LED display functions................................ 15-106
LEND ........................................................... 9-115
List of block start data ................................... 5-98
List of condition data ................................... 5-104
List of configuration devices............................ 2-4
List of control data ....................................... 5-138
List of dedicated instructions......................... 14-2
List of devices used......................................... 6-5
List of errors................................................... 15-6
List of functions................................................ 3-4
List of input/output signal details................... 3-20
List of input/output signals ............................ 3-14
List of monitor data...................................... 5-110
List of parameters.......................................... 5-22
List of positioning data .................................. 5-82
Manual pulse generator input selection ( Pr.24 )

........................................................................5-32
Manual pulse generator operation ..............11-27
Manual pulse generator operation program
........................................................................6-42
Manual pulse generator operation start time chart
......................................................................11-34
Manual pulse generator operation timing and
processing times ..........................................11-29
Mechanism of positioning control....................1-7
Monitor data area.............................................7-3
Movement amount after near-point dog ON
( Md.34 ) ......................................................5-128
Monitor output 1 offset ( Pr.127 ) ..................5-74
Monitor output 2 offset ( Pr.128 ) ..................5-74
Motor capacity ( Pr.104 ) ..............................5-60
Index - 4
Movement amount per pulse ( Pr.2 to Pr.4 )
Operation timing and processing time during

speed-position switching control (INC mode)
........................................................................9-86
Operation timing and processing time of fast
OPR................................................................8-14
....................................................................... 5-22
OPR acceleration time selection ( Pr.51 ) ..5-54
Movement amount per rotation ( Pr.3 ) ...... 5-22
OPR basic parameters ..................................5-48

OPR complete flag.......................................5-126
Motor current value ( Md.104 ) ................... 5-134

Motor rotation speed ( Md.103 ) ................. 5-134
Motor type ( Pr.103 ) .................................... 5-60
Monitor output offset ( Pr.127 ) .................... 5-74
Multiple axes simultaneous start control .... 10-20

Multiple PLC .................................................... 2-5
OPR deceleration time selection ( Pr.52 ) ..5-54

OPR detailed parameters ..............................5-54
[N]
OPR direction ( Pr.44 ) ................................5-50
Names of each part......................................... 4-3

Near pass function ...................................... 12-20
Near pass .................................................... 12-20
Near-point dog method machine OPR ........... 8-6
Near-point dog signal .................................... 3-18
OPR method ....................................................8-5

OPR method ( Pr.43 )..................................5-48
OPR method (1): Near-point dog method.......8-6
OPR method (2): Count method 1)
..........................................................................8-8
OPR method (3): Count method 2)
........................................................................8-10
OPR method (4): Data set method ...............8-12
OPR OFF request program ...........................6-35
OPR request ....................................................8-2
OPR request flag .........................................5-126
New acceleration time value ( Cd.10 ) ...... 5-144

New current value ....................................... 9-106
New current value ( Cd.9 )......................... 5-142
New deceleration time value ( Cd.11 ) ...... 5-144
New speed value ( Cd.14 ) ........................ 5-146
New torque value ( Cd.22 )........................ 5-150
OPR request flag OFF request ( Cd.19 )
NEXT start ................................................... 10-15

No. of control axes .......................................... 3-2
No. of modules can be mounted..................... 2-5
No. of occupied I/O points............................... 3-3
......................................................................5-150
OPR retry ( Pr.48 ).......................................5-52
OPR re-travel value ( Md.100 ) ....................5-134
OPR retry function .........................................12-4
No. of pulses per rotation ( Pr.2 ) ............... 5-22
OPR speed ( Pr.46 )....................................5-50
No. of write accesses to flash ROM ( Md.19 )
OPR torque limit value ( Pr.54 ) ..................5-56
..................................................................... 5-118
NOP instruction ........................................... 9-111
Normal start ................................................... 10-8
Optional function 1 ( Pr.123 ).........................5-70

Optional function C ( Pr.160 ) ........................5-82
Order of priority for stop process...................6-72
Outline design of positioning system.............1-18
Outline of installation, wiring and maintenance
..........................................................................4-2
Outline of OPR control.....................................8-2
Outline for restarting ......................................1-27
Outline of starting...........................................1-24
Outline of stopping .........................................1-26
Override function..........................................12-44
Override program...........................................6-44
[O]
OP address ( Pr.45 )................................... 5-50
OP shift amount ( Pr.53 ) ............................ 5-56
OP shift function ............................................ 12-8
Operating principle .......................................... 1-7
Operation pattern ( Da.1 )............................ 5-84
Operation patterns........................................... 9-5
position-speed switching control................... 9-94
speed-position switching control (ABS mode)
....................................................................... 9-94
Index - 5
Positioning start signal...................................3-17
[P]
Positioning starting point No. ( Cd.4 ) ........5-140
Parameter ( Da.14 ) ................................... 5-101

Parameter 1 ( Da.18 ) ................................ 5-107
Parameter 2 ( Da.19 )................................. 5-107
Parameter area ............................................... 7-3
Parameter initialization program ................... 6-50
Parameter initialization request ( Cd.2 ).... 5-138
Performance specifications............................. 3-2
Peripheral device........................................... A-14
Personal computer ........................................ A-14
PFWRT........................................................ 14-11
PINIT.............................................................. 14-2
PLC CPU ....................................................... A-14
PLC CPU memo area ..................................... 7-3
PLC CPU module............................................ 2-5
PLC READY signal ....................................... 3-17
PLC READY signal [Y0] ON program .......... 6-36
Position loop gain 1 ( Pr.113 )....................... 5-64
Position loop gain 2 ( Pr.115 )....................... 5-64
Position loop gain change ratio ( Pr.153 ) .... 5-78
Position-speed switching control .................. 9-99
Position-speed switching control speed change
register ( Cd.25 ) ........................................ 5-152
Position-speed switching control enable flag
( Cd.26 )...................................................... 5-154
Position-speed switching latch flag............. 5-126
Position-speed switching signal.................... 3-21
Positioning address/movement amount ( Da.6 )
....................................................................... 5-86
Positioning complete signal .......................... 3-15
Positioning complete signal output time ( Pr.40 )
....................................................................... 5-42
Positioning control operation program.......... 6-16
Positioning complete ....................................... 9-6
Positioning data area (No.1 to 600)................ 7-3
Positioning data being executed ( Md.47 )
..................................................................... 5-132
Positioning data No. being executed ( Md.44 )
..................................................................... 5-132
Positioning operation speed override ( Cd.13 )
..................................................................... 5-146
Positioning program examples ..................... 6-20
Positioning start No. ( Cd.3 ) ..................... 5-140
Positioning start No. setting program ........... 6-36
Positioning start program .............................. 6-39
Index - 6
Precautions
Disposal instructions................................4-15
Handling precautions .................................4-5
Precautions for creating program..............6-2
Precautions for installation ........................4-7
Precautions for maintenance...................4-15
Precautions for MR-J2M-B connection .12-98
Precautions for SSCNET cable wiring ......4-7
Precautions for using stepping motor .....1-22
Precautions for wiring ..............................4-10
Pre-alarm data selection ( Pr.129 ) ...............5-74
Pre-reading start function ............................12-84
Process time
Inching operation timing and processing time
...............................................................11-19
JOG operation timing and processing time
.................................................................11-6
Machine OPR operation timing and process
time..........................................................6-62
Manual pulse generator operation timing and
processing times ...................................11-29
position-speed switching control ............9-94
speed-position switching control (ABS mode)
.................................................................9-94
speed-position switching control (INC mode)
.................................................................9-86
Operation timing and processing time of fast
OPR.........................................................8-14
Position control operation timing and process
time..........................................................6-63
Program details..............................................6-53
Program examples
program ...................................................6-45
Continuous operation interrupt program
.................................................................6-48
Error reset program .................................6-51
External command function valid setting
program ...................................................6-36
Flash ROM write program .......................6-50
Inching operation setting program...........6-42
JOG operation setting program...............6-42
Rotation direction ( Pr.107 )...........................5-60
JOG operation/inching operation execution

program .................................................. 6-24
M code OFF program.............................. 6-41
Manual pulse generator operation program
................................................................ 6-42
OPR request OFF program .................... 6-35
Override program .................................... 6-44
Parameter initialization program............. 6-50
Parameter setting program ..................... 6-20
PLC READY signal [Y0] ON program .... 6-36
Positioning start No. setting program ..... 6-36
Positioning start program ........................ 6-39
Restart program ...................................... 6-49
Servo on [Y1] program............................ 6-36
Servo parameter read program .............. 6-51
Skip program ........................................... 6-47
Speed change program .......................... 6-43
Step operation program .......................... 6-46
Stop program........................................... 6-52
Target position change program............. 6-48
Teaching program ................................... 6-47
Torque change program ......................... 6-45
Unit setting program................................ 6-21
PSTRT1......................................................... 14-3
PSTRT2......................................................... 14-3
PSTRT3......................................................... 14-3
PSTRT4......................................................... 14-3
Purpose and applications of positioning control
......................................................................... 1-5
[S]
Servo adjustment parameter .........................5-64
Servo expansion parameter ..........................5-74
Servo expansion parameter 2 .......................5-78
Servo amplifier data read ( Cd.102 ) ..........5-160
Servo amplifier S/W No. ( Md.106 ) .............5-134
Servo basic parameter ..................................5-58
Servo OFF command ( Cd.100 ) ................5-160
Servo ON/OFF .............................................12-89
Servo parameter ( Md.105 ).........................5-134
Servo response ( Pr.109 )..............................5-62
Servo series ( Pr.100 )...................................5-58
Servo status ( Md.108 )................................5-136
Setting data ......................................................5-2
Setting for the movement amount after near-point
dog ON ( Pr.50 ) ..........................................5-54
Setting items for block start data ...................5-12
Setting items for condition data .....................5-13
Setting items for servo parameters .................5-7
Setting items for OPR parameters ..................5-6
Setting items for positioning data ....................5-9
Setting items for positioning parameters.........5-4
Setting the positioning data ...........................9-22
Setting the torque limit function ...................12-27
Shape ( Da.11 ) ..........................................5-101
[Q]
QD75 ............................................................. A-14
QD75 READY signal..................................... 3-15
[R]
Ratio of load inertia moment to servomotor inertia
moment 2 ( Pr.152 ) ...................................... 5-78
Read current value ( Md.101 )..................... 5-134
Reference axis .............................................. 9-21
Reference axis speed ................................... 5-33
Regenerative brake resistor ( Pr.102 ) ......... 5-58
Regenerative load ratio ( Md.109 ).............. 5-140
Relatively safe stop ....................................... 6-70
Remote I/O station .......................................... 2-5
Repeated start (FOR condition).................. 10-14
Repeated start (FOR loop).......................... 10-13
Signal layout of connector .............................3-19

Signal name ...................................................3-14
Signals
Axis stop signal ........................................3-17
BUSY signal.............................................3-15
Error detection signal...............................3-15
Execution prohibition flag signal..............3-17
JOG start signal .......................................3-17
M code ON signal ....................................3-15
PLC READY signal..................................3-17
Positioning complete signal.....................3-15
Positioning start signal.............................3-15
QD75 READY signal ...............................3-15
Start complete signal ...............................3-15
Synchronization flag signal......................3-15
Simultaneous start .......................................10-12
Simultaneous starting axis start data No. (Axis 1
start data No.) ( Cd.30 )..............................5-156
Restart command ( Cd.6 ) ......................... 5-140
start data No.)( Cd.31 )...............................5-156
Restart operation........................................... 6-67

Restart program ............................................ 6-67
Index - 7
Speed switching mode ( Pr.19 )..................5-32
start data No.)( Cd.32 ) .............................. 5-156
Speed-position switching control (ABS mode)

........................................................................9-91
Speed-position switching control (INC mode)
........................................................................9-86
Speed-position switching control movement

start data No.)( Cd.33 ) .............................. 5-156
Skip command ( Cd.37 ) ............................ 5-158
Skip function ................................................ 12-61
Skip operation program................................. 6-47
Slot................................................................... 2-5
Software stroke limit function...................... 12-29
Software stroke limit lower limit value ( Pr.13 )
....................................................................... 5-28
Software stroke limit selection ( Pr.14 ) ..... 5-28
Software stroke limit upper limit value ( Pr.12 )
....................................................................... 5-28
Software stroke limit valid/invalid setting ( Pr.15 )
....................................................................... 5-28
S-pattern acceleration/deceleration processing
method......................................................... 12-82
S-pattern proportion ( Pr.35 )...................... 5-38
amount change register ( Cd.23 ) ..............5-152

Speed-position switching control positioning
amount ( Md.29 ).........................................5-124
Speed-position switching enable flag ( Cd.24 )
......................................................................5-148
Speed-position switching latch flag .............5-126
Speed-position switching signal ....................3-18
Spiral interpolation .........................................9-61
SSCNET........................................................ A-14
SSCNET cable over all length.........................3-3
Standard speed switching mode ...................9-12
Start Hour ( Md.5 ) ......................................5-112
Start complete signal .....................................3-15
Special start instruction ( Da.13 ) .............. 5-101
Start data No. ( Da.12 ) ..............................5-101
Special start data instruction code setting value
Start data pointer being executed ( Md.43 )
( Md.36 )...................................................... 5-130

value ( Md.37 )............................................ 5-130
......................................................................5-132
Start details setting program..........................6-54
Start history ..................................................5-112
Special start repetition counter ( Md.41 )... 5-132
Start history pointer ( Md.8 ) .......................5-114
Specifications of input/output interfaces....... 3-18

Specifications of input/output signals ........... 3-14
Speed change 0 flag ................................... 5-126
Speed change function ............................... 12-37
Speed change program ................................ 6-20
Start information ( Md.3 ) ............................5-112
Start positioning data No. setting value
Speed change request ( Cd.15 ) ............... 5-107
( Md.38 ) ......................................................5-130
Speed designation during OP shift ( Pr.56 )
Start program .................................................6-56

Start program for high-level positioning control
......................................................................10-23
Special start data instruction parameter setting
Start Minute: second ( Md.6 ) .....................5-112

Start No. ( Md.4 ).........................................5-112
....................................................................... 5-56
Speed differential compensation ( Pr.138 ) .. 5-76
Speed integral compensation ( Pr.117 ) ....... 5-64
Speed integral compensation changing ratio
( Pr.155 ) ........................................................ 5-78
Speed limit function..................................... 12-23
Status ( Md.31 )...........................................5-126

Step function ................................................12-56
Step mode....................................................12-57
Step mode ( Cd.34 ) ...................................5-156
Speed limit value ( Pr.8 ) ............................ 5-26
Step operation program.................................6-46

Step start information...................................12-58

stop selection ( Cd.42 )................................. 5-64
Speed loop gain 1 ( Pr.114 ) ......................... 5-64
Speed loop gain 2 ( Pr.116 ) ......................... 5-64
Speed loop gain changing ratio ( Pr.154 ).... 5-78
Speed-position function selection ( Pr.200 ). 5-32
Step start information ( Cd.36 ) ..................5-158
Index - 8
Time chart for restarting ..........................6-39

Time chart for starting "fast OPR" ...........6-60
Time chart for starting machine "OPR" ...6-59
Time chart for starting "major positioning
control" ....................................................6-60
Time chart for starting "position-speed
switching control" ....................................6-61
Time chart for starting "speed-position
switching control" ....................................6-61
Time chart for starting with external command
signal .......................................................6-64
Time chart for changing the speed from the PLC
CPU ..............................................................12-41
Time chart for changing the speed using an
external command signal.............................12-42
Time chart for changing the speed using the
override function ..........................................12-45
Torque change function...............................12-51
Torque change program ................................6-45
Torque limit function ....................................12-25
Step valid flag ( Cd.35 ) ............................. 5-156

Stop cause..................................................... 6-72
stop function................................................ 12-93
stop selection( Cd.42 ) .............................. 5-140
Stop group 1 sudden stop selection ( Pr.37 )
....................................................................... 5-38
....................................................................... 5-38
....................................................................... 5-38
Stop process.................................................. 6-72
Stop program................................................. 6-72
Stop signal..................................................... 3-18
Sub functions................................................. 12-2
Sub functions specifically for machine OPR
....................................................................... 12-4
Sudden stop .................................................. 6-43
Torque limit setting value ( Pr.17 ) ..............5-30
Sudden stop deceleration time ( Pr.36 ) .... 5-38
Torque limit stored value ( Md.35 ).............5-128
Synchronization flag (X1).............................. 3-15

System control data .................................... 5-138
System monitor data ................................... 5-110
Torque output setting value ( Cd.101 ).......5-160

Types and roles of control data .....................5-18
Types and roles of monitor data....................5-14
Types of data ...................................................5-2
Types of errors ...............................................15-2
Types of stop processes................................6-71
Types of warnings..........................................15-3
[T]
Tact time ...................................................... 12-86
Target position change function.................. 12-74
Target position change request flag ( Cd.29 )
..................................................................... 5-154
Target position change value (new address)
[U]
Unconditional JUMP ....................................9-112
( Cd.27 )...................................................... 5-154
Unit magnification ( Pr.4 )............................5-22
Target position change value (new speed)
Unit setting ( Pr.1 ).......................................5-22
( Cd.28 )...................................................... 5-154
Upper limit ......................................................3-21
Target speed ( Md.33 )............................... 5-128

Target value ( Md.32 ) ................................ 5-126
TEACH1 ........................................................ 14-7
TEACH2 ........................................................ 14-7
TEACH3 ........................................................ 14-7
TEACH4 ........................................................ 14-7
Teaching data selection ( Cd.38 ) ............. 5-158
Teaching function ........................................ 12-68
Teaching positioning data No. ( Cd.39 ).... 5-158
Teaching program ......................................... 6-47
Time chart
Inching operation start time chart ......... 11-23
JOG operation start time chart.............. 11-11
[V]
Valid M code ( Md.25 )................................5-122
[W]
Wait start ......................................................10-11
Warning history ............................................5-118
Warning history pointer ( Md.18 )................5-118
Writing to the Flash ROM ..............................13-6
WITH mode..................................................12-64
Work piece .................................................... A-14
Index - 9
[X]
X0 (QD75 READY)........................................ 3-15
X1 (Synchronization flag).............................. 3-15
[Z]
Zero speed ( Pr.130 ) .................................... 5-74
Index - 10
WARRANTY
Please confirm the following product warranty details before starting use.
1. Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range

If any faults or defects (hereinafter "failure") found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product
within the gratis warranty term, the product shall be repaired at no cost via the dealer or Mitsubishi Service Company.
Note that if repairs are required at a site overseas, on a detached island or remote place, expenses to dispatch an
engineer shall be charged for.
[Gratis Warranty Term]

The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated
place.
Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi, the maximum distribution period shall be six (6) months, and
the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen (18) months. The gratis warranty term of repair
parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs.
[Gratis Warranty Range]

(1) The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state, usage methods and usage environment, etc.,
which follow the conditions and precautions, etc., given in the instruction manual, user's manual and caution labels
on the product.
(2) Even within the gratis warranty term, repairs shall be charged for in the following cases.
1. Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling, carelessness or negligence by the user. Failure caused
by the user's hardware or software design.
2. Failure caused by unapproved modifications, etc., to the product by the user.
3. When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user's device, failure that could have been avoided if functions
or structures, judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user's device is subject to or as necessary
by industry standards, had been provided.
4. Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts (battery, backlight, fuse, etc.) designated in the
instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced.
5. Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages, and failure caused by force
majeure such as earthquakes, lightning, wind and water damage.
6. Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi.
7. Any other failure found to not be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or the user.
2. Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production

(1) Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven (7) years after production of the product is discontinued.
Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins, etc.
(2) Product supply (including repair parts) is not possible after production is discontinued.
3. Overseas service
Overseas, repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi's local overseas FA Center. Note that the repair conditions at each FA
Center may differ.
4. Exclusion of chance loss and secondary loss from warranty liability

Regardless of the gratis warranty term, Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation to damages caused by any cause
found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi, chance losses, lost profits incurred to the user by failures in Mitsubishi
products, damages and secondary damages caused from special reasons regardless of Mitsubishi's expectations,
compensation for accidents, and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products and other duties.
5. Changes in product specifications

The specifications given in the catalogs, manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice.
6. Product application
(1) In using the Mitsubishi MELSEC programmable logic controller, the usage conditions shall be that the application will
not lead to a major accident even if any problem or fault should occur in the programmable logic controller device, and
that backup and fail-safe functions are systematically provided outside of the device for any problem or fault.
(2) The Mitsubishi general-purpose programmable logic controller has been designed and manufactured for applications
in general industries, etc. Thus, applications in which the public could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and
other power plants operated by respective power companies, and applications in which a special quality assurance
system is required, such as for each Japan Railways company or the Department of Defense shall be excluded from
the programmable logic controller applications.
Note that even with these applications, if the user approves that the application is to be limited and a special quality is
not required, application shall be possible.
When considering use in aircraft, medical applications, railways, incineration and fuel devices, manned transport
devices, equipment for recreation and amusement, and safety devices, in which human life or assets could be greatly
affected and for which a particularly high reliability is required fin terms of safety and control system, please consult
with Mitsubishi and discuss the required specifications.
Microsoft Windows and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States
and other countries.
Other company and product names herein may be either trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective owners.
User's Manual(Details)

User's Manual
(Details)
Type QD75M Positioning Module User's Manual(Details)
HEAD OFFICE : 1-8-12, OFFICE TOWER Z 14F HARUMI CHUO-KU 104-6212,JAPAN

NAGOYA WORKS : 1-14 , YADA-MINAMI 5-CHOME , HIGASHI-KU, NAGOYA , JAPAN
MODEL
QD75M-U-S-E
MODEL
CODE
1CT752
IB(NA)-0300062-B(0404)MEE
IB(NA)-0300062-B(0404)MEE
Printed in Japan
Mitsubishi Programmable
Logic Controller
When exported from Japan, this manual does not require application to the
Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry for service transaction permission.
QD75M1
QD75M2
QD75M4
Specifications subject to change without notice.

File 314 1241

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

File 314 1241

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

File 314 1241

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Type QD75M Positioning Module

Type QD75M Positioning Module

HEAD OFFICE : 1-8-12, OFFICE TOWER Z 14F HARUMI CHUO-KU 104-6212,JAPAN

Specifications subject to change without notice.

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions,

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions,

Never disassemble or modify the module.

[Precautions for use]

When disposing of the product, handle it as industrial waste.

IB (NA) 0300062-A First edition

Japanese Manual Version IB-0300030

1.1 Positioning control.................................................................................................................................... 1- 2

3.2.3 QD75 sub functions and common functions .................................................................................... 3- 8

4.1 Outline of installation, wiring and maintenance....................................................................................... 4- 2

5.1 Types of data............................................................................................................................................ 5- 2

5.2.7 Servo basic parameters ................................................................................................................... 5- 58

6.1 Precautions for creating program ........................................................................................................... 6- 2

Section 2 Control Details and Setting

8.1 Outline of OPR control ............................................................................................................................. 8- 2

9.1 Outline of major positioning controls ....................................................................................................... 9- 2

9.2.21 JUMP instruction ........................................................................................................................... 9-112

10.1 Outline of high-level positioning control .............................................................................................. 10- 2

11.1 Outline of manual control .................................................................................................................... 11- 2

12. Control Sub Functions

12.1 Outline of sub functions ....................................................................................................................... 12- 2

14. Dedicated Instructions

14.1 List of dedicated instructions ............................................................................................................... 14- 2

15.1 Error and warning details..................................................................................................................... 15- 2

Appendix 6 Positioning control troubleshooting ..............................................................................Appendix- 57

Type QD75M Positioning Module User's Manual (Hardware)

(The manual is supplied with the module.)

GX Configurator-QP Operating Manual

(The manual is supplied with the software.)

Using This Manual

....... Symbol indicating positioning parameter and OPR parameter item.

(A serial No. is inserted in the

Conformation to the EMC Directive

Generic Terms and Abbreviations

Details of generic term/abbreviation

Generic term for PLC CPU on which QD75 can be mounted.

Generic term for positioning module QD75M1, QD75M2 and QD75M4.

Servo amplifier: Abbreviation for MR-H-BN/MR-HB.

Servo amplifier: Abbreviation for MR-J2-03B5.

Servo amplifier: Abbreviation for MR-J2-B/MR-J2S-B/MR-J2-Jr/MR-J2M-B.

Abbreviation for GX Developer (SW4D5C-GPPW-E or later).

Abbreviation for GX Configurator-QP (SW2D5C-QD75P-E or later).

Abbreviation for manual pulse generator (MR-HDP01) (prepared by user).

Generic term for DOS/V personal computer.

Axis 1, axis 2, axis 3,

Indicates each axis connected to QD75.

1-axis, 2-axis, 3-axis,

Generic term for "Home position return".

Generic term for "Home position".

QD75M1 positioning module

QD75M2 positioning module

QD75M4 positioning module

Section 1 Product Specifications and Handling

Section 1 is configured for the following purposes (1) to (5).

Product outline .............................................................................................. 1- 1 to 1- 28